ce ey
ee

ts)
rs

ahs Lihteie
Brera yeet ae
Sephshebasihes :
muni age tf
roibearegeste Aihevete terre
pbeea Tera cepsc bret es3ts
prarartrar stare cent sats,
erent
rebel ens imits
test i Tet, i
See

ot

wet

of
ryt

Hse
io

rates
aerets
ay
Reecorpcaeteee

*

Ir

re,
:
oe
rs
s

a —

sees

gases
ce

Siete
Barer
wrote

e

rrr
oars

Seyi bist ee

aiaese
rr
sts
patae
~e
att

ne

%

es

=

moe
ane

pis

OU
ehratts

ss

so
peeiree
ries
gigi atatts ats
Se Pee,
aie
‘
a
a:
ey
sat

~f fF 9
od Peel tah
sersrpeceer
rs

Se

“

>

<

iS

oy
=
ae
“
oe
a
vores
aor)
pete
- os
<iiats

UPROSTE se seca dene besa ress yeanpeetghe! tie)
sbedeeetarepe es teerhatee areas
arbrecrapeedpimeries cee Pigeleceisstarapereyessy$i 4
Stor brothas petetr er: apererts Grkeh $
HL inane tea ana aR
reseese set esrhererevyest rt ctetabehy : th

©

+
7 itt i! eihe%,
$ : tt “ED h are ath Sebes
iets mospugseensgephe secur et eg Hyer pete tase Midimtrteereret eset oft) Sie ete:
porte Tel elonpapa arse hese Ae Ps teed phe s@hiards We PLMEPLML DEMS rerer bre) ; re :
Desert antat ts tape mR
ts

is

e,
>

Wethety
in *
; Se oes
erent Mls ; siotp heh rahert cy Nir aici
; prererertibatehrbetheceuMolrastas cared PML Mt Oh crate eben br:
e as SOS See :
He ebebebay ciaecs pecuaantt ryt sit cpetatere atid
Tiersen eauatebet beso seue pasar egteseRDSRTE RUIN GaNUe LTT bear SbeLet hat eohys
eer rk Sesere ie Ttas ce behasate ca bete cater, bapseeehees ceteecnisertpgy
piace Senne ea aaah are et
, ; r terete bier es ai rei heme ks
Seay bivewssaeeaecuccge hese tesevavarsanncguetegutri tert errata he
ite er sebeagegsaceee tense gE Ra fuareeraatta
ie ‘ Tees ry
,

eatetat

eer

iat? statist ate
re

pas

gee

+

ms
*

rereres
eater
<pe

os

Sratreet
% cere ag
vere st oa
=
z= 3
eet Seieceeeseres

ss

tire
= State

Sere

pce Seats
sees rer :
eects :
Mileage eee reat ttt
eee riety tates
se ee
eeeeees

-

rotate
eseee
preerneeee
eee
=
5
Se
ae
me
ieee
5 2-8

PF

seat ot
Grastits
ee

ost
Laat et ae
reel

=

i

5

Ciotet
Ces

ares
ahs fe refit
ieee ites rors
carer eerie
¢ ee ete
Soe

nat stet: {
iioteeet :
rere y
weet
ct; - 2-
err tetyte tet se
oS aie

Se
ne ie ew ce"
peeks

reat’ ay

piatetae tee
-= 9
ratstatet se tomtate

Fate

s5S5tet is
vi ey

ee *theeits
pepspsreaset ahs}
ath

+

Ahm foe
go ates
ei tteteteeten eet at,
*
piers
sti re peat eteees a
senenean piece
aSens

if

‘ $
is

pub; es

beet

rbebebe i i
ftit bebebati it
oe} f

erasures

ieesabitece i

tpt oete hs pire

(ms

a

405,

phat ds

\
epeansetopcts

SSS
SS

TE
x BLOGIN & SON
inc.
CHEMICAL
MEDICAL &
SCIENTIFIC
PERIODICALS
AND BOOKS

Sais 29 EAST ee
NEW YO.

ce

p=
awe:

ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT

IN HONOR OF

Professor Frank KH. Lillie

THE COLLECTING NET, June 28, 1930

APPRECIATIONS OF PROFESSOR FRANK R. LILLIE ON
THE OCCASION OF HIS SIXTIETH BIRTHDAY

DR. LILLIE AS ADMINISTRATOR OF THE
MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

By Dr. M. H. Jacogs

Director of The Marine Biological Laboratory,
Professor of General Physiology
University of Pennsylvania.

During forty consecutive years Dr. Frank R.
Lillie has not only witnessed but has played a
unique part in influencing the development of
the Marine Biological Laboratory from its
modest beginnings to its present position as a
splendidly equipped scientific institution of
international importance.

Coming to Woods Hole in 1891 as an in-
vestigator “receiving instruction”, he became
in 1893 a member of the Staff of Instruction
and a few years later Head of the Department
of Embryology, a position which he retained
until 1903. In 1900 he became Assistant Di-
rector and, on the retirement of Professor
Whitman in 1908, Director. This position he
held until 1926 when he in turn resigned and
was elected President of the Corporation, and
in this capacity he now gives to the Labora-
tory the benefit of an experience in its affairs
which is never likely to be excelled.

During the period since 1908 when he has so
largely guided the destinies of the Laboratory
the material resources of the institution have
increased from a few wooden buildings with
scanty equipment to its present holdings of
land, buildings and equipment valued at one
and a half million dollars with a permanent
endowment of more than a million dollars.
During the same period the number of investiga-
tors has increased from 52 to 329, and the number
of co-operating institutions from 17 to 84.

Great as must be the feeling of gratitude of
everyone associated with the Laboratory for
the most important part which Dr. Lillie has
played in this enormous expansion of its re-
sources, it is fitting that equal recognition
should be given to another less tangible but no
less important matter. For institutions, as for
individuals, a too sudden change from poverty
to comparative affluence has dangers which
many of our universities have been unable to
avoid. To Dr. Lillie more than anyone else the

Laboratory owes its freedom from certain fea-
tures of our American system of institutional
management which are particularly irritating
to scientists. To have preserved during the
critical period of its enormous material ex-
pansion the atmosphere of freedom and _ in-
formality which characterized its earlier days
and to have kept alive the spirit of hearty co-
operation which makes it possible for the group
of scientists who compose the Corporation and
the Board of Trustees to manage the affairs
of their own institution without a cumbersome
administrative machinery, without the services
of efficiency experts, and with an almost un-
believable absence of friction of any sort, is a
contribution of outstanding importance, not
merely to the Marine Biological Laboratory but
to Science and Education generally.

AN APPRECIATION FROM THE PRESIDENT
OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

3y Dr. Rosert M. Hutcuins

President, University of Chicago
Gifted with scientific insight and administrative
ability, a rare combination, Doctor Frank R. Lillie
has been the inspiring leader of an internationally
recognized Department of Zoology as well as a
skilled investigator in the biological field. He
constantly seeks to aid, encourage, and give credit
to those who work with him. The success with
which his program of development has met has
been made possible by his ceaseless and untiring
personal efforts in enlisting human and financial
support. May I join my congratulations and best
wishes with those of his associates on the faculty
of the University of Chicago to Doctor Lillie upon

this memorable occasion.

DR. LILLIE—AN APPRECIATION
By Jutrus RosENWALD

Dr. Frank R. Lillie is a gentleman, a great
scholar, and an able administrator who for forty
years has devoted his life to the subject in which
he has attained world wide distinction. His thirty
years at the University of Chicago have added
lustre to the reputation of that great university.
Under his leadership the statesmanlike plans for
the recent enlargement of the Marine Biological

PROFESSOR FRANK R, LILLIE

Littie ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT or THE COLLECTING NET 3

Laboratory at Woods Hole were formulated and
financed. Probably no other individual is as
responsible as he for the notable history of this
great biological station. His personal influence
at Chicago and Woods Hole on the lives and
scientific achievements of hundreds of biologists,
who now hold important posts in many universi-
ties in this country and abroad, is beyond question.
These students of his include one in whom I have
been personally interested for many years—the
brilliant negro scientist, Dr. E. E. Just. Citizens
of Chicago and friends of the University are
honored in reflected glory by this distinguished
scholar, scientific leader and charming personality.

AN APPRECIATION BY ONE OF THE
OLDEST MEMBERS OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

Dr. Epmunp B. WILSON

Da Costa Professor Emeritus, Department of
Zoology, Columbia University

Tt is a pleasure and a privilege to greet Dr.
Lillie on this happy occasion, to offer him our con-
gratulations, and to assure him of our affection
and esteem. Unfortunately we can not very well
tell him all that we think of him; for he is so
medest a man that it is easier to sing his praises
behind his back than face to face. Let me at
least assure him of our warm regard, of our
admiration for his character and achievements,
and of our hope that he may have many happy
returns of this anniversary through a long future.

Those of us who are his old friends and
neighbors think first of the personal qualities
that long ago endeared him to us and commanded
our respect. But on such an occasion as this it
is inevitable that we should think too of his fine
accomplishment during the many years of his
service as director of the Marine Biological
Laboratory. Long ago he proved himself an
eminently worthy successor to the distinguished
men who preceded him in the development of
marine biological laboratories in America, pro-
minent among them Louis Agassiz, Alexander
Agassiz, Spencer F. Baird, William Kk. Brooks,
Alpheus Hyatt and Charles O. Whitman.

As I look back on Lillie’s long service I am
impressed especially with two of its aspects. One
is the unassuming and seemingly easy manner in
which that service was rendered. The tasks that
he had to perform were often delicate and difficult,
but he had a way of making them look easy; and
he carried them through with a good sense and

absence of fuss and fury that are beyond all
praise.

The second noteworthy thing in the record is
the manner in which he kept a steady hand on the
helm without creating jealousy or hard feeling
among the crew. In this respect his record seems
to me especially noteworthy. Differences of
opinion, of course, there have been; but I am not
able to recall a single instance in which those dif-
ferences led to personal animosities. I am afraid
that he sometimes had a hard team to drive. He
succeeded because he did not try to drive. The
effectiveness of his leadership lay in the tactful
and fraternal way in which he maintained and
carried forward our traditional policy of coopera-
tion and democracy in scientific administration.

If you will not betray my confidence I will
frankly confess that there was a time, long before
Lillies day, when I was rather sceptical con-
cerning the democratic ideal of scientific organiza-
tion, a time when I was more impressed with the
effectiveness of benevolent despotism. Even
to-day I will confess to a certain weakness for
the benevolent despot. If this confession scan-
dalizes you, made as it is in this presence, I beg
your indulgence because of my long standing
admiration for the splendid results achieved at
Naples by my beloved old friend Anton Dohrn.
If any man was a benevolent despot it was he;
but no man ever accomplished more for the de-
velopment of marine biology, and no man was
ever more delightful and stimulating as a human
being. Now, I have not changed my mind about
Dohrn and Naples. Under the conditions exist-
ing at that time Anton Dohrn alone could have
created and maintained the Zoological Station.
But since that time a great deal of water has
flowed under the bridge and times have changed.
In this country to-day conditions are widely dif-
ferent; and I am wholly ready to admit that a
friendly democratic organization, such as we have
here, is best for us. This was always Whitman’s
ideal, and in the hands of Lillie it has brought
forth abundant fruit. Our future seems assured ;
and of Lillie it may well be said that he has made
Woods Hole safe for democracy.

And so, on this birthday anniversary, we offer
him a thousand good wishes, hoping that it will
be a great many years before his welcome
presence at Woods Hole will be missed. As for
me, an old veteran in the service, I amuse myself
with the notion that perhaps some day he and I
may find ourselves together collecting Unio and
Nereis and Chaetopterus, engaging once more in
the lost art of cell-lineage and the more modern
one of centrifuging eggs, on some evergreen
shore that lies on the other side of Jordan,

THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

LILLIE ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT oF THE

COLLECTING NET 5

DR. LILLIE AS A FRIEND
By Dr. Gary N.

Professor and Head of the Department of Zoology
Columbia University

CALKINS

Nearly forty years ago the task of enumerating
Protozoa, and of running down odors and tastes
in drinking water for the Massachusetts State
Board of Health seemed to me irksome and un-
proftable, so a cub biologist came to Woods Hole
in 1893 and registered for the course in Embry-
ology. Here he was taken in hand by a cub
instructor—Frank R. Lillie—who at that time
assisted Professor Whitman in giving the course.
I had known him before but an erstwhile acquaint-
anceship ripened that summer into a warm
friendship which has grown and _ strengthened
with the passing years. Never in these four
decades has word or deed come from him that
lessened in the slightest degree the confidence and
esteem of his many friends. Some of us indeed
must have taxed his patience many times, and in
d.fferent ways, but if he has been irritated the
irritation has never been shown and his loyalty
has never swerved.

As a young man Frank Lillie was quiet and
somewhat shy but with a sense of humor that was
not dulled by repression. Frivolity was never
one of his minor sports but I think he rather en-
joyed being with the frivolous-minded, certainly
no taint of prudery ever lay behind his natural
reserve, although vulgarity somehow never seemed
to show its head in his presence. His shyness
has long since been tempered into the easy con-
fidence of the man of the world but the reserve
is still there, and his host of friends have never
been burdened with his private worries, griefs,
or enthusiasms. Many times I have gone from
tee to green without getting a conversational word
from him, but a “slice” “pull” “flubbed”
shot would occasionally bring out an exclamation
which delighted my soul and showed that he was
human.

While only constant prodding will bring out
an admission of worry or grief from him he in-
stantly responds with real sympathy to his friends
in trouble. Nor do his friends know, by any
direct way, of the many benefactions to be traced
to his door—only by evidence that cannot be
hidden do we learn of the benevolence, individual
and communal, which seems to be one great
expression of his sympathetic nature.

Were I asked to picture my idea of an ideal
friend endowed with the attributes of perfect
understanding expressed by golden silence or
temperate speech, of humor without the barbs of

irony or sarcasm, of thoughtful balance in counsel
or debate, of unfailing loyz ulty and affectionate
tolerance of my own whimsicalities and defects,
I should describe Frank R. Lillie.

DR. LILLIE AND HIS SERVICE TO SCIENCE
3y Dr. Epwin G. ConKiin

Professor of Biology, Princeton University

As one who has been associated with Dr. Frank
R. Lillie at the Marine Biological Laboratory for
nearly forty years it gives me particular pleasure
to join with his host of friends and admirers in
cordial greetings and good wishes to him on this
his sixtieth birthday. Only those who have been
intimately acquainted with the history of the
Marine Biological Laboratory during all these
years can Fully appreciate what this Laboratory
owes to Dr. Lillie.

Throughout all this period covering the whole
professional life of Dr. Lillie his research work
has been a constant inspiration to biologists here
and elsewhere. The fundamental character of
his work, its deep scientific and philosophical sig-
nificance, its masterful planning and execution,
its thoroughness and accuracy in all details have
been a stimulus and model to all his students and
associates, and its influence on the progress of
biology as a whole has been of great and lasting
value.

But while his research work has been of the
highest order of excellence he has never failed to
give himself to the service of others and of science
in general. Ata period when many scientific in-
vestigators have taken the selfish attitude that the
only thing that counts in a scientific career is per-
sonal research, he has given his time and efforts
freely to the promotion of the work of others and
to the advancement of science.

He has been constantly on the staff of this
Laboratory for thirty-seven years, five years as
instructor in Zoology, six years in charge of Em-
bryology, eight years as Assistant Director,
eighteen years as Director, and President since
1926. His services to the Laboratory during all
these years have been incalculable. He interested
our first great benefactor, Mr. Charles R. Crane,
in this institution and largely through his efforts
and influence we have received the munificent sup-
port of the General Education Board, the Rocke-
feller Foundation and the Carnegie Corporation.
Nor should it be forgotten that he and Mrs. Lillie
have themselves been generous, although un-
heralded, donors to the Laboratory. This insti-
tution is the enduring monument of his unselfish
labors.

YOLOUUIG SV NOILISOd SIH GHHSINONITHY WITT Yd NAHA\ 9261 NT AMOLVUORVT TVOIDOTOIA ANTIYVN AHL dO DNIGTING NIVIV cosnn

ONIGTING NIVN AHL

LItt1eE ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT OF THE COLLECTING NET Ff

But Dr. Lillie’s unselfish services to science
have not been limited to this institution. He has
for many years served as managing editor or as
co-editor on our leading biological journals, he
has been active in the work of the National
Academy of Sciences and the National Research
Council, and has rendered important service as
chairman of the Biology Fellowship Board and
of the Committee on Sex Research of the Coun-
cil. He and Mrs. Lillie have given to the
University of Chicago the Whitman Memorial
Laboratory of Experimental Zoology, and last of
all, he has, as Chairman of the Committee on
Oceanography of the National Academy of
Sciences, brought to a successful conclusion the
establishment and munificent endowment of the
Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution.

These unselfish and highly successful labors of
Dr. Lillie have made all biologists his debtors but
those of us who have known him personally owe
him a more affectionate debt of gratitude. For
his unswerving loyalty, his transparent sincerity,
his kindly sympathy, his wise counsel, his judicial
poise, his high ideals we are bound to him by
bonds of the warmest affection. May this cele-
bration of his birthday bring to him the assu-
rance that friendships are the chief treasures of
life and that service is the true measure of
success.

DR. LILLIE AS A LEADER
By Dr. C. E. McCiune

Professor and Head of the Department of
Zoology, University of Pennsylvania

To the casual visitor and to the uninitiated
generally the Marine Biological Laboratory is an
institution which can be rated and measured in
terms of material things like buildings and en-
dowments, income and expenditures, and the like.
To those who really know the Woods Hole station,
it is an idea—an inspiration—which has planted
itself in this spot and has clothed itself in these
habilaments but which might, if necessity arose,
suffer transplantation and reintegration elsewhere.
An idea, however, is the child of many minds,
but always one outstanding personality incarnates
the conception and gives it strength and practical-
ity. In the early days of our laboratory the
leader was Dr. Whitman, who refused to let
material consideration hamper intellectual ideals.

How long this disregard of practical considera-
tions might have permitted the continued working
out of high purpose is a question, but one which,
fortunately, did not require an answer from those
interested in the Marine Biological Laboratory.
Whitman had a disciple and a successor who not

only could see visions but could also understand
the language of those who measure and weigh the
elements which make visions realities. There are
many who can understand and appreciate the con-
tribution of Frank Lillie to the material develop-
ment of our now internationally famous marine
station. The splendid evidence of this abounds
in buildings and books, in records of achievement
and in effective organization, but less evident, and
vastly more important, is the sustaining spirit
which animates those who live and work at the
laboratory on occasion, but think always of its
welfare. To have led in the development of such
an influence in unifying the purpose and devotion
of a large and widely scattered body of scientific
workers is an achievement granted to but few.
The evidence of such leadership is not superficially
evident, but it is known to those who have ex-
perienced the manifestations in the early life of
the laboratory, and to them it is a memory long
to be cherished and an evidence of greatness in
character and ability nowhere else equalled in the
otherwise outstanding career of Frank Lillie.

May many more generations of budding bio-
logists come to know the virtue of patience,
kindliness and sincerity, so marked a characteris-
tic of our former director.

DR. LILLIE AND THE DEVELOPMENT OF
THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

Dr. A. P. MATHEWS

Professor and Head of the Department of Phy-
siological Chemistry, University of Cincinnati

To understand the transformation which has
occurred in the Marine Biological Laboratory dur-
ing the forty years Dr. Frank R. Lillie has been
connected with it as a student, instructor, as-
sistant director, director and president of the
board of trustees, one must have a picture of the
laboratory as it was in 1890. To recall to our
minds this picture is like recalling our childhood.
Surely, each feels, that child cannot be I. In
1890 the laboratory was only two years old. It
stood alone, or practically so. It was an experi-
ment. There was no endowment; one wooden
laboratory empty of equipment, a steam launch,
the Sagitta, and a few skiffs constituted the whole
plant, together with an old dwelling house, the
Homestead, where the Mess was housed. Each
investigator went out and got his own materials,
there was no supply department. There were
no departments either of physiology and botany.
Each season ended with a deficit of one or several
thousand dollars, for which the trustees, at that
time almost altogether Bostonians, were responsi-
ble and to cover which some one or several of

AVES) >) SSS DE Ova @ Vo NEINVE IA AN “HSI “VY ‘q : mopuin

PAyy Pun PuoIIy “AALSMAAG “J, “A “Peyyuepr jou “LLvig -_ ‘[ SHYAY “F{ “NVONOTT “FT fy, “ago7q | “TTEMGVEAL “YT VW 3204 Yano.

‘SANNA “YY MOAMNAONV’] ‘D ‘duOdMoIg “YA “A ‘peytwept jou “aay “Ss “4 ‘“TiwNOW ‘Gq “Vv 9d0 “MD ‘poy quept jou ‘naedaaay “YAY
‘NITINOD “S) “W “(i )'AaIaNg “eM ‘SMaHLVIN ‘d 'V SNETIVD “ND “LVaLOd "TM $0204 pay Tina ‘gy ‘NVNLIW MA “O ‘dD
‘LOOY “SM ‘Hd IOGNVY “f{ ‘poy uepr jou ‘woman INDI d “| “AVMMOOag “[ “YY “AITIT “YY AVA “D “Ef : 204 puosr¢ ‘NVWIIDNDOD “TM
NANTCHVS) “DH “INVNOD ‘S “WY ‘Adosvad “ “[ ‘NASAIN) NVA Vuy ‘NCLONTEAVE] “YN ‘WVHAOD ‘d “A “ASVIV NM °S 5 7Y/D1t 07 Bfa] ‘m0.4 Ju04,7

€63L NI GHHdVYNOLOHI AUCLVHOAVT AHL WO SUAAWHIT

LILLIE ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT OF THE COLLECTING NET 9

them had to go out and secure the money. The
number of investigators was hardly more than a
dozen and several of these were graduate students.

But though small in stature and in flesh the
laboratory was a vigorous infant and richly en-
dowed with vital spirits. There are some nowa-
days who think that the outer shell in some way
forms or is the vital spirit; the laboratory proves
the contrary. Spirit forms body, not the reverse.
It had an extraordinary enthusiasm and verve.
Whitman, whose dignity, simplicity, kindliness,
and catholicity of spirit the laboratory has in-
herited had carried it through the perils of early
infancy. There was a group of very able zool-
ogists here: Whitman, E. B. Wilson, Morgan,
Conklin, Bumpus, Gardner, Ayers, Lillie, Bristol,
Watase, Mall, McFarlane, Loeb, F. S. Lee, Mead,
Sharp, Clark, Hargitt, Miss O’Grady, Miss Clapp,
these are some that come to mind as being here
in those first years. Their ability, discoveries,
enthusiasm helped create the laboratory spirit and
gave it international fame. The plan of co-
operative support by the colleges had been
adopted.

In these early years as a student Dr. Lillie con-
tributed greatly by his fine spirit, scientific
enthusiasm, and the splendid work embodied in
his thesis on the embryology of Unio.

It was from such beginnings that the laboratory
developed to its, present position of supremacy.
Under Whitman’s guidance, but with the very
efficient support of Lillie as instructor and later
as assistant director, it weathered great crises in
its existence. The first of these occurred in 1895
when although the majority of the board of
trustees feared to open the laboratory for finan-
cial reasons, it was opened and conducted by
Whitman, Bumpus, Lillie and the rest, with the
support of a minority of the board of trustees
chief among whom was Dr. Gardner. This
resulted in the reorganization of the board of
trustees and was followed by several years of
very precarious existence. The second crisis
occurred about 1900. It was through Whitman’s
courage and vision, aided in part by the force of
circumstances, that the laboratory escaped this
second great dange=, It was proposed by many
members of the bo, 1 of trustees that the labora-
tory should be taken over by, and become part
of, the Carnegie Institution and thus the financial
difficulties be escaped. Events, largely due to Dr.
Lillie, have proved the wisdom of Whitman’s
stand for independence. Dr. Lillie stood loyally
by Whitman during these hard years, when the
future was so dark. He enlisted the support of
his brother-in-law, Mr. Charles R. Crane, and
Mr. Crane and Mr. L. L. Nun, a brother-in-law

of Dr. Whitman, were those who encouraged the
laboratory to persevere in its independence; and
they and Mr. John Phillips of Boston made it
possible by generous gifts to acquire land so much
needed for growth. Dr. Lillie by his good judg-
ment and management as assistant director was a
very important factor in this period. It is
doubtful whether the laboratory could have con-
tinued to maintain its independent existence had
it not been for him.

Since he became director, some twenty years
or more ago, the laboratory has become what it
is today, the leading marine laboratory in the
world and a unique institution. There is none
other like it. Provided as it is with a unique
organization, with magnificent buildings, a splen
did equipment and library, a fine endowment
which ensures its permanence and continued
ability to serve the biological sciences, and above
all with the spirit of its early days which it has
maintained—a spirit of good fellowship and
hearty cooperation of the biologists of America
its future is indeed assured.

All this development is owing to Dr. Lillie more
than to any other one man. He has been in-
fluential in securing for the laboratory the splen-
did gifts which has made its material progress
possible. He has shown sound judgment in his
management of the affairs of the institution. He
has, moreover, continued to carry on, both per-
sonally and through his students, important and
fundamental studies of the mechanics and
chemistry of fertilization; he has directed the
department of zoology at Chicago, one of the
largest and most important zoological departments
of the country; and he has published a most
excellent text book of embryology, by which the
number of his students is greatly increased and
extended over the whole world. To all these
achievements. he has recently added another and
brought here what will be in the future an in-
valuable adjunct and colleague of the laboratory,
an oceanographic institute.

To do these things it is clear that one must have
an unusual combination of qualities: love of
science, intellectual ability, great industry, good
judgment, foresight, and a solid and reliable
character, which shall attach friends to him and
make few or no enemies. These things have given
him his power of leadership. The development
of the Marine Biological Laboratory under his
directorship to its present victorious eminence, is
a visible evidence that he possesses these qualities
to an unusual degree.

But while Dr. Lillie has contributed so much
to the Marine Biological Laboratory, on the other
hand the Laboratory has conferred upon him an

10 Littie ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT OF THE COLLECTING NET

even greater blessing, since it gave him Mrs. Lillie ;
and he no doubt feels that he is still greatly in
debt. And it has given to both Dr. Lillie and Mrs.
Lillie the undying affection of all those who have
been so long associated with them at Woods Hole.

DR. LILLIE — AN APPRECIATION
By Dr. W. C. Curtis
Professor of Zoology, University of Missouri,
Chairman of Division of Biology and Agriculture,
National Research Council (1930-1931)

Recalling my earliest associations at the Marine
Biological Laboratory from 1896 to 1930 I think
of Frank Lillie as an instructor in the course in
Embryology and one of the young investigators
for whom I had great respect as a student. Later,
from 1898 to 1911, I saw him in action during
his first years as Director when I was connected
with the Invertebrate course. If I were asked my
most vivid impression of him during all the years
since 1896, I should say it has been his capacity
for growth. As a young man of marked ability
his modesty often embarrassed him and some-
times us because of a certain diffidence we all
remember, It has been interesting to watch his
“ontogeny” in adult life, how his responsibilities
have brought the maturity and self command that
all admire, without decrease in the essential
modesty of the man. I think one feels the same
quality in his work as an investigator. This has
always been of a high order but he has gone
steadily on to better things in a way that has made
us feel his intellectual grasp of any problem he
has taken in hand. His two recent essays upon
problems of development illustrate the case and
make us hope he will not fail to publish the others
he has projected.

As an administrator he has shown the same
qualities. Whitman gave the laboratory its initial
ideals and prestige. Lillie rendered no less ser-
vice in maintaining and interpreting these
standards while he established our finances upon
a safe foundation.

To have reached the age of sixty with such a
record is indeed enviable. To be sixty and still
at one’s best with the prospect of even more
effective work to be done delights one’s colleagues
and friends.

DR. LILLIE AS A TEACHER
Dr. Cart R. Moore
Hull Zoological Laboratory,
The University of Chicago.
If a teacher be a person who stimulates the
student to an appreciation of sound individual
production and sews deeply the seed of conscien-

tious application; trains the pupil to use his mind;
one who directs without seeming to do so; fosters
a critical attitude without discouragement and
encourages without ostentation; is pregnant with
suggestions at critical moments and imparts a
sense of satisfaction in real accomplishment,
Frank R. Lillie occupies a place in the first rank.

We know him best in connection with students
in the course of graduate training and later, and
as a director of research; it is here, undoubtedly,
that his mastery is most evident. His ability to
initiate well conceived and timely programs look-
ing towards broad fundamental concepts is well
known. His own endeavors have been character-
istically directed to pathfinding with individual
consolidation of positions left to his student
followers. His is a real leadership.

After initiation, organization perhaps ranks as
an outstanding characteristic. The organization
of a seminar or graduate course at once directs
the student’s attention to broad vistas with a
central theme deftly supported by disciplines,
concepts, theories, facts and incidents. His choice
of presentation, personal or by the student, un-
covers logically and clearly the separate building
stones of the cathedral. Well chosen and timely
resumes serve to retain intact the well knit fabric
of logical analysis of the topic under considera-
tion. Critical evaluation of facts or concepts, a
diligent search for other possible interpretations,
a leisurely careful consideration often impresses
the student that thoughts are being expressed
aloud more or less unconscious of the immediate
environment. To the student a most insignificant
detail may be briefly and cleverly woven into a
concept at once far reaching in its implications.
All possible points of view and interpretation are
encouraged ; discussion is stimulated ; theoretical
concepts are always to the forefront; and if final
conclusions are to be drawn this is often left to
the student with the background thus extensively
unfolded. Dogmatic or strictly opinionated con-
clusions find no place in his laboratory. The
facts, the implications, and often a well developed
theory make up the proceedings.

For the moment a cold concise analysis of tacts
may appear to be the only concern but suddenly
the humanistic side of his nature may unexpectedly
break forth resolving itself either in the direction
of the author of a paper or the student making the
report. Many embarrassments to the student,
justified by poor preparation, are softened by a
few words appropriately chosen without in any
sense excusing the performance. One does not
leave the seminar hour conducted by Professor
Lillie without food for thought sufficient for days.

As a director of research students his marked

Litt1eE ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT oF THE COLLECTING NET 11

ability as a teacher in many ways reaches its acme.
Introduced into broad fundamental fields wherein
the ground has usually been already broken the
student at once sees his problem as an integral
part of a much greater whole. The student finds
many open approaches for advancement of knowl-
edge in such fundamental major interests as
analytical embryological development, the funda-
mental aspects of the broad problem of fertiliza-
tion, the biology of sex, or in the field of
correlation of genetics and development. To h’s
research student the way has been opened, the
problem suggested, means of approach perhaps
briefly discussed and the student is left with the
understanding that results are expected. A rigid
analysis of fact, a simple query “what does it
mean?’’, often sends the student to his room to
deliberate, read, weigh evidence and arrive at
conclusions. In times of discouragement a few
soft words serve as a stimulant, or in moments of
unjustified exultation a subtle rebuke that grows
with mature consideration serves to temper the
waters and maintain an even balance. In the end
the finished product, considered by the student
his own, without a consciousness of the clever
direction of his thoughts for perhaps a few years,
gives that sense of satisfaction of real accomplish-
ment every student should possess. Himself,
always busy, except for necessary moments of
diversion, surrounded by large and far reaching
problems of educational or administrative de-
mand, the student never finds him too much
occupied to listen during moments of discourage-
ment or distress, to encourage or quietly suggest.

Tolerant of ideas, patient with a slow develop-
ing consciousness in the student, generous with
respect to sudden original ideas however falla-
cious they may be, the student is encouraged to
emerge from any dilemma by his own efforts.
Loyalty to a student develops slowly and only
after mature consideration but once having arrived
it is fostered until just cause removes it. He is
given freedom to develop himself as he will
unless restraining influences are demanded ; these
administered quietly, politely, and considerately
but forcefully lead to that appreciation of his
mastery and generosity which all his students
carry away.

THE LABORATORY CELEBRATES THE
SIXTIETH BIRTHDAY OF DR. LILLIE

The sixtieth birthday of Professor Frank R.
Lillie and his fortieth year of association with the
Marine Biological Laboratory was officially re-
cognized by the laboratory on June 27.

The celebration included a series of scientific
Teports presented by students of Professor Lillie.

The large auditorium was crowded with associates
and friends of Dr. Lillie. Professor E. B.
Wilson, one of the oldest and most distinguished
members of the laboratory, told of his early
associations with Dr. Lillie. Dye, We Ge
Young of Brown University spoke on the sper-
matozoa of the guinea pig; Dr. L. V. Heil-
brunn of the University of Pennsylvania dis-
cussed some aspects of his work on protoplasm ;
Dr. B. H. Willier, who came from Chicago as the
official representative of the University of
Chicago, discussed chorio-allantoic grafts, and
finally, Professor E. E. Just of Howard Univer-
sity, who cut short his stay in Europe to be
present for the occasion, considered the fertiliza-
tion problem.

The former students of Professor Lillie pre-
sented him with a large mariner’s clock, inscribed
with the following words: “To Professor Frank
R. Lillie on his sixtieth birthday from his former
students.” The presentation of the gift was made
by Dr. Heilbrunn.

Following the exercises in the auditorium there
was a reception at the M. B. L. Club where old
and new associates had the opportunity of extend-
ing their congratulations to Professor Lillie.

PAPERS BY DR. FRANK R. LILLIE

1893. Preliminary account of the embryology of Unio
complanata. Jour. Morph. vol. 8, no. 3, pp.
569-578

1895. The embryology of the Unionidae. A study in

cell-lineage. Jour. Morph. vol. 10, no. 1, pp.
1-100

On the smallest parts of Stentor capable of
regeneration. A contribution on the limits of
divisibility of living matter. Jour. Morph. vol.
12, no. 1, pp. 239-249

On the effect of temperature on the development
of animals. (with F. P. Knowlton). Zool. Bull.
vol. 1, no. 4, pp. 179-193

On the origin of the centers of the first cleavage
spindle in Unio complanata. Sci. n. s. vol. 5,
p. 389

Centrosome and sphere in the egg of Unio. Zool.
Bull. vol. 1, no. 6, pp. 265-274

Adaption in cleavage. Biol, Lect. M. B. L. 1897-
98. pp. 43-67

Some notes on regeneration and regulation in
planarians. I. The source of material of new
parts and limits of size. Amer. Nat. vol. 34, no.
399, pp. 173-177

The organization of the egg of Unio, based on a
study of its maturation, fertilization, and
cleavage. Jour. Morph. vol. 17, no, 2, pp. 227-292

Notes on regeneration and regulation in plan-
arians. (continued) Amer. Jour. Physiol. vol.
6, no, 2, pp. 129-141

Differentiation without cleavage in the egg of
the annelid Chaetopterus pergamentaceus. Arch,
Entwicklungs, Organismen vol. 14, nos, 3-4,
pp. 477-499

1896.

1898.

1899.

1909.

1901.

1902,

12 Litt1e ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT oF THE COLLECTING NET
1903. On anamniote embryos of the chick. Sci. n. s. The Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods
vol. 17, p. 484 Hole. Int. Rev. d. ges. Hydrob. u. Hydrog. vol.
Experimental studies on the development of the 5, nos. 5-6, pp. 583-589
organs in the embryo of the fowl (Gallus Breeding habits of the heteronereis form of
domesticus). I. Biol. Bull. vol. 5, no. 2, pp. Nereis limbata at Woods Hole, Mass. (with
92-124 lh. EB. Just). Biol. Bull. vel. 24, no. 3, pp. 147-169
1904. Experimental studies on the development of 1914. Studies of fertilization. VI. The mechanism of
organs in the embryo of the fowl (Gallus fertilization in Arbacia. Jour, Exp, Zool, vol.
domesticus). II. Biol. Bull. vol. 7, no. 1, pp. 16, no. 4. pp. 523-590
33-54 1915. Sperm agglutination and fertilization. Biol. Bull.
TYurther experiments in the embryology of the vol, 28, no. 1, pp. 18-33
chick. Biol, Bull. vol. 7, p. 309 Studies of fertilization. VII. Analysis of varia-
1905. On the nature and behavior of the morphogenous tions in the fertilizing power of sperm suspen-
substances in the egg of Chaetopterus, Sci. n. s. sions of Arbacia. Biol. Bull. vol. 28, no, 4, pp.
vol. 21, p. 385 229-251
1906. Observations and experiments conrerning the The fertilizing power of sperm dilutions of
elementary phenomena of embryonic develop- Arbacia. Proce. Nat. Acad. Sei. vol. 1, pp. 156-160
ment in Chaetopterus. Jour, Exp. Zool. vol. 3, 1916. The theory of the free-martin. Sci. n. s. vol. 438,
no. 2. pp. 153-268 pp. 611-613
1907. The twenty-first session of the Marine Biological The history of the fertilization problem. Sci,
Laboratory, June 1 to October 1, 1908. Preli- n. s. vol. 43, pp. 39-53
minary announcement. Sei. n. s. vol. 26, pp. 1917. Sex-determination and sex-differentiation in
839-842 mammals. Proe. Nat. Acad. Sci. vol. 3. pp. 464-
The biological significance of sexual differentia- 470
tion—a zoological point of view. Sci. n. s. vol. The free-martin; a study of the action of sex
25, pp. 372-376 hormones in the foetal life of cattle. Jour.
1908. On the specific gravity of constituent parts of Exp. Zool. vol. 23, no. 2, pp. 371-452
the egg of Chaetopterus and the effect of centri- 1919. Tandler and Keller on the free-martin. Sei. n. 8,
fuging on the polarity of the egg. Sci. n. s. vol. vol. 50, pp. 183-184
27, pp. 905-907 1921. Studies of fertilization. VIII. On the measure of
A contribution towards an experimental analysis specificity in fertilization between two associ-
of the karyokinetie figure, Sci. n. s. vol. 27, pp. ated species of the sea urchin genus Strongy-
907-908 locentrotus. Biol. Bull. vol. 40, no, 1, pp. 1-22.
The American Society of Naturalists’ coopera- Studies of fertilization. IX. On the question of
tion in biologieal research. Sci. n. s. vol. 27, superposition of fertilization on partheno-
pp. 869-372 genesis in Strongylocentrotus purpuratus. Biol.
Polarity and bilaterality of the annelid egg. Bull. vol. 40, no. 1, pp. 23-31
Experiments with centrifugal force. Biol, Bull. Studies of fertilization. X. The effects of copper
vol. 16, no. 2, pp. 54-79 salts on the fertilization reaction in Arbacia
1999. On the teaching of the elements of embryology. and a comparison of mercury effects. Biol.
Sci. n. s. vol. 29, pp. 932-934 Bull. vol. 41, no. 38. pp. 125-148
Karyokinetic figures of centrifuged eggs; an 1922. An early stage of the free-martin and the parallel
experimental test of the center of force hypo- history of the interstitial cells. Sci. vol. 55, no.
thesis. Biol. Bull. vol. 17, no. 2, pp. 101-119 1482
The theory of individual development. Pop. Sci. 1923. Supplementary notes on twins in cattle. Biol.
Month. Sept. pp. 289-252 Bull. vol. 44, no, 2, pp. 47-78
1911. Studies of fertilization in Nereis. I. The cortical 1924. Fertilization. (with FE. E. Just). General Cytology
changes in the egg. II, Partial fertilization. edited by E. V. Cowdry, pp. 451-536
Jour. Morph. vol. 22, no. 2, pp. 261-393, 1927. The gene and the ontogenetic process, Sci. vol.
Charles Otis Whitman. Jour. Morph. vol. 22, no. 66, pp. 361-368
4, pp. xv-Ixxvii The present status of the problem of ‘Sex-inver-
“Charles Otis Whitman—an appreciation”. Sei. sion’ in the hen. Comments on Doctor Domm/’s
nm. Ss. Vol, 33) pp. 54-56 paper. Jour, Exp. Zool. vol, 48, no. 1, pp. 175.
1912. The production of sperm iso-agglutinins by ova, 196
Sci. n. s. vol. 36, pp. 527-530 1929. Embryonic segregation and its role in the life
Studies of fertilization in Nereis. III. The mor- history. Wilhelm Roux’ Arch. f. Entwickl. Org.
phology of the normal fertilization of Nereis. vol. 118, Festschrift f. Hans Spemann, Dritter
IV. The fertilizing power of portions of the Teil. pp. 499-533
spermatozoon, Jour, Exp. Zool. vol, 12, no, 4,
0 eee BOOKS BY DR. FRANK R. LILLIE
The penetration of the spermatozoon and the - p
origin of the sperm aster in the egg of Nereis. 1906. Laboratory outlines for the study of the embry-
On the fertilizing power of portions of the ology of the chick and the pig. Ist edition.
spermatozoon. Sci. n. s. vol. 35, p. 471 Univ. of Chicago Press. Later Editions: 1906
1913. Studies of fertilization. V. The behavior of the and 1913. , : ;
spermatozoa of Nereis and Arbacia with special 1908. The development of the chick, An introduction
reference to egg-extractives. Jour, Exp. Zool. to embryology. Ist edition. New York, Henry
vol. 14, no. 4. pp. 515-574 Holt & Co. Second edition: 1919,
The mechanism of fertilization, Sci, n. s. vol. 1923. (with Carl R. Moore). A laboratory outline of

38, pp. 524-528
Review of Hertwig’s “Allgemeine

3iologie”, Sci,
n. 8. vol, 387, pp. 64-66

embryology with special reference to the chick
and the pig. 4th edition. Univ. of Chicago
Press.

a

Vot. V, No. I

SATURDAY, JUNE 28, 1930

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Copies. 20 Crs.

SPECIAL SEMINAR AND RECEPTION AT THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL
LABORATORY MARKS THE SIXTIETH BIRTHDAY OF DR. LILLIE

This year marks the fortieth year that Profes-
sor Frank Lillie has been a worker at the Marine
Biological Laboratory. He came to Woods Hole
in 1890, and from that time to this, he has not

capacity or another, guided the destinies of the
Marine Biological Laboratory.

The celebration last night was very quiet, but
through it all one could not help but sense the

missed a single summer.

the laboratory celebrated Dr.
birthday, and his fortieth year at Woods Hole.
The celebration began with a general meeting in

the auditorium and this was
followed by a reception at the
M. B. L. club.

When Dr. Lillie first came
to the Laboratory, it was in its
infancy, a small shack with
little or no equipment. He saw
it grow up to its present large
size and to its present position
of prominence. It is hardly
fair to say he saw it grow.
Rather he made it grow. For
he, more than anyone else, is
directly responsible for the
present development of the
laboratory. The eighteen years
during which he served as Di-
rector of the Laboratory was
a period of great growth and
expansion. Before he assumed

the duties of Director, Dr. Lillie served as As-
sistant Director and shouldered many of the prob-
Since his resignation
from the Directorship, he has acted as President
So that, all in all, for
a period of thirty years, Dr. Lillie has, in one

lems of administration.

of the Board of Trustees.

Last night workers at
Lillie’s

sixtieth

M. B. L. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 1, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Lecture. Professor W. R.
Scott, “New Light on the Develop-
ment and Migrations of American
Mammals.”

THURSDAY, JULY 3, 8:00 P. M.

Seminar. (1) Walter S. Root and
Charlotte Heywood: “The Effect of
Carbon Dioxide upon the Rate of
Oxygen Consumption and of Cleav-
age of the Arbacia Egg.”

(2) L. Michaelis and K. Salomon;
“Respiration of Erthroeytes.”

(3) R. W. Gerard: “Observations on
the Metabolism of the Cocecus,
Sarcina Lutes.”

(4) S. G. Barron: “The Effect of
Methylene Blue on the Respiration
of Normal and of Cancer Tissue.”

Zoologists.

Professor E. B. Wilson,
No one could have been better chosen
for the position of chairman.
ate of Dr. Lillie for these many years, Professor
Wilson has been with the Laboratory from its
very beginning, and he better than anyone else is

sincere appreciation of Dr. Lillie’s work on the
part of his associates, his co-workers, and his
students both past and present.
began in the auditorium.

The program
Friday night is a
regular seminar night at the
Laboratory. So that when Dr.
Lillie came to the auditorium,
he was prepared to listen to a
seminar program and nothing
more than that. Perhaps he
noticed that the men on the
program were all former stu-
dents of his. He was perhaps
a bit surprised at the presence
of Dr. Willier, who had come
all the way from Chicago as
the official representative of
the University of Chicago.
But it is safe to assume that
Dr. Lillie was not aware that
the entire program had been
prepared in his honor.

The meeting in the audi-
torium was presided over by
dean of American

Friend and associ-

ee

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ANNIVERSARY SUPPLEMENT IN HONOR OF DR. LILLIE

The Birthday Anniversary of Dr. Lillie .. 1
Phe Program of the Physiology Course,

Dr. W. R. Amberson

The New Biological Station in Virginia, _
Dr. B. D. Reynolds .......
Hditorial Page - 2.20.0...

iene geet Eee

9
a

A Method of Obtaining Whole Blood in

the Absence of an Anti-elotting

INS hig WE ses Abi Soynene ahi.
3 Items (of interest <2 crieaces-lclvetavica antec 6
4 Directory ....

ZZ THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V, No. 31,

in a position to know of Dr. Lillie’s self-sacrificing
services to the institution. In a few well-chosen
words, Professor Wilson opened the meeting. He
told of the reason for the gathering, of the great
pleasure with which old and new workers at the
laboratory were there to pay homage to the man
who had given so much of his life to the welfare
of the institution.

After Professor Wilson’s introductory remarks,
there were seminar reports by former students of
Dr. Lillie. These will be reported more fully in
a later issue of Tue Cottectinc Ner. Dn W. C.
Young of Brown University read a paper on the
post-testicular history of spermatozoa and repro-
duction in the male guinea pig. Dr. B. H.
Willier of the University of Chicago then spoke
on the developmental relation of the heart and
the liver in chorio-allantoic grafts. Dr. E. E.
Just of Howard University briefly considered his
recent work on fertilization. Dr. Just had cut
short his stay in Europe in order to be present
at the birthday celebration. Finally Dr. L. V.
Heilbrunn of the University of Pennsylvania
spoke for a few moments on the action of ultra-
violet rays on Arbacia egg protoplasm. Or at
any rate he began to speak on this subject, but as
his talk progressed, the audience gradually be-
came aware that the subject was being changed
away from biology to the more immediate subject

of the birthday of Dr. Lillie. And it developed
that Dr. Lillie’s former students had contributed
to an expression of their appreciation for him and
had purchased a beautiful clock to commemorate
the occasion of his sixtieth birthday. This clock,
a ships-bell clock, was presented to Dr. Lillie.
It bears the inscription, “To Dr. Lillie on his
sixtieth birthday from his former students.” As
a matter of fact the clock was liberally over-sub-
scribed. The excess funds are being made the
nucleus of a portrait fund to be used for the pur-
chase of a portrait of Dr. Lillie which will be
hung in the library of the Laboratory.

After the presentation ceremony, the large
audience adjourned to the club-house. There,
many old friends of Dr. Lillie were happy to con-
gratulate him on the occasion. Old and new
workers of the laboratory had a chance to meet
Dr. Lillie, to meet each other, and to spend a very
pleasant evening talking over past, present and
future. The social committee of the club had
arranged the reception, and had provided very
agreeable refreshments. The clubhouse was filled
with flowers, and there was a general air of
festivity. Some of the guests wondered how
many of those present last evening would be in
Woods Hole ten years from now to celebrate
Dr. Lillie’s seventieth birthday and his fiftieth year
of association with the laboratory.

PROGRAM OF THE PHYSIOLOGY COURSE

By Dr. WitttAmM R. AMBERSON
Professor and Head of Department of Zoology, University of Tennessee

In preparation for the work of the present
summer the course in physiology has undergone
a rather extensive reorganization. The teaching
staff has been strengthened by the addition of a
number of new members. These are Dr. Philip
Bard, of Princeton University, Dr. Hallowell
Davis, of Harvard University, and Dr. Ralph
Gerard, of the University of Chicago. Dr. Leonor
Michaelis, who for some years past has given a
series of lectures in connection with the course,
will this year give, in addition, a week of special
instruction in the use of the hydrogen electrode to
a small group of students, as an integral part of
the laboratory work. Former members of the
active teaching staff have agreed to serve as a
group of special lecturers. To this group have
been added Dr. Balduin Lucké, of the University
of Pennsylvania, and Dr. Henry Fry, of Wash-
ington Square College, New York University.
Dr. Fry will also act in an advisory capacity on
cytological studies to be undertaken in connection
with experimental work. By arrangement with
the embryology course, Dr. Charles Rogers, of the
embryology staff, will direct the work of a group

of students in physiology who are interested in
artificial parthenogenesis.

The main objective of the course will continue
to be preparation for, and stimulation toward,
problem work. With this end in view, no attempt
will be made to give a systematic course in
physiology. The lectures will present many dif-
ferent points of view, given by many different
lecturers on the problems of their own special
fields of work. For the first four weeks these
lectures will relate more or less directly to the
laboratory work. In the last two weeks lectures
of a more advanced and technical character will
be given.

The more formal period of laboratory instruc-
tion will continue for four weeks, from June 19
to July 16. During this time, the students are
working upon a schedule which brings them into
contact with a number of different techniques and
materials. Before the opening of the course each
student was asked to elect, from a laboratory
outline of twenty-four different projects, a list
of twelve subjects which he particularly wished
to study. From these elections a laboratory

June 28, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET 3

schedule has been worked out in which the indivi-
dual needs and desires of each student have been
taken into account. Each student has his own
laboratory schedule. A number of different types
of work are progressing simultaneously, with at
least three members of the teaching staff directing
the students who have elected the projects which
they have offered. For the four-week period no
student has been assigned more than eight sub-
jects for study, and most members of the class
have been assigned only six or seven.

The laboratory program of the course includes
microrespirometer studies, gas and blood gas
analysis, the determination of the relationship
between pH and COs tension in sea water,
measurements of chronaxie and recovery rate in
nerve and muscle, action and injury potentials,
electrokinetic phenomena, the oxygen dissociation
curve of hemocyanin ,a comparative study of
invertebrate hearts, operative work upon the
nervous systems of dog-fish, a group of studies
upon egg materials, including osmotic and per-
mability effects, and artificial parthenogenesis, and
colorimetric and electrometric pH work, the last
being chiefly under the direction of Dr.
Michaelis. The course has recently acquired new
equipment, including a complete Warburg micro-
respirometer apparatus, and an electric combus-
tion furnace for the removal of oxygen from tank
nitrogen and hydrogen. Much of the laboratory
work has been made possible by loans of apparatus
made by other institutions.

At the conculsion of the more formal period
of training each student will undertake the study
of some problem growing out of his own interests
or from the experience acquired in the first weeks
of the course. These problems will be under-
taken with the advice, or under the direction, of

some member of the teaching staff, or of some
other investigator connected with the laboratory.
No time limit is set to such problem work. The
course equipment and laboratory space are avail-
able to all students for the rest of the summer,
and the problems may even be continued in suc-
ceeding years.

The ultimate objective of all problem work
will be te make a definite scientific contribution,
worthy of publication. This objective will, of
course, be reached in relatively few cases. In
past years a number of papers have been published
which have communicated results secured by
students working in the Physiology class. It has
been the custom to allow such students to publish
their results under their own names. The mem-
bers of the staff have now agreed that, in the
future, a different policy will be adopted. In
agreement with the present practice of a number
of the leading departments of Physiology and
Biochemistry in this country, it has been decided
that student work, originating in the class, and
carried out with course equipment, under the
direction of some member of the staff or of some
other investigator, shall, if carried to a successful
conclusion, be published under the joint author-
ship of the student, or students, and the director
of the research. In this way a more careful
planning of the problem work will be insured,
with closer contact between student and director,
and a sense of mutual responsibility which will
lead to more worthy scientific results.

The members of the teaching staff invite the
interest and cooperation of the other members of
the Woods Hole scientific community in making
the present program a success. The Laboratory
is open to visitors to inspect the work of the
course.

THE NEW BIOLOGICAL STATION IN VIRGINIA

By Dr. Bruce D. REYNOLDs,

Department of Zoology, University of Virginia

A matter that should be of general interest to
biologists is the recent announcement of the
establishment of a biological station in the
Allegheny Mountains of Virginia. It is to be
called the Mountain Lake Biological Station and
will be an integral part of the University of
Virginia. The station will be under the direction
of Dr. Bruce D. Reynolds, with Dr. Ivey F.
Lewis as Associate Director. The primary aim
is to give graduate instruction in biology during
the summer months under ideal environmental
conditions. Furthermore, the station affords a
gathering place where research may be indus-
triously pursued and where biologists may make

contacts with their fellow workers.

There are several reasons why the station fills
a real need in the promotion of biological interests.
First, the region is rich in flora and fauna which
have been inadequately studied. Second, there
are no biological stations devoted primarily to
advanced work in this section of the country.
Third, the climatic conditions and scenery make
this an unusually attractive place to spend the
summer.

Mountain Lake is located in Giles County,
Virginia, at an elevation of four thousand feet
above sea level. The lake, from which the name

(Continued on Page 5)

4 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V, No. 31,

The Collecting Net

Woods Hole New Bedford

Telephone: Falmouth 993
A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.
Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors

Mary Howe .. Annaleida S, Cattell

Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

Dr. Lillie and the Laboratory

We are not competent to write an appreciation
of Dr. Frank R. Lillie and ‘his services to the
Marine Biological Laboratory. This pleasant
task has been undertaken by others. However,
we do know that the development of an institution
of this kind is dependent upon the number of
its active workers and upon its material wealth.
In his contribution Dr. Jacobs emphasises some
relevent facts. When Dr. Lillie accepted the
directorship there were fifty-two investigators
enrolled in the laboratory. This number had in-
creased to two hundred and fifty-two when he re-
linquished his position in 1926. The two pictures
of the “Main Building’ reproduced on Page 6
of our supplement bring out vividly the develop-
ment of the material resources of the laboratory
during Dr. Lillie’s administration.

In spiritual and material things the laboratory
as it stands to-day is a product of the labor of
Dr. Lillie. It is perhaps his greatest contribution
to biology. Certainly no other individual has
made a greater one.

About Ourselves

With this number THe CoLiectine Net ini-
tiates its fifth year of publication. Four years
ago scarcely anyone would have predicted that
our undertaking would grow to such large propor-
tions. Like many successful men—especially
statesman—THE CoLLtectinG Net was a product
of its time.

Our publication began at a time when there
was a definite need for it. During previous
years the growth of the laboratory had been
remarkable. In 1912 there were only ninety-three
investigators at the laboratory and in 1926 when
Tue Cotrectinc Net began publication the
number had tripled. In the early years the group
was small so that each worker was familiar with
all the activities of the laboratory. With its rapid

growth this knowledge has become increasingly
difficult to obtain without some agency such as
Tue CoLvectine NEt.

The purpose of THe Corttectinc Net is to
print material of especial interest to those who
have been engaged in biological work in Woods
Hole. We wish to cover completely all the activi-
ties of the Marine Biological Laboratory, The
United States Bureau of Fisheries and the new
Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. Its pro-
jected contents can be fairly well divided into
four parts:

(1) Results of scientific work reported during
the summer at Woods Hole, together with
critical reviews of such reports.

(2) The publication of notes and news con-
cerning the activities of the scientific institutions
in Woods Hole and those persons affiliated with
them.

(3) The publication of other biological news
of particular interest to workers at Woods Hole.

(4) Brief notes of events in Woods Hole of
especial interest to workers at the laboratory.

The efficiency with which we can turn our
words into deeds depends upon the good-will and
cooperation of everyone in Woods Hole. We
believe that we have gained this support and con-
sequently look forward to issuing each week a
number which is a little bit better than the one
that preceded it.

A New Undertaking

In 1928 Dr. Just contributed to THe CoLLect-
1NG Nev a series of articles on ‘Methods for
Experimental Embryology with Special Reference
to Marine Invertebrates.” The contents of these
articles are of untold value to beginning investiga-
tors and, indeed, to all workers at the laboratory.

Dr. Lucké and others have made the admirable
suggestion that THE CoLLectinG Ner undertake
to collect an extensive series of notes and articles
on biological materials and methods of particular
interest to biologists in Woods Hole. These
accounts would be prepared by those actually’
using these methods, printed throughout the
summer in THe Net, and then later assenvbled in
pamphlet form. If this is done, and done well,
such a manual would become the marine biolo-
gists’s bible.

In this number we are printing our first note
of this kind contributed by Dr. Johlin. We
seriously hope that it is only one of many that
we may have the privilege of printing during
the present summer. In contributing these
accounts, where their special technique can be
made available to all, members of the laboratory
aias a favor upon investigators and students
alike,

June 28, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 5

NEW BIOLOGICAL STATION

(Continued from Page 8)

is derived, is located on the top of Salt Pond
Mountain. It is a body of clear water with a
surface area of approximately 250 acres and an
average depth of sixty feet. Rising from its
shores Bald Knob peak reaches an altitude of
4,248 feet, one of the highest points in the state.
Extensive stretches of wooded, mountainous ter-
rain surround the lake and in the vicinity are
freshwater streams, one of which tumbles over
rocks seventy feet high to form the beautiful
Cascades. The mean temperature for the sum-
mer months is approximately sixty-eight degrees,
the nights being remarkably cool. There are no
mosquitoes present and only a few other insect
pests are found.

For many years Mountain Lake has been
operated as a summer resort, the number of guests
ranging from two to three hundred during the
height of the season. As a consequence ample
sports and social opportunities are afforded.
Through an arrangement with the management
one of the larger cottages will be converted into
a laboratory and equipped with modern conven-
iences.

Mountain Lake is approached by two roads,
one from Newport, which is about twelve miles,
and the other from Pembroke, approximately
eight miles distant. The latter is the freight and
express station. ..Newport has a population of
around three hundred and Pembroke about five
hundred. Each day motor cars are sent to Pem-
broke for mail, passengers, groceries, etc.
Neither of the roads is hard-surfaced, but both

are passable during the summer. Pembroke is
the nearest railway station.

The owners of the Mountain Lake property
have agreed to retain one of the large cottages as
a dormitory for men students. Women students
and married couples may obtain quarters in the
hotel or cottages as they desire. During the first
year, at least, it is considered desirable for stu-
dents and members of the staff to be lodged as
paying guests of the hotel. The regular rates for
room and board range from $20.00 to $35.00 per
week. The management has agreed to make the
very generous rate of $16.00 per week to students.
All meals are served in the large dining room of
the hotel. The food is good and wholesome, the
service is clean and the prevailing atmosphere is
one of dignified refinement.

The summer work is divided into two terms
of five weeks each, with classes meeting six days
a week. The terms are independent of each other
and the students can register for either or both.

Registration is open to both white men and
women who have had a minimum of six session
hours of college credit in biology. The courses
may be taken for either graduate or undergraduate
credit, but they are designed primarily for those
working toward advanced degrees.

For the summer of 1930 the first term will
begin June 23 and the second term July 28.
During the first term course work will be offered
in Plant Morphology, Plant Cytology, Inverte-
brate Zoology, and Helminthology. During the
second term the course work given will be
Taxonomy and Ecology of Plants, Taxonomy and
Ecology of Animals, and Protozoology.

A METHOD OF OBTAINING WHOLE BLOOD IN THE
ABSENCE OF AN ANTI-CLOTTING AGENT

By Dr. J. M. JoHLtn
Associate Professor of Biochemistry, Vanderbilt University

Occasional interest has been shown by investi-
gators of the M. B. L. in a method of obtaining
whole blood without clotting in the absence of
an anti-clotting agent. The blood of the dogfish,
and of other members of the shark family, will
usually remain without clotting for a long time if
taken directly from the bloodstream in such a
manner as to keep it free from tissue fluids.

For the purpose of taking blood the fish is
mounted on an operating board, laid open by
slitting the abdomen, its peritoneal cavity dried
with paper towelling, and the blood drawn from
the dorsal aorta through a lumbar puncture needle.
A simple device for taking blood is made by
inserting a two-holed stopper into any appropri-
ate receiving vessel, fitting the holes with two

pieces of glass tubing (one of which should reach
to the bottom of the container), and attaching
two pieces of rubber tubing. One, attached to
the longer piece of glass tubing, and leading to the
lumbar puncture needle, should be six or eight
inches long and should preferably be transparent
tubing. The other, which should be about
eighteen inches long, is used to apply suction by
the mouth. A saliva trap may be inserted in this
tube.

Unless care is exercised to prevent air bubbles
from entering with the blood, hemolysis and sub-
sequent clotting will follow. When the blood has
been carefully taken, plasma left in contact with
cells will usually not clot for several hours, while
plasma free from cells may not for several days,

6 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V, No. 31,

ITEMS OF INTEREST

A VALUABLE CONTRIBUTION

On Thursday the rollers on the printing press
broke. New ones were cast in Boston, and this
work was completed on Friday morning; but one
of them was defective. This involved recasting,
and the job could not be completed before 1:00
P. M. The press had to begin printing our sup-
plement that evening, and train connections made
it impossible to ship the rollers by express. Lester
Barth arose to the emergency and on thirty
minutes notice was speeding to Boston in his car.
Five and a half hours later he turned up at our
printers and triumphantly delivered a heavy box,
6 feet in length, containing the necessary equip-
ment. We are under great obligations to Mr.
Barth for this contribution to THe CoLLectTinG
Net. Without his efficient help this accident
would have greatly delayed the printing of the
number and thus lessened its value to everyone.

Dr. W. R. Amberson has resigned his position
as assistant professor of physiology at the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania to take over his new
duties as professor and head of the department
of Zoology at the University of Tennessee.

Dr. Caswell Grave left last week for Florida
from where he has now sailed for the Tortugas
where he will spend the major part of the sum-
mer.

Dr. E. E. Just, Head of the Department of
Zoology at Howard University suceeded in cutting
his stay in Europe short to attend the ceremonies
in honor of Dr. Lillie on Friday evening. Dr.
Just has been working at the Naples laboratory
and in Germany. He will remain at the labor-
atory throughout the summer continuing his re-
searches on fertilization phenomena.

Dr. G. St. deRenyi of the University of Penn-
sylvania Medical School has sailed for Budapest.
Dr. deRenyi spent last summer in Woods Hole
as a member of the laboratory.

Mr. Hugh Montgomery, son of Mrs. Priscilla
Montgomery, the librarian of the Marine iBol-
ogical Laboratory, was married on Saturday
afternoon to Miss Esther Howland at Walpole,
N. H., the summer home of the bride’s parents.
Miss Howland, whose father is professor of
economics at Yale University, is a graduate of
Columbia University, and took the course in
physiology at Woods Hole in 1927.

PHYSIOLOGY CLASS LECTURES

June 30: Dr. Haywood, “The Effect of Envi-
ronmental Factors upon Cell Activity.” July 1:
Dr. Haywood, “The Effect of Environmental
Factors upon Cell Activity.” July 2: Dr. Lucké,
“The Permeability of the Living Cell to Water.”
July 3: Dr. Bard, “Phylogeny of the Nervous
System.” July 5: Dr. Bard, “Comparative Physi-
ology of Nervous Integration.” July 7: Dr. Bard,
“Comparative Physiology of Nervous Integr-
ation.”

Dr. Henry J. Fry has been advanced to a full
professor of biology at New York University
(Washington Square College.)

Mr. George Barclay arrived from Memorial
Hospital on June 17 to set up the X-Ray equip-
ment of the laboratory and make measurements
on the machines. He returns to the Hospital on
July 1 when his place here will be taken by some
one else from the same institution.

Dr. and Mrs. Elliot R. Clarke, and their
daughter, Peggy, recently came from Philadelphia.
They will remain at Woods Hole until they leave
for Amsterdam where Dr. Clarke will attend the
International Anatomical Congress.

Dr. Harold Plough, who has been teaching in
the embryology course for a number of years,
has resigned his position on the teaching staff of
the embryology course. He is replaced by Dr.
V. C. Twitty who is instructor in zoology at Yale
University. Dr, Twitty will give the section of
the course on Coelenterates and Tunicates.

Dr. William R. Amberson this year replaces Dr.
Merkel H. Jacobs as director of the physiology
course,

Dr. Alfred C. Redfield is spending the sum-
mer in California working at the Jacques Loeb
Laboratory which is an integral part of the Hop-
kins Marine Station of Stanford University. Dr.
Redfield has just been advanced to full professor
of physiology in the Harvard Medical School.

Dr. F. H. Swett, who has been associate profes-
sor of experimental embryology at Vanderbilt
University, is going to Duke University this Fall
as head of the Department of Anatomy in the
Medical School.

Dr. George T. Hargitt, who has been profes-
sor of zoology at Syracuse University will be
professor of zoology at Duke University next
year.

NX

June 28, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET

Bearing Witness
of Its Origin » »

MICROSCOPE FFS, for years the standard in-
strument for the scientific, college and medical
laboratory, embodies within itself the well-
known Bausch & Lomb precision manufacturing
control. The glass for the optical system is made
in our own glass plant so that highest quality
can be maintained. Precision grinding, precision
testing and inspecting — all are under the constant
supervision and control of our highly skilled
craftsmen.

No less is this true of its mechanical parts. The
ieee kes patented B &L side fine adjustment, responding
to a touch for the most delicate focusing—the

rack and pinion substage and coarse focusing

adjustments all tell the story of careful manu-

Be sure to visit the facture and control of quality for which Bausch

Bausch & Lomb Annual & Lomb is justly noted.
Exhibit, July 8 to August 2 Send for descriptive details of the FFS.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO.
642 St. Paul Street « » Rochester, N. Y. i ei See

OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
= LOMB

8 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V, No: 31,
The word

Turtox

-- is a promise of
honest quality and concientious service in Biology

Since its organization and consistently throughout its growth the General Biological
Supply House has held to the poliey that the selling of supplies is only a small part of the
function of a supply house. In following this policy we have made a sincere effort to offer
biology teachers a really helpful, many-sided service, covering a great variety of problems,
Our scientifie staff, which now compares favorably with the staffs found in the larger
colleges and universities, has been built up with this thought in mind—that only a trained
biologist, who has had experience as a teacher, is fitted to collect and prepare material of
the kind that present-day biology teachers have a right to demand.

That this staff should bring about the offering of many extra “services” in addition to
the preparation of good biological material is a natural outcome. The men and women in
our laboratories want to be of help to you; they are biologists and they look at things
from the teacher’s viewpoint.

SOURCES FOR RESEARCH MATERIAL

Research workers in Biology are invited to make use of our Research Service as a means of secur-
ing rare or unusual items needed for their problems.

The Turtox Research Service is an attempt to secure for research workers in biology, specimens
and materials needed for their work which cannot be obtained from the usual sources. This service
costs nothing and we do not offer anything for sale in this connection. If the desired material can
be obtained from any of our field collectors in this country or abroad we either purchase it and bill
it to the research worker at actual cost or put him directly in touch with the collector who ean supply
the desired material. The latter course is followed in most cases. If the material is not obtainable
from any of our regular collectors, we publish a note in Turtox News, calling the attention of other
biologists to the needed material. This course usually brings many responses, which go direct to the
research worker and do not pass through our hands at all.

During the past three years this service has been used by quite a large number of investigators,
and in most cases the desired material has been secured within a reasonably short time. If we can be
of help to you or to any members of your department in this way, please tell us. Remember, there is
no charge of any kind—vwe are glad to be of help in this manner as one small way in which we can
contribute to research in Biology.

The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

General Biological Supply House

( Incorporated )

761-763 East Sixty-ninth Place
Chicago, Illinois

Write today for your set of the Turtox Biology Catalogs

June 28, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 9

TURTOX SERVICE LEAFLETS

The Turtox Service Leaflets were originally planned for the High School teachers, but
during the past year University teachers have requested thousands of copies. These
leaflets are supplied to teachers free of charge. They have been used by large numbers
of teachers in High Schools and have been recommended by several leading Science Di-
rectors in Teachers Colleges.

No. 1 How to Make an Insect Collection.

No. 2 Preserving Zoological Specimens.

No. 3 Preserving Botanical Specimens.

No. 4 The Care of Protozoan Cultures in the Laboratory.

No. 5 Starting and Maintaining a Balanced Fresh-water Aquarium.
No. 6 Growing Fresh-water Algae in the Laboratory,

No. 7 Building a Permanent Teaching Demonstration Collection.
No. 8 How to Prepare Microscope Slides of Simple Objects.

No. 9 How to Make Skeletons.

No. 10 The School Terrarium.

No. 11 Insect-eating Plants.

No. 12 EHeology in the Laboratory.

No. 13 Rearing the Silk Worm Moth.

No. 14 A Selected List of Books for the Biology Library.

No. 15 The Culture of Drosophila Flies and Their Use.

No. 16 The Culture of Planaria and Its Use in Regeneration Experiments.

No. 17. Modeling in the Laboratory.

No. 18. Bird Study as a Field Work Subject for High School Biology Students.

No. 19 Special Projects for Biology Students.

No. 20 Notes on Marine Aquaria.

No. 21 The Embalming and Injection of the Cat and the Laboratory Care of Embalmed
Specimens.

No. 22 How to Make Laboratory Drawings.

No. 23 Feeding Terrarium Animals.

No. 24 Preparing and Caring for a Herbarium Collection.

No. 25 The Study of Living Frog Eggs in the Laboratory.

No. 26 Making Biology Charts.

No. 27 Turtox Plant and Animal Identification.

No. 28 Field Collecting Hints — Botany.

No. 29 Field Collecting Hints — Zoology.

No. 30 Common Parasites.

No. 31 Insect Galls.

No. 32 Culturing the Common Moulds.

No. 33 Aquatic Insects.

No. 34 How to Obtain Living Material in the Laboratory to Demonstrate Different Types
of Insect Life Cyeles.

No. 35 Studying Ants in an Observation Nest.

Revised editions of Leaflets No. 1 to No. 21 are now ready. Numbers 22 to 35 will be
ready for mailing September 1, 1930.

General Biological Supply House

( Incorporated )

761-763 East Sixty-ninth Place
Chicago, Illinois

Write today for your set of the Turtox Biology Catalogs

10 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vot. V, No. 31,

BIOLOGY CLASSROOM Alles

Charts, Models, Specimens, Slides
and Museum Preparations

Our Stock includes 25 series of
Biology Charts, our own and the
best productions of European Chart

Publishers.

Be sure to acquaint yourself
with our line and services before
selecting next year’s specimens or
lecture room helps.

Write for our Biology Catalog No. OB.

DENOYER-GEPPERT COMPANY

Makers and Importers of Biology Charts
and Models, Specimens, Slides and
Museum Preparations

5235-5257 RAVENSWOOD AVENUE __ CHICAGO, ILL.

JuNeE 28, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 11

Available for Research---

Pure Proteins and Vitamin Products

MILK PROTEINS

The preparation of materials, of highest purity, for research studies, is
so costly and involves such a loss of intellectual skill, this service is best ren-
dered by American industrial laboratories, who specialize in such work.

Through years of experience in the laboratories of Osborne & Mendel
(Conn. Expt. Station), we now produce the two chief proteins of milk, in state
of very high purity.

Casein and Lactalbumin are prepared from fresh skim milk, which is the
only way to obtain either one of these proteins, as pure substances.

“Casein-Harris” shows the following average analysis:

NUTOUEREUTRO 2 -znasssenernenredoneccseencscéssnnenan I MOSS CORI ON) Se (RBID) cos asonccocasatoonssene36 87.09
ANEID, 55 Ga. gasp sae SORE aE eee if) SOW aPC ON MONE, 5 scon gntacssonecaoneesooe su -20
Calcium trace Nitrogen, water, fat, ash-

INGB OPENS Oe, -deiobdhende Reena RanAR eoeteete ReSE USYGG” eer. ce coe ree meee sec 15.44

(cf.—Osborne & Harris, Jr. Am. Chem. Soc., 25-IV, 346)

“Lactalbumin-Harris” shows highest nitrogen content, very low ash and
the average analysis of the purest specimens of this protein.
Both of these proteins are free from all vitamines.

YEAST AND ITS VITAMINES

We claim to prepare the purest specimens of washed and dried yeast cells,
available anywhere, for researches of precision.

Brewers’ Yeast-Harris (pasteurized powder), is prepared from a pure cul-
ture of fermentative yeast. The yeast cells are thoroughly washed with pure
water, to remove extraneous, soluble matter from its culture medium. The
cells are quickly dried at temperature, just high enough to pasteurize the cells
and to stop fermentation properties.

It is offered for chemical, nutrition and clinical purposes, where a pure
yeast, with a known content of vitamine-B (F. & G) is desired.

CONCENTRATES OF VITAMINE-B (F & G)

Concentrated preparations from this yeast, containing Vitamine-B com-
plex (F. & G), are also available for investigations. They contain more
vitamine in proportion to total nitrogen content, than the whole yeast, and
often serve such purposes in feeding experiments.

We also offer vitamines F. & G—‘‘adsorbed” on Fuller’s earth—free from
many extraneous substances of the whole yeast, as a “starting material” for
further researches on vitamine-B complex.

“Autoclaved Yeast” is also offered, containing the anti-pellagric G vita-
mine (heat-stable) and free from anti-neuritic Vitamine-F, which is heat-
labile. This product is standardized by the white rat method and growth
charts are available with it.

THE HARRIS LABORATORIES
Tuckahoe 5% New York

12 THE COLLECTING NET SU ee ee V, No. 31,

LIDBERG ELECTRIC
PARAFFINE EMBEDDING OVENS

PARAFFINE EMBEDDING OVENS, Lidberg Electric. A new model, made of laminated quartered
oak, transite and felt insulation, with tinned copper lining throughout the embedding chamber, The
heating unit consists of a unique woven wire mesh between the transite walls.

Temperature is controlled by an expanding capsule thermo-regulator with a temperature range
from 50°C to 60°C and a sensitivity of 0.5°C, Ovens are sent out with the capsule adjusted for 56°C,
the attainment of which temperature requires approximately one hour from room temperature.

The thermo-regulator is situated between the walls, separated from the embedding chamber, and
readily accessible from the outside by means of removable panel in which is inserted the signal lamp.
This thermo-regulator operates equally well on either alternating or direct current. The contact points
are entirely without the interior chamber so that the danger of igniting vapors from melting paraffine
is entirely obviated. Each oven is provided with a drain hole in center of bottom.

The operating sensitivity, i. e. the maximum variation of temperature at location of thermometer
bulb, when working within the usual range, is plus or minus 0.59C. The operating uniformity, i. e.
the maximum variation of temperature throughout working shelf space in relation to the temperature
indicated by the thermometer in the interior compartment, is plus or minus 2.0°C.

1784. Paraffine Embedding Oven, Lidberg Electric, inside dimensions 12 inches wide x 10 inches
deep x 10 inches high. With two shelves, thermometer and complete operating direc-

tions. On 1l-inch wooden feet for use on table. For 119 volts ..................--0... $90.00

Code: Word <2 oti some haeerots tle chakras satan oimbete oie lets er eta eprint nce heresies te mee rate neces Anode
1785. Ditto, but with inside dimensions 15%4 inches wide x 1544 inches deep x 18 inches high

and with six shelves. For 110 volts..............:sssssseew a AUIS UREA ort erolor Gives $210.00

Cont Tn (+) PRB aT ARO Unin soaker ciocered ap oduamde Sacro Sobdoo shed 1 on yodce dado ds aon Sucannena.c Anofa

Sole Distributors

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

June 28, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

13

DIRECTORY FOR 1930

Abbreviations
MPTICMMESTERE OEE ore y.2h no cih wo aloe ok arccce eine es eas Bot.
MME SIRE NORIO eS, oo wes cle crale le we Da ake wien de eigen vie Br.
Lecture Hall co. Bighe SAY occhc RI OPRET ELAS ERNE ae cna L
1) 18 Ra 24 1G 6 O. M.
Mememereilor alding os)... 6... eee cee de ee Rock,
Chemical Room ..... Pr eee ei ceRGiase dot Chem

in “American Men of Science.”

THE STAFF

Allen, C. E., prof. bot. Wisconsin.
Amberson, W. R., asst. prof. phys. Pennsylvania.
Bard, P., asst. prof. phys. Princeton.
Bissonnette, T. H., prof. biol. Trinity.

Bold, H. C., instr. bot. Vermont.

Bowling, Rachel, instr. zool. Columbia.
Bradley H. C., prof. phys. chem. Wisconsin.
Brooks, S. C., prof. zool. California.

Calkins, G. N., prof. protozool. Columbia.
Cohn, E. J., assoc. prof. physical chem. Harvard.
Cole, E. C., assoc. prof. biol. Williams,
‘Conklin, E. G., prof. zool. Princeton.
‘Coonfield, B. C., instr phys. Harvard
Croasdale, Hannah T., collector.

Davis, H., asst. prof. phys. Harvard.
Dawson, J. A., asst. prof. zool. Col. City of N. Y.
Duggar, B. M., prof. bot. Wisconsin.

Fry, H. J., assoc. prof. biol. New York.
Garrey, W. E., prof. phys. Vanderbilt Med.
Gerard, R. W., assdc. prof. phys. Chicago.
Goodrich, H. B., prof. biol. Wesleyan.

Grave, B. H., prof. biol. De Pauw.

Grave, C., prof. zool. Washington.

Hansen, I. P., instr. phys. Wesleyan.

Harvey, E. N., prof. phys. Princeton.
Haywood, Charlotte, asst. prof. phys. Vassar.
Hecht, S., prof. biophysics. Columbia.
Jacobs, M. H., prof. gen. phys. Pennsylvania.
Jennings, H. S., prof. zool. Hopkins.

Lewis, I. F., prof. biol. Virginia.

Lillie, F. R., prof. emb. Chicago.

Lillie, R. S., prof. gen. phys. Chicago.

Lucké B., assoc. prof. path. Pennsylvania.
Mast, S. O., prof. zool. Hopkins.

Mathews, A. P., prof. biochem. Cincinnati.
McClung, C. E., prof. zool. Pennsylvania,
Michaelis, L., mem. Rockefeller Inst.
Morgan, T. H., dir. biol. lab. Cal. Inst. Tech.
Nelsen, O .E., instr. zool. Pennsylvania.
Packard, C., asst. prof. Inst. Cancer Res. Columbia,
Parker, G. H., prof. zool. Harvard.

Plough, H. H., prof. biol. Amherst.

Pollister, A. E., instr. zool. Columbia.

Poole, J. P., prof. evolution. Dartmouth.
Robbins, W. J., prof. bot. Missouri.

Rogers, C. G., prof. comp. phys. Oberlin.
Rugh, R., instr. zool. Hunter.

Sayles, L. B., asst. prof. phys. Tufts.
Severinghaus, A. E., assoc. anat. Columbia.
Taylor, W. R., prof. bot. Pennsylvania.
Twitty, V. C., instr. zool. Yale.

Wilson, E. B., prof. zool. Columbia.
Woodruff, L. L., prof. protozool. Yale,

INVESTIGATORS E

Amberson, W. R., asst. prof. phys., Pennsylvania Br.309,

Armstrong, P. B,, instr. anat., Cornell Med. Br. 318.

Astrom, I. Elizabeth, asst. bot.. Toronto. Bot. 5.

Bailey, Sarah W., grad. emb., Radcliffe. Br. 217e.

Baker, H. B., assoc. prof. zool., Pennsylvania. Br. 219.

Ball, E. G., Nat. Res. fel. med., Hopkins Med.

Bard, P., asst. prof. phys., Princeton. Br. 109.

Barron, E. S. G., instr. med., Hopkins, Br. 122A.

Barth, L. G., Nat. Res. fel. phys., Chicago, Br. 111.

Beams, H. W., fel. histol., Virginia. O. M. Base.

Belkin, M., instr. biol., New York. Br. 9.

Blumenthal, R., fel. zool., Pennsylvania. Br, 217m.

Bold, H. C., instr. bot., Vermont. Bot. 26.

Bowling, Rachel, instr. zool., Columbia. O. M. 21.

Breitenbecher, J. K., lect. zool., McGill. L. 25.

Bridges, C. B., res. asst. genetics, California Inst. Tech.
Br. 324.

Bronfenbrenner, J., prof. bact., Washington Med. Br. 2,

Bronk, D. W., prof. biophysics, Pennsylvania. Br. 231.

Brooks, Mati'’da M., res. assoc. biol., California, Br. 223,

Brooks, S. C., prof. zool., California. Br. 223.

Buck, Louise H., res. asst. zool., New York. Br. 1.

Burdick, D. L., instr. biol., Union. Br. 217).

Bytinski-Salz, H., res. fel. zool., Yale. Br. 315.

Caldwell, Lucile, grad. zool., Hopkins. Br. 217e.

Calkins, G. N., prof. protozool., Columbia. Br. 331.

Carothers, E. Eleanor, lect. zool., Pennsylvania. Br. 221.

Carroll, P. L., instr. biol., St. Louis. O. M. 38.

Cattell, W., asst. biophysicist, Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.)
Br. 332.

Chatton, E., prof. biol., Strasbourg (France). Br, 213.

Chidester, F. E., prof. zool., West Virginia. Br. 344.

Christie, J. R., assoc. nematologist, U. S. Dept. Agr.
Rock. 3.

Chouke, K. S., asst. prof. anat., Colorado. Br. 122C,

Clowes, G. H. A., dir, Lilly res. labs. Br. 328.

Cobb, N. A., principal nematologist U. 8S. Dept. Agr.
Rock. 3.

Coe, W. R., prof. biol., Yale. Br. 323.

Coffey, Julia M., asst. bact., N. Y. State Dept. Health.
Br. 122B.

Coldwater, K. B., instr. zool., Missouri. Br. 336,

Cole, K. S., assoe. prof. phys., Columbia, Br. 305,

Coonfield, B. R., prof. biol., Southwestern. O. M.

Cooper, G. O., instr. bot., Wisconsin. Bot. Table 6,

Copeland, M., prof. biol., Bowdoin. Br, 334,

Croasdale, Hannah T., grad. bot. Bot. 22.

Curtis, W. C., prof. zool., Missouri. Br. 336.

Davis, H., asst. prof. phys., Harvard Med. Br. 199.

Dawson, A. B., assoc. prof, zool., Harvard. O. M, 4.

Dearing, W. H., grad. zool., Pennsylvania, Rock, 6.

Deitrick, J. E., stud., Hopkins Med. Chem.

Dixon, Evelyn C., grad. bact., Washington. Br. 2.

Dolley, W. L., Jr., prof. biol., Buffalo. Br. 339,

DuBois, D., grad. phys., New York. Br, 9.

DuBois, E. F., assoc. prof. med., Cornell Med. Br. 301.

Dubuisson, M., prof. zool., Ghent (Belgium). Br. 114.

Duggar, B. M., prof. plant phys., applied bot., Wiscon-
sin. Br. 329.

Du Shane, G., grad. zool., Wabash. Br, 234.

Edwards, D. J., assoc. prof. phys., Cornell Med. Br. 214.

Failla, G., physicist, Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.) Br. 306.

Fankhauser, G., Rockefeller Found. res. fel. zool.,
Chieago. Br. 315.

14 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V, Nowa

Finley, H. E., instr. zool., West Virginia State. L. 30.

Frew, Priscilla E., instr. zool., Hunter. O. M. 44.

Friedheim, E. H., Rockefeller Inst., Br. 206.

Friedman, Hilda, asst. path., Washington Med. Br. 122C

Fry, H. J., assoc. prof. biol., New York. O. M. Base.

Furth, J., assoc. path., Pennsylvania. L. 26.

Gardiner, Mary S., assoc. biol., Bryn Mawr. Br. 330.

Garrey W. E., prof. phys., Vanderbilt Med. Br, 215.

Geib, Dorothy A., stud., Hopkins Med. Chem.

Geiman, Q. M., grad. zool., Pennsylvania, Rock. 6.

Gelfan, S., res. fel. phys., Chicago. Br. 328.

Genther, Ida T., asst. zool., Washington. Br. 311.

Gerard, R. W., assoc. prof. phys., Chicago. Br, 309.

Goldforb, A. J., prof. zool., Col. City of N. Y. Br, 321.

Goodrich, H. B., prof. biol., Wesleyan. Br. 210.

Graubard, M. A., asst. zool., Columbia. Br, 314.

Grave, B. H., prof. zool., DePauw. Br. 234.

Grundfest, H., Nat. Res. fel. phys., Columbia. Br. 340.

Harryman, Ilene, res. asst., Lilly res. labs. Br. 319.

Harvey, Ethel B., asst. biol., New York. Br. 116.

Haywood, Charlotte, asst. prof. phys., Vassar. O. M 3.

Heilbrunn, L. V., assoc. prof. zool., Pennsylvania. Br.
222.

Henshaw, P. S., biophysicist, Memorial Hosp. (N. Y.) Br,
332.

Heusner, A. P., stud., Swarthmore. O. M. 40.

Hibbard, Hope, asst. prof. zool., Oberlin. Br, 218,

Hinrichs, Marie A., res. assoc. phys., Chicago. Br. 311.

Hintze, A. Laura, asst. prof. phys., Goucher. O. M. Base,

Hirsch, G. C., prof. zool., Utrecht (Holland) Br. 312,

Hook, Sabra J., asst. zool., Barnard. Br. 314,

Hoppe, Ella N., res. asst. biol., N. Y. State Dept. Health.
Br. 122B.

Howe, H. E., editor Ind. and Eng. Chem. Br. 203.

Howland, Ruth B., assoc. prof. biol., New York. Br. 1.

Huettner, A. F., assoc. prof. bicl., New York. Br. 1.

Hughes, T. P., assoc. bact., Rockefeller Inst. L. 31.

Hunter, Lillian M., grad. bot., Toronto. Bot. 5.

Hyman, Libbie H., res. assoc. zool., Chicago. Br. 122D.

Iglauer, C. A., grad. zool., Pennsylvania. Rock. 6.

Imlah, Helen W, grad. emb., Radcliffe. Br. 217f.

Jacobs, M. H., prof. gen. phys., Pennsylvania. Br. 102.

Jeffery, Helen, grad. bact., Washington Med. Br. 2.

Jennings, H. S., prof. zool., Hopkins. Br. 127.

Johlin, J. M., assoc. prof. biochem., Vanderbilt Med.
Br. 342.

Just, E. E., prof. zool., Howard. Br. 228.

Keil, Elsa M., instr. zool., N. J. Col. Women. Chem,

Keltch, Anna K., res. asst., Lilly res. labs. Br. 319.

Kettelkamp, B. H., instr. zool., Pittsburgh Rock. 7.

Keys, A. B., Nat. Res. fel. biol.

Keyes, D. B., prof. ind. chem., Illinois. Br, 313.

Kinney, Elizabeth T., asst. zool., Barnard. O. M. Base.

Kinsbergen, M., grad. asst. biol., New York. O. M. Base.

Knower, H. McE., res. worker, Wistar Inst. Br. 234.

Knowlton, F. P., prof. phys., Syracuse Med. Br. 226.

Koehring, Vera, prof. zoology, Beaver (Pa.) Br, 217a.

Kunitz, M., assoc. mem., Rockefeller Inst. Br. 209.

Lackey, J. B., prof. biol., Southwestern (Tenn.) Br. 110.

Lancefield, D. E., assoc. prof. zool., Columbia. Br. 333.

Lancefield, Rebecca C., asst. bact., Rockefeller Hosp.
(N. Y.) Br. 208.

Lee, Katy, grad. asst. zool., Missouri. Br. 335.

Liljestrand, S. H., prof. pharmacol., applied phys., West
China Union. L. 29,

Lillie, F. R., prof. zool., Chicago. Br. 191.

Lillie, R. S., prof. gen. phys., Chicago. Br. 326,

ner B., assoc. prof. path., Pennsylvania Med. Br,

0.

Lynch, Ruth §., instr. zool., Hopkins. Br. 127.

McClung, C. E., prof. zool., Pennsylvania.

MacDougall, Mary S., prof. biol., Agnes Seott. Br. 217i,

McGoun, R. C., Jr., instr. biol., Amherst. Br. 204.

MacMurray, Mary T., grad. bot., Barnard. Bot. Table 4.

Manwell, R. D., instr. zool., Hopkins. L. 24.

Marsland, D. A., asst. prof. biol., New York. Br. 9.

Mathews, A. P., prof. biochem., Cincinnati. Br, 341.

Mavor, J. W., prof. biol., Union. Br, 304.

Menkin V., Nat. Res. fel. med., Pennsylvania, O.M, 34.

Meyer, R. K., res. asst. zool., Wisconsin. L. 34.

Michaelis, L., mem. Rockefeller Inst. Br. 206.

Miller, Evelyn H., grad. phys., Pennsylvania. Br, 110.

Miller, L. W., grad. asst. zool., Pittsburgh. Rock 7.

Mitchell, P. H., prof. phys., Brown. Br. 233.

Monnier, A. M., asst. phys., Sorbonne (France). Br. 225,

Morgan, T. H., prof. biol., California Inst. Tech. Br.
320.

Morgan, Lillian V., Pasadena, Calif. Br. 320.

Morgulis, S., prof. biochem., Nebraska Med. Br, 122A,

Morril, C. V., assoc. prof. anat. Cornell Med. L, 27.

Morris, Helen S., grad. bot., Columbia. Bot.

Morris, S., instr. zool., Pennsylvania. Rock. 6.

Mulder, A. G., assoc. prof. phys., Tennessee. Br. 110.

Nabrit, S. M., prof. biol., Morehouse (Ga.) L, 33.

Nelsen, O. E., instr. zool., Pennsylvania. O. M. 27.

Nelson, Phyllis M., grad. zool., Washington. Br. 2.

Nonidez, J. F., asst. prof. anat., Cornell Med. Br, 318.

Packard, C., asst. prof. zool., Columbia. O. M. 2.

Park, O., assoc. prof. biol., Kent State (Ohio). L, 22.

Parmenter, C. C., assoc. prof. zool., Pennsylvania. Br.
220.

Parpart, A. K., instr. phys., Pennsylvania. Br. 205.

Parpart, Ethel, Pennsylvania. Chem.

Payne, F., prof. zool., Indiana. Br. 115.

Phillips, P. L., instr. anat., Cornell Med. Br. 317.

Philpott, C. H., lect. med. zool., Washington Med. Br. 3.

Plough, H. H., prof. biol., Amherst. Br. 204.

Pollister, A. W., instr. zool., Columbia. O. M. 44.

Poole, J. P., prof. evol., Dartmouth. Bot.

Pond, S. E., asst. prof. phys., Pennsylvania Med. Br.
216.

Raffel, D., Nat. Res. fel. zool., Hopkins. Br. 125,

Rankin, D., grad. bot., Hopkins. Bot. Table 2.

Reese, A. M., prof. zool., West Virginia. Br. 344,

Reynolds, Sarah J., res. asst. biol., New York. O. M. Base

Richards, O. W., asst. prof. biol., Clark. Chem.

Robert, Nan L., instr. zool., Hunter. Br. 217h,

Roberts, Edith A., prof. bot., Vassar. Bot. 4.

Rogers, C. G., prof. comp. phys., Oberlin. Br, 218,

Root, W. S., asst. prof. phys., Syracuse Med. Br. 309.

Rugh, R., instr. zool., Hunter. O. M. 22.

Salomon, K., Rockefeller Found. fel. phys. Br. 207.

Sanders, Rosaltha, grad. zool., Yale. Br. 323.

Savin, Marion B., grad. zool., Pennsylvania. Br, 217.

Sayles, L. P., instr. zool., Tufts. O. M.

Schechter, V., asst. biol., Col. City of N. Y. Br. 321.

Schmidt, L. H., grad. biochem., Cincinnati. Br, 341,

Schmitt, F. O., asst. prof. zool., Washington. Br, 106.

Schrader, F., assoc. prof. zool., Bryn Mawr. Br, 343.

Schrader, Sally H., instr. biol., Bryn Mawr. Br. 348.

Schubert, M., res. asst. biochem., Rockefeller Inst. Br.
207.

Schultz, J., res.
Br. 340.

Schweitzer, M. D., asst. zool., Columbia. Br. 314.

Scott, Allan C., grad. asst. zool., Pittsburgh. O. M. 43.

Scott, Florence M., asst. prof. biol., Seton Hill (Penn.)
Br. 217d.

Severinghaus, A. E., assoc. anat., Columbia Med. O. M.
31,

Shapiro, H., asst. zool., Columbia. Br, 314.

Sharma, B. M., prof. anat., Tibi Med. (India). Br. 312.

Shattuck, G. E., asst. phys., Pennsylvania Med .Br. 205.

Shaw, C. Ruth, asst. zool., Pittsburgh. Rock. 7.

asst. genetics, California Inst. Tech.

June 28, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 15

Shlaer, S., res. asst. biophysics, Columbia. O. M. Base.

Shoup, C. S., asst. prof. biol., Vanderbilt. Br, 111.

Sichel, F. J., asst. biol., New York. Br. 9.

Slifer, Eleanor H., grad. zool., Pennsylvania. Br. 217b.

Smith, Doreen, grad. asst., household sci. Toronto, Br.
332.

Smith, F., res. asst., Rockefeller Inst. Br. 111.

Smith, G. H., asst. prof. bot., Missouri. Br. 217e.

Smith, Suzanne G., grad. asst. zool., Missouri, Br. 335.

Stabler, R. M., asst. instr. zool., Pennsylvania. Rock.

Stockard, C. R., prof. anat., Cornell Med. Br, 317.

Street, Sibyl F., asst. zool., Vassar. Chem.

Strong, O. S., prof. neur. and neurohist., Columbia Med.
Chem.

Stuck, Florence, grad. zool., Columbia. Br. 314.

Stunkard, H. W., prof. biol., New York. Br. 232.

Sturdivant, H. P., instr. zool., Columbia. Br. 314,

Sturtevant, A. H., prof. genetics., California Inst. Tech.

Br. 333.
Swann, S., Jr., instr, phys., Yale Med. Br. 313.
Taft, C. A., Jr., instr. phys., Yale Med. L. 32.
Tang, P.S., grad. phys., Harvard. O. M.
Tashiro, S., prof. biochem., Cincinnati. Br. 341.
Taylor, W. R., prof. bot., Pennsylvania. Bot. 24,
Twitty, V. C., instr. zool., Yale. O. M. 33.
TeWinkel, Lois E., asst. zool., Barnard. Br. 314.
Thompson, J. W., instr. zool., Swarthmore. O. M. 40.
Toothill, Martha C., asst. biol., Brown. O. M. 39.
Tower, Sarah §., instr. anat., Hopkins. Br. 327,
Tuan, H., grad. bot., Pennsylvania. Bot. 2.
Turner, C. D., res. asst. zool., Missouri. Br, 336.
Van Cleave, C. D., instr. anat., Pennsylvania. Br. 117.
Van Slyke, instr. zool., Pittsburgh. Rock. 7.

Wallace, Edith M., asst. genetics, California Inst, Tech.

Br. 321.
Wang, C. C., grad., Chicago. Br. 119.
Warren, H. C., prof. psychol., Princeton. Br. 303,
Wells, Evelyn, instr. biol., St. Mary’s Seminary (Md.)
Bot. Table 5.
Wenrich, D. H., prof. zool., Pennsylvania. Br. 220.

Wesson, L. G., asst. prof. pharmacol., Vanderbilt Med.

Br. 342.
Wilson, E. B., prof. zool., Columbia. Br. 322,
Wilson, F. E., grad. chem., Clark. Chem.
Wilson, May G., assoc. pediatrics, Cornell Med. L, 21.
Woodruff, L. L., prof. zool., Yale. Br. 323,
Woods, F. H., asst. prof. zool., Missouri. Br, 335,
Wolf, E. A., asst. prof. zool., Pittsburgh. O. M. 43.
Wright, C. I., fel. phys., Rochester. O. M. Base.
Yancey P. H., grad. zool., St. Louis. O. M. 38,
Young, W. C., instr. biol., Brown. O. M. 39.
Zeleny, C., prof. zool., Illinois. Br. 115.

STUDENTS

Appelrot, S., Rockefeller Found. fel. phys. Beirut.
Baker, E. G. S., stud. asst. zool. Depauw. emb,
Ballard, O. T., grad. asst. zool. Ilinois. emb.
Bamber, L. E., grad. asst. zool. Illinois. emb.
Behner, Dorothy M., grad. asst. phys. New York. phys.
Breed, Helen L., Wellesley. bot.
Brehme, Katherine S., grad. Barnard. protozool.
Brunel, J., asst. prof. bot. Montreal. bot.
Carter, G. H., Amherst. emb.
Carter, Helen D., grad. Elmira. protozool.
Chang, J. H., grad. Chicago. phys.
emeevers C. A., Boston Society of Natural History

emb.
Chen, T., asst. biochem. Peking Union Med. phys.
Costello, D. P., asst. zool. Col. City of Detroit. protozool.
Dann, Margaret, grad. asst. phys. Cornell Med, phys.
Dawson, Helen L., grad. Washington. emb.

Derbyshire, A. J., Jr., grad. Harvard. emb.

Doyle, W. L., Hopkins. invert. zool.

Drew, W. B., grad. Massachusetts Agr. phys.

Drouet, F., grad. asst. bot. Missouri. bot.

DuBois, D., grad. phys. New York. phys.

Earl, Ruth R., tech. Col. City of N. Y. emb,

Eaton, T. H., Jr., grad. Cornell. emb.

Embich, J. R., grad. Columbia. protozool.

Feng, J., grad. Chicago. phys.

Flamman, M. Muriel, grad, Seton Hill (Pa.) protozool.

Frye, Mary E., grad. Pa. Col. for Women. protozool.

Gardner, Edith M., grad. asst. phys. Vassar. phys.

Gates, F. L., res. fel. phys. Harvard. phys.

Glidden, Dorothy P., Smith. bot.

Green, D. E., grad. asst. biol. New York. emb.

Guerlac, H. E., Cornell, emb.

Hegnauer, A. H., fel. phys. Rochester. Med. phys.

Hileman, Clara M., Pennsylvania State Col. for Women,

emb.,

Hjortland, A. L., grad. asst. zool, Illinois. emb,

Hopkins, M., grad. Amherst. bot.

Hunninen, A. V., Wesleyan. emb.

Huntington, Evelyn, Vassar. bot.

Johnson, Arlene C., Wheaton. emb.

Johnson, Myra L., Smith, emb.

Klose, Theodora G., instr. bot. Vassar. bot.

Lane, Mary, grad. Smith. emb.

Leitch, J. L., grad. California. phys.

Lherisson, C., prof. biol. National Med. Sch, (Haiti)
protozool,

Loefer, J. B., grad. asst. biol. New York. emb.

Loughridge, G. A., asst. bot. Rutgers. bot.

Mackmull, G., demon. histol. and emb. Jefferson Med.
Baugh Institute of Anatomy, emb.

Masten, Lois E., grad., Elmira. protozool.

Maxwell, Florence J., instr. zool. Carnegie Inst. Tech.
emb.

McKee. J. C., grad. Wisconsin bot.

Monaghan, Betty R., asst. phys. Washington. phys.

Morgan, Willie A., grad. asst. biol. Coker (S. C.) pro-
tozool.

Nichols, Rowena, grad. Wellesley. emb.

Oliphant, J. F., instr. biol. Union. phys.

Oppenheimer, Jane M., Bryn Mawr. bot.

Oster, R. H., grad. Williams. phys.

Patch, Esther M., teacher biol. East Boston High. emb.

Pitts, R. F., grad. Hopkins. phys.

Reid, Marion A., instr. phys. Boston Med. emb.

Riley, Lena C., Wellesley. emb.

Roland, A. E., Acadia (Nova Scotia). bot.

Rosenbaum, Louise, Pennsylvania. emb.

Safford, D. W., grad. Dartmouth. bot.

Schoelt, A., grad. Columbia, protozool.

Scotland, Minnie B., instr. zool. N. Y. State. protozool.

Scott, J. P., Wyoming. emb.

Shaw, Gretchen, grad. Chicago. phys.

Smith, Claire M., grad. Hunter. protozool.

Stanley. W. F., grad. asst. zool. Illinois. emb.

Steinberg, B., dir. labs. and res. Toledo Hosp. protozool,.

Steiner, M. M., grad. asst. biol. New York. phys.

Stevens, Thelma O, grad. asst. phys. Mt. Holyoke. phys,

Stewart, P. A., Rochester. bot.

Tang, P., grad. Harvard. phys.

Vack, Christine M., tech. phys. Harvard Med. phys.

Vicari, Emelie M., res. assoc. phys. Cornell Med. phys.

Weisman, M. N., fel. zool. Col. City of N. Y. protozool.

Wells, L. J., grad. Chicago. emb.

Wilde, Mary H., asst. bot. N. J. Col. for Women, bot.

Woodward, Alvalyn E., asst. prof. Michigan. phys,

Wormley, J. W., Howard. emb.

16 THE COLLECTING NET

ADMINISTRATION

Billings, Edith, secretary

Chamberlain, Thelma, secretary

Crowell, Polly L., asst. to the business manager
Dillinger, Bessie R., secretary

Finch, Kathleen, secretary

MacNaught, F. M., business manager

LIBRARY

Bradbury, Hester A., assistant
Briggs, Lillian F., assistant
Lawrence, Deborah, secretary
Montgomery, Priscilla B., librarian
Rohan, Mary A., assistant

CHEMICAL ROOM

Deitrick, J. E., grad. Hopkins Med.

Frew, Pauline M., stud. Bates.

Geib, Dorothy A., grad. Hopkins Med.

Haas, Dorothea, grad. chem. Illinois.

Johlin, Sally, Peabody Demonstration School.

Keil, Elsa M., instr. N. J. Col. for Women.

Lundstrom, Helen M., grad. phys. Pennsylvania.

Parpart, Ethel R., tech. path. Pennsylvania Med.

Richards, Oscar W., asst. prof. biol. Clark.

Street, Sibyl F., asst. zool. Vassar.

Strong, O. S., director, prof. neur. and neurohist. Co-
lumbia.

Wilson, F. E., grad. chem. Clark.

APPARATUS ROOM

Apgar, A. R., photographer

Boss, L. F., mechanician

Graham, J. D., glass-blowing service

Liljestrand, P. H., Ohio Wesleyan. assistant

Pond, S. E., asst. prof. phys. Pennsylvania. custodian

SUPPLY DEPARTMENT

Bulmer, Gladys, bot. collector

Caldwell, J. A., collector

Clarkson, J., deckhand

Croly, J. T., Dartmouth. collector

Crowell, Ruth S., secretary

Erlanger, H., Wisconsin. collector

Gamble, D. L., General Biological Supply House
Gray, G. M., curator

Gray, M., collector

Greenough, H. V., Jr., collector

Hilton, A. M., collector

Jeffers, W., Missouri. collector

Kahler, W., collector

Kingsbury, R., collector and chauffeur
Leathers, A. W., head of shipping department
Lehy, J., collector and chauffeur

Lewis, E. M., engineer

Lillie, W., collector

McInnis, J., collector

Nielsen, Anna M., secretary

Smith, C. B., collector
Spaeth, W., deckhand
Thornly, W. F., Dartmouth. collector
Veeder, J. J., captain of Cayadetta
Wamsley, S. W., supervisor of schools, Charleston.
special preparator
Wilsey, J. D., collector
BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS
Googins, H. C., janitor
Hemenway, W., carpenter
Larkin, T., superintendent
Look, G. C., janitor
Rock, J. F., watchman
Russell, M. R., night watchman
Russell, R. L., gardener
Tawell, T. E., storekeeper and head janitor

MECHANICAL DEPARTMENT

Coates, K., night mechanic
Kahler, R., assistant
Larkin, T., superintendent
Steele, N., fireman

Story, R., assistant

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL

Barnum, Susie G., assistant

Conger, Edith E., sec. diy. biol. and agr.
Curtis, W. C., chairman div. biol. and agr,
Thorne, Louise C., sec. to Dr. Curtis

BUREAU OF FISHERIES

Bailey, E. W., jr. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F.

Bateman, C. B., tech. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Buhrer, Edna M., jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Chesley, L., fel. zool. Duke.

Clarke, G. L., grad. Harvard.

Cobb, N. A., nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Conger, Paul S., diatomist, U. S. National Museum. ....

Cooper, Corinne R., jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Crossman, M. Louise, jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Danforth, Josephine, jr. scientific aid. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Doyle, W. L., stud. Hopkins.

Foster, K. W., grad. Harvard.

Goffin, C. E., stud. Pembroke.

Goffin, R. A., collector. U. S. B. F.

Gray, I. E., asst. prof. zool. Duke.

Hall, F. G., prof. biol. Duke.

Hemmeter, J. C., physician. Baltimore.

Linton, Edwin, res. fel. Pennsylvania.

Merriman, D., stud. zool. Harvard.

Nesbit, R. A., asst. aquatic biol. U. S. B. F.

Neville, W. C., asst. U. S. B. F.

Root, R., fel. biol. Duke.

Sette, O. E., aquatic biol. U. S. B. F. director, Woods
Hole Station.

Swanger, Helen H, jr. nematologist. U. S. Dept. Agr.

Taylor, W., asst. biol. Princeton,

[ Vor. V, No. 31,

a

Ee

——

June 28, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET

It is Not the Cover that Makes a

WHEN

Spencer Precision
Rotary Microtome

NO. 820

was designed, now nearly 20 years ago
and the attainment of a degree of ac-
curacy and precision heretofore unap-
proached, we thought that such precise
craftsmanship should be protected by a
cover, and we originated that type of
protection.

We fully appreciated then as now that to take an ordinary type of microtome of less
precision and simply cover it would add very little. With such an instrument of preci-
sion as the Spencer Rotary Microtome No. 820, it does mean much.

OVER 1800 UNIVERSITIES, COLLEGES AND RESEARCH
LABORATORIES HAVE PURCHASED THIS MICROTOME

It Has Become Worldwide in Distribution

There is scarcely an important educational hospital or research laboratory in America
that is not equipped with one or more of these microtomes. Some universities have in use
as many as 6, 8, 10 and 12 of them. There is scarcely a country in the world to which
we have not shipped and to many of them in quantities. It has thus become not alone
INTERNATIONAL but WORLDWIDE in its use.

BECAUSE :

It is built with an incline-plane feed, an advantage possessed by no other rotary
microtome.

It completely overcomes the inaccuracies usually encountered in rotary micro-
tomes, due to the up-and-down movement of the object.

In this microtome the feed and the up-and-down movement are entirely inde-
pendent.

Its advanageous features manifest themselves in its perfection of accuracy.

It is Made for Better Section Cutting

Spencer Precision Rotary Microtome No. 820 equipped with one knife, handle
and back for sharpening and with three object discs.............00.:cc. $240.00

CATALOG T-& DESCRIBES IT.

SPENCER LENS COMPANY

MANUFACTURERS
Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring
Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Etc.

BUFFALO, N. Y.

Microtome.

SPENCER SPENCER
BUFFALG BUFFAL
Say Say)

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

THE COLLECTING NET

Complete . . .°. Practical
5 o Whine 5s

An

Elementary Course in

GENERAL
Pr olOLOGy

Part I. Principles and Theory

By G. W. SCARTH
Professor of Botany, McGill University

Part II. Laboratory Exercises

By F. E. LLOYD

Macdonald Professor of Botany, MeGill
University

G, W. SCARTH
This book answers the need for an elementary
text in General Physiology that will meet the
requirements of the study of plant physiology
as well as biology and medicine. It is the
only students’ textbook that presents in ele-
mentary form an analysis of the general
properties and behavior of cells in terms of
physical and colloid chemistry.

Special Features.
The first part of the book serves as a
guide to the practical laboratory work
in the second.

2. The authors have laid special emphasis
on the fundamentals by giving first a
thorough discussion of the most useful
physical facts and principles, and then
indicating their many possible applica-
tions to the life of the cell.

3. The method of presentation is provoca-
tive; it stimulates original thought and
encourages outside reading and investi-
gation,

4, The historical has been linked up with
the present day by presenting both
classical and modern experiments.

or

Instruction is based very largely on
individual work which in large classes
means simple experiments and inex-
pensive apparatus,

6. The Appendix contains full lists of the
equipment, materials and chemicals
required for the laboratory course,

“The text holds a unique position in its con-
tent and methods of presentation. It follows
a new trail to much of the most desirable
information,”

258 pages 6 by 9 Cloth, $2.75

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 Fourth Avenue, New York City
(5 SURES 0 0 00 Oe

New

McGRAW-HILL BOOKS

Bacteriology

By STANLEY THOMAS

Professor of Bacteriology, Lehigh University
—Second Edition—

301 pages 6x9 illustrated $3.00
A well-organized presentation of the essential
principles of bacteriology with a discussion of
the practical applications of these principles
in the work of the sanitary engineer, the
industrial chemist, the agriculturalist and the
medical student.
In this revision all the material is brought up
to date and many sections have been entirely
rewritten.

An Introduction to

Vertebrate Embryology

By H. L. WIEMAN
Professor of Zoology, Univ. of Cincinnati
McGraw-Hill Publications in the

Zoological Sciences
411 pages 6x9 illustrated $4.00
A text for an introductory course in vertebrate
embryology, which while centering the laba-
tory work on the study of the chick and pig
embryos, extends the work beyond these two
forms. The book may be used in connection
with laboratory work on cleavage and early
stages in amphioxus and the frog. A compara-
tive point of view is maintained throughout
the text. Descriptions of cleavage and germ
layer formation in the pig and new data in
human embryology, which have become avail-
able only in the last year or two, are ineluded,
as well as a general outline of human
embryology.

Guide to the Study of

Animal Parasites

By WILLIAM A. RILEY
and REED O, CHRISTENSON
Department of Zoology, Univ. of Minnesota
McGraw-Hill Publications in
the Zoological Sciences
131 pages 5144x8% illustrated $1.50
We bring to your attention the following
excerpt from a review of this book which
appeared in the Journal of the American
Medical Association:

“The authors have adopted the unique
plan of not only giving detailed directions
for work but appending suitable figures
and even analytic keys to assist the stu-
dent. Particular mention should be made
of the list of parasites found in the com-
mon laboratory animals, which should
prove invaluable to teachers. The authors
have attained their purpose admirably.”

Send for copies on approval

McGRAW HILL BOOK COMPANY, Ine.

370 Seventh Ave. New York

[ Vor. V, No. 31,

, JuNE 28, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 19

Elements of Physiology

By Ernest GALE Martin, Pu.D. AND FRANK WaLTER WEYMOUTH, PH.D,
Professor of Physiology Associate Professor of Physiology
School of Medicine, Stanford University
Octavo, 784 pages with 133 engravings. Cloth, $8.00, net

The first section contains an account of the nature and capacities of protoplasm as revealed by
observation and experimentation. The second section deals with the principle that every protoplasmic
cell is inherently a self-sustaining system. Consequently, if it is continuously provided with a proper
environment, it should continue to live and function indefinitely (subject to the possible influence of
intrinsie senility). Accordingly the task of physiology after examining the properties of protoplasm,
is to enquire as to the factors of suitable cell environment, and the limits of departure from the
optimum for each. In a highly organized body, like that of man. the maintenance of proper eell-
environment depends on the interaction of various complex mechanisms. The third section is con-
cerned with these. Since bodily maintenance must be carried on in the presence of a changing
external environment various adjustments of the organism are necessary. The fourth section considers
these. A final chapter deals with Reproduction,

New Works and New Editions

GERSHENFELD’S BACTERIOLOGY AND SANITARY SCIENCE
Octavo, 432 pages, with 30 engravings and 2 plates. Cloth, $4.00 Net.
LABORATORY METHODS OF THE U.S. ARMY.
New (8rd) Edition. Small 12 mo., 696 pages, illustrated.
Flexible binding, $3.50 Net.
MORREY’S BACTERIOLOGY.
New (4th) Edition. 12 mo., 347 pages, 175 engravings, 5 plates
Cloth, $3.50 Net.
MULLINER’S MECHANO-THERAPY.
12 mo., 265 pages, with 57 engravings. Cloth, $2.75 Net.
PARK AND WILLIAMS’ PATHOGENIC MICROORGANISMS.
New (9th) Edition. Octavo, 819 pages, with 216 engravings

and 9 plates Cloth, $6.50 Net.
SMITH AND WIKOFF’S MATERIA MEDICA.

12 mo., 300 pages Cloth, $3.25 Net.
STONE ON THE NEW BORN INFANT

12 mo., 183 pages Cloth, $2.00 Net.
WINSLOW’S BIOGRAPHY OF HERMANN M. BRIGGS, M. D., D. Se.

Octavo, 432 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $5.00 Net.

WASHINGTON SQUARE ; PHILADELPHIA

LEA & FEBIGER

Please send books listed on margin. Please send large illustrated catalogue.

20 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V, No. 31,

The Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service

is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians --- Investigators --- Teachers

It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT form, a brief review of all original papers on Biological
Subjects which appear in the following journals:

Journal of Morphology and Physiology

The Journal of Comparative Neurology

The American Journal of Anatomy

The Anatomical Record

The Journal of Experimental Zoology

The American Anatomical Memoirs

Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)

Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)

Physiological Zoology, (Chicago, Ill.)

Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Authors’ Abstracts Without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available in abstract form and of purchasing articles of special
interest in reprint form without the necessity of subscribing to all the journals. Subscription, $3.00
eS ie Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value and
assistance to Librarians and Investigators. Subscription, $5.09 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form

referred to above, are brought together periodically, with authors’ and Analytical Subject Indices.
Price $5.00 per volume,

Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology
Thirty-sixth St. and Woodland Ave. Philadelphia, Pa.

Richard R. Smith Has the Privilege of Announcing the Forthcoming Publica-
tion of

COLLEGE BIOLOGY

by

Henry R. Barrows
Associate Professsr of Biology, New York University

COLLEGE BIOLOGY will provide a thorough foundation for those who are to
continue their biological studies, and an excellent grounding in the general
principles of the science for those who are not.

COLLEGE BIOLOGY will be illustrated with 271 line drawings and photo-
graphs of exceptional merit and interest.

COLLEGE BIOLOGY will be published in September.

Richard R. Smith, Inc.

12 EAST 41ST STREET

June 28, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 21

Van Slyke Constant Volume Blood Gas
Apparatus

For the determination of CO., and O,, in Blood and Other Solutions
Micro-Kjeldahl Determination of Nitrogen, Urea, Etc.

The Van Slyke Constant Volume Apparatus requires no intro-
duction. It is today part of the standard equipment in medical

and educational Biological Laboratories both here and abroad.

Indispensable in Research Work due to its accuracy. Preferable
for Routine Determinations due to its convenience and rapidity.

Useful in thirteen time-saving methods of analysis. This
accuracy of results is obtainable only when specifications
have been complied with in every detail of construction.
The glassblowing and grinding must be practically per-
fect. The allowable error of the extraction chamber at
the 0.5 and 2 ml. graduations must not exceed 1 part in
500 (heretofore considered an unattainable precision for
volumetric ware).

PORTABLE MODEL

The Portable Model operates on the same

principle as the older model and in effect is
the same, except that it is much
smaller, requires no permanent in-
stallation, and is ‘mounted (motor
and all) in one unit ready for opera-
tion.

A limited number of the above com-
pletely mounted portable Apparatus
made in our own Shops, of officially
approved design, workmanship and
accuracy, and supplied with E & A
Improved Shaker, in stock for im-
mediate delivery.

Write for Full Information

EIMER & AMEND

Est. 1851 Inc. 1897

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemical Reagents
Third Ave., 18th to 19th St., NEW YORK, N. Y.

22 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V, No. 31,

A complete display of Microscopical
Equipment including several recent
developments in this field of en-
deavor and a new advanced model of
the Leitz Biological and Medical
Microscope will be displayed.

BOLEIT Zine

60 E. 10th Street,
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Microscope “L”.

GLASS ELECTRODE
APPARATUS

The glass electrode method of hydrogen-ion

determination of liquids is particularly adapt-
able to measurements on physiological media.

Advantages

(a) Accuracy within 0.02 pH is
obtainable.

(b) Medium under test is not con-
taminated

(ce) Less than 1 ce. of the sample is
sufficient

(d) About 5 minutes to each test

(e) Clear, colored or turbed solu-
tions can be tested

(f) A null method is employed.

A copy of List 108-C will be sent on
request.

Pioneer Manufacturers CAMBRIDGE 3512 Grand Central
of Precision Instruments BUS APCAO RLU GOI Gy minal New York

June 28, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 23

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for

SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, ete.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

‘ on Al
Y RV. ff\\\ Naval MEST A Trae
Crav-AmAms CompAny
Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Botanical and Biologiacl Models and preparations
and Skeletal material
Sole agents for Spaltcholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

Collecting
Nets

Turtox nets are designed by experienced collectors, manufactured in cur own plant and built for

years of service. Four popular models are:

No. 340.40 TURTOX ALL-PURPOSE NET. 30 inch handle with patented lock device and inter-

changable marquisette and silk bolting cloth bags mxking it suitable for both Air and Aquatic work. $3.75

No. 340.82. STANDARD PLANCTON NET. (Illustrated above) Designed for towing. Net bag of

silk bolting cloth 125 meshes to the inch. Strains water well and retains most plancten organisms. 9.00

No. 340.98 DREDGE NET. Turtox. An unusually heavy, well made net suitable for bottom col-

lecting in both fresh and salt water. : pees ; 15.00
Detailed descriptions of these and over 30 other nets for all purposes will be sent on request.

Any Turtox net will be sent on approval for your inspection.

TURTOX NEWS (devoted to all branches A few copies of “Biological Field Work” are
of Biology) is mailed without charge to still available and will be mailed without charge
over 20,000 biologists monthly. Ask to have to anyone interested in field work or a directory
your name placed on our mailing list. of summer biological stations.

The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

General Biological Supply House
(INCORPORATED)
761-763 EAST 69th PLACE, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS

24 f THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V, No. 31,

INTERNATIONAL
LABORATORY CENTRIFUGES

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT COMPANY
352 WESTERN AVE.

BOSTON, MASS., U. S. A.

Marine For the
Biological Biological Sciences
Laboratory Models
Skeletons
Supply eae
Department Preserved Material

Naturalists’ Supplies

Stains and Chemicals
FOR THE BEST Museum Preparations
BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL Laboratory Glassware
CLASSROOM MATERIAL Bird Skins and Mounts

Dissecting Instruments
MUSEUM SPECIMENS Bacteriological Reagents

LIFE HISTORIES Microscope Slide Preparations
Charts, Botanical and Zoological
Samples of different preparations on Insect Life-histories and Collections
exhibit. Microscopes, Microtomes & Accessories
Catalogues and Information Furnished by New York Biological Supply Company

Applying at Supply Department Office
General Supplies for the Biological
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator Sciences
34 Union Square New York, N. Y.

June 28, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

Excelled
by None”

“Equal
to Any

Sim,

fe) Sey
mise nan Ye

oy
rk Co

GOLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE

Microscopic

COVER GLASSES

DO NOT FOG

We have the largest stock in the
U. S. A. and the largest variety of
sizes and thinnesses, squares, circles
and rectangulars.

Circular will be sent on request

And Now

GOLD SEAL MICRO. SLIDES
RITE-ON MICRO. SLIDES

If your Dealer can’t supply you send
order (mentioning dealer's nameg to
Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Tr ed
Cray-ApAms Company
117-118 East 24th St. New York
Importers and wholesale distributors of

Quality laboratory anatomical
models, surgical instruments, etc.

supplies,

and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

PULFRICH
PHOTOMETER

(arranged as Colorimeter)

This instrument is designed for readily
analyzing colors and numerically speci-
fying them with a degree of precision
formerly obtainable only with a spectro-
photometer. It is a practical color
measuring instrument which meets the
requirements of chemical, physiological,
biological, medical, textile, paint, and
other industrial laboratories.

Additional accessories equip the instru-
ment as a glossimeter, nephelometer,
and comparison microscope.

Price from $293. upward, f.o.b. New York

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

fees
JENA J

26 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V, No. 31,

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles
Main Street

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE
REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

SAMUEL CAHOON
Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows Every Night at 7 and 9
Matinees Wednesday and Friday
at 2:30

MONDAY, JUNE 30
TUESDAY, JULY 1
GRETA GARBO in
“ANNA CHRISTIE”

WEDNESDAY, JULY 2
THURSDAY, JULY 3
MAURICE CHEVALIER in
“THE BIG POND”

FRIDAY, JULY 4
DAN and SCHENK in
“THEY LEARNED ABOUT WOMEN”

SATURDAY, JULY
ALICE WHITE in
“THE SHOW GIRL IN HOLLYWOOD”

ELIZABETH THEATRE

Woods Hole, Mass.

_—_———————— ——SSSOQSOSSS——]]|]
= .
.
q
S
> 29 a c

Ss | “BILL” ENGLISH

ESE

TEXACO

SANSOUCI’S BEAUTY PARLOR

Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and
All Branches of Beauty Culture

Phone 19-M

Falmouth

When in Falmouth Stop at
ISSOKSON’S
GENERAL MERCHANDISE

Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait

A. ISSOKSON

A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

Colonial Building.

N. E. TSIKNAS
FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10e DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

June 28, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

These dishes are made from clear,
heavy glass, have a capacity to the
brim of 350 cc., inside height 45
mm., inside diameter 100 mm., height
over all 50 mm. The bottoms are flat
and the dishes will stack perfectly.
This type of bowl has been in use
for a number of years at the Marine
Biological Laboratory at Woods
Hole, Dartmouth College, DePauw
University, and elsewhere.

BIOLOGICAL

It is applicable to work in embryo-
logy, especially with chick embryos;
to small aquatic organisms, living or
preserved; to the development of
Echinoderms and other eggs. Fur-
ther uses will be readily apparent
to the biologist.

The dish fits conveniently under a
microscope. The rounded inside
permits easy cleaning. When stacked
or nested, the dishes can be easily
transported and stored, and evapora-
tion of liquids is inhibited because of
the accurate fit.

6734— BIOLOGICAL SPECIMEN
DISH, Each 25c

Per Dozen, $2.50, Per Gross $23.00

WILL CORPORATION —

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RocHEsTER, N-Y:

A.P.C. OPACIMETER

(Patents Pending)

A portable instrument for determining opacity
of transparent or translucent substances such as
glass, paper, ete.

Accurate within 0.5%.

Determinations are independent of the color
and surface characteristics of the sample tested.

Readings are independent of color and inten-
sity of light sources, of the color sensitivity
curve of photo-electric tubes, and of the grid-
voltage plate-current characteristics of amplify-
ing tubes.

Determinations can be made in daylight, thus
increasing facility and speed.

Useful in evaluating different combinations of
inks and papers.

Operation easy, not requiring technical ex-
perience.

White for A. P. C. Bulletin No. 102

EIMER & AMEND
Established 1851 Incorporated 1897
Sole Licensed Manufacturer and Distributor
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V, No. 31,

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
works, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or sereen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it passible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors, Living insects or microscopie living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard

microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objeetive, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Cr4v-ApAms CompAny
117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Vol. V. No. 2

SATURDAY, JULY 5, 1930

A. CRESSY MORRISON CONTRIBUTES ONE

OF THE COLLECTING NET SCHOLARSHIPS

Mr. Morrison,

the President of the American
Institute of the City of New York, has given the

sum!of $100.00 toward THE CotLtectinc Net

Scholarship Fund to be awarded for further re-

_ search work at the Marine Biological Laboratory.

This large gift is greatly ap-
preciated by members of the
laboratory because it is a
definite contribution to bio-
logical research. It means that
a promising student now work-
ing at the Marine Biological
Laboratory will receive finan-
cial aid, making it possible for

_him to return to the laboratory

-been varied and

next summer to carry on re-
search work.

Mr. Morrison’s career has
interesting.
He has written a Lay Version
of Damon and Pythias, the

Evening Lecture. Dr.

M. B. &. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 8, 8:00 P. M.
Henry B.
Bigelow, research curator of zo-
ology, Harvard University, and
director of the Woods Hole Oceano-
graphic Institution. Subject to be
announced later.

FRIDAY, JULY 11, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Seminar. Dr. B. M. Duggar,

“Purification Technique with Plant
Viruses.”

Dr. W. R. Taylor, “Chromosome
Structure in Meiosis of Gasteria.”

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Coprrs 25 Cts.

THE PERMEABILITY OF THE ERYTHRO-
CYTE TO UREA!

Dr. M. H. Jacoss,
Professor of General Physiology, University of

Pennsylvania

witH A. K. Parpart, W. A. SMITH AND
G. E. SHattuck

Urea penetrates most cells
at an easily measurable though
not very rapid rate.’ The gen-
eral order of magnitude of its
rate of penetration for the
cells previously studied is us-
ually not greatly different from
that of glycerol and is much
less than that of ethylene gly-
col. These relations are very
well illustrated by the erythro-
cytes of the fishes, of which
approximately 30 local species
have been studied. In the
case of one species of frog

Story of the Man who Resembled Christ. The

(Continued on Page 41)

1An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on June 24.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mr. Morrison and the Scholarship Fund
The Permeability of the Erythrocyte to Urea,

Dr. M. H. Jacobs ‘ Bethe ees)
Reyiew of the Seminar Report of Dr. Javobs,

Dr. L. Michaelis 39
Accumulation of Ions in Living Cells,

Dr. S. C. Brooks . 31
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Brooks,

Dr. Kenneth 8S. Cole ... 32
Cole,

eels to Comments by Dr.
S. C. Brooks . » Bo
The Pietadon between rH and the ‘Penetration
of Oxidation-reduction Indicators,

Dr. Matilda Moldenhauer

al oF the Seminar Report of Dr.

oe Gebarron sx. ;

The miifect of Injury on Cellular Permeability
to Water,

Drs. Balduin Lucke and Morton McCutcheon ..

Brooks 34
Brooks,

Ferrous Iodide, Unsaturated Fatty Acids and
Vitamin A,

Dr. F. E.

Review of Dr.
Dr, A. P. Mathews

Review of Dr. Chidester’s Article,
Dr. Shiro Tashiro

Comments on the Paper by Dr.
Dr. L. G. Wesson

The M. B. L. Club

The Reviewing of Scientific Reports

Addition to the Directory

Currents in the Hole

The University Players Guild

List of Recent Research Reports

The Woods Hole Choral Society

Items of Interest

Chidester
Chidester’s Article,

Chidester,

30 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. Now32aa

and three of turtles, on the other hand, the
relative. rate of penetration of urea is much
greater than that of glycerol and equals or even
considerably exceeds that of ethylene glycol. In
the ten species of mammals which have been
investigated the relative permeability to urea
becomes even greater, the ratio of its penetration
rate to that of glycerol being of the order of
magnitude of from 100:1 to 10,000:1 and to that
of ethylene glycol from perhaps 10:1 to 150:1.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. JACOBS

Dr. L. MicHaevis
Member of the Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research

The most interesting feature of Dr. Jacobs’
paper is the fact that the data described do not
fit at all to any of the suggested theories of
membrane effects. The pore theory, at least in
its simplest form, cannot account for the fact
that two molecules of the same molecular size
may have, in corpuscles of different species, such
exceedingly different rates of diffusion. Nor
does the lipoid theory fit either, because none of
the investigated substances belong to the class of
highly lipoid soluble substances. No better does
the theory ef surface tension cover the facts, as
none of the substances used by Dr. Jacobs ap-
preciably lowers the surface tension of water,
at least not the boundary surface water-air.
Furthermore, last not least, no theory presented
as yet can account for the fact that there are
such conspicuous differences in the behavior of
erythrocytes of different species toward the same
substance, and that the diffusion ratio of urea and
ethylene glycol varies so widely according to the
zoological class.

Such a situation is a good opportunity to
remind one of the weakness of any general
theory of permeability of cell walls, and it will
be useful to point out how much we are justified
to expect from such a theory and how much we
may expect any simple theory to fail.

First of all, I wish to say some words with
particular emphasis about what we may call the
constrat of the two most applied theories of
permeabilities: the lipoid theory and the sieve
theory. The lipoid theory could be also desig-
nated as the solubility theory, because the
permeability of a substance across the cell
membrane is ascribed to whether or not this sub-
stance is soluble in the ‘substance of this
membrane which is supposed to be of a lipoid
character. So, what is really the contrast of
these two theories, is (1) the pore theory.
starting from the atomistic or molecularistic
point of view. There is underlying this theory
the assumption that the space of the membrane

The completely opposite behavior of urea and ~
ethylene glycol, two substances of almost the same _
molecular weight and molecular refraction, with
the erythrocytes of the fishes on the one hand
and with those of the mammals on the other, is
believed to indicate that the permeability of the
cell to substances of low lipoid solubility cannot
be adequately explained by the so-called pore
theory, at least not in the simple torm in which it -
is frequently stated.

is not entirely occupied by its molecules, but also
by holes comparable to the holes of a crystal
grating. The size and shape of these holes, in
correlation to the size and shape of the molecule
which is to penetrate the membrane, is considered
as the determining factor. (2) The solubility
theory must be classified in that part of physical
chemistry which entirely disregards the molecular,
heterogeneous structure of matter and defines a
phase as something of which the smallest part in
to which it may be divided, is homogeneous in
itself and like any other smallest part of it. Only
in this sense may we speak of a homogeneous so-
lution.

Both points of view are schematic, and are
each useful for a definite purpose. The classic
thermodynamics can entirely neglect the mole-
cular structure, and can deal with phases, phase
boundaries, homogeneous solutions, ete. Such a
theory, though it has proved its powerful use-
fulness in science, necessarily fails when we are
considering very small objects approaching mole-
cular dimensions. For a group of ten molecules —
there is no sense in speaking of a phase, of a
homogeneous system, of a solution, or of a second
law of thermodynamics. Futhermore, such a
theory can never account for the mechanism of
a process. As we treat a problem from this point —
of view, all such concepts as molecular size and
shape and size of pores, are throughout alien
bodies. There is no sense in stating that the solu- —
bility theory is inferior because it cannot account
for the influence of the size of molecules, which
should be taken into consideration by the “‘mole-
cularist.” If, in a given problem, the size of
molecules and the discrete structure of matter
necessarily must be considered, it is no longer
an object accessible for the solubility theory.
This latter theory, therefore, cannot be said to
be wrong, but it does not fit the problem. There-
fore, there can be no struggle between the
solubility theory and the sieve theory. The
weakness of the solubility theory for our par-

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 31

ticular problem lies in the fact that the object in
question—the cell membrane with its extremely
minute thickness—may be outside the domain of
those objects which can be covered by this theory
with good approximation. One cannot speak of
a phase or a solubility of a substance in this
phase, if this phase has a thickness of no more
than, say, ten molecules.

Thus, at first sight, one may be inclined to
believe that a molecularistic point of view might
be a more useful aspect of the problem. This,
however, has a weakness of its own at the present
time. As we express the molecular point of view
by describing the membrane as a sieve with holes
of almost molecular dimensions, which may or
not fit purely with respect to size and form to
the molecule which is to enter, we should be con-
scious of the fact that this picture is a preliminary
one representing what we may call a truth of
first approximation, liable to corrections which
may sometimes overshadow the picture. So we

-may obtain, in certain cases, a distortion of the
truth instead of truth itself. .For this simplified
picture disregards the fact that the pores, even in
a quasi-solid membrane, are not rigid, that there

are force fields around the molecules which may
produce, by mutual action of molecules, distor-
tions of the spatial arrangements, forces which
according to the conditions may be called surface
tension, adhesion, polarization, chemical affinities,

ACCUMULATION

OF IONS

which probably will all be reduced to electric
forces exerted by free electric charges, dipoles,
quadrupoles, etc., within the molecule.

So we may summarize the present state of
knowledge that the solubility theory has done a
great service indeed, but there must be expected
and, in fact, has been reached, a limit to its
applicability; that the pore theory has the ad-
vantage of giving a mental picture of the
happenings and has shown certain advantages
too; that both theories have served the purpose
of constructing membrane models which imitate
certain details with respect to the permeability of
cell membranes. None of these models, however,
imitates the cell wall in every detail; and we may
especially infer from such observations as shown
now by Dr. Jacobs, that no single model for a
cell membrane can exist as apparently closely
related cells—which differ only by the zoological
specificity—vary widely with respect to their pre-
meability. What we need now, is, on the one
hand, a further accumulation of such facts as Dr.
Jacobs has found out, and on the other hand, a
refinement of the theory on intermolecular forces
by the atom physicist. When these two lines of
research come into contact, the theory of per-
meability will be further advanced. At the pre-
sent time, the role of the biologist is in the main
to accumulate more of such valuable facts as Dr.
Jacobs has just described.

IN LIVING CELLS!

Dr. S. C. Brooxs
Professor of Zoology, University of California

Selective accumulation of ions by living cells
presents two aspects: the movement of individual
ion species into or through the protoplasm against
their concentration gradients ; and the very unlike
amounts of chemically similar ions which are

taken up by a particular type of living cell. A
basis for the explanation of the latter pheno-
menon was given in 1925 by André and Demoussy,
who pointed out that prior to the establishment
of diffusion equilibrium the more mobile ions will
appear in the forefront of the diffusion process.
They might therefore be expected to appear in
relatively high concentrations in the interior of
living cells, or, as in the case studied by André
and Demoussy, in those cells farthest removed
from the absorbing tissues of the root.

But this hypothesis leaves unexplained the
movement of ions into the interior of living cells
against their concentration gradients. Osterhout,
in 1926, pointed out that in the case of Valonia
the thermodynamic requirements for such accu-

mulation of cations were fulfilled, and that if it

was assumed that protoplasm was permeable to
molecules only (KOH, NaOH, COs, HCl) and
not to ions, and if it was further assumed that
KOH diffused faster through the protoplasm than
NaOH molecules, then the non-equilibrium con-
dition previously described by André and De-
moussy would account for the observed accumu-
lation of cations in Valonia. In order to account
for the observed accumulation of anions it was
necessary to regard KOH and NaOH as non-
diffusible and postulate a membrane equilibrium
due to an excess of cations inside the cell as com-
pared with the sea water. Among other reasons
for regarding this hypothesis as inadequate we
may mention the rather unique assumption that
molecules of KOH diffuse more rapidly than
those of NaOH, and the failure of the generali-
zation that only molecules and not ions penetrate
living cells.

We have therefore adopted a suggestion made
by Hober, namely, that in the protoplasm of

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on June 24.

32 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 32,

Valonia there occur selectively ion permeable
regions, some permeable to cations only, and some
to anions only. They may be thought of as
behaving like the dried collodion membranes
studied by Michaelis, particularly in permitting
ion exchange, and in greatly exaggerating the
differences in mobility between such ions as
potassium and sodium. If this be assumed, then
the ebserved conditions of pH and HCOs3 con-
centration should lead to accumulation of both
cations and anions. Thus Cl ion would be ex-
changed for HCO; through the anion permeable
regions, and K ions and Na ions for H ion through
the cation permeable regions. The outward dif-
fusion gradient of HCO; and H ions would thus
furnish the source of the work necessary to main-
tain local electrical neutrality in each region by
accumulating the appropriate corresponding ions
against their concentration gradients. A non-
equilibrium state would be expected to be char-
acterized by a relatively high concentration of K
ions which have a higher mobility than Na ions.

Experimental proof has been furnished for
both the essential features of this theory, namely:
the accumulation of ions and the non-equilibrium
state. Proof of the first point was furnished by
Netter, who while our own research was in pro-
gress, was able to demonstrate the passage of
potassium from a dilute to a concentrated solu-
tion by exchange for H ions.

In our own research we placed Valonia plants
in sea water modified by the addition of isotonic
NaCl or KCl. If the sap were in substantial
equilibrium with the surrounding solution, the K
and Na content of the sap should have varied in
the same sense as that in modified sea water. It
was found, however, that either modification of
the sea water led to a relative and absolute in-
crease of the K content of the sap, and that this
effect increased with time and with the degree of
modification of the sea water. This could be
‘true only of a non-equilibrium condition.

Since both the means of accumulating ions and
the non-equilibrium basis for the selective activity
of the cells have thus been given experimental
proof, it will be seen that the postulated mechan-
ism accounts adequately for the observed compo-
sition of normal Valonia sap. Bivalent cations,
which are almost or quite absent from the sap,
may be an exception insofar as the mechanism of
their exclusion may differ from that regulating the
penetration of K and Na. The similar selective
accumulation of ions by many other plant and
animal cells may be largely due to the same mech-
anism as that operative in Valonia.

The most probable assumption as to the rela-
tion between permeability, which for convenience
of visualization may be thought of as a function
of the spaces or pores in the structure of the pro-
toplasm or its limiting surfaces, and the rate of
penetration of K ions and Na ions would be that
with increasing permeability at first only the more
mobile and presumably less hydrated K ions would
be able to penetrate at all. Even when a few
spaces would allow Na ions to penetrate, still an
increase in permeability would have more effect
on the penetration of K ions than on that of Na
ions. It is probable that the addition of either
isotonic KCl or NaCl solutions to sea water in-
creases the permeability of V’alonia, and as sug-
gested above, a relative increase in the penetration
of K ions as compared to Na ions is to be ex-
pected. This would account for the relative and
absolute increase in the K content of Valonia sap
in our experiments.

This theory establishes a direct relationship be-
tween cellular COs production, growth in cell
size, and the relatively high K content generally,
though not always, found in embryonic cells, neo-
plasms, and other rapidly growing tissues. It
further accounts for many of the outstanding fea-
tures of the mineral nutrition of plants.

Further details and consequences are discussed
in a recent paper in Protoplasma.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. BROOKS
Dr. KENNETH S. COLE

Assistant Professor of Physiology, College of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University

It is always a pleasure to welcome the Brooks’
back to Woods Hole even when they merely com-
mute over from the Golden Gate. This time
however they have gone to the land of Valonia to
collect sap, boiled it down in California, and
brought it up here to us. This scientific sweet, of
which Dr. Brooks tells us, is primarily a series of
hypotheses as to the mechanisms which regulate
the passage of ions through the cell wall of
Valonia as the K’ concentration in the medium is
changed. When in normal sea water, the steady

state—equilibrium is a dangerous word—is main-
tained by COs and a mosaic membrane. On the
other hand, an alteration of the K’ content of the
isotosmotic medium in either direction from
normal is postulated to make for the easier ad-
mission of this ion to the interior with the result
that the K’ increases faster than the Na’.

The supporting experimental evidence is that of
chemical analysis of the sap after various periods
of exposure. We wish to commend Dr. Brooks
for this painstaking work,—especially because of

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 33

the difficulties of the K’ determination. The
graphs of the data for the K’, Na’, and Cl’ con-
centrations in the sap looked so very violent in
their ups and downs that we attempted to put
things on another basis, assuming that these three
ions were the only ones present and then comput-
ing the percentage that each ion contributed to
this total.

K’ Na’ CV
It I II T I
A 189 hrs. 416 % 7 69% -19 514% 6
B 72 hrs. 41.5 0 7.47 al Seb) Sea)
i) 25 hrs. 41.65 Thay fea) 75045 -.05
D 9.5 hrs. 40.25 =65 9105) ~ 1165 50:7 + -1.0
Controls 40.95 65 8.0 Te) Bako 65

1 Average ion percentages of total ion for sap of cells
from modified sea water.

Il Difference between I and series control.

These differences seemed to us rather lacking
in conclusiveness and we wondered what normal
variation of the material might be expected.
Having had no experience with V’alonia, the data
from the controls of A, B, C, and D as given
above—where II is now the maximum devia-
tion from the mean—were our only standards.

The material for each series was picked to
be as nearly alike in each experiment while there
was no attempt to secure such uniformity from
one series to another. Thus it is not entirely fair
to compare their controls. But disregarding this
measuring stick of variability, we are still un-
convinced that there is a relative increase in K’
and we are skeptical of increases in absolute K’
concentrations until we see why they may not be
explained by fortuitous variations of total ion
concentration.

We are very much interested in the postulates
advanced by Dr. Brooks and we will certainly
find them worth considering further. We do
however like our facts to be a little more of an
obvious peg upon which to hang our theoretical
hat. Because we envy Dr. Brooks his energy,
enthusiasm, and power of attack on the question
of “How does a membrane ?”, we hope that he will
convince us of his theory by his experiments, and
that he will forgive us for being very much im-
pressed by smallness of the changes of the K’
of the sap of Valonia when that of the medium
changes by a factor of sixteen.

REPLY TO COMMENTS BY DR. COLE

(S. C. Brooks)

Our conclusion that a non-equilibrium condition
normally existed in Valonia was based upon con-
sideration of absolute changes in ion concentra-
tion rather than upon relative changes, such as

those suggested by Dr. Cole for the following
reasons. An enormous accumulation of data on
the mineral nutrition of plants is generally believed
_ to show that the intake of diffusible anions is sub-
stantially independent of the intake of diffusible
cations. Since Cl, K, and Na are diffusible ions
in this sense it seems inadvisable to allow varia-
tions in Cl intake to have a statistical effect on
the data when we have reason to believe that
there is no real physical basis for such an effect.
This leaves us only K arid Na to consider. The
ratio of K to Na seems less reliable than the data
on K alone, since, as explained in the paper re-

“a

ferred to, Na is determined by difference between
two relatively large quantities and has therefore
a relatively high percentage of error. We are
therefore inclined to adhere to our opinion that
absolute concentration changes as used by us
furnish a less speculative basis for theoretical
study than the analysis suggested by Dr. Cole.

It should perhaps be pointed out that the hy-
pothesis offered predicts that with increasing per-
meability, the ratio of K intake to Na intake will
pass through a maximum and then decrease. It
is possible that in some of our experiments this
maximum has been passed.

We do agree with Dr. Cole that further data
as to the variation to be expected in supposedly
comparable samples would be very desirable and
hope some time to be able to furnish data of this
kind.

34 THE COLLECTING NET

THE RELATION BETWEEN rH AND THE PENETRATION OF OXIDATION-
REDUCTION INDICATORS *

Dr. MatrtpA MoLpENHAUER BrRooKS

Research Associate in Biology, University of California

This paper is an endeavor to show whether
there is any relation between the reduction inten-
sity of a substance and its ability to penetrate
living cells.

The oxidation-reduction indicators which
Clark (1) perfected and measured showed that
those which fall in the electro-positive end of the
scale penetrated Valonia cells and were found
reduced in the sap; the dyes which fall in the
electro-negative end of the scale did not pene-
trate at all, while, on the other hand, the dyes
which were in the mid-range penetrated but were
not reduced in the sap.

These results seem to show that there is a
relation between reduction-intensity of a sub-
stance and its ability to penetrate living cells.
However, to test this point further, two more

[ Vor. V. No. 32

dyes which were found by Rapkine, Struyk and
Wurmser (2) to be more electro-negative than the
indigo sulphonates on Clark’s scale, namely, Janus
green and neutral red, were tested for their
ability to penetrate Valonia. It was found that
Janus green did not penetrate, but that neutral
red was found in the sap in an oxidized form.
These studies show definitely that the reduction
intensity of a dye is not the factor which deter-
mines whether or not a dye penetrates into
Valoma. ;

1. Clark, W. M. et al. Studies on oxidation-reduction.
Hygienie Laboratory Bulletin No. 151, U. S. Pub.
Health Serv. 1928.

2. Rapkine, L., Struyk, A. P. and R. Wurmser. Comp-
tes Rendus 100, 1020, 1929.

*An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on June 24,

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. BROOKS
Dr. E. S. G. Barron

Instructor in Medicine, Johns Hopkins University sa

Valonia is a one celled marine plant with a
delicate layer of protoplasm lying just inside the
cell wall and whose central vacuole contains a sap
which can be easily expressed and analyzed.
Therefore, it is the most suitable material for the
study of cell permeability. Mrs. Brooks who has
been engaged for several years in such observa-
tions has now studied the relation of the reduc-
tion potential of reversible dyes to its diffusion
through the living cell. As it was expected, she
found that such relationship did not exist. The
reviewer, while studying the catalytic effect of
dyes on the oxygen consumption of living cells
made similar observations. Thus taking two dyes
with identical redox. potential, (methylene blue
and gallocyanine) methylene blue* penetrates the
cell wall of starfish eggs while gallocyanine does
not. Indigodisulphonate did not penetrate while
the more negative dyes, cresyl violet and safranine
did penetrate the cell membrane.

It is well known that almost every basic dye

enters the living cell but there are few acid dye
stuffs that do penetrate the cell. Ehrlich in his
studies on vital coloration and later Nirenstein
and Hober showed that the vital colors which
enter easily into the living cell are those which
dissolve in oil. The few exceptions to this rule
were removed by trying to imitate the plasma
membrane with a mixture of an oil with a fatty
acid and an organic fat soluble base. The con-
stitution of the Valonia membrane has not yet
been established. Hober believes that the proto-
plasmic surface of Valonia has some areas which
are permeable to cations and other areas per-
meable to anions. It would be of interest to study
the permeability of Valonia cells to dyes taking
into consideration their solubility on such oils as
prepared by Nirenstein.

*Whether methylene blue or azure B_ is the dye
found in the starfish egg has no significance for the
present discussion since both dyes possess similar
reduction potential.

.

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

35

THE EFFECT OF INJURY ON CELLULAR PERMEABILITY TO WATER!
Dr. Batpuin LucKE
Associate Professor of Pathology, University of Pennsylvania Medical School
Dr. Morton McCutcHEon
Assistant Professor of Pathology, University of Pennsylvania Medical School

Permeability to water is a general property of
cells, which may be defined as the amount of
water that enters or leaves the cell, per unit of
time, per unit of cell surface and per unit of
osmotic driving force. In the units employed in
our work, permeability is expressed as the
number of cubic micra of water entering or
leaving the cell per minute, per square micron
of cell surface, per atmosphere of difference in
Osmotic pressure between interior and external
medium.

It has been shown that permeability of the cel!
co water is affected by a number of factors. For
example, Professor Ralph Lillie found it to
vary with the state of physiological activity of
the cell, and the present writers have shown it
to be affected by temperature, specificity and
valence of ion, etc. In this communication evi-
dence is presented that injury to the cell is yet
another factor causing alteration of its permea-
bility to water.

For a study of the relation of injury to per-
meability the spherical unfertilized egg of the sea
urchin is admirably suited. Injury is readily
recognized by the addition of sperm after the
cells have been returned to their natural medium,
sea water, at the conclusion of an experiment;
normal cells shortly undergo cleavage, while
injured cells divide atypically or not at all.

Permeability of the cell to water is determined
by the following method: eggs from a single
suitable specimen of sea urchin are placed in sea
water of the desired osmotic pressure. The
osmotic volume changes proceed relatively slowly
and permit accurate measurement of the diameter
from which volume and surface of the cell can
be calculated. The course of the swelling or
shrinking process is satisfactorily described by
certain equations by which permeability may be
computed. For this purpose the mean volume of
several cells is plotted against time. The rate of
passage of water is given by the rate of increase
or decrease of cell volume; it is obtained from the
slope of the curve at a given time. This value is

divided by cell surface and the difference in pres-

sure between the interior of the cell and the
medium. The resulting numerical quantity is
termed the permeability of the cell to water, at
a given time.

By the method outlined above we have studied
permeability to water of cells injured by exposure

to heat and by exposure to anisotonic solutions.
Effect of Injury by Heat

In these experiments cells are placed in sea
water of different temperatures (30 to 45°C.) for
a given number of minutes. It is found that such
exposure effects no volume changes of cells in
isotonic solutions, and the cells retain their pro-
perty of swelling or shrinking in anisotonic
solutions. The behavior of the injured cells
differs greatly from that of normal cells. For
example, after an exposure for 4 minutes to 42°C.,
the injured cells will swell very rapidly for
several minutes in various hypotonic solutions,
after which they shrink. Normal cells, under
similar conditions, will continue to swell until
constant volume is attained after many minutes,
or even hours, or until they burst having reached
their elastic limits. From experiments of this
kind it is apparent that injured cells do not lose
their semipermeability at once nor completely.
But while in normal cells the amount of solute
that can enter or leave the cell is inappreciable
under the conditions of the experiment, injured
cells become gradually permeable to dissolved
substances. The shrinkage following initial rapid
swelling in hypotonic solutions is probably due to
escape of dissolved substances. It is also ap-
parent that the increase in permeability to water
manifests itself before escape of solute takes
place.

In the determinations of quantitative differences
between injured and normal cells in regard to
permeability to water, such differences are most
clearly brought out in the initial measurements.
In one group of experiments we varied the length
of time for which cells were exposed to a given
high temperature. In another group temperature
was varied and time of exposure held constant.
In such experiments injury by heat manifests it-
self by an increase in permeability to water, and
this increase is proportional to the degree of
injury. (i. e., the intensity of the injurious
factor.) ;
Effects of Injury Brought About by Exposure
to Anisotonic Solutions

Before citing examples of this type of injury,
it should be pointed out that it is possible to avoid
injury by performing the experiments under
suitable conditions (the solutions should be at a

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on June 24.

36 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 32%

low temperature, i. e., 10 to 15° C, the exposure
should not be too prolonged, the material should
be in good condition to start with, etc.). If,
however, the conditions of the experiment are
made unfavorable, injury generally occurs. For
example, when cells are caused to swell rapidly
(at 20-25°C) in various hypotonic solutions, it
is generally found. that permeability to water
gradually increases during the course of the
swelling process; when cells from such experi-
ments are returned to ordinary sea water and
inseminated, cleavage is atypical or fails entirely.
~ With normal cells permeability remains practical-
ly constant during the swelling process, and
cleavage is normal.

In experiments of the above kind injury occurs
only after several minutes and therefore does not
affect the initial permeability of the cell. In order
to determine the initial permeability of injured
cells, cells previously placed in various hypotonic
solutions for a given length of time are returned
to ordinary sea water and allowed to shrink. In
such cases injury has been inflicted, if at all,
during the swelling Be oud therefore might

_ FERROUS IODIDE, UNSATURATED FATTY ACIDS AND VITAMIN A

Dr. F. E. CHIDESTER
Professor of Zoology, West Virginia University

In 1925, the writer, who had been keenly in-
terested in the endocrine glands since 1912, was
struck by the tact that several medical writers
had shown that thyroid extract was beneficial in
cataract and certain other eye diseases involving
keratization. Accordingly, he began experiment-
ing with rats depleted of Vitamin A, using
various 1odin compounds.

Among the interesting discoveries was the fact
that on a normal diet tiny quantities of iodin
would induce greater growth. Subsequent studies
carried on with various associates seemed to
indicate quite definitely that xerophthalmia and
other symptoms of Vitamin A deficiency would
yield to iodin treatment, and the most effective
combination proved to be with extremely small
doses of ferrous iodide?

Our studies of the efficiency of ferrous iodide
have been carried on since 1928, and a paper that
will shortly appear elsewhere (Chidester, Eaton,
and Speicher, “The Influence of Iodide of Iron
on Rats Receiving.a Vitamin A-free Diet”) will
describe our latest findings. Suffice it to say
here that we have demonstrated repeatedly that
even in marked depletion on a Vitamin A-free
diet we could partially replace Vitamin A; and
we have been able to cure xerophthalmia in three
days’ time.

We have successfully demonstrated that ade-
quate proteins and carbohydrates are present in

be expected to affect the rate of shrinkage from
the first instant.

For example, cells were made to swell in several
hypotonic solutions at a high temperature. When
returned to ordinary sea water permeability is
found to be very high in cells taken from the more
dilute solutions, and normal in cells from the less
hypotonic solutions. A corresponding difference
is observed in the results of insemination.

From such experiments the conclusion may be
drawn that injury by anisotonicity of the medium
manifests itself by an increased permeability to
water, and that this increase varies directly with ~
the degree of injury as shown by fertilization
tests. In general summary, then, it is found
that, in the case of unfertilized eggs of Arbacia,
injury (induced by high temperature and by
anisotonic sea water) causes a marked increase
in permeability to water, and that this increase
can be correlated with the degree of injury.

The results of these experiments are in har-
mony with studies of other investigators on per-
meability of injured cells to dissolved substances.

our diet (Sherman No. 380’ plus ergosterol ) and
for the past year we have been experimenting
with various fats and fatty acids. True, we could
have attempted to destroy all of the Vitamins A
and D in cod liver oil, by bubbling oxygen
through it, and then restored the D, and added
to it our ferrous iodide. But we have persistently
fought shy of such a procedure and hoped to
utilize vitamin-free fatty acids or fats. The
chances of error have been great, and we pre-
ferred to go slowly and carefully, trying to use
substances about which there could be no question.
Last year we tried oleic acid, stearic acid and ethyl
butyrate with indifferent success. Perhaps the
chief difficulty was that of feeding our fats. We
have hesitated to forcibly feed substances, since
such procedure would involve mishandling the
rats, which might disturb the activity of them
thyroids.

But the recent paper by Burr and Burr? seems
to present just the information that we need,
and the results obtained by us seem to offer

(2) Burr, G. O. and Burr, M. M. “On the Nature
and Role of the Fatty Acids Essential in Nutri-
tion,” J. Biol. Chem., vol. 86, No. 2, pp. 587-
621, April, 1930.

(1) Chidester, F. E., Eaton, A. G. and Thompson,
G. P., “The influence of minute doses of
iodine and iron on growth of rats furnished
Vitamin A-free diet.” Science, vol, 68, p, 482,
November 1928,

OER HG ei

Jury 5, 1930 ]

a satisfactory explanation of the results of the
Burrs, while both our studies seem to the writer
to simultaneously clear up certain questions sug-
gested by the work of the Mellanbys and McCar-
rison on hyperplasia of the thyroid in relation
to unsaturated fatty acids.

Burr and Burr have shown that the unsaturated
fatty acids are extremely effective in curing rats
suffering from a low fat disease induced by rear-
ing them for four to six months on a fat-free
diet. Their interpretation of the results in com-
parison with the non-curative effects of the
saturated fatty acids is that “linoleic acid (and
possibly others) is an essential fatty acid”.

In their experiments Burr and Burr were
furnishing small quantitics of iodin, as they added
to the distilled water “traces of KI”.

In our experiments we found that extremely
minute quantities of iodin would induce growth in
Vitamin A-deficiency, but that if iodin was fur-
nished in any appreciable quantity the starvation
effect was more pronounced and depletion was
extremely rapid, with weight reduction. Con-
gestion of the kidneys, noted by the Burrs, is
common in inanition. (Jackson).

T. B. Robertson, in his “Principles of Bio-
chemistry’ shows that excessive administration
of thyroid tissue to animals leads to hypertrophy
of the kidneys.

Apparently Burr and Burr were introducing an
excess of iodin for the highly depleted condition
of their fat-starved animals. As soon as they
added the unsaturated fatty acids, the excess iodin
was taken up by the acid and the animal was
restored to its normal balance.

The writer is positive that the success of the
Burrs’ experiment with unsaturated fatty acids

THE COLLECTING NET

37

is due to their relatively high iodin number of
173-202. Butter fat with an iodin number of
26-38 was not effective.

The studies of the Mellanbys on hyperplasia
in dogs and those of McCarrison on the action of
unsaturated fatty acids in tadpoles and pigeons
would seem to indicate a very close relationship
between the high iodin number of the fats and
their curative effects. The Mellanby? found
that thyroid hyperplasia could be induced in
dogs by the administration of diets containing
a high proportion of unsaturated fats, such as
butter fat, but that cod liver oil, also an unsatu-
rated fat (but carrying with it considerable
iodin) would reduce the hyperplasia. McCarrison*#

studied pigeons that developed hyperplasia
of the thyroid when reared in filthy sur-

roundings, but with a supply of iodin which he
deemed adequate under normal conditions. He
concluded that contamination of the food and
drink by the excreta of the animals induced in-
adequate absorption of the iodin. He found
that an excess of butter or of oleic acid in the
diet enhanced the hyperplasia, but that cod liver
oil afforded complete protection against goitre.

McCarrison says “It would seem that there is
such a thing as a Fat-Thyroid-Iodine balance and
that this balance may be disturbed by an excess
of fats on the one hand or a deficient supply of
iodine on the other”.

(3) Mellanby, E. and M. “The Experimental
Production of Thyroid Hyperplasia in Dogs”,
J. Physiol. 55; vii-viii, 1921.

4) MecCarrsion, R., Pathogenesis of Deficiency
Disease, XI. “Observations on Fat Excess in
Relation to Iodine Requirements and to the
Thyroid Gland.” Ind, Jour, Med. Res., vol. 11,
pp. 1-51, 1923,

REVIEW OF DR. CHIDESTER’S ARTICLE

Dr. A. P. MatHEews
Professor of Biochemistry, University of Cincinnati

In this paper Dr. Chidester states that he could
partially replace vitamin A in the diet with ferrous
iodide and that he could cure xerophthalmia due
to vitamin A deficiency in three days. He does
not specifically give as a conclusion of his work
that small amounts of ferrous iodide are vitamin
A, but he gives the impression that he is at least

inclined to believe this for he states that ferrous

iodide will give the antimony trichlorid reaction
for vitamin A, which is the production of a blue
color in chloroform. He gives no experiments in

this preliminary paper so it is difficult to discuss

anything more than this opinion that ferrous
iodide is vitamin A, an opinion also which he
nowhere expresses clearly enough to enable one
to say that he has it.

He goes on to suggest that had he added un-

saturated fatty acids as well as the ferrous iodide
to the diet he might have duplicated vitamin A,
but he says that these experiments are under way
and all he reports definitely is that ferrous iodide
cures xerophthalmia in rats in three days. But
he does not say whether they stayed cured.

I can only comment on this as follows in the
absence of experimental details: The blue color
that he gets with chloroform and ferrous iodide
and antimony chloride may very possibly be iodine
set free from the iodide. The blue color in the
antimony chloride test for vitamin A is not pre-
sumably due to iodine. It is given by carotin,
which has been very carefully and many times
recrystallized and which contains no iodine. Not
every blue producing substance is vitamin A, any-
more than every yellow one is saffron.

38 THE COLLECTING NET

Vitamin A deficiency is certainly not an iodine
deficiency. It is conceivable that the stimulating
effects of iodides on the body metabolism might
enable it to function longer without vitamin A
or might even enable the body or the intestinal
bacteria to make vitamin A, but this is for Dr.
Chidester to prove; and the possibility must be
regarded as very remote.

Not all animals develop xerophthalmia in
vitamin A deficiency. Pigs are said to be im-
mune. Nearly all of them develop ulcerations of
the mouth and of the intestinal tract as well as
of the eyes. These ulcerations have been cured by
giving carefully purified carotin. Finally, it has
been pretty well established that vitamin A is
either carotin, the yellow coloring matter in
carrots, or else it is so closely associated with
this that it cannot at present be separated from it.
V. Euler and his colleagues, Karrer and V. Euler,
Kawakami and Hellstrom, and Kawakami and
another in Suzuki's laboratory have purified
carotin so that its melting point rose from 167 to
183° without any diminution of its power of

___[ Vou. V. No. 3m

promoting growth of rats on a vitamin A-free-
diet. A few thousandths of a mg. per day of —
carotin is enough for a rat. There seems very —
little doubt that carotin is vitamin A, although
it has not yet been demonstrated. I might add,
however, that di-iodo carotin was also active in—
growth promotion. Nevertheless, as carotin has —
probably eleven double bonds, possibly ten of

them have not been effected by the iodization.

In fact I do not believe that vitamin A is
ferrous iodide, if this is what Dr. Chidester
means. It is quite possible that unsaturated fatty
acids may act somewhat in the same way as
carotin, for carotin were it oxidized to a carboxy]
group at one end would be just such an highly
unsaturated fatty acid. V. Euler is of the opinion”
that other similar substances may act like carotin.
It is stated that one of the crocetins from saffron
is also active. Butter without vitamin A, although
it contains butyric acid, oleic and other unsat-—
urated acids has no power of replacing carotin,
or vitamin A.

REVIEW OF DR. CHIDESTER’S ARTICLE
Dr. Surro TASHIRO
Professor of Biochemistry, College of Medicine, University of Cincinnati

A discovery of the chemical nature of any
vitamin is a noteworthy biochemical event,
whether it is made by chemical analysis of the
pure active principle or by substituting a chemi-
cally known compound for the naturally occuring
vitamine. If ferrous iodide can be shown, beyond
a doubt, to be the compound responsible for the
properties and functions of vitamin A, Dr.
Chidester as well as the Marine Biological
Laboratory should be congratulated.

In spite of the fact that this vitamin is always
associated with lipoids, particularly those con-
taining unsaturated fatty acids, we must first
remove these fatty acids in order to prepare a
more concentrated form. It would appear, there-
fore, unlikely that the active compound can really
be in combination with unsaturated fatty acids.
One should remember, however, a variety of ways
in which fatty acids can enter into a combination
with various compounds and by which they can

loose their typical physical and chemical behaviors.

The role of unsaturated fatty acids in iodin
metabolism is exceedingly important. To this
relationship, we may add another factor, bile salts.
As a factor regulating fat absorption, it influences
not only iodin intake into the blood, but also other
salts such as calcium and others that are apt to
form insoluble soaps. There is a very interesting
relationship between bile salts and thyroxin,
involving lipoid matabolism. Furthermore the
Japanese investigators have shown important
bearing of vitamin A deficiency on biliary
secretions as well as various pathological calcifica-_
tions. These evidences, together with a well
known fact that involves unsaturated fatty acids
in hepatic diseases, indicate that unsaturated fatty
acids are one of the most important compounds
not only in aiding transportation of iodin, but~
also in playing an important role in the obscure”
lipoid metabolism. b

COMMENTS ON THE PAPER BY DR. CHIDESTER
Dr. L. G. Wesson
Assistant Professor of Pharmacology, Vanderbilt University School of Medicine

These views of Dr. Chidester, which seem to
correlate the results of experiments by a number
of investigators, are especially interesting at the
present time in view of the recent publication of
Burr and Burr, and, it seems to me, may ex-
plain in part at least the latters’ very interesting
results. Dr. Chidester shows (1) that it is known
that a very slight iodin imbalance has an exagger-
ated effect on malnourished animals; (2) that

unsaturated acids may take care of iodin in the
diet, whether iodin is in excess or not; (3) that,
when cod liver oil is used as the source of the
unsaturated acid, its iodin content lessens the
amount of iodin that the unsaturated cod liver —
oil acids can render physiologically inactive; and
(4) that, in Burrs’ experiments, the effective un-
saturated acids may act by simply neutralizing
the exaggerated excess-iodin effect.

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 39

THE M. B. L. CLUB

Woods Hole probably collects together each

season one of the most individualistic communities
in the world. Individualistic yet cooperative. It
has always been a place to escape from the crowd;
the personal work and thinking of the investigator
have been favored by the maintainance of suffi-
cient isolation for everyone. Of course most has
been accomplished by absorbed concentration of
effort in the private rooms or at the tables for
research; and the fame of Woods Hole has gone
abroad in the publications of its research results.
But with all its value, isolation and segregation to
the extreme would never have led to our unique
development of cooperative strength.
_ Here is one of the greatest Universities. A
center of healthy critical interchange and stimu-
lating contacts of individuals. In many ways,
every one has opportunity to meet, to share
experiences and to exchange views and methods
with many others. Some feel this “mixing” or
social intercourse of coworkers is one of the most
important phases or forces in the development of
our individuals, it works out this way here.
Certainly it has always been recognized here, not
only in strictly scientific conferences, large and
small; but in delightful informal gatherings in
off-times or rest periods.

When the workers were few, there was constant
daily interchange and plenty of impromptu meet-
ings. The whole crowd could be called together
for a smoker on any evening. No _ special
mechanism was necessary to help promote and
carry the social life. But times have changed,
and one discovers with surprise that we are facing
quite a new situation. With the development of
such greatly enlarged facilities, we find that there
are not only many more people, but that they
come for irregular and different periods of the
summer. Then the classes and certain groups of
investigators have shifted to two ends of the
season. Besides this, householders, apartment
dwellers, and many groups have settled apart
from the laboratory, far or near. So a mechanism
is needed and has grown up to make possible a
continuation of that social interaction which has
meant much to the exceptionally fine cooperative
spirit of the place.

This mechanism, or functional linkage of our
individuals is the M. B. L. Club.

Every year a few of us are chosen from the

ranks as officers for the service of the club, to
Maintain its spirit and its facilities. All are
‘members, every worker may share its opportuni-
- ties, and its pleasures. The club-house furnishes
common meeting grounds for all groups. If any
fail to come something is lacking to all. Here is
a comfortable place to rest, read, or talk, to play
cards or dance. The teas, and dances, musicales

£
Ps

and assemblies bring us together en masse; or we
go singly for company or merely to relax.

Do not think of the club as another force to
determine or regulate your social life as the
courses direct your biological training. It is rather
an outer environment, so to speak, somewhat
apart from the isolation of the laboratory atmos-
phere, where we meet our fellows and enjoy one
another with or without accompaniment of
scientific problems.

The officers try to arrange and keep going
whatever may help any individual to meet others,
or to enjoy phases of use and pleasure to him.
Beginners meet veteran workers, as well as others
of various groups. Workers of a variety of
nationalities and of different fields of interest
come together. All come in a spirit of live and
let live, so characteristic of the place; not to
inhibit or check, but to share and enjoy.

So you are urged to join the M. B. L. Club at
once, at the beginning of the season. You will
then do your part in aiding us to encourage and
develop its enjoyable and helpful influences,
which have proved so worth while in the past.

The Club opened last week with a reception on
Friday and a dance on Saturday. The series of
concerts for classical music began Wednesday
evening. The Friday afternoon teas will start
Friday, July 11. Dances will continue on Satur-
day evenings.

H. McE. Knower.

In brief the Club offers: a place for quiet
relaxation; an opportunity to read current
periodicals ; a place for smokers, teas, card parties,
suppers for small groups; teas at which members
of the Laboratory may meet each other; music—
good, bad and indifferent: a raft on the bathing
beach ; any cooperative function.

All the above involve expense. Every member
of the Laboratory should be willing to support an
institution which serves so many, even if he may
not make any definite use of it himself, because
of more fortunate location in cotage or apartment.

The Club can not continue all the varied ac-
tivities unless it has the generous support of
the Woods Hole family. So we ask your help.

C. G. Rogers.

M. B. L. CLUB CONCERT

Concert Reproduced on Radio-Amplified Phono-
graph will be given at the M. B. L. Club, Wed-

:nesday, July 9, at 8:00 P. M.

Programme
I. Beethoven—Symphony No. 7 in A Major
Intermission of 5 minutes
II. Tschaikowsky—Scherzo (Pizzicato astinato)
from the 4th Symphony
III. Satie—Gymopeédie No. 2
IV. Wagner—‘‘Ride of the Valkyries”

40 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. Now32Z

The Collecting Net

Woods Hole New Bedford
A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work

at Woods Hole.

Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors
Annaleida 8, Cattell

Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

Mary Howe ton. tie ee temas:

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

The Reviewing of Scientific Reports

It has become customary for THE COLLECTING
NEt to print summaries of the reports on research
work presented at the Marine Biological Labora-
tory and the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries. An at-
tempt is made to obtain a critical review of each
paper from a competent investigator. In general
these reviews have been considered a very valu-
able addition to our magazine. It has always
seemed to us that, to have a real excuse to exist,
Tue Cotrectinc Net ought to have some out-
standing characteristics which would make it dis-
tinct among other publications. We feel that
accompanying each scientific report with a critical
review fulfils this requirement.

Too often reviewers of books have the habit of
outlining the contents of the volume, speaking
well of those parts which are good; but believing
it wiser to refrain from commenting on those
parts which are faulty. Sweet criticism may be
wise on some occasions, but in a scientific com-
munity it should be superfluous. The reviews in
Tue Cotrectine Net should be omitted if they
cannot be made more critical and helpful than
many book reviews printed in America. In
cases of this kind the summary by the author 1s
sufficient.

To be most effective we believe that the re-
viewer should

(1) Enlarge upon the subject of the paper
and relate it to other fields of research.

(2) Suggest possible applications of the re-
sults obtained.

(3) Make a sincere attempt to evaluate the
work; if criticisms are made they should be fully
justified. That is, criticism should be construct-
ive rather than destructive.

If these suggestions can be carried out in writ-
ing reviews their value will be very great. In-
telligent criticism will be welcomed by the author
of the original paper and it will be useful to every
member of the laboratory. The reviews should
be of particular value to the student and the young
investigator. They would serve to emphasize the
fact that there can sometimes be differences of
opinion among distinguished biologists. | Too
often a student is inclined to believe that the facts

ing address before the Thirteenth International

presented by a lecturer are not to be questioned.
It is enlightening to see experts in debate.

Not everyone at the laboratory can see the ad-
vantage of including reviews in THE COLLECTING
Ner. For them we would like to quote these
words of Professor August Krogh from the open-

Physiological Congress :

When I try to picture the evolution of physiological
truth I am struck by the similarity with the evolution
of life itself upon our planet. Ideas are conceived, —
facts are elaborated with immense joy and with infinite
labor. A large number die without ever coming to
the lieht of publication, and of those which are pub-
lished an appalling proportion sink to the bottom and
can only be dug out as fossils from dusty library
shelves. Many succumb in controversies with other
ideas and facts and a minority only survive in the
sense that they beget new ideas and give rise to the
discovery of new facts. I believe that this enormous
waste is on the whole inevitable and bound up insepar-
ably with the difficulties which physiological investga-
tion has to overcome. I look upon controversy especially
as one of the chief ways in which truth is approached.
We may fondly imagine that we are impartial seekers
after truth, but with a few exceptions, to which I know
that I do not belong, we are influenced and sometimes
strongly by our personal bias and we give our best
thoughts to those ideas which we have to defend.
Nevertheless we should of course all do our best to
avoid controversy, in the sense that we should take
every possible care to verify our faets and substantiate
our conclusions before publishing our results.

ADDITION TO THE DIRECTORY
INVESTIGATORS
Bernstein, A., res. asst. phys., New York. Br. 1.
Biddle, R. L., grad. fel. biol, California Inst. Tech.
Br ola:
Clark, Frances M., sec. to Dr. Clowes, Lilly Research —
Lab. Br. 328. ’
Corey, H. Irene, sec. to Dr. McClung, Pennsylvania.
Curtis, Mary E., grad. protozool., Yale. Br. 323.
Francis, Dorothy S., grad. fel. bot., Missouri. Br. 332.
Kerr, T., instr. biol., New York. Br. 217k.
Lazarich, Mara, res. asst. biol., New York. O. M. Base.
Lorberblatt, I., res. asst. bact., Washington. Br, 2. :
Matthews, S. A., instr. zool., Pennsylvania. Br, 117.
Miller, Helen M., Nat. Res. fel. genetics, Hopkins. Br.
126
Potter, T. S., res. fel. phys., Chicago. Br. 217
Steinbach, H. B., grad. protozool., Brown. Br, 233,
Stewart, Dorothy R., asst. prof. biol., Skidmore (N. Y.)
Br. 111.
Tocker, A. M., res. asst. bact., Washington Med. Br, 2.
STUDENTS
Forbes, J. M., grad. Harvard, bot.
BUILDINGS AND GROUNDS
(Correction)
Hilton, H. A., superintendent.

In the rush of last week there occurred a couple
of errors in THE Cottectinc Net. We wish to
ask those concerned to accept out sincere apolo-
gies. The most unfortunate one was that in the
note concerning Dr. Amberson’s change in po-
sition we did not state the facts. He is leaving
Pennsylvania to become Professor of Physiology~
and Head of the Department of Physiology in
the School of Medicine of the University of
Tennessee.

THE COLLECTING NET 41

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
1/:TAG NES eee orien Wes ilzez5l
iether 1:25 1:33
Nitliyge 7 tog a+ Sess 2:21 2 :26
|jivlliys GyeS ees cpap 3:10 Sells
{pet So) eee 3:54 SBS V/
[jc OS Areorarer 4:35 4:43
Je a eee 5:20 5:27
July 12 6 :00 6:11
July 13 6:45 6:51

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
gause the turning of the current to occur a half an
hour earlier or later than the times given above.

RECENT RESEARCH REPORTS
The following seminar reports were presented
at the Laboratory before the first calendar was
printed.
Tuesday, June 24—(1) Balduin Lucké and.
Morton McCutcheon: “The Effects of Injury on

Cellular Permeability to Water.” (2) M. M.
Brooks: “The Relation between rH and _ the
Penetration .of Oxidation-reduction Indicators.”
(3) S. C. Brooks: “Accumulation of Ions in
Living Cells.” (4) M. H. Jacobs, A. K. Parpart,
W. A. Smith and G. E. Shattuck: “The Per-
meability of the Erythrocyte to urea.”

Friday, June 2/—(1) L. V. Heilbrunn: ‘The
Action of Ultraviolet Rays on Arbacia Egg
Protoplasm.” (2) William C. Young: “The
Post-testicular History of Spermatozoa and Re-
production in the Male Guinea Pig” (3) B. H.
Willier: “The Developmental Relations of, the
Heart and the Liver in Chorio-allantoic Grafts”.
(4) E. E. Just: “Problems in Fertilization.”

THE UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD

The University Players Guild opened its third
season June 30 at West Falmouth with Leslie
Howard’s “Murray Hill”. This group is com-
posed entirely of college men and women who are

_endeavoring to establish a close connection be-

tween the universities and the professional stage.

Three new plays are in this summer’s list, ““The
Masque of Venice” by George Dunning Gribble,
“The Watched Pot” by “Saki” (H. H. Munro)
and Jean Ferguson Black’s dramatization of
Christopher Morley’s famous novel, “Thunder on
the Left”. The other plays to be presented are
“The Marquise” by Noel Coward, ‘““The Wooden
Kimono” by John Floyd, “The Makropoulos
Secret” by Karvel Capek, ‘““The Firebrand” by
Edwin Justus Mayer, ‘Hell Bent for Heaven” by
Hatcher Hughes, “A Kiss for Cinderella” by Sir

James Barrie.

Among the colleges represented are Harvard,
Princeton, Radcliffe, Vassar and Smith. The
members of the company are Leslie Cheek,
Margaret Cook, Lee Crowel, Alfred Dalrymple,
Julia Dorr, Henry Fonda, George Federovy,
Elizabeth Fenner, Aleta Freile, Susan Gill, Goory
Ivanoy-Rinovy, Elizabeth Johnson, Josephine Kip,
Charles Leatherbee, Joshua Logan, Myron Mc-
Cormack, John Morris, Royal Mygatt, Kingsley
Perry, Christine Ramsey, Barbara Rose, Faith
Seiple, Dorothy Schueller, Kent Smith, Thomas
Smith, Margaret Sullivan} Mrs. E. H. Sullivan,
Nancy Sullivan, Winifred Train, Margaret
Waldo, Bretaigne Windust.

THE WOODS HOLE CHORAL SOCIETY

The Woods Hole Choral Club begins its fourth
season this week under the leadership of Profes-
sor Ivan Gorokhoff. During the coming weeks
the members will prepare for their annual concert
in the Auditorium, In the program are numbers
ancient and modern, sacred and secular, by Italian,
Russian, and English composers. Anyone who
likes to sing is invited to see Mr. Gorokhoff
before or after the rehearsals which come each
Tuesday and Friday evening after the lecture.

CONTRIBUTES ONE OF SCHOLARSHIPS
(Continued from Page 29)

Baking Powder Controversy (2 volumes), com-

piled the Encyclopedia of Superstition, and dis-

covered a method of separating oxygen and nitro-

gen in the magnetic field.

As to his affiliations—here are just a few of
them. He is president of the Bouronville Realty
Company, President of the Bouronville Welding
Company, Chairman of the Chemical Advisory
Committee to the Department of Commerce, Vice
President, New York Electrical Society; Secre-.
tary of the International Acetylene Association;
Chairman of the Executive Committee of the
American Tariff League; Treasurer of the Fixed
Calendar League; member of the Board of Gover-
nors of the Synthetic Organic Chemical Manu-
facturers Association; member of the United
States Chamber of Commerce; member of the
Congressional Country Club, National Press Club,
Cosmos and the Union League Club.

In 1921, he prepared, for the United States
Government, ari exhaustive report on labor con-
ditions, wages and standards of living. He com-
piled a record of private foreign loans floated in
the United States from 1914 to 1927. He has
made a thorough study of the necessity of tariff
protection covering enactment and administra-
tion of tariff laws since 1897 and has been active
in creating and supporting organized effort to pro-
mote general knowledge of the American policy of
protection. ‘

42 THE COLLECTING NET

oa [ Vor. V. No. 32,

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Eugene C. DuBois of Cornell Medical
School has purchased one of the Warbasse cot-
tages on Penzance Point, where he and his family
are living this summer.

Dr. Kenneth C. Blanchard, assistant professor
of biochemistry at New York University, and
Mrs. Blanchard are in Woods Hole for a few
days. Dr. Blanchard has spent other summers
here working at the Laboratory.

Dr. and Mrs. S. C. Brooks have bought the
building which formerly housed the Sea Robin and
are moving it to their lot on the Breakwater Beach
to remodel into a cottage. .

Dr. Shiro Tashiro, for many years professor of
physiological chemistry at the University of Cin-
cinnati, has come back to Woods Hole after an
absence of seventeen years. When Dr. Tashiro
was here before, he was in charge of the Chemical
Room. Dr. Tashiro and his family are occupying
the Lyon’s cottage here.

Dr. P. S. Galtsoff of the Bureau of Fisheries is
making a survey of Pearl and Hermes Reef in
the Hawaiian Archipelago to determine the
feasibility of using it for a supply bed for Pearl
Harbor, near Honolulu. Dr. Galtsoff will not be
in Woods Hole at all this season, since this work
will occupy him until about the middle of Sep-
tember.

Delafield DuBois and his family of New York
have the Chambers’ cottage for the summer. Mr.
DuBois is carrying on research work in physiology
at the Laboratory, and Mrs. DuBois is doing some
writing at the cottage.

Dr. Harvey W. Wiley, for many years, director
of the bureau of foods, sanitation, and health of
“Good Housekeeping Magazine”, formerly chief
chemist of the United States Department of
Agriculture, and for many years professor of
agricultural chemistry at George Washington
University, died at his home in Washington, D.
C., June 30 at the age of 85.

Dr. and Mrs. Henry McE. Knower have been
entertaining their son, Henry, during the past
week. Some of us recall with much amusement
the time when he entered the canoe tipping con-
test in the Warbasse’s “Water Sports” many years
ago. Another person was needed at the last
moment to even up the number of persons partici-
pating. Dressed in neatly pressed white flannel
trousers he courageously stepped into a waiting
canoe, taking the part of the punter. One by one
his vanquished victims were plunged into the
water. Then he stepped ashore as well dressed
as ever!

Stones that were left after a storm of last
winter had washed out the sand, are being re-
moved from a portion of the Breakwater Bathing
Beach. Fine sand piled on the upper beach out
of reach of ordinary tides and storms will add
to the comfort of the bathers this summer while
taking their sun baths after the swim. This work
is being done by popular subscription, and it is
hoped that all who enjoy the beach will help out
in this work. Subscriptions may be handed to
Laurence G. Wesson, M. B. L., Brick Building,
No. 342.

Mrs. S. Morgulis, New Dormitory 308, wishes
to announce that she will be glad to show her
pieces of Russian handicraft and linen dresses
mornings and by appointment to anyone in-
terested.

The Woods Hole Log—an off-shot from THE
Corttectinc Net— may lie dormant until next
summer. This is accounted for by the fact that
a couple of its ‘“‘would-be-editors” are scheduled
for the U. S. Government Naval Science Cruise
during the summer.

We had hoped that one of the local organiza-
tions would take over The Log and publish it for
the benefit of some worthy cause. We still hope
so.

Through the generosity of Dr. and Mrs. Alfred
Meyer the Woods Hole Public Library has ac-
quired a beautiful set of books of general literary
interest. There are ten in the set at present and
more are to be added. These books are dedicated
to the memory of Dr. and Mrs. Meyer’s brother,
Harry Harvey Meyer.

On June 26 Albert Schofield swam across
Vineyard Sound. He plunged into the water at
East Chop at twelve o’clock and climbed upon the
rocks at the Nobska light house two hours and
nine minutes later. Mr. Schofield, who is twenty
three years of age, is in the real estate business
in East Weymouth.

The Sound has been crossed by a swimmer
only once before, although four persons are said
to have lost their lives in attempting this feat.
The other successful crossing was made in 1927
by a carpenter from Vineyard Haven.

A brush fire broke out on the peat bog on
the Brick Kiln Road between East Falmouth and
West Falmouth on June 30. The Woods Hole
Fire Department was called and spent several
hours fighting the flames, but were forced to
return after an unsuccessful battle.

The International Microbiological Congress will
convene in Paris from July 20 to 25.

ee ee

ae ee Se

——

Jury 5, 1930 } _THE COLLECTING NET 43

People Who Buy
SPENCER RESEARCH MICROSCOPES

Are not susceptible
to bargain appeal
They want:

Quality, Precision, }
Design, Usability. J

Always, their great re-
sponse is to that patri-
cian element which sets
fine things apart and so

Spencer Research
Microscopes

Nos. 7H, 14H and 7CBH

First visioned by Professor C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania, and then cre-
ated in their proudest traditions and kept free from the barterings of the market place.

Without special inducement they have met a demand that has no parallel in research
microscope history. There is now scarcely a college, university or research laboratory
in America that does not possess at least one of these fine microscopes.

Whoever want a research microscope, want the very latest and the best; they want a fork-type
substage which admits every possible substage accessory. They want a fine adjustment for focusing
the condenser because in recent years they have learned that fine focusing of objectives is not
enough, it should be supplemented by fine focusing of the condenser; they want a highly corrected
achromatic condenser; they want the advantage of case and comfort on the eyes provided by the
converging binocular tubes; they want a combination stage—plain and mechanical (2 in one); they
want a combined binocular and monocular body (2 in one) which avoids the necessity of changing
from one tube to another when changing from binocular to monocular vision and vice versa; they
may want a set of highly corrected apochromatic objectives, certainly the best achromatic obtain-
able.

All these and many more advantageous features, many of them patented by us, are
provided in Spencer Research Microscopes and explain why laboratory workers gener-
ally prefer the Spencer to others.

The company that makes the best research microscopes should be
able likewise to excel in making laboratory and student microscopes

aga SPENCER LENS COMPANY

MANUFACTURERS
| BUFFALO | Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineaseopes, Optical Measuring
USA Instruments. Dissecting Instruments, Ete.
BUFFALO, N. Y.

SPENCER

BUFFALQ
Ee

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

44 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 32,

NEW LARGE MODEL
FANZ AUTOMATIC MICROTOME KNIFE SHARPENER

||

we

automatic device for lifting and reversing the knife. This is operated by a cam shaft and levers as
shown in illustration and, as regularly sent out, is adjusted to lift and reverse the knife at approx-
imately one-half minute intervals. Height of angle iron stand, 32 inches.
Where a number of knives, including some of large size, are to be conditioned, we recommend the
use of the Large Model with this automatie attachment.
7207. Microtome Knife Sharpener, Fanz Automatic, Large Model, as above described, complete with
two plate glass discs and supply of paper dises 30 inches diameter, specially selected Emery,
Red Rouge; White Rouge, Castile Soap, Diamantine Powder, etc., and detailed directions for
use. With motor for 110 volts, 60 cyeles, a. ¢. ine FISD AS Fh Ya oie sae $650.00
Code Word ‘ : oe oon : So tsi 7 Khalf
NOTE—We also offer the original model Fanz Microtome Knife Sharpener, for sharpening knives up to
8 inches length, and without automatic lifting and reversing device at $235.00.
Sole Distributors

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S. A.

MICROTOME KNIFE SHARPENER, Fanz Automatic, Large Model, for sharpening knives up to 12
inches long. Consisting of a plate glass dise 30 inches diameter, with motor drive, and the Miller
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

Jury 5, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 45

Precision Plus »

THE unvaryingly high quality of B&L
Scientific instruments is not a matter of
chance. Starting in Bausch & Lomb’s own
optical glass plant, the largest in America,
every operation is controlled by experts
working to the most exacting standards of
precision—in fact precision plus. Every part
is inspected and tested many times. Opt-
ical and Mechanical Perfection is the nat-
ural result.

The 2500 Biological Colorimeter is equipped
with an optical system which transmits a maximum
Write for catolog H-23 for a description of this amount of light and provides a dividing line that

and other B & L Colorimeters. is practically invisible. The separable cups are
both adjustable, one being actuated by rack and
pinion. The instrument is an embodiment through-
out of characteristic B & L quality and precision.

2500 Biological Colorimeter

Be sure to visit the Bausch & Lomb
Annual Exhibit, July 28 to August 2

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO.

671 ST.PAUL STREET « ROCHESTER, N. Y. CREATERVIKION THROVCH

OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
= LOMB

OF

MAKERS ORTHOGON.EYEGLAS EEINISTE;S es © iRSs BES ER

VISION

46 : = THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 32,

MULTISPEED ATTACHMENT

for

International
Centrifuges

inereases available Relative Centri-
fugal Force from 2000 times gravity
to 20,000 times gravity.

Hematokrit Head of § tubes capacity.

6-Tube Head for tubes of 7 ml.
capacity.

(One of these attachments is in use in the Marine Biological Laboratories)

International Equipment Company

352 WESTERN AVE. BOSTON, MASS.

ee
SECTION THROUGH TWO TRAYS, SHOWING NESTING FEATURES

This tray will carry forty-eight l-inch slides or thirty-two 1%%-inch slides, or
twenty-four 2-inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well protected from accident
or dust. Trays nest together. Width and breadth the same, so that they may be
nested in either direction. All metal—no paint or varnish to affect slides.

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE

THIRTY-SIXTH STREET AND WOODLAND AVE., PHILADELPHIA, PA.

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 47

Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the
slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the
markings can be washed off with water
so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again
and again.

Use Pen
or
Pencil

“RITE ON”

Non-corrosive semi-white,
medium thickness

All four sides ground and polished.

$1.75 Gross

Sample gross sent prepaid on
receipt of check.

Please mention dealers name

Crayv-ApAms Company
Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
models, surgical instruments, etc., and
botanical models, and specimens, skeletons,
charts, etc.

a EE ET
————————————————————————————

PHYSICIANS’
AND LABORATORY
MICROSCOPE

ESA-105

Magnifications: 56x to 900x

Price $132 f. 0. b. N. Y.

Simplified Mechanical Stage 12 cm dia.

Illuminating Apparatus with rack and

pinion. Abbe Condenser n.a. 1.2 with iris.
Quadruple Nosepiece.

Achromatie Objectives: Huygens Oeculars:

8 n.a.0.20 7x
40 n.a.0.65 10x
90 n.a.1.25 (oil im.) 10x

A good dark field outfit is obtained by adding:
Cardioid condenser $22, extra for oil im. with
iris $4. Compensating ocular 15x: $8.50.

A satchel type of carrying case can be supplied
instead of the standard cabinet at an additional
cost of $4.00.

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

|

48

THE COLLECTING NET

BIOLOGICAL

These dishes are made from clear,
heavy glass, have a capacity to the
brim of 350 ec., inside height 45
mm., inside diameter 100 mm., height
over all 50 mm. The bottoms are flat
and the dishes will stack perfectly.
This type of bowl has been in use
for a number of years at the Marine
Biological Laboratory at Woods
Hole, Dartmouth College, DePauw
University, and elsewhere.

It is applicable to work in embryo-
logy, especially with chick embryos;
to small aquatic organisms, living or
preserved; to the development of
Echinoderms and other eggs. Fur-
ther uses will be readily apparent
to the biologist.

The dish fits conveniently under a
microscope. The rounded inside
permits easy cleaning. When stacked
or nested, the dishes can be easily
transported and stored, and evapora-
tion of liquids is inhibited because of
the accurate fit.

6734 BIOLOGICAL SPECIMEN
DISH, Each 25c

Per Dozen, $2.50, Per Gross $23.00

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

Rocuester,N-Y.

[ Vout. V. No. 32,

DS ae SERVICE

Plant and Animal Forms

This, the most recently developed branch of
the Turtox Service Department, is a plan whereby
the teacher may have unfamiliar plants and
animals found in his locality identified. Since
making the first announcement of this service
(April 1920) a great variety of forms have been
identified. These include reptiles, amphibians,
mammal skulls, insects, parasitic worms, plants
of many kinds, ete.

This identification service is made possible only
by: first, the experience of the Turtox Staff
which is well trained in the various branches of
Biology; secend, the cooperation of specialists on
various forms; third, the immense comparative
collections of specimens kept in the Turtox
laboratories.

There is no charge for this service and asking
for assistance does not obligate you in any way.
If you care to use this service write to us for
further information. Standard record sheets,
labels and instructions for shipment will be sent
on tequest.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
(Incorporated)
761-763 East 69th Place
CHICAGO, ILL., U. S. A.

Hydrogen lon Apparatus

Electrometric and Colorimetric
Indicator and buffer solutions.

Colorimetric comparators for testing
water, sewage, and other materials.

Special solutions for blood and water
testing.

Write for further information stating
in detail your requirements.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897
HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

a,

—

eee —

ee

se

Jury 5, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 49

AGAIN Leitz leads

in the perfection of College and Laboratory Micro-
scopes. Our new Fall Student and Laboratory
Microscope was received with enthusiasm and a
number of classes are now being completely
equipped. i:

In design and proportions it adapts itself admirably
for laboratory work. Its rugged construction as-
sures years of satisfactory use.

The Leitz Standard of Accuracy which cannot be
associated with quantity production or hurried
workmanship, is distinctly evident in this model.

a Ee LELZ Ine

60 E. 10th Street,
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Write for Pamphlet No. 1168 (CN)

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for
SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, ete.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Crav-Apams Company

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Botanical and Biologiacl Models and preparations
and Skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 32,

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Woods Hole and Falmouth

Compliments of

PENZANCE GARAGE
WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Day or Night
Phone 652

A. L. A.
Towing

IDEAL
RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing

Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH
(Episcopal)
The Rey. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion - - - - 7:30 a.m,
Morning Prayer - - - - 11:00 a.m,
Evening Prayer - - - - 7:30 p.m.

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Phone 239-W Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

THE QUALITY SHOP
Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes
and Souvenirs
Ask for things you do not see,
Main Street Woods Hole

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street

Woods Hole, Mass.

N. E. TSIKNAS

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

5O eS AA NR yA A AE a aI ow"

Jury 5, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD

Presents

“The Wooden Kimono”

A Mystery Comedy by John Floyd

Week of July 5-12

Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
Tel. Falmouth 1250

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10e DEPARTMENT

| KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.

Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Monday July 7th — Tuesday July 8th
Authentic Pictures of
“BYRD AT THE SOUTH POLE”

Wednesday, July 9th (Matinee 2:30)
Thursday, July 10th
JANET GAYNOR and CHARLES FARREL in
“HIGH SOCIETY BLUES”

Friday, July 11th, (Matinee 2:30)
WILLIAM POWELL in
“THE SHADOW OF THE LAW”

Saturday, July 12th
CLAUDETTE COLBERT - CHARLES RUGGLES

in
“YOUNG MAN OF MANHATTAN”

aie Marine
Biological
Laboratory

Supply
Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
’ exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

52 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 32)

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
works, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, ete.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is usel for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and inse ts for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examin? a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard”
microscopic high power objectives and oculars,

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address
Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Crav-Apams Company

117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

THE POSTTESTICULAR HISTORY OF
SPERMATOZOA IN THE GUINEA PIG

Dr. WittrAm C. YounGc

SATURDAY, JULY 12, 1930

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Corres 25 Crs.

Instructor in Biology, Brown University

Spermatozoa in the guinea pig attain what
appears to be their full structural development

while still a part of the
germinal epithelium. They are
then carried through the rete
tubules and vasa _ efferentia
into the nine to nine and one-
half foot long ductus epididy-
midis. Diverse opinions are
held as to the significance of
this long passage. All, how-
ever, involve either of two
ideas. The first is that sper-
matozoa enter the epididymis
as immature cells which are
strengthened and acquire their
capacity for being stimulated
to motion in consequence of

some specific action of the
epididymal — secretion. The
second is that spermatozoa

enter the epididymis as mature
cells, the vitality of which is
(Continued on Page 57)

Guinea Pig,

Dr. William C. Young

The Metabolism of Sarcina Lutea,

Dr. R. W. Gerard
The Last Heath Hen,
Professor Alfred O. Gross

Respiration of Mammalian Erythroe ytes,

Dr. L. Michaelis

Evening Lecture. Dr.

Evening Seminar.

M. B. L. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 15, 8:00 P. M

professor of zoology, Johns Hop-
kins University, “Heredity and
Mutation in Relation to Environ-
ment in Protozoa.”

FRIDAY, JULY 18, 8:00 P. M.

Vera Koehring,
“Some Cytological Relationships in

H. 8S. Jennings

THE METABOLISM OF SARCINA LUTEA
Dr. R.
Associate Professor of Physiology, University

W. GERARD

of Chicago

The separate cocci of an old strain of Sarcina
lutea were cultured twenty-four hours on simple

agar media at 37° C. suspended
in water and washed twice by
centrifuging. The final yellow
paste was homogenized in the
desired fluid. Very little debris
was present and a uniform
suspension of isolated cells,
average diameter 1.274 ex-
tremes 1.1- 1.44, was easily
obtained. Direct counts were
made by a _ haemocytometer
and the viability was checked

Narcosis.” by plate counts. The two
Eleanor H. Slifer, “The Mitotic Ac- | usually agreed well and
tivity in the Developing Grass- showed, further, no regular
hopper Egg.” growth or death of the bac-
A. F. Huettner, Spermatogenesis in teria in the course of the run.

Drosophila Melanogaster.”

Hope Hibbard, “Cytological Studies
on the Silk Gland of Bombyx
Mori.”

One half or one cubic. centi-
meter of suspension was used
in each experiment, lcc. con-
taining about 5 x 10 bacteria,
(Continued on Page 56)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Posttesticular History of Spermatozoa in the

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Root,
Dr. George H. A. Clowes .... he nO)
53 Ferrous Iodide, Unsaturated Fatty Acids and
Vitamin A; A Reply to the Criticism of Dr.

. BS) Ae:

Unsaturated Fatty

Mathews on the Paper

“Ferrous Iodide,
Acids, and Vitamin A”,

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Gerard,
Dr. Matilda Moldenhauer Brooks 57
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Young,

Professor Charles R. Stockard.

The Effect of Carbon Dioxide upon the Oxygen
Consumption and the Rate of Cleavage of

Arbacia Eggs,
Drs. Walter

54 Professor F. ©. Chidester..................- 61
The Phi Sigma Society,

55 Professor Paul B. Sears.... eee as)
A New psevute for Fisheries Research,

Dr. Carl. L. Hubbs... .. 64
The Musical Program at the M. B. Th ere;

58 Dr. Henry McE. Knower ab 65
Lectures at Cold Spring Harbor............... . 65
Mhembalboratomy i @lnbn ses ene nen: . 66
Gurrents)pan athe) Elo emcee soi cere eerste cay gone (ha)
Ttemis vos lmherewtes <sym one rar tee mc meee 67

S. Root and Charlotte Haywood 59

Se

on
-

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 33

THE LAST HEATH HEN
ProFessor ALFRED ©. Gross,

Derartment of

On Martha’s Vineyard Island just across the
Sound from the Marine Biological Laboratory 1s
the home of the lone survivor of the Heath Hen.
The death of this individual will also mean the
death of its race, and then another bird will have
taken its place among the endless array of extinct
forms. The numbers of Heath Hen have heen
closely followed by ornithologists and since 1908
a detailed census has been taken of the birds each
year. For the first time in the history of orni-
thology a species has been studied and photo-
graphed in its normal environment down to the
very last individual.

In early colonial times the Heath Hen was very
abundant in favorable places from Maine to the
Carolinas. The bird’s habit of congregating in
open fields and the ease with which it was tricked
and killed by the market gunners were contri-
buting factors to its rapid decline soon after white
man and his fire arms came to America. By 1870
the Heath Hen was exterminated from the main-
land and from that time on has been restricted
to its last stronghold on Martha’s Vineyard. It
is remarkable that a bird subjected to all the
vicissitudes of disease and enemies has survived
in that limited area for over a half century. The
prolongation of the life of the bird on that island
has been due to the interest taken in it by the
State of Massachusetts, conservation organiza-
tions, bird clubs and individuals who have done all
in their power to save the bird. The State De-
partment of Conservation has expended $70,000
and thousands more have been contributed by
individuals in the unprecedented efforts to prevent
the bird from being exterminated.

Many attempts were made in the past when the
birds were abundant, to transplant them to other
favorable places on the mainland and to other
islands such as Long Island, New York, one of
their former strongholds. Furthermore the most
experienced sportsmen and game breeders were
unable to breed the birds in captivity indicating
that the Heath Hen was very sensitive to any
radical change in its environment and that it
would not yield to such methods of conservation.
All of the many experiments of introducing the
Western Prairie Chicken, its nearest relative, to
the East have likewise proven unsuccessful.
Efforts to increase the numbers of the Heath
Hen on Martha’s Vineyard by the establishment
of a reservation in 1908 met with temporary
success. The birds increased from less than 100
to an estimated number of 2,000 in 1916. Un-
fortunately a destructive fire swept over the entire

F Zoology, Bowdoin College

breeding-area on May 12, 1916 which in the
course of a few hours undid the work of many
years. The following year there were less than
150 birds remaining, and the majority of these
were males. There was a slight rally in numbers
during the following few years, but the birds
were too far gone to overcome the surmounting
uncontrollable conditions of extensive inter-
breeding, declining sexual vigor, the condition of
excess males and, worst of all, disease. In 1920
many birds were found dead, or in a weak and
helpless condition, indicating that disease was
exacting its toll. The Heath Hen is very sus-
ceptible to poultry diseases and when domestic
turkeys were introduced to the Island in large

THE LAST HEATH HEN

numbers the dreaded disease “ Blackhead’? came
with them. The turkeys and Heath Hen fed on
the same fields and thus the disease was readily
transmitted to the native birds. The Heath Hen
continued to decrease in numbers, and by 1925
it was apparent that they had reached their lowest
ebb in history. The Federation of the Bird Clubs
of New England, Inc., then came to the front and
offered to raise $2,000 annually to support addi-
tional warden service. In spite of this splendid
cooperation, the birds, after two years of effort
on the part of all concerned, continued to decrease.

The 1927 spring census showed thirteen birds,
only two of which were females. In the autumn
seven birds were seen and by April 1928 the flock

“Jury 12, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET 55

dwindled to three males. During the fall of 1928
only two birds were seen and after December 8
but one was reported. This bird was photo-
graphed from a blind, on April 2, 1929 at the
farm of James Green located on the State high-
way between Edgartown and West Tisbury. At
that time it was the common expectation that the
bird would step out of existence before the end
of another year. It was seen regularly until May
1, 1929, but after that date it disappeared among
the scrub oaks to live in seclusion, as was cus-
-tomary for the Heath Hen to do in the past, dur-
ing the summer months. After the moulting
Season it again appeared at the Green farm in
October to announce to the world that it was still
alive. It was seen at irregular intervals during
the winter, and after the first warm days of March
it appeared daily at the traditional ‘booming field”
at the Green farm. The State Department again
placed an observation blind in the field and baited
the bird for over a month in order to make it
“possible to study and to photograph the bird at
close range during the period of the census.
During the springtime of former years the
_ Heath Hen appeared in the open fields in the
early morning hours following dawn and again
in the late afternoon preceding sunset, to go
rough their weird and extraordinary courtship
performances. This year the lone bird generally
Hew out of the scrub oaks and sailed gracefully
to a point near the center of the meadow. After
_-alighting it erected its head and carefully scruti-
ized its surroundings, seeming to make sure that
all was safe before continuing to search for food.
The bird presented a pathetic figure as it stood
_ out there all alone without any companions save
the crows that had come to share the food in-
tended for the Heath Hen. Though it soon
Started feeding it was ever on the alert for pos-
sible danger. Its eyes were much keener than

*

those of the observer inside the blind. On several
occasions the bird crouched in the grass, his colors
blending so perfectly with the surroundings that
he dissappeared from view. A minute or two
later a hawk would swoop over the field, explain= .
ing the reason for the Heath Hen’s behavior. No
doubt the alertness of this individual has been an
important factor in its preservation. The feeding
in the open was a businesslike performance and
during the time of the census was not interrupted
by the booming and cackling characteristic of the
courtship performance, which in former years
occupied the greater part of the time of the males
during the visits to the open fields. Not once did
the male inflate his curious orange sacs and boom,
for there was no female to admire him and no
male to challenge him to such an exertion. Its
spirit must be broken but nevertheless it seems to
enjoy its life and its freedom. It is in excellent
health, fat and plump and in perfect plumage.

The State Department has been asked to collect
and preserve this last bird for science, but from
a sentimental point of view how much better it is
to let this individual live in its natural environ-
ment among the scrub oaks on the sandy plains
of Martha’s Vineyard than it would be to put it
in a cage or to mount it and have it collect dust
on some museum shelf.

How long this bird will live no one can safely
predict ; its going is inevitable, but ornithologists,
bird lovers and sportsmen the world over will
have the satisfaction of knowing that all that
could be done by the State, bird clubs, and
individuals has been done to save this bird from
extinction. The State Department has assuréd us
that the bird will be allowed to live, and when
death comes, whether it is due to old age, disease
or violence, we will at least know that the life of
the last Heath Hen was not wilfully snuffed out
by man.

RESPIRATION OF MAMMMALIAN ERYTHROCYTES!
Wy Dr. L. MicHaetis

Non-nucleated erythrocytes are supposed to
ix _ have no or no appreciable respiration (i. e. oxygen
x consumption ) but only fermentation (i. e. gly-
_ colysis with lactic acid as an end product).
Uarrop and Barron showed, however, that in
the presence of certain dye stuffs which have the
property of being capable of a reversible oxida-
tion and reduction, a consumption of oxygen
takes place provided the erythrocytes are sus-
pended in a sugar containing medium. It is
shown in this paper that aqueous extracts of

.

z "

Member of the Rockefeller Institute
witH Dr. K. SALomon

various organs exert an effect similar to that of
methylene blue, especially extracts of liver, then
kidney, spleen, and lymph nodes; whereas muscle,
brain and blood serum contain very little or none
of the active principle. The active principle
could not be isolated from the extracts. It was
shown to be unaffected by carbon monoxide, and
not to be identical with a sulfhydril body.

1An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 3.

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 33

THE METABOLISM OF SARCINA LUTEA
(Continued from Page 53)

dry weight 12 mgms. The oxygen consumption
(Qos cmm Os per mgm. dry weight per hour,
and R. O. and acid production were studied with
the Warburg methods, acid production also by
means of indicators. All experiments were
carried out at 20°C.

For water suspensions in a roughly steady state
the Qo, averaged 26, or each coccus consumed
three times its volume of oxygen per hour. For
two to three hours after mounting the Qo», was
higher, highest at first, falling to the steady level
rather rapidly and then slowly decreasing further,
over many hours. The initially high values were
increased when N» was bubbled through a sus-
pension for an hour before mounting, and much
diminished by bubbling 02 E. This and other
evidence indicates that the initial excess oxygen
consumed was used to discharge an oxygen debt
developed as a result of partial anoxia during
preparation.

The addition of glucose increased the Qos two
to three times, the initial excess as well as the
later level. In water the R. Q. was 0.67, in
glucose 0.95, at first, and 0.71 after seven hours—
the average being 0.81. In some cases the extra
oxygen consumed in the presence of glucose was
more than enough to oxidize all the added sugar.
These observations speak for a “specific dynamic
action” of glucose on these organisms. Larger
amounts of glucose did not give higher Qo values
than smaller ones, but the higher values were
more persistent.

Methylene blue also caused an increased Qoz
over twice that in water, though the rise was less
persistent than for glucose. Glucose and methy-
lene blue together gave a greater increase than
the sum of their separate effects.

Small amounts of sodium lactate, up to 0.2%,
caused a great rise in Qos, up to twenty times that
in water, but the rise was not maintained and the
respiration returned to normal in one to two
hours. The extra oxygen used in this time was
that required to completely oxidize the added
lactate. Larger amounts gave more persistent,
but not greater, increases of the Qos and not all
of the added lactate was oxidized. The incomplete
oxidation was not due to the accumulation of end
products, since diluting the suspension decreased
rather than accellerated the rate of oxidation.
Nor was the progressive alkalinity, due to
NaHCO; replacing Na lactate, a factor since
buffering at pH 7 or 8 was immaterial.

Sodium chloride, up to 1.0 %, had no influence
or respiration, and cyanide in M/100 concentra-
tion in no way inhibited the oxygen consumption
in water nor the increase in methylene blue or
water nor the increase in methylene blue or
glucose.

For a spherical tissue or cell the following

equation for oxygen penetration was developed:

Go AN /GeD)
where Co is. the minimum _ concentration
of oxygen at the cell surface which will

suffice for penetration to the center; A is the rate
of oxygen consumption per unit volume; r the
radius; and D the diffusion coefficient for oxygen
through the cell substance. For the known A in
water and r of these cells, and assuming Krogh’s
constant for a sheet of fascia, Co—0.004% Os
that is, Qos should be independent of Coy until
the latter falls below this value. The critical
O, concentration (Co) was determined in
water and glucose solutions and was, re-
spectively, 1.0 and 25 + %0o. Rapid
shaking had no effect. Either, therefore,
the D used is entirely too large—O: might diffuse
less readily through cell membranes than between
cells, as is true for so many substances—or certain
assumptions implied in the derivation of the above
equation are invalid. These are : (1) that the
respiration is uniform in all cell regions and (2)
that the respiration of any one region is indepen-
dent of the oxygen pressure in that region pro-
viding it is greater than zero. The second
assumption is almost surely incorrect, but a
mathematical examination of the true function
cannot be given here. In regard to the first, it
can be shown that:
€/Co 35/2

where Co is the critical concentration of oxygen
as before and r the cell radius. If all the oxygen
is consumed with a central core, as a nuclear
region, 11, the required oxygen concentration is
C,. Thus, if respiration is limited to a nuclear
region, th the cell diameter, C; = 10 Co.

After a period in nitrogen, admission of small
amounts of oxygen, up to 0.5%, cause the cocci
to respire, but the Qo» is never up to normal and
falls with time after admitting the oxygen.
Accurate gas mixtures containing very small
amounts of QO» are easily made in the manometers.
These are filled with Nz at atmospheric pressure,
10,000 mm. Brodie solution. The columns are
lowered to give a “negative” pressure, the stop-
cock opened an instant, and the columns adjusted
to bring the volume of gas to its initial value. The
mm. rise of pressure due to air, divided by 5 and
‘by 10,000 and multiplied by 100 gives the per-
centage oxygen.

When air or pure oxygen is admitted
after a period of anoxia the Qo» at once
rises to very high values, far beyond those seen
initially, and in several hours falls to the
level of cells kept in oxygen from the start.
This is due to the oxygen debt and the extra
oxygen so consumed may be over half that which
would have been used during the period of anoxia.
It is greater after long than short periods without

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 57

oxygen and greater in glucose than in water—as
if the sugar had stimulated anaerobic processes
as well as aerobic.

Such a debt might represent either the accumu-
lation of metabolites by anaerobic reactions and
their subsequent oxidation, as the lactic acid
‘system of muscle, or the depletion of an oxidizing
reserve to continue oxidations in nitrogen and its
replenishment when oxygen is admitted, as in the
nerve. In the latter case there should be an
anaerobic production of CO, and the later excess
Qos when oxygen is admitted should not be ac-
companied by an equivalent outburst of COs.

Neither of these is the case, so such a reserve
‘seems to be excluded. On the other hand, there
is no evidence of accumulation of acid metabolites
either by direct colorimetric pH determination or
by the manometric measurement of CO. liberated
from bicarbonate. Either the cell buffers are
able to take up large amounts of acid or, more
probably, non or weakly acid-metabolites accumu-
late under anaerobic conditions.

Dr. I. S. Falk of the department of bacteriology was
an active collaborator in part of this work.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 3.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. GERARD
Dr. Matitpa MoroenHAuER Brooks
Research Associate in Biology, University of Culifornia

The study of metabolic activity of organisms,
which has been so ably attacked by Dr. Gerard,
suggests the attempts of others to correlate such
findings with oxidation-reduction potential of the
solution in which bacteria are present.

In the following paragraphs there are discussed
some of these researches which relate to Dr.
Gerard’s experiments.

Cannan, Cohen and Clark found that various
bacteria are poorly poised with respect to electro-
motively active substances at any one moment, as
indicated by the orderly drift toward negative
potentials in the course of time. The work of
Aubel and Aubertin shows that the growth of
bacteria was at its maximum only if the oxidation-
reduction potential of the external solution was
properly poised with respect to electromotively
active substances specific for the organism. Such
substances as cysteine, the more negative reversi-
ble dyes, the sugars, lactate, fumarate and pyruvic
acid may be mentioned in this category. On the
addition of one of the above mentioned substances,
there is a temporary halt in the drift, showing that
the solution has been temporarily poised.

Rapkine concluded that. the establishment of a
proper potential was essential. He placed fer-
tilized sea urchin eggs in boiled sea water from
which O had been removed, and to which methy-
lene blue had been added, and found that they de-
veloped normally, whereas the controls without

methylene blue did not develop. Barron also
noted the effect of methylene blue on the oxygen
consumption of sea urchin eggs, and concluded
that the dye plays a catalytic role.

It is interesting to note that in Dr. Gerard’s
work, large amounts of glucose give the same
effects as small amounts, indicating that the re-
duction intensity rather than the capacity factor is
affected. When glucose and methylene blue are
used together, a greater increase than the sum
of their separate effects is obtained, which sug-
gests another factor besides intensity, as for ex-
ample, the catalytic role of the dye (?)

The lack of effect of cyanide on O con-
sumption, has been commented upon by Dixon
and Elliott who were able to inhibit with cyanide
only between 40 and 90% of the respiration of
animal tissues thereby showing that the remaining
10 to 60% of the respiration is not sensitive to
cyanide, and therefore belongs to another system.
Emerson has also obtained a reduction in the
respiration of Chlorella when glucose and HCN
were used; but when these plants were caused to
become hetertrophic, no such effect was found.

The failure of Sarcina lutea to produce acids
other than COyz is paralleled by experiments of
M. M. Brooks on B subtilis. Here there was no
decrease in pH at least for several hours, provided
that the CO» was continually removed.

SPERMATAZOA IN THE GUINEA PIG

(Continued from Page 53)

preserved by some action of the epididymal
secretion.

Neither idea is supported by recently accumu-
lated data. Instead, they suggest that the
epididymis provides an environment in which
stimuli to spermatozoon. development which are
not different from those found in the testis are
present, that spermatozoa enter the epididymis
as unripe cells which are incapable of functioning,

and that much of the time consumed by them in
passing through the epididymis is necessary for
the completion of their development. Once
functional maturity is attained, however, there is
no influence which preserves them indefinitely and
unless they are discharged, they age and become
incapable of functioning.

At this stage in their history the undischarged
spermatozoa are not eliminated in the urine, or

58 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 33

phagocytized within the genital tract, or resorbed
within the seminal vesicles as others have claimed.
Instead, they appear to undergo a liquefaction or
dissolution in situ.

A last aspect of the problem concerns a possible
relationship between the age of spermatozoa and
certain foetal and gestational abnormalities.

More than 480 female guinea pigs were insemi-
nated with spermatozoa ranging in age from the
very young spermatozoa in the proximal end of
the epididymis to spermatozoa which had been
isolated in the epididymides by operative proce-
dure and allowed to age for 20 and 25 days.
Among other things, the percentages of stillborn
and aborted offspring which were delivered by
females impregnated with the variously aged
spermatozoa were recorded.

The percentages of stillborn offspring were
fairly constant throughout and as high among the
controls as among the experimental animals.

The situation was quite different, however, for
aborted offspring. The percentage was lowest,
only 3.6, among the females inseminated with the
youngest spermatozoa. It rose to 9.0% when the
somewhat older sperm from the distal end were
used. Since we now know that spermatozoa which
have become old are not eliminated from the
genital tract, this increase is to be expected 1f any
of the abnormalities causing abortions are attri-
butable to the excessive age of spermatozoa.
When the spermatozoa which had aged 20 and
25 days were used, approximately 20% of the
offspring were abortuses.

Tentatively, these data are interpreted as sug-
gesting (1) that stillbirths and abortions may be
two different phenomena traceable to different
causes, and (2) that in the course of the regressive
changes which occur in spermatozoa during the
last part of their period of residence in the
epididymis, there may be a period when they
function imperfectly, such imperfections being
reflected in the structure of the embryo and
foetus. Both suggestions are tentative, pending
the accumulation of additional data, and neither
is regarded as a conclusion.

Recapitulating, it is believed that a fairly com-
plete account of spermatozoon history from the
time they leave the testis until they have reached
the distal end of the vas deferens can be given for
at least one species. Spermatozoa are believed to
be carried out of the testis into the ductus
epididymidis while they are functionally im-
mature. Much of the time consumed in passing
through this nine foot tubule is necessary for a
completion of their development. Once this is
attained, there is no influence which preserves
them in an optimal functional condition and they
begin to age and ultimately to become liquefied.
At this time there seems to be no general escape
of spermatozoa from the distal end of the tract
except during copulations and through dissolu-
tion or liquefaction. There may be a_ short
period when their inability to function perfectly
is responsible for certain foetal and gestational
abnormalities.

A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on June 27.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. YOUNG
Dr. CHartres R. STocKARD
Professor and Head of the Department of Anatomy, Cornell University Medical School

If it is a fact that spermatozoa, not promptly
discharged, age and become incapable of function-
ing while in the epididymis, why then do infre-
quently mated male guinea pigs sire equally as
successful litters as do frequently used males?
The operative procedure of tying the proximal
end of the epididymis and vas deferens, to which
Dr. Young resorted, may promote the degenera-
tion of spermatozoa as a number of observations
on the effects of ligating the vas deferens would
suggest.

Dr. Young claims contrary to general belief
that no spermatozoa are normally passed out
except during copulation. If this be true the
operative procedure seems unnecessary for testing
the normal effects of aging on the sperm. A more
desirable test would be simply to mate males after
long and infrequent intervals.

In making such tests it is highly important to
establish a reproductive record for all females
used and their expected litter-size-production

should be determined. Experience shows that
intrauterine absorption and partial litter deaths
are more frequent than actual abortions. Abor-
tions seem rather to occur in colonies not properly
handled and fed.

It would be of interest if Dr. Young could
demonstrate an actual difference in nature between
abortions and still-births as he suggests. How-
ever, as far as present evidence goes for mammals
in general the one difference is that of the time
of occurrence. ‘

Should Young’s present results, which he fairly
states are only in the preliminary stage, prove
correct one might suggest a new role of possible
importance for the epididymis. If ageing and
liquefaction of spermatozoa normally occur in this
tubule then the more resistant and vigorous sperm
are better able to withstand the conditions and
more certainly pass through to fertilize the eggs.
The epididymis might thus serve as an apparatus
for the selection of the superior spermatozoa.

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 319)

THE EFFECT OF CARBON DIOXIDE UPON THE OXYGEN CONSUMPTION
AND THE RATE OF CLEAVAGE OF ARBACIA EGGS!
Dr. Watter S. Root
Assistant Professor of Physiology, College of Medicine, Syracuse University
Dr. CHARLOTTE Haywoop
Assistant Professor of Physiology, Vassar College

The interrelationship between oxygen and car-
bon dioxide in supporting the respiration of
higher animals is a matter of fundamental im-
portance. Since experiments upon such forms
are often difficult to interpret, because of the
number of uncontrollable factors, single cells have
been used in the present study.

Experiments have been carried out with the
fertilized eggs of Arbacia punctulata using the
technique developed by Amberson (1928). Eggs
from twelve to fifteen females were used in
each experiment. After fertilization, the egg
suspensions were divided into two parts which
were equal to within ten per cent as measured by
the respiratory exchange in control experiments.
The suspensions were placed in tonometers and
equilibrated simultaneously with air and different
carbon dioxide tensions. The respiratory ex-
changes were measured at 20.6 plus or minus 0.3°
C. At the beginning and at the end of the experi-
ments which lasted from two to four hours,
samples of gas were secured from the tonometers
and analyzed in duplicate by means of a Haldane-
Henderson gas analyzer with a nitrogen side tube.
The analyses were controlled by daily air analyses.
The oxygen and carbon dioxide in the gas and in
the sea water were calculated for the beginning
and for the end of the experiments using the
absorption coefficients given by Kritmmel (1907.)

It was found that for each ten mm. Hg in-
crease in carbon dioxide tension up to 30 mm.,
there was a decrease in the oxygen consumption
of 21 per cent. At 35 to 40 mm. Hg carbon
dioxide tension the curve bends sharply and
further increases in the carbon dioxide tension
have a relatively slight effect upon the rate of
oxygen consumption.

The average of the respiratory quotients
obtained in air in thirty-two determinations was
0.71. The respiratory quotients in the presence
of carbon dioxide must be interpreted with cau-
tion for they range irregularly between 0.136
and 1.286 with an average value of 0.67. The
‘carbon dioxide production decreases parallel with
the oxygen consumption as the carbon dioxide
tension increases.

In order to determine whether carbon dioxide
decreased the rate of oxygen consumption of fer-
tilized Arbacia eggs by virtue of its penetrating
power, or whether it acted upon the surface of
the egg, a group of experiments was carried out

using hydrochloric acid which enters cells with
difficulty, if at all. The hydrogen ion concentra-
tion was determined by means of a quinhydrone
electrode. The pH so obtained was compared
with the pH of sea water at different carbon
dioxide tensions as determined by Henderson and
Cohn (1916).

The results of these experiments show a linear
depression of the rate of oxygen consumption
beginning at about pH 6.2 (corresponding to
about 35 mm. Hg carbon dioxide tension), and
falling to about 62 per cent of the control at pH
5.6 (corresponding to 140 mm. Hg carbon
dioxide tension).

The differences in the results obtained by the
action of carbon dioxide and hydrochloric acid
upon the rate of oxygen consumption of fertilized
Arbacia eggs may perhaps be interpreted as dif-
ferences in the ability of the two acids to penetrate
the cell membrane. This would indicate that the
seat of oxidations is not limited to the cortex.

It is, of course, possible that the relatively pro-
found effect of carbon dioxide upon the rate of
oxygen consumption of these cells may not be
due to any change in the intracellular acidity, but
to some specific effect of the carbon dioxide
molecule.

Experiments concerning the effects of carbon
dioxide upon the rate of cleavage were also
carried out. Sea water was equilibrated with
different carbon dioxide tensions in a tonometer.
At the same time a tonometer for the control was
equilibrated with room air. Ten minutes after
fertilization 0.9cc. of an egg suspension was in-
troduced into each of the equilibrated tonometers.
A temperature of 20.6 plus or minus 0.5°C. was
maintained in all experiments except those of
eight hours or more duration; in these longer
experiments the variations in temperature were
not more than 2.0°C.

After exposure to the gas of the tonometer for
varying lengths of time samples of the eggs were
obtained for observation without the admission
of air. Further division of the egg samples was
prevented by fixing them in a weak solution of
formaldehyde in sea water. Observation of the
eggs consisted of counts made to determine the
percentage of eggs showing the first cleavage.
These percentages were plotted against the time

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 3.

60 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 33>

after insemination at which the samples were
taken. The time required for cleavage in fifty
per cent of the eggs has been arbitrarily chosen
as a measure of the time required for cleavage.

The difference in the time required for cleavage
in fifty per cent of the eggs in the control tono-
meter and in the tonometer containing carbon
dioxide is the delay caused by the presence of
carbon dioxide. Thus 10 mm. Hg carbon dioxide
tension causes a delay of about 12 minutes; 20
mm., a delay of 25% minutes; 30 mm., a delay of
48 minutes. Above 35 to 40 mm. Hg carbon
dioxide tension, small increments of the gas were
found to inhibit cleavage to a degree which was
proportionately much greater, and the curve,
therefore, ascends steeply at this range of car-
bon dioxide tension. In all control experiments
ninety-five to one hundred per cent cleavage was
obtained.

Abnormalities of cleavage were found at some
of the tensions employed; in such cases they were
counted separate from the normal cleavages, but
the total number of cleavages, abnormal as. well

as normal, was used in determining the cleavage
time. The average ratio of abnormal to normal
cleavages was 2.5. The ratio ranged from 1 to

S/5k

To determine the carbon dioxide tension which
would suppress cleavage completely, the eggs
were exposed to carbon dioxide for eight hours
or more. Samples were then taken and the per-
centage of cleaved eggs noted. Two controls were
always carefully made in these experiments which
showed that no cleaved eggs were accidentally
present at the time of fertilization and that the
eggs were fully capable of undergoing division.
If the exposed eggs showed no cleavage in eight
hours or more, the suppression of cleavage was
regarded as complete.

Although the variations inthe results obtained
with different groups of eggs make it impossible
to designate any one tension of carbon dioxide as
the threshold of complete suppression of cleavage, —
the data are sufficiently consistent to allow a
tentative assertion of 120-130 mm. Hg carbon
dioxide tension for this value.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. ROOT
Dr. Georce H. A. CLowEs

Research Director of Eli Lilly and Company, Indianapolis

Root’s observations on the effect of carbon
dioxide on the rate of cleavage of Arbacia eggs
confirm the observation of Homer Smith and
Clowes that cleavage of Arbacia eggs in sea water
is suppressed at a given carbon dioxide tension.

Root makes the further important observation
that this suppression of cell cleavage is associated
with a marked falling off in oxygen consumption
and carbon dioxide production.

In stating that “the relatively profound effect
of carbon dioxide upon the rate of oxygen con-
sumption of these cells may not be due to any
change in the intracellular acidity, but to some
specific effect of the carbon dioxide molecule,
Root was apparently unaware that Smith and
Clowes had observed that the effectiveness of
carbon dioxide in repressing cell division de-
creased as the total bicarbonate content of the sea
water increased in such a relation as to indicate
an extreme probability that conditions of equal
repression of cell division represent conditions of
equal intracellular hydrogen ion concentration.

Smith and Clowes noted furthermore a striking
contrast in the effects exerted by solutions of
equal hydrogen ion concentration made up from
sea water but differing only in the nature of the
acid employed. At equal hydrogen ion concen-
{rations solutions prepared with hydrochloric
acid on the one hand, and carbon dioxide on the
other, showed little or no difference in their effect
on the initiation of fertilization, which is a purely

surface mechanism, but the most striking contrast
was noted in their effect on the subsequent
cleavage process. Over the comparatively wide
range from approximately pH 5.0 to pH 7.0, cell
division proceeds unaffected if the acidity is due
to hydrochloric acid, but is entirely suppressed in
the same range if carbon dioxide is employed.

The power of carbon dioxide to penetrate
protoplasm is so remarkable that it can not pos-
sibly be explained as penetration of HCO; but
rather of the highly lipo-soluble COQj. There is
no reason why H»CO3, which may be considered
as hydroxy formic acid, should have a penetrat-
ing power greatly in excess of formic or acetic
acid. On the contrary the introduction of the
additional hydroxyl group would be expected to
lower the penetrating power of HCO; to the level
of lactic acid or glycolic acid. It is a noteworthy
fact that carbonic acid is the only naturally occur-
ring acid which exists in aqueous solution in
equilibrium with an appreciable concentration of
its anhydride. This duality, coupled with the high
lipo-solubility and other physical properties of
the anhydride on the one hand, and the chemical
properties of the acid on the other, appears to
endow COs with its exceptional mobility in living
tissues, and, presumably from the experiments
referred to above, with its extraordinary capacity
to bring about a prompt and delicately regulated
adjustment of the hydrogen ion concentration of
interior aqueous phases of protoplasmic struc-
tures.

‘Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 61

FERROUS IODIDE, UNSATURATED FATTY ACIDS AND VITAMIN At
Dr. F. E. C HmeEsTER
Professor of Zoology, West Virginia University

The writer holds that in the work of the Mel-
lanbys and McCarrison the unsaturated fats, with
the exception of cod liver oil, were able to take
up iodin in such quantities that hyperplasia was
accentuated, but that cod liver oil (containing
0.002% of iodin in McCarrison’s study) was able
to restore the iodin balance.

The role of cod liver oil as a carrier of readily
assimilable iodin and iron; the well known fact
that substances rich in Vitamin A, such as liver,
egg yolk, legumes and leafy vegetables, are also
rich in iron, and the relationship between iodin,
iron and calcium balance will be discussed in a
more complete paper now in process of prepara-
tion.

In experiments now being carried on at West
Virginia University we are adding pure linoleic
acid, and certain Vitamin A-free oils to ferrous
iodide in an attempt to complete the substitution
(or identification) of both the xerophthalmia-
curing and the growth-promoting substances
present in Vitamin A.

As the animals are thoroughly depleted at the
present writing, final results may be expected
very soon.

It is interesting, although not especially signi-
ficant, that in a series of experiments just com-
pleted the writer has shown that of all the ferrous
and iodine combinations, ferrous iodide, our
biological substitute for a part of Vitamin A,

gives the characteristic blue color with antimony
trichloride, readily recognized by investigators
who have tested various oils.

The stimulus to test ferrous iodide for Vitamin
A, using the Antimony trichloride test, was given
at Woods Hole by Mr. Danielson of the Depart-
ment of Biochemistry at Harvard, who returned
to Boston before our tests were made. The
writer had dismissed the various color tests from
mind as unsatisfactory after trying them on oils
two years ago. He is still in doubt as to their
importance.

Free discussion of the work of the Burrs with
Dr. L. G. Wesson of Vanderbilt University en-
abled the writer to formulate his theory of the
role of unsaturated fatty acids, and the action of
cod liver oil in restoring iodin-fat balance.

The Marine Biological Laboratory should
therefore receive credit for the opportunity to
meet those and other sympathetic and stimulat-
ing scientists who have listened to the elaboration
of our theory and watched the chemical tests as
they were demonstrated.

1This article is a continuation of Dr. Chidester’s
report which was printed in the last number. Owing
to accident in the printing office the part reproduced
here was omitted. This article was reviewed by Drs.
Mathews, Tashiro and Wesson.

‘From the Department of Zoology, West Virginia Uni-
versity, and the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods
Hole, Mass.)

A REPLY TO THE CRITICISM OF DR. A. P. MATHEWS ON THE PAPER
“FERROUS IODIDE, UNSATURATED FATTY ACIDS, AND VITAMIN A”
Dr. F. E. CHIDESTER

The writer had not intended to present very
much evidence on his theory of the ultimate
nature of Vitamin A, until the experiments now
under way with linoleic acid and our ferrous iodide
combination were completed. His chief interest
was of course in attempting to correlate the
interesting results obtained by the Burrs with
fatty acids, with the findings of the West Virginia
University group on ferrous iodide, and to record
quite briefly the admittedly unimportant fact that
ferrous iodide gives the Antimony trichloride
reaction for Vitamin A.

But it would seem that Dr. Mathews, in his
humorous way, has rather stressed the impossibil-
ity of our attempted correlation of ferrous iodide
with Vitamin A, and has seemingly dismissed the
subject by accepting cardtin as Vitamin A. It is
regrettable that Dr. Mathews did not see our re-
port in Science (Chidester, Eaton and Thompson,

Science, vol. 68, p. 432) and that he did not also
have the opportunity to examine our records and
graphs of the 1929-1930 work which we are
hoping to publish soon. His keen criticisms have,
however, stimulated the writer to make an effort
to dispel the idea that carotin is Vitamin A.

Carotin is not accepted by certain of the Ameri-
can and British workers as Vitamin A. Palmer
showed (1914) that cotton-seed oil, rich in
carotinoids, is devoid of Vitamin A. Drummond
(1919) fed pure ‘and impure preparations of the
pigment carotin, to rats that had been made
Vitamin A deficient. They developed xeroph-
thalmia and failed to grow. Steenbock (1921)
showed that while recrystallized carotin induced
growth in rats depleted of Vitamin A, the Vitamin
was not necessarily a pigment.

Palmer and Kennedy (1921) proved that rats
would thrive on rations freed from carotinoid

62

THE COLLECTING NET

[ VoL. V. No. 33

pigments, but rich in Vitamin A. Another
observation of Palmer and Kennedy is of interest
in connection with the theory of the writer that
iron is a part of Vitamin A. They showed that
15 per cent of their egg-yolks from a carotinoid-
free flock, and containing no carotin were equiva-
lent as sources of Vitamin A to 85 per cent of
yellow maize, which furnished 1,400 parts per
million of carotin. Egg yolk is known to be rich
in iron, with 0.003 grams of iron per 100 grams
of dry substance.

Bonanni studied the variations in iodin content
in hen’s eggs, finding that those laid in the country
in May and June had a higher iodin content than
those laid in the city in February-March. (Boll.
r. accad. med. Roma, 38; also Zentr. Biochem.
15, 164).

As stated by Dr. Mathews, Euler, Euler and
Hellstrom, 1928, (A-Vitamin-Wirkungen der
Lipochrom. Bioch. Zeit. Bd. 203, S. 370-384)
found that a daily dose of 0.005 mg. per rat per
day of purified carotin induced complete recovery
and growth for 25 days in rats on a diet complete
except for Vitamin A. The authors concluded
that their success was due to the fact that they
also supplied Vitamin D in the form of activated
ergosterol, while others failed because they had
not furnished the D.

But it chances to be a fact well known to
vitamin students, and brought out many times by
Sherman and McCollum and their co-workers,
that if rats are depleted of Vitamins A and D
and irradiated ergosterol is added to replace the
D, one must expect quite marked improvement,
which lasts for some time.

In our studies of 1928 (Chidester, Eaton and
Thompson, Science, vol. 68, p. 432) we found
that irradiated ergosterol produced such a tem-
porary effect, and that after it had gradually dis-
appeared, leaving Vitamin A deficiency as the
only one, we were able to further catalyze food-
stuffs stored in the animals, by traces of ferrous
iodide, and to bring deficient groups up to a point
where they closely followed the controls receiving
cod liver oil for 14 weeks, and for 6 weeks
averaged 20 grams above the average weights of
the negative controls then surviving.

Last winter in an experiment with 41 rats con-
cerning which our group (Chidester, Eaton and
Speicher) have just reported to the National
Research Council, and will shortly publish, we
found pronounced beneficial effects lasting ten
days, due to the addition of irradiated ergosterol
to the diet of rats that had been thoroughly de-
pleted for over 8 weeks on a diet low in Vitamin
D and lacking Vitamin A. We also found that
supplemental daily irradiation of the animals (6
days a week) for 30 seconds at a distance of 18
inches from a Macbeth carbon arc lamp, caused
another group to draw upon stored foods and to

rise above the controls receiving cod liver oil, but
to burn themselves out and die in 28 days.

We have no record that Euler, Euler and
Hellstrom’s rats “stayed cured” on carotin and
ergosterol. On the other hand, as we shall also
report in a forthcoming paper, we found that in
thoroughly depleted, Vitamin A deficient rats,
started on the Sherman No. 380 diet on January
24, 1930, then furnished 1/100 mg. daily of
irradiated ergosterol from April 4, the ergosterol
effect was rather pronounced for a week. The
eraphs show, however, that the waning effect
received new impetus when the optimum dose of
ferrous iodide was furnished on April 16. But
the subsequent daily irradiation of the animals
for 30 seconds, started on April 29, apparently
facilitated the catalytic action of the ferrous
iodide, until on May 13, the group of six rats had
and average weight 7 grams higher than the con-
trols receiving cod liver oil.

On June 10, 137 days after they were started
on the experiment, and 55 days after they began
receiving ferrous iodide, there were three survi-
vors of this lot still with an average weight that
was .3 gram above that of a month previous. We
feel therefore that our experiments of 1928 have
been confirmed, and that ferrous iodide may be
an important adjunct at least to Vitamin A pro-
duction.

We now look with favor on the pure unsatu-
rated fatty acids studied by the Burrs, and hope
that they will still further supplement our diet.

In the studies of Drummond, Rosenheim and
Coward, 1925, (Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind., 44, 123)
cholesterol was prepared from cod liver oil or
brain, and recrystallized eight times. When
irradiated with a quartz mercury vapor lamp, it
was fed in daily doses of 1 mg. per rat to animals
depleted of Vitamin A, and induced resumption
of growth. In these studies it would seem to be
demonstrated that cholesterol or some substance
which cannot be separated from it by crystalliza-
tion is capable of being activated by ultra-violet
rays to form Vitamin A. (McCollum and Sim-
monds 1929).

A few years ago there was some controversy
over whether ultra-violet destroyed Vitamin A or
not, but it was finally accepted as proven that the
action of ultra-violet was destructive.

The writer is confident in line with other prin-
ciples of physical and chemical action it will be
proven that a very slight exposure to ultra-violet
light will result in Vitamin A activation. It has,
of course, been conclusively demonstrated that
the amount of radiation necessary to activate
Vitamin D will destroy Vitamin A. The writer
holds that there is an optimum period and intensity
for the activation of Vitamin A by ultra-violet
and that although this is much less than for the
activation of Vitamin D, it is just as significant.

rete Rk ae 6 SAP PO aS SOTA SAS T= enh A ee

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 63

In the experiments of Drummond, Rosenheim
and Coward (cited above) the writer believes
that the intake of irradiated cholesterol, supposed
to carry Vitamin A, simply carried into the animal
enough ultra-violet stimulus to release the iron
and iodin stored in the body, and to so temporarily
affect the iodin-fat-iron balance that it permitted
the iron to act as a catalyzer, while iodin was
released to cure the inflammations, fatty acids
induced growth, and calcium was made available.

The writer agrees with Dr. Mathews that the
antimony trichloride reaction has but little signi-
ficance but applies such slight significance
to carotin, equally with ferrous iodide, as
Euler, Euler and Hellstrom gave such evidence
of the identity of carotin with Vitamin A. After
all, the biological tests are the ones worth while.
Hawk, who showed in 1929 that exposure of cod
liver oil to oxidation increased the blue color
formed with Antimony trichloride, might, how-

ever, have been more impressed had he considered
our iodin-iron-fatty acid theory, since it is quite
obvious that oxygenation would prolong the pro-
cess of driving off iodin, and the reaction would
then be comparable to our reaction with pure
ferrous iodide. In spite of the objections of
chemists to consideration of the iodin content of
oils as an indicator of Vitamin A, Bills reports it
as present in cod liver oil to the extent of 0.0001
to 0.0005 per cent in the unsaponifiable fraction.

Whether ferrous iodide is a part of Vitamin A
or simply a partial substitute is a matter for
further study, but the 60 depleted rats that we are
testing may determine the efficacy of linoleic acid
and ferrous iodide as a proper combination in
Vitamin A deficiency.

Department of Zoology, West Virginia University,
and the Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole,
Mass., July 3, 1930.

THE PHI SIGMA SOCIETY
Paut B. Srars
Chancellor of Phi Sigma and Professor nd Head of the Department of Botany

University of Oklahoma

As a servant of this society for several years,
I have had many gratifying evidences of the es-
teem in which it is held. The most recent has
been an invitation from the editor of THE Cot-
LECTING Net for an account of the history and
purpose of Phi Sigma. He tells me “the number
of members belonging to your society at Woods
Hole is very great and I am sure that they, as
well as those who are not members, would be in-
terested to read such an article’.

Had Phi Sigma been founded decades ago in
one of the older institutions of Europe or Am-
erica, antiquity alone would have invested it with
prestige and glamour. As a matter of fact its
founding and progress have been full of signifi-
cance, without any such investiture. Beginning
at Ohio State in 1915 as a group of serious
students of biology, it has, from the first, been
a working organization. Although classed nom-
inally as an honor society until recently, its
function has never been merely that of supplying
jewelry for the chests of its members.

Today the chapter reports of its official maga-
zine “The Biologist” are a veritable current in-
dex of the active biological research in thirty in-
stitutions. Included in this thirty are many of
the great biological centers of the continent. Its
Honorary President is Dr. Alexander G. Ruthven,
thrice a peer of the realm, in teaching, administra-
tion, and research.

On March 17, 1915, eleven students from vari-
ous biological departments at Ohio State Uni-
versity met in the Ohio Union and officially or-
ganized Phi Sigma. Mr, Eric Cogan, a graduate

student in entomology from South Africa, was
the first president. The first president was a
gentleman of parts, receiving his doctorate about
the time of his twenty-first birthday. From the
outset the group had magnificent counsel from
its faculty friends—Osborn, Transeau, Landacre,
Barrows, and others. These friends wisely urged
and practiced a policy of “hands off” realizing
that any organization which had to be fed oxygen
would be better dead. While strictly refraining
from any attempts to manage or dictate their
written and spoken words were a constant source
of help.

The writer, who was initiated into this group
in 1916, remembers its meetings as episodes in
his early scientific fellowship. There was a re-
markable spirit of give-and-take whenever the
young workers in widely separate fields of biology
laid their various cards upon the table. To his
mind this still typifies the thing that Phi Sigma
exists for.

In May, 1916, occurred two notable events. A
second chapter, Beta, was established at the Uni-
versity of Michigan. This chapter has maintained
from the beginning a splendid record. The
second event was the appearance of a modest
publication, Volume 1, Number 1, of The Biolo-
gist, under the editorship of C. I. Reed.

By June, 1917, additional chapters had been es-
tablished at Maine, Denver, and Wisconsin. The
effects of the World War were beginning to be
severely felt. The Biologist suspended publica-
tion until February, 1921, and the activities of

64

THE COLLECTING NET

the chapters were paralyzed by the heavy drain
on their personnel. In citing the achievements of
the membership at this time the quiet work of
those who served the government in scientific
capacities instead of choosing the more obvious
and picturesque field of military service should
be mentioned. Some of these men exhibited
moral courage of a high order.

After the war the chapters reorganized and a
period of rapid expansion began under the leader-
ship of Dr. Emory W. Sink. Successive pres-
idents have been Dr, Albert W. Setchell, Dr. Ira
Eugene Cutler, the writer, and Dr. Ruthven.
Throughout this period of development, culminat-
ing in the present roster of thirty-two chapters
(two are inactive) and hundreds of initiates, two
men have stood by the society through thick and
thin. One of these is the present National Treas-
urer Mr. Erwine Hall Stewart. The other is
Professor Carlos I. Reed, National Secretary
until illness forced his resignation in 1928. Mr.
Stewart, a rancher of Mesa, Colorado, and an
alumnus of Epsilon Chapter, has given his time
and business ability without stint. | Professor
Reed, more nearly than any other one individual,
has made the welfare of Phi Sigma his personal
concern, and has tided her through many difficult
experiences,. His services were recognized at
the New York convention in 1928 when the so-
ciety presented him with a jeweled pin. The list
of others who have served the organization well
would be too long for inclusion here, but mention
must be made of the Davises, Father Keefe
(known to many at Woods Hole), Noland, and

[ Vor. V. No. 33

Ortenberger, the present editor and secretary.

The recent notable revision of the ritual is
largely the work of vice-chancellor Keefe.

Since 1925 it has been evident that the number
of special honor societies has grown without re-
striction, and almost without reason. This has
cast a shadow, or at least a burden of proof, upon
even the most worthy of organizations. In actual
fact Phi Sigma has always deserved to be free
of prejudice from such a source. It is, and has
always been, essentially a working organization,
although election in many institutions constitutes
a distinct honor.

Provisions regarding membership in Phi Sigma
have been liberalized so that professional workers
in biology who are in the vicinity of chapters may
be admitted to active membership. Faculty mem-
bers have the option of assuming active mem-
bership, with its obligations as well as privileges,
but their domination in chapter affairs is not, and
never has been encouraged. Election to honor-
ary membership implies actual distinction, and the
list of honorary members, not large, is an im-
pressive one.

One of the most interesting things about Phi
Sigma is the individual flavor of the various
chapters. Some make a feature of out-of-door
fellowship among brother naturalists. Others de-
vote their time to strenuous courses of journal
reading. Some have the active assistance of
their universities in sponsoring lectures of note.
In short, the correspondence reaching the nation-
al offices gives an unmistakable impression of
vitality.

A NEW INSTITUTE FOR FISHERIES RESEARCH eee)
Dr. Cart L. Husss, Director

The Institute for Fisheries Research was or-
ganized February 1930 to conduct the fishery
investigations of Michigan waters. The field
is largely, though not wholly, limited to the inland
waters of the state and to sport fishery problems,
because the Great Lakes Laboratory of the United
States Bureau of Fisheries is undertaking investi-
gations of the commercial fisheries of the Great
Lakes. These two investigating units have their
headquarters in the Division of Fishes of the
Museum of Zoology of the University of Michi-
gan. Graduate student assistants and fellows in
these ichthyological units enroll for advanced de-
grees in the Department of Zoology of the Uni-
versity.

The Institute for Fisheries Research deals
primarily with definite problems of practical ap-
plication, for it is subsidized by the State Depart-

ment of Conservation. Among the problems now
being studied are a general lake and stream survey
of the state, leading to fish management recom-
mendations ; analysis of the creel census statistics
of inland waters; diagnosis and suggested treat-
ment of diseased fish, especialy in hatcheries; the
migratory habits of trout, determined by tagging
experiments; the food and competitive interrela-
tions of trout and other fishes ; the cause of dwarf-
ing of perch and other species; the development
of the fish supply by modifying conditions in
nature (snagging trout streams; providing spawn-
ing beds in lakes, etc.).

The staff of the Institute (for the latter part
of 1930) is: Director, Carl L. Hubbs; Fish
Pathologist, Wendell H. Krull; Assistant to
Director, John R. Greeley ; Assistant, Gerald Mac-
Crimmon; Secretary, Orel Shoebridge; Fellows,
J. Clark Salyer and Clarence Tarzwell.

er re

fpreee Ws

FM ees We

Se

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 65

THE MUSICAL PROGRAM AT THE M. B. L.
CLUB

The second Wednesday evening concert of the
M. B. L. Club was enjoyed by nearly one hun-
dred people, and it was an appreciative audience
which sat in the dimmed light looking out on the
waters.

Here is an ideal place to listen to music. Great
music, with its infinitude of thought and variety
of stimuli for receptive listeners reaches us best
in such an environment, against the background
of sky and broad sheets of water.

Last Winter Stokowsky advocated isolated,
enclosed stalls for his audience, claiming that they
lost too much viewing the orchestra in action in a
brilliantly lighted auditorium full of diverting
objects. He went further and broadcast pro-
grams into more distant, quieter rooms apart.
Now he has taken up the project of broadcasting
on a still larger scale to individuals in their own
setting, apart from disturbances.

It seems to us that the Club offers just the
advantages Stokowsky seeks.

It may be claimed by over sensitive critics that
our amplified records lack important feature to
a musical program, no matter how well repro-
duced. These critics can not enjoy anything short
of perfection, at first hand. Of course they are
right to stand out for the best, but to an amateur
seeking to learm and hungry for the sounds of
music, much seems to come out of these repro-
ductions. Our audience evidently felt the force
of true musical experssion and influence of high
order.

Certainly pure music, of the Symphony, or of
briefer forms, emerges in one’s consciousness with
unique value, as he looks out over the wide waters
of the tide, with its shifting currents of deep
quiet power or spirited conflict. Some nights it
flows beneath the stars, sometimes the moon
reveals the flood. Dim land and cloud forms are
lost in the obscurity of the horizon. No object
diverts, all enhances the power and charm of the
music. One is alone among the listeners, with the
music in tune with nature.

Last year these concerts were started by Father
Keefe with Mr. H. V. Greenough, Jr., in charge.
This year we are lucky to have Mr. Greenough
with us again and to profit by his enthusiasm and
kindness in lending records from his collection.

He is planning concerts for each Wednesday,
and is generously giving his time to them. We
owe him thanks for this service. Hence this
article. Mr. Greenough will also give some opera
on certain Sunday nights.

Henry McE, Knower.

LECTURES AT COLD SPRING HARBOR

The following partial list of lectures has been
obtained from the Long Island Biological Associ-
ation.

Tuesday, June 24-—Dr. P. R. Needham, In-
structor in Biology, University of Rochester,
“Quantitative Studies on Aquatic Animals”.

Friday, June 27—Dr. C. H. Curran, Assistant
Curator, Department of Insect Life, American
Museum, “Some Insects from Barro, Colorado
Island”.

Wednesday, July 2—Dr. W. W. Swingle and
Dr. J. J. Pfiffner, Princeton University and The
Biological Laboratory, (Lecture to be delivered
by. Dr. Swingle), “An Active Extract of the
Adrenal Cortex”’,

Tuesday, July 8—Dr. W. H. Cole, Professor
of Physiology and Biochemistry, Rutgers Uni-
versity, “Chemical Stimulation in Animals”.

Friday, July 11—Dr. Reginald G. Harris, Di-
rector The Biological Laboratory. “The Main-
tenance of Pregnancy by Extract of Corpus
Luteum”’.

* Tuesday, July 15—Dr. George W. Corner,
Chairman Department of Anatomy, University of
Rochester School of Medicine and Dentistry,
“Twelfth Century Doctors of Salerno”.

Friday, July 18—Dr. I. S. Kleiner, Professor
of Physiological Chemistry, New York Homeo-
pathic Medical College, “Life of Dr. William
Beaumont, Pioneer American Physiologist”.

Tuesday, July 22—Dr. L. T. Webster, Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research, “Experi-
mental Epidemiology.”

Friday, July 25—Dr. Hugo Fricke, Biophysics,
The Biological Laboratory of the Long Island Bi-
ological Association, “Electric Properties of Liv-
ing Cells’’,

Tuesday, July 29—Dr. I. R. Taylor, Instructor
in Biology, Brown University, ‘““Metabolism of
Pupae of Galleria mellonella (Bee Moth)”.

Friday, August 1—Dr. William Salant, Phar-
macology, The Biological Laboratory, Long Island
Biological Association, “The Role of Calcium and
Potassium in Determining Pharmacological
Action”.

Tuesday, August 5—Dr. Franklin Hollander,
Assistant Professor of Physiology, New York
Homeopathic Medical College, “Gastric Secre-
tions”.

66 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. No. 33

The Collecting Net

Woods Hole, Mass.

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors

Annaleida S, Cattell

Mary Howe .....

Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

THE LABORATORY CLUB

Last week we printed an account of the activi-
ties and purposes of the M. B. L. Club. This
institution has served a useful function for a
great many years, but the expansion of the labor-
atory makes its work greater than it has ever
been before. The dormitory and apartment
houses, on the one hand, lessen the need for a
social center, but on the other, they increase it.
Now there is a greater tendency for more or less
closed groups to form so that those living out-
side of these buildings have little opportunity of
becoming acquainted with their occupants. The
friendships that are formed among investigators
and students are of lasting value. They do their
part to forward the work of the laboratory. *°

In the following number Professor Emil
Abderhalden makes the statement that “ the most
important function of a scientific convention is
to bring about mutual contact, the personal dis-
cussion and the making of new friendships.” In
the same way this function is important for the
laboratory. The M. B. L. Club has a great
opportunity and a heavy responsibility.

The older members of the laboratory appreci-
ate the value of the Club to the laboratory com-
munity and many of them have devoted much
time and energy to it. They have personally per-
formed every kind of work—ranging from
organization and administration to janitor service.
Few people realize and fully appreciate all that
they have done. For a number of years the club
officers have been interested in obtaining the
assistance of the younger members of the labor-
atory in the work of the Club. It is of particular
value to this group, and it is theye who should
carry on the work of the M. B. L. Club.

The addition of the four extra pages to this
number of THe Cottectine Net has been made
possible by the reservation of a larger amount of
advertising space by makers of scientific appara-
tus and publishers of scientific books. Our
readers can insure THE CoLiectinG Net of still
further support from its advertisers if they will
go over our advertising section, page by page,

each week. Each number contains important
announcements of new scientific apparatus and
new books. Without these things the further
advancement of biological research would be
difficult or impossible. It is a necessary part of
the work of a biologist to acquaint himself fully
with new apparatus and new books. This holds
not only for effective research but also for effec-
tive teaching.

Members of the Laboratory and townspeople

alike are grateful to Dr. Wesson for his active
work in improving the bathing beach near the
Breakwater Hotel. Not only has he collected
money to finance the work; but he has adminis-
tered the money and personally supervised the
work of replacing the stones with sand. Even
though winter storms may undo most of the work
the investment has been a good one, for through-
out the summer it wili add to the comfort of the
bathers at the beach.
To The Editor:—The writer has observed that the M.
B. L, does not possess a source of “standard time” at
least one in a conspicuous place, and wishes to suggest
that THE COLLECTING NET undertake to raise a
fund to provide an appropriate timepiece to be placed
in a suitable and convenient location.

Wishing THE COLLECTING NET continued success,
T am, LESTER F. BOSS.

Dr. Franz Schrader, formerly associate pro-
fessor of Zoology at Bryn Mawr, has been
appointed professor of Zoology at Columbia
University.

Mrs. Rebecca C. Lancefield has just received
the appointment of associate member in the Rocke-
feller Institute. Formerly she served in the ca-
pacity of “‘assistant.”

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
aly 2s oe cccre eee 6:00 6:11
Vitilivanli Seem rent 6:45 6:51
uly. eat L283 7:39
ifitilivagl Steers aes 8:11 8:28
July Os eee 8:49 alls)
li ln ae eae 9:38 10202 |
Maly AUS Te rage: 10:25 1050
ittlives| Oe eae a ee 11:12 11250
iittlive2 OR nee 12 :04

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be.
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes |
cause the turning of the eurrent to oceur a half an
hour earlier or later than the times given above,

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

67

* The Journal of Experimental Biology which
until January 1 was The British Journal of
Experimental Biology has several Woods Hole
physiologists on its editorial board. Drs. S. C.
Brooks, M. H. Jacobs, Robert Chambers, E.
Newton Harvey and W. O. Fenn are members.
Drs. L. T. Hogben and C. F. A. Pantin, now
both in England who have recently spent a
summer working at Woods Hole, are included
on the Board. Manuscripts from this country
may be sent to Dr. Eric Ponder at New York
University.

~ Miss Theodora G. Klose is going from the Uni-
yersity of Nebraska to Vassar College this fall
as instructor in botany.

Dr. William S. Tillet has left the Rockefeller

Institute to become associate professor of medi-
cine in charge of the department of biology at
the Johns Hopkins Medical School.

D. Brown, formerly assistant professor of
physiology at New York University has taken a
position in the Medical School. He will also be
carrying out graduate work in the Department of
Physiology at The Cornell Medical School.

~ Dr. J. E. Gray is giving up his position as as-
sistant professor of zoology at Tulane University

to be professor of zoology at Duke University.

Dr. M. T. Townsend, associate professor of
histology at the University of Oklahoma Medical
School, has been appointed head of the depart-
ment of biology at Illinois Wesleyan University,
Bloomington.

' Dr. Henry T. Fernald, head of the department
of entomology and director of the graduate school
at the Massachusetts Agricultural College,
retired from active duty as professor emeritus at
the end of June. The department of entomology
will be combined with zoology and geology of
which Professor C. E. Gordon is the head. Pro-
fessor F. J. Sievers, director of the experiment
Station, will also direct the graduate school.

Miss Ruth Addoms is going to Duke University
from the University of Wisconsin as instructor
in botany.

Dr. Margaret C. Ferguson has been advanced
to the position of research professor in botany at
Wellesley College.

- Colonel William Boyce Thompson, mining en-
gineer and copper operator, who founded the
eyce Thompson Institute for Plant Research
With an endowment approaching ten million dol-
lars, died on June 28 at the age of sixty-one years.
In his will no mention was made of the Institute.

te

, aa

ITEMS OF INTEREST

The last number of the Journal of Experimental
Biology contains an article entitled “Temperature
and Heart Rate in Chick Embryos” by E. R.
Parpart and Otto Glaser.

In the issue of Science for July 4 there is an
article entitled “The Myogram of the Isolated
Skeletal Muscle Cell” by Dugald E. S. Brown
and Ferdinand J. M. Sichel.

Dr. Truman Squire Potter of Chicago Univer-
sity has taken the Stokey cottage on Gardiner
Road where he and his family are spending the
summer.

We have among our number this year an
authoress, Mrs. Otto Glaser, whose book “Brother
Anselmo” has recently appeared on the book
stands.

Dr. May G. Wilson of New York purchased
The Lanterns on Gardiner Road from the Peebles,
at the end of the season last year.

The Cummins of Milton have taken the Smith
cottage at the corner of Spencer Baird and
Gardiner Roads for the summer.

Two cottages on School Street have just been
opened. Dr. and Mrs. Victor Safford from
Jamaica Plains are occupying Mrs. Lear’s cottage.
They will remain throughout the summer. Mrs.
Alvern P. Clough from New Hampshire arrived
last week. Mr. and Mrs. Clough have rented the
Stevenson bungalow for the season.

Mrs. G. M.Grant, who was manager of the K.
and G. Lunch Room in Woods Hole three
years ago, has returned and opened up the Twin
Door on Main Street. She expects to do a good
business and enjoy the same popularity that was
hers three years ago.

A motorboat belonging to Charles W. Bailey
was found going around in circles near Quick’s
Hole on July 5. Mr. Bailey had gone out in the
morning to lift his lobster pots and no one knows
what happened to him. The search for his body
has been fruitless. He is survived by a wife and
four small children.

Mrs. Robert Veeder is visiting her daughter
on Long Island for two weeks. Her son-in-law,
Dr. Hill is working at the Rockefeller Institute.

We learn from the Police Department in Fal-
mouth that cars from outside this state must
carry Massachusetts plates within thirty days
after their arrival here. This regulation is in
force for cars from every state. A Massachu-
setts driver’s license must also be obtained within
this period.

68 THE COLLECTING NET { Vou. V. No. 33

AN OBJECTIVE CHANGER

Carrying three pairs low power objectives

SPENGER

UNIVERSAL
BINOCULAR
MICROSCOPES

Nos. 55 and 56

CONVERTIBLE:

No. 55—as illustrated with horse-
shoe base.

No. 56—the stage and above that
omitting base.

EQUIPPED WITH:
MULTIPLE
NOSEPIECE

A new, original, patented objec-
tive changer which carries three
patios Se pairs low power objectives and
2 s eee — which revolves like an ordinary
we ya Tot triple nosepiece. The objectives
ae : ; may be removed instantly and
others substituted.
The objectives on the nosepiece are dust proof and the worker can easily get to them to
clean them.
These microscopes have a very large stage 100 m/m x 100m/m. Objects in the center of a
dish 50 m/m high and 130 m/m in diameter may be brought into the lines of vision. The
rack and pinion movement together with the adjustability of the arm on the slide permits
the focusing on very thick objects. The large mirror (62 m/m diameter) is sufficient to
illuminate the large fields of the lower power objectives.

NEW :: ORIGINAL :: BETTER
SPENCER LENS COMPANY amc

MANUFACTURERS

SPENCER
BUFFALO Microseopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring
Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Ete. U.S.A
BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

Jury 12, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 69

MUDD

ELECTRO-ENDOSMOSIS APPARATUS

4942.

ELECTRO—ENDOSMOSIS APPARATUS, Mudd, for investigation of the direction and rate of
liquid flow through membranes or porous diaphragms traversed by electrie current.

An Zn-ZnSO, electrode is connected through a salt bridge by a T-way stopcock with a tube contain-
ing the perfusing liquid. The membrane is attached to the open mouth of this tube, in the calibrated
portion of which the rise and fall of the meniscus can be read. The open vertical tubes and stop-
cocks permit filling and washing.

The apparatus is adapted to the determination of the H-ion reversal points of membranous
tissues, and has also been used to study the electrokinetic potential in the capillaries of porous dia-
phragms of clay, asbestos and other non-conducting material. See Stuart Mudd, M. D., “Electro-
endosmosis through Mammalian Serous Membranes,” The Journal of General Phyisology, Vol. IX, No.
3 (January 20, 1926), p. 369; and Chapter II, “Filters and Filtration’, in Filterable Virsuses, by Thomas
M. Rivers, M. D. (Baltimore, 1928), p. 55. See also Wm. R. Amberson and Henry Klein, “The In-
fluence of pH upon the Concentration Potentials across the Skin of the Frog”, Journal of General
Physiology, Vol. XI, No. 6 (July 20, 1928), p. 823; and Henry Klein and Wm. R. Amberson, “A Physico-
chemical Study of the Structure of Dental Enamel”, Journal of Dental Research, Vol. IX, 1929, p. 667.
4942. Electro-Endosmosis Apparatus, Mudd, as above described : : $15.00

INU CMRUVLOU Mem ey cteret aa /-.clein tie ston a8 %. woos Hates

Price subject to change without notice.

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

70

THE COLLECTING NET

LL EE PE
Superseding
‘Animal Parasites and Human Disease’

Fourth Edition

An
Introduction to

HUMAN
PARASITOLOGY

By ASA C. CHANDLER

Based on the author’s original work,
“Animal Parasites and Human Disease”,
this book has been entirely rewritten,

rearranged and brought up to date, giving
the beginning student a comprehensive
integrated account of the entire field of
parasitology.

There are three main sections to the
book: the first deals with the protozoa;
the second, with the helminths; and the
third, with the arthropods. Wherever

advisable the subjects have been classified
systematically, although the classification
has been stressed only enough to give a
correct idea of the general relationships of
the organisms dealt with. The author has
emphasized rather the biological aspects
of the subject,—treating in detail life
cycles, epidemiological factors, inter-rela-
tions of parasite and host, and underlying
principles of treatment and prevention.

The style of writing is clear and interest-
ing. There are more than 300 illustrations,
most of which have been drawn by the
author directly from specimens.

A professor of Zoology says of this hook:
“Like his previous text, it is characterized
by a clarity of expression and an interest-
ing presentation which is certain to make

it a valued addition to the texts on the
subject. As a result of Dr. Chandler’s
tropical experience, it embodies much
original material which adds greatly to
its value.”

655 pages 6 by 9 Cloth, $5.00

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 Fourth Avenue, New York City

LOLS

McGRAW-HILL PUBLICATIONS

in the

ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES

A new text which features:

—A broad comparative point of view link-
ing up cytology with embryology in a
variety of chordate forms.

—Emphasis on the physiology of develop-
ment.

—An attempt to interest the student in the
subject for the sake of the subject itself.

An Introduction to

VERTEBRATE
EMBRYOLOGY

By H. L. WIEMAN

Professor of Zoology,
University of Cincinnati

411 pages, 6x 9, illustrated, $4.00

The opening chapters deal with certain
features of the study of protoplasm and are
offered for the purpose of linking cytology
with embryology. This presentation is paral-
leled by appropriate studies in the laboratory.
The early development of Amphioxus and the
frog are next considered together with refer-
ence to some phases of experimental embry-
ology which have a_ general significance.
Throughout the text an effort has been made
to call attention to experimental work when-
ever practicable. The treatment of the chick
embryo and the mammalian embryo, except
in connection with difficult phases of the
subject, is planned to complement the labor-
atory work rather than supplement it. The
chapters on human embryology have no
counterpart in .the laboratory work,—the
student’s study of the pig embryo serving as
the background for the discussion, which may
also be supplemented by demonstrations.

Coming in August
Wieman and Weichert’s

LABORATORY MANUAL
for
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY

Send for copies on approval

~ McGRAW HILL BOOK COMPANY, Inc.

370 Seventh Ave. New York

[ Vor. V. No. 33°

Jury 12, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 71

LEELA SSS SE SSS SESS ELSES ESSE SSCS OSS SEO ES

CAMBRIDGE COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY

General Editors

J. BARCROFT, C.B.E., M. A. J. T. SAUNDERS, M.A.

Fellow of King’s College and Professor Fellow of Christ's College and Demon-
bY of Physiology in the University strator of Animal Morphology in the
% of Cambridge University of Cambridge
% Comparative Physiology of the Heart
¢ By A. J. Clark, M.C., M. D. Cloth, 12 mo., 154 pp., $3 25
% In this book the author discusses certain aspects of the heart’s functions, which have a
* particular significance when viewed from the standpoint of comparative physiology.
bY “As a book of reference this will be of real value to those who wish to study more deeply

the many fascinating aspects of the subject.’—The Lancet.

Px

Genetics of Sexuality in Animals

By F. A. E. Crew, M. D., D. Se., Ph. D. Cloth, 12 mo., 199 pp., $4.00
“This volume provides a very clear and not too lengthy account of the mechanism of sex-
determination and sex-differentiation, and of the physiological provesses involved.’—British
Medical Journal.
“Physiologists and experimental morphologists will be grateful to the author for getting a
survey of the field into so compact and easily referable a form.”’—Science News Letter.

The Comparative Physiology of Internal Secretions

By Lancelot T. Hogben, M. A., D.Sc. Cloth, 12 mo., 142 pp., $4.00
The author discusses in the first three chapters chemical coordination; adrenaline and neuro-
muscular coordination; internal secretion and the chromatie function. The last four chapters
deal with endocrine factors and secretory processes; the relation of internal secretion to
vasomotor regulation; endocrine factors in metabolism, and the role of the ductless glands
in developmental processes.

Biological Chemistry and Physics of Sea Water

By H: W. Harvey, M. A. Cloth, 12 mo., 194 pp., $4.25
This book covers the following topics: chemistry of sea water; water movements; tempera-
ture of the sea; color and illumination of sea water; and chemical and physical factors
controlling the density of population.

“The author of this book qualifies as a good interpreter between the world of marine
organisms and ours.”—Science News Letter.

Ciliary Movement

By J. Gray, M. A. Cloth, 12 mo., 162 pp., $4.25

In this work the author treats the following subjects: the movement of a cilium; ciliary
currents, the force exerted and the work dene by cilia; the relation of ciliary movement to
ionie equilibria; the metabolism of ciliated cells and the nature of the ciliary cyele;
metachronal rhythm and ciliary control; and the distribution of cilia and the functions
which they perform.

The Comparative Physiology of Muscular Tissue
By A. D. Ritchie, M. D. Cloth, 8 vo., 111 pp., $3.00

This book covers the following topies:—general character of muscular tissue; chemical
changes in active muscle; mechanies and theory of muscular contraction; and effect of
environment. ;

“Tn this book describing the characters and functions of muscle cells, a muscle or a group of
muscles is considered as an aggregate of muscle fibers rather than as a complex septum of
the body.”—Anatomical Record.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

* PUBLISHERS
BY 60 Fifth Avenue New York
Atlanta Boston Chicago Dallas San Francisco

CLES

LEMME GL GGG OGG GGG GGG DGG DGG P&L GPG GGL G GGL. LLL MI LXPLAILYL SILL LGALALLSIALLIGDP SS

s
KOKO KK KK OK OR RR RT OKO TOK

NI
bo

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 33 7

This Camera is inserted into the Micro-
scope Tube after the ocular has
been withdrawn.

The permanent records obtained with
quently of special benefit. The fine

Write

K.

60 EAST 10th ST.,

ST OF y
at €.
& x

Marine

Supply

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on

exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

Biological
Laboratory

Department

a

ROLL FILM ATTACHMENT CAMERA

LEIT Attachable to Any Standard Microscope ‘

THIS CAMERA USES STANDARD CINEMA FILM 4

Specimen of image produced with Roll Film Micro Attachment

Camera. The characteristics under which this photograph was

taken are as follows:

1. Standard type microscope;

Achromatice objective 16mm

3. “Periplan” ocular 8X;

4, Magnification 27X;

5. Low voltage lamp
luminant 3

6. “Lifa” filter No. 200b;

7. Exposure: 1/10 second;

8. Condenser diaphragm
closed one-half ;

9. Film used: Leitz

cinema film,
z who devote their time to special
Research W orkers studies at the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory will find the Leitz Roll Film Attachment Camera a valuable
asset.

as il-

special

this camera long after the specimen has been destroyed are fre-
grain of cinema film permits of exceptional enlargements.

for Pamphlet No. 1142 (CN)

LEITZ, Ine.

NEW YORK, N. Y.

Laboratory Colloid Mill

For Use in Mechanical Dispersion,
Deflocculation, Emulsification
and Homogenization

Used for blending of food products where
emulsification or dispersion is desired; also for
acceleration of chemical reactions.

Material is of highest class, Monel Metal being
used for working surfaces. The mill can be
taken apart for cleaning in a minute and re-
assembled in a minute. The bowl is nickel plated
and the base, as well as the motor casing, is
lacquered. The capacity is about two quarts and
it has an hourly production capacity from 5 to
25 gallons, depending on the material and speed
at which material is fed into the mill.

21526. COLLOID MILL—As above des-
eribed, Height 20%, in.; Diameter
of base 94% in.; Power required %
h. p. Universal motor, 110 volts; Net
weight 25 pounds; Shipping weight
75 pounds

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897
HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

pny

THE COLLECTING NET

Jury 12, 1930 ]

“Equal
to Any

Excelled

GOLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE

Microscopic

COVER GLASSES

DO NOT FOG

We have the largest stock in the

C5 by None”
f (o) ‘TRADEMARK i .
(¢) i

RESEARCH MICROSCOPE
FCE-6

With optics to meet exacting requirements

With interchangeable monocular and bino-

U. S. A. and the largest variety of
sizes and thinnesses, squares, circles
and rectangulars.

cular tubes and complete Abbe
illuminating apparatus.

Magnifications: 79 to 1800x
Large mechanical stage
Aplanatic condenser n. a. 1.4
Quadruple nosepiece
Apochromatic objectives:

10 n.a. 0:30, 20 n.a. 0.65

60 n.a.1.4 (oil immersion)
90 n.a.1.3 (oil immersion)
Paired comp. oculars:

Tx, 10x; 15x, 20x

Price complete in case
$580 f. o. b. N. Y.

Circular will be sent on request

And Now

GOLD SEAL MICRO. SLIDES
RITE-ON MICRO. SLIDES

If your Dealer can't supply you send

order (mentioning dealer's nameg to
Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Polarizing Accessories for the above

OZ S18) 9 secothct Rene BROscp peed Bera

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:

Polarizer No. 1, Analyser No. III. with
divided circle,

Cray-s

pAms ComPpANY

Wholesale Distributors

117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of

laboratory supplies, anatomical
surgical instruments, etc., and

botanical models, and specimens, skeletons,
charts, etc.

a
gypsum plate R. I. in
Peer) $45:00 A
728 South Hill Street, Los Ange'es Quality
models,
[JENA J

73

74 THE COLLECTING NET

case is of best-quality leather, hand-
somely finished, lined with velvet and
having chamois skin protecting flaps.
The instruments comprising the set are
of “A” quality, with keen cutting edges.
These instruments consist of he follow-
ing:

7092
The Dissecting Set illustrated above is
being widely used by instructors and
by advanced students of biology. The

Scalpel No. 6935 ebony handle 46 mm edge

Scalpel No. 6942 ebony handle 25 mm edge

Scissors No. 7909, medium straight

Forceps No. 6787 heavy straight for
vertebrate work

AS yay

1 Tenaculum No. 7052 ebony handle 160 mm
length

1 Cartilage Knife No. 6817, all steel 45 mm
edge

1 Seeker No. 7037 all steel 150 mm length

1 Triple chain and hooks No, 6807

1 Blowpipe No. 6747 120 mm length

1 Celluloid rule No. 10497, 6 inches

Per Set tite ..... $5.00

Per dozen, 10% discount

We can supply Dissecting Sets containing any
desired selection of dissecting instruments
and we would be pleased to submit quotations
on any required quantity.

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

Rochester, N.Y.

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on

Biological Subjects which appear in the following

journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chie¢ago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-eatalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of- Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight 1-inch slides
or thirty-two 1%4-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides,

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

[ Vou. V. No. 33 ©

le A)

—

owe

an oe

ole: attache ein Fe ber 08 oc op Ord PUNO ee ee

N
‘or

Jury 12, 1930 ] os THE COLLECTING NET

A NEW QUINHYDRONE HYDROGEN ION APPARATUS

Designed after Specifications by W. J. Youden, Ph. D.
of the Boyce-Thompson Instilute for Plant Research

The Youden pH Apparatus is a potentiometer set-up
with quinhydrone electrodes. It is complete with milli-
voltmeter, galvanometer, rheostats, keys and switches.
SIMPLICITY OF OPERATION

No technical knowledge or skillis necessary. With
unknown solution in reference tube, adjust the rheostat
to cause the galvanometer to read zero. The voltmeter
reading is noted and the pH for this voltmeter reading is
found in a table supplied.
SPECIAL FEATURES OF SUPERIORITY

Rapid Manipulation. 30 to 40 determinations per hour,
more than twice as rapid as any other electro-metric
method.

Low Cost. The use of quinhydrone electrodes permits
using a millivoltmeter of 800 my. range.

Sensitivity. Equivalent to .03 pH—as high as is necessary in practical work, and considerably greater
sensitivity than the most precise colorimetric methods.

Portability. All sets are light in weight. Field sets in carrying case.

Simplicity. Component parts are simple, durable, and convenient.

No. 5270 Youden Hydrogen Ion Concentration Apparatus. Complete with millivoltmeter, galvano-
meter, rheostats, special quinhydrone electrodes, and supplies necessary for operation. $85.00

A portable set in carrying case with handle is also supplied. Write for prices.

CA Sian of Quality ELCH|

SERVICE

Simple and Rapid Manipulation

CA Mane of Service

W. M. Welch Scientific Company

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of

1516 Orleans Street Scientific Apparatus and School Supplies Chicago, Ill., U.S.A.

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for

SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, etc.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Crav-Awams CompAny

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Botanical and Biologiacl Models and preparations
and Skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

;

:
[ Vor. V. No. 339

10° THE COLLECTING NET

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS
Tel. Falmouth 660-661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

| N. E. TSIKNAS

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

Follow the Crowd to

DANIELS’

for Home-made Ice Cream,

Delicious Sandwiches,
Coffee,

PICNIC LUNCHES

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH
(Episcopal)

The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion - - - - i

Morning Prayer - - - - 11:

Evening Prayer - - - i

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Phone 622

Woods Hole

Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley :
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS
FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR

Tel. 935.
Falmouth

Main Street

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Colonial Building.

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth : H

Phone 239-W Free Delivery

We Press While You Wait i
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members) 4

SSS — 4
When in Falmouth Stop at j
ISSOKSON’S :

GENERAL MERCHANDISE ;

Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait } :
eee i
——————

A. ISSOKSON

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing 4
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

M. DOLINSKY’S

Woods Hole, Mass.

Main St. Call 752

SANSOUCYrS BEAUTY PARLOR

Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and
All Branches of Beauty Culture

Falmouth Phone 19-M

Jury 12, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 77

THE
LNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“The Watched Pot’
by Saki (H. H. Munro)
Week of July 14-19
Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel.

Falmouth 1250

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

Visit
Malchman’s

THE.LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.

Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Monday July 14 — Tuesday July 15
MORAN and MACK in
“ANYBODY’S WAR”

THREE DAYS
Wednesday July 16 — Thursday July 17
Friday July 18

(Matinee each day at 2:30)

Erich Maria Remarque’s World Famous Book
ALL QUIET ON THE WESTERN FRONT
ADMISSION
Afternoons—adults 50c children 25e
Evenings —adults $1.00 children 25¢

Saturday July 19
GARY COOPER in
“THE MAN FROM WYOMING”

The Collecting Net

3egan Publication in 1926

BACK NUMBERS AND

VOLUMES

May be obtained by

addressing

The Collesine Net

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

78 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vo. V. No. 33.

EINTHOVEN STRING GALVANOMETERS

This well-known instrument pos-
sesses the advantages of extreme
sensitivity, short period and negli-
gible self induction or capacity. It
is largely used for physical and
physiological investigation. Several
types are furnished.

| Full information on request.

ee CAMBRIDGE
Type ‘“‘B” shown above has a readily
interchangeable string suspension INSTRUMENT Co INC

which makes possible quick replace-

ment of strings of different charac-
teristics. 3512 Grand Central Terminal, New York

Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

Living Marine Forms for Inland Schools

Many salt water plants and animals may be kept alive for periods of several days
while they are being studied in the laboratory. The laboratory dissection work may,
in this way, be supplemented by observing the activities of the living specimens. The
interest created by living marine forms can well be imagined by comparing a pre-
served starfish, dripping with formalin, with a living specimen crawling over submerged
rocks in the aquarium.

In cooperation with the Supply Department of the Marine Biological Laboratory,
Turtox is arranging to supply many living marine plants and animals to all parts of the
United States at almost any time during the school year. Shipments of the living
specimens and supplies of sea water will be made directly from Woods Hole, Mass.

If you would like to have living marine forms for your school laboratory, write for
further information about this service.

Turtox Service Leaflet Number 20 “Notes on Marine Aquaria’ will be sent on request.
mel, }
mucTs General Biological Supply House}

(INCORPORATED)
761-763 East 69th Place © ||

«2010
Ses

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

Chicago, Illinois

q
:
i

Jury 12, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 79

Precision
Built » »

PRODUCT of the famed’
B&L skill in design and
manufacture the model.
AKW Microscope is one
of the most valuable “all
around” microscopes ever:
produced.

Its uses are legion for its ex-

‘ of tremely wide field, long working

nit Eehibie He sack Riis distance and stereoscopic effect

: adapt it equally well for the work

of the biologist, the bacteriologist,

the chemist, and in many branches

i of industry. Image is not inverted or reversed. The drum nosepiece permits
C change of magnification with but slight adjustment of focus.

Starting in Bausch and Lomb’s own optical glass plant, the largest in
America, every operation in the manufacture of the AKW is controlled by
experts working to the most exact standards of precision.

Write for catalog D-15.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. )

671 ST. PAUL STREET « » ROCHESTER, N.Y. GREATER VISION THROUGH

OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
= LOMB

MAKERS OF ORTHOGON EYEGLASS LENSES

THE COLLECTING NET [Vor. V. No. 33

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
works, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living inseets or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
ean readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard

microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopie preparations of slides, living organisms
and inseets ean be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-euvette. Extra equipment prices on
request,

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

« — A =~. ¥ A 73 Nees
Crav-Anmams CompAny
117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Vol. V. No. 4

NEW LIGHT ON THE EVOLUTION AND
MIGRATIONS OF AMERICAN MAMMALS

Dr. WILLIAM BERRYMAN SCOTT
Blair Professor of Geology and Paleontology,
Princeton University
The work of exploration goes steadily on and
the stream of paleontological discovery is almost

SATURDAY, JULY 19, 1930

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Copirs 25 CTs.

HEREDITY AND MUTATION IN RELATION
TO ENVIRONMENT IN PROTOZOA

Dr. H. S. JENNINGS
Professor of Zoology, Johns Hopkins University
Dr. Jacobs told me that I might talk about gen-
etics in the Protozoa, and I take it that you will
permit me to extend that to mean genetics in the

uninterrupted. Some of the
most sensational of these have

unicellular organisms or Pro-
tista.

mot yet been published and of
the others, I have selected a
few of wider application.

One lesson that we are
slowly learning is that the
course of mammalian develop-
ment is much slower and most
groups extend much farther
back in time than we _ had
supposed. For example, the
most ancient known rodents,
those of the Lower Eocene
(Paramys) were long regard-

Evening Lecture.

Evening

M. B. GL. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 22, 8:00 P. M.

Professor F. R.
Lillie, professor of embryology,
University of Chicago, “The Action
of the Sex Hormones in the Fowl;
an Account of the Chicago Experi-
ments.”

FRIDAY, JULY 25, 8:00 P. M.
Seminar. Dr. S. Gelfan:
“The All-or-None Law in Muscle”.

Dr. W. R. Amberson: “Low Voltage
Hiements of the Action Potential

Many things in the genetics
of the Protozoa and Protista
seem very different from what
we know about the genetics of
the higher organisms. The
unicellular organism does not
behave in a uniform way, any
more than it is uniform in its
form and structure. The rules
of action, the so-called laws of
inheritance and variation and
physiology and behavior, may
be very diverse in different
groups. In the study of Pro-

ed as nearly representing the
common ancestor of all
rodents. It has, however,
become plain that we must go
to much more ancient times

Nerve”,

Wave of the Nerve”.

Dr. F. O. Schmitt: “The Effect of |
Cyanides and Carbon Monoxide on

tozoa there have been grad-
ually coming out a number of
really extraordinary things, it
seems to me, particularly in

to find this common ancestor,

for all the families of the Rodentia

existence before the end of the Eocene.
(Continued on Page 87)

were in

New Light on the Evolution and Migrations of
American Mammals,
Professor William Berryman Scott 81
Heredity and Mutation in Relation to Environ--
ment in Protozoa,
Professor H. S. Jennings ; 81
A Technique and Some Adsorption Studies with
a Plant Virus,

Professor B. M. Duggar Ses hate Daa AcHn emit}
Chromosome Structure in Gasteria,
Professor Wm. Randolph Taylor .. 88

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Taylor,

Professor C. EB. McClung . 90

——

the relations of heredity vari-
ations, of mutations, to environment. This ap-
peals to me as the thing of most general interest
in the genetics of the Protozoa and so I shall

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Catalytic Effect of Methylene Blue on the
Oxygen Consumption of Normal Tissues and

Tumours, Dr. E. 8. Guzman Barron 90
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Barron,

Erie G. Ball 91
The Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution,

Professor C. G. Rogers §
Recent Books in the Biological Sciences 92
The Club Teas and Dances,

Mrs. H. E. Howe meets * 93
Editorial Page : ; . 94
Currents in the Hole nae of (94
Items of Interest MR ere NOES os OER OG catia oe

82 THE

COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 34

speak mainly of that, though I hope to touch on
other matters also if time permits; because in-
terpretation of the action of the environment on
mutation depends on the knowledge of some of
the other features of genetics in the group.

In the Protozoa, if the reports of investigators
are correct, many kinds of environmental con-
ditions, the more ordinary conditions of life, alter
the hereditary constitution. They produce muta-
tions, if that is what you mean by mutations. And
further, the environment produces kinds of muta-
tions, or at least, kinds of hereditary modifications,
that are as yet not found in higher organisms, and
these hereditary modifications show in their be-
havior a number of extraordinary features.

Genetics in the Protozoa shows us the nature
of inheritance and the nature of variation when
there is only one single cell division between the
parent and the next generation —when parent and
offspring are separated only by one single cell
division. There is no long series of cell divisions
between the mature parent and the mature off-
spring as there is in the higher animals. The
Protozoa multiply over long periods by the general
method indicated in this diagram. The two cells
divide, go through a period of growth, and be-
come at once new individuals without further cell
division.

It is coming to be said, more and more, that
Protozoa are not as simple as it was once imagined
that they were, but are really complex. However,
in this matter of reproduction and inheritance the
processes really are much simpler, at least nu-
merically, than in many-celled organisms. This
process of division of one cell into two, creating
at once new individuals, presents genetics in its
simplest form. The problem of genetics, viewed
in its most general aspect, arises from a certain
and striking fact about organisms, namely, that
they present themselves as separate systems
with a certain unity, but on examination we find
that these individuals are diverse in many respects.
We all know that no two human individuals are
alike, save, approximately, in rare cases of identi-
cal twins, and we find, to a very considerable
degree, the same sort of situation in other organ-
isms.

Perhaps the first and fundamental question of
genetics is: how does it happen that organic indi-
viduals are different from one another? How
can we account for their differences? Genetics
is particularly concerned with differences that con-
tinue from one generation to another, that are
reproduced anew in each generation, like differ-
ences in the constitution of crystals of different
inorganic substances. When we come to get ac-
quainted with the Protozoa, in the way that one
gets acquainted with his cat, his dog, or his parrot,
we find that they, too, are diverse, and that many
of their diversities are constitutional, inherited,

and reproduce from generation to generation under
given uniform conditions.

The question that we are interested in now is:
how does it happen that the individuals of a given
kind of organism, of a given species of organism,
are different? What sort of differences do we
find in the Protozoa and what are their causes and.
their origin?

If one cultivates a population of Protozoa and
gets acquainted with the individuals, he finds.
many structural differences. For instance, in the
Infusorian, Paramecium, you may find individu-
als differing in size, and when you cultivate these
different types from generation to generation you
find that , at least, certain of these size differences
are handed on, are inherited, so that a number of
biotypes may be distinguished. It is obvious that
these different races must differ in some respect
in the substance of which they are composed, as
crystals of inorganic matter differ in the substances
of which they are composed. Some grow large
and others small under the same conditions. Be-
sides these visible differences in size, or form, or
structure, they differ in many other respects—
in vigor, in resistance to poor conditions, in via-
bility, and in the conditions under which they
thrive, such as nutrition. Some are weak,
some are strong; some in isolation cultures
soon die, others live many generations and then
die; still others live indefinitely. Some stand
higher temperatures than others; some withstand
chemicals (salt solutions etc.) Some multiply,
some conjugate readily. There are differences in
behavior: some react readily to slight stimuli,
others only to strong stimuli or to stimuli of dif-
ferent kinds. All of these differences are in-
herited in different stocks. How does it happen
that these different stocks exist? What is the
origin of the diverse biotypes? How does it
happen that individuals are diverse in so many
ways and that the diversities are inherited? It
seems to us that originally they could not have
been diverse. They must have come from the
same parents and yet they have become different.
How does this occur?

Before entering upon this, recall for a moment
certain things about the genetics of higher or-
ganisms; because we know more about them than
we do of the Protozoa. It has been shown that
higher animals have in their nuclei a lot of diverse
substances which are commonly called genes.
These substances can be separated from one an-
other and then recombined in biparental repro-
duction; and in that way it can be proven
that they are diverse; that they have diverse ef-
fects on development. They give the individuals
diverse adult characteristics.

What is the underlying idea concerning the
gene, what are its essential features? Why should
some organic substances be called genes and

Jury 19, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 83

others not? In Drosophila much has become
known about genes, about their arrangement, size,
number, etc. but these details are, in a way, subsi-
diary. The underlying points, briefly, are two:
(1) genes are materials on which the character-
istics of the organism—its form, its struc-
ture, its activities—depend in the sense that if
you change one or more of the genes some of
‘these characteristics are changed; (2) these di-
verse substances on which characteristics depend,
each assimilates after its own kind; each divides,
reproduces, after its own kind, so as to give rise
to additional amounts of that same kind of ma-
terial, just as the different kinds of Protozoa
multiply, each after its own kind. After ten suc-
cessive generations, as you know, the gene, or the
Protozcon, has multiplied its material 1000 times,
and after a hundred divisions, many billions of
times. If you substitute one kind of a substance
for another, the characteristics of the individuals
are changed, and each kind reproduces after its
own type. Any substances that show these char-
acteristics we may call genes. Or if you want to
restrict the name to such substances when they are
in the form of small particles arranged in rows in
chromosomes, then we will call any materials that
show these two characteristics “genic substances.”
Now, in Protozoa that show diverse inherited
a it is clear that there must be
_ diverse substances which determine the diverse
characteristics. For example in the Rhizopod,
Difflugia corona, there are great differences in size
and in physiological effects, and these differences
are in large measure inherited so that there are
different biotypes. If you allow any one of these
individuals to reproduce you get another indivi-
dual like itself, and in that way “there are produced
diverse biotypes. The different biotypes are com-
posed of diverse substances, some yielding few
- spines and some many, some short spines and
some long, just as different chemicals yield dif-
ferent crystals. The different substances that
give these different characteristics reproduce, each
after its own kind, producing different races, so
that there are genic substances in these Protozoa.
Now, how does it happen that there are diverse
~ genic substances, assimilating and reproducing
each after its own kind? The most natural sug-
gestion is that perhaps the environment acts on
‘the genic substance and modifies it and that this
produces new characteristics. It has been shown,
as you know, that in higher organisms this sort of
thing can be done by the use of certain agents;
by radiations. Radiations alter the gene, causing
it to yield a new hereditary characteristic, so that
we have a mutation. In order to produce a muta-
_ tion two things must be done: (1) the gene must
_ be changed so as to yield a different characteristic
and (2) the changed gene must multiply after its
-own kind. It must produce, not the original sub-

fe

£

ae:

stance, but the kind of substance that has been
brought about by the action of the radiation, or
whatever has produced the mutation. The changed
gene must assimilate and reproduce after its own
kind. These are the conditions that must be ful-
filled in order to get new characteristics by action
of the environment.

Now, coming back to the Protozoa, we can
readily change their form and structure by sub-
jecting them to diverse chemical and _ physical
conditions. But when they are restored to normal
environment, the same old form, structure and
function come back, so that diversity of race has
not been produced. But if we continue to subject
the animals for generation after generation, suc-
cessively, to the ‘special conditions, and keep this
up for a very long time, then we get certain other
results. We get changes in the inherited charac-
teristics. In other words, the two essential
conditions for a mutation have been fulfilled.
Some genic substance has been changed and it
assimilates, in the changed condition, and pro-
duces more of that same genic substance, in vast
quantities. A diverse biotype has been produced.
Such diversities have been produced by many
different types of conditions in Protozoa. It is
this that gives the situation interest for compari-
son with mutations in higher organisms. Altera-
tions so produced are of many different types.
Some are injurious. Some of them on the other
hand are distinctly to the advantage of the organ-
ism. These are what have been called adaptive
changes in the hereditary constitution. Changes
produced by a particular environmental agent
often have a special and definite relation to that
particular kind of agent, fitting the organism to
thrive and survive under the influence of that
agent.

The first type of inherited environmental effect
has been brought to light by the classical work
on life histories, depression, degeneration and
rejuvenescence in the Protozoa; work begun by
Maupas and Balbiani forty years ago and con-
tinued to the present time—some of the most
distinguished work having been done by investi-
gators in the Marine Biological Laboratory. If
you cultivate an Infusorian for generation after
generation, under conditions differing from that
in nature, after a very long time it begins to “run
down hill.” It begins to decline in vigor. It
multiplies less rapidly. It does not resist bad
Saditons as well. It has digestive and assimila-
tive troubles. It shows various unfavorable con-
ditions. If you do not handle it with loving care
it will die on your hands. The course of these
changes is shown by plotting a curve of the fre-
quency of fission. It runs gradually down hill,
with fluctuations ; but on the whole there is a very
steady downward progress, even until death.

This whole complex of symptoms is commonly

84 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 3

spoken of as depression. As you know, there is
some difference of opinion as to what is occurring
during depression. Some think of it as a change
similar to getting old; others think of it as essen-
tially an injury due to environmental conditions.
Whatever its ultimate nature, environmental con-
ditions do play a part in bringing it about. In
some organisms, such decline or depression does
not occur if the creatures are kept in a favorable
environment while it does occur in an unsuitable
one. According to Dr. Woodruff, Paramecium
aurelia continues to live indefinitely if kept under
favorable conditions, but if kept under unfavor-
able conditions dies after some hundreds of
generations. Such decline may be produced by
unfit food, too high temperatures, certain chemi-
cals, and many other kinds of unfit conditions.
The material of which these organisms are com-
posed has become gradually altered by the
environment so that they have been damaged;
they have become depressed or degenerated.

What we are most interested in is that this
altered material continues to assimilate, to produce
more of its own depressed kind, to multiply in
the depressed condition. If we compare a stock
that has been living under bad conditions, and
has run down hill, with a stock which has not
been living under such conditions, we find that
the two stocks are different. Under the same
present conditions, one multiplies rapidly and has
high vigor and resistance; the other multiplies
slowly and has low vigor and resistance, and
there are a large number of different grades of
such depression. This may continue for 10, 100,
500, or more generations. That is to say, the
depressed genic substance multiplies itself in the
depressed condition. In the Protozoa the condi-
tion of the present generation as to vigor and
health depends on the conditions under which
their ancestors have lived. It may be their
ancestors 100 generations ago. If these have lived
under bad conditions, then the present individuals
are depressed and weak. If their ancestors have
lived under good conditions, the present indivi-
duals are strong and vigorous. This is the sort
of thing that many investigators have looked for
in man and in his relatives, the higher animals.
They have looked for inherited degeneracy
resulting from alcohol or other poisons; but the
evidence is that this sort of thing does not occur
in man or among the many-celled organisms.
Apparently the processes through which the genic
substances go, and the great number of cell

divisions from the egg cell to the adult
are incompatible with continuing to multi-
ply an injury. In the Protozoa there is but

a single cell division between parent and offspring.
In some of the Protozoa there are indications that
the genic substance, so damaged, is localized in
some part of the body, and that there are other

parts which are not damaged and that these may
pass on to later generations, so that the damage
is remedied. But the important thing is that
there are genic materials that may be damaged
by environment, and that nevertheless continue to
assimilate, multiply and produce individuals in
the damaged condition, so that the injury is re-—
produced for hundreds of generations. J
When Protista of certain kinds are subjected
over long periods,—for hundreds or thousands
of generations,—to very gradual changes in con-
ditions, perhaps of an injurious nature, such as
gradually increasing temperature, they slowly ac-
quire an increased resistance. The increase may
be very great. The experiments of Dallinger and
Drysdale on flagellates, lasting over a period of
seven years, increased the temperature which
certain species of Protozoa can resist from about
25°C. to about 70°C. or from about 80°-160° F
If Protozoa are subjected to certain chemicals
their resistance becomes in time greatly increased.
The animals become immunized to certain poisons,
just as higher animals do, so that they can later
live and thrive under conditions which earlier
would have killed them at once. In this
respect the results are the same in Protista
and in the higher organisms. There can be no-
doubt about the main facts. Investigators have
begun with a single cell, have allowed it to divide,
and have produced from its divisions may indivi-
duals; one set of these have been subjected to”
conditions that bring on immunity and increased
resistance, while the other has not. The two
become, in the course of many generations, ex-
tremely diverse in their resistance to these condi-
tions, even when restored to the usual ones.
In the free-living Protozoa, knowledge of these
matters is less extensive. The genetic features
have been brought out mainly in a very extensive
investigation over many years by Jollos. Certain
very important features have been worked out
by various investigators. Resistance has been
greatly increased, in the case of Paramecium, to
quinine, various dyes such as methylene blue,
trypan blue, and certain compounds of arsenic and
antimony. The acquirement of resistance is due
to some change in the metabolism of animals so
that they have the power to destroy a harmful
substance or transform it into something else.
Paramecia that have acquired the power to resist
quinine do not resist and destroy methylene blue.
The acquired immunity is specific, in large degree.
The genic substance is changed in a different way
by each of these different materials. :
Such immunity, such increases of resistance, 1s,
in the Protozoa, inherited. This is clearly shown —
to be the case both in the parasitic Protozoa and
bacteria, and in the free-living forms. The
acquired resistance persists after the organisms
have been remoyed from the agents that have

Jury 19, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 85

caused the change. Such inheritance is known
to endure for ten, twenty, a hundred, sometimes
thousands, of generations. In the course of time
it may disappear if the animals are kept continual-
ly under conditions that lack the agent which
produced resistance. To this we return. But it is
this positive fact of inheritance for hundreds of
generations that is of interest. It shows clearly
that the organism, or some material in the organ-
ism, has become changed under the influence of
environmental conditions and that this material
continues to assimilate, multiply and reproduce
after its own changed kind. The altered, more
resistant substance increases itself a thousand
times in ten generations. The environment, then,
has produced a heritable change, and if that is
what is meant by mutation, then this is a mutation.

These changes are not damage, but improve-
ment. The organism acquires the power to do
certain things that it could not do before and to
live under conditions under which it formerly
could not live. The powers and capabilities of
the members of the present generation depend on
the conditions under which their ancestors lived
4 hundred generations or more ago.

Slightly different facts are known for many
bacteria. Certain kinds of bacteria can split up
certain sugars, such as lactose. Certain others
cannot. The latter, if cultivated in the presence
of that sugar, make no use of it for several or
many generations, but in the course of time some
of them develop the power to split it up, to create
nutriment from it. Such individuals transmit this
acquired power for many generations. One is
inclined to be sceptical about the inheritance of
such acquired powers but experiments have been
very carefully carried out. Some investigators
have begun their experiments with a single bac-
terial cell. One part of the descendants were
induced to acquire the new power, others were
not. It was found by tests that one set retained
the power to break up the lactose and the other
had no such power. This also is a change induced
by environment which is beneficial to the organ-
ism.

These three are perhaps the main classes of
inherited environmental changes in the Protozoa.
(1) Environmental conditions may damage the
genic material and this damaged genic substance
will assimilate, multiply and reproduce itself. (2)
Resistance may be increased, and, again, the
altered material assimilates and reproduces; and,
(3) environmental conditions may change the
metabolic processes, so that later the organism
has the power to perform chemical operations that
it could not do before, and this altered substance
also assimilates, multiplies and reproduces in that
condition. In many ways, therefore, the capabili-
ties of the Protozoan individual depend on the
way in which its ancestors lived. If they lived in

* fied.

such a way as to be injured, the descendants are
weak and degenerate. If they lived in such a way
as to acquire new powers, these new powers are
handed on to the children to the hundredth
generation.

The contrast between this and what we find in
many-celled organisms, in higher animals, in man,
seems very great. Why should there be such dif-
ferences between simple and complex organisms
in this respect ? What is it that has really happened
when the organism has changed under the influence
of the environment and the changes are handed
down to posterity? How are we to understand the
relation between the nature of the inherited
changes and the nature of the _ environ-
mental condition that brings them about? How
are we to understand the fact that high temper-
ature brings about increased resistance to high
temperature? Or that the presence of a particular
kind of food induces the power to make use of
that kind of food? How can we understand, in
other words, the adaptiveness of the changes?

When we enter on such questions we are deal-
ing with interpretations, and interpretations are
less valuable and enduring than the facts they try
to explain. The answers to these questions are
by no means clear. There are many important
relations that need to be considered in forming
an opinion.

For an adequate interpretation we ought to have
before us a picture of the total genetics of the
organisms, but my time will not permit me to pre-
sent such a picture here. Certain important re-
lations however we must sketch.

First, we have the fact that many, though not
all, of these inherited modifications, after having
been passed on for perhaps hundreds of genera-
tions, disappear when conjugation takes place.
Now, at conjugation, as you know, there occur
changes in the constitution of the organism that
might very well have something to do with the
disappearance of inherited changes. In higher
animals we know that the genic substances are
in the nuclei, and so they may very well be in the
nuclei of Protozoa. The two kinds of nuclei,
micro. and macronuclei, are derived from the
same nucleus, so that if one of them contains
genic substance the other probably does also. The
macronucleus enlarges and takes part in ordinary
activities, while the other nucleus remains minute.
During conjugation the large macronucleus is dis-
solved and disappears. Only the micronucleus
remains. The latter divides and reproduces a
new macronucleus. The disappearance at this
time of the modifications induced by the environ-
ment seems to imply that it was the genic sub-
stance in the macronucleus that had become modi-
When these genic substances disappear and
are replaced by substances from the micronucleus,
naturally the modifications disappear also. Many

86 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. V. No. 34

of the different types of modification may disap-
pear at this time—depression, inherited lowering
of the vitality, ete. According to Jollos acquired
resistance to heat and chemicals usually disappears
as do also other inherited changes.

All this leads readily to the following interpreta-
tion. The genic substances are in the nucleus, in
the Protozoa as they are in the Metazoa. The
nucleus becomes divided into an active part and
a reserve part, both containing genic substances.
The genic substances of the active macronucleus
become modified by the environment. These
modified genic substances assimilate, multiply and
reproduce, so that the changes brought about are
inherited and this continues for many genera-
tions. But when, after many generations, these
¢nodified genic substances disappear at conjuga-
tion, their effects disappear with them. They are
replaced by unmodified genic substances from the
micronucleus. In consequence, the organism
goes back to the condition which existed before
the changed condition occurred. This is only a
hypothesis, but it is extremely plausible, and prob-
ably there is a great deal of truth in it. But if it
is correct, there is evidence that the environment
can and does modify not only the genic substances
in the large nucleus, but also genic substances
somewhere else. For not all inherited environ-
mental modifications disappear at conjugation.
This is true of all classes of environmental modi-
fication. In the case of depression resulting from
bad conditions, both Calkins and Woodruff have
found that if the depression has become deep, it
may not be entirely lost at conjugation.
The condition of the animals is improved,
but they still retain a large degree of depression
which is passed on to descendants. Hence there
are depressed genic substances still remaining
after the dissolution of the macronucleus, and
these continue to assimilate and multiply in the
depressed condition. If these genic substances
are in the micronucleus, then it is clear that long-
continued action of bad conditions alters the
genic substances of the micronucleus, though less
deeply than that of the macronucleus. Or possibly
the cytoplasm has the properties of genic sub-
stance, perpetuating itself in the damaged con-
dition.

This same thing is shown by the fact that
certain Infusoria, such as certain species of
Paramecium, have a regular process of dissolving
and redistributing the nuclear material, about
every 30 days or every 60 days (endomixis), yet
under bad environmental conditions depression is
brought about and continues unchanged through
the dissolution of the macronucleus becoming
greater and greater, despite the replacement of
the larger nucleus by the smaller. Further,
acquired resistance to heat or chemicals persists
through many periods of endomixis. So it is

_ duced at conjugation without any action of the

clear that the genic substances are not restricted
to the larger nucleus. :

All of this, while interesting, does not touch
the main question:—what is the nature of the
change in the genic substances—the change which
gives rise to inherited modifications? I talked
this over a short time ago with one of the most
successful and experienced investigators of the
production and inheritance of mutations in the —
higher organisms. He held that all these changes”
are mutations. The Protozoa, he held, obviously
undergo mutation very frequently. Their genic
substances are actually changed, as the genes of —
Drosophila are changed by radiation. That is,
perhaps the most simple interpretation, but it
leaves, as you will have observed, certain very
large and insistent questions unanswered. How
are to be explained the adaptive features of these
mutations, if that is what they are? How are
to be explained the acquirement under the
influence of particular agents, of new methods of
metabolism, the acquirement of immunity, of
increased resistance, that precisely fit the agent
that induced them?

The most direct answer, again, is to say that
the genic substances in the Protozoa have the
saine powers of acclimatization and immunization —
that other parts of the living material have in the
higher organisms. Acclimatization to high or low
temperatures, to diverse chemicals; acquirement
of immunity to poisons, to disease-producing
germs, these things actually occur in the body of
many organisms that are not Protozoa. They
occur in our own bodies. They do not occur, so
far as we can discover, in the genes of higher
organisms, but if they can occur in other parts of
the living material, as they certainly can, then
there is no reason why they cannot occur in the —
genic material. One may therefore interpret the
facts in Protozoa as showing that the genic sub- —
stances have in these organisms retained the power
of direct acclimatization, of immunization, to
environmental conditions.

Investigators in Protozoology have been averse
to these radical conclusions. At least they have
sought other explanations and there are other
facts and relations in the genetics of the Protozoa
that suggest the possibility of other explanations,
though they by no means rule out the possibilities
that I have set forth. I shall not have time to”
take up these other facts and relations, but will
merely state certain of them in a few words.
First, we have the fact that changes in resistance,
acclimatization, changes of most of the kinds that
we have already mentioned as being produced
under the action of the environment, may be pro-

environment. Conjugation is the process of
forming new combinations of genic materials so
that we may have the same results as those pro-

Jury 19, 1930 ]

tHE (COLLECTING

NET 87

duced under the action of a particular environ-

ment arising through new combinations of genic
substances without mutation. It is suggested,
then, that possibly the environment acts in some
such way as that.

The second thing, to which I shall merely
allude, is that during the ordinary reproduction
of the Protozoa you can, by a process of selection,
while keeping all the organisms under the same
environmental conditions, produce biotypes or
races which differ in their characteristics.
Not so much is known about the production of
differences in resistance and the like. The things
that are known are mainly structural differences,
but it is true that new inherited characteristics
may be produced by selection. How does selection
act? It has commonly been assumed that selection
acts through the fact that when the cell divides
into two cells the nucleus does not divide
accurately, so that something like non-disjunction
occurs and a different combination of genes goes
into one cell from that which goes into another.
That is also a mere hypothesis, and it is obvious
that selection can act just as well and produce the
results that it does produce, if there are frequent
mutations. Selection might act through the fact
that mutations are occurring frequently. All the
observed results of selection can be so produced.
If either of these methods of selective action are

real, then possibly the environment may act
selectively. And that would give us an answer to
the question, how does an environmental agent
bring about acclimatization to that particular

agent? The answer would be that many muta-
tions are occurring, or irregularities in cell

division are occurring, and some of these produce
animals with increased resistance to the inimical
agent. The rest are killed or do not propagate.
In time, therefore, the entire stock consists of
individuals with resistance to these agents, and
the resistance is inherited.

Many investigators of the Protozoa hold that
this is the method—one or the other is the
method—through which inherited environmental
modifications are produced. These are hypotheses
to explain results, hypotheses which are preferred.
There is no evidence to show which, if either, of
the possibilities is correct.

I must close here since my time is up. The
important thing that I have tried to bring before
you is that in the Protozoa changes in the genic
substances occur under the action of the environ-
ment, and that the changed material so produced
continue to assimilate, multiply and reproduce, so
that the changes are inherited for many genera-
tions. All the rest is interpretation.

1A lecture, slightly abridged, presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on July 15. The text was trans-
eribed by Miss H. Irene Corey from her shorthand notes.

NEW LIGHT ON THE EVOLUTION AND MIGRATIONS OF AMERICAN MAMMALS

(Continued from Page 81)

Extinction of species and higher groups has
always been a mystery. At the end of the
Mesozoic Era the gigantic reptiles which had
dominated the land, the sea and the air, died out
all over the world with what seems like startling

_ suddenness. The suddenness was, almost certainly,

illusory and due to breaks in the record. We have
recently learned much concerning the extinction
of the great Pleistocene mammals, which is now
seen to have been a gradual, long drawn-out pro-
cess. The Wamer Mastodon and the patches of
skin of the ground-sloth Glyptotherium, found in
association with a skull, on which the blood-stains
are still red, have long been known as proving
that these Pleistocene species had survived till
historic times. Two new discoveries have lately

_ been made, one of which demonstrates the very

late survival of Pleistocene species; this is the
discovery, in Ecuador, of a Mastodon skeleton,
manifestly killed and washed by the Indians;
associated with this are quantities of flint imple-
ments and Maya pottery of the 4th Century A. D.
Professor Lull, of Yale, has just published a
description of a ground-sloth, found in a cave in

New M exico, with much of the skin and ligaments

still preserved. The bearing of these facts on the
antiquity of Man in America is obvious.

It is now definitely proved that similar
structures may be independently developed, in
different groups, not only once but many times,
but these are single, or a few related structures.
There is no reason to believe that the same groups
ever originated twice. A very striking case is the
twice repeated development in Europe, North and
South America, of clawed feet among hoofed
animals. In each case, the scattered parts of
these unfortunate animals had been distributed
among two or three orders. I have just published
an account of the skeleton of the Patagonian
Homalodontotherium very kindly put in my hands
by Director Luirius and Mr. Riggs of the Field
Museum, in Chicago, the Toxodont representative
of the clawed ungulates. I may tell you in strict
confidence, that Mr. Riggs has found a sabre-
tooth Marsupial, a most astounding discovery.

The work of the Field Museum in South
America and of the American Museum in Mon-
golia is gradually unravelling the tangled skein of
mammalian migrations from continent to con-

tinent.

3

88 THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vot. V. No. 3¢

A NEW TECHNIQUE AND SOME ADSORPTION STUDIES WITH A PLANT VIRUS
Dr. B. M. Duccar
Professor of Plant Physiology and Applied Botany, University of Wisconsin

The type of virus chiefly considered in this
connection induces a ‘mosaic’? or mottling of
the leaves of tobacco and some related hosts. The
virus is distributed throughout the plant and the
histological changes are relatively slight. Mottl-
ing is the result of areas in which the chlorophyll
and plastids are poorly developed (yellow areas)
intermingled with areas of richer development
(deep green areas). Affected plants live to matur-
ity, with slight dwarfing, but they never “recover’’
or “grow out” of the disease.

Infective juice is ordinarily obtained by grind-
ing fresh leaves of diseased plants, filtering
through cotton or cloth, and centrifuging to re-
move only the coarsest particles. After extensive
efforts to obtain a purer virus extract by filtration
or selective adsorption, following in part the
methods of Willstatter with enzymes, it was
found practicable, and satisfactory for most
purposes, to remove by selective adsorption
or precipitation the major part of the
undesirable or contaminating particles, thus
leaving the virus in suspension in the “clarified”
juice. The agent finally selected is the trade
product super celite, a very finely prepared dia-
tomaceous earth. Diluting the murky-green
chlorophyll-containing juice to a concentration
of 1/10, adding 10 gms of “celite’’ per 100 cc.,
shaking, permitting the mixture to stand % hour,
then centrifuging for 3 mins., an amber colored
liquid is obtained. This is effective at high
dilution in producing the disease, and is practically
equal to the original juice at the same dilution.
The virus solution thus prepared is favorable for
the study of many physical chemical properties.

Inoculation technique has been improved and
the usual errors involved in handling large num-
bers of plants for experimental purposes largely
avoided by the use of glass capillary infecting
needles. These are handled by forceps flamed
after each insertion, a separate short capillary
being used for each plant in any test.

Many grades of charcoal adsorb and inactivate
this virus. The more consistent results are

CHROMOSOME STRUCTURE IN GASTERIA
Dr. Wm. RANpdoLPH TAyLor
Professor of Botany, University of Michigan

The available history of meiosis in microsporo-
cytes of Gasteria begins with the inception of
prophase activity. The nucleus shows granules
throughout supported by a coagulable matrix, and
with 1-3 nucleoli. Earliest concentration produces
masses of rather indefinite form, which give way
to a definitely spiral spireme system, the individual

obtained with certain “activated carbon” prepara-
tions, especially “‘Norite’’ and ““Nuchar No. 2”.
The process is considered practically irreversible.
Quantitative studies can be made on the basis of
the dilution of the virus only, since the mass of
the virus is unknown. ‘

Constituents of certain plant juices also
inactivate the virus: the juice of the poke weed
(Phytolacca decandra) is _ notably
Definite concentration relations exist.
poke weed the inactivating agent cannot be re-
moved by centrifuging, is non-dialyzable, but
readily removed by charcoal or by filtration of
the juice through fine porcelain filters, thus indi-
cating a material of colloidal dimensions and
suggesting adsorption of the virus particles.

Preparations of various enzymes appear to
affect the virus not primarily by reason of enzymic
action but rather because of other constituents of
the preparations, especially certain proteins. The
available crude proteins thus far tested differ
greatly in the magnitude of this inactivation.

Meal of the poke weed seed is highly efficient
as an inactivating agent, and the meal of tobacco
seed, even when considerably diluted, is conspicu-
ously” positive in effect. Since the virus of
tobacco is never transmitted by way of the seed,
the virus must suffer inactivation during seed
development. It is suggested that seed proteins,
in the case of this particular virus, may be the
cause of the so-called “hereditary” loss of the
virus.

Other appropriate lines of study, from the
standpoint of adsorption and inactivation, are
suggested by the relation of the virus to its insect
carrier or vector. Certain species of sucking
insects convey the virus from diseased to healthy
plants, other species do not. Some type of
inactivation may possibly explain many of the
interesting relations already recorded in the
literature.

A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 11.

parts lying roughly parallel with consequent
polarity. Evidences of such regularity are soon
lost, and the threads seem indefinitely intertangled
throughout the nuclear cavity. Some evidence
indicates that the threads pair laterally from this
apparently tangled state, as when parallel pairs ap-
pear on one side of the nucleus leading toward and

functional in the next division is visible.

Jury 19, 1930 }

THE COLLECTING NET

89

merging into the tangle of single threads on the
other side. Pending decisions on certain obscure
points, it may be assumed that this is the manner
of synapsis of the homologous spireme elements.
The paired strands become evenly distributed
throughout the nucleus, show paired chromomeres
of suggestive configurations, and from this
point onwards are little subject to synezetic
distortions. However, it becomes increasingly
difficult to secure the support of properly coagu-
lated karyolymph, and various appearances sug-
gestive of so-called ‘second-contraction’ are
produced. Following even distribution of the
spireme, the lateral pairs of threads gradually
separate somewhat, while shortening greatly, and
often with some evidence of assuming a partly
radial position with respect to the nucleus. By
the time that the number of elements can be
precisely ascertained initial evidence appears of
division of each to form a true chromosome
tetrad, and this is well marked in the nearest ap-
proach which this plant shows to a diakinesis
stage, as the writer described in 1926. Chromo-
meres, in the better cases clearly paired, still
appear, but by no means in numbers correspond-
ing to the ones seen earlier. The shortening into
metaphase involves complete separation of the
elements of the tetrad, and either the new
formation of a chromonematal thread within each
now swollen half-chromosome or the spiral
winding of the old spireme axis. The metaphase
and early anaphase chromosomes show a clear
differentiation into matrix and chromonema, the
latter at first glance appearing as discs which
more careful study shows to be the manifestation
of a spiral chromonema. This structure becomes
obvious in later anaphases, with increasingly loose
turns and less dense matrix. Always the
chromosome halves are definitely oriented with
respect to each other, and sometimes the fiber
attachment constriction which will only be
Also

there is some evidence of the split of the chro-

spiral

spirals.

monema which will be completed during the
second maturation division, to be effective during
the first gametophytic mitosis. In telophase,
after the formation of the membrane, the chro-
monemata seem to lose their unbroken contour
and evidences of chromomeres appear. The
remaining telophase changes involve completion
of the apparent dispersion of the chromosomes

and organization of nucleoli.

The second maturation division, however,

succeeds immediately. The earliest evidence of

a spireme shows discontinuous-looking structures
in parallel bands which soon merge into parallel
Each of these in favorable preparations
appears split. They shorten, become definitely
with sharp contours, and show the
characteristic second-maturation division prophase

character of paired chromosomes approximated
at the fiber-attachment constriction. All the
attachment ends are together at one pole of the
nucleus, just as they went all together toward one
pole in first maturation anaphase. The late
prophase chromosomes show two parallel chro-
monemata, and the form suggests some flattening.
As the chromosomes shorten they twist, be-
come definitely cylindrical, and show the double
spiral at metaphase in each of the sister chromo-
somes. Shortening continues until telophase, but
the chronionemata shorten faster than the chro-
mosome as a whole, and in late anaphase again
appear as almost straight elements. The matrix
may appear vacuolate and the chromosomes, in
later stages, somewhat flattened. With the
appearance of a telophase membrane the chromo-
somes take up a peripheral position in the nucleus,
and become flattened against the membrane.
Anastomoses with adjacent chromosomes form
and break the regularity of contour, while as the
nuclei increase in size the chromosomes lengthen,
the chromonemata become granular and _ less
obviously continuous, separate somewhat further
and eventually lie as notable parallel rows of
granules lengthwise of the nucleus. Cytokinesis
by furrowing follows the second maturation
division, a vague suggestion of denser cytoplasm
being the only suggestion of a cell plate after the
first maturation division.

The method used on Gasteria served to give
an unusually good representation of the first divi-
sion of the gametophytic nucleus in the pollen
grain, ordinarily difficult, because of the heavy
chitinous coats. The split first noted in the first
maturation anaphase chromonema and clearly
followed through the second maturation division,
appears in the gametophytic prophase, showing
a split spireme which behaves in the orthodox
manner to the formation of a simple haploid set
of split chromosomes. The structure of the
chromosomes could not be followed in this
material, but is presumably the same as that noted
in the root-tip cells of Gasteria, not yet reported
upon, but which is similar to that reported for
vegetative chromosomes by Kaufmann and more
recently by Sharp.

The genus Gasteria is of South African lilia-
ceous plants, sub-shrubby with very thick,
strapshaped, often warted leaves and simple or
subsimple racemes of pendulous tubular orange-
red flowers. It is closely related to the
officinal Aloe. Its virtue for this study is the
small number of large chromosomes with form-
differentiation between them. Most of the
critical observations were made on microsporo-
cytes more or less extruded from anthers teased
into fragments in the fixing fluid and then
sectioned in paraffin, or on smears of the suitable
stages likewise stained with haematoxylin. In

90 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. a

general the methods followed were those described
in the botanical chapter of McClung’s Handbook
on Microscopical Technique. Subsequent to the
preparation of most of the writer’s material very
important improvements on the methods of mak-

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. TAYLOR

Dr. C. E. McCiune
Professor and Head of the Department of Zoology, University of Pennsylvania

The work of Professor Taylor is valuable,
not only for the results obtained, but also for the
demonstration it gives of the importance of good
technical
tions produced by the classical botanical methods

methods. In his preparations distor-

are lacking, and structures, not otherwise demon-
strated, appear clearly. Thus, synizesis is lacking
and the inner structure of the chromosomes is
rendered evident. It is of great general interest
to note that these improved results upon plant cells
lessen materially the apparent differences between
them and animal cells. Chromomeres, often said
to be absent, exhibit in Gasteria all the regularity
of structure and behavior common to animal cells.
The manifestation of a plane of cleavage in a
chromosome, which will not result in separation
of the parts until a later cell division, adds
another instance of the phenomenon. It seems
clear that this is much more common than has

THE CATALYTIC EFFECT OF METHYLENE BLUE ON THE OXYGEN CONSUMPTION

OF NORMAL TISSUES AND TUMOURS!
Dr. E. S. GuzMan Barron
Instructor in Medicine, Johns Hopkins University Medical School

It was shown two years ago by Harrop and the
writer that the addition of methylene blue or
similar reversibly oxidized and reduced dyes
increases the oxygen consumption of erythrocytes.
Correlated to this increase, it was also demon-
strated that there is a decrease of the lactic acid
formation, suggesting an oxidative change of this
substance. From his studies on the action of
methylene blue on the oxygen consumption of
marine eggs (arbacia and starfish) and leucocytes,
the writer suggested that the effect of the dye
seemed proportional to the fermentative power of
the cell. To test the validity of this hypothesis
the writer has made use of the fundamental re-
searches of Warburg on the metabolism of normal
adult tissues and tumours. It is known that
while, in general, normal adult tissues possess a
respiration sufficiently high to check the ap-
pearance of fermentative processes, tumours
have a low respiration; in consequence, part of
the necessary energy for the performance of
cellular activities has to be provided by fermenta-
tion.

The following normal tissues were studied:
liver, kidney, pancreas, testicles, brain (gray
matter), and spleen, Liver, pancreas, kidney and

ing permanent balsam smear preparations of plant
microsporocytes have been published by B. P.
Kaufman in The American Journal of Botany
and by H. C. Tuan in Stain Technology.

A paper presented at the Marine Biological Laboratory
on July 11.

been supposed, and it may even be a constant part
of the mitotic process, which, in unfavorable
material, can not be seen. I have seen in Amblys-
toma cells undoubted evidence of such precocious
splitting of chromosomes as soon as the daughter
chromatids have separated in the equatorial plate.
There seems to be an inherent inability of the
ultimate chromatin units to exist in an unpaired
condition. Division of these units apparently
requires their arrangement in a linear thread of
the smallest lateral dimensions, which, of course,
greatly increases the length of the aggregate. In
some cases limitations of space result in throwing
the thread into a coil, and this result is beauti-
fully shown in Gasteria. Further extension and
refinement of the methods which have permitted
Dr. Taylor to unravel the tangled prophase thread
of Gasteria mitoses will bring us much valuable
knowledge of the common mitotic process of
plants and animals,

testicles possess no aerobic glycolysis. Brain and
spleen have a small aerobic glycolysis. Methylene
blue has no catalytic effect on the tissues where
there is no aerobic glycolysis, i. e. lactic acid pro-
duction ; moreover it exerts a distinct toxic action
as shown by a definite drop in the oxygen con-
sumption. The dye increases slightly the oxygen
consumption of brain and spleen. When the
production of lactic acid is induced in normal
tissues by inhibiting the respiration with KCN,
the dye exhibits its catalytic effect. Addition of
lactates to normal tissues has no action, i. e. th
dye does not oxidize the added lactate.

The following tumours were studied: human
carcinoma, Rous chicken sarcoma, rat sarcoma,
carcinoma and adeno-carcinoma. All these
tissues possess a definite aerobic glycolysis.
Accordingly methylene blue increased thei
oxygen consumption from 40 to 90 per cent.

It can be therefore concluded, as far as the cells
and tissues studied by the writer are concerned,
that methylene blue exerts its catalytic power on
cells possessing aerobic glycolysis, there being a
rough proportionality between the catalytic power
of the dye and the fermentative power of the cell.

1 An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 3,

Jury 19, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 91

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. BARRON
Eric G, Batt
National Research Council Fellow in Medicine, The Johns Hopkins University Medical School

During Professor Warburg’s visit last fall to
give the Herter lectures, I heard him say in a
small discussion group that everywhere he went
he was met with questions concerning various
curious actions of methylene blue and troubles

encountered with this dye. If only some scientific
songwriter, be there such, would write the
Methylene Blues what a vogue it would have in
most laboratories! Dr. Barron has recently
added more fuel to the flame in demonstrating the
curious catalytic effect of this dye and certain
other reversible oxidation reduction dyes on the
oxygen consumption of various living cells and
tissues. There seems but little doubt in this case
that methylene blue is behaving as a hydrogen
acceptor but the substance or substances upon
which it acts is still very much a problem.

Barron’s recent contribution, indicating a
relation between the catalytic power of the dye
and the fermentative power of the cell, though
not solving this problem, is I believe a step in the
right direction. This work suggests that cells
possessing aerobic glycolysis may have been
forced to this mode of metabolism due to the loss
or lack of an enzyme such as occurs in cells
capable of oxygen consumption. Addition of
methylene blue supplies these deprived cells with
a catalyst that is capable of behaving in a manner
similar to that afforded by the missing enzyme.
If KCN is added to cells possessing such an
enzyme to destroy its activity, then as Barron has
shown, the cell reverts to the fermentative type,
but can be immediately restored to its former
- oxygen consumption by the substitution of methy-
lene blue for its inactivated enzyme.

With such a respiration catalyst provided,
further work on its mode of action seems to be

in order. Does methylene blue act on the same
substances as the naturally occurring enzyme or
is an entirely different set of procedures estab-
lished? If oxygen consumption alone is con-
sidered, then the two catalysts appear to be
analogous in their actions, but conclusions on this
basis alone are not very valuable. Further work
along this line should prove interesting. The work
of both Wendell and Warburg, confirming some
of Barron’s earlier experiments, points out the
possibilities of oxidation of lactic to pyruvic acid
being responsible for increased oxygen consump-
tion in the presence of methylene blue. Undoubt-
edly the formation of pyruvic acid may account
for some of the increased oxygen consumption,
for the fact that such an oxidation of lactic to
pyruvic acid by yeast cells occurs only in the
presence of methylene blue is well established.
However, such an oxidation cannot account for
all the oxygen consumed nor explain the increase
in carbon dioxide production that occurs simul-
taneously.

I believe that Dr. Barron’s recent work presents
a valuable means of obtaining further insight
into cell metabolism. In conditions of decreased
or increased oxygen consumption of cells the
effect of added methylene blue may give some

insight into the causes of the change that
occurred. For example, what would be its effect

in the interesting experiment of Root and Hay-
wood who found a decrease in oxygen consump-
tion of Arbacia eggs with increasing carbon
dioxide tension? And is the enormous increase
in oxygen consumption of the fertilized Arbacia
eggs due to the introduction of a catalyst not
jinlike methylene blue? These and many other
questions suggest themselves in connection with
this interesting discovery.

THE WOODS HOLE OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION
Dr. C. G. RoGERs
Professor of Comparative Physiology, Oberlin University

On Tuesday evening, July 8, the members of
the Marine Biological Laboratory and their friends
heard from Dr. Bigelow an account of some of
the aims and purposes of the Woods Hole Ocean-
ographic Institution. Dr. Bigelow mentioned in
passing that the work of construction of the lab-
oratory of the Institution is already under way on
the water front just southeast of the Main Build-
ing of the Marine Biological Laboratory, and
called attention to some of the reasons why
Woods Hole has been selected as the place. for

this institute. A considerable part of the work
of the institute ‘will involve the use of a sea-
going laboratory in which a small group of special-
ists will carry on extended observations.

Dr. Bigelow mentioned the great lack of trust-
worthy information about the sea and the appar-
ent lack of interest in it and in the problems as-
sociated with it. The implications that investiga-
tors of the Marine Biological Laboratory are not
interested in the sea water seems to the writer
lacking in foundation. The great number of in-

92

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 34

vestigators here and at other seaside laboratories
who in the course of their experimental work
make daily routine tests of the hydrogen ion con-
centration, temperature, salinity, etc., of the sea
water, is sufficient indication of their interest and
of their recognition of the need for critically
controlled experimental conditions.

The lecturer pointed out the fact that the work
to be done by the Institution is of a very special
nature and that it must be done under conditions
very different from those to which we are ac-
customed in the Marine Biological Laboratory.
The research of the Institution including investi-
gation of a physical and chemical nature as well
as biological, must be organized as a definite pro-
gram under a sort of benevolent autocracy rather
than as independent research projects carried out
wholly by individual initiative. It will be very
likely that the activities of the Institution will as-
sume the form of a series of chain reactions
each step depending upon preceding activities and
results —an application of the trial and error
method.

Among the various lines of research proposed
are studies of the (1) chemical composition of
sea water; (2) direction and constancy of
ocean currents; (3) distribution of marine animal
and plant life and the causes leading to such dis-
tribution; (4) migrations of marine life; (5)
variations in the composition of sea water due to
flow of fresh water and to removal by secre-
tions of certain constituents of the sea water; (6)
temperature changes, their causes and effects; (7)
effects of light; (8) animal behavior as influenced
by various constituents of the sea water.

Such a list of undertakings can readily be
amplified by one interested in this particular
science.
be determined by the freedom with which indi-
vidual scientific imagination may be allowed to
function, and in part by the balance which may
be preserved between highly specialized investiga-
tion and the role which specialization has in com-
pleting the fabric of the knowledge of the sea.

Our best wishes are extended to the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution.

RECENT BOOKS IN THE BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES

Adolph, E. F., The Regulation of Size as Illustrated by
Unicellular Organisms. Thomas.

Bailey, V., Animal Life of the Yellowstone National
Park. Thomas.

Bailey and Miller, Text-Book of Embryology.
Wood.

Baitsell, G. A., The Evolution of Earth and Man. Yale.

Baitsell, G. A., A Manual of Biology (Fourth Ed.)
Macmillan.

Barger, George, Some Applications of Organic Chemis-
try to Biology and Medicine. McGraw-Hill.

Belling, J., Use of the Microscope. McGraw-Hill.

Blunt, Katherine and Cowan, Ruth, Ultraviolet Light
and Vitamin D in Nutrition. Chicago Press.

3olduan, Charles F., Public Heaith and Hygiene.
Saunders.

Bose, J. C., Growth and Tropic Movements of Plants.
Longmans, Green.

Bronson, W. S8., Fingerfins, The Tale of a Sargasso Fish.
Maemillan.

Buchanan, E. D. Bacteriology (Third Ed.) Macmillan.

Cameron, A. T. and White, Frank D., A Course in
Practical Biochemistry for Students of Medicine.
Maemillan.

Campbell, Elmer, General Elementary Botany. Crowell.

William

Castle, William E., The Genetics of the Domestic
Rabbit. Harvard.

Castle, William E., Genetics and Eugenics (Revised
Fourth Ed.) To be published in July. Harvard.

Chandler, Asa C., An Introduction to Human Parasi-
tology. Wiley.

Clark, Austin H., The New Evolution—Zoogenesis.

Williams & Wilkins.

Cowdry, Edmund V., Edited by, Human Biology and
Racial Welfare. Hoeber.

Craig, Charles F., Laboratory Methods of the United
States Army. Lea & Febiger.

De Beer, G. R., Embryology and Evolution. Oxford.

dHerelle, F., The Bacteriophage and its Clinical Ap-

plications, Thomas.
Dodds, Gideon §8., Essentials of Human Embryology.
Wiley.

Hast, E. M. and Jones, D. F.,
breeding. Lippincott.
Eriksson, J., Fungous Diseases of Plants. Thomas.
Evans, C .Lovatt and Hartridge, H., Starling’s Principles
of Human Physiology (Revised). Lea & Febiger.
Fairchild, David, Exploring for Plants. Macmillan.
Fasten, Nathan, Origin through Evolution. Knopf.
Fisher, R. A., The Genetical Theory of Natural Selec-
tion. Oxford.
Frank, R. T., The Female Sex Hormone. Thomas.
Fraser-Harris, D. F., The A. B. C. Nerves. Knopf.
Fulmer E. I. and Werkman, Chester, H., An Index to
the Chemical Action of Micro-organisms on the
Non-nitrogenous Organic Compounds. Thomas.
Gates, R. Ruggles, Heredity in Man. Macmillan.
Godwin, H., Plant Biology. Macmillan.
Guyer, Michael F., Animal Micrology (Third Revised

Inbreeding and Out-

Ed.) Chicago.

Harvey, E. Newton, The Nature of Animal Light. Lip-
pincott.

Haupt, A. W., Laboratory Directions for General

Biology. McGraw-Hill.

Herrick, C. Judson, The Thinking Machine. Chicago.

Howell, A. B., Aquatic Mammals. Thomas.

Jennings, H. S., The Biological Basis of Human Nature.
Norton.

Johnson, John C., Educational Biology. Macmillan.

Jones, F. Wood, Man’s Place Among the Mammals.
Longmans, Green.

Keeler, Clyde E., The Laboratory Mouse. Harvard.

Kligler, I. J., The Epidemiology and Control of Malaria
in Palestine. Chicago.

Lebour, Marie, The Planktonic Diatoms of Northern
Seas. Adlord & Son, London.

Lull, Richard S., Organic Evolution (Revised Ed.) Mac-
millan,

Lull, R. 8., A Remarkable Ground Sloth. Yale.

Lutman, B. F., Microbiology. McGraw-Hill.

Marmer, H. A., The Sea. Appleton.

Matheson, R., Handbook of the Mosquitoes of Nerth
America. Thomas. :

Maxwell, 8S. S., Labyrinth and Equilibrium, Lippincott,

|
|

a

The success of this institute will in part —

Jury 19, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 93

Metealf, Z. P., A Textbook of Economic Zoology. Lea
& Febiger.

Meyerhof, Otto, Chemical Dynamics of Life Pheno-
mena. Lippincott.

Michaelis, L., trans. from German by Flexner, L. B.,
Oxidation-Reduction Potentials. Lippincott.

Moore, A. R., edited by; Morgan, T. H.; Northrop, J.
H.; and Osterhout, W. J. V., Monographs on Ex-
perimental Biology. Lippincott.

Morgan, Ann, Field Book of Ponds and Streams, to be
published in July. Putnam’s.

Morgan, T. H., The Physical Basis of Heredity. Lip-
pincott.

Osterhout, W. J. V., Injury, Recovery and Death. Lip-
pincott.

Pack and Gill, Forests and Mankind. Macmillan.

Park, Wm. H.; Williams, Anna W.; and Krumwiede,
Charles, Pathogenic Micro-organisms. Lea & Febiger.

Parker, G. H., The Elementary Nerveus System. Lip-
pincott.

Parker, G. H., Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the
Vertebrates. Lippincott.

Parkes, A. S., The Internal Secretions of the Ovary’

(Monographs on Physiology). Longmans, Green.
Pearl, Raymond, The Biology of Death. Lippincott.
Pearse, A. S., Environment and Life. Thomas.
Pearson, H. H. W., Gnetales (Cambridge Botanical

Handbooks). Macmillan.

Plimmer, R. H. A. and V. G., Food, Health, Vitamins

(New Ed.) Longmans, Green.
mer Charles R., The Outlines of Modern Biology.

olt.
Rendle, A. B., The Classification of Flowering Plants.

Vol. 2 Dicotyledons. Macmillan.

Riley and Christenson, Guide to the Study of Animal
_ Parasites. McGraw-Hill.

Robbins, W. J. and Rickett, H. W., Laboratory In-
structions for General Botany. Van Nostrand.
Robertson, T. B., Chemical Basis of Growth and

Senescence. Lippincott.

Rogers, C. G., Laboratory Outlines

Physiology. McGraw-Hill.
Searth, G. W., An Elementary Course

Physiology. Wiley.

Schafer, Sir Edward Sharpley,
Histology. Lea & Febiger.
Seott, George G., The Science of Biology (Revised Ed.)

Crowell.

Shelford, Victor E., Laboratory and Field Ecology.

Balliere Tindall & Cox, London.

Shimer, H. W., Evolution and Man. Ginn.
Shull, A. F., Laboratory Directions in Principles of

Animal Biology. McGraw-Hill.

Shull, A. F., Principles of Animal Biology. MceGraw-

Hill.

Shumway, Waldo,
ology. Wiley.
Stephenson, M., Bacterial Metabolism (Monographs on

-Biochemistry). Longmans, Green.

Thomas, Muriel L., Work Book and Outline of Ana-
tomy and Physiology. Saunders.

Tilney, Frederick, The Master of Destiny,
graphy of the Brain. Doubleday, Doran.

Van Slyke, D. D., Factors Affecting the Distribution of

Electrolytes. Lippincott.

Walter, H. E., Genetics (Third Ed.) Macmillan.
Warthin, Alfred Scott, Creed of a Biologist. Hoeber.
Wieman, H. L., Introduction to Vertebrate Embryology.

McGraw-Hill.

Williams, Jesse F., Anatomy and Physiology. Saunders.
_ Wilson, James A., A Manual of Mendelism. Macmillan.
Woodger, J. H., Biological’ Principles. Harcourt, Brace.
Woodruff, L. L., Foundations of Biology (Fourth Ed.)

Maemillan.

Yerkes, R. M., The Great Apes. Yale.

in Comparative
in General

The Essentials of

Introduction to Vertebrate Embry-

A Bio-

THE CLUB TEAS AND DANCES

The weekly teas at the M. B. L. Club were
resumed with the Physiology-Protozoology tea on
Friday, July 18. These teas will be given each
Friday from 4:30 to 6 o'clock by members of the
different courses for anyone in the laboratory
who wishes to attend. They are informal and
intended to bring us together for a pleasant social
hour to get better acquainted with our hosts.

The second tea will be given by the Botany-
Embryology group on Friday, July 25. The next
week the Investigators and the Bureau of
Fisheries will be hosts, and Friday, the first of
August, the Invertebrate course will entertain.
We hope members of the Club and those who are
interested in the social doings of the Laboratory
will be present. Posters will be put up in the
Mess and the Laboratory Building to remind you
of the date and the host each Friday.

We are also planning a series of dances each
Saturday evening throughout the summer. They
will be from 9 to 12 and admission is 50 cents a
couple for non-members. The music is furnished
by the excellent Orthophonic Victrola and many
new records have been loaned us.

May I add my voice to Dr. Knower’s in urging
all members of the colony to join the Club. The
membership fee is only $1.50, the price of three
Saturday dances, and the advantages, as Dr.
Knower has already pointed out in former issues
of THe Cotrectrnc Net, are many and the
activities diverse. Being in an atmosphere some-
what different from that of your daily work is
alone a worthwhile relaxation.

Mrs. H. E. Howe,

Chairman of the Social Committee,
M. B. L. Club.

M. B. L. CLUB CONCERT

Concert Reproduced on Radio-Amplified Phono-
graph will be given at the M. B. L. Club, Wed-
nesday, July 23, at 8:00 P. M.

Programme
I. Beethoven — Symphony No. 6 in F. Major
(recorded by Serge Koussevitsky and the
Boston Symphony Orchestra)
Intermission of Five Minutes
II. Dvorak—Largo from the “New World”
Symphony.
Tschaikowsky—Three Parts of the
“Nutcracker Suite”

Ti.

a. Danse Chinoise
b. Danse des Mirlitons
c. Walse des Fleurs.

94 THE COLLECTING. NET

[ Vou. V. No. 34

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Wig tpgepn Gera te) Mle eae Alene oho Se net ee Cen CORRS Editor

Assistant Editors

Mary Howe .. Annaleida S, Cattell

Business Manager
Tise Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

Book Reviews

For some time Tur Cottectine Net has been
planning to obtain reviews of some of the more
important books published in the field of biology.
On another page we are printing a more or less
complete list of American books recently pub-
lished which seem to be of especial interest to
the biologists at Woods Hole. The names of
most of the books were contained in answers
received from about thirty publishers in response
to a letter that we addressed to them. We will
print reviews of several of these books during
the course of the summer, and we hope that this
additional feature will meet with general approval.
As limitations of space do not permit us to review
more than about half a dozen books, the problem
of their selection is difficult and important. We
are asking the assistance of the investigators in
choosing the books which are important and at
the same time of the most interest to the biologists
at Woods Hole.

We believe that every investigator at the labor-
atory reads Tur Cottectinc Net; but we know
that there are a limited number who depend upon
some one else’s copy. By subscribing they will
make it possible for us to spend more money on
improving our magazine and they will also lend
their assistance in building up THE CoLLecTiING
Net Scholarship Fund.

Four numbers of THe Cottectinc Net have
been issued this summer; there are six more to
come. They will appear each Saturday, the last
one being issued on August 30.

The subscription price of THE COLLECTING
Net is $2.00 for the ten numbers issued during
the summer. Single copies cost 25 cents. These
are the charges made when the purchasers wish
their copies mailed to them. When an individual
working at the laboratory wishes to obtain his
copies from the laboratory, the mess hall or our
office we are able to supply the ten copies for
$1.75 and single copies for 20 cents each.

ANNOUNCEMENT
PHOTOGRAPHY

Aid to investigators along photographic lines
is offered during the present season as follows:

(1.) General photographic service. Mr. A.
R. Apgar, photographer, Room 211, Brick Build-
ing will assist in the preparation and finishing of
lantern slides, photomicrographs, enlargements
from motion picture film and other negatives,
prints and copies of prints. Work will be done
at cost.

(2.) Loan of photographic equipment. The
Laboratory is prepared to loan for short periods,
cameras for photomicrographic work and for
general photography in two classes, e. g. (a)
wide angle, short focus and (b) medium angle,
average range. A limited supply of trays, flash
guns and tripods is available.

(3.) Chemicals for research purposes, only, ©
may be secured by application to Room 216.

(4.) Dark rooms are limited to experimental
work and are generally assigned for the season.
A small amount of space can be arranged for
individuals who desire to develop bromide paper
and negatives which they prepare themselves by
application to Room 216. They should examine
the room in which they desire to work and so”
arrange their material that others working in the
same room will not cause interference.

Samuel E. Pond,

Custodian of Apparatus.

The Denoyer-Geppert Co. have an exhibit of
specimens, charts and models at the Old Lecture —
Hall. Complete sets of the Pfurtscheller Zoology
and the Winslow Physiology charts are shown.
Mr. R. M. Beutell of Cambridge, Mass. and Mr.
H. E. Zabei of the home office are in charge.

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound: :

Date A.M. P.M.
july sl Os eee 10:12) SEso
tly; 200 eee ere 04)

Uy oZ1 ere ae 12:45) 12e57
i) iy 22 1:38 1:49

Lily 22) ters ee sae : :
ly 23 tear eye Zoe 2:40

Uy 24 err eee ORs 3:26 3:36
ial, Clee eae a Se 4:19 4:30
ulyaZOlnen oaks DelZ 5:21
lyA2 7a eee 6:03 629

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
eause the turning of the current to oceur a half an | -
hour earlier or later than the times given above. |

- assistant

THE COLLECTING

NET 95

Jury 19, 1930 ]

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. W. R. Taylor, formerly professor of botany
at the University of Pennsylvania, has been ap-
pointed professor of botany at the University of
Michigan.

Dr. Abby Howe Turner, professor of physi-
plogy at Mount Holyoke College, is spending a
year at the University of Copenhagen working
under Dr. August Krogh. Dr. Turner spent the
last two summers here carrying on research in
respiration. Dr. Charlotte Haywood, formerly
professor of physiology at Vassar
College, will take her place at Mount Holyoke
this year as acting chairman of the Physiology
Department with the title of associate EE eaene
of physiology.

Miss Katherine Knowlton, daughter of Dr. F.
P. Knowlton, professor of physiology at the
College of Medicine, Syracuse University, took
her degree of M. D. at that College this June,
and is now serving a year’s internship in a San
Francisco hospital. As a child, Miss Knowlton
spent her summers with her parents at their
cottage on Gardiner Road.

~ Dr. R. P. Bigelow, professor of zoology at the
Massachusetts Trastinte of Technology, and his
family are again occupying their cottage near the
bathing beach. _ Their arrival in Woods Hole has
been delayed by the illness of Dr. Bigelow who
is now convalescing.

Dr. Donald B. Keyes and his family arrived
last week and are living in the Young cottage on
Crow Hill. Dr. Keyes is professor and head of
the division of industrial chemistry at the Uni-
versity of Illinois.

_ After a stay of six weeks in Woods Hole, Dr.
B. M. Duggar and his family left on July 13 to
spend some time visiting in New Hampshire and
Maine before returning to their home in Madison,
Wisconsin. They will visit Dr. and Mrs. C. R.
Plunkett who are spending the summer on a farm
in Maine. Dr. Plunkett’s book, “The Outlines
of Modern Biology,” has just been published with
illustrations by Mrs. Plunkett. Dr. Duggar is in
charge of research work in botany at the labor-
atory.

Mr. A. H. Bisco, for many years head Janitor
at the Marine Biological Laboratory has retired
and has gone to England to live. He and Mrs.
Bisco sailed last Fall. His position at the babora-
tory is being efficiently filled by Mr. T. E. Tawell.

Dr. J. M. Johlin is clearing the brush off the
knoll back of the Knowlton cottage on Gardiner
Road preparatory to building a cottage there.
Dr. Johlin is associate professor of biochemistry
in the School of Medicine at Vanderbilt Univer-
sity.

Mr. R. L. Duffus and his family are again
spending the summer here and have taken the
Cowdry cottage on Milfield Street. Mr. Duffus
is a contributing editor of the New York Times.

The Schramm cottage on Gardiner Road has
been let to Dr. A. J. Goldforb, professor of Zo-
ology at the College of the City of New York.

Miss Bessie Rudd, assistant physical training
instructor at Radcliffe college is spending the
summer at the Gigger cottage on Gardiner road.
Miss Rudd will give instructions in tennis and
swimming during the summer session.

The Whitney yacht, “Wanderer”, of New
York, put into port at Woods Hole the week
before last for several days.

The State supervisor of marine fisheries, Mr.
Howes, has recently issued the following state-
ment :

“Tt is the interpretation of the division of fish-
eries and game that a person catching crabs for
family use and not for commercial purposes does
not come under the intent of the law, and does
not need a license.

“Tt is not the intention of the division to prose-
cute persons taking crabs for family use by such
devices as a small net on the end of a pole—the
gear most generally used.”

The Methodist Church held its annual sale of
food and handiwork in the vestry of the church
on Friday, July 18.

On July 14 the Coast Guard boats CS-133 and
146 assisted in towing the yacht “Kulinda’, be-°
longing to Mr. John Swope of Penzance Point,
off the beach in front of the Breakwater Hotel.
The high wind of the storm had swept the .
“Kulinda’ from her moorings and it took about |
two hours to bring her out into the bay again.

The Coast Guard are still hunting in the
vicinity of Quick’s Hole for the body of Charles
W. Bailey who was lost from his boat on July 5,
but the search has been in vain.

96 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 34

LEE ELE LEG E EEL GEL LEGGE EEL LS,

General Editors
J. BARCROFT, C.B.E., M. A. B ae SAUNDERS, M.A.
Fellow of King’s College and Professor Fellow of Christ’s College and Demon-
of Physiology in the University strator of Animal Morphology im the
of Cambridge University of Cambridge
Comparative Physiology of the Heart
By A. J. Clark, M.C., M. D. Cloth, 12 mo., 154 pp., $3 25

In this book the author discusses certain aspects of the heart’s functions, which have a
particular significance when viewed from the standpoint of comparative physiology.

“As a book of reference this will be of real value to those who wish to study more deeply
the many fascinating aspects of the subject.’—The Lancet.

PRERRRRR RRR RRR REE
.

2
¥F

‘2
OK

¢

2

os

Genetics of Sexuality in Animals

By F. A. E. Crew, M.D., D. Se., Ph. D. Cloth, 12 mo., 199 pp., $4.00
“This volume provides a very clear and not too lengthy account of the mechanism of sex-
determination and sex-differentiation, and of the physiological processes involved.”—British
Medical Journal.
“Physiologists and experimental morphologists will be grateful to the author for getting a
survey of the field into so compact and easily referable a form.”—Science News Letter,

1

2

The Comparative Physiology of Internal Secretions

By Lancelot T. Hogben, M. A., D. Se. Cloth, 12 mo., 142 pp., $4.00
The author discusses in the first three chapters chemical coordination; adrenaline and neuro-
muscular coordination; internal secretion and the chromatic function. The last four chapters
deal with endocrine factors and secretory processes; the relation of internal secretion to
vasomotor regulation; endocrine factors in metabolism, and the role of the ductless glands
in developmental processes.

Biological Chemistry and Physics of Sea Water

By H. W. Harvey, M.A. €loth, 12 mo., 194 pp., $4.25
This book covers the following topics: chemistry of sea water; water movements; tempera-
ture of the sea; color and illumination of sea water; and chemical and physical factors
controlling the density of population.

“The author of this book qualifies as a good interpreter between the world of marine
organisms and ours.”—Science News Letter.

*

Ciliary Movement

By J. Gray, M.A. Cloth, 12 mo., 162 pp., $4.25

In this work the author treats the following subjects: the movement of a cilium; ciliary
currents, the force exerted and the work dene by cilia; the relation of ciliary movement to
ionie equilibria; the metabolism of ciliated cells andl the nature of the ciliary cycle;
metachronal rhythm and eiliary control; and the distribution of cilia and the functions
which they perform.

The Comparative Physiology of Muscular Tissue

By A. D. Ritchie, M. D. Cloth, 8 vo., 111 pp., $3.00

This book covers the following topics:—general character of muscular tissue; chemical
changes in active muscle; mechanics and theory of muscular contraction; and effect of
environment.

“Tn this book deseribing the characters and functions of muscle cells, a muscle or a group of
museles is considered as an aggregate of muscle fibers rather than as a complex septum of
the body.”—Anatomical Record.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

PUBLISHERS

60 Fifth Avenue °© New York
Atlanta Boston Chicago Dallas San Francisco

CAMBRIDGE COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY

OK

CEREAL MMMM HM ODO DOO DOOD DOOD RRR RRR RR RRR KKK ROK RIOD

Jury 19, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 97

OXIDATION-REDUCTION
POTENTIALS

By L. Michaelis, M. D.
Member Rockefeller Institute
Translated from the German by Louis B. Flexner

A first step towards a solution, in the metabolism of the living cell.

A new point

of view that provides a clearer and a thermodynamically correct approach to cell

energetics.

centration” and its application to biological problems.
Order your copy now!

197 pages.

evidence of profound research.
16 Illustrations.

Part One Phiysico-Chemical Considera-
tions

Definition of oxidation and reduction. The
| force of oxidation and reduction. Historical
and eritical remarks on redox potentials and
the mechanism of their establishment. Evalua-
tion of a redox potential. Theory of mixtures
of different redox systems. The poise of a
reversible redox system. The neutral point
of the redox scale. Inorganic redox systems.
The influence of complex formation. Reversi-
| ble organie redox systems. Atomistics of
reversible organic redox processes. Relation
between color and oxidation potential. The

The result of the author’s intensive work on “Hydrogen Ion Con-

Invaluable, concise, the

$3.00

activity theory applied to organic redox sys-
tems. General formulation of the potentials
of the organie redox systems with respect to
the concentration of Hydrogen ions. Various
seales of the redox potential. Influence of
tautomerism. Irreversible oxidations and
reductions.

Part Two Physiological Applications
The physiologically important redox systems,
Sulphydril systems. True reversible redox
systems of importance in physiology. Reviews
of the physiologically important redox sys-
tems. Measurement of reduction potentials in
physiological systems.

MONOGRAPHS ON EXPERIMENTAL BIOGRAPHY

Factors Affecting the Distribution of Electro-
lytes, Water and Gases in the Animal Body
By D. D. Van Slyke, Ph. D., Se. D.
Rockefeller Institute
16 Diagrams. 70 Pages 2.50

Chemical Basis of Growth and Senescence
By T. B. Robertson
University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South
Australia

45 Illustrations. 376 Pages $3.00
The Biology of Death
By Raymond Pearl
| Johns Hopkins University
{ 64 Illustrations. 275 Pages $3.00

Injury, Recovery and Death In Relation to
Conductivity and Permeability
By W. J. V. Osterhout
Harvard University
{ 96 Illustrations. 259 Pages $3.00

The Physical Basis of Heredity
By Thomas Hunt Morgan
Professor Experimental Zoology in Columbia
University

Chemical Dynamics of Life Phaenomena
By Professor Otto Meyerhof
Awarded the Nobel Prize 1923, for the
Researches Published in this Book

8 Diagrams. 110 Pages $3.00

Labyrinth and Equilibrium
By Samuel Steen Maxwell, M.S., Ph.D.
University of California

11 Illustrations. 163 Pages $3.00

The Nature of Animal Light
By E. Newton Harvey, Ph.D.
Professor of Physiology, Princeton University
36 Figures 14 Tables. 182 Pages $3.00

Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the
Vertebrates
By G. H. Parker, Se. D.
Harvard University

37 Illustrations. 192 Pages $3.00

The Elementary Nervous System
By G. H. Parker, Se. D.
Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

$3.00

Inbreeding and Outbreeding
Their Genetic and Sociological Significance
By Edward M. Eeast, Ph.D., & Donald F. Jones
46 Illustrations. 285 Pages $3.00

For Sale at All Bookstores

LIPPINCOTT

117 Illustrations. 305 Pages 53 Illustrations. 229 Pages $3.00

Washington Square, Philadelphia

98

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 34

BRONFENBRENNER

ee a ULTRA-FILTRATION
APPARATUS

A new arrangement, combining ‘the prin-
ciple of ultra-filtration with that of electro-
phoresis. Consisting essentially of three
concentric chambers, of which the middle
one is formed by the collodion membranes
deposited on the surfaces of two Alundum
thimbles. The other two chambers serve for
removing the dialyzed electrolytes from the
membrane by means of a stream of cold
water.

The high efficiency of this apparatus is
due to the following: the dialyzing surfaces
are very large in comparison to the capacity
of the apparatus; the permeability of the
membranes is easily varied by changing the
density of the collodion used in coating the
thimbles; the rate of dialysis is speeded up
by a continuous removal of the dialysate by
a flow of water at each electrode; the con-
stant flow of cold water at the electrodes
permits the use of high voltage (110 to 115)
without an excessive rise in temperature;
the material subjected to dialysis may be
kept from becoming concentrated by diluting
it during dialysis; the whole dialyzing cham-
ber is agitated, thus preventing the deposit
of solids on the membrane.

See Jacques J. Bronfenbrenner, “ A Simple
Electro-Ultrafilter,” The Journal of General
Physiology, Vol. X, No. 1, (Sept. 20, 1926),

5154 pp. 23-26.
5153. Electro Ultra-Filtration Assembly, Bronfenbrenner, Small Model. With two Code
Alundum cylinders, i. e. 17 x 76 mm and 34 x 100 mm, Carbon electrode, Word
Copper electrode, and Separatory Funnel ... Pits Sah Me sine so ten ce Sf 225.00 Forwt

5154. Ditto, Large Model, complete as shown in illustration. With two Alundum eylin- |
ders, i. e, 34x 250 mm and 90x 300 mm, Platinum electrode and Copper electrode 270.00 Fosgn

Detailed description and directions for preparing membranes sent upon request.

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

’

Jury 19, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 09

Photomicrography —
an important factor
in laboratory work

WHILE the microscope forms the very heart of
the equipment of most laboratories, apparatus
for making photographic records of micro-
scopical observations for future reference and
comparison is almost equally important. To
meet routine requirements we have designed a
high-grade photomicrographic camera which is
exceptionally easy to operate and simple to
focus.

The B &L Type K Camera can be used with any
standard monocular microscope and any good
light source. An observation eyepiece permits
the specimen to be observed and photographed
without changing position for either operation.

Write for catalog E-21 for detailed description.

oa ements Be sure to visit the Bausch & Lomb
B&L Type K Camera Annual Exhibit, July 28 to August 2

C=
BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL co. WF}
671 ST.PAUL STREET « » ROCHESTER, N. Y. oa nckcearnes

BAUSCH .
% LOMB

BAUSCH ELOMB

Makers of Orthogon*Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

100 5 PE ACOLENCTAING NET [ Vou. V. No. 34
“Equal Excelled
to Any by None”

ZEISS

MAGNIFIERS

The following are particularly
popular:

APLANATIC FOLDING
MAGNIFIERS

6x, 8x, 10x . $6.50 each

ANASTIGMATIC FOLDING
MAGNIFIERS

G6 Ale CYR, 5. 5 UII) Gaye
Prices F. O. B. New York

The price of the best magnifiers is within
the reach of everyone, the difference in
performance between the best and ordi-
nary magnifiers is considerable.

All of the above magnifiers have excellent
definition to the edge of the field of view
and the image is free from color defects.
Descriptive literature, also listing other
types of magnifiers, will be sent on

request.

A selection of Zeiss Instruments will be
ON EXHIBITION
at The Collecting Net
July 21-31

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Ange‘es

EARLZEISS
ee

GOLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE

Microscopic

COVER GLASSES

DO NOT FOG

We have the largest stock in the
U. S. A. and the largest variety of
sizes and thinnesses, squares, circles
and rectangulars.

Circular will be sent on request

And Now

GOLD SEAL MICRO. SLIDES
RITE-ON MICRO. SLIDES

If your Dealer can’t supply you send
order (mentioning dealer's name) to
Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Wholesale Distributors

117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
models, surgical instruments, ete., and
botanical models, and specimens, skeletons,
charts, etc.

of) ey

BIOLOGY CLASSROOM AIDS
Charts, Models, Specimens, Slides

and Museum Preparations

Jury 19, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 101

Hydr 02. Hydromedusae.
Hydra.

ZA20
Embalmed Cat

Denoyer-Geppert Exhibit
Classroom Aids

Old Lecture Hall
Chart PZ6 Hydra

Our Stock includes 25 series of Biology Charts, our own and the best productions of
European Chart Publishers.

Be sure to acquaint yourself with our line and services before selecting next
year’s specimens or lecture room help.

Write for our Biology Catalog No. 6B.

DENOYER-GEPPERT COMPANY

Makers and Importers of Biology Charts
and Models, Specimens, Slides and
Museum Preparations

5235-5257 RAVENSWOOD AVENUE CHICAGO, ILL.

102 : THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 34

A. P. C. PHOTOELECTRIC
SPECTROPHOTOMETERS

For accurate quantitative color analyses
of transmitted or reflected light in the
visible spectrum and of transmitted ultra-

violet radiation.

Write for A. P. C. Bulletin No. 101.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Marine
Biological
Laboratory
Supply
Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

7092

The Dissecting Set illustrated above is
being widely used by instructors and
by advanced students of biology. The
case is of best-quality leather, hand-
somely finished, lined with velvet and
having chamois skin protecting flaps.
The instruments comprising the set are
of “A” quality, with keen cutting edges.
These instruments consist of he follow-
ing:

1 Sealpel No. 6935 ebony handle 46 mm edge

1 Sealpel No. 6942 ebony handle 25 mm edge

1 Scissors No. 7909, medium straight

1 Foreeps No. 6787 heavy straight for

vertebrate work
1 Tenaculum No. 7052 ebony handle 160 mm

length

1 Cartilage Knife No. 6817, all steel 45 mm
edge

1 Seeker No. 7037 all steel 150 mm length

1 Triple chain and hooks No, 6807

1 Blowpipe No. 6747 120 mm length

1 Celluloid rule No. 10497, 6 inches

Per Sets eos ion winigck tte yeas meester $5.00
Per dozen, 10% discount

We ean supply Dissecting Sets containing any
desired selection of dissecting instruments
and we would be pleased to submit quotations
on any required quantity.

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RockEsTER, N-Y.

Oats Nhe ae ee

helo

Nth oe = erm i ema ara a er atts eR mm

Jury 19, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 103

LEITZ
WIDE FIELD BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE

A NEW MODEL
WITH

Automatic Multiple Objective Nosepiece

Research Investigators at the Marine Biological
Laboratory have expressed keen enthusiasm over
this new construction.

It is very gratifying to our organization to find such
response. We shall continue to seek to interpret
the needs of those whose requirements demand
the utmost in optical and mechanical construction.

WRITE FOR PAMPHLET NO. 1169 (CN)

Microscope, Model “WFA-M’

E. LEITZ, Ine.

60 EAST 10th ST., NEW YORK, N. Y.

TURTOX NEWS

Mailed without charge to over 20,000 Biologists in the
United States and Foreign Countries

The principal purpose of Turtox News is to- announce new Turtox products and
new developments in the Turtox laboratories. It is, however, not our policy to make
this publication a purely advertising medium, and in practically every issue are pub-
lished short articles and notes of interest to biclogists. These articles are all of a
biological nature, but cover a wide range, including ecology, pedagogy, nature study,
travel, laboratory methods, etc. They are written in some cases by members of our
staff, in other cases by outside Biologists.

If you are not receiving Turtox News regularly, just send us a postal, asking us to
place your name upon the mailing list.

OCI
SE,
SOX,

MUCTS General Biological Supply House
(INCORPORATED)
761-763 East 69th Place

Chicago, Illinois

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

104 THE COLLECTING NET eee eee V. No. 34
CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH SAMUEL CAHOON
(Episcopal) Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector FISH AND LOBSTERS
Holy Communion - - - - 7:30 a.m.
Morning Prayer : : 3 5 Ti 00 "ns. Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Hivenin g sprayerea | sal net = 7:30 p.m. Woods Hole and Falmouth

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

Follow the Crowd to

DANIELS’

for Home-made Ice Cream,

Delicious Sandwiches,
Coffee,

PICNIC LUNCHES

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

N. E. TSIKNAS

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

THE TWIN DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles
Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Woods Hole

Main Street

Tel. 1243

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING |

CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Phone 239-W Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

PARK TAILORING AND |

THE QUALITY SHOP

Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes
and Souvenirs

Ask for things you do not see,
Main Street Woods Hole

Compliments of

PENZANCE GARAGE

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Day or Night AS AG
Phone 652 Towing

Jury 19, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET 105

THE
LNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“Thunder on the Left”

G. FERGUSON BLACK

Dramatization of Mr. Christopher Morley’s
famous novel.
Week of July 21-26
Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

| ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.

Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays
Sunday, July 20
HARRY RICHMAN, Broadway’s Matchless
Entertainer in

JACK OAKIE in
“THE SOCIAL LION”

Wednesday, July 23 — Thursday, July 24
MATINEE BOTH DAYS
PAUL WHITEMAN and his band in
“THE KING OF JAZZ”
Afternoons — adults 50e children 25¢
Evenings — adults 75e children 25e
Friday, July 25
FANNY BRICE in
“BE YOURSELF”

Saturday, July 26
JACK HOLT and RICHARD ARLEN in’
“THE BORDER LEGION”

if)
| bre DY

)

Small but International quality.
Speed 2700 - 3300 R. P. M.

Relative Centrifugal Force 1300-1800
times gravity.

Four tubes of 15 ml. or two tubes of
15 ml. and two tubes of 50 ml.

Send for Bulletin CC.

International Equipment Company

352 WESTERN AVE. BOSTON, MASS.

106 THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V: No. 34

“RITE ON”
Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the

slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the

markings can be washed off with water
so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again
and again.

=

SIZE 3”x1”

Non-corrosive semi-white,
medium thickness

All four sides ground and polished.

$1.75 Gross

Sample gross sent prepaid on
receipt of check.

Please mention dealers name

Crav-AvAms Company
Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies,
models, surgical instruments, etc., and
botanical models, and specimens, skeletons,
charts, etc.

anatomical

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neees-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographie references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ieally, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Secticn Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight l-ineh slides
or thirty-two 1%4-ineh slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides.

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

Jury 19, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 107

SLIGHTLY LARGER, SLIGHTLY HEAVIER,
JUST A BIT MORE RUGGED -- NEW

SPENCER No. 34

LABORATORY and MEDICAL

1 MICROSCOP

I. Chromium plated objectives and adjustment
buttons.

II. Distance 95 m.m. (increased from 80 m.m.)
from inner curve of arm to optical axis.

III. Solidarity exemplified and graceful lines
characteristics of all Spencer microscopes
are featured.

IV. Increased size and new beauty added to
outstanding performance without increase
in price.

Our many years of close experience with
the needs of laboratories and laboratory
workers, has naturally led to careful
study of types of design, sizes, weight
and to every phase of instrument needs
both from the standpoint of the worker
as well as that of manufacturer. The
result has been that Spencer Microscopes
No. 44 and 64, because of neat compact-
ness, beauty in design, brilliant perfor-
mance, excellence in craftsmanship, dur-
ability and size for ease and comfort in
use, have held a foremost place among
laboratory microscopes for the past 18 or
20 years and their popularity has not
declined—in fact their sale during the
past year exceeds all previous years.

For certain types of work there has been some demand, not for laboratory micro-
scope of research size and weight, No! not that, but for an instrument slightly larger,
slightly heavier and a bit more rugged.

To meet this demand our new No. 34 microscope has been designed, not as a substi-
tute for Nos. 44 and 64 but as an additional instrument incorporating in design and
construction all the advantageous features of those most popular instruments, with a
bit more size, weight and ruggedness added. It is supplied with or without
the mechanical stage.

Brochure No. M-41 illustrates and describes it—sent on request.

SPENCER LENS COMPANY

MANUFACTURERS \
Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring

SPENCER SPENCER
Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Etc.

BUFFALG BUFFALO
[eg] erg
BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

THE COLEECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 34

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
works, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a _ long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
mieroscopie preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microsecopie specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living inseets or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living organisms

and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 119 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

; A : e)

<r | Cas mac (- ARaArT, oem

Av-ApAms CompAny
117-119 East 24th Street

NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Cu

Vol. V. No. 5

SATURDAY, JULY 26, 1930

SOME CYTOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON
THE SILK GLAND OF BOMBYX MORI
Dr. Hore Hipparp
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Oberlin College

The stimulus of the economic importance of
mort, the silk worm, has probably been
responsible for the large collection of published

Bombyx

observations upon this form,
and in particular, upon the silk
gland itself. What I have to
add at this time is the result
of the application of a rela-
tively new method of tech-
nique.

The subject will be limited
to the nuclear changes which
transpire during the develop-
ment and secretion of the
gland. The method employed
is the “nucleal reaction”, 1. e.
Schiff’s aldehyde test applied
to histology by Feulgen of
which the recent modification
by Wermel is an improvement.
Briefly, the method is as fol-
lows: the tissues are exposed
to hot HC1 in such a way as

to partially hydrolyse the nu-_

cleic acids (thymonucleic

Some Cytological Observations on the Silk Gland

of Bombyx Mori,

Dr. Hope Hibbard ....
Professor Edward Mellanby’s

Deficiencies,

Dr L. G. Wesson

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr.
Dr. Arthur W. Pollister .....
Meiosis in Drosophila Melanogaster,
Dr A We Mivetiner 2. icin. san
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Huettner,

Dr. Calvin B. Bridges ....

conserve

“FOOD DEFICIENCIES” —
PROFESSOR EDWARD MELLANBY

Dr. L. G. Wesson
Assistant Professor of Pharmacology, Vanderbilt
University School of Medicine

M. B. GL. Calendar

TUESDAY, JULY 29, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Lecture. Dr. Leonor Micha-

elis, The Rockefeller Institute, “The
Reversible Oxidizable - reducible
Systems found in Living Organ-
isms.”

FRIDAY, AUGUST 1, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Seminar. Dr. Paul S. Hen-

shaw, “Some Biological Effects Pro-
duced by Alpha Particles on Droso-
phila Eggs.”

Ware Cattell, “The Effect of X-Rays
upon the Growth of the Wheat
Seedling.”

Dr. W. C. Curtis, “Effects of X-rays
upon Regeneration.”

Dr. Charles Packard, “The Relation
between Division Rate and Sus-
ceptibility to Radiation.”

animal
leaving thyminic acid with free aldehyde radicles.
(Continued on Page 110)

cells)
best condition,

wheat germ become badly rachitic.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Mitotic Activity in the ease op eer ee

Eleanor H. Shifer .........

Dr. E. Eleanor Carothers . : see aE,
totes sees 109 Some Cytological Relationships in Narecosis,
Lee ture on Food Dr. Vera Koehring .... Se IG
109 Revi a aor the Seminar Report of. Dr. Koehring,
pos cies ah eardee . Alden B. Dawson gee ped Sk
hee on. es ; Alita ‘aeoete Recollections of the Tavlexnetaceal hee
= iological Congress in Boston,
te ees 112 Professor Emil Abderhalden ...............118
The Ocean andwits: Contents... -: swe aeseeeens 121
Regie 113 Editorial’ Pagers .cicc doe satus ann ae ee Oe
he eae idm items lof Tnterest, hacs.oshce. os eee eles

Review of the Seminar Report of Miss Slifer,

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Copirs ?5 (Crs

A LECTURE BY

Irradiated ergosterol, or vitamin D, tends to
calcium and phosphorus so necessary for

bone and teeth formation.
When vitamin D is deficient in
the diet, not only does the
growing animal develop rick-
ets, but imperfectly formed
and poorly arranged teeth re-
sult with a low resistance to
caries. There appears to be
present in cereals, particularly
in oatmeal and wheat germ a
“toxamin” that acts in a man-
ner contrary to vitamin D as
regards calcification. For in-
stance, if puppies are fed a
diet low in irradiated ergoste-
rol and with varying amounts
of oatmeal, those receiving
more oatmeal develop rickets
to a greater degree. If the
same amounts of various cere-
als are given to litter mates,

those receiving white bread and rice maintain the
while those receiving oatmeal or

Any attempt

110

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. V. No. 35

to relate this anticalcifying effect of the cereal to
its calcium or phosphorus content, or to the ratio
of these fails. Oatmeal boiled with acid loses
the ability to affect bone formation. Inclusion
of ample vitamin D in the diet counteracts the
toxamin effect of these cereals. The effect of
the toxamin on teeth growth was also used to
demonstrate its action, and the neutralizing effect
of an abundance of vitamin D in the diet.

Deficiency in the diet of vitamin A, present in
abundance in green vegetables, egg yolk, butter,
and other foods, leads to a proliferation and ker-
atinization of cuboidal and columnar epithelial
cells with the resultant obstruction of ducts,
lesions, and degenerative changes. The organism
becomes especially prone to infection, but it is not
known whether this is a primary or secondary
result of the deficiency. Pneumonia and puerper-
al septicemia are now being studied by the Mel-
lanbys from the point of view of vitamin A de-
ficiency and treatment.

Other symptoms of vitamin A deficiency are
the spinal nerve degenerative changes similar to
that observed in lathyrism, and an altered appear-
ance of the dentine. With plentiful vitamin A
in the diet, the symptoms arising from the nerve
degeneration may be cured; the spinal cord is
found to have a normal appearance in experi-
mental animals, the structure of the dentine be-
comes normal, and the secondary dentine growth
is greatly stimulated in the case of dental caries.
Similar nerve changes are produced by ergot, the
fungus of rye, when a deficiency of foodstuffs
containing vitamin A is found in the diet of the

poorer classes at times of economic stress. These
“epidemics” are being successfully combated by
wholesome amounts of vitamin A.

The yellow pigment carotene (carotin), a high-
ly unsaturated hydrocarbon that is found, for ex-
ample, in carrots and cabbages, may be added to
a diet deficient in vitamin A under conditions that
give infections to rats in 100 per cent of the cases,
with a marked beneficial effect on the number of
infected animals. As little as 0.01 mgm. of caro-
tene given daily to rats on a vitamin A deficient
diet has a marked effect in lowering the severity
of these infections, while a daily dose of 0.04
mgm. imparts almost complete resistance under
the conditions of the experiment. In other words,
carotene may be substituted for vitamin A, al-
though it is probably not vitamin A itself. If
one feeds carotene to rats that have symptoms of
vitamin A deficiency, the recovery of the rats
takes place quickly, and a color reaction for vita-
min A can now be shown in the fats of the livers
of these rats whereas none could be found with-
out the carotene feeding. The transformation of
carotene into vitamin A takes place rapidly in the
liver, so rapidly in fact that it is not known wheth-
er carotene itself will produce recovery from the
symptoms of vitamin A deficiency without trans-
formation into A.

The lecture was profusely illustrated by photo-
graphs and charts.

An abstract of a lecture delivered at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 18th by Professor Edward

Mellanby, Professor of Pharmacology, University of
Sheffield, England.

SOME CYTOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE SILK GLAND OF BOMBYX MORIL
(Continued from Page 109)

This is then placed in fuchsin-sulfurous acid
(made from a 1% basic fuchsin solution reduced
to a faint straw-colored liquid). The fuchsin
unites with the aldehyde radicles_ giving,
not a pink fuchsin color, but an entirely new
brilliant violet compound. Thus we have a chem-
ical reaction, not a stain in the usual sense, which
demonstrates only, and all, the aldehyde-contain-
ing material, or, since chromatin is the only source
of this material, chromatin.

It was shown in the slides, which are photo-
graphs, how this brings into evidence the chro-
matin constituents of the nucleus at every phase
of development. Sections were made of the
glands but a more comprehensive idea of the
nuclear growth is possible from a study of the
entire organ.

The silk glands consist of two long unbranched
tubes with three regions, a secreting, reservoir,
and excreting portion of 15, 6, and 5 cm. in length
respectively, in the full-grown condition. These
unite in the spinneret near the mouth. This ar-
rangement is analogous to that of Galleria des-

cribed by Wu in the current Journal of Morphol-
ogy. The wall everywhere is only one cell thick,
and two elongated hexagonal cells completely sur-
round the tube. In the secreting zone and the
reservoir the nuclei are similar. The cells of the
excreting tube are different. Correlated with this
divergence is the distribution of tracheal tubules.
They are very abundant and penetrate deeply into
the cytoplasm of every cell of the secreting and
storing parts; in the excreting tubules there are
no tracheal connections at all.

The history of the secreting region will be fol-
lowed. The young gland, even before hatching,
has small oval nuclei. These elongate parallel to
the long axis of the cell and show a tendency to
bifurcate at the tip. The branching continues
until the nucleus has the appearance of a complex
Amoeba proteus. Here, in a whole mount, the
intricacies of branching are no longer adequately
shown at a single focus of the camera. However,
under careful observation these parts are all found
to be in connection. The “fuzziness” seen in the
photograph is not actual.

Juty 26, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

111

The maximum development is shown in a
gland from a mature caterpillar just starting to
spin. The photograph is more distinct than the
preceding since the cells were dissected off after
fixation and flattened under the coverglass. The
branched nucleus fills the entire cell.

After three days of spinning when the glands
are discharged and the animal is about to pupate,
the cells appear to be nearly all nucleus. That
this material is not already broken down is evi-
denced by the fact that the fuchsin-sulfurous acid
does not give the violet color if the hydrolysis be
omitted in the technique. The cells do not adhere
to each other as formerly but separate at the
slightest touch. Further steps are being followed
day by day in the advancing pupal stages where
these cells are disintegrating. One wonders how
this tremendous quantity of chromatin is used in
the metabolism of the metamorphosing insect.
Certainly it has not been transformed into silk.

It was indicated that the cells of the excreting
tubule were not similar to those just described.
The nuclei here are highly branched but never
reach the degree of development of those in the

active cells. Incidentally the moth described by

‘Wu differs from Bombyx since Galleria has un-

branched nuclei in this tubule.

By making studies of whole mounts of the
glands we have a method far superior to that of
sections. The apparent “fragmentation” of the
nucleus seems to be much over-emphasized, if it
occurs at all. Connections, sometimes very fine
to be sure, can nearly always be traced from one
point to the others.

Furthermore, regarding the role of this nucleus
in the elaboration of secretion, if there are nuclear
emissions in the form of nucleolar masses as des-
cribed by Wu, Beams, Noel and Paillot, Dehorne,
Hosselet, Nakahara, and others, they do not con-
tain the nucleic acids of chromatin. Violet gran-
ules have never been seen in the cytoplasm outside
this complex nucleus. This of course does not
preclude the diffusion of materials nor does it
show what may happen to nucleoli of different
chemical composition which remain perfectly
colorless after this technique.

A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 17.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. HIBBARD
Dr. ArtHUR W. POLLISTER
Instructor in Zoology, Columbia University

The spinning glands of insects have been the
objects of many exhaustive cytological studies
with particular reference to the perplexing prob-
lem of the relation of cellular structure to the
synthesis of definite formed products or secre-

tions. Anyone who has examined the literature
on this subject must have been impressed by the
fact that this function of the development of se-
cretory granules has been successively assigned to
each of the different visible cellular components
in nearly the chronological order in which these
have been objects of widespread cytological
scrutiny. Thus, when attention was being par-
ticularly directed toward the nucleus, Korschelt
and others held that this was intimately concerned
in the secretory process. Under the influence of
filar and’ granular theories of protoplasmic struc-
ture arose hypotheses of cellular secretion involv-
ing granules and filaments as the active agents.
A direct descendant of these theories was the view,
very widely held at one time, that mitochondria
are either directly or indirectly concerned in the
development of secretory granules. Later the
mitochondria lost considerable ground to the
Golgi apparatus, and this cell component in turn
was forced to yield to a considerable extent to
its younger successor, the vacuome. These suc-
cessive changes of viewpoint about the problem
have peen closely correlated with an advance in

technical methods by which cytologists are slowly
but steadily coming to a more accurate conception
of the true morphological and chemical character-
istics of the formed bodies of the cell, a progress
indicated especially by the fact that the vacuome
theory was formulated as a result of studies of
unfixed cells stained with neutral red, widely be-
lieved to be a non-toxic vital dye.

Dr. Hibbard’s application of the Feulgen re-
action is a fine example of the superiority of a
modern technical method. The cells of spinning
glands have been the cornerstone —in fact,
practically the whole foundation—of the nuclear
theory of secretion. Dr. Hibbard has enumerated
some of the observers who have described the
migration of formed structures from the nucleus
into the cytoplasm, where they are later trans-
formed into the secretory product of the gland
cell. All of the nuclear granules stain with hema-
toxylin, and, in the long succession of cytologists
who have worked on this gland, many have ap-
plied what they considered to be specific stains in
an attempt to determine which of these granules
are karyosomes (i. e. composed of chromatin)
and which are true nucleoli or plasmosomes. The
difficulty of obtaining reliable results with these
older methods is indicated by the fact that Kors-
chelt using the Ehrlich-Biondi stain, decided that
the larger nuclear granules were chromatin;
while Meves, applying the same stain, came to the

112

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 35 —

opposite conclusion that the larger nuclear bodies
were plasmosomes.
to similarly conflicting conclusions. Such a dis-
tinction between nuclear granules is highly im-
portant because of the many recorded observations
of the migration of bodies from the nucleus. The
Feulgen reaction is widely recognized as a most
specific micro-chemical test, and Dr. Hibbard’s
application of this method to the cells of the spin-

Several later workers came*

ning glands demonstrates very clearly that Maziar-
ski’s observation of the migration of chromatin in-
to the cytoplasm was erroneous due to inadequate
technical methods for the indentification of chro-
matin. Such a restriction of the identification of
possible nuclear emissions in the cells of spinning
glands is a definite contribution to the general
problem of the synthesis of secretory products by
the cell.

MEIOSIS IN DROSOPHILA MELANOGASTER

Dr. A. F. HUETTNER
Associate Professor of Biology, New York University

The fact that we observe in Drosophila melano-
gaster crossing-over in the female but not in the
male is responsible for the observations presented
here.

The testes of the very young larva contain only
spermatogonia. They are rather small as com-
pared with spermatocytes, but they are very con-
spicuous in that they stain heavily with all chro-
matin stains. When the testis elongates and in-
creases in size, the spermatogonia become restrict-
ed to a small part in the distal end where they
can still be located in the elongate tubular testis of
the adult fly. By very slight gradations sper-
matogonia develop into spermatocytes. In prep-
arations treated with the Feulgen reaction, it is
possible to trace the gradual dissolution of the
chromatin of the spermatogonia as they enter the
growth period. In the earliest spermatocytes,
where the chromatin becomes loose and flocculent,
a round vesicular body makes its appearance in
the nucleus which increases in size and never
takes on any stain with the Feulgen reaction which
is specific for chromatin. In similar prepara-
tions fixed in Fleming’s solution and stained with
iron-hematoxylin, the chromatin in the spermato-
gonia is slightly heavier and more dense but it
has a close resemblance to that of preparations
treated with the Feulgen reaction. However, in
the transitional stages from the spermatogonia to
the primary spermatocytes, the chromatin does
not appear as well as with the Feulgen reaction,
and the round vesicular body observed in the
nuclei of the early spermatocytes takes on a heavy
stain with iron-hematoxylin and appears entirely
black. If it were not for the proof furnished by
the Feulgen reactions, indicating the diffusion of
the chromatin in the karyoplasm, one might as-
sume on the basis of the hematoxylin preparations
that the chromatin is embodied in the heavily
staining nucleolus.

The large plasmosome in the nucleus of the
young spermatocyte become rather spherical as the
growth period advances. With the increase in size
of the nucleus, the plasmosome emits heavily stain-
ing particles which emanate as slender projections

and disintegrate in the nuclear reticulum, leaving
a spherical matrix which retains a grayish stain
with hematoxylin. Eventually this spherical rem-
nant also disappears when the primary spermato-
cyte is ready to enter the leptotene stage.

After. the chromatin has diffused through the
nuclear reticulum and cannot be demonstrated any
longer by any of the chromatin stains, it appears
again as distinct and clearly defined chromatin
threads. One cannot observe less than six nor
more than eight, and they probably represent the
diploid pre-leptotene condition. There is no
polarization and they are scattered irregularly
throughout the entire nucleus. In later stages the
threads appear to be finer in delineation and they
are well supplied with chromomeres.

Instead of shrinking, the chromosomes conju-
gate in pairs with the individual chromosomes ex-
tremely well defined. A complete conjugation of
any one pair, or a simultaneous conjugation of all
the synaptic mates was never seen to take place.
This is important in view of the lack of crossing-
over in the male of Drosophila melanogaster, and
this point will be considered later. This partial
synapsis is swiftly followed by diakinesis.

It appears that some semblance of chromosome
conjugation does take place in the male of Droso-
phila melanogaster, but whether this constitutes
a true synaptotene condition is doubtful in view
of the behavior of the synaptic mates. Further-
more the entire process is performed with ex-
treme rapidity, and the pairing is immediately
followed by tetrad formation. One is vividly
reminded of delayed synapsis of certain chromo-
somes in some of the Hemiptera, where the sy-
naptic mates just touch each other and separate
immediately. In the perusal of the literature I
found a similar case in the Dipteran Dasyllis
grossa, described by Metz almost ten years ago.
In this insect the chromosome threads pair in con-
jugation and form slender loosely adjoining
threads, diverging sometimes at the ends, forming
Y’s or diverging in the center, forming loops.
Metz regards this condition as a form of abortive
synapsis. His figures are strikingly like mine of
Drosophila melanogaster,

Jury 26, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

113

The present investigation offers a cytologic
basis for the absence of crossing-over in the male
of Drosophila melanogaster, which may hold true
for all the Diptera. If crossing-over does not
take place prior to the period of conjugation of
chromosomes, as Plough pointed out in his in-
vestigations on the egg, we may safely assume that
this also would hold true for the male, if there
were crossing-over in that sex. The striking
difference between the spermatogenesis of Droso-
phila melanogaster and that of other animals in
the leptotene and synaptotene stages certainly in-
dicates a radical difference in chromosome be-
havior. These phases exist in Drosophila melano-
gaster only in a blurred and abortive condition.
The leptotene threads remain separate from the
time of their appearance to diakinesis, ex-
cept during an extremely brief period prior to
diakinesis. At that time the long chromatic
threads touch each other, but they remain separate
throughout the greater part of their entire length.

It is not necessary to enter into a detailed dis-
cussion of the maturation divisions, since all qual-
ified cytologists agree that both maturation div-
isions are in conformity with those found in other

animals. In diakinesis the chromosomes contract
slightly, resulting in heavy clumpy chromatic
masses which can be distinguished as four inde-
pendent groups in every spermatocyte. The XY
combination is slightly smaller than the two large
autosomal complexes, and the dot-like autosomes
are always characteristically small in their appear-
ance. Subsequently the nucleus elongates, its
membrane disappears, the asters are formed, and
the chromosomes enter the first maturation divis-
ion with the XY combination lagging and gen-
erally slightly to one side of the tetrads.

There is a brief interkinesis between the two
maturation divisions. The chromatin in the
nucleus of the secondary spermatocyte becomes
diffuse, staining very lightly at first, but soon the
nucleus increases in size and contains a faintly
staining reticulum. The reduction of the sec-
ondary spermatocyte into the spermatids is gen-
erally very clear in regard to the chromosomes.
Their number and structure is well defined and is
much more readily ascertained than any of the
other phenomena of spermatogenesis.

, A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 17.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. HUETTNER
Dr. Carvin B. BripcEs
Carnegie Institution of Washington

The paper by Dr. Huettner, with all its ex-
cellences, will hardly conclude the controversy over
the behavior of the “chromosomes” of the male
of Drosophila melanogaster. or the essential
difficulties lie deeper than in the peculiarities of

this particular object. The controversy originated
through a confusion as to the nature of the bodies
and structures observed in studying intranuclear
changes, and even as to what nuclear components
it is important to follow. Such confusions have
been rather widespread and one may continue to
expect a pronounced lag in some sections of cur-
rent literature even on those points that have been
cleared up fairly satisfactorily.

One of the reasons for these confusions lies in a
carrying over of the point of view of the earlier
cytologists, whose main problem was the more
detailed description of the observed nuclear struc-
tures and of the behavior of those structures—of
the chromatin, chromosomes, plasmosomes, etc.
‘Theirs was an objective attack ; also an attack very
fruitful within its limitations. The significant
feature of the newer point of view is that the
study is directed upon the characteristics and man-
euvers of objects not at all directly observed, and
indeed injected bodily into cytological thinking
from an outside field—that of genetics. These
new objects are the genes and the aggregates of
genes, the gene-strings, The methods of genetics

have given a large and rapidly growing body of
definite information as to the genes and their be-
havior, as to their geographical and spatial dis-
position within the cell and as to their distribu-
tion to daughter cells, especially in the very com-
plex distribution patterns involved in gametogene-
sis. The significant problem just now before cy-
tology is to interpret this information, very specific
and exact in nature and dealing with the finest
detail, in terms of the relatively gross structures
and behaviors observable visually. As far as
possible, even at the cost of far greater labor, these
observations are being made on living material.

The genes are themselves so small, so numerous
and so slightly differentiated, in refraction, etc.,
from the materials surrounding them, that fol-
lowing them by direct visual observation is at
present hopeless and may indeed remain so. Even
the aggregates of genes, the gene-strings, are
probably invisible. What can be observed is
their voluminous coverings or wrapping materials,
which are apparently several layers thick. At
certain stages of cell growth, such as the anaphase,
these bulky packages, each of which contains a
gene-string within its substance, can be seen in
the living state and are the chromosomes. In cer-
tain large clear cells, like those of the plant
Tradescantia, the chromosomes can be seen to con-
sist of an outer thin pellicle or interphase mem-
brane, enclosing a layer of chromosomal sap, and,

i114

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 35

within these two coverings, a long closely coiled
thread, the “chromonema”. The chromonema is
the closest approach to the gene-string that has
been identified in the living state. Perhaps the
chromonema is the gene-string itself; but it may
be suspected that in turn the chromonema carries
the gene-string within its pellicle and chromonemal
sap, though these structures are on too small a
scale to be separately visible. There is hope that the
application of photography with ultra-violet light
and special lenses may extend this analysis in the
living state.

Much easier technically, but subject to great
dangers in interpretation, has been the study of
killed and stained material. An early observation
was that the nucleus and the chromosomes were
characterized by interactions with and precipita-
tion of the chemicals used as stains, so that the
nucleus and especially the chromosomes became
colored. The chromosomes were indeed named
from this property, but at the present stage of
cytological development the chromosomes are
bodies defined on structural and _ functional
grounds and it would be well to ignore deliberately
this misleading historical emphasis on stainability.
The substance that interacted with the dye materi-
al was called: chromatin. But it was found that
different dyes stained “different parts of the
chromatin” and deeper staining, stained more or
other chromatin. With the development of
knowledge concerning the structures stained, the
term chromatin has become more and more am-
bigous. Attempts to clarify its use by distinc-
tions between “true chromatin” and ‘“‘pseudo-
chromatin” and “‘basichromatin” and “oxychro-
matin” have been made, but the earlier connota-
tions persist in the literature. In the past the im-
portance of “chromatin’’ has been emphasized ex-
cessively. It has even been treated as the seat of
the hereditary qualities in the cell. The location of
chromatin within the cell and its behavior during
the cycle of a cell generation was thought of high
significance. The basic error of Jeffrey was in
following chromatin while he hoped he was fol-
lowing chromosomes. He entirely missed the
fact that the real problem was to follow the genes.
Just as following colored bodies is an antiquated
substitute for following chromosomes, so follow-
ing chromosomes is an unsafe method of fol-
lowing genes. Not all chromatin is chromosome,
and equally, not all chromosome is gene--string.
In Miastor and in many Lepidoptera there are
divisions in which overbloated metaphase chromo-
somes divide each into two rather tiny chromo-
somes that go to the poles while the greatest bulk
of the chromosome is left behind at the site of the
metaphase plate. There these discarded chromo-
some bodies may retain their former shape long
after the genes have passed to the poles in the di-
minished chromosomes. In the chromatin dimin-

ution of Ascaris megalociphela and A lumbricoides
the accumulation of ‘“‘chromatin’’ distends the
space between the genes and the chromosome pel-
licle, flows into the extended end regions of the
chromosome, and those ends drop off.

Also there is good reason to believe that the Y
chromosome of Drosophila, and other forms, for
all its imposing bulk and length, does not repre-
sent the same situation as the modest X. There
are chromosomes and chromosomes.

The importance of the chromosome is now being
overemphasized just as the importance of chro-
matin has been. It seems true that gene-strings
develop chromosome draperies about them during
prophase, but just as true that these chromosomes
lose their identity at telophase. Typically, their
contents, the chromosomal sap, etc., increase in
bulk; their pellicles distend and fuse; the inter-
chromosomal portions of the pellicles disintegrate
and the portions directed toward the cytoplasm
become continuous, forming the pellicle of the
new nucleus. Chromosomes have ceased to ex-
ist; invisible gene-strings are disposed inside
a nuclear sap and pellicle. Shreds and blobs of
left over and metamorphosing ‘“‘chromatin” lie
about or aggregate into nucleoli and plasmosomes,
with no very significant relation to the gene-string.
The dicta that nuclei come only from nuclei and
chromosomes from chromosomes should be re-
vised. Typically, there is no continuity of the
chromosomes or of the nuclei; but nuclei perish
at metaphase, adding their sap to the cytoplasm
and leaving behind, not a nucleus, but chromo-
somes. Nuclei come from chromosomes and
chromosomes come from gene-strings, probably
even indirectly by the intermediate stage of chro-
monemas. In this series only the genes come from
genes. The syntheses of daughter genes from the
materials of the surrounding fluids is self-
governed, at the site of the parental gene, a process
at once the most fundamental and the hardest to
comprehend in the whole range of cellular phe-
nomena.

Certain facts, such as keeping in step through
a great range of temperatures, suggest that the
genes have a very high similarity or rather the
same basic structure. The specific effects dis-
tinguishing gene from gene would then be due
to modifications in subsidiary parts of the gene.
It is in this basic structure that the most general
property of the genes, that of self-reproduction,
may be assumed to depend. The growth processes
of the gene presumably utilize specific materials,
abstracting them from the surrounding media, and
likewise return to these fluids other specific ma-
terials and products. But since the genes are
basically alike, wherever genes are growing there
will be a substance or substances produced in
common and liberated in their immediate neigh-
borhood. Of course these liberated materials

Jury 26, 1930 }

need not stay in the immediate neighborhood, and
it is probable only their colloidal or gel nature and
the formation of the successive layers of pellicles
that restricts their migration and diffusion. That
this common rather specific substance should dis-
play distinctive chemical reactions with stains is
to be presupposed. But that more than the crud-
est reliance can be placed on these reactions is ap-
parent from the fact that the products are con-

THE COLLECTING NET

is

tinually changing not only their location but their
composition. The initial products undergo a long
chain of reactions, hydrolysis, reductions, etc.,
and the mixtures are continually changing in pro-
portions as they drift outward through the suc-
cessive layers of chromonema, chromosome and
nucleus. There is no evidence that the genes
themselves ever stain, and considerable evidence
that they do not, as in so-called resting nucleus.

MITOTIC ACTIVITY IN THE GRASSHOPPER EMBRYO 1
ELeaNnor H. SLIFer
University of Pennsylvania

The eggs of the grasshopper, Melanoflus dif-
ferentialis, are particularly suitable for biological
studies. They are comparatively large, easy to
separate from the material in which they are laid
and they can be secured in large numbers.

In the neighborhood of Philadelphia this grass-
hopper lays its eggs in the late summer and fall.
These remain in the ground over winter and hatch
the following spring. If such eggs, immediately
after being laid, are placed at a moderately high
temperature—say 25°C—and kept there, they will
develop for about three weeks. Growth then
stops rather abruptly and the embryo remains in
this quiescent condition for several months. Ex-
amination of the embryo at this time shows it to
extend a little less than half the length of the egg
with the head, appendages and ventral portions
of the thorax and abdomen well-developed but
with the dorsal surface still incomplete. The head
lies close to the caudal pole of the egg and the
embryo is, to all appearances, ready to undergo
blastokinesis, that is, to revolve around the pos-
terior end of the egg and to head up towards the
caudal pole. This, however, does not take place.
Hatching occurs only after a prolonged period of
dormancy and the time at which it occurs varies
considerably even with the eggs in a single pod.
In rare instances hibernation fails to take place
and hatching begins about the 38th day at 25°C.
Evidence accumulated so far tends to show that
this non-hibernating habit may be inherited.

Hibernation, in the ordinary M. differentialis
egg, can be prevented by exposing eggs under
three weeks of age—that is, three weeks at 25° C—
to low temperatures, or according to Nelson, it
can be broken by subjecting eggs which have al-
ready begun to hibernate to cold. In such cases
growth recommences at once and hatching takes
place, with marked regularity, about two weeks
after revolution.

Considerable use has been made of these eggs
in physiological work. Bodine, in 1929, pub-
lished the results of extensive experiments deal-
ing with their respiratory metabolism. | When
kept at 25°C he found the curve for 02 consump-
tion rose to a peak at the nineteenth or twentieth
day. It then fell off rapidly and reached a low

level by the thirty-fifth day. Here it remained for
several months. About two weeks before hatch-
ing it began to rise again and reached a maximum
at the time when the little grasshoppers were
ready to emerge. The grasshopper egg takes up
large quantities of HsO as it develops so that at
hatching it may weigh twice as much as when
first laid. Bodine also found that the passage of
HO into the egg stops towards the end of the
third week. It has likewise been found that the
combustion of fats by the embryo, as measured
by the amount of fatty acid present, comes almost
to a standstill between the third and fourth weeks.

With these results in mind an examination of
the embryo from the cytological view point, in an
attempt to correlate internal morphological changes
with physiological behavior, was believed desir-
able.

Eggs containing embryos of various ages were
fixed, the embryos dissected away from the yolk
and prepared for sectioning in the usual way. A
particularly intensive study was made of em-
bryos from eighteen to twenty days old. In over
two dozen cases the total number of mitotic figures
present in the embryo was determined. Only
those cells with distinct, compact chromosomes
were included in the count. The number found
in embryos between these ages ranged from 1000
to 4500. This is the state of affairs towards the
close of the third week. However, when sections
of embryos a week older were examined it was
found that cell division was now almost complete-
ly absent. In 1923 Carothers noted, for several
other species of grasshopper, that embryos sec-
tioned during hibernation rarely showed dividing
cells.

The regularity and decisiveness with which cell
division stops in the Melanoplus differentialis egg
raises a number of interesting questions. In what
way, for example, does cold alter conditions in
the egg so that cell-division can be resumed? Is
the effect exerted on the yolk so as to change ©
certain food-stuffs, let us say, to a more available
form? Or perhaps the low temperature changes
the permeability of the membranes surrounding
the embryo and yolk so that the water needed for
further growth can enter the egg. Or, possibly,

116

the cold may affect the cells of the embryo itself.
Then, again, in what way does a long exposure to
a moderate temperature compare with a short ex-
posure to cold? The final result—that is, re-
sumed cell-division—is the same in both cases.
A chemical and physical study of conditions in the
egg just before and after the onset of hibernation,

THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vor. V. No. 35

and, again, after exposure to cold, seems especially
desirable.

The whole problem is still in its infancy, but
it appears to offer interesting possibilities for fur-
ther work.

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory on July 17.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF MISS SLIFER
Dr. E. ELEANOR CAROTHERS
Lecturer in Zoology, University of Pennsylvania

In the life history of many grasshoppers one
stage in particular has proven a challenge to the
ingenuity of the investigator, whether the ap-
proach was made from the cytological, genetical
or physiological view-point. This stage is the
period of suspended animation or hibernation, the
primary function of which is to carry the species
through the winter.

Dr. Slifer met this problem from the physio-
logical aspect in her careful quantitative study of
the amount of fatty acids remaining in the egg at
various stages of development, and from the cyto-
logical side through her study of mitoses in the
embryos at the critical stage.

For those who are not familiar with this stage
in the life cycle of the short-horned grasshoppers
a brief statement of conditions may be of interest.
Hibernation usually affects the embryo in the egg
or the nymphs. However, adults of certain species
may survive the winter as far north as southern
New Jersey. The eggs of some species (e. g.,
Circolettix verruculus) cannot be forced by
present methods beyond a stage just previous to
the rotation of the embryo except by prolonged
exposure to cold. Eggs of other species are laid
in the spring and hatch during the summer, and
hence are never exposed to cold. Dr. Slifer, I
believe, is the first to report both hibernating and
non-hibernating eggs in the same pod. She is at-
tacking this problem from the genetical standpoint.
Comparable conditions for the nymphs may be
illustrated by Chortophaga viridifasciata: in the

South Central states a non-hibernating summer
generation alternates with one in which the
nymphs hibernate over the winter, while further
north the non-hibernating summer generation is
omitted. Nymphs which normally would hiber-
nate will proceed without pause if they are never —
chilled so that in the laboratory six generations
per year may be reared. After second or third
instar nymphs have been chilled to near O°C., the
mechanism which operates during hibernation
goes into effect and if the insects are kept at or-
dinary room temperature they will remain prac-
tically dormant for several months after which
they automatically resume growth. They can be
induced to continue development at any time, how-
ever, by exposure to temperature somewhat be-
low O°C for several days.

What is this mechanism which in some instances
works automatically at a fixed stage of develop-
ment and in others is called into play only by ex-
posure to cold? Obviously, theories involving
the nucleo-cytoplasmic ratio cannot account for
the sudden cessation of mitosis described by Dr.
Slifer. Is the solution perhaps to be found in
work on cold hardiness such as that of Dr. Nellie
Payne in which the water regulatory mechanism
of the protoplasm seems to be involved? That
some condition of the protoplasm is concerned
seems to me more probable than that the effect is
on the food stuffs in the yolk, since the latter as-
sumption would not explain the apparently com-
parable phenomenon in the hibernating nymphs.

SOME CYTOLOGICAL RELATIONSHIPS IN NARCOSIS 1

Dr. VERA

Beaver

It is found that in the following respects the
transparent Daphnia pulex offers favorable ma-
terial for experimental cytological studies: first,
the various cells of the organism are maintained
in their normal medium unaffected by other than
one experimental factor; second, such reagents
may be used which induce narcosis so that positive
indications of the penetration of permeating sub-
stances are definite; third, injury to the organism
and therefore injury imminent to any cell is im-
mediately manifested; fourth, the relationship of
the permeable substance to at least one cytological

KOoEHRING
College
system may be demonstrated with a surety not
hitherto afforded by any experimental work of this
nature.

Discussing these aspects in reverse order, it has
been found that Daphnia lends itself so perfectly
to neutral red staining in dilute solutions that,
while the neutral red complex of every cell in the
body may be revealed, such staining is non-toxic
and the organism lives and reproduces with no ap-
preciable harmful effects. Only when vital stain-

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on July 17.

Jury 26, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 117

ing thus ceases to be a factor of unknown import
may it be used against other experimental factors.
Reactions in the neutral red system of any part
of the organism are then significant.

It is of great advantage to be able to detect in-
jury to an organism quickly. Practically all types
of injury to Daphnia, whether chemical, thermal
or mechanical, are quickly indicated by reactions
of the anterior digestive tract, this apparently be-
ing the most sensitive region of the body. It is
in this region that the lumen, not only of the in-
testine but of the two digestive coeca, stains pink
with neutral red. Any injury to the organism is
immediately revealed by a sudden fading of the
color of this lumen accompanied by swelling of the
boundary cells and various degrees of distortion.
The cells of the body in general show no visible
signs of injury for many minutes.

Criteria for narcosis are definite in Daphnia.
The heart is a very labile organ and changes in
rate, rhythm, size, shape, and length of time dur-
ing which beats cease completely may be ac-
curately correlated with the various penetrating
substances used in these experiments. Accom-
panying signs of narcosis are the cessation of
appendage, eye, abdominal and peristaltic move-
ments as well as some very striking cytological
changes in muscle striation. All these manifesta-
tions must at present be regarded as induced by
actual penetration of the reagents used into the
tissues of the organs of the Daphnia body for the
rapidity of narcosis is usually such that mere ces-
Sation of respiratory activities could in no way
account for the characteristic changes occasioned
by various narcotics.

This brings the discussion to the first point—the
ideally controlled medium for the observation of
metazoan cells affected in situ by reagents which
normally could not affect them save through the
medium of the barrier cells of the body. For it
is believed that no gases, liquids or solids normally
pass into the body organs save by way of intesti-
nal, respiratory or cuticular cells, and that tissues
bathed only in body fluids must be affected by the
presence of these substances in the body fluids.
Any reactions observed, therefore, are probably

The brilliant studies of Parat have served to
focus the attention of cytologists on the neutral-
red reaction as a supplementary method of study-
ing certain cytoplasmic inclusions. However, in
order that neutral red may be used intelligently
some definite knowledge of the nature of this re-
action, as well as the conditions that may modify
it, is necessary. Of the many workers that have
used neutral red, Dr, Kochring is the only one

the unmitigated effect of the one experimental
factor involved. Concentration of reagent, tem-
perature and nutritive conditions of the organism
undoubtedly afford quantitative variations which
however, are not apparent in the essentially qual-
itative manifestations of cellular physiology which
these metazoan cells indicate in response to a few
selected permeating substances.

Only the vapors of volatile substances have
been used in these experiments—ether, chloro-
form, ammonium hydroxide, potassium cyanide
and carbon dioxide.

Very briefly stated the grosser visible phenom-
ena are: First, the response of the heart, as the
most striking manifestation of complete narcosis,
is characteristic for each reagent used; second,
even after prolonged or often repeated narcosis no
change in the morphology or color range of the
cellular neutral red bodies is effected; third, as a
result of narcosis, changes in the intensity of
neutral red staining seem to indicate definitely that
the reagents used stimulate cellular secretions;
fourth, with the possible exception of ether, a
marked cytological muscular change from stria-
tions to a granular mosaic is produced, the speed
of reversibility being characteristic for each re-
agent used, as well as the behavior of the muscle
during granulation.

The fact that the vapors of NHyOH, KCN and
CO, produce no change in the color range of
neutral red in the organism when it is very evident
that these substances have affected cells, the
vacuoles of which are stained with neutral red,
is significant. Whatever may be the change in
pH in the intestine, in the body fluid or in the
cellular protoplasm, no pH change is ever mani-
fested in the neutral red system during or after
narcosis, nor even in cells after the death of the
organism. Workers who have found such
changes have perhaps injured the organism with
excessive amounts of stain or penetrating reagent.
Daphnia has cells with acid, neutral and alkaline
reacting neutral red bodies; these bodies never
change in color range during complete narcosis
with ether, chloroform, NHysOH, KCN, and COs.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. KOEHRING
Dr. Arpen B. Dawson ,
Associate Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

with courage enough to propose a comprehensive
explanation of this reaction. She regards neu-
tral red as an indicator of proteolytic enzyme
action, whether this be intra-intra or extracellular.
Cellular hydrolytic and cellular synthetic systems
are thus manifested and the course of assimilation
and secretion in organisms is thereby revealed.
The selection of a transparent organism which
may be studied as a unit and not as dissociated

118

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No. 35°

cells and the application of the dye in extremely
dilute solutions is indicative of the modern trend
of cytological investigation. | However, the use
of tissue cultures of metazoan cells for a study
of the neutral-red reaction (Lewis and Lewis)
would appear to give almost as ideal working con-
ditions.

To those interested primarily in the morpho-
logical aspects of the neutral-red reaction, as ob-
tained intracellularly, Dr. Koehring’s experiments
furnish little information since the morphological
appearance of the stained granules and vacuoles
remains, with the exception of a change in in-
tensity, remarkably constant during narcosis. The
most commonly described response of cells to in-
jury or to stimulation is an increase in the in-
tensity of the color of the bodies already stained,
and frequently if there is sufficient dye available
in the medium, this is followed by a neoformation
of neutral-red bodies. This reaction cannot oc-
cur, however, if the dye in the medium has been
exhausted; in other words a too dilute solution
may definitely limit the extent of the neutral-red
reaction, and cause it to appear constant under ex-
perimental conditions. This, however, may be
largely offset by using larger volumes of the
dilute stain.

Apparently living cells in tissue cultures do
not behave in all respects like the cells of living
Daphnia where the same criteria of survival and
ability to undergo mitosis can be applied. A cita-
tion of some of the observations of Lewis and
Lewis (’24) will serve to make this clear. Vacu-
oles may fail to stain in an acid (pH5 or 4.8),
neutral-red medium but if after a culture is bathed
in such a medium the latter is replaced by a dye-
free medium (Locke—bouillon—dextrose), the
neutral-red appears at once in the vacuoles and

INFORMAL RECOLLECTIONS OF THE INTERNATIONAL PHYSIOLOGICAL

CONGRESS IN BOSTON! :

Dr. Emrt ABDERHALDEN

Professor of Physiology, University of Halle (Germany)
TRANSLATED BY ILSE MICHAELIS

What an undertaking it was to invite the
European physiologists to come to America!
Attractive though it was, on one hand, to see with
one’s own eyes what the rapidly developing
country of the “unlimited possibilities” had to
offer in the way of special working possibilities,
on the other hand there was the problem of ex-
yenses. Though we counted from the beginning
vith the proverbial hospitality of our American
olleagues, there remained the high fare for the
‘ip. But soon the horizon cleared. Through
onations in America and through far reaching
support from the countries concerned, contribu-
tions towards travel expenses were secured which
enabled over 600 European scientists to visit the
Congress in Boston. A large number of the

granules, indicating that the dye was probably
present as a colorless compound. The same fail-
ure of the vacuoles to show color occurs in a
potassium cyanide-neutral red medium. If this
is washed off with a dye-free, cyanide-free
medium the color immediately appears. The
washing of a previously stained culture with a
potassium cyanide medium also causes the red
color to disappear, but it can be made to reappear
by washing off the cyanide, while the introduction
of ammonia vapor into the tissue cultures causes
a very rapid formation of vacuoles.

Such discrepancies as seen in the effect of
potassium cyanide on the neutral-red reaction
when applied directly to living cells in cultures
and to the living organism, suggest that the intro-
duction of such chemicals into the environment
of the entire organism may initiate a series of ©
changes which do not equally affect all the cells
of the body.

This review has been limited to a discussion of
the neutral-red reaction, especially to the possible
difficulties which may arise in attempts to utilize
such a dye as an accurate indicator of cytological
changes occurring in an organism, in such ex-
perimental procedures as the induction of narcosis
by chemicals. The reversible cytological changes
produced in striated muscle are striking and merit
intensive study. Any consideration of Dr. Koeh-
ring’s observations on the physiological changes
occurring in such organs as the heart is omitted
since the reviewer is too well aware of his in-
competence to discuss such questions. Dr. Koeh-
ring is to be commended for the excellent judg-
ment exercised in the selection of material for
studies on vital staining and the zeal with which
she has accumulated valuable observations on the
neutral-red reaction.

European delegates used a so-called one-class boat
which the famous holder of the Nobel prize, Hill,
had chosen. Seldom has a gayer crowd crossed
the ocean. The limited living quarters soon
brought the scientists of all countries into close
contact with each other. Day after day there was
opportunity for play and for serious talk. Here
and there could be noticed groups of scientists
discussing a problem. In limited circles lectures
and demonstrations were presented.

To me this pre-congress on the boat suggested
the idea that all international congresses might be
held on ship-board. At present the’ practice is to
choose a certain place in a certain country for
bach congress. Interested people are attending in

1Translated from Medizinische Klinik, No. 46, 1929,

Jury 26, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

119

an ever increasing number—the meetings in
Stockholm were visited by eight hundred per-
sons; in Boston more than sixteen hundred
physiologists and representatives of near fields
were registered. A reception takes place. In the
large crowd it is quite impossible to greet even
those members one has met before; much smaller
is the success in meeting delegates one would wish
to know. And yet the most important function
of a convention is the mutual contact, personal
discussion and the making of new friendships.
Deduct from the Thirteenth International Con-
gress the crossing from Europe to America, the
trip through a few of the cities in the United
States and Canada, and further the joint living
quarters in splendid student dormitories, and that
congress, though organized beyond all praise,
would have rushed by without the gain of the
numerous new friendships which certainly were
valuable to each individual. On a boat there are
no diversions. The lectures would be visited well
and the discussions would not have to be cut short
by a bell announcing that the five minutes granted
_ for it were over. No one can escape! Everyone
can be located and questioned. The most furious
opponents will have to meet and express their
points of view with the aid of data or even
experiments. The boat could land in a different
country each time in order to provide the possi-
bility of becoming acquainted with other people’s
working methods. At first sight the idea of hold-
ing a convention*on a boat might seem a joke or a
utopia. Yet J am convinced that at some time my
proposal will be accepted.

And now as to America! First of all I have to
mention the fact that all I saw was more or less
strongly in contrast with what I had read and
heard concerning conditions in America. They
seem to cook with water too. It is naturally
quite impossible to become thoroughly acquainted
with country and people during a three weeks’
stay, but as far as the scientific spirit is concerned
a judgment may well be given. What impressed
me most in all institutions of science that I visited
(Harvard Medical School, Columbia University,
Rockefeller Institute, the scientific laboratories at
Albany, the Universities of Toronto and Mon-
treal) was the excellent comradeship among the
investigators. Envy and grudge which here in
some cases have put a check to the smooth de-
velopment of research were lacking almost com-
pletely. Of course, such human things are not
wholly unknown to the American research
worker ; drawbacks exist everywhere. But among
our American colleagues they are overcome by
the sincere joy that every one shows at
another’s success. We talked in detail about in-
vestigations in progress. One’s opinion was
often consulted. It was natural that every-
body placed his experiences at the disposal
of others. This most excellent spirit means

an enormous addition for the future de-
velopment of scientific research in the United
States. The same holds true in even larger mea-
sure for the Canadian scientists. Numerous
discoveries in recent years are due to the co-
operation of investigators of different institutions
and fields of science. For example, the discovery
of insulin has decidedly been advanced by the fact
that several research workers placed their parti-
cular experiences and laboratory facilities at each
others disposal. Compare with this how
difficult it is in Germany to succeed in the co-
operation of different institutions and clinics in a
certain aim. And yet it seems to me that in the
future the development of many branches of
science will depend entirely on such cooperative
work. I do not deny that this method has dis-
advantages, inasmuch as a too far reaching
specialization might take from the individual
investigator the possibility for complete evalua-
tion of his findings. An example will illustrate
this: a scientist occupies himself with the inter-
pretation of X-ray diagrams. He himself neither
makes the picture nor develops the plate. It is
quite possible that an investigator who is familiar
with all the phases of a certain method may modi-
fy this method, being perhaps the only individual
capable of telling what essential changes could
turn that method into one of still greater efficiency.’
Thus it is conceivable that in developing photo-
graphic plates modifications might become
necessary by which the final result of the
work could benefit. An unnecessary amount of
work and material is further wasted where hun-
dreds and hundreds of blood tests are made by
persons who have no direct contact whatever with
the problem in question. An immense amount of
material is gathered which is liable not to be
evaluated completely. It is absolutely necessary
for all cooperative work that each of the particip-
ants should know the basis of all methods em-
ployed and be capable of forming a judgment on
the accuracy of the individual process.

Again the question arises whether Germany’s
scientific position in the world has been shaken.
Can we keep pace with the enormous efforts being
made towards an always greater completion of the
institutions of research in the United States and
Canada, or is the curve a declining one? Of
course, this question cannot be answered generally.
Here we can only investigate the field of physi-
ology. There is no doubt that in judging the de-
velopment of a science we have to think first of
all of the men who are devoted to research. Only
then can we consider the means and equipment
at their disposal. The United States and Canada
dispose of an excellent younger generation.
Everywhere I met well trained, intelligent and
highly enthusiastic young physiologists; but even
the old guard has long overcome that condition
which made America appear a pupil of the big

120

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No. 35

European, especially German, masters. American
research work is now at least equal to the Euro-
pean, in particular to the German. Numerous
fundamental discoveries in the fields of physi-
ology, and especially chemical physiology, have
been made by investigators in the States and
Canada. Should we feel sorry for this success?
I think not! Science is international. It is
entirely indifferent to whom we owe discoveries
and where scientific knowledge is being advanced.
The important thing is that progress exists. This
does not mean that national ambitions should
be excluded entirely from the fight for scientific
progress. In any country a decline of scientific
success would be a sad and dangerous symptom.
The situation is not such that knowledge won in
one country will immediately spread throughout
the world; on the contrary, an echo can only be
produced when the news reaches people who have
themselves worked successfully on corresponding
experiments. If there were no personalities who
can quickly follow the leaders in other countries—
in order to take the leadership themselves some
day—it would mean for the country concerned a
loss difficult to make up for at the present rate of
the development of science. From this point of
view it is quite a healthy ambition to use all efforts
not to stand back in the scientific competition of
the nations. On the contrary, one should strive
to equal other nations, and if possible, to excel
them. In scientific respect competition can bring
only advantage to all. No harm can be done if
a nation fights for the laurel in this fashion.

In reading the numerous reports which have
appeared in recent years on the equipment of
American institutions, on the almost fabulous
organization of clinics, one can easily get dis-
couraged. I know that many scientists are of the
opinion that German science has lost its leading
position in many fields, and that it has been sur-
nassed, especially by American men of science.
There is no doubt that for example in physiological
chemistry and physiology results have been
obtained in American and Canadian institutions
which we admire without envy. But it is likewise
certain that progress is being made in these fields
in laboratories and universities in Germany. I
think that no retrogression can be felt in the
fields of science just mentioned. Serious alone
is the circumstance that at to-day’s stand of
science it has become impossible in many of its
branches to reach a certain aim in a certain
limited time. In the laboratories of physiology,
physiological chemistry, chemistry and physics I
have found everywhere most useful equipment,
such as cold rooms large enough to permit working
in them, large centrifuges for very low tempera-
ture, apparatus for quick evaporation of large
amounts of liquids at low temperature, etc.
Furthermore ample funds are available for re-

search work in America. They lack the burden
of anxiety under which we are suffering here day
by day. When an investigator applies for funds
for a special problem or an expensive piece of
apparatus it will be granted to him with pleasure.
One is certain that he is not asking for anything
unreasonable and is happy to support his ambi-

tions. Of course, this is not true for every single

institution in the United States and Canada;
there are many that are equipped more than
poorly. Over here everything has to be fought
for. Much time is wasted until special funds are
granted. Everyone knows that it is practically
impossible to undertake a larger piece of research
work with the ordinary budget. It is indeed
fortunate that through the ‘“Notgemeinschaft” a
strong decline of German science has been
prevented. The model support in America of
scientific work by private individuals is unfortu-
nately also lacking completely in Germany. As in
general so in science—the able personality may
succeed in obtaining the necessary means for in-
vestigations merely through distinguished work.
In this regard doubtless an excellent selection
takes place.

On my last visit to American and Canadian
research laboratories and universities an enormous
danger to German research has impressed itself
upon me. I realize that it is quite ungrateful to
mention this problem. Yet this must be discussed
in view of the peculiarities of the organization
of German universities and in the interest of the
further development of German science. In the
United States as well as in Canada we frequently
have investigators and separate instructors. The
practical instruction of physicians plays a more
important role than with us. The instructor is
extremely busy and frequently spends most of his
time in teaching. Thus investigation, in many
cases, is concentrated in institutions devoted to
research exclusively. The tendency to effect a
similar separation in Germany is not lacking. We
have excellent research laboratories, (Kaiser
Wilhelm Society). They have completely fulfilled
the hopes put in them. It is an admirable idea to
make investigators independent from teaching in
order to allow them to devote their entire time
and strength to research. It would, however, be
an enormous mistake if one would look upon
investigators in universities as teachers primarily
to whom investigation ranks second only. If
the funds at university laboratories are being
restricted many instructors are forced to give up
research. The idea that he finds complete satis-
faction in his teaching work is quite erroneovs
Man can only give satisfactory instruction who
is himself in the middle of research and thus
preserves the necessary criticism of new litera-
ture. The university teacher has many advan-
tages over the “pure” investigator. He is in

Jury 26, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

121

constant touch with the youth. He is forced to
follow up the entire field that he is teaching in
all its phases of development. In that way he
preserves a wide horizon. He recognizes con-
nections which escape the specialist. Enforced
research is inconceivable. The investigator must
be free to change his problem occasionally. The
university teacher will not feel too depressed even
if he is not quite successful in his research, for
he knows that through his teaching he is doing
useful work. With new courage he will attack
new questions after a failure. It frequently hap-
pens that intensive research begins to slow down.
If it is completely interrupted for some time a
new way is often discovered suddenly which was
previously overlooked in the middle of the work.
Of course, the combination of research and teach-
ing has its well known disadvantages. Research
has to be postponed. Precious time is spent on
various administrative duties and meetings.

I shall not stop to describe single impressions
that I got in America. Too many such descrip-
tions have been published recently. Many of them
are quite one-sided. The visit to a few univer-
sities does not permit a judgment of similar
institutions in the entire country. No one wish-
ing to give a true picture of German physiological
equipment to a foreigner will show him only the

Physiological Institute at Halle. It would be
hatural to take the interested guest to modern and
well equipped laboratories. The same would be
true for every country. But the one thing is
certain, namely that we can learn a great deal
from our American and Canadian colleagues. It
is quite essential that we keep in touch with all of
them. We must constantly strive to improve our
research possibilities, especially also in the univer-
sity laboratories. Whenever some one distin-
guishes himself through some particular accom-
plishment he should be assisted in the full develop-
ment of his personality, independent of posi-
tion, title, ete. It is most important now to fully
evaluate the existing forces. I am firmly con-
vinced that if we do this our scientific position
among the other nations will be fully maintained.
And one more point. In all the countries of the
world the high esteem of German science is deep-
ly anchored. It is a holy will of old times not
only to maintain but to enlarge this reputation.
A young and promising generation is at our
disposal. It is necessary to help it on its way and
to turn over sufficient means for further develop-
ment to those places which understand best how
to use them to the greatest advantage. A loss of
means cannot be admitted in the present serious
situation.

THE OCEAN AND ITS CONTENTS

For “information vegetable, animal and min-
eral” concerning the waters which almost com-
pletely surround us here at the Hole and cover
three quarters of the earth, let us recommend a
small but chunky volume, “THE Seas” by Russell
and Yonge. This book is written in a popular

style, but it has an adequate framework of real
biology, and is written by two men well fitted
for the task they set themselves. Both were con-
nected, as assistant naturalists, with the Marine
Biological Association, Plymouth, and Dr. Yonge
was leader of the Great Barrier Reef Expedition.

The matter of the book deals not only with
the sea shore, but also the mysteries and problems
of the deeper oceans, and much of the material
is of extraordinary interest to the biologist as well
as to the layman. Some of the topics discussed
are the sea shore, the sea bottom, swimming ani-
mals, drifting life, boring life, coral reefs, color
and phosphorescence, feeding of marine animals,
sea water, ocean seasons, methods of oceano-
graphic research, sea fisheries and fishery re-
search, and the products of the sea. Perhaps the
most attractive element in this book is the abund-
ance of illustrations, three hundred and eighty-
four in all, with one hundred and sixty-seven. in
full color, many of them examples of unusual
photography,

The list price of the book is five dollars, and if
you purchase a copy, you are making a doubly
benevolent gesture—in your own behalf, for it’s
really a delightful book, and in behalf of THE
CottectinG Net Scholarship Fund which re-
ceives $2.50 each time a book is sold.

THE CHORAL CLUB CONCERT

On Monday evening, July 28, at 8:30, the
Choral Club will give its annual concert in the
Auditorium. The club numbers about forty, and
under the direction of Professor Ivan Gorokhoff,
it has been practising since the first of this month.
The program, which is given below, contains a
variety of songs and is sure to appeal to every
listener. The price of admission is 50c and $1.00.
1. Now let every tongue adore Thee........ J. 8. Bach
2 eNgne: DImMiGis.... eee itteeena ne A. Arkhangelsky
3. O Be Joyful in the Lord....... A. T. Gretehaninoff

4. Unto her....Shine, O Jerusalem...... N. Tolstyakof€
5. Gospodi Pomiluy (Lord, have mercy)...... Lyovsky
G. P. da Palestrina

6. ‘Wu es: Petrust ¢....2 2c) sees
7. Let their celestial concerts unite.....G. F. Handel
From the oratorio Samson.

8; The) Brook: fo yee cranes A. Arkhangelsky
9: The: Nightingale... cee. oe P. I. Tschaikowsky
10.) Kalinkai.; ce aieieete eee eore ee Russian Folk Song
11. Down St. Peter’s Road........... Russian Folk Song

12. Finale from “The Gondoliers” Gilbert and Sullivan

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Wisure Cathe lle ty dateretseisia ores aUetelele! = ieiasaiehe wats Editor

Assistant Editors

Mary Howe Annaleida S. Cattell

Business Manager
Tse Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

The Scholarship Fund

When it first began publication in 1926 THE
Cottectinc Net initiated a Scholarship Fund.
Its purpose was to provide promising students
with financial aid in returning to the laboratory
when they could not readily do so without this
assistance. In 1927, 1928, and 1929 the sum of
$500.00 was collected in our net; and distributed
in five or six parts to individuals selected by a
committee of senior investigators.

Last summer the awards were made on a com-
petitive basis and the students in any of the five
classes were eligible to submit reports of research
work done that summer. These were considered,
together with recommendations from the director
of each class, by a committee consisting of Drs.
Conklin, Garrey and Woodruff. Substantially
the same arrangements will be followed this sum-
mer.

The income for the scholarships has been ob-
tained primarily from three sources:

(1) Income from THe CottectinG NEt.

(2) Receipts from some lecture, play or moy-
ing picture presented by us.

(3) Gifts from interested individuals.

From the latter source we have already re-
ceived a sum totaling $185.00. The receipts from
Tue Cotrectine Net will not be large this year
because the cost of publishing the first number
was over four hundred dollars. We hope, there-
fore, that we may find new contributors to our
Fund.

An Unofficial Publication

The relation of THe Cottectine Net to the
Marine Biological Laboratory is not clear to
everyone. Our publication receives the hearty
cooperation of the workers at this laboratory,
but it is an independent enterprise. THE Cor-
LecTING Net has no official connection with the
Marine Biological Laboratory, and this institu-
tion is in no way responsible for its make-up, its
contents or its editorial policies.

THE COLLECTING NET

‘paratus and for the making of such equipment

[ Vor. V. No. 35°

Tue Cotrectinc Net has undertaken to sell
an English book—‘The Seas’—to forward its
Scholarship Fund. This book concerns itself with |
our knowledge of the sea and its contents and
is beautifully illustrated with photographs and —
colored plates. . This volume costs $5.00, and
each time one is sold the sum of $2.50 is added —
to our Scholarship Fund. We sincerely hope that
members of the laboratory will be interested in —
purchasing this book. It will make an appropri-
ate addition to the library of anyone who spends
the summer near the seashore.

GLASS BLOWING SERVICE

Mr. J. D. Graham, in charge of the Glass
Blowing Service, University of Pennsylvania,
has been engaged as glass blower to be available
at the Marine Biological Laboratory, from July
8 to August 19. He will devote four weeks of
this period partly to the construction of new
devices to be added to the stock of scientific ap-

or for repairs as may be required by investigators
working at the Laboratory. A part of the machine
shop has been equipped for this work and a stock —
of both soft and pyrex glass is on hand for use.
The work which can be undertaken this year
is as follows: blown-glass forms not requiring
molds, seals, stop-cocks and stop-cock grinding,
drilling and cutting of tubing and plate, and the
fusing of glass and quartz apparatus of the more
complicated set-ups located in the Laboratory —
rooms.
Detailed sketches and description of the appara- —
tus required may be left at the Apparatus Room
or the Chemical Room during the summer, for
Mr. Graham’s attention, together with a memo-—
randum of the time you desire delivery. Work
will be done at cost. S. E. Pond:

Currents in the Hole br

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards

Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.

Jtlya ZO See SEZ 532i

Nally 275 ses he 6:03 6:19

Ai ae aaebeeamet 6:54 7:13

alye29" 3... ater 7:42 8:06

{pai IO. Be sae 8:37 9:05

July 31 9:31 10:04

Angoust) WY 29 se 10:23) “11E05

AM SUISE 2 yy ans 11:20 ee

August 3 12504 Se 12RS

In each case the current changes six hours later

and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de- |
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
eause the turning of the current to oceur a half an
hour earlier or later than the times given above,

Jury 26, 1930 ]

RHE COLLECTING NET

123

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Recently there have been several special lectures
before the embryology class. Dr. Heilbrunn and
Dr. Fry lectured on Friday and Saturday, re-

spectively. The following schedule has been ar-
ranged for the first part of next week:

Monday, Dr. R. S. MeEwen—Early development and de-
termination of the embryonic axis in a Teleost; Tues-
day, Dr. V. C. Twitty—Heteroplastic transplantation in
Amphibia; Wednesday, Dr. W. R. Amberson—Chemical
embryology. (Joint lectures for Embryology and Phys-
jology).

D. M. Whittaker, who was instructor in biology
at Stanford University two years ago, is to be as-
sistant professor of zoology at Columbia Uni-
versity this year. During the past winter he has
been working with Dr. Crozier at Harvard Uni-
versity under a National Research Fellowship.

Dr. E. S. G. Barron who has been instructor in
medicine at Johns Hopkins University has accept-
ed the position of associate professor of physiol-
ogical chemistry at the University of Chicago.

Dr. H. W. Wieman, professor of zoology at
the University of Cincinnati, and Mrs. Wieman
arrived last week and will spend the remainder of
the summer in Woods Hole.

Dr. Lorande L. Woodruff, professor of zoology
at Yale University, and his family have taken the
Kellicott cottage on Crow Hill for the summer.

Dr. George J. Heuer has recently moved into
the H. J. Hughes’ house for the summer. Dr.
Heuer is Professor of Surgery in the College of
Medicine of the University of Cincinnati, and has
held this position since 1922 when he was called
from Johns Hopkins.

Glenn A. Millikan, who took the physiology
course at the laboratory last summer, is now in
Cambridge, England carrying out research work
in physiology. He is the son of Robert Millikan,
the physicist.

Miss Pauline Holbert, who worked in the
Chemical Room in 1927, has been visiting in
Woods Hole. She was called away suddenly last
week by the death of her brother, Theodore Hol-
bert, who was killed in an airplane accident in
Elmira.

Dr. and Mrs. McKeen Cattell, together with
their three children, have sailed for England
where they will remain until early next Spring.
Dr. Cattell will continue his research work on the
effect of pressure upon reactions in nerve-muscle
physiology at University College in Cambridge.

_ Dr. Charlotte Haywood, who has been teaching
in the physiology course, has left Woods Hole.

‘She will sail for England from Montreal on July

25, where she is planning to spend four or five
weeks before returning to her work at Mount
Holyoke.

Dr. and Mrs. Benjamin C. Gruenberg have been
visiting Woods Hole this week. Dr. Gruenberg
is managing director of the American Association
for Medical Progress.

Dr. N. B. Dreyer, who was here during the
summer of 1928 working at the laboratory, spent
Tuesday night in Woods Hole. He is leaving
his position as assistant professor of pharmacol-
ogy at McGill University to accept his duties as
professor of pharmacology at Dalhousie Univer-
sity. :

Commander Frederick A. Nichols is concluding
his three years in command of the Woods Hole
Coast Guard base about August 19 and is to be in
command of the cutter Champlain at New York.
He will be replaced by Lieutenant-Commander R.
S. Patch of the cutter Monaghan at Boston.

On July 30 the local Coast Guard will par-
ticipate in the whaleboat events, competing with
Fairhaven crews, as part of the New Bedford
Tercentenary celebration.

Oscar Hilton is making rapid progress in the
development of his land in Cherry Valley, on the
main road to Falmouth near the drive to Nobska
road. A steam shovel and its crew are cutting a
road parallel to the highway.

On July 13 two cars collided on West Street
near the apartment house. The cars were dam-
aged, but no one was injured. The participants
were not from Woods Hole.

Representative William A. Jones is general
chairman of the Cape Cod Mosquito Control Com-
mission. They will raise the sum of $200,000
dollars with which they hope to eliminate most of
the mosquitoes on Cape Cod.

While driving his car in Falmouth on July 18,
Frederic A. Nichols, Jr. of Woods Hole, a student
at the Worcester Polytechnic Institute, struck and
broke the leg of Patrolman Crocker. The acci-
dent occurred in a traffic jam caused by a fire in
a home on Shore Street.

Early on the morning of July 20, Charles James
proprietor of the James’ Spa near the depot, died
at his home in Woods Hole. Mr. James had been
ill for a number of years.

The Knight house has been engaged for the
summer by Miss A. B. Ottman of Wellesley.

124 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 35

Keeping Pace With

the Progress of
Science « «

THE instruments of science are continually

being changed — modified — improved to

keep pace with the methods of today’s

scientists. In the field of microscopy B&L

has been the first to bring out an entirely
Be sure to visit the Bausch & Lomb new microscope for modern research.

Ponual Exhibit; Jat 22 pen teat The DDE Microscope is complete. It is a bin-

ocular instrument which can be instantly changed

into a monocular type for photomicrography. Its unique design allows you to

work in a natural, upright position with the stage horizontal. Metal parts, such

as adjustment heads, are now chromium plated. These parts will not rust, cor-

rode or become stained by reagents. The rest of the instrument is finished in a

satiny black, giving the microscope a handsome black and nickeled appearance.

Write for catalog D-164, which explains many valuable
details which space does not permit us to give here.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. y
671 ST.PAUL STREET « » ROCHESTER, N.Y. (MGananrmonunma

BAUSCH
% LOMB

BAUSCH éELOMB.

Makers of Orthogon®Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

Jury 26, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 125

SEIGHTLY: LARGER; SLIGHTLY HEAVIER,
JUST A BIT MORE RUGGED --- NEW

SPENCER No. 34

LABORATORY and MEDICAL

¢ MICROSCOPE

I. Chromium plated objectives and adjustment
buttons.

II. Distance 95 m.m. (increased from 80 m.m.)
from inner curve of arm to optical axis.

III. Solidarity exemplified and graceful lines
characteristics of all Spencer microscopes
are featured.

IV. Increased size and new beauty added to
outstanding performance without increase
in price,

Our many years of close experience with
the needs of laboratories and laboratory
workers, has naturally led to careful
study of types of design, sizes, weight
and to every phase of instrument needs
both from the standpoint of the worker
as well as that of the manufacturer. The
result has been that Spencer Microscopes
No. 44 and 64, because of neat compact-
ness, beauty in design, brilliant perfor-
mance, excellence in craftsmanship, dur-
ability and size for ease and comfort in
use, have held a foremost place among
laboratory microscopes for the past 18 or
20 years and their popularity has not
declined—in fact their sale during the
past year exceeds all previous years.

For certain types of work there has been some demand, not for laboratory micro-
scope of research size and weight, No! not that, but for an instrument slightly larger,
slightly heavier and a bit more rugged.

To meet this demand our new No. 34 microscope has been designed, not as a substi-
tute for Nos. 44 and 64 but as an additional instrument incorporating in design and
construction all the advantageous features of those most popular instruments, with a
bit more size, weight and ruggedness added. It is supplied with or without
the mechanical stage. ‘

Brochure No. M-41 illustrates and describes it—sent on request.

aa SPENCER LENS COMPANY aac

MANUFACTURERS

Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring | BUFFALO |
Ey)

Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Etc. U.S.A
BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

126

THE COLLECTING NET

New McGraw-Hill Books
- in Press -

ELEMENTS OF PLANT SCIENCE
By CHARLES J. CHAMBERLAIN
Professor of Morphology and Cytology
University of Chicago

» ANIMAL ECOLOGY -
With Especial Reference to Insects
By ROYAL N. CHAPMAN
Director of the Experiment Station
University of Hawaii
THE LOWER FUNGI
Phycomycetes
By H. M. FITZPATRICK
Professor of Mycology
Cornell University
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
By N. A. MAXIMOV

Professor of the Pedagogical Institute
of Leningrad
Translated from the Russian and Edited by
A. E. Murneek and R. B. Harvey

SCIENCE and the SCIENTIFIC MIND

Twenty-four essays selected by
Leo E. Saidla and
Warren E. Gibbs

Laboratory Manual for
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
By H. L. WIEMAN

Professor of Zoology
and Charles K Weichert
Instruetor in Zoology
both of the University of Cincinnati

STAR CLUSTERS
By HARLOW SHAPLEY
Paine Professor of Practical Astronomy and
Director of the Harvard College Observatory.
MAN AND THE STARS
By HARLAN TRUE STETSON
Director of the Perkins Observatory,
Ohio Wesleyan University
DETERMINATION OF ORBITS OF
COMETS AND ASTEROIDS
By RUSSELL TRACY CRAWFORD
Professor of Astronomy, University of
California

Let us send you copies of any of these books
on approval on the day of publication.

McGRAW HILL BOOK COMPANY, In-.

370 Seventh Ave. New York

[ Vor. V. No. 35

—— EEE SS a ee eS

. . . Specifically Adapted
to the Needs of Medical
and Premedical Students

Essentials of

HUMAN
EMBRYOLOGY

By GIDEON S. DODDS
Professor of Histology and Embryology,
School of Medicine
West Virginia University

This textbook of human embryology has
been written primarily for medical students,
and secondarily for those who are prepar-
ing for the study of medicine in schools
where embryology is a prerequisite subject.
It presupposes a knowledge of gross and
microscopic strueture of the body and is
designed especially to interpret and clarify
such knowledge.

Professor Norman M. Grier of Evansville
College, in a review of this book, makes
this significant comment:

“No justification is needed for the type
of textbook which Professor Dodds has
given us, for while his work is written pri-
marily for medical students, it is also
readily comprehended by those who have
had courses in collegiate Histology and
Comparative Anatomy. This type of text,
therefore, written from the human rather
than from the comparative embryological
standpoint, is in a way prophetic of future
developments in the biological section of
the liberal arts curriculum, In remarkably
concise space, but still in a very readable
style, the author presents an admirable ©
foundation for obstetrics, and includes an
excellent section on anomalies in develop-
ment. Clean-cut illustrations aid in giving
it a high coefficient of ‘usability’. This
book is to be highly recommended for the
purpose stated.”

316 pages 534 by 9 Price, $4.00

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 Fourth Avenue, New York City

Jury 26, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET

IMPORTANT MACMILLAN BOOKS

READY SOON,
PROBLEMS AND METHODS OF RESEARCH IN PROTOZOOLOGY

©

* Edited by
hd ROBERT W. HEGNER, Professor of Protozoology
Ka , and
JUSTIN ANDREWS, Associate in Protozoology
in the

Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health

The editors of this book have brought together information of value to students and investigators
in the field of Protozoology that is at present either widely scattered in the literature or has never
before been published. They have organized the work of approximately twenty-five outstanding re-
search workers with the purpose of aiding both the seasoned investigator and the beginning student.
The editors at first had intended to prepare the entire manuscript themselves, but it soon became evi-
dent that the work would be much more valuable if specialists in each field were to contribute chapters
on problems and methods of research in the various phases of the subject about which they were most
familiar.

KOK

PROTOZOAN PARASITISM OF THE ALIMENTARY TRACT
PATHOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS and TREATMENT
By
Kenneth M. Lynch, M. D., Professor of Pathology, Medical College of the State of
South Carolina; Pathologist to the Roper Hospital, Charleston, S. C.; President,
American Society of Clinical Pathologists, 1930-31; President, American Society
of Tropical Medicine, 1930.

KOK

The confusion which exists among those practically concerned about Protozoa of the alimentary
tract of Man and their relation to disease has been the stimulus in writing this book. It was planned
as a monograph for students and practitioners of medicine and for those variously connected with
medicine in special ways which bring them as responsible parties into this very common consideration
in diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of disease.

KD

JUST PUBLISHED
THE MYCOSES OF THE SPLEEN

LS

Fy

* By
Pg ,
& Alexander George Gibson, M. D., F. R. C. P., Physician to the Radcliffe Infirmary,
3¢ and Reader in Morbid Anatomy in the University of Oxford Price $4.50

of

The author builds a strong case in support of his contention that certain forms of splenomegaly that
are included in the terms of splenic anaemia, Banti’s disease, and acholurie jaundice are the result of
an invasion of the spleen by a streptothrix organism. Admittedly a controversial proposition, the
author, in this fascinating monograph, does not hesitate to give due consideration to adverse clinical
evidence advanced by the opponents of this theory.

XO

KD

KOK

CECE

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

* PUBLISHERS
bd 60 Fifth Avenue New York
* Atlanta Boston Chicago Dallas San Francisco

2.

or

e

SLEEEEELEE ELE EE EEE EEE EEE EG EEE EEE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EEEEEEEEE EERE EEEEELE EES:

OK KKK KK KOKO OK KKK Ta

>?

LLL LEE LEE ELE EELS LE EEE EE EE EL ELS CCC CEE EEE EEE EES,

OK OOK KOK

128 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. V. No. 35

Turtox Products

for
APPARATUS FOR BIOLOGY LIFE HISTORIES
BOTANICAL MATERIAL LIVING SPECIMENS
CHARTS MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
COLLECTING EQUIPMENT MUSEUM PREPARATIONS
CULTURES PARASITOLOGY MATERIAL
DISSECTIONS RESEARCH SERVICE
EMBRYOLOGICAL SPECIMENS SERVICE DEPARTMENT
ENTOMOLOGICAL SPECIMENS SKELETONS
INJECTED MATERIAL STAINS AND REAGENTS
For Comparative Anatomy TAXIDERMY
JEWELL MODELS ZOOLOGICAL MATERIAL

LANTERN SLIDES

General Biological Supply House
(INCORPORATED)
761-763 East 69th Place

The Sign of the Turtox Chicago, Illinois
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

PR ee Oe

Send us your inquiries for
SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, etc.

ae will be gladly sent on request

Cray

Toaiorte rs od aaKGE sale distributors o Anttoniche
Botanical and Biological models and preparations
and skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

meri le?

(Spee.

Ce ee ee ee ie kd

Jury 26, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 129

COMPTON ELECTROMETER

HE Quadrant Electrometer shown is primarily
due to Profs. Arthur H. and Karl T. Comp-
7%4x74x9% ton. It embodies the sound detail design and
inches precision of construction necessary to fully
weight realize the advantages of the Compton Modifi-
cations,
6 pounds .
The needle and quadrant adjustments are en-
tirely free from backlash or “wobble” and are
provided with accurate micrometer heads. A
small movement in the height of either changes
the sensitivity considerably. The Electrometer
has a stable zero and extremely high sensitivity.
Once set up, it can immediately be brought to
any required state of sensitivity since the differ-
ent movements can be accurately repeated from
time to time.

Send for electrometer list C 169

CAMBRIDGE

Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

3512 Grand Central Terminal, New York

PACULTY MEMBERS

are recommending the

NEW LEITZ MEDICAL STUDENT
MICROSCOPE
The Models “L” and “LS” offered this fall embody

refinement in construction as suit the requirements
for all Medical Colleges.

The low power objective 16mm (10X) is of
divisible construction and serves to cover large
sections, embryos, etc. The Abbe Condenser is
also divisible and can be used in connection with a
special diaphragm for darkfield investigations.

The Leitz Standard of Accuracy which cannot
be associated with quantity production or hurried
workmanship, is distinctly evident in this model.

ey E. LEITZ, Inc.

Write for Pamphlet No. 1168 (C. N.) : 60 E. 10th Street,
NEW YORK, N. Y.

130 THE COLLECTING NET { Vor. V. No. 35

SOLD BY THE COLLECTING NET
for the benefit of its Scholarship Fund

AN ENTIRELY NEW WORK BY THE LEADERS OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF
EXPEDITION, 1928-9

THE SEAS

OUR KNOWLEDGE OF LIFE IN THE SEA
AND HOW IT IS GAINED

By F. S. RUSSELL. D.S.C., B.A. (Cantab.)
Assistant Naturalist to the Marine Biological Association, Plymouth; Formerly Assistant Director of
Fisheries Research to the Egyptian Government
and
C. M. YONGE, D.Sc. Ph.D.
Leader of the Great Barrier Reef Expedition; Formerly Assistant Naturalist to
the Marine Biological Association, Plymouth

WITH 384 ILLUSTRATIONS
167 of which are in full colour

In pocket size, 64% x 4% ins., cloth gilt, round corners
PRICE $5.00

By special arrangements with the publisher, Frederick Warne and Co. Ltd., half of the money
coming from the sale of this volume will be turned over to THE CotLectina Net Scholar-
ship Fund.

Marine
Biological
Laboratory

Supply

VAN SLYKE vu %
CONSTANT VOLUME BLOOD
GAS APPARATUS

For the Determination of COs, CO
and Os, in Blood and Other

Solutions, Micro - Kjeldahl De- Department
termination of Nitrogen, Urea,

Ee ; FOR THE BEST
Requires no permanent installa-

tion, and is mounted in one unit BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
ready for operation. CLASSROOM MATERIAL

MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

EIMER & AMEND Samples of different preparations on

Write for Bulletin No. 378

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897 exhibit.
HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY Catalogues and Information Furnished by
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS Applying at Supply Department Office

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y. GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

Jury 26, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 131

Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the
slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the
markings can be washed off with water
so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again 7092
and again.

The Dissecting Set illustrated above is
being widely used by instructors and
by advanced students of biology. The
case is of best-quality leather, hand-
somely finished, lined with velvet and
having chamois skin protecting flaps.
The instruments comprising the set are
of “A” quality, with keen cutting edges.
These instruments consist of the follow-

| “RITE ON”

ing:
1 Sealpel No. 6935 ebony handle 46 mm edge
1 Sealpel No. 6942 ebony handle 25 mm edge
‘ 1 Scissors No. 7009, medium straight
Non-corrosive semi-white, 1 Forceps No. 6787 heavy straight for
medium thickness 7 vertebrate work
1 Tenaeulum No, 7052 ebony handle 160 mm
5 , . length
A , c af =
ae racceenoundsnnd) polished, 1 Cartilage Knife No. 6817, all steel 45 mm
edge ~
$1.75 Gross 1 Seeker No. 7037 all steel 150 mm length
4 1 Triple chain and hooks No. 6807
1 Blowpipe No. 6747 120 mm length
Sample gross sent prepaid on 1 Celluloid rule No. 10497, 6 inches
receipt of check.
erm Setitcmewrs iratere tite ices Setshy aster eriees $5.00
_ Please mention dealers name _ Per dozen, 10% discount

We can supply Dissecting Sets containing any

Cxay-ApAms CompANy desired seiection of dissecting instruments

and we would be pleased to submit quotations
Wholesale Distributors on any required quantity.

117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of

Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical WI LL CORP ORATION
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RoowesTER, N-Y.

SE
SS ———

132

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No. 35

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH
(Episcopal)
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion 7:30 a.m.
Morning Prayer 11:00 a.m.
Evening Prayer 7:30 p.m.

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole

Phone 622

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE |

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

DANIELS’
for Home-made Ice Cream,
Delicious Sandwiches,

Coffee,

Follow the Crowd to
PICNIC LUNCHES

H. M. HOWES & SON CO.
Choice Meats, Groceries and Vegetables

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Telephone 695

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station
a

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS
Tel. Falmouth 660-661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

| N. E. TSIKNAS

THE TWIN DOOR

RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Phone 239-W Free Delivery
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

When in Falmouth Stop at
ISSOKSON’S
GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait
A. ISSOKSON

SANSOUCIS BEAUTY PARLOR
Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and
All Branches of Beauty Culture
Falmouth Phone 19-M

:
5
#

THE COLLECTING NET 133

Jury 26, 1930 }
THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“The Makropoulos Secret”

by Karvel Capek
Week of July 28 - August 2

Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10ce DEPARTMENT

Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Sunday, July 27

CHARLES “BUDDY” ROGERS in
“SAFETY IN NUMBERS”

Monday, July 28 — Tuesday, July 29

MATINEE MONDAY

“PARAMOUNT ON PARADE”

With MAURICE CHEVALIER, DENNIS KING,
LEON ERROL and dozens of other screen
and stage stars.

Wednesday, July 30 — Thursday, July 31
JACK OAKTE and JEANETTE McDONALD in
“LET’S GO NATIVE”

Friday, August 1

RONALD COLEMAN and ANN HARDING in
“CONDEMNED”

ALICE WHITE in
“SWEET MAMA”

The Collecting Net

Began Publication in 1926

BACK NUMBERS AND

VOLUMES

May be obtained by

addressing

The Collecting Net

WOODS. HOLE, MASS.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. No. 35 .

MONOBJECTIVE
BINOCULAR
MICROSCOPE

With readily interchangeable binocular
and monocular tubes

MICROSCOPE DSA-1

Stand DSA with simplified Mechanical Stage and
Quadruple Nosepiece; Condenser n.a. 1.2 with
Iris Diaphragm, Achromatic Objectives: 3 8 n. a.
0.20, 40 n.a. 0.65, 90 n.a. 1.25 (Oil Immersion).
Paired Huygens Oculars: 10x and 15x. Magni-
fications: 80x to 1350x.

Price $225 f. 0. b. N. Y.

MICROSCOPE DSA-2

Same stand as DSA-1, but with aplanatie con-
denser n.a. 14 and Apochromatic Objectives: 10
na. 0.39, 20 n.a. 0.65, 40 n.a. 0.95 and 90 n.a.
1.3 (Oil Immersion). Paired Compensating Ocu-
7x, 10x and 15x. Magnifications: 70x to

Price $400.50 f. a. b. N. Y.

A Selection of Zeiss Instruments will be
ON EXHIBITION
at Wocds Hole
July 21 — 31

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

JENA)

The .
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with eomplete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ieally, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographie Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight l-ineh slides
or thirty-two 14-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides.

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

te gaat

ie es

~
,
;
¥
§
.
‘
+
:'

aie

Juty 26, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 135

A NEW GLASS BLOWERS’ TABLE

SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR LABORATORY USE

6063-Al1

GLASS BLOWERS’ TABLE, Graham. Of quartered oak, with top covered with monolithic transite.
Dimensions, 54 inches long x 30 inches wide x 31 inches high. With two drawers for tools, a movable
rack 36 inches long and a wooden block with twelve 1l-inch holes for supporting tubing and finished
work. .

A slideway covered with monolithic transite, 24 inches long x 6% inehes wide, for holding the
burner, is placed in convenient position.

Designed for laboratory use in accordance with the suggestions of Mr. J. D. Graham, of the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, and other professional glass blowers.

Where adequate blast is not already available, we recommend the installation of No. 1037 Crowell
Air Blower mounted on base with motor, this unit having been selected especially for use with No.
2652-C Graham Glass Blowers’ Blast Burner, also reeommended for use with this table.
6063-A1l. Glass Blowers’ Table, Graham, complete as above described, but without burner shown

hal MMW SIMENMON, Soooeehsdodeoanoe

Meo tetens BAG Bate ree nti cite cin ee ree Phnut eit Nias ave eel ee : $135.00

WodemWior diets te seece clocks exc viesutne ALD a8 6 (Ee CELE eae enter ane Tefli
Accessory Apparatus

1037. Air Pump, Crowell Type 1-A Rotary, with a free air capacity of 6.9 cu. ft. per minute at
maximum speed, mounted on cast iron bedplat> connected by silent chain drive with 4
h. p. motor, 1725 r.p.m., for 110 volts, 60 cycles, a. ¢. (can be used on 220 volts a. ¢. when
terminals are properly connected). With air receiver 12 x 8 inches and pressure gauge
reading to 15 lbs. Floor space required, 21 x 14 inches ; 130.00
Code Word ..... eo Ate tee a ee Sa tray eae pene 8 ae ; Abytm

venient manipulation of Pyrex glass, but equally suitable for ordinary soda lime glass.
With four metal tips of various sizes, one finely perforated glass tip and two slip nozzles.
Requires a gas supply line of at least 34-inch diameter up to the %-inch bore hose connec-
tion for efficient operation. Complete, with detailed directions for use 3 30.00
Code Word SO a Recker AID ated nce ne P ; . Bucqa

Sole Distributors

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

136 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 35

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
FROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
livng organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is use! for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopie preparations, living organisms and inse ts for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examin? a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on imporiant features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopie preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera,

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in pelished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switeh for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Czav-Anpams Company
117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Vol. V. No. 6

THE LOW-VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OF THE
ACTION POTENTIAL WAVE OF NERVE
Dr. Wittiam R. AMBERSON

of Physiology, College of Medicine,

University of Tennessee

With ArTHUR K. PARPART AND GERTRUDE

SANDERS

It has long been recognized that the most strik-
ing physical event in the propagation of the
nerve impulse is a wave of

Professor

SATURDAY, AUGUST

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION,
StNGLF Copies 25 Crs.

2, 1930 $2.00

THE ACTION OF THE SEX HORMONES IN
THE FOWL

Dr. FRANK R. LILLIE

Professor of Embryology, University of Chicago

The subject of the talk tonight, the action of
the sex hormones in the fowl, is an ac-
count of the Chicago experiments. It is a subject
on which we have been work-

electrical potential change,
in which the active region of
the nerve becomes electrically
negative to inactive regions.
Records of this action poten-
tial wave, such as are given by
the string galvanometer, or
other rapid recording instru-

Evening Lecture.
associate
Cornell

M. B. LG. Calendar

TUESDAY, AUG. 5, 8:00 P. M.
Dr. E. F. DuBois,

professor of
Medical
Progress in the Field of Respira-
tory Metabolism.”

FRIDAY, AUG. 8, 8:00 P. M.

ing pretty steadily for the last
eight years. Papers have been
published in various places and
at various times but the ma-
terial has not been brought to-
gether. This is a sort of
comprehensive review of some
of these experiments for the

medicine,

College, “Recent

ments, show, as their most Evening Seminar. Helen M. Miller: Tuesday evening lectures.

obvious feature, a sudden “Life Cycle of a Bisexual Rotifer.” Moreover the subject of the

change in potential (8-15 Dr. Tracy M. Sonneborn: “Cause, | biology of sex is one that has
Inheritanee, and Effects of the

millivolts) which endures for

not been much studied here at

no more than two or three
thousandths of a second,
when the lead-off electrodes
are close to the stimulating
electrodes. The most accurate
records of the form of this

Chain-forming Tendency in the
Ciliate Protozoan, Colpidium.”

Dr. Ruth Stoeking Lynch: “The
Effects of Long-continued Starva-
tion in a Rotifer in Relation to
Inheritance.”

Dr. H. W. Stunkard: “The Life
History of Cryptocotyle lingua.”

Woods Hole, certainly not the
sex hormones. I do except the
chromosomes, but the sex hor-
mones at any rate have not
been studied here very much.
The subject is one of growing

most obvious feature of the

importance now that these sub-

action potential wave have

been secured through the use of the cathode ray

oscillograph (Erlanger, Gasser, Bishop, and their
(Continued on Page 141)

stances are being obtained in a
very highly purified chemical form. Thus there is
placed in our hands a very powerful new instru-
ment of research.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Low-Voltage Elements of the Action Po-
tential Wave of Nerve,
Professor William R. Amberson............ .. 137

The Action of the Sex Hormones in the ore

Professor Hramiky Re Waillieh cer eeectveerescesceecs-e =e 137
The All-or-None Law in Aineeuer Contractions,

Dr. 8S. Gelfan............ el a3)
The Eifect of Cyanides ara of Gannon io.

noxide on Nerve,

Drs Hnancrsis Osi Schmiitite eecsse. ects s-2s: 145

The Developmental Relations of the Heart and
oy er in Chorio-Allantoie Grafts,

B. H. Willier 147

A Nee Biologist Has Won Distinction - in “His
Field : eerng LAT,
Currents in the Hole...... DyiiSe eA eh eee LAS,
Directory Addendia............. Be TE Cs Oe oo Sees Lek
Editorial Page Disses = mene csanvene cee =, U5y0)
Chemical Room Service. CAS ECT COSC De eer eae eed)
Items of Interest n Devine LO

The A B C of Woods Hole. Podesta eegetee: eG?

138

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No? 36

The subject, then, is a physiological one. Now,
we cannot deal physiologically with any such
imaginary entity as sex. What we have to deal
with are sex characteristics which may be treated
individually, as for instance Mendelian character-
istics are. If all these separate characteristics are
conformable within the individual, that is of the
same sign, male or female, we can speak of the
sex of the individual as male or female. But, if
some of them are unconformable, we may have
varying degrees of intersexuality if they are in
succession, or gyandromorphism if they are simul-
taneous. When we use the terms * ‘determination of
sex” or “differentiation of sex’? we mean the
determination or differentiation of conformable
sex characteristics within the individual.

The relationship of the sex characteristics to the
life history is the same in principle as for other
characteristics. The zygote exhibits no sex char-
acteristics except those of the chromosome com-
plex and, in rare cases also, a difference in size.
‘Sex differences in characteristics of one sort or
another arise in a certain order or succession
which need not be the same for all species. But
in vertebrates they are commonly centered around
certain periods in embryonic development and the
period of puberty. Each character or organ has
its male form and its female form which is neces-
sarily preceded by a common basis, that is to say,
a segregate or embryonic primordium which ex-
ists in both sexes. I take it as an axiom that all
zygotes of a species develop the same segregates
or primordia. Sex differentiation consists in the
realization of the male form or the female form of
differentiation of the segregates or primordia of
sexually dimorphic characters and organs.

These generalizations may serve to illustrate
the point of view of the experiments in fowls that
we have been carrying on, as I have said, in the
Whitman Laboratory of Experimental Zoology in
Chicago for the past eight years, and the review
will be confined quite largely to our own experi-
ments. But these experiments touch a sufficiently
large number of topics within this field to be
fairly representative of the whole. In the expert-
ments with which we began, surgical methods were
used entirely. That is to say, the operations of
castration, or ovariotomy, or of transplantation of
the gonads. In the later experiments chemical
methods were followed, that is, injection of the
male and the female hormones into various classes
of birds, either normals or castrates. The first
experiments were carried out by Dr. L. V. Domm,
Dr. Mary Juhn, and other collaborators. In the
experiments with chemically prepared hormones
we have had the co-operation of the department
of Physiological eke of the University of
Chicago : Dr. F. Koch for the male hormone
and owe R. G. eaues son for the female hormone,
and their several assistants, L. C. McGee, T. F.

Gallagher and others. I am going to use the bio-
logical terms “male and female hormone’’ be-
cause the exact chemical nature of these biologi-
cally active substances is still unknown.

The surgical experiments will be reviewed
briefly as they are older and presumably better
known. They are, however, the indispensable
basis for understanding results of the hormone
injection.

It would take too long to review the historical
setting of our experiments. The names and the
work of Berthold, Goodale, Morgan, Nonidez,
Peézard, Caridroit, Crew and M. M. Zawidowsky
will occur to all who are familiar with the sub-
ject.

The sex characteristics of the fowls with
which we are dealing may be divided into two
classes, as noted particularly by M. M. Zawidow-
sky and also by other investigators, namely, those
characteristics that are dependent for their ex-
pression on the presence of the gonads and those
that are highly independent and which therefore
appear in the castrate of either sex. The inde-
pendent sex characteristics of the male are the
plumage and the spurs, which, curiously, are
among the most pronounced sex characteristics of
the breed with which we deal. But the other
sex characteristics of the male are gonad-depend-
ent. In the female there are no independent sex
characteristics: all of the sex characteristics, in-
cluding the plumage and the rudimentary condition
of the spurs, are dependent upon the presence
of the gonads for the typical sex expression. We
shall have a good deal to say about plumage char-
acteristics and so it is well to note carefully that
the development of the feather may be treated
for our purposes as entirely independent of the
male hormone, but as influenced profoundly in
the main feather tracts by the female hormone.

(A series of thirty lantern slides was then
shown illustrating the sex characters of the nor-
mal cock and hen of the brown leghorn breed
and the results of the surgical and chemical ex-
periments on this breed of fowl. The principal
points of the running discussion were as follows) :

I. THE SURGICAL EXPERIMENTS

1. Bilateral ovariotomy. Domm was the first
to perform this operation. In a large number of
operations he finds that the gonadless female
(poularde) has all the characters of the capon:
diminished head furnishings, male type of plum-
age, spurs, indifferent sexless behavior, etc. The
only differences are the presence of a rudimentary
oviduct in the poularde, and somewhat lesser sta-
ture and weight.

Lipschutz and Zawidowsky based a theory of
equipotency of the male and female soma on
similar, but less complete facts. We find this
theory confirmed by this and the following ex-
periments in all respect: that seem essential. The

ey

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING

NET 139

differences in the genetic constitution of the male
and female are not effective in the determination of
somatic sex characteristics after the sex en-
docrine constitution of the individual is de-
termined. The segregates and primordia of sex-
characters and organs appear to be bipotential in
either sex, and this is experimentally proven for
most of them.

2. Sinistral ovariotomy. This experiment has
been performed by a considerable number of in-
vestigators, but on much the largest scale by
Domm. Following this operation the rudimen-
tary gonad on the right side grows to a consider-
able size. It usually forms an organ that is ana-
tomically and histologically like a sterile testis. It
has, however, a variable embryonic foundation
(Brode) ; and corresponding to relatively infre-
quent embryonic variations it may form an ovo-
testis or even a typical ovary. The somatic char-
acters of the individual follow the endocrine com-
position of the hypertrophied right gonad. In the
usual case the individual acquires all the somatic
characters of an adult male more or less complete-
ly: head-furnishings, plumage, spurs and sex-be-
havior. The oviduct regresses and the rudimen-
tary Wolffian ducts of the female may become
quite typical vasa deferrentia.

If such birds are allowed to live they sooner or
later become more or less completely hen-feath-
ered, while retaining all other male characteris-
tics. Gray’s study (in press) renders it extremely
probably that this result is due to a re-activation
of the germinal epithelium which proliferates fe-
male endocrine cells. The bird thus becomes an
endocrine hermaphrodite.

3. Spermatogenesis in the female. A certain
percentage of birds (roughly about 10%) that
have had the left ovary removed at an early age
(before about five weeks after hatching) exhibit
complete spermatogenesis in scattered tubules of
the hypertrophied right gonad. This never occurs
in our experience in birds sinistrally ovariotom-
ized after three months of age. Brode has ob-
served that scattered primordial germ cells are
present in the medulla of the right ovary of em-
bryo chicks, but that they begin to degenerate at
about three weeks after hatching, and are soon
entirely gone.

These observations lead us to the conclusion
that the spermatogenesis observed is due to sur-
viving primordial germ-cells; and to the further
conclusion that primordial germ-cells of the fe-
male developing in the medulla undergo spermato-
genesis, but in the cortex of the ovary ovogenesis.
Whether the spermatogenesis is accompanied by
chromosome regulation or not we do not know.

From the surgical experiments we deduce as a
theory the existence of two kinds of sex-hor-
mones. Further that the male gonad produces

only male hormone, whereas the ovary produces

both, though under normal conditions the produc-

tion of male hormone is almost totally suppressed.

The chemical experiments bring substantially defi-

nitive proof of this theory, and extend our knowl-

edge of hormonic action in important respects.
I. THE CHEMICAL EXPERIMENTS

1. The male hormone was first isolated in a
biologically active form in the Department of
Physiological Chemistry of the University of
Chicago by F. C. Koch, L. C. McGee and T. F.
Gallagher. They have co-operated in our work,
and the capon is now the test object for standardi-
zation of the male hormone by growth of the comb
induced by injections. The source of the hor-
mone was at first bulls’ testes and lately human
mate urine. The solid content of the daily minimal
dose for the capon is as low as 0.01 mg. in the
latest preparations which are perfectly non-toxic.
The experiments on the extraction of the male
hormone are not yet carried to the point where we
can say that only a single effective substance is
present, though this seems probable. Apart from
the comb reaction, which is very definite and speci-
fic, the work with the male hormone on birds has
not so far proved as interesting as in Moore’s ex-
periments with the same preparations on rats and
guinea pigs. In these animals all the male char-
acters that are lost by castration can be reinstated
by the injections. In the brown leghorn fowl the
effect of the male hormone on plumage may be
treated as negligible for the purpose of our dis-
cussion.

2. The female hormone yields results of more
immediate interest in the brown leghorn fowl on
account of its effect upon the most diversified sex
equipment, the plumage. The female hormone
used in our experiments was prepared by R. G.
Gustavson and assistants from human placenta or
human pregnancy urine. The preparations were
highly purified and non-toxic, but in the experi-
ments recorded the crystalline product obtained by
Gustavson as well as by other experimenters re-
cently was not used. It is, however, interesting
to note in passing that 0.0002 mg. of the crystal-
line product may produce the oestrous cycle in
rats. Thayer, Veler and Doisy have recently an-
nounced the empiric formula CsH2302 for the
crystalline substance. The experiments with the
female hormone described below were performed
by Dr. Mary Juhn and Dr. Gwendolin Faulkner
with the advice of Dr. Gustavson and myself.
Parts of the results are not yet published else-
where.

The preparations used caused precocious ma-
turity of the oviducts of immature pullets in a
dosage of thirty rat units per day for ten days.

The effect on regenerating feathers of capons
was tested by variable injected doses. It was
found that in all the feather tracts tested, the male

140

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vo. V. No. 36

form and pigmentation of the capon feathers were
replaced by the female form and pigmentation if
adequate dosage of the female hormone was giv-
en. Extracts of other kinds similarly prepared do
not produce this effect, nor does thyroid feeding.
In these experiments it was found that the thres-
hold of reaction for the hormone effect was dif-
ferent in different feather tracts. Other experi-
ments demonstrated that the more slowly growing
feather tracts would react at a lower dosage than
the more rapidly growing feather tracts, and in
general that there was a proportional relation for
the feather reaction between rate of growth of
the feather and concentration of the hormone in
the blood.

The rate of growth of feather tracts is in the
order back, saddlé, anterior breast, posterior
breast. Correspondingly increasing dosages of
the female hormone are required to produce the
female type of feather in these feather tracts of
capons.

The hormone is rapidly excreted and disappears
from the blood, so far as feather tests reveal its
presence, in less than three days after cessation
of injections. During excretion the hormone
thresholds are successively passed in the reverse
order, after cessation of injections. The grow-
ing feathers then revert to the male or capon type
in the order posterior breast, anterior breast, sad-
dle, back. If one day’s injection in seven is
omitted, as in the first experiments performed,
the posterior breast feathers exhibit a male band
across the otherwise female feather for each such
omission. If intermittent injections are given, e.
g., three days on followed by three days off, say
twice repeated with adequate doses, in the first
three days the concentration of hormone in the
blood is rising, and the threshold of reaction for
the tracts of different growth rates is successively
passed beginning with the slowest; in the second
three days the concentration of the hormone is
falling and the thresholds are successively passed
in inverse order. The second cycle repeats this.

From such data a curve can be derived repre-
senting the rise and fall of effective concentra-
tion of the female hormone. If the ordinates be
plotted from cubes of linear growth rates of the
various feather tracts to represent threshold
values of female reaction of feather germs in
these tracts, the abscissae representing days,
the space within the ascending and descending
limbs of the curve will represent the female re-
action for all feather tracts, and the distance be-
tween the limbs at appropriate levels will repre-
sent the relative length of the developed feather
exhibiting the female form and pigment. Such
a curve represents very well the measured data.

Repeated cycles of interrupted injections pro-
duce barring of feathers with alternate male and
female pattern and pigment, the variations of

which, in different tracts, with respect to presence
or absence and varying widths of male and female
bars are dependent on dosage and the relative
growth rates.

The variations in growth rate in the various
feather tracts described above apply only to the
cock and to the capon. In the relatively uniform
plumage of the female the growth rates of the
feathers are surprisingly uniform in the same
tracts. In the anterior and posterior parts of the
breast the growth is much more rapid in the male
or capon than in the female; but in the back and
saddle it is much less rapid. It is interesting to
notice that injection of the female hormone ap-
proximates the rate of growth as well as the form
and pattern, to that of the female. Thus the
female hormone increases growth rate in the re-
generating feathers of back and saddle, but dimin-
ishes it in the breast.

The principle of variable thresholds for the
same hormone in different parts or organs of the
individual is one that may be of considerable bio-
logical significance. It is to be noted that in the
normal female the production of the female hor-
mone and its concentration in the blood must be
kept at the maximum threshold. How is this regu-
lated?

The hormones used in these experiments are of
mammalian or human derivation. They are as ef-
fective in the bird as in the rat or guinea pig.
They are certainly of very simple chemical com-
position. They are thus in no sense species-speci-
fic. Neither are they tissue- or organ-specific. For
they affect, or “‘determine,” tissues and organs of
the greatest anatomical diversity: feathers, comb,
spurs, oviduct, for instance. They are on the other
hand, system-specific both in birds and mammals,
that is their effects are specifically evident in the
entire complex of parts related to sex. The sys-
tem that they affect is a biological, not a physico-
chemical, system, in the sense that its defining
characteristics are purely biological.

CONCLUDING REMARKS

If you will allow me, I shall generalize some
of the principles established by these experiments.

The same embryonic segregates and organ pri-
mordia (substrata) are formed in both male de-
termined and female determined zygotes: The
general possibilities, and, frequently at least, the
most special possibilities of development are the
same for both kinds of zygotes.

Whether the differentiation of any sex-char-
acter is mediated by genes directly, or by hor-
mones, it is always a question of realization of al-
ternate, i. e. male or female, forms of behavior
of the same things (segregates and primordia),
e. g. primordial germ-cells, gonads, genital sub-
sidiary characters, somatic secondary sex-char-
acters, etc.

The decision concerning form of realization oc-

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

141

curs always in response to alternate conditions
(genes male and female, hormones male and fe-
male, and in some cases probably to extra-organic
conditions.) There are only two sexes, and only
two modes of expression of any sex-character,
with their intermediates (mosaics and inter-gra-
dations. )

In the birds the genic differences between the
sexes are inadequate to induce sex-differentiation
of any characters, as shown by the essential
similarity of castrates of both sexes, except for
the primary sex-endocrine differentiation, which
we must logically attribute to genetic factors act-
ing as determiners. The mechanism of control of
the differentiation of sex-characters has been tak-
en over in the fowl by two simple chemical sub-
stances, the male and female sex hormones, which
are apparently identical in birds and mammals,
and possibly throughout the vertebrate phylum.

If we compare insects and vertebrates respec-
tively, we note agreement with respect to the prin-

ciple of the genetic determination of sex (one sex
homogametic and the other heterogametic), and
also with respect to all modes of operation of
sexual functions (gametes, gonads, genital sub-
sidiary, somatic secondary, etc.) The differences
are with respect to the dependence of differentia-:
tion of sex-characters on genetic constitution alone
in insects, in contrast to a relative independence of
genetic constitution and dependence on the two
sex-hormones in vertebrates.

The general bearing of this is that all characters
are more fundamental than the method of their de-
termination. The sex genes and the sex hormones
are mechanisms of selection of alternate possibili-
ties which exist in pairs for each sex character.

Our problems as physiologists are limited to the
means of control of the dimorphism of the sexes
as it exists. What lies beyond this is a problem
in evolution. Sex-differentiation has arisen in
the course of evolution; for the physiologist its
various forms are given as irreducible facts.

THE LOW-VOLTAGE ELEMENTS OF THE ACTION POTENTIAL WAVE OF NERVE

(Continued from Page 137)

collaborators) which has shown that the action po-
tential wave in mixed nerves is really compound,
since, when the lead-off electrodes are at some
distance from the stimulating electrodes, the
wave shows three or more maxima, due to the
presence of action potentials in various groups of
nerve fibers conducting at different rates. Even
at the longer conducted distances, however, this
potential does not spread out over more than five
or six thousandths of a second. The oscillograph
has recently shown, that, with very strong stim-
uli, other fiber groups of high threshold may be
excited, in which conduction is very much slower.
Such fibers are not usually excited by the stimuli
ordinarily employed in nerve work, and are be-
lieved not to have been active in the study here
reported.

In addition to these more obvious components
of the action potential wave, to which we may
refer, collectively, as the “high-voltage phase,”
it has recently been recognized that there exists
another phase which immediately follows it. In
this phase the voltage is so low that it cannot be
detected in most records, but the potential en-
dures for so long a time that the total quantity
of electricity discharged by it may be much great-
er than that given by the high voltage phase alone.
This element of the action potential wave may be
spoken of as the “low-voltage phase.” It has also
been variously described as the “retention”
(Levin) the “delayed potential” (Gerard) and the
“after-potential,’ (Gasser and Erlanger.) It
usually consists of several components, and in the
single wave typically shows a period of negativity

immediately succeeding the high voltage phase,
which is later followed by an “after-positivity” of
very low voltage (20-40 microvolts) which may
persist for seconds. The latter is believed by
some workers to be an artifact. After multiple
stimulation an “‘after-positivity’” may persist for
minutes. (Gerard).

The work here reported deals especially with
the negative component of the low voltage phase,
as it occurs in the sciatic nerve of the bull-frog.
The study has been made by the use of a sensi-
tive Downing moving-magnet galvanometer. This
instrument was specially constructed for this
work by Mr. Downing, of University College,
London, and set up by him in our laboratory at
the University of Pennsylvania; the results ob-
tained are very largely due to his technical skill
in the construction of a very sensitive but stable
instrument. We have operated at a sensitivity of
70-80 cm. per millivolt. This high sensitivity is
entirely in the galvanometer; no amplification
system has been used.

In earlier work done at University College, Mr.
Downing and I were able to detect the presence
of the two components of the low-voltage phase
in a roughly qualitative manner from photogra-
phic records of the galvanometer deflection. In
the present work we have developed a method of
direct analysis, in which the time-relations of the
distribution of potential have been determined
more exactly in a semi-quantitative manner. The
principle involved in this direct analysis is very
simple and very old. In all essentials it was used
long ago (1869) by Bernstein in his classical

142

studies of the time relations of the high voltage
phase, made with his differential rheotome. In
our own work the analysis depends upon the use
of a pendulum which, in its.swing, opens two or
three keys whose position with respect to each
other may be varied. In the analysis of the single
action potential wave two keys only are used. The
opening of the first key stimulates the nerve, the
opening of the second key breaks the galvano-
meter circuit. Into this circuit the action poten-
tial discharges through lead-off electrodes placed
at some distance (45 mm.) from the stimulating
electrodes. Only that position of the whole wave
which is generated within the period between the
opening of the two keys is able to pass into the
galvanometer. By increasing the time during
which the galvanometer circuit remains closed
more and more of the wave is allowed to dis-
charge. Within the ballistic period of the instru-
ment (.3 sec.) the maximal deflections secured
in such a series of readings are comparable, and
give, by difference, a measure of the electrical
discharge in successive periods of time. Suitable
calibration readings, done with known potentials
for known times give data for the evaluation of
the voltages of the various phases of the action
potential wave. By the use of three keys, two of
which give stimulation, analysis may be made of
two waves following each other at a short inter-
val.

The results of this study by direct analysis may
be summarized as follows:

(1) In nerve which has been long inactive
the low voltage phase is much reduced, and may
even be absent. After activation by a series of
repetitive stimuli the high voltage phase is little
affected but the low voltage phase becomes highly
developed. In each single wave the negative com-
ponent becomes very prominent, so that the maxi-
mal deflection of the galvanometer is greatly in-
creased. In extreme cases this component of the
low voltage phase may now discharge ten times
as much electricity as the high voltage phase, the
potential enduring for half a second or more, but
never rising above half a millivolt in value.
Ratios of 3 or 4 to 1 are more common. The
magnitude of this phase may be much further
increased by application of low tensions of COs.

This factor of activity is so important that we
have routinely taken all readings on the single
wave within two minutes after a half minute per-

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. No. 36

iod of multiple stimulation. When this factor is
carefully controlled the analyses are extremely
consistent ; duplicate readings check closely.

(2) The low-voltage phase is well developed
at temperatures between 12° and 20° C. At high-
er temperatures there is some reduction in mag-
nitude. Below 10° C it is much diminished, and has
practically disappeared at 5° C.

(3) In oxygen lack the low voltage phase,
after some preliminary fluctuations, always dis-
appears long before the extinction of the high
voltage phase. Upon the re-admission of air the
low voltage phase reappears within a few minutes
and usually becomes very powerfully developed,
rising to magnitudes far above those previously
obtained from the same preparation. The high
voltage phase, as Heinbecker has previously
found, shows no such post-asphyxial overshoot,
but returns to, or nearly to, its original value.

(4) When two action potential waves fol-
low each other at an interval of one hundredth of
a second the high voltage phases of both waves
appear without diminution, but the low voltage
phases are diminished, so that the total discharge
from both waves together is less than double that
given by one wave alone. The low voltage ele-
ments of the two waves appear to interfere with
each other in such a manner that one or both is
reduced in amount.

We have, therefore, electrical evidence for the
existence of two separate processes in nerve
activity. The high voltage phase is the electrical
sign of a process which is relatively slightly af-
fected by changes in the physical and physiologi-
cal conditions, and which is relatively anaerobic in
character. The low voltage phase is the electrical
sign of a second process which is much more
fluctuating in character, being relatively aerobic,
sensitively related to changes in O2 and COz ten-
sion, temperature, activity, and probably many
other factors. The behavior of this second pro-
cess, during and after oxygen lack, may be re-
lated with the observation, in respiratory studies,
of an anaerobic oxygen debt. (Gerard, Fenn).
We may tentatively conclude that the second pro-
cess is restorative in nature, and that it is identical
with the mechanism responsible for the recovery
heat.

A summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on July 25.

DISCUSSION

_ Dr. Ralph Lillie: Is there any evidence of posi-
tive variation ?

Dr. Amberson: We were considering only the
negative component of the low-voltage phase. The
positive phase which comes later, is also present,
but we found it impossible to analyze it although
it is almost always visible in a photographic record
showing the whole wave.

Dr. Monnier: Recent work by Dr. Gasser and,

Dr. Erlanger on the ending of the axon action
potential shows that it is very difficult to obtain
an absolute monophasic action potential. Though
one end of the nerve is killed the action potential
is always slightly diphasic. Such diphasicity be-
comes important in the delayed part of the action
current and high magnification demonstrates it
decidedly. Instead of being continuously nega-
tive, as it is really, the delayed part of the action

-

pee Od Bor

at -

GO ALE A ICE AP to tel EC

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

143

potential goes through the base line and shows a
certain positivity. I believe that Dr. Amberson’s
general results are not only correct but would un-
doubtedly appear magnified if such work were to
be done again with a cathode ray oscillograph.

Dr. Amberson: In the case of these analyses
we are not permitting the after-positivity to mani-
fest itself. Certainly in the first blocks of the
analysis itself the circuit is opened before the
after-positivity is manifest. Actually in these
cases in which we have deliberately exaggerated
the low-voltage phase by stimulation, the after-
positivity comes in so late, at a distance of .5 to 1
second, that it is not able to produce any effect.
At present our results are minimized not by the
after-positivity but by the fact that toward the
end of the analysis we operate beyond the ballistic
period of the instrument.

Dr. Bishop: lf the nerve is diphasic then really
both the high-voltage phases and low-voltage
phases will be diphasic and the negative potential
would be doubly diphasic, and on a slow galvano-
meter would seem smaller than it really is. Then
if any procedure affects the two potentials differ-
ently, this difference will also be observed by the
diphasicity. I think Dr. Monnier’s argument is
that Dr. Amberson’s method does not differentiate
between the two potentials sufficiently.

Dr. Amberson: I misunderstood Dr. Monnier’s
suggestion.

Dr. Monnier: It seems to me that Dr. Amber-
son’s method only minimizes the real size of the
phenomena observed.

THE ALL-OR-NONE LAW IN

Dr. Amberson: I quite agree if you are re-
ferring to the diphasic effect.

Dr. Gerard: The suggestion about delayed po-
tential representing recovery brings up an im-
portant question. When earlier work concerning
delayed effects first appeared, it seemed to me
along with delayed heat production there was a
continued elaboration of energy. That type of
work was carried out more exactly by Levine with
a group of nerves in which it seemed quite definite-
ly that the persistence of potential represented
not the process of recovery, but the failure to re-
cover. A good many other facts about the rela-
tions of these different phenomena in nerve all
point in the same direction. The facts that Dr.
Amberson has brought out are distinctly con-
trary however. First of all, let us consider the
influence of temperature. Temperature and slow
recovery processes should further prolong the af-
ter-potential ,whereas, as a matter of fact, accord-
ing to these experiments it shortens it. The other
rather more distressing finding is the effect of
nitrogen gas. I found in a similar study that the
delayed potentials were progressively increased
during the time the nerve was in nitrogen. I must
admit that Dr. Amberson’s method of study is
much more direct than the one I used and I can see
no fault whatever in his explanations. My meth-
od was much less direct. Unfortunately I can
see no defect with that at the moment. There is
certainly a very real and critical problem as to the
exact significance of these delayed potentials in
nerve.

MUSCULAR CONTRACTIONS!

Dr. S. GELFAN
Research Fellow in Physiology, University of Chicago

According to the all-or-none law, the response
of a single muscle fibre is independent of the
stimulus intensity, and dependent only upon the
initial physiological and mechanical conditions
which obtain in the muscle. That single fibres are
capable of sub-maximal contractions, and that
graded unit responses may be elicited by varying
strengths of stimuli, I have already demonstrated
for the musculature of the retrolingual membrane
(membrana basihyoidea) of the frog. These ex-
periments have been repeated and the results con-
firmed by Pratt.

The capacity for graded responses is not a
characteristic of the retrolingual membrane only.
Similar experiments were performed on the cur-
arized frog’s sartorius muscle, in sitw and with
normal circulation. In this skeletal muscle also,
records have been obtained showing graded con-
tractions in response to graded strength of stimu-
lation. Brown and Sichel’s recent work, in which
the isometric twitches of a single excised sartorius
fibre were recorded, similarly shows graded re-
sponses.

In the fresh and uninjured muscle sub-maxi-
mal responses can, as a rule, only be evoked when
the stimulus is localized to a single fibre and with
micro-electrodes that do not exceed a certain size.
The micro-electrode must also be in close contact
with the fibre, and the strength of stimulus deli-
cately graded. Under these conditions, there is
no difficulty in producing sub-maximal contrac-
tions, and we must conclude, therefore, that the
contractile mechanism is of such a nature as to
permit graded responses, and that it is not inde-
pendent of the stimulus intensity. In this respect,
the all-or-none law for muscle is no longer valid.
The previous work on muscle with direct stimula-
tion, in which the law was found to hold, can be
explained as due to diffuse stimulation. With
indirect stimulation, if the all-or-none law is valid
for nerve, as most of the evidence indicates to be
the case, only maximal responses would be pro-
duced since the nervous impulse discharged to the
muscle fibre is always all-or-nothing.

The work completed in the laboratory at Woods
Hole by Dr. Gerard and myself, strongly suggests

144

the possibility that the conductile mechanisms
may be distinct from the contractile one. Using
low enough magnification so that most of the
length of a fibre from the retrolingual membrane
could be observed under the microscope, we found
that the spread of contraction from the point that
is excited by the electrode, as the strength of
stimulus increased, is not continuous to the very
end of the fibre, but only up to a certain point. As
the stimulus intensity is then further increased
the entire fibre responds maximally. This may be
explained by assuming that in the sub-maximal

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. V. No. 36

responses the contractile mechanism is directly
stimulated without initiating the conducted re-
sponse. When the threshold for the latter me-
chanism is reached the entire fibre responds
maximally. Though graded responses are char-
acteristic of the contractile mechanism, the all-or-
none law may still be postulated for the con-
ductile or transmissive one, and when maximal
contractions are obtained it is by virtue of the
operation of the conductile mechanisms.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on July 25.

DISCUSSION

Dr. Garrey: Those of you who know the his-
tory of the All-or-None Law as applied to muscu-
lar contraction know that it was first demonstrat-
ed by Dr. Bowditch of Boston. Another man,
also of Boston, Dr. Pratt, has further demonstrat-
ed this same law. I am going to ask him to open
the discussion.

Dr, Pratt: One particularly interesting applica-
tion of the All-or-None Law is in reference to
the behavior of the nerve and muscle fibers in the
ordinary integrated activities of the body. It
became very necessary to make sure about this
point after Lucas demonstrated discontinuous
muscle contractions in the presence of changes
in gradations of stimuli. In taking up experi-
ments designed to examine this question I used
for several years the method of stimulating sarto-
rius muscle which was apparently the very best
method for avoiding the graded phenomena in
muscle fibers such as Dr. Gelfan has himself dis-
covered. J used a very fine electrode, a liquid
electrode inside a glass tube which was drawn
out at the end in such a way that the lumen had
access to the tissue through a small hole. This
pore was about the diameter of a human red blood
corpuscle. This was applied to the fascia which
overlies the sartorius. The latter was used as a
terminal for the nonpolarized system. “Eeisenberg
and I worked for several years and got thousands
of contractions of single sartorius fibers in re-
sponse to graded stimuli, and in every case we
were able to confirm Lucas’ findings, namely that
there was a series of contractions occurring in
steps. There was either maximal contraction or
nothing at all. Two years ago two workers in
Prague, Fisch! and Kahn, resurrected a very
wonderful preparation. It was used first by
Richard Thoma in 1873. This preparation is that
of the retrolingual membrane which is on the
tongue of the frog. The tongue of the frog is
unique in that it is fastened only at the anterior
extremity of the lower jaw. The retro-lingual
membrane lies on the ventral surface of the
tongue and consists of a superficial layer of cili-
ated epithelium, beneath which is connective tissue

and endothelium, the lining of the underlying
lymph space. There migrate into this membrane
tongue muscle fibers which radiate through the
membrane and become entirely separated in many
cases so that they may be stimulated individually.
Thoma used this membrane for the study of the
migration of the leucocytes. Fischl and Kahn
used this preparation for stimulating the mem-
brane itself and also the nerve with graded stimuli
and they claimed to get graded contractions. It
seemed to me that they were not getting true
single fiber contractions but were dealing with the
ordinary coming in of whole muscle-fiber units in
the production of a step-like graded series. So
I took up this problem with the purpose of apply-
ing the former method of stimulation used in the
sartorius. We found it to be the very best prepa-
ration for demonstrating the all-or-none contrac-
tion of single muscle fibers and made a number of
very satisfactory step-like records which were
perfectly typical of what Lucas and I had pre-
viously found. It seems that Dr. Gelfan during
all this time had also been working on that same
membrane by the extremely concentrated stimula-
tion of micro-electrodes and it appeared from his
demonstrations that he had found the very best
preparation for demonstrating graded contrac-
tions for single muscle fibers. We got together
and he made a very satisfactory record with my
machine and still got the graded contractions. So
we know now that individual skeletal muscle
fibers are capable of graded contractions. It
seems to me that injury or fatigue has a great
deal to do with eliciting this type of contraction.
We set to work to verify Dr. Gelfan’s findings
and were able to do so in every respect so that
this is a question of an exceedingly interesting ma-
terial responding to stimuli possibly of a localized
decremental nature, and on the other hand ma-
terial which shows a very marked tendency to re-
spond maximally or not at all to any ordinary
kind of stimulation applied to a single muscle
fiber only. The question of nerve as a stimulus
of muscle comes in here in a very interesting way.
Can we get a subnormal impulse? I think the way

Aucust 2, 1930 |

of getting it is to lower the threshold of the mus-
cle. Use advanced fatigue, use curare, use
anaesthesia; lower the muscle threshold. That
we have tried in a very satisfactory way because
we have found the nerve fibers that Thoma men-
tioned and have been able to get in certain prepa-
ration not only the nerves entering the membrane
but the ramifications of these nerves and the
terminal nerve strands. It is best to stimulate
with a fine electrode a single nerve fiber. Under
no circumstances so far has it been possible to
- get submaximal contraction of a single muscle
fiber no matter how great the injury or fatigue.
- Iam in hearty agreement with Dr. Gelfan in his
results on the intensive stimulation of muscle
fiber.

Dr. Mathews: Vd like to ask a question. Mc-
Kenzie criticized the All-or-None Law by saying
that it holds for artificial stimulation of the nerve,
but he was also of the opinion that it did not hold
for the natural stimulation which the nervous
system itself supplies. I'd like to ask Dr. Pratt
or Dr. Gelfan if they have any information on
that subject. Have either of these gentlemen
tried new experiments with natural stimuli?

Dr. Pratt: This has not been tried in our
laboratory. I feel that if the nerve can produce
graded contractions in the individual muscle fiber,
this is probably due to neuro-fibrillae having a
separate jurisdiction.

Dr. Bishop: There are two phenomena in
muscle that maybe considered. One is that pre-
sented by Dr. Graham. If you anaesthetize a
muscle to a certain concentration the threshold
suddenly arises. At this time conduction stops.
At the same time contraction is slightly longer

THE COLLECTING NET

145

lasting and lowered, but still goes on. You will
get contraction without conduction in anaesthe-
tized muscle. Another phenomenon is the so-
called idiopathic contraction which is caused by a
galvanic current of long duration but low intensity.
If you stimulate long enough and cause it to re-
spond weakly it will continue in contraction as
long as the current is on without conduction. I
wonder if Dr. Gelfan has tried stimulating the
muscle with galvanic current and whether the
duration of muscle fiber contraction is propor-
uonal to the duration of the current.

Dr. Gelfan: No, I have not tried that form
of stimulation but perhaps it is of interest to men-
tion that the fiber can be stimulated mechanically
by piercing the sarcolemma. It goes to maximal
contracture for a brief time, then relaxation. As
a rule only maximal contractions are observed.
Assuming transmission to be a surface phenome-
non, we have here stimulation by injuring the sur-
face membrane, analogous to the scraping of the
passive iron wire model. Relaxation comes when
the injury is repaired by the formation of a new
film.

Dr. Gerard: To answer Dr. Mathews a little
more fully: If we accept the idea of the nerve
impulse as being anything like a propagated dis-
turbance depending only on the nerve along which
it passes, then of course the nerve impulse reach-
ing the muscle is the normal stimulus to it and it
does give regularly an all-or-none response. The
artificial electrical stimulus, on the other hand,
can lead to graded contractions. I should say the
answer to the question is exactly the reverse. It is
a case of graded response only to an artificial
stimulus.

THE EFFECT OF CYANIDES AND OF CARBON MONOXIDE ON NERVE!
Dr. Francis O. Scumitt
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Washington University

The object of the present experiments is to
approach to a clearer understanding of the chemi-
cal processes which cause and accompany the pro-
pagation of the impulse in nerve. For this pur-
pose I am working along two quite distinct lines
of research: First, that of metabolism of nerves;
and secondly, the measuring of the electric poten-
tial of nerves. It is my hope to bring these two
methods together to yield results unobtainable
perhaps by either method separately. Indeed,
some progress has already been made in this di-
rection. I refer to the fact that it is now possible
in our hands to obtain oscillographic records of
the action potential from nerves whilst measuring
simultaneously their metabolism manometrically.

It seems quite clear from classical electrical
researches on nerves as well as from recent meta-
bolic researches and the Lillie theory of nerve

action that the propagated disturbance is followed
by, and doubtless also accompanied and perhaps
caused by certain phenomena of oxidation. Hence
it became our problem to determine whether or not
the propagation of the action potential was actually
an oxidation. For such a fundamental research
we have turned to the theory of Warburg as be-
ing the most promising experimentally.

Warburg believes to have shown that the res-
piratory enzyme is an iron-containing, hemin-like
substance which can be poisoned by HCN, HeS,
and CO. Neither Warburg nor his collaborators
have ever worked on nerve, however. Hence it be-
came our task first to see whether nerve behaved
towards these poisons as did Warburg’s yeast. I
shall describe each substance separately as to its
effect on metabolism and as to its effect on the
action potential. The work with nerve-muscle

146

preparations was done with Miss B. Monaghan
as concerns cyanides, and with Mr. L. V. Beck
as concerns CO + HS.

To be very brief I find that cyanides may in-
hibit nerve very completely. If the solution is a
dilute one, e. g. N/1000 NaCN, the inhibition is
complete only for an hour or so. Then the inhibi-
tion rapidly wears away and becomes small. The
more concentrated the cyanide solution, the long-
er it takes for this initial inhibition to wear off;
but in solution as strong as N/10 NaCN the in-
hibition is practically constant and amounts to
80-95%. This escape of inhibition is doubtless
due to the expulsion of HCN from the inner fibers
by lactic acid as a result of the anoxemia_pro-
duced, since lactic acid is stronger than HCN by
some six orders.

Using a special chamber and nerve-muscle
preparations stimulated by condenser discharges,
the effect of cyanides on the impulse was studied.
It was found that in air, the threshold is unaffect-
ed by quite strong solutions of cyanide even after
many hours. This can perhaps be explained by
our manometric experiments. In the first hour or
so the nerves are really anoxemic and if this con-
dition continues would stop conduction. But after
a short period of anoxemia the lactic acid piled up
suffices to drive all HCN from the nerve, it
escapes from inhibition, and no effect is noticed
on the threshold. In eight out of eleven cases
cyanided nerves, after having been partially or
completely asphyxiated in nitrogen failed to re-
cover when air was admitted but recovered rapidly
when Ringer was substituted for the cyanide. It
must be remembered that a threshold method was
used and that conduction in a few inner fibers
may have sufficed to produce the muscle contrac-
tions observed.

HS was found by the threshold method to
render the nerve non-irritable in several hours, an
effect which was only occasionally reversible.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 36

Metabolic experiments with CO showed inhi-
bition of respiration varying from 20 to 70% de-
pending on the purity of CO. The constant
n/l-n x CO/Oz = K of Warburg was found to
be in agreement with 10 as found by him. It was
also shown that light causes a decrease of this
CO inhibition which ends abruptly with the ilwm-
ination. So far I have not succeeded in demon-
strating an excess Oy of stimulation in CO mix-
tures.

By far the most striking and important results
were obtained when the action potential was
studied in CO. In mixtures containing from
1-3% Ov» in CO it was found that the height of
the action potential decreased progressively to ex-
tinction; this decrease being faster than a similar
percentage of Oy in Ny. If during this decline in
CO the nerve be illuminated with light from a
20-25 ampere are giving a maximum in the
region of 4000 A. U. predominantly, the height
of the action potential rises immediately and con-
tinues rising often almost to complete recovery.
An important point to note is that the potential
does not drop immediately after the illumination
is stopped but returns to the original curve only
after 20-30 minutes. That this effect is not one
of temperature rise or of photo-oxidation is
shown by the fact that a companion nerve in a
N» and Oy, mixture, falling along a similiar curve
is quite unaffected by the illumination. There is
some evidence of small rises in potential in illum-
inated nerves in presumably pure CO. I have
no explanation of this fact, but it should be fur-
ther investigated.

The work is not sufficiently far along to war-
rant any sweeping generalizations or speculations
but it seems almost certain that the action poten-
tial is produced by an oxidation mediated by the
system poisoned by CO.

1Summary of a paper presented at the Marine Biologi-
cal Laboratory on July 25.

DISCUSSION

Dr. Garrey: It is not so very long ago that we
were all under the impression that nerve did not
show metabolism. A number of us who are here
tonight remember the first step which was taken
in the demonstration of the fact that nerve
respires, by Dr. Tashiro. We then realized that
we had to deal with a new phase of this subject.
His results were received with scepticism espe-
cially after the physical methods were developed
which claimed to demonstrate the construction of
a single molecule of sugar. Yet again Dr. Parker
demonstrated in this laboratory very marked oxi-
dation by nerves. Now we talk about the respi-
ration of nerve as though we had always known
about it. I think this is a very important and

interesting paper and that it should be fully dis-
cussed.

Dr. Ralph Lillie: I should like to ask if he has
ever tried the effect of iron salts in the oxidation
processes in nerve.

Dr. Schmitt: No, I have not tried that. I did
think of trying some of the organic things but
was told by Warburg that iron salts, when added
to such a complicated thing as nerve, would pro-
duce nothing. We have tried it out with refer-
ence to metabolism but nothing else.

Dr. Garrey: Dr. Warburg overlooked a number
of important things, among them the fact that
iron salts may stimulate the nerve to marked activ-
ity. They will oxidize when stimulated.

Dr. Lillie: Since oxygen consumption is in-
creased so very markedly, there is no reason for
supposing that there would be any great difference,

Aueust 2, 1930 ]

THe COLLECTING NET

147

THE DEVELOPMENTAL RELATIONS OF THE HEART AND LIVER IN CHORIO-ALLANTOIC

GRAFTS OF WHOLE CHICK BLASTODERMS
Dr. B. H. WILtrIER
Associate Professor of Zoology, University of Chicago

It is a pleasure to offer the work here presented
as a tribute to Professor Frank R. Lillie whose
suggestions in 1916 initiated a program of study
on the physiology of development of the chick
embryo by the method of chorio-allantoic grafting.

The present investigation is concerned with the
developmental relations of the heart and liver.
More specifically it deals with the problem of the
dependency of these organs upon each other in
their original development and the location of the
presumptive liver material.

The method employed consists in transplanting
to the chorio-allantoic membrane whole pellucid
areas of chick blastoderms of stages before (prim-
itive streak) and after (head-process to 10s) the
heart rudiments are formed. The liver rudiment
arises much later (22s) than the oldest stage
transplanted. The grafts grew for 8 or 9 days.

Of grafts examined the heart has developed in
32 and the liver in 24 cases. Typically the heart
is a muscular, spindle-shaped body without cham-
bers but having a lumen containing blood. It is
occasionally found pulsating. The liver is a his-
tologically normal body without organization into
lobes.

In eight grafts the heart developed without liver
showing that the heart rudiment has the capacity
to differentiate independently of the liver. The
liver, on the other hand, never developed in the
absence of heart, indicating the dependency of
the former in its origin upon the heart rudiment.
This interpretation is supported further by ex-
amining the relation of the entodermal products
(gut and liver) to the heart in the grafts. In
those cases where heart develops without liver,
entodermal derivatives in the form of gut tubes
are found but never in contact with heart. When
both heart and liver develop they are either in

contact (over 50% of the cases) or closely as-
sociated. In the latter cases there is evidence to
indicate that they have been separated by growth
mechanics peculiar to the graft. The relationship
of the heart and liver thus found in the graft is
like the contact relationship of the splanchnic
mesoderm (myocardium) and the entoderm of an
early blastoderm. The evidence thus suggests
that a contact relationship of the heart rudiment
and the entoderm is necessary for the latter to
differentiate into the liver.

In ten grafts two hearts developed from each
blastoderm, and in all but one of these cases, a
liver also developed either in contact or in close
association with each heart. The mechanics of
development in these grafts was apparently of
such a nature as to prevent the right and left folds
of the splanchnopleure from uniting in the median
ventral line, thus bringing about these results.
Right and left anterior halves of the pellucid area
of a blastoderm in the head-process stage trans-
planted to separate hosts will each give heart and
liver, thus confirming the above interpretation as
to the origin of duplicate hearts and livers in
implants of the whole blastoderm. These results
show that the entoderm originally in contact with
each heart rudiment has the capacity to differenti-
ate into liver. This is interpreted either (1) as
indicating the occurrence of right and left areas
of presumptive liver cells in the entoderm which
is in contact with each heart rudiment, or (2) as
a case of embryonic induction, the capacity to re-
act being widely distributed in the entoderm at
first, i. e., any entoderm in contact with the heart
rudiment may form liver.

A summary of a seminar report presented at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory on June 27.

A NEGRO BIOLOGIST HAS WON DISTINCTION IN HIS FIELD!

In a biological laboratory in Naples works a
scholarly man, honored by the world for his
scientific discoveries and remembered by thous-
ands of students to whom he has given guidance
and inspiration. Dr. Ernest Everett Just is now
near the top of this profession, but about twenty
years ago his assets consisted of $5 and a fierce
determination to learn and pass on his learning to
others of his race. In addition to his poverty, he
was handicapped by the fact that he was a negro,
a race that has had few opportunities to produce
great scholars.

Dr. Just’s rise in the world of science has been
steady if not spectacular, In.1915 he was

presented with the Spingarn Medal, which is
given annually by J. E. Spingarn to “the man or
woman of African descent and American citizen-
ship who shall have made the highest achievement
during the preceding year or years in any honor-
able field of human endeavor.” Some of his
experiments are in the field of cancer research ;
others in which he uses ultra-violet rays, bear
upon heredity and the determination of sex. He
is head of the Howard University department of
zoology, and his trip to Naples is a grant from
the Julius Rosenwald Foundation.

The boy’s inheritance was unusually good. His
father was a wharf builder, who died when Ernest

148

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No. 36

Just was only 4 years old. His mother was a
woman of high character with a fairly good
education. When her son was born forty-five
years ago in Charleston, S. C., she was engaged
in teaching and working in the phosphate fields.
Mrs. Just, it is said, established the first indus-
trial school in the State and was its first principal.

Ernest Just attended his mother’s school and
then went to the State College at Orangeburg.
Later he decided to go North to study. He found
a job on the Clyde Line and worked his way to
New York. Finding work here, he saved enough
money to go to Kimball Academy at Meriden,
N. H. At this school he completed the four-year
course in three years, finding time to be editor of
the school paper and president of the debating
society. He then entered Dartmouth College,
graduating in 1907 with special honors in zoology
and history and with the only magna cum laude
in his class.

During his first year in the study of biology he
discovered how little, comparatively speaking, was
known about the development of the egg. The
subject intrigued him and he decided to make it
his specialty. After leaving Dartmouth he
accepted a position in Howard University, where
he has been teaching for the last twenty-one years.

In addition to his duties at Howard University,
Dr. Just has accomplished much research work
and writing. He, with some of the best known
scientists of the country, is the author of a book
on cytology, published in 1924. When leading
biologists of Germany were looking over the
world’s list of scholars for one who could best
write a treatise on fertilization, they chose Dr.
Just. He is one of the authors of a ponderous
work on colloid chemistry. Among the others are
some who have won the Nobel prize.

In 1916 Dr. Just received the degree of Ph. D.,
magna cum laude, in zoology and physiology from
the University of Chicago. He studied a year at
that institution during a leave of absence from
Howard University. Every summer for twenty
years he has been engaged in research work at
the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole,
Mass.

Dr. Just is a member of the editorial board of
the international journal Protoplasma, published
in Berlin. He is also an editor of the official organ
of the Marine Biological Laboratory. He belongs
to the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science, the American Society of Zool-
ogists, the American Naturalists, and is a corres-
ponding member of La Société des Sciences
Naturelles et Mathématiques of France.

Friends of the scientist have often advised him
to give up teaching and devote himself entirely
to research work, believing that his time might
better be spent with experiments and investiga-
tions from which valuable information might be

gained. But Dr. Just feels that he is called to

teach and inspire the youth of his race.
1A reprint of an article which appeared last summer
in a Sunday edition of the New York Times.

A MOTHER HEARS DR. JENNINGS
The Protozoan undefiled
By sex is a maternal creature,
Nobly it splits to have a child
Quite like itself in form and feature,

It swallows anything desired,

It bears the cold and mounting heat,
And little traits it has acquired

The docile progeny repeat.

It teaches children—really charming !—
To eat at mess with pleasant face,
So pure, you know, and quite unharming
And nice to have around the place.
OF Mare

A NEW METHOD OF CLEARING TISSUES

San Dimas, Cal., July 16—Workmen breaking
up a concrete wall near here reported today they
found a live frog imbedded in the hardened
mass of cement which was laid two years ago.
The frog hopped away without aid, they said.
Its body was somewhat translucent, but other-
wise normal.

A note clipped from the front page of “The Evening
Standard”,

WOODS HOLE YACHT CLUB

The Woods Hole Yacht Club held its third
race of this season on Monday, July 28, in the
afternoon. Comstock Glaser’s Menidia finished
first, followed by Isabel Morgan sailing Black
Cat, George Clowes sailing Dorine, Eugene Du-
bois sailing Scuttlebutt, Wistar Meigs sailing
Aunt Addie, and Ogden Woodruff sailing Char-
log, in that order.

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
August 2 . 11.320" 5. eee
August 3. 12 :04 12:15
August 4 . 1:06 Lele
August 5. 2:00 2:04
August 6 . 2:49 2557
August 7 . 3:35 3:42
August 8 . 4:20 4:21
August 9 . 4:59 5:03
August 10 .. 2230 5:43
August 11 .. 6:17 6:29

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
eause the turning of the current to occur a half an
hour earlier or later than the times given above. |

ee

om

os

a eee ee ee ee

Avaust 2, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET

149

z

DIRECTORY ADLGENDA

e

INVESTIGATORS

Beck, L. V., res. asst. zool. New York. Br. 234.
Bernstein, A., res. asst. phys. New York. Br. 1.

Biddle, R. L., grad. fel. biol. California Inst. Tech.
Br. 315.
Bishop, G H., assoc., prof., phys. Washington Med. Br.

225.
Bissonnette, T. H., prof. biol. Trinity. O. M. 26.
Chalmers, Elizabeth, grad. asst. zool. Pittsburgh Rock.
Chen, H. T., Harvard. Br. 109.

Clark, Frances M., sec. to Dr. Clowes, Lilly Research
Lab. Br. 328..

Cline, Elsie, grad. asst. genetics. Hopkins. Br. 127.
Cole, E. C., assoc. prof. biol. Williams. O. M. 24,

Corey, H. Irene, sec. to Dr. MeClung, Pennsylvania. Br.
219

Cowles, R. P., assoc. prof. zool
Curtis, Mary E., grad protozool

Dawson, J. A., instr. invert. zool.
O. M.. 28.

Draper, J. W., res asst. phys. Cornell Med. Br. 214.
Gates, F. L., res. fel. biophysics. Harvard. Br. 330
Grand, C. G., res. asst. phys. New York. Br. 337.
Hansen, I. B., instr. zool Wesleyan. O. M. 29
He!ter, D. M., instr. bact. Washington Med. Br. 2.
Hill, S. E., asst phys. Rockefeller Inst. Br. 209a.

Hoerr, S. A., stud biol. Antioch. Br. 122
Johnson, H. H., instr. zool. Col. City of N. Y., Br. 110.
Kaltreider, N. L., asst. phys. Pennsylvania. Br, 231.

Hopkins. Br. 234
Yale. Br. 323.
Col. City of N. Y..

‘Katz, J. D., asst. instr. biol New York. O. M. Base.

Lazarovich, Mara, res. asst. biol New York. O. M|
Base

McEwen, R. S., assoc prof zool. Oberlin. Br. 218

Matthews, S. A., instr. zool. Pennsylvania. Br. 117

Miller, Helen M., Nat. Res fel. genetics. Hopkins. Br.
126.

Parks, Elizabeth K., grad asst zool. Oberlin Invert
Lab.

Perrot, J. L., cytol Geneva (Switzerland) Br. 315,

Petrik, J. M., prof. phys. Masaryk (Czechoslovakia)
Br. 223.

Potter, T. S., res. fel phys

Ravenswaay, A. C., van, res
Med. Br. 2.

Redfield, Helen, genetics.
M 1

Chieago. Br. 217

asst _bact. Washington
California Inst. Tech. O.
Romanoff, A. L., res instr. emb. Cornell. L. H, 32
Santos, F. V., grad. zool. Chicago O M. 1
Scarborough, J. E., Jr., stud. med. Harvard O. M. 1.
Schauffler, W. G., physician. Princeton L H. 24

Smythe, C. V., Nat. Res. fel. biochem. Rockefeller
Inst Br. 207.

Sonneborn, T. M., res asst. zool Hopkins Br. 127.

Steinbach, H. B., grad protozool. Brown. Br, 233

Stewart, Dorothy R., asst. prof. biol. Skidmore (N. Y ) -
Br. 111

_Sumwalt, Margaret, asst prof. phys
Col. (Phila.) Br. 231.

Tocker, A. M., res asst. bact., Washington Med Br. 2

Uhlenhuth, E., assoc. prof. anat., Maryland Med. L. H.

Whitaker, D. M., asst. prof. zool. Columbia. Br. 331

Whedon, A. D., prof. zool. North Dakota Agr. Col.
Br. 327.

Wieman, H. L., prof. zool Cincinnati. Br

Woman’s Med.

334,

INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY

INSTRUCTION STAFF
Bissonnette, T. H., prof. biol. Trinity.
Cole, E. C., assoc. prof. biol. Williams.
Coonfield, B. R., prof. biol. Southwestern.
Dawson, J. A., asst. prof. zool. Col. City of N. Y.
Hansen, I. P., instr. biol. Wesleyan.
Nelsen, G. E., instr. zool. Pennsylvania.
Parks, Elizabeth K., grad. asst. biol. Oberlin.
Pollister, A. W., instr. zool. Columbia.
Sayles, L. P., asst. prof. Tufts.
Severinghaus, A. E., asst. prof. anat. Columbia.

STUDENTS

Alderman, Evangeline, grad. Oberlin.

Baumgartner, F. M. Butler.

Bittinger, Isabel, Radcliffe.

Boardman, E. T., grad. Hopkins.

Brown, F. A., Jr., grad. Harvard.

Campbell, D. H., grad. Wabash.

Carlson, J. G., grad. asst. zool. Pennsylvania.

Chadwick, C. S., instr. biol. Vanderbilt.

Coplan, Helen M., Goucher.

Cohen, Rose S., grad. Cincinnati.

Craig, R. L., Amherst.

Crowell, P. S., Jr., grad. Bowdoin.

Derrickson, Mary B., grad. Goucher.

Dorris, Frances S., grad. Yale.

Doyle, W. L., Hopkins.

Eichold, Eva C., Newcomb.

Everett, J. W., grad. Yale.

Farber, S. M., Buffalo.

Fennell, R., grad. Duke.

Fisher, K. C., Acadia

French, C. S., Harvard.

Hamburger, L. P., Jr., Hopkins,

Hart, Helen B., Wellesley.

Hayes, F. R., asst. prof. zool. Dalhousie.

Heiss, Elizabeth M., grad. asst. biol. Purdue,

Heusner, A. P., Swarthmore.

Hewitt, Dorothy C., grad. Yale.

Holloway, May P., teacher Burke
School.

Hubbard, Ruth A., asst. Cleveland Museum of Nat.
Bist: 77

Jackson, Jeannette A., grad. asst. biol. Syracuse.

Johnson, Dorothy F., grad. Wellesley.

Kille, F. R., asst. prof. biol. Birmingham-Southern.

Kroc, R. L., grad. Oberlin.

Leavitt, B. B., instr. zool. Dartmouth.

Merriman, D., Harvard.

Morris, S., instr. zool. Pennsylvania.

Prest, Margaret R., grad. asst. zool. Mt. Holyoke.

Redmond, A. C., Hamilton.

Reynolds, A. E., grad. DePauw.

Ritter, Miriam E.,, Wilson.

See, M. Barbara, grad. asst. Jamaica Plains High School.

Shea, Margaret M., grad. Oberlin.

Sidebotham, Ruth S., grad. Washington.

Snook, T., grad. Rutgers.

Snell, P. A., grad. Princeton.

Swanson, O. E., Antioch.

Stone, Martha, Delaware.

Tipton, S. R., grad. Duke.

Townsend, Grace, grad. Ohio State.

Treat, Dorothy A., grad. Cleveland Museum of Nat. Hist.

Waters, N. F., grad. Harvard.

Weed, B. C., grad. Clark.

Woodruff, Beth H., grad. asst. biol. Western Reserve.

Industrial High

150

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 36

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors
Annaleida S. Cattell

Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

Mary Howe

Editorial Notes

Readers of Tue Cotrectine Nev are earnestly
requested to submit notes and news for publica-
tion on our page entitled “Items of Interest.” We
would like to record news concerning any person
working in the field of biology regardless of
whether or not that individual has been a worker
at Woods Hole. Each note is certain to be of
interest to a few people, and the page of items
therefore becomes of interest to everyone at the
laboratory. This probably does not hold for any
other page in the number. For these reasons we
look forward to doubling the space devoted to
news notes as soon as sufficient material is avail-
able. We sincerely hope that we may have the
active cooperation of our readers in enlarging this
department.

A copy of the first number of Tur CoLtecTinc
Net containing the birthday anniversary supple-
ment in honor of Dr. Frank Lillie is being given
to:

(1) Each college and university library in the
country.

(2) Each member of the Corporation of the
Marine Biological Laboratory.

(3) Each member of the Physiological Con-
gress who came to Woods Hole last August.

The Corporation of the Marine Biological Lab-
oratory holds its annual meeting on August 12.
Its purpose in meeting is to elect a treasurer and
a clerk of the Corporation and eight trustees of
the laboratory. Reports will be presentéd by the
clerk and the treasurer of the Corporation and by
the director and the librarian of the laboratory.
There are about fifty-five Corporation members
now in Woods Hole, and it is hoped that each one
will attend the meeting.

The laboratory owns no property on the Break-
water bathing beach; but few people realize that
“Little Beach” is laboratory property, and that
it was obtained by the institution to insure a per-
manent bathing beach for its workers. The en-
trance to the beach is almost opposite Professor
Jennings’ cottage on Gardiner Road.

CHEMICAL ROOM SERVICE

The following standardized solutions will be —
furnished during the season of 1930. Quantities
are limited. Special solutions, buffers, glass dis-
tilled water, and. pH standards should be ordered
at least two days before needed.

N 1.000 (with factor)

Acetic acid. Sulphuric acid.
Hydrochloric acid. Sodium hydroxide.

N 0.100 (with factor)

Hydrochloric acid. Sodium hydroxide.

Buffer mixtures

Acetate pH 3.6-5.6

Phosphate pH_ 5.3-8.0

Borate pH 7.6-10.0

Acetate-citrate pH 2.2-8.0 (Mellvaine)

Indicators—Clark and Lubs series.

Color tube standards—On special order.

Glass distilled water—On special order.

Silver nitrate—On special order.

Calcium chloride—On special order.

For other standards inquire of person in charge
at the Chemical Room.

Certain tools are available for loan for investi-
gators’ use. In order that the maximum use be
obtained it is requested that the tools be returned
as soon as the investigator is through with them.
If they are not returned within 24 hours the
janitors may be requested to bring them back to
the Chemical Room if they are needed by other in-
vestigators. This year screwdrivers, hammers,
saws, pliers, pinch bars, a box scraper and nail
puller are available.

Investigators are urged to co-operate with the
Chemical Room by cleaning their glassware be-
fore returning it to the Chemical Room. When
an investigator has completed his work, if he will
place his name on the sheet on the Chemical
Room Bulletin Board the janitors will return his
supplies to the Chemical Room on the date in-
dicated.

Supplies no longer needed will be collected if
word is left at the Chemical Room.

Investigators who are continuing the same work
in the same room next season may keep their sup-
plies in their room over the winter by listing them
on a Kept Out Card (furnished at the Chemical
Room window) and leaving the card with their
supplies. All supplies not listed on these cards
will be returned to the Chemical Room by the
janitors during the winter. Should the investiga-
tor be unable to return the following summer the
supplies will be returned to the Chemical Room
stocks if they are needed by other investigators.

Small amounts of. special solution will be kept
for investigators in the Chemical Room on re-
quest. Supplies that may be injured by freezing
should not be left in the wooden buildings.

Oscar W. Richards

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

151

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Dr. Richard Ashman, formerly of the School
of Medicine at Tulane University, has recently
been appointed assistant professor of physiology
in the School of Medicine in the University of
Tennessee.

Dr. Roberta Hafkebring, formerly instructor
in physiology in the School of Medicine of Tu-
lane University, has accepted a position in the
department of physiology at the Women’s Medical
College in Philadelphia.

In May the Kaiser Wilhelm Society for the
promotion of Sciences dedicated its newly erected
Institute for Medical Research. Dr. Otto Meyer-
hof has been made director of physiology.

An act of Congress authorizes the United
States Bureau of Fisheries additional appropria-
tions for new stations, laboratories and distribu-
tion cars to the amount of $1,885,000; annual in-
creases in appropriation for the division of fish
culture of $100,000, and an increase in appropria-
tion for the divisions of inquiry and fishery indus-
tries at the rate of $60,000 and $35,000 per annum
for the five-year period.

Politics has resulted in the board of trustees of
the University of Mississippi summarily dis-
missing a large part of their faculty. Among
those professors eliminated are Dr. P. W. Row-
land, professor of pharmacology and Dr. J. O.
Crider, professor of physiology and dean of the
School of Medicine.

Dr. E. P. Lyon, dean of the University of Min-
nesota Medical School, and a trustee of the Marine
Biological Laboratory, received the award of the
degree of doctor of science at the commencement
of the University of Southern California.

Dr. G. P. McCouch, assistant professor of
physiology at the University of Pennsylvania,
spent last weekend in Woods Hole. He came
from his summer home in North Conway, N. H.,
to present a paper at the Muscle-Nerve Physiology
seminar meetings on July 25 and 26.

The Clay-Adams Company is opening an ex-
hibit under the direction of Mr. J. A. Kyle. A
series of ten human foetuses, cleared by the Spal-
teholz method, is shown from six weeks up to
eight and a half months. The embryology of the
chick is demonstrated with models by Deyralle.
Botanical models, life histories and charts com-
plete the varied exhibition.

On Sunday evening, August 3, at 8 o'clock, a
special program consisting of Wagner’s “The
Walkyrie”’, will be presented at the M. B. L.
Club over the Radio-amplified \@ctrola.

Dr. Huntington Williams, of the State De-
partment of Health in Albany, N. Y., spent last
week with his family in Falmouth and visited at,
the laboratory. Dr. Williams took the course in
embryology under Dr. Kellicott in 1915,

Dr. and Mrs. S. C. Brooks left Woods Hole
on August 1 to drive back to their home in Berke-
ley. They have both been doing research work
at the laboratory since the first part of June.

Willy Pogany, well-known Hungarian painter
and illustrator of many books, was visiting in
Woods Hole during the weekend of July 26.

Mr. and Mrs. Delafield Dubois and family left
Wednesday, July 30, for New York. Mr. DuBois
has retired from General Electric and for the
past two years has been located at Washington
Square College. Mrs. DuBois is well known as
a writer of children’s plays and short stories.

A bequest of Dr. W. J. Matheson wills $20,000
to the endowment fund of the Long Island Bio-
logical Association at Cold Spring Harbor.

Louis A. Veeder, only son of Captain John J.
Veeder, disappeared off the lightship Handker-
chief early on the morning of July 22. Mr. Veed-
er was a member of the crew of the Albatross I
and when the old ship gave place to the Albatross
II, he joined the lighthouse service and was mate
of the Handkercluef when he disappeared. He
is survived by a wife and three children who are
living in Gloucester, and by his father and mother
who are well known in Woods Hole, and a sister,
Mrs. Isabelle Mitchell, of New Bedford.

The Coast Guard patrol boat CG-2317 was
forced to open fire with her machine guns on the
Marge in Buzzards Bay near Bourne on the night
of July 23. The Marge has long been suspected
of rum running and on this occasion was arrest-
ed for failure to stop upon proper notification.
She was hit by the third round of shot and two
men aboard were grazed by the fire and later
treated by the Coast Guard doctor. No liquor
was found aboard and the men claimed that there.
had been none although there were unmistakable
evidences of it. The vessel was brought to Woods'
Hole where it may be seen at the Coast Guard
Station.

The annual fete of the Falmouth Nursing
Association will be held on August 7 from 3 to
11, on the Falmouth green. There will be booths
for the sale of tea, fancy work, candy, and
baked goods, and a grab bag and toy booth for
the children. In the evening there will be block
dancing.

152 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. V. No. 36

A NEW
STUDENT KYMOGRAPH

IN OUR STOCK FOR IMMEDIATE SHIPMENT :

8017

KYMOGRAPH, Student. With spring motor and adjustable friction drive; for use only
in vertical position. On heavy triangular base with simple apparatus support. Speed at
the drum surface varies from 1.66 to 166 millimeter-seconds, and the time for complete
revolution of the drum from 290 seconds to 2.9 seconds. The drum is 180 mm. high
and 150 mm in diameter. This Kymograph can be used for long paper with the ad-
dition of No. 8017-A Long Paper Support.

Code
Word

8017. Kymograph, Student, as above described, with apparatus support,
but without Long Paper Support : tettiees Deesseteeseeaesess 660,00 Mamoy
10% discount in lots of 12.

NOTE—No. 8020—A Paper is suitable for use with above Kymograph.

8017-A. Long Paper Support, consisting of a revolving cylinder on heavy
triangular base. Designed especially for use with No. 8017 Stu-
dent Kymograph in connection with No. 8020-B as in rolls.
For use only in vertical position Fea ce et: os lihus etetaese L800 3iaanes

8020-A. Paper, glazed and gummed, in strips 180 mm wide x 500 mm long.
Per box of 100 strips catsh dt oadateastuseussecvacneaees Bm OCU Oka FEES

8020-B. Paper, glazed, 180 mm wide, in roll of 50 meters; for use with
Long Paper Support on Student Kymo.... 3.00 Maosograph. Per roll .......

Prices subject to change without notice

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT
LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS
WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

Avucust 2, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 153

People Who Buy
SPENCER RESEARCH MICROSCOPES

Are not susceptible
to bargain appeal
They want:

Quality, Precision,
lL Design, Usability.

Always, their great re-
sponse is to that patri-
cian element which sets
fine things apart and so

Spencer Research
Microscopes

Nos. 7H, 14H and 7CBH

First visioned by Professor C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania, and then cre-
ated in their proudest traditions and kept free from the barterings of the market place.

Without special inducement they have met a demand that has no parallel in research
microscope history. There is now scarcely a college, university or research laboratory
in America that does not possess at least one of these fine microscopes.

Whoever want a research microscope, want the very latest and the best; they want a fork-type
substage which admits every possible substage accessory. They want a fine adjustment for focusing
the condenser because in recent years they have learned that fine focusing of objectives is not
enough, it should be supplemented by fine focusing of the condenser; they want a highly corrected
achromatic condenser; they want the advantage of case and comfort on the eyes provided by the
converging binocular tubes; they want a combination stage—plain and mechanical (2 in one); they
want a combined binocular and monocular body (2 in one) which avoids the necessity of changing
from one tube to another when changing from binocular to monocular vision and vice versa; they
may want a set of highly corrected apochromatic objectives, certainly the best achromatic obtain-
able.

All these and many more advantageous features, many of them patented by us, are
provided in Spencer Research Microscopes and explain why laboratory workers gener-
ally prefer the Spencer to others.

The company that makes the best research microscopes should be
able likewise to excel in making laboratory and student microscopes

atts SPENCER LENS COMPANY ama

MANUFACTURERS

| BUFFALO | Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring | BUFFALO |

SUS AS Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Ete. USAF
: BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

$

154 LE COLEECRING NET [ Vou. V. No. 36

Available for Research---

Pure Proteins and Vitamine Products

MILK PROTEINS

The preparation of materials, of highest purity, for research studies, is
so costly and involves such a loss of intellectual skill, this service is best ren-
dered by American industrial laboratories, who specialize in such work.

Through years of experience in the laboratories of Osborne & Mendel
(Conn. Expt. Station), we now produce the two chief proteins of milk, in state
of very high purity.

Casein and Lactalbumin are prepared from fresh, skim milk, which is the
only way to obtain either one of these proteins, as pure substances.

“Casein-Harris” shows the following average analysis:

Moisture oe ae sec 0:73, (Casemn(Nexi6:38) coe eee 87.09
ASR bea iia iiogsbes fast unees neereeeOo) ither-soluble) aa eee eee -20
Calcium . ssstsstsseeceseeeees. brACe Nitrogen; water, fat, ash-

INSCEO Deni. see ee 13,66. "freesec nica ae eee 15.44

(cf.—Osborne & Harris, Jr. Am. Chem. Soc., 25-IV, 346)

“Lactalbumin-Harris” shows highest nitrogen content, very low ash and
the average analysis of the purest specimens of this protein.
Both of these proteins are free from all vitamines.

YEAST AND ITS VITAMINES

We claim to prepare the purest specimens of washed and dried yeast cells,
available anywhere, for researches of precision.

Brewers’ Yeast-Harris (pasteurized powder), is prepared from a pure cul-
ture of fermentative yeast. The yeast cells are thoroughly washed with pure
water, to remove extraneous, soluble matter from its culture medium. The
cells are quickly dried at temperature just high enough to pasteurize the cells
and to stop fermentation properties.

It is offered for chemical, nutrition and clinical purposes, where a pure
yeast, with a known content of vitamine-B (F. & G) is desired.

CONCENTRATES OF VITAMINE-B (F & G)

Concentrated preparations from this yeast, containing Vitamine-B com-
plex (F. & G), are also available for investigations. They contain more
vitamine in proportion to total nitrogen content, than the whole yeast, and
often serve such purposes in feeding experiments.

We also offer vitamines F. & G—“adsorbed” on Fuller’s earth—free from
many extraneous substances of the whole yeast, as a “starting material” for
further researches on vitamine-B complex.

“Autoclaved Yeast” is also offered, containing the anti-pellagric G vita-
mine (heat-stable) and free from anti-neuritic Vitamine-F, which is heat-
labile. This product is standardized by the white rat method and growth
charts are available with it.

THE HARRIS LABORATORIES
Tuckahoe New York

Fee Ce LD, GO STO

4

>

>

a ee eS ee ee

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

¢

x

Ce

KX

a

x

Le

CEES,

PS

x

ROK OK

oe

CEREALS,

THE COLLECTING NET

LLEEELELELEEL GEESE EEE EEE EES.

You Are Cordially Invited to Visit the
Macmillan Exhibit at Woods Hole

August 4th to 9th

SOME-OF THE BOOKS ON. DISPLAY

Bailey & Spoehr ROLE OF RESEARCH IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE FORESTS
OF NORTH AMERICA

Bareroft THE RESPIRATORY
THE BLOOD, Parts 1 & II

Boas & Michelson THE CHALLENGE
CHRONIC DISEASES

Buchanan BACTERIOLOGY 3rd Edition

Cameron TEXTBOOK OF BIOCHEMISTRY
FOR STUDENTS OF MEDICINE AND
SCIENCE

Chandler HOOKWORM DISEASE

Clark COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY
HEART

Coghili ANATOMY AND THE PROBLEM OF
BEHAVIOR

Crew GENETICS OF SEXUALITY IN ANIMALS

Gates HEREDITY IN MAN

Goldzieher THE ADRENALS

Gray CILIARY MOVEMENT

Hammond THE PHYSIOLOGY OF REPRODUC-
TION IN THE COW

Harvey BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY AND PHY-
SICS OF SEA WATER

Harvey-Gibson TWO THOUSAND YEARS OF
SCIENCE

Hegner COLLEGE ZOOLOGY

Hegner-Andrews PROBLEMS AND METHODS
OF RESEARCH IN PROTOZOOLOGY

Hegner, Cort and Root OUTLINES OF MEDI-
CAL ZOOLOGY

Hegner-Taliaferro HUMAN PROTOZOOLOGY

Herms MEDICAL AND VETERINARY EN-
TOMOLOGY

Hogben THE COMPARATIVE
OF INTERNAL SECRETION

FUNCTION OF

OF

OF THE

PHYSIOLOGY

Hurst EXPERIMENTS IN GENETICS
Kerr ZOOLOGY FOR MEDICAL STUDENTS
Kingston INSTINCT AND INTELLIGENCE

McCollum and Simmonds THE NEWER
KNOWLEDGE OF NUTRITION
Newman LABORATORY GUIDE AND RE-

VIEW MANUAL

Parker and Haswell TEXTBOOK OF ZOOLOGY

Parsonnet and Hyman APPLIED ELECTRO-
CARDIOGRAPHY

Pearson GNETALES

Pickering THE BLOOD PLASMA IN HHALTH
AND DISEASE

Punnett HEREDITY IN POULTRY

Rolleston THE LIFE OF SIR THOMAS CLIF-
FORD ALLBUTT

Rose FOUNDATIONS OF NUTRITION

Savage THE PREVENTION OF HUMAN
BERCULOSIS OF BOVINE ORIGIN

Sherman CHEMISTRY OF FOOD AND NUTRI-
TION :

Terry INTRODUCTION
HUMAN ANATOMY

Walter BIOLOGY OF THE VERTEBRATES
Walter GENETICS

Ward and Gallagher DISEASES OF DOMESTI-
CATED BIRDS

Whitehead SCIENCE
WORLD

Wilson A MANUAL OF MENDELISM
Wilson THE CELL

Woodruff FOUNDATIONS OF BIOLOGY
Zinsser INFECTION AND RESISTANCE

TU-

TO THE STUDY OF

AND THE MODERN

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

PUBLISHERS

60 Fifth Avenue
Chicago

Atlanta Boston

New York

Dallas San Francisco

OSS Ck

x KY

OK OK OY

KA
¢
KA
Ka
KA
Ka

156 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 36

More LEICA Cameras are used by
scientists than any other camera.
Zoologists and Botanists, in fact
scientists in almost every field of
scientific endeavor find the LEICA

Camera an indispensable factor in
their equipment.

For field work or for laboratory use, the LEICA gives exceptional results and also serves
for copying, photographing of small specimens and for photo-micrography.

Write for Catalog No. 1174.(CN)

FOE PeZ, diste!

60 EAST 10TH ST., NEW YORK, N. Y.

Reduce the Time Spent in Quizes

For the Biology instructor, who has a limited amount of time to devote to the prep-
aration and giving of quizes, the Turtox Biology Key Cards and Quiz Sheets reduce to
less than one half the time ordinarily necessary to cover a given amount of work.

Each Turtox Quiz Sheet consists of a carefully made drawing, with parts numbered,
but without any explanatory legend. The Quiz Sheets are printed on light-weight bond
paper, size 81% x 11 inches, and are bound in tablets of 25 sheets each, all of the same
subject. There is a place on each sheet for the student’s name, and also space for him
to write in the names corresponding to the numbered parts of the drawing.

The Turtox Key Cards are the same size and use the same drawings as the Quiz
Sheets but are printed on heavy white Bristol board and have a full explanatory legend
with numbers corresponding to those appearing on the Quiz Sheets.

The Turtox Key Cards and Quiz Sheets are now available for fifty subjects studied
in Zoology, Botany, Embryology and Comparative Anatomy. A complete list of the sub-
jects covered and samples of the Quiz Sheets will be sent on request.

Prices: Key Cards 10c each. Quiz Sheets 35c per pad of 25.
we)

General Biological Supply House
(INCORPORATED)
761-763 East 69th Place

The Sign of the Turtox Bees ME

Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

DAE COLLECTING NET

Excelled
by None”

GOLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE

Microscopic

COVER GLASSES

DO NOT FOG

We have the largest stock in the
U. S. A. and the largest variety of
sizes and thinnesses, squares, circles
and rectangulars.

Circular will be sent on request

And Now

GOLD SEAL MICRO. SLIDES
RITE-ON MICRO. SLIDES

If your Dealer can’t supply you send
order (mentioning dealer’s name) to
Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Cray-ApAms Company

Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

ABBE DRAWING
APPARATUS

Cat. No. 12 60 21

LARGE ABBE DRAWING
APPARATUS

in case

Price $28.00 f. 0. b. N. Y.

This apparatus permits of most accurate draw-
ing at any magnifications available with a eom-
Length of mirror arm 140
Provided with
two interchangeable Abbe cubes for a large and

pound microscope.

mm., size of mirror 125x70 mm.
for a small exit pupil, complete adjustment for
precise centering and vertical displacement, mod-
erating glasses for controlling the illumination
proceeding from the drawing surface, as well as
from the microscope. With an erect microscope,
drawings are made without distortion on a hori-
zoutal surface.

Cat. No. 12 60 24

RIGHT-ANGLED PRISM

on slide
Price $6.00 f. o. b. N. Y.
Inteschangeable with the Abbe cubes of the pre-
ceding, for the purpose of converting it into a
projection drawing apparatus.

Carl Zeiss, Inc.

485 Fifth Avenue, New York
Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

ues

157

co

THE COLLECTING NET

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.

Subseriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to
The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight 1l-inech slides
or thirty-two 1%-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides,

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

»

MINOT
SLIDE CABINET

Designed by the late Dr. Charles S.
Minot; entirely of metal construction;
very compact, occupying much less
space than wooden cabinet, strongly
made throughout and neatly finished on
outside in maroon-colored japan with
bronze stripes, inside being finished in
black japan; contains 30 japanned
metal trays, each holding 24 glass
slides, 75 x 25 mm. Trays are provided
with convenient knobs and card hold-
ers. New and improved construction
of trays holds each slide independently
in place, preventing shaking or slipping
when trays are removed. Cabinet is
furnished with brass lock. Outside di-
mensions: height, 14% inches; depth, 13
inches; width 7 inches; capacity, 720
slides; furnished complete with 30
trays.

11882 MINOT SLIDE CABINET as described
above cece $35.00

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

Rooster, N-Y.

[ Vor. V. No. 36

Aucust 2, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 159

EXHIBIT IN LECTURE HALL
under direction of J. A. Kyle

Biological Life Histories

Botanical Models ‘Brendel’

Spalteholz Preparations

Charts: Anatomical, Neurological, etc.
Skeletal Material, Human and Zoological
Models, Anatomical and Zoological

Cuav-Apams Company

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical, Botanical and Biological
models and preparations and skeletal material i

Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations and Brendel Models
117-119 East 24th Street New York

Biological
Laboratory
Supply
Department

Our Glass Blowing Department is fully
equipped for all kinds of scientific glass
blowing. Blueprints are kept of import-
ant items.

Apparatus is made according to A.S.T.M.
A. P. H., A. P. I., M. C. A. and Bureau
of Standards specifications.

Attention is directed to our special
hydrometers, thermometers, extractors and
physico-chemical apparatus, also to our
stopcocks and ground joints.

Write for further details specifying your
requirements.

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

pune GLASS BLOWING

y
’

v
160 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. V. No. 36
CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH SAMUEL CAHOON
(Episcopal) Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
=v i The Rev. James Bancroft, Be a FISH AND LOBSTERS
oly Communion” - - - - 7:30 a.m.
Morning Prayer - - - - 11:00 a.m. Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Evening Prayer - - - - 7:30 p.m. Woods. Hole and Falmouth
WALTER 0. LUSCOMBE N. E. TSIKNAS
a WeREARe FRUITS AND VEGETABLES
Woods Hole Phone 622 Falmouth and Woods Hole
Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles THE TWIN DOOR
Elizabeth Arden Coty RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
Yardley - G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Choice Bits from Pekin .
Chicken and Lobster Dinners
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS Waffles
FALMOUTH Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.
“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store IDEAL RESTAURANT
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street Main Street Woods Hole
Falmouth Tel. 1243
Follow the Crowd to :
DANIELS’ LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING ‘
- Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing :
A ee eens Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at
Coffee, M. DOLINSKY’S
PICNIC LUNCHES Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

PARK TAILORING AND

COME TO
THE TOASTED SANDWICH SHOP CLEANSING SHOP
M. B. L. Specials Cape Cod Specials Phone 239-W Free Delivery
Dinners and Lunches We Press While You Wait
Tel. 70787 (Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

Compliments of DONNELLY’S BEAUTY SHOPPE
PENZANCE GARAGE Telephone 211 for Appointment

WOODS HOLE, MASS. Miz |
Day oriNaent ACSA Opp. Elizabeth Theatre
Phone 652 Towing

Falmouth, Mass.

2
|
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth

THE QUALITY SHOP SANSOUCYrS BEAUTY PARLOR
Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes Frederic’s Permanent Waves
and Souvenirs and
Ask for things you do not see. All Branches of Beauty Culture
Main Street Woods Hole Falmouth Phone 19-M

————— ee
oe

Aucust 2, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET 161

| ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Sunday, August 3
MARION DAVIES in
“THE FLORADORA GIRL”

Monday, August 4 - Tuesday, August 5
Matinee Monday
“QUEEN HIGH”

Broadway’s stage hit now on the talking screen

Wednesday, Aug. 6 - Thursday, Aug. 7
The two “Rio Rita” comedians,
BERT WHEELER and ROBERT WOOLSEY in
“THE CUCKOOS”

Friday, August 8
HELEN TWELVETREES & GEORGE FAUCETT

in
“SWING HIGH”

Saturday, August 9

CLARA BOW in
“LOVE AMONG MILLIONAIRES”

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Phone 116

Falmouth

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC.
13 West 46th Street,
New York City
All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

FOR RENT

For Month of August and Part of September °
5 ROOM CAMP ON MILFIELD STREET
Apply to R. A. GOFFIN
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“The Masque of Venice”

by GEORGE DUNNING GRIBBLE
A COMEDY
Week of August 4 - 9

Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10ce DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

162 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 36

The ABC of Woods Hole for 1930

All times are given in daylight saving time

RELIGIOUS SERVICES PUBLIC LIBRARY HOURS

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH Wednesdays and Saturdays
3:00 p. m. to 5:00 p. m.

; (Episcopal ) 7:00 p. m. to 9:00 p. m.
Holy Communion - - Keolnaate
Morning Prayer - ‘s 5 Ghat) os, TELEGRAPH OFFICE HOURS
Evening Prayer _ 5 7:30 p.m Week Days - 8:00 a. m. to 10:00 p. m.
Preaching Service a ‘ 10:30. alam Sundays - 9:00 a. m. to 11:00 a. m.

4:30 p. m. to 6:30 p. m.

METHODIST EPISCOPAL CHURCH POST OFFICE HOURS
Sabbath School - - 11:45 a.m. Mails Due - - - - 9:53 a. m.
Evening Service - - - 7:30 p.m. 10:35 a. m., 3:50 p. m. and 6:55 p. m.
Thurs. Prayer Meeting - 8:00 p.m. Mails Close - - - - 6:45 a.m.
9:50 a. m. and 5:25 p. m.
ST. JOSEPH’S ROMAN CATHOLIC Sundays” - - - Due 10:45 a. m.
CHURCH Close 5:25 p. m.
Masses - 8:00 a. m. and. 10:30 a. m. Office Hours 7:00 a. m. to 7:50 p. m.

week days only.

TRAIN SCHEDULE
Woods Hole to Boston—Week Days
AM AM AM
Woods Hole Sey recaranieOOL. iene et OF 20
Falmouth .. , ‘ 7:09 7:22 10:28
IB OStONN omen : a 8:56 9:10 12:40
Boston to Wocds Hole—Week Days

Monday Only —* Saturday Only—ll

BOAT SCHEDULE

AM AM PM PM PM PM PM
Ly. New Bedford 7:09 9:30! 12:05 SO es00) WsaDie even
Ly. Woods Hole 8:20 10:50 1:20 Bea) (620) SOROS) fee.
Ly. Oak Bluffs . 9:10 11:40 2:10 4°40) TO” acne rane
Due Vineyard Haven . ae Pe iharoet trance GORSOwens
Due Nantucket 3 11:30 2:00 4:30 T2007 wORBD ere) Kanes

>)

AM AM PM PM PM
Boston = wa .850p T8525 — \IMlz06 1:25 4:03
Falmouth Oy nore ORES) LOM2Y, 3:08 3:30 6:02
Woods Hole .. .. ; 10735 10:35 3315 3:37 6:09

“Woods Hole to Boston—Sundays

PM PM PM PM
Woods Hole 6:25 7:20 WalmMoOuth...2.ie.ccs.ccseeOsoe Sree

PM PM

Ly. Nantucket 6:30 O00) ) lai

Ly. Vineyard Haven...... 6:10

Ly. Oak Bluffs : 9:00 11:30 2

Ly. Woods Hole ; . 6:55 9:50 12:20 PAG

Due New Bedford ; 8:20 11:30 2:00 4
Sunday Only—*. Daily except Sunday—t

S
=
c
wo
—)
*
oo
S
on
S
S

oc
Soe
<)
oS
SIO:
Se
S
on
a
S

WOODS HOLE BUS LINE
Woods Hole — Falmouth (Daily except Sundays)
Ly. Woods Hole 8:30 9:55 11:00 1:40 3:55 4:05 5:25 6:40 7:25 9:30
Due Falmouth 8:45 10:10 11:15 1:55 3:10 4:20 5:40 6:55 7:40 9:45

Ly. Falmouth 9:15 10:30 11:35 2:20 3:30 4:50 6:00 7:00 9:00 11:00

Due Woods Hole 9:30 10:45 11:50 2:35 3:45 5:05 6:15 7:15 9:15 11:15

Aucust 2, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 163

Microtome for
Laboratory

7 Wo r k » »

THE simplified model of the Minot Rotary Microtome has been
completely redesigned to give you an instrument of utmost de-
pendability for laboratory work.

The specimen holder, a 25mm disc, works by a ball and socket so it can
be oriented to give any desired cutting angle. A single screw holds it
rigidly in place.

Feeding mechanism operates automatically and provides for cutting sections
from 2 microns up to 26 microns. The counterbalanced drive wheel is
grooved to permit the use of a belt where a motor is to be used. The base
of the instrument is very heavy to give stability when in use.

The entire instrument is constructed with characteristic B&L precision and
workmanship.

Write for circular D-21 which gives complete details.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. AY py
671 ST. PAUL STREET « » ROCHESTER, N. Y. omeGPTICAL SCIENCE.

‘BAUSCH
~ LOMB

BAUSCHeIC

Makers of Orthogon*Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No.

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARASels

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is use! for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopie preparations, living organisms and inse ts for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examin» a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on impor.ant features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera,

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 119 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
llx objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

ite, ns ‘
Crav-Apams CompANY
117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

36:

CN

inoue,

THE COLLECTING NET

dollars each to be awarded to
students in the various courses
at the Marine Biological
Laboratory that meet the fol-
lowing qualifications.

(1) The student must
show evidence of ability to en-
gage in research work. Judg-
ment of this will in part be
based on a written report of
problem work done at Woods
Hole during the summer.
Such work need not necessarily
be done in connection with the
course. ;

(2) Other things being
equal, preference will be given
to students who without such
financial assistance would be
unable to attend the 1931 ses-
sion of the Laboratory.

(3) The student must en-
gage in a full-time research
problem at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory for a period
of at least six weeks during
the summer of 1931.

Reports of work done by
students during the summer

SCHOLARSHIPS
There will be available for the summer of 1931
five scholarships of the value of one hundred

SATURDAY, AUGUST 9, 1930

neuro-muscular
auditorium of The

M. B. L. Calendar

MONDAY, AUGUST 11, 8:00 P. M.
Special Evening Lecture. Cornelius
Crane. Motion Pictures, An Ex-
pedition to the South Seas.
TUESDAY, AUGUST 12, 8:00 P. M.
Evening Lecture. Professor E. Chat-
ton, “A Study of the Dinoflagellate,
Polykrikon Schwartzi, as a Basis
for the Discussion of Some Pro-
blems of General Cytology.”
THURSDAY, AUGUST 14, 8:00 P. M.
Special Evening Lecture. Ernest F.
Coe, The Florida Everglades.
FRIDAY, AUGUST 15, 8:00 P. M.
Evening Seminar. Dr. Mary S. Mac-
Dougall, “A Mutation in Chilodon
uncinatus Produced by Ultraviolet
Radiation’—a Preliminary Report.
Dr. R. D. Manwell, “The Effect of
Quinine and Plasmoquin on Avian
Malaria.”
Professor E. Chatton, “The Asym-
metric Motile Stages of Epistylis
and the Question of the So-called
Longitudinal Division of the Vor-
ticellidae.”
Dr. Ruth B. Howland, “Cine-photo-
micrograph of Microinjection of
Vacuolated Protoplasm.”

of 1930 together

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00
SINGLE Copies 25 Crs.

THE NEURO-MUSCULAR SYMPOSIUM

symposium was held in the
Marine Biological Laboratory
on Saturday morning, July 26.
Twelve papers were present-
ed; those physiologists taking

part were: Drs. M. Dubuis-
Gol, Wo !8_ (Garney,, ID). JI.
Edwards, G. H. Bishop, F. H.
Pratt, Re We Gerard) Ro S:
Lillie, A. M. Monnier, H.
Davis, G. P. McCouch, P.
Bard, and D. W. Bronk. In

the afternoon the group held
an informal outing at Lackey’s
Bay on Naushon Island, where
the physiologists partook of
lobster, green corn and water-

melon. Dr. Pratt came from
Boston, and Dr. McCouch
from Philadelphia especially

to attend the symposium.
The program was a con-
tinuation of the Friday eve-
ning seminar in which papers
were presented by S. Gelfan,
W. R. Amberson, and F. O.
Schmitt. These were printed
in the last number of THE
CotrectinG Net. We are for-
tunate in being able to print

summaries of the papers given at the symposium,

with recommendations "from the head of each together with the resulting discussion, in this
(Continued on Page 141) number.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

THE COLLECTING NET Scholarships.................. 165 Dr. A. M. Monnier ........ 178
The Neuro-Muscular Symposium. . 165 Dr Grayson P. MceCouch - 180
Dr. Philip Bard ............ 180

Dr. M. Dubuisson ... Se LLOG: Dr. Hollowell Davis 181
Dr. Dayton J. Edwards...... cieststsvisvsueeee, 168 Official Laboratory Meetings 182
Professor Frederick H. Pratt................ .170 The Beach Question . 182
Drs. E. Ronzoni and G. H. Bishop..... 171 The Dedication of the Bell Tower 183
Professor D. W. Bronk...... ae aed 172 jditorial Page ot 184
Dr. R. W. Gerard x ee eaap eracnetes ce .. 178 Currents in the Hole .... 184
Professor Ralph S. Lillie . 176 Items of Interest ..... 185

166

THE COLLECTING

NET [Vot. V. No. 37

THE NEURO-MUSCULAR SYMPOSIUM

Dr. Ralph Lillie: We have rather a long pro-
gram so I suggest that each paper be limited to
ten minutes. This meeting is devoted to a con-
tinuation of the subject on which papers were

presented last night, the general physiology of
excitation processes and transmission processes
in nerve and other irritable tissues. The first
paper is that of Dr. Dubuisson.

CARDIAC AUTOMATISM IN INSECTS
Dr. M. Dusursson
Professor of Comparative Phystology, Ghent, Belgium

In Chironomus plumosus (Diptera) larva, the
circulatory system is composed of a long tube
located immediately beneath the dorsal tegument.
The tail end of the tube is swollen into some kind
of a bulb. This bulb is the only part which has
the power of contraction.

The dorsal end and its swollen end are kept in
place by some ligaments of muscles. It is con-
nected with the dorsal teguments and the digestive
system by some conjunctive tractus and also
connected to the lateral teguments by some
powerful muscles (muscularis alaris). These
muscles are displayed in a segment-like arrange-
ment.

The microscopical observation of the heart of
the larva, in situ, reveals approximately 90 beats
per minute but the heart activity is often inter-
rupted by periods of rest of different duration.

A careful observation shows that the degree of
contracture of the lateral muscles of the posterior
end of the circulatory system is not the same
during the period of rest as it is during the con-
traction of the cardiac muscle. During the
activity of the heart, the muscularis alaris are
contracted, thus stretching considerably the heart
walls. During the periods of rest of the heart,
the muscularis alaris are relaxed and the heart
walls are slightly or not at all stretched.
Numerous observations on a great number of
larva of Chironomus have shown that the begin-
ning of a series of pulsations always occurs
shortly after the contraction of the lateral muscles
and that the relaxation of these elements always
comes shortly before the heart stops.

From these observations, we may conclude that
the contraction of the muscularis alaris, leading to

the distension of the myocarde, is the factor which
starts and keeps going the heart beats.

The Chironomus nymphea have about the same
frequency of heart beats as the larva but the
periods of rest are more scarce.

The adult Chironomus have no periods of rest:
the muscularis aliformis are permanently con-
tracted and the heart is continually active.

I have checked these ‘observations with other
forms of insects. The nymphea of Agiron
(Odonata) have confirmed the above results. In
adult Coleoptera (Hydrophilus priccus, Dytiscus
marginalis) the heart beats regularly without
periods of rest. The lateral muscles are well
developed. They show a mixed structure both
muscular and conjunctive. These elements stretch
permanently the walls of the heart. If we cut the
muscularis aliformis, the walls of the heart are
no longer stretched and the beats stop immediately
and forever.

The fact that I made the same observations on
Diptera, Odonata and Coleoptera, that is to say
on quite different orders of insects, gives me the
opportunity to write the following conclusion:

“The distension of heart walls of insects is the
factor which controls the heart beats: starts it
and keeps it going.”

(Analogous phenomena have been observed on
other invertebrates’ hearts by different authors
and by myself. The reader will find a review of
this question in the following paper: ‘““M. Dubuis-
son, Contribution a la physiologie du muscle
cardiaque chez les Invertébrés. Le role de la
distension dans l’automatisme cardiaque.” This
paper will appear in the next issue of the Archiv.
Intern. de Physiol., 1930).

DISCUSSION

Dr. Lillie: Dr. Dubuisson’s paper is open for
discussion.
Dr. Garrey: These groupings of contractions

in the insect heart are of particular interest, and
the phenomenon of stretching is a well known
effect. Those of you who have observed the
Ascidian heart, which is a tube, know that it
reverses the direction of its beat from time to
time. Beating in one direction the walls of the

heart at the other end are definitely stretched to
such a point that they start a rhythm so that
waves pass in both directions and meet some-
where in the body of the heart; and since the
stretched part has a faster rhythm than the other
part, it finally overcomes the action of the latter
and there is reversal. However, that is not the
only point which we have to take into considera-
tion. It is found in the heart of Limulus, parti-

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

167

cularly under the action of acetone, that you may
get a series of grouped and graded contractions
which are very similar to the so-called Cheyne-
Stokes grouping or the Lucciani groupings which
we find in the vertebrate heart. The grouping
may be found both in muscle receiving constant
stimulation from the ganglia and also in the
ganglia themselves. I am interested to know
whether this insect heart is a neurogenic or a
myogenic heart.

Dr. Pratt: For several years work has been
going on in our laboratory on the lymph hearts
of the frog which seem to partake of some of the
important characteristics shown in Limulus. It
is proved beyond a question that the lymph hearts
receive nerve impulses from nerve fibers through-
out the spinal cord. In the lymph hearts there are
nerves which are practically duplicates of the

phrenic nerve going to the diaphragm. We have
been particularly interested in neurogenicity and
myogenicity in the lymph heart. The lymph
heart will stop absolutely, when excised, for hours
or even days. Then it will start work again.
Meanwhile the frog has been sewed up and can
be kept alive for a long time. When the frog is
opened up after several months the nerve is found
to be regenerated. It looks as though this nerve
has a capacity for becoming myogenic.

Dr. Lillie: These isolated hearts are rhyth-
mical in certain solutions, for example pure
NaCl solution, but not in others, e. g. Ca-contain-
ing solutions.

Dr. Garrey: I would like Dr. Dubuisson to
answer my question, whether it is a myogenic or
neurogenic heart.

Dr. Dubuisson: I think it is neurogenic.

PAPER BY DR. W. E. GARREY ENTITLED “ON THE HEART OF LIMULUS”
DISCUSSION

Dr. Dubuisson: 1 wish to ask Dr. Garrey con-
cerning the work of Hashimo who found that
the beat would continue after the removal of the
ganglion but believed that this was due to the
action of the suspensory ligament.

Dr. Garrey: This actually is not true. It is
due to a misinterpretation, because the heart
beats perfectly after complete removal from the
body and the suspensory ligaments have absolute-
ly nothing to do with it.

(Here followed some discussion by use of the
diagram on the board.) If you remove the gang-
lion as Dr. Carlson did, there will still be some
beat. Certainly this is true because all the gang-
lion cells cannot be removed. If you cut away the
ganglionic cord, scattered nerve cells will still be
left on the heart which if warmed will accelerate
the rhythm. Hashimo probably did not remove
all the ganglion cells.

Dr. Dubuisson: I think there are no ganglia
on that side of the heart.

Dr. Garrey: Yes, there are frequently fusi-
form ganglia on both sides.

Dr. Dubuisson: And who has discovered this.

Dr. Garrey: This is my own observation.

Dr. Edwards: 1 would like to ask Dr. Garrey
if he has noted any difference in the spread of
excitation from these local stimuli when applied
to the anterior as contrasted to the posterior seg-
ments, because there apparently is some difference
in contractility. The anterior segments are much
more highly contractile than the posterior. I
wonder if these local stimuli show any difference
in their spread in different segments.

Dr. Garrey: I have not noticed any very de-
finite difference. Whether there is an actual
difference in the spread of the impulse I cannot

say, but that is possible, dependent upon the
spread through the nerve fibers. If you take this
heart preparation, as Dr. Dubuisson has indicated,
and put a series of pins through the center, you
may get two sets of records from the lateral
halves. If now you cut one lateral nerve, the
only possible path of impulse from the ganglion
is through the other lateral nerve. One half of
the heart ceases to contract. But in a little time it
begins to take up its contractions again and in
the course of five or ten minutes it is back where
it was before. In other words, the path of im-
pulse has spread across the median line to the
other side. This is something like the phenomenon
Porter has described in the central nervous sys-
tem. In peripheral nerves of Limulus the
impulses from the functioning side seem to find
a new path through the nerve plexus. Whether
or not this has any connection with the spread of
current I cannot say.

Dr. Gelfan: How do you explain the fact
that when you cut the lateral nerve you still have
contraction of the heart on this side?

Dr. Garrey: I am inclined to think that the
impulse spreads through the peripheral nerve
plexus but originates in ganglion cells. The gang-
lion cells which have the more rapid rate force
the whole heart to beat in its rhythm.

Dr. Gelfan: In the normal heart, as you
mentioned, there are only local contractions, when
directly stimulated. But Dr. Carlson found that
when the heart is immersed in isotonic NaCl
solution, the local responses will rapidly spread
until the whole heart contracts. Have you found
any other solutions that would produce the same
effect ?

Dr. Garrey: I don’t think of anything off-

168

hand. This is only the by-product of incidental
observation. Of course any solution which will
decrease the amount of calcium, for instance any
sodium salt or lithium chloride and that whole
series of calcium deionizers, will produce some

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

effect. You can get a mixture of salts without
any calcium which gives you a beat five times as
high as the normal beat of the heart and the
spread then takes place throughout the entire
myocardium.

THE ACTION OF PRESSURE ON SOME PHYSIOLOGICAL PROCESSES
Dr. Dayton J. Epwarps
Associate Professor of Physiology, Cornell Medical College

When pressure is applied locally to a tissue
the usual effect is a depression in the functional
activity of the part compressed, but if an isolated
heart or a gastrocnemius muscle of a frog is
placed in Ringer’s solution and the liquid-and-
muscle compressed with certain amounts of
pressure, then the result is an increase in the
activity of the organ.

A special compression chamber admits different
types of muscle preparations and provides a
means of recording the tension developed by the
muscle in response to a stimulus. The results
of a typical experiment with a preparation of
cardiac muscle from the apex portion of the heart
of the terrapin will illustrate the characteristic
response.

The amount of tension developed at atmos-
pheric pressure is taken as the control and the
percentage change at each of the different
amounts of pressure tested are figured from the
control as the standard. At 2000 lbs. compression
on the heart muscle the response to a stimulus
shows an increase of 162%, at 4000 lbs., an in-
crease of 333%, and at 6000 Ibs., an increase
of 438% in the amount of tension. The
characteristic form of the curve of response shows
little change under pressures up to between 3000
to 4000 Ibs. From this range up to the highest
pressure we have used, there is a marked retarding
effect shown in the relaxation phase, and an
evident slowing of the contraction phase at the
higher pressures. These changes in the form of
the curve are indicative, we believe, of an in-
creased viscosity of the muscle substance as a
result of the compression. The effects of pressure
on contractility are reversible in the sense that
one may repeat the experiment a number of times
on a preparation with the same characteristic
result. On the other hand, a comparison of the
tension of a control contraction taken before the
heart preparation has been made to produce a
fourfold increase in its activity by means of a
compression of 5000 to 6000 Ibs., with a control
following such contractions by the muscle, shows
a decided falling off in its function. This de-
crease in the ability to develop tension which
results from a few vigorous contractions under
pressure is not recovered from and_ indicates,
therefore, that some irreversible change has taken
place in the muscle,

The augmented contractility which pressure
calls forth in muscle can be superimposed upon
two other well known factors having the same
directional effect. A moderate amount of cooling
(13°C) gave in eight experiments an average
increase of 25.3% in the capacity to develop
tension by the muscle as a result of the effects
of low temperature on the contractile process.
The same heart preparations at room temperature
but with 950 lbs. pressure applied to them showed
an increase in tension capacity of 35.1% as a
result of the “pressure effect.” Now when the
factor of the “‘cold effect’? occurs simultaneously
with that of the ‘‘pressure effect”, as was done
in these experiments by applying pressure to the
preparations when cooled, then the results show
an increase in tension of 53.3% thereby establish-
ing the additative tendency of the two facters.

In a similar manner we have tested the influence
of epinphrine and found that its effect in augment-
ing the contractility of muscle may be super-
imposed upon that of pressure. A feature of
special interest with epinephrine is shown in the
relatively greater augmentating action of pressure
on hearts treated with this drug. It suggests that
epinephrine in some way sensitizes the contractile
mechanism for the action of pressure.

There is obviously an upper limit to the
“pressure effect’? as an augmenting factor in the
response of muscle. For skeletal muscle our
results indicate that this lies somewhere between
3000 and 4000 Ibs. but for cardiac muscle it
appears to be somewhat above this range. The
results obtained with skeletal muscle and also
those on the form of the curve at high pressures
with cardiac muscle indicate a depressing action
of pressure when employed above a certain range.

Observations on a rhythmically beating heart
have shown that there is an increase when a
pressure of about 1000 Ibs. is applied, but this
change does not persist. In recent experiments
on the heart rate in Fundulus embryos we have
observed no indication of an increase under
pressure. In a series of fourteen experiments
the application of 1200 Ibs. pressure produced
an average decrease in the heart rate of 8%
within a period of two minutes after the pressure
was applied. The observations have not been
carried over pressure periods of more than ten

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

169

to twenty minutes, but during this interval the
rate tends to gradually decline and frequently the
pulsations appear to be restricted to parts of the
heart.

Some observations have been made on the
effect of pressures of about 1500 Ibs. on the early
stages of development in the eggs of Fundulus
and Arbacia and the data of one experiment will
illustrate the retarding action shown. Eggs of
Arbacia placed in the compression chamber for
one hour at 1500 Ibs. pressure, when removed, a
count revealed that 89% were in the four cell

stage and the remainder in the eight cell stage,
whereas all of the control eggs had reached the
eight cell stage.

The evidence indicates, therefore, that pressure
within certain limits augments the contractility
of cardiac and skeletal muscle. Higher pressures
will restrain this function. That the rhythmically
beating heart will temporarily increase in rate
under low pressures, but the embryonic heart of
Fundulus is depressed by a similar amount of
pressure. Similarly the early stages of egg de-
velopment may be retarded by pressure.

DISCUSSION

Dr. Schmitt: I should like to ask Dr. Edwards
a few questions. In the beginning you said you
had used 6000 pounds pressure and then later on
at 5° temperature the height was decreased at
high pressures. Was the pressure then higher
than 6000 pounds? Bridgman showed some time
ago that if you put protein under pressures start-
ing with 6000 pounds and going up to 10 or 12
thousand pounds, the proteins are precipitated.
He did some very nice work using simply egg
white. At these pressures there is a decided
change in the physical state of proteins. Have
you studied with your apparatus the possible
change in state of natural proteins? I’d like to
mention that Gasser and Hill have shown that if
you stretch a muscle, presumably bringing the
hypothetic contractile elements close together,
making the time which they have to move against
the viscosity of the plasma smaller, the decrease
in time to maximum is smaller. Have you found
this sort of thing ?

Dr. Edwards: In reply to the first point; the
pressure that gives augmentation is only about
3 to 4 thousand pounds, with skeletal muscle.
With cardiac muscle, recorded on the slide that I
showed you, we have apparently just about
reached the maximum augmentation with pres-
sure. We had our apparatus designed to stand
6000 pounds pressure and with this, heart muscle
is just reaching the top, apparently. We are going
to carry it a little further. The suggestion that
you make concerning physical properties is a very
interesting one. We believe that some of these
results undoubtedly indicate a change in con-
traction through changes in viscosity. That
accounts very well for the depression in the
mechanism of contraction but it does not account
for the increase in contraction. I know of no
way by which an increase in viscosity can decrease
the contraction phase and at the same time pro-
duce a greater contractile power.

Dr. Schmitt: I might say that we have sub-
jected heart and skeletal muscle to quite high in-
tensity of ultrasonic radiation. At the antinodes
you get very considerable pressure. At the nodes
you get just the other sort of thing. You get no

results at all until a certain point, and then, as
Dr. Harvey has shown, you get some contraction
of the muscle, but apparently pressure alone is
not enough to do it.

Dr. Edwards: Have you had any indication of
spontaneous contractions? With high pressures
we frequently get them.

Dr. Schnutt: No, we have failed to get any
action at all with ultrasonic radiation.

Dr. Morgulis: Are there any temperature
changes in the chamber during contraction ?

Dr. Edwards: We have thermopyles in the
chamber and the amount of change of tempera-
ture at these pressures is only a fraction of a
degree. We have here about 500 cc of liquid
surrounding the muscle so that dissipation of
heat will be very rapid and the actual change is
very slight.

Dr. Tashiro: Do you know of any change in
pH during these contractions ?

Dr. Edwards: We have made no such obser-
vations though we do find that a slight change in
the pH of the solution to begin with, markedly
alters the effect of pressure.

Dr. Monnier: Dr. Schmitt remarked that it
might be valuable to study the change in the
optical properties of muscle under high pressure.
The study of double refraction of muscle would
undoubtedly enable one to see if there is any
change in the molecular structure of muscle under
high pressure.

Dr. Edwards: We have not made such studies.

Dr. Davis: In studying changes in contraction
and relaxation of muscle under high pressures,
have you been over the data, reinterpreting it
since the recent scandal concerning the Fulton
lever? I was looking over one of your recent
papers and thought that possibly the changes in
the duration of contraction and relaxation might
simply be secondary to the different tensions
developed in that the greater the tension developed
the greater the effect of the friction. Have you
been over your data with this in mind?

Dr. Edwards: We heard about the “scandal”
and did look at our records, but I don’t think that

170

will materially change our interpretation. TI
realize that it is extremely difficult to place the
end of contraction and the beginning of relaxation
under any system. In part of our work we used
elastic membrane recorders and we frequently
got that sudden shift from a plateau to a fall that
suggests the angle.

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

Dr, Pratt: I have records of individual fiber
contractions in the sartorius which show a very
definite plateau and a very abrupt angle from this
plateau before relaxation. I have a feeling of
reservation with regard to the actual existence of
such an angle, but I have not made use of the
Fulton Lever.

A METHOD FOR WORKING ON THE TERMINAL NERVE-MUSCLE UNIT
Dr. FRepdEricK H. PRatr
Professor of Physiology, Boston University Medical School
Miss Marion A. Retp
Instructor in Physiology

The method here described makes possible a
direct experimental study of the terminal motor
axone with its attached muscle fiber. Thus, in
one field and focal plane with active circulation,
an ultimate member of the motor-unit can be
identified, operated upon and selectively stimulated
under the compound microscope.

A technique employed by us for recording in
situ by reflected light the mechanical response of
muscle fibers in the retrolingual membrane (imem-
brana basihycidea) of the frog has recently been
reported. On noting in this structure the frequent
presence of terminal nerve filaments (from 2.
hypoglossus) we have since met the requirement
of transmitted light by a procedure similar to
that devised by Richard Thoma for the observa-
tion of leucocyte migration and published at
Heidelberg in 1873. Both nerves and muscle
fibers are mentioned by Thoma, who points out
the many conditions fulfilled by the preparation
in the study of living tissue elements.

The intrinsic lingual muscle fibers (stratum
arcuatum, Gaupp) which from either side enter
this delicate membrane bounding dorsally the
extended tongue form a transversely, somewhat
sparsely disposed branching and anastomosing
system. The fibers, though suggesting thus an
interconducting syncytium, are nevertheless parti-
tioned into discrete members each of which is of
the striated-voluntary type. Since Thoma’s
observations these fibers have from time to time
been an object of interest to workers on muscle
structure and function, notably Ranvier and Kahn,
and have come recently under special notice in a
fruitful examination of the credentials of the all-
or-none law.

The motor-unit, a term introduced by Sherring-
ton to denote the nerve fiber with the muscle
fibers governed by it, is known to be adapted in
its pattern to the directional demands on the
muscle in developing tension. Thus in the
sartorius the motor-unit is linear in disposition,
involving formation in files of the ‘squad’ of
muscle fibers under command of the neurone.
This close formation of a group intimately bound
into the muscular matrix offers little feasibility
of detailed inspection in vivo, With the retrolin-

gual membrane, however, the tension requirement
is highly diffuse; it is correlated with a dispersion
or deployment of the muscle-squad in essentially
one piane, the fibers being none the less completely
integrated through the nerve strands passing
along and across the intervals formed by the
divergence and loose intertexture of the muscula-
ture as it invades the membrane from the arcuate
layer. It should therefore be possible, with
proper illumination and control, to take practical
advantage of this natural isolation of what may
be termed respectively a motor sub-unit (branch
system subordinate to the motor-unit) and the
motor-terminal (ultimate sub-unit—the innervated
muscle fiber).

In Thoma’s method the everted tongue is
stretched over a glass plate after an opening for
transmission of light has been made in what is
now the floor of the superficial lymph sac (sinus

basihyoideus). This admits of continued circula-
tion, the preparation being kept moist by
irrigation. With the present modification, how-

ever, it is unnecessary to stretch the tissues since
a glass disc or cylinder supports the membrane and
fills the opening beneath it, with the further
advantage that manipulation is afforded without
deranging the focal position; as, for example, in
the mechanical blocking of impulses in single
nerve fibers. Even with complete pithing the
capillary circulation in this preparation may be
highly active and persistent, all tissues under
observation being immersed.

A disc made from a segment of glass rod
(about 5x 4mm. for FR. pipiens) is cemented with
balsam to a glass plate. The tongue of the pithed
or narcotized frog is everted and an incision
made through its mid-region as far as the mem-
brane, avoiding undue hemorrhage from the rich
bilateral vascular supply. The preparation is now
adjusted (prone position) so that the tongue
rests on the plate above mentioned, with the disc
penetrating the opening so as to support the
endothelial surface of the membrane. The entire
preparation is laid in a Petri dish and covered
with Ringer’s fluid to above the level of the
membrane, which may now be transilluminated
under the microscope and at the same time mani-

Aveust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

171

pulated frgm above. Although low powers suf-
fice for most experiments a high-power objective
immersed in the solution gives excellent defini-
tion.

For stimulation the unipolar method is con-
veniently used. An indifferent terminal rests in
the bath covering the preparation. The active
electrode may take various forms ; we have worked
largely with quartz-covered platinum electrodes
(diameters between 2 and 10#) of the type des-
cribed by Taylor, carried in a manipulator
mounted integral with the carriage of the pre-
paration. A micro-needle in a second manipulator
is readily added to the apparatus. By means of
this system single or faradic induction shocks
are delivered to any point in the field, the inten-
sity being graduated over a wide range with great
delicacy by coarse and fine sliding rheostats—the
former in series with the primary circuit, the
latter on a shunt across the primary terminals in
series with a further set of resistances variable
up to 11000 ohms.

On exciting a single motor nerve fiber it is
very readily evident that the responding muscle
fibers are those limited to innervation by the
ramifying nerve filaments of the unit, that the

nerve threshold is distinctly lower than the muscle
threshold, and that one has to deal with a system
having a capacity of performance not only
independent of changes in the intensity of
stimulation but, so long as other factors are in
abeyance, of unvarying character. Functional
isolation of one motor-terminal is to be obtained
by cutting or otherwise blocking the filaments
passing to other muscle fibers of the unit, or by
actual destruction of such fibers. The area of
innervation (locus of “‘end-organ”) appears with
sufficient definition to enable the observer to man-
ipulate the electrode with a considerable degree of
selectivity. The persistence of thresholds, which
are obtainable with great exactitude, appears to
be correlated with the circulatory conditions.
Frequently a muscle fiber with the innervating
collateral is in immediate relation to an actively
conducting capillary the walls of which are defined
in optical section with extreme clearness. After
circulatory failure or mechanical injury, or in the
course of fatigue or curarization, the relative
excitatory conditions of axone and muscle fiber
are again readily investigated ; the effect of nerve
fiber on muscle fiber has so far proved consis-
tently maximal.

ACTION POTENTIALS OF MUSCLE TREATED WITH IODO-ACETIC ACID
Dr. E. Ronzoni AnD Dr. G. H. BisHop

Skeletal muscles treated with sodium iodo-
acetate 1/5000 are known to go into rigor, the
result of which is hastened by stimulation.
Irritability decreases as rigor developées. Lunde-
ghaard reports that no lactic acid is produced by
the contractions of a muscle poisoned by this salt.
We have examined the potentials of such muscles
by means of the cathode ray oscillograph, and
cannot find that they vary in any way from the
normal. Greenfrog sartorii stimulated through
their nerves, or directly, one end being treated
with potassium salts to elicit demarcation poten-
tials, were arranged to record contractions on a
smoked drum, and simultaneously, action poten-
tials were led off monophasically. The demarca-
tion potential was compensated initially, and a
rotating interruptor, turning once per second, first
opened a short circuit across the compensated
muscle recording circuit, to record any change in
demarcation potential, and during this open
interval the nerve was stimulated through a second
contact to elicit the muscle action potential. Each
tenth response was recorded photographically.

No significant change of demarcation potential
was noted during development of rigor, with ten-
sion developed equal to one half or more of the
twitch tension; a millivolt or two in either direc-

tion being seen in different experiments when the
demarcation potential was 30 to 50 millivolts. The
action potential amplitude varies strictly with the
twitch tension until rigor is well developed, when
the twitch tension falls off markedly, but the
action potential height less completely. Taking
into account however that the muscle is becoming
much more rigid, it seems probable that the ap-
parent more rapid decrease in tension than in
potential, developed in successive twitches, is due
to change of form, and that the action potential
is a measure of the energy of contraction through-
out.

The changes in the muscle are irreversible, but
at the end of the experiment the muscle, though
completely non-irritable, is still polarized as can
be shown by treating it with potassium salts at
the second electrode, when the demarcation
potential is promptly abolished. If not so treated,
the muscle only slowly loses its potential. Rigidity
apparently involves “paralysis” rather than im-
mediate “death” of the muscle. Failure to develop
tension upon stimulation is not due however
merely to mechanical rigidity, or to the already
shortened condition, but to a failure of the irrit-
able and conductile processes which normally
initiate the development of the twitch tension.

172

THE (COLLECTING NED

[Vot. V. No. 37

DISCUSSION

Dr. Gerard: I think in one sense these
experiments are very satisfactory in that they
allow us to maintain the hypothesis that the spike
of the action current determines in some way, or
is an indication of processes which determine the
amount of energy which is to be liberated in the
subsequent twitch contraction. We think very
definitely in terms of this hypothesis. Perhaps
Dr. Bishop will express himself as to whether he
believes that this is tenable or not.

Dr. Bishop: The whole question of the com-
parison of the spike of the action of muscle to
that of nerve is thrown open agin. I have always
felt that they were the same thing. However, I
cannot find anything wrong with the idea that the
main spike of the action potential of muscle sets
off the whole process. It takes a couple of sigmas
for the muscle to get to contraction and that is
about the time of the maximum of the action
current. In my own experiments I rather expected
that we would find action current of the muscle
without liberation of lactic acid, but I cannot find
that this is so. Apparently the spike of the action
is produced only when there is lactic acid present.
Apparently as long as you have a normal twitch

contraction you get a spike. You can depress it
by anaesthesia, but you then get a contracture
which is arbitrarily considered as non-conductive.
You see three stages; contraction, contracture of
Reighard, and conduction alone. Z

Dr. Gerard: You said that whereas you get
the contracture in the absence of lactic acid
formation, in the case of normal contraction and
spike of the potential you do get conduction. Have
you found that the individual twitch is associated
with lactic acid production? Isn’t that contrary
to Lundeghaard ?

Dr. Bishop: Lundeghaard injects his material
into the frog and apparently the heart stops. We
have done it both ways and both ways we get
some lactic acid.

Dr. Davis: We are simply to think, then, of
nerve as a muscle with all the lactic acid left out.
That is, the spike of the action potential in muscle
is not dependent on the formation of lactic acid
but rather results in the formation of lactic acid.

Dr. Bishop: I think that is true.

Dr. Lillie:..In general lactic acid appears to
be associated with the contraction and not with
the conduction process as such.

GRADED MUSCULAR CONTRACTIONS
Dr. D. W. Bronx
Professor of Biophysics, University of Pennsylvania

Recent work by Adrian and Bronk has
shown that the strength of a reflex or voluntary
muscular contraction is graded by a variation in
the number of neuro-muscular units in action and
by a variation in frequency of discharge of nerve
impulses from the motor nerve cells. In weak
contractions the impulse frequency may be as low
as five or ten a second so that the individual mus-
cle fibres respond in discrete twitches, the smooth
character of the response being due to the lack
of synchronism in the several fibres. As the
frequency of impulses increases mechanical sum-
mation results in the development of a greater
tension. 4

The range of frequencies of motor impulses to
a muscle seems closely to cover the range neces-
sary to produce a maximum variation in tension
there being no evidence of discharge frequencies
much above that necessary to produce a complete
tetanus in the individual fibres. The frequency

necessary for fusion obviously varies from one
muscle to another but there seems to be a similar
variation in range of impulse frequencies. Myo-
thermic studies by the author show that the energy
expended in maintaining a given amount of
tension-time in a sustained contraction decreases
as the frequency of stimulation increases the
greatest economy being obtained at a frequency
adequate to produce a complete tetanus. Strong
contractions are therefore maintained more eco-
nomically than weak ones. As fatigue develops
the properties of a muscle change so as to make
possible maximum tension and maximum economy
as the frequency of stimulation increases, the
at a lower stimulation frequency and there is some
evidence that under these conditions the frequency
of motor impulses is lower. These various lines
of evidence indicate a marked parallelism between
the time constants of a muscle and the frequency
of motor nerve impulses going to the muscle.

DISCUSSION

Dr. Davis: 1 should like to extend the remarks
a little by noting some of the experiments which
Mrs. Davis and I have been carrying out. We
have been using the soleus muscle and were parti-
cularly interested in finding out what happens
under different frequencies of stimulation as

fatigue begins to set in. I think we have come to
a slightly different concept of economy—that is,
physiological economy—the essential point being
that for a brief time while the muscle is fresh
the high frequency gives the strongest contraction.
If fatigue sets in, the recording lever falls. The

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING

NET 173

level to which it falls is lower with a high fre-
quency of stimulation than it is with a low one.
We actually get a better performance on the part
of the partially fatigued muscle with a somewhat
lower frequency. When the muscle has been
driven to a low level by forcing it with a high
frequency, and is then stimulated at a low fre-
quency, the tension increases. The muscle actual-
ly recovers while doing more work. We can best
interpret all of this in terms of the relative
refractory phase of the muscle. This is known to
be prolonged by fatigue, and if the stimuli come
in too rapidly each one finds the muscle only par-
tially recovered. This cuts down the liberation
of energy by making each quantum less. By
spacing the stimuli somewhat farther apart we are
able to get a greater liberation of energy.

Dr. Bronk: I think in that connection it would
be very interesting to see what would be the nature
of the discharge from the motor centers. I dare
say one would find that the frequency would drop
off. If you examine the frequency of discharge
from the receptors in muscle, if you continue to
stretch the muscle, the frequency falls off. Then
if one loads the muscle more strongly, the fre-
quency rises, but will fall to a lower level than that
which was maintained at the weaker tension, If
the tension be reduced, the frequency actually
rises. During sustained contraction, the frequency
of sensory impulse is gradually lowered, and,
acting upon the motor centers the motor nerve
frequency would likewise fall and would be able
to maintain muscle contraction under the more
favorable conditions.

NERVE METABOLISM AND ASPHYXIA
Dr. R. W. Gerard
Associate Professor of Physiology, University of Chicago

Conduction in a nerve is suspended in the
absence of oxygen, so that it obviously depends
ultimately on oxidation processes. Recovery of
an asphyxiated nerve is very prompt when
oxygen is again admitted. The question there-
fore arose whether it might not be possible to
substitute for gaseous oxygen some other sub-
stance which would act like oxygen and carry on
the chemical reactions which normally take place
in its presences At once the various dyes sug-
gested themselves and studies were made of the
influence of methylene blue and one of the more
highly oxidizing indophenol dyes. Mr. Feng did
a good deal of the work. The results have been
very interesting. The experimental conditions
were as follows: a nerve was led through a
chamber in which it could be exposed to nitrogen
while being stimulated at one end. The action
currents were led off beyond the experimental
region and duplicate sets of nerves were used
from the same frog in order that they might be
exposed to different conditions. There was fur-
ther an arrangement for nitrogen or hydrogen to
be bubbled through the chamber, having passed
first through the fluid to be studied and later put
on the nerve. The nerves were asphyxiated in,
gas and at the end of asphyxiation a solution,
either of pure Ringer’s solution or Ringer’s with
dye added, was forced up on to the nerves, and
the effect noted.

In nitrogen there is a steady fall of action
potential. In the ordinary frog sciatic nerve,
adding either plain Ringer’s, free from oxygen,

or Ringer’s containing methylene blue, during or.

at the end of the fall, has no restoring effect
whatsoever. When oxygen is subsequently re-
admitted there is marked recovery. Although the
exterior of the nerves was stained with methy-

lene blue, it occurred to us to examine the fibers
inside, and they were found to be perfectly color-
less. The experiments were therefore not
crucial.

In further experiments, then, we resorted to
the simple expedient of slitting the sheath longi-
tudinally, which causes practically no injury, and
such split nerves enabled us to show a very de-
finite recovery in oxygen-free solutions. The
recovery is equally good, or approximately as
good, wether one puts oxygen-free Ringer on the
nerve or oxygen-free Ringer containing dye. The
sheath is obviously extremely important as a
barrier to diffusion. That had been indicated by
some of Dr. Davis’ experiments on narcosis. It
appears still more strikingly in the present
observations. Thus isotonic glucose does not
block a nerve with intact sheath in three hours,
but blocks one with the sheath split in less than
fifteen minutes. Isotonic CaClz blocked the
intact nerve in fifty minutes, the split one in less
than two, and so on.

The experiments were now modified slightly so
that nerves were asphyxiated in Ringer’s solu-
tion and solid dye introduced without admitting
oxygen. The addition of methylene blue gave no
evidence whatever of recovery; and the same was
true when indophenol was added. In both cases
the addition of oxygen was still effective.

In other experiments, instead of using oxygen
lack we inhibited oxidations by the addition of
cyanide. The addition of N/150 NaCn gave a
progressive fall—SO or 60 minutes to block—and
adding methylene blue in cyanide gave no re-
covery, although washing out the cyanide with
fresh Ringer did.

Although in these experiments the methylene
blue had reached the fibers, and though the nerve

174

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

fibers had reduced the methylene blue, none the
less it was unable to evoke recovery. The reason
for that we do not know. Possibly the rate of
diffusion of methylene blue is so slow compared
to the rate at which it is reduced that at no time
is oxidation raised to a sufficient level to permit
conduction. Another explanation is based on the
energy relations. Much less free energy is
released when a foodstuff is oxidized by methy-
lene blue than when oxidized by oxygen.

Oxygen-free Ringer’s solution applied to
nerve produces some recovery. There are old
observations to the effect that oxygen alone will
not give complete recovery and oxygen-free
Ringer alone will not give complete recovery, but
both together wall.

In experiments which I published in a recent
paper, I found that there was no recovery of
asphyxiated nerve (using intact frog nerves) in
oxygen-free Ringer’s. The difference in my
results and those of other investigators probably
depends on most of their work having been done
on European frogs with much thinner nerve
sheaths. I found also that nerves never in con-
tact with Ringer could recover fully from asphy-
xiation in oxygen alone.

If nerve is asphyxiated more than once, the
second asphyxiation is usually more rapid; but if
one allows a sufficiently long interval between the
first asphyxiation and the second, the rate at
-which the nerve asphyxiates the second time is
not so much increased. The interpretation of
these older findings has been almost universally
in terms of an accumulation of injurious meta-
bolic products which are not oxidized away and
which interfere with the processes in the nerve
involved in conduction.

There are at least three ways in which absence
of oxygen can lead to nerve block: (1) the direct
exhaustion of the precursor of some necessary
reaction—some oxygen reserve in the nerve; (2)
the mass action effect of accumulated products
tending to stop the reaction; (3) some change in
the milieu which prevents the progress of the
reaction although there is still material present
for carrying out oxidation. I think that the action
of oxygen-free Ringer’s solution is rather de-
finitely due to the third, rather than to the second,
of these possibilities. In the first place, nerve
that has been asphyxiuted for more than 8 to 15
hours will still recover very freely in oxygen but
will not recover at all in the oxygen-free Ringer.
A more direct line of evidence is the fact that very
small amounts of Ringer’s solution will produce
recovery about as well as larger amounts and do
it very promptly. The products (if there are
such) which interfere with conduction do not do
so by virtue of an acid reaction because the nerve
recovers in buffer solutions at pH6 or pH7 to the
same extent as in more alkaline ones.

If the dissected nerve is kept in isotonic NaCl
instead of isotonic Ringer for a half hour, its
action potentials continue to act, at asphyxia, in
about the same way, and when one adds Ringer’s
solution one gets no trace of recovery immedi-
ately though adding oxygen gives a_ perfect
return. We fell quite definitely that some other
disturbance in the nerve than the accumulation of
metabolites is at the basis of this fact.

I will just say one more thing on studies of
oxygen consumption, resting and active values of
oxygen consumption in nerve. Of course the
values have been rather widely scattered. ‘Vhe
experiments that I carried out in Europe did not
agree entirely with those of other workers. I
was using a different species of frog from Fenn
and two different kinds of techniques. It is very
satisfying to find that when one applies a different
technique to the material the results are in per-
fectly adequate agreement. The latter experi-
ments on resting and active oxygen consumption
on the part of the European species are not far
from Fenn’s values for pipiens. The index was
about the same. These values Fenn has suggested
are somewhat too high. His most recent figure
is 45 for the resting phase. A series of 227
experiments gave about 42, but increase of stim-
ulation added on 5, this being approximately at
the same temperatures. Most of the experiments
were done in winter.

Some of you heard Dr. Winterstein’s talk last
summer when he made the point that increased
oxygen consumption produced in nerve by
stimulation depends on a direct stimulus rather
than on the activity of the nerve due to conduc-
tion. Being somewhat puzzled by the percentage
increase observed on the American and European
frogs he decided that most of the extra oxygen
consumption during stimulation depended on the
fact that in some cases electrodes from the stimu-
lated region of the nerve were within the chamber
and in some cases without the chamber and in the
latter case one obtained little or no oxygen con-
sumption.

That this is not correct I think is clearly shown.
Mr. Feng has repeated one control I made some
time ago. If the nerve in the manometer chamber
lies on stimulating electrodes one observes an
increase in the rate of oxygen consumption on
stimulation. That might be due to the effect of
the stimulus on the region of the nerve on the
electrodes or it might be due to the activity of
the nerve depending on the conducted impulse.
If one takes a companion nerve on the other side
of the differential manometer, mounted in exactly
the same way, but with the nerve cut across just
below the electrodes leaving an end still on them,
then the stimulus is still able to act upon the
nerve but the activity due to the conduction pro-
cess is abolished. In this case the extra oxygen
consumption of stimulation is likewise abolished.

ers

‘

7)

4

Avucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

175

DISCUSSION

Dr. Schmitt: I don’t believe there is serious
disagreement between our results with cyanide.
The only results we have so far are on muscle
preparations and that is with the threshold method.
Since then we have tried the oscillograph and we
do get decrease in the action potential. I think,
however, that the action potential does decrease,
but in your graph you have shown the action of
cyanide for a matter of perhaps an hour or two.
I'd like to ask whether you have tried it for a
longer time? We found that you could put nerves
in cyanide for hours without affecting the thres-
hold—but it was at least 8-10 hours. Secondly,
have you tried adding the methylene blue or
nitrogen at an early part of failure? We find that
there is a sharp rise which is very much higher in
the early part of failure than in the latter part.
I have tried to plot the rise in action potential
against the relative part in the fall of the irritabil-
ity, but I don’t get a high line. As the failure
proceeds you get a much smaller effect. Have you
tried methylene blue on split nerves in the early
part of failure?

Dr. Gerard: The effect of cyanide on oxygen
consumption in my hands has been much greater
apparently, than in yours. Using N/100 cyanide
I have had 60%, 70%, 80% of inhibition and
have not gotten much greater increases as the
cyanide concentration was made stronger although
I never went as:far as you did. I have not noticed
the curve that you report which, however, might
be due to not following the early stages as closely
as you did. There is no evidence that has come to
my own notice which would suggest that the
cyanide effect might gradually wear off. I did
some cyanide experiments on the heat production
in nerve, using gaseous HCN. Responses re-
mained low under cyanide for many hours without
any sign of recovery whatever.

As regards your second question, Yes and No.
In the first experiments that we tried with methy-
lene blue it seemed quite simple to have it present
from the start and so delay the asphyxia, but as
a matter of fact we found that the methylene blue
nerve went out much quicker than the other. This
suggested the hypothesis that methylene blue
augments the oxygen consumption, and led to
earlier block because the oxygen reserve was
exhausted sooner. Methylene blue does markedly
increase oxygen consumption. We have also
added methylene blue to nerves at times of com-
plete asphyxia. In some cases the dyes were
added considerably earlier than that.

Dr. Schmitt: I mean much earlier than that.

_Dr. Gerard: The indophenol was added about
one-third of the way to block.

Dr. Barron: Dr. Gerard tells me that the
metabolism of nerve is somewhat different from
the metabolism of muscle. Conduction through

herve is quite different from the energy necessary
for the conduction through muscle. We know that
when we add methylene blue to cells there is a
production of lactic acid and the lactic acid will
be oxidized by methylene blue. This oxidized
lactic acid does not take any active part in the
conduction of nerve and you cannot expect the
action of methylene blue to affect contraction of
nerve. In muscle this is quite different. So far
as we know the action of muscle is due to the
change of sugar into lactic acid and fatigue
phenomena are due to the lactic acid produced or
to the production of carbohydrates. In every case
the addition of methylene blue will produce a still
further contraction because you destroy the
lactic acid which is producing the muscle rhythm.
I think it would have been much better if, instead
of using indophenol you had used dyes which
have a higher induction potential. Indophenol
has a very positive potential so that your indo-
phenol is almost reduced and the effect of the dye
will not be seen. It is possible that if you had
used dyes like gentian violet or safranin or neutral
red, the effects would be different.

Dr. Gerard: We were using these dyes not
with the idea of evoking their catalytic action but
simply as hydrogen acceptors—to give a mass of
chemical substance which could be reduced; and
so it seems to me that indophenol as a chemical
which can be easily reduced was the one to be
used. I don’t say that it would not improve the
situation to use other dyes.

The suggestion that methylene blue fails to
cause recovery in nerve because the methylene
blue is reduced only by oxidizing lactic acid
(which has nothing to do with conduction in
nerve) is certainly a possibility. We have planned
to make direct chemical analyses to settle the
question of whether or not this dye does lead to
the removal of lactic acid. In nerve there is a
stimulation of the resting oxygen consumption by
methylene blue, although the lactic acid mechanism
is inactive as long as the nerve is in oxygen.

Dr. Monnier: 1 would like to ask if you
stimulated the nerve always with sugars of the
same strengths or if in each case you used to
stimulate the nerve with a sugar necessary to give
the maximum deflection of the galvanometer ?

Dr. Gerard: Both. You see the nerve was
stimulated at a region that was not exposed to any
change. It was a perfectly normal stretch of
nerve.

Dr. Schmitt: Was there any observation simi-
lar to that which noted that, whereas when you
put only cyanide on, often there is no recovery,
but as soon as only Ringer’s is added there is

recovery?
Dr. Gerard: We now combine cyanide and
Ringer's. It is evidently a matter of washing the

cyanide out with Ringer’s and not with oxygen.

-

176

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

RECOVERY IN THE PASSIVE IRON MODEL
Dr. Racpu S. LILviez

Professor of General Physiology, University of Chicago

In strong HNO: (> 70 vols. %)} the activation
reaction travels along the iron wire in the form
of a clearly defined area or “wave’’ of limited
length. Ina typical circuit transmission in a pure
iron wire suspended in HNOs of 78-80 v. % at
15° this wave has a length of 12-15 cm. and a
speed of ca. 15 cm. per second. The length is
determined by the relation between the speed of
transmission (S) and the duration (T) of the
reaction at each element of surface (1. e, L =
ST), and decreases as the concentration of HNOs;
increases. At any point on the surface the metal
reacts with the acid for a brief time (ca. 1 second
in the above instance), and then instantly becomes
again passive. Two processes are thus concerned
in the formation of the wave; the first is the local
activating process of electrochemical reduction,
which disrupts the passivating film and allows
metal and acid to interact ; the second is the oxida-
tive reaction which restores the film (repassiva-
tion process). Transmission depends on the
first; the second may be compared with the
recovery process in the irritable living element ;
it is similar in its general relations to the process
occurring during the so-called refractory period,
by which the activated nerve fibre or muscle cell
regains its original reactivity. In strong acid
the wire always shows this prompt spontaneous
repassivation.

In the iron wire the recovery process consists
in the production of a new surface film having
the same properties as the original film before
activation. Repassivation, however, forms only
a part of the whole process. In general two
separate phases are distinguishable: first, the
formation of the adherent and impermeable oxide
film which confers passivity; this occurs rapidly,
its most definite index being the electromotor
variation of passivation; second, a more prolonged
phase during which the repassivated wire, which
at first transmits imperfectly, regains by degrees
its original transmissivity. Schematically we may
represent the sequence of events thus:

Recovery Process
(1) Phase of Repassivation
(2) Phase of Imperfect Transmission

(a) decremental period
(b) relatively slowly transmitting
period

When we activate a series of similar passive
wires in 70 v. % HNO; at regularly increasing
intervals after a previous activation the
phenomena of transmission are observed to vary
with time in the following manner. At first the
transmission is typically decremental; i. e., the
activation wave travels for only a limited distance

and then stops short. As time advances the dis-
tance travelled increases and eventually the trans-
mission becomes again complete, although at first
it is slower than in a completely recovered wire;
by degrees it regains its original speed. A similar
variation in transmissive properties has been
shown to occur in muscle and nerve during the
relative refractory period.

The duration of the entire recovery period
varies with the nature of the wire, the concentra-
tion of HNOs, the presence of foreign (e. g.,
surface active) substances and the temperature.
In pure soft iron wire in 70 v. % HNO3 at 20°
it lasts for only a few seconds, while in steel
(piano) wire it lasts 15 minutes or more. The
precise reason for this difference of behavior in
different kinds of wire is unknown, but is appar-
ently related to the special structure of the
metallic surface.

The present observations were made with steel
wires and have reference to the time required for
the freshly activated wire, immersed in HNO3 of
varying concentrations at 20°, to recover its ability
to transmit completely or non-decrementally when
transferred to strong acid (70 v. % and pure 1.42
HNO;). In each experiment a number of com-
pletely recovered wires 50 cm. long were first
activated simultaneously in strong acid; they
were then immediately transferred with platinum-
tipped forceps to HNOs of the concentration under
examination. After measured intervals of ex-
posure to this acid they were returned one by one
to strong acid and immediately activated by
touching with zinc. The minimal time required
for the recovery of complete transmissivity is thus
determined, usually within one half minute. A
large number of observations were made with each
concentration of acid and the results were
averaged, with estimate of probable errors; this
is necessary because the individual variations are
considerable, even with wires cut from the same
roll and treated as uniformly as possible. Con-
sistent uniformity is shown by such averages.

The preceding description of the recovery pro-
cess refers to wires activated in strong acid and
allowed to recover in the same acid. If passive
wires are activated while immersed in weak acid
the phenomena are entirely different. A wire
activated in strong acid, immediately transferred
to weak acid ( < 50 v. %), and then touched with
zine instantly transmits rapidly along its whole
length and remains active; i. e., effervescence and
solution continue unchecked until the whole wire
is dissolved. In this case the decremental stage
is entirely absent, as is also the spontaneous re-
passivation or recovery. Such an experiment

A a lll A A EAI TLD (ey eM RS

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

177

shows that automatic repassivation requires a
certain minimal concentration of HNOs; it also
shows that the condition which determines re-
passivation is the same as the condition which
renders the wire for a time decrementally instead
of completely transmissive. This condition is
a certain critical intensity of oxidative action. It
is evident that decremental transmission depends
on some special peculiarities of the newly formed
film, since it disappears after a certain period in
the acid. The nature of the conditions may per-
haps be best indicated as follows. If we take a
wire at a certain stage of recovery in 70% HNOs,
e. g. Y% minute after activation in this solution,
we find that it transmits completely if immersed
in 50% HNOs, but only for a few centimeters if
immersed in 70% acid, and hardly at all in 100%
acid. In general, the distance of transmission is
less (or the degree of decrement greater) the
stronger the acid in which the wire is activated.
Within the region occupied by the activation wave
each element of surface is the seat of two distinct
chemical processes which are opposed in their
general effect: the one reducing (film-disruptive),
the other oxidative (film-forming). The relative
intensities of these two processes determine which
one gains the upper hand. If the oxidation process
has more than a certain intensity the film becomes
continuous and the reaction ceases; if it has less
than this intensity no protective film is formed
and the reaction continues unchecked.

In the typical automatically reversed activation
reaction in strong acid the initial local reduction
is immediately succeeded by an oxidation which
reforms the film, but which at the same time
imparts to the newly formed film some structural
or other character unfavorable to transmission.
If, however, the wire is left in the acid for some
time before reactivation it recovers the ability to
transmit as before. Evidently this change from
the decremental to the non-decremental state is
the expression or index of some progressive
chemical or structural change in the surface film
occurring under the influence of the acid.

The rate of this change is a direct function of
the concentration of acid. To illustrate: in a
series of preliminary observations the wires were
activated in 70 v. % HNO; and were allowed to
recover in acid of the four concentrations given
below. The exposures required to render them
again completely transmissive in 70 v. % HNO3
were as follows:

Concentration Minimal Exposure for
(v. Yo HNO, of Recovery of Transmission
1.42 sp. gr.) (minutes at 19°-20°)
10 25
25 i > 11 (est. ca. 16)
70 - 6-7

G 100 | 3% -4

The rate of recovery thus increases with the
concentration, being about seven times as rapid
in the concentrated as in the 10 v. % HNOs3.

In a more complete series of experiments the
exposures required to render wires completely
transmissive while immersed in 100% (1.42)
HNO3 were determined for a series of concen-
trations ranging between 15v.% and 100v. %.
In general these exposures (for any given con-
centration) are about twice as long as those re-
quired to render the wires transmissive in 70%
HNOs. That is, at a certain stage of recovery
the passivating film has properties permitting
complete transmission in the weaker but not in
the stronger acid. The decremental transmission
observed in the stronger acid is the expression of
its more intense oxidative action, which interferes
with the local reduction that determines transmis-
sion.

The results of this series are summarized in
the following table.

Concentration Minimal Exposure for Product
(C) Recovery of Trans- CT

(v. Y HNO, of mission in minutes

sp. gr. 1.42) at 19°-20° (T)
15 ca. 40 ca. 600
20 35.5 plus or minus 0.47 710
30 3.5 plus or minus 0.26 705
40 17.8 plus or minus 0.28 712
59 16.6 plus or minus 0.10 830
60 14.1 plus or minus 0.11 846
70 12.4 plus or minus 0.15 868
80 11.4 plus or minus 0.11 912
100 10.5 plus or minus 0.13 1005

It is plain that at its first deposition in strong
acid the passivating film has some structural or
other character, such as thickness, irregular
orientation of molecules, or possibly a less inti-
mate contact with the metallic surface, which
makes it relatively resistant to electrolytic reduc-
tion. Under the action of the external acid this
structure changes in such a way as to render the
film progressively more reducible, until finally
a limiting stage is reached corresponding to
maximal transmissivity. This stage of complete
recovery is the stage at which the film is most
readily reduced; this is shown further by the fact
that the threshold of electrical activation is then
lowest, as has been determined in other experi-
ments.

The hypothesis of a solvent action by which the
outer layers of the oxide film (at its first deposi-
tion presumably several molecules thick) are
dissolved away as ferric nitrate seems the most
probable one to explain the general course of the
recovery process. The same final stage is reached
in the different concentrations of acid, but at a
rate which increases with concentration. The
relation of concentration to rate of recovery
appears nearly proportional in the lower concen-

178

trations up to 50 v. %; i. e., there is an approach
to a mass action effect. The relatively slower
recovery in the stronger acid may indicate the
superposition of two actions, one the solvent action
of the acid on the film, the other an oxidative
action by which the oxide layer is renewed or
reinforced (probably intermittently) as the re-
action proceeds. This apparent retardation of
recovery is found only in the passivating concen-
trations and becomes more pronounced as the
concentration increases. Occasionally , under
conditions difficult to define, wires have been
found to remain decrementally transmissive in

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

pure 1.42 HNO; for abnormally long periods,
even several hours. This condition is certainly
an effect of strong oxidation. On the general
view just indicated the state of maximal trans-
missivity would correspond to a minimal thick-
ness of the oxide sheet, possibly monomolecular.
Further thinning in the strong acid would be
automatically prevented, because any accidental
local interruptions exposing the metal, being local
anodes with high current density, would be
instantly repaired.

170 volumes C. P. HNO, of 1.42 sp. gr. in 100 volumes
of solution.

DISCUSSION

May I ask whether the action
modification during the

Dr. Amberson:
potential undergoes
recovery period ?

Dr. Lillie: 1 have observed no parallel change
in the potential between the iron and the surround-
ing acid. If any such change occurs it is certainly
a very minute fraction of the potential change of
activation which amounts to about 0.7 of a volt.
Immediately after activation one does observe,
under certain conditions, an after-positivity, but
this disappears very rapidly if one removes, by
stirring, the layer of acid adhering to the wire
so that I regard this not as a change in the electro-
motor properties of the film itself.

Dr. Bronk: Under what conditions do you
get rhythmic transmission?

Dr. Lillie: One can get a rhythmic transmis-
sion if one simply maintains a local area of
activity at any point on the surface of. the wire.
One may do that in a variety of ways—for

instance by continuous contact with a base metal
like zinc, or by enclosing the end of the wire in
a glass tube, thus preventing repassivation. Then
this continuously active region acts as a pace-
maker.

Dr. Monnier: How long does the second
phase of recovery, recovery of the original trans-
mission velocity, require?

Dr. Lillie: It varies according to the character
of the iron and also according to the strength of
the acid. In the steel wires perhaps 15 to 20
minutes are required at 20° for the wire activated
in 70% acid to regain its transmissivity. But in
the case of pure soft iron wire, practically carbon-
free, the same stage of recovery is reached in a
few seconds—perhaps 10 or 15. Recovery may
thus proceed about 100 times as rapidly in some
specimens of wire as in others under the same
external conditions.

MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS APPLIED TO SOME FUNCTIONS OF THE
NERVOUS SYSTEM
Dr. A. M. Monnier
Assistant in Physiology, Sorbonne, Paris

After Lapicque, Keith Lucas and R. S. Lillie.
it has been assumed that the working of the
nervous system depended upon the time factors
of its different parts. Conduction through a
synapse was said to be possible only if both the
axon side and the dendrite side of the synapse
had the same chronaxie or in other words were
isochronous. This is the analogy to the resonance
phenomenon which is so obvious in the tuning of
radio sets. But radio waves are a_ periodic,
oscillatory phenomenon, quite different from the
monophasic, non-periodic nerve action potential.
Until recently there was no real demonstration
that such non-periodic phenomena were subject
to resonance just as periodic systems.

Irritability in nerve under constant current
stimulation undergoes, according to Bishop, a
change similar in shape to the curve of the action
potential in nerve. Such curves are similar to

double exponentials. These double exponentials
can be transposed easily into a damped-hyperbolic
function :

V=e- Bt/T X sh X t/T
where sh = hyperbolic sine.
Usefulness of such functions in electrical
engineering has been fully demonstrated by
Kennelly. Their basis, instead of being a circle,
as for ordinary sines, is a rectangular hyperbola.
Such an equation is very much like an ordinary
damped sine wave. The only difference is the
nature of the sine. Therefore most of the pro-
perties of the damped sine wave can be applied
to such an hyperbolic function, and also through
analogy to nervous phenomena.

Fortunately damped sine waves are well known.
The early radio, spark telegraph, used only
damped oscillating circuits and there is quite an
amount of mathematical literature on the subject.

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

179

Tuning a receptor oscillatory circuit shows a
marked resonance phenomenon. When _ the
damped sine wave has the same period as the
receptor circuit the current in the latter is the
largest. The resonance curve, when plotted on
semi-logarithmic coordinates, is perfectly symme-
tric, that is to say, when, for instance, the period
of the sine wave is twice the period of the circuit,
the current in the circuit is exactly the same as
when the period of the sine wave is half the
period of the circuit.

Damped hyperbolic functions show also a
resonance curve. On that basis we may say that
the stimulating effect at the dendrite of a synapse
should be maximum when the action potential
travelling along the axon side of the synapse has
a duration consistent with the chronaxie of the
dendrite. As duration of action potential is related
to chronaxie, the nervous impulse should go
through a synapse most easily when both axon
and dendrite have the same chronaxie. But the
resonance curve of damped hyperbolic function
is nO more symmetric, as it shows on its low
frequency side a much smaller slope than on its
high frequency side. This indicates that the
nervous impulse should flow more easily from
axon to dendrite than from dendrite to axon,
providing the chronaxie of the axon is slightly
larger than the chronaxie of the dendrite. This
demonstration would account for the fact of one
way conduction in synapses. Such a theoretical
result had been* forethought by R. S. Lillie years
ago. } j

Isochronism permits conduction: a less perfect
isochronism insures one way conduction. Un-
fortunately, as an experimental proof, we cannot
stimulate a dendrite with action potential of dif-
ferent duration. But we can stimulate a nerve
with a close image of an action potential, namely
with a double condenser discharge. This is what

I have done in St. Louis with a cathode ray
oscillograph, which permits great accuracy in the
observation of the threshold action potential.

When the reciprocal of the liminal voltage is
plotted against the duration of the stimulating
discharge, we obtain an experimental resonance
curve decidedly asymmetric.

One way conduction may be based on another
process. According to Adrian and Bronk
sensory nerves transmit not single impulses but
repetitive impulses of very short duration. My
actual work at Woods Hole shows that the chro-
naxie of the lateral line of the dogfish (a sensory
nerve) measured with the cathode ray oscillograph
is about one sixth of a thousandth of a second.
If the chronaxie of the dendrite is very large
compared with the chronaxie of the sensory axon,
the stimulating effect of each isolated subliminal
action potential of the axon will pile up, until
after several impulses stimulation occurs. It is
only through repetition that nervous impulses can
overcome a large heterochronism. No isolated
action potential starting from the dendrite could
flow backwards to the axon, so here again we have
one way conduction.

The summation of subliminal repeated stimuli
or action potentials in sensory nerve can be
demonstrated easily. Mathematical calculation
shows that the shorter the lag between each sub-
liminal stimulus, the smaller those stimuli have
to be to insure stimulation. This theoretical curve
follows closely Chauchard’s? experiment on sti-
mulation of different tissues by repetitive stimuh.

This is only a brief attempt to show how
mathematical analysis may be used to obtain a
clearer illustration of nervous phenomena.

1Jillie, R. S., The Conditions Determining the Rate
of Conduction in Irritable Tissues and Especially Nerve.
Amer. Jour. of Physiol. 1914 - 34,

2Chauechard, D. B., Recherches Quantitatives sur
Addition Latente. Ann, de Physiol. 1925 - I.

DISCUSSION

Dr. Davis: Dr. Monnier has given a very in-
teresting account of how a certain type of analysis
can be applied to questions of stimulation. I

think it is very much in place to apply such
analyses to processes such as the summation of
inadequate stimuli in the nerve trunk. There we
have cumulative evidence of various sorts that
we are dealing with processes which are primarily
physical. Personally I have felt very hesitant
about carrying this same type of analysis into the
nerve centers, into synapses. I think we ought to
be very cautious about thinking of it as anything
more than the merest tentative working hypo-
thesis. And what do you do with the problem of
inhibition ?

Dr. Monnier:
picture.

y That is true. It is a crude
It is only trying to translate facts into

a convenient language in order to interpret these
facts.

Dr. Davis: Perhaps to some of us without the
advantage of your training it is a question
whether or not it is quite so convenient a language.

Dr. Garrey: In all cases where there are
phenomena of inhibition we find a very marked
change in the metabolic state of the tissues them-
selves. Inhibition really becomes a type of
stimulation, if you wish to call it that, and I think
it is very doubtful whether it is a synaptic pheno-
menon at all. That same phenomenon appears in
the heart of the cold-blooded animals. If inhibi-
tory drugs are applied you will find that there is
a further inhibition in the production of CO, and
in the consumption of oxygen. Perhaps we will
have to extend our concept of just what we mean
by such phenomena.

180

THE COLLECTING NET

Dr. Monnier: I perfectly agree. We do not
know anything about the chronaxie between two
terminals of the synapse. It is unfortunate but
it is a fact. It is purely a hypothetical idea. The
idea of “isochronaxie” occurs to one’s mind be-
cause it seems easy, perhaps too easy.

Dr. Lillie: Of course it need not be pointed
out that there may be a formal correspondence
between two types of phenomena without any
close correspondence in the actual detailed nature
of the phenomena themselves.

PATTERNS OF SOME EXTRA OCULAR REFLEXES OF THE CAT
Dr. Grayson P. McCoucu

Assistant Professor of Physiology, University of Pennsylvania
F. H. ADLER

Stretch reflexes could not be elicited from any
of the muscles tested (external rectus, internal
rectus, inferior oblique).
ation is reciprocal in the sense that relaxation of
antagonist is synchronous in onset with con-

traction of the prime mover; but the curve of
relaxation begins to fall somewhat more steeply
than that of contraction begins to rise. The tension
developed is low: rarely more than four grams
higher at the peak than at the trough.

In nystagmus innerva-

In the retraction of the eyeball associated with
the wink from stimulation of the conjunctive,
each head of the retractor bulbi develops a tension
often exceeding forty of fifty grams. The recti
all serve as passive transmittors of the pull from
retractor bulbi. Usually either internal or ex-
ternal rectus shares actively in the contraction
the wink from stimulation of the conjunctiva,
The form of contraction indicates rapid recruit-
ment followed by relaxation almost as abrupt and
complete as that following a neuromyal tetanus.

THE BEHAVIOR OF A DECORTICATE CAT
Dr. Purtip Barp
Assistant Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

In this animal the cortex of the right cerebral
hemisphere was ablated on July 5, 1929, that of
the left hemisphere on December 23, 1929. At
the time of these operations it was recognized that
there remained the olfactory bulbs, the olfactory
radiations and a large part of the olfactory cortex
(paleocortex and archipallium). The full ex-
tent of the cerebral ablation and injury cannot be
determined until autopsy. Consequently the pres-
ent report is incomplete and unsatisfactory. But
it is probably not far from the truth to state that
the behavior of this animal is that of a cat which
lacks neocortex and has suffered a partial des-
truction of olfactory cortex on both sides.

_ The animal was kept under observation for nine
months before the first intracranial operation was
performed. During that time she showed her-
self to be an alert, gentle, and friendly animal.
From the first she sought, obtained, and enjoyed
a good deal of petting. She always purred when
stroked and she submitted to rough handling with-
out exhibiting anger or fear. She showed anger
only when actually hurt, usually displayed re-
sentment when approached by any other cat, and
she took the usual feline interest in rats. These
facts are of interest in connection with her post-
operative behavior.

Since recovery from the immediate effects of
the second operation the general conduct and the
evokable reactions of this cat have shown a strik-
ing uniformity; nothing has been lost and nothing
gained. She crouches or lies for long periods of
time without moving. Occasionally she licks the

anterior part of her body. In hot weather she
stretches out; when exposed to cold she tends to
assume a compact posture. She walks about only
when food has been withheld for more than a day
or when her bladder is distended. Her walk,
though somewhat stiff, is fairly normal. When
placed on her back or side she immediately rights
herself, but when dropped back-down she does
not right herself in the air as quickly as a normal
cat. When crouching, sitting, standing or walk-
ing the distribution of tone in leg muscles is near-
ly normal; when any unusual position is imposed
the leg extensors show a hypertonia comparable to
that shown by a decerebrate preparation. Often
while sitting a hind leg is kept rigidly thrust for-
ward. When held in an abnormal position she
shows no resentment and seldom attempts to re-
gain the normal position.

The responses of this animal to certain sensory
stimuli are invariable and distinct. Illumination of
the eye evokes a brisk constriction of both pupils
and, if the light be intense, blinking also occurs.
On the other hand no other visual responses have
been noted. In walking she bumps into all obstacles
in her path and she shows no response to moving
noiseless objects. Definite auditory reactions can
be obtained. The head is turned toward the source
of certain sounds. Shuffling or scraping noises
are especially effective in evoking this reaction.
When the cat has been without food for some
hours the proximity of highly odorous food such
as canned salmon invariably evokes lowering of
the head, sniffing and licking. She is unable to

[Vot. V. No. 37 —

4
a
x

i
Aa

Aveust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

181

find such food by herself, but licks it when it is
placed immediately under her nose or when her
mouth is put in it. In this way she is able to
feed herself. Short bouts of feeding then alter-
nate with prolonged periods of licking of nose
and lips. This licking is an exaggeration of the
post-prandial behavior of normal cats. She is
wholly indifferent to milk and will not lap it, but
will do so with avidity if a little salmon juice be
added. A very curious response shown by this cat
is that of licking the floor, her chest or her fore-
legs whenever any part of her body is gently
rubbed or scratched. This is apparently an over-
response to a tactile stimulation devoid of “local
signature.”

Of special interest are the emotional reactions
of this decorticate cat. The affective behavior of the
decorticate dogs of Goltz and of Rothmann and of
the two hemisphereless cats of Dusser de Berenne
was confined to a reaction, capable of regular
elicitation, which closely resembled the rage of a
normal member of the same species. The same
is true of this cat. Definite anger can often be
evoked by merely picking her up and moderate
pinching of her tail always evokes hissing, snarl-
ing, striking, biting, retraction of the ears, lashing
of the tail, erection of hair, dilation of the pupils
and acceleration of the heart rate. This indicates
that expression of rage is dependent upon sub-
cortical neural mechanisms and previous work
(Bard. Ainer. J. Physiol., 1928, 84, 490) has
shown that these are located in the hypothalamic
region. On the basis of this fact it might be ex-

pected that other primitive emotional reactions
also have a neural basis in subcortical parts of the
brain. It is of interest therefore to know that
this animal is capable of showing fear. It has
been found that very loud noises such as the es-
cape of steam under high pressure cause this
decorticate cat to cringe, move rapidly sidewise
away from the source of the sound in a sneaking
manner with wide eyes and plaintive vocalization,
and, in short, to give every sign of intense terror.
It would be of the greatest interest to know wheth-
er such an animal as this is capable of sexual be-
havior. Unfortunately in an unsuccessful at-
tempt to give her away as a pet both ovaries were
removed in November, 1928. Nevertheless, a
month after the final operation, it was noted that
insertion of a vaginal thermometer evoked eleva-
tion of the pelvic region with treading movements
of the hind legs followed by rolling on the floor.
She attracts the male over considerable periods of
time, but shows no response to his advances other
than the rage which is evoked whenever she is
roughly handled. On three occasions when intro-
mission took place she rolled and became distinct-
ly playful; observation shows that this is an almost
invariable response in normal female cats when
approached by the male. In this decorticate cat
a reaction which constitutes a part of the elaborate
courtship behavior of the normal female is evoked
only by direct sexual contact. In conclusion it
may be stated that the proximity or contact of a
rat or the barking of a dog have no effect what-
ever upon this animal nor does purring ever occur.

RE-EDUCATION AND THE MODIFICATION OF REFLEXES
Dr. Hottowett anp P. A. Davis
Department of Physiology, Harvard Medical School

In a series of experiments, initiated by Mr. 5S.
Roberg and Dr. Alexander Forbes, we undertook
to find the effect on the reflex centers of the cat
induced by a re-education in the functional use
of these centers. The sciatic nerve was cut at the
popliteal space and the peripheral end of the
peroneal division sutured to the central end of
the popliteal-tibial division, and vice versa. When
regeneration occurred the flexor muscles of the
ankle were persumably innervated by extensor
nerves, and vice versa. In spite of this change of
central connections the animals showed fairly good
functional regeneration in six months, being able
to coordinate the movements of the ankle joint
in question in walking and running.

In the acute experiments the animals showed,
under light ether, a general extensor rigidity
including this ankle joint. Stimulation of an
ipsilateral sensory nerve resulted in a flexion

reflex. The reflex activities of gastrocnemius and
of tibialis anticus muscles recorded separately
under ether, following decerebration and follow-
ing spinal transection, were somewhat variable,
but suggested a partial modification of the reflex
centers to correspond to the new functional con-
nections. The modification was more evident
after decerebration and before spinal transection
than after transection.

The results cannot be regarded as final, how-
ever, as we found that normally the peroneal
nerve, assumed to be purely flexor in function,
includes nerves to certain foot muscles which
contract during an extension reflex, and the
poplitealtibial nerve similarly carries a few
flexor fibers. The experiments must therefore
be extended and confirmed, using motor nerves
which are purely flexor and purely extensor in
their motor function.

DISCUSSION

Dr. McCouch: 1 have nothing to add in the
way of discussion, except to say that it is the

first positive attack, the first successful one, on
what to my mind is one of the most fascinating

182 THE COLLECTING NET

and important problems in the integration of the
nervous system.

Dr. Gerard: Some kind of reintegration in the
spinal cord must take place, I think. I recall
the case of a young rat whose spinal cord was
transected. Later on it turned out that we had
missed a very fine strand of tissue of one of the
lateral columns. There was immediate inco-
ordination between the front and rear halves of
the animal; the legs would twitch in response to
pressing the tail and that kind of thing. In the
course of six weeks, however, the animal walked,
ran, and climbed about in a manner which no one

[Vot. V. No. 37

could tell from normal, was able to climb. In
fact it was impossible to tell that the motor co-
ordination of the animal was in any way disturbed.
Nevertheless, examination of the animal showed
that there was only a very fine strand of tissue
connecting the front and back portions of the
spinal cord.

Dr. Lillie: It is said that persons may adjust
themselves very readily to the pseudoscope, which
inverts images.

If there is no further discussion, we will
adjourn.

OFFICIAL LABORATORY MEETINGS

The annual meeting of the Trustees of the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory will be held on Tues-
day morning, August 12. At noon on the same
day the members of the Corporation will meet
for the Election of Officers and Trustees and the
transaction of such business as may come before
the meeting. Because of these meetings it seems
worthwhile to print the by-laws of the Corpora-
tion.

BY-LAWS OF THE CORPORATION OF THE MARINE
BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

I. The annual meeting of the members shall be
held on the second Tuesday in August, at the Labora-
tory, in Woods Hole, Mass., at 12 o’clock noon, in each
year, and at such meeting the members shall choose
by ballot a Treasurer and a Clerk to serve one year, and
eight Trustees to serve four years. There shall be
thirty-two Trustees thus chosen divided into four
classes, each to serve four years, and in addition there
shall be two groups of Trustees as follows: (a) Trustees
ex Officio, who shall be the President of the Corpora-
tion, the Director of the Laboratory, the Associate Di-
rector, the Treasurer and the Clerk; (b) Trustees Em-
eriti, who shall be elected from the Trustees by the
Corporation. Any regular Trustee who has attained
the age of seventy years shall continue to serve as Trus-
tee until the next annual meeting of the Corporation,
whereupon his office as regular Trustee shall become
vacant and be filled by election by the Corporation and
he shall become eligible for election as Trustee Emeritus
for life. The Trustees ex officio and Emeriti shall
each have the same right to vote as the regular Trustees.

The Trustees and officers shall hold their respective
offices until their successors are chosen and have quali-
fied in their stead.

II. Special meetings of the members may be called
by the Trustees to be held in Boston or in Woods Hole
at such time and place as may be designated.

Ill. The Clerk shall give notice of meetings of the
members by publication in some daily newspaper pub-

THE BEACH

There has been considerable discussion during
the summer regarding “rights” on the so-called
Breakwater Bathing Beach on the Bay Shore or
Buzzards Bay side of Woods Hole. It seems
worth while to draw attention to some of the
points involved.

The records show clearly that there is no
bathing beach in Woods Hole owned by the Town

lished in Boston at least fifteen days before such meet-
ing, and in ease of a special meeting the notice shall
state the purpose for which it is called.

IV. Twenty-five members shall constitute a quorum
at any meeting.

V. The Trustees shall have the control and manage-
ment of the affairs of the Corporation; they shall pre-
sent a report of its condition at every annual meeting;
they shall elect one of their number President of the
Corporation who shall also be Chairman of the Board of
Trustees; they shall appoint a director of the Labora-
tory; and they may choose such other officers and
agents as they may think best; they may fix the com-
pensation and define the duties of all the officers and
agents; and may remove them, or any of them, except
those chosen by the members, at any time; they may
fill vacancies occurring in any manner in their own
number or in any of the offices. They shall from time
to time elect members to the Corporation upon such
terms and conditions as they may think best.

VI. Meetings of the Trustees shall be called by the
President, or by any two Trustees, and the Secretary
shall give notice thereof by written or printed notice
sent to each Trustee by mail, postpaid. Seven Trustees
shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of busi-
ness. The Board of Trustees shall have power to
choose an Executive Committee from their own number,
and to delegate to such Committee such of their own
powers as they may deem expedient.

VII. The accounts of the Treasurer shall be audited
annually by a certified public accountant.

VIII. The consent of every Trustee shall be neces-
sary to dissolution of the Marine Biological Laboratory.
In ease of dissolution, the property shall be disposed of
in such manner and upon such terms as shall be de-
termined by the affirmative vote of two-thirds of the
Board of Trustees.

IX. These By-laws may be altered at any meeting
of the Trustees, provided that the notice of such
meeting shall state that an alteration of the By-laws
will be acted upon.

X. Any member in good standing may vote at any
meeting, either in person or by proxy duly executed.

QUESTION

and therefore accessible to all. The Breakwater
Beach, including the bath houses, the so-called
Laboratory Beach adjoining the Gansett property
and the Nobska Beach are all privately owned.
When the Breakwater Beach property, Lot X on
the Town plan, was sold, certain rights were given
to “any such inhabitants of Woods Hole as make
it their home to use the bathing beach and passage

Pee a>

~

Auecust 2, 1930 |

it COLEBCTING NET

183

thereto”. These rights apply to a strip of shore
ten to fifteen feet wide and two hundred feet long
extending in front of the bath house. The rest
of the adjoining béach on either side of the bath
house is*privately owned The deeds to these lots
read “to the waters of Buzzards Bay”. However,
I am told by the authorities at the Town Hall in
Falmouth, that while formerly titles were given
to read “to the waters of Buzzards Bay” recent
decisions by the Land Court indicate that a title is
good only to “Mean High Tide”.

Different interpretations have been given of the
term “Waters of Buzzards Bay”. One of the
property owners on the Bay Shore has, he tells
me, had a well known Boston lawyer look into
the matter and has been told that his deed entitles
him to the beach in front of his property at all
states of the tide; indeed that the title tothe land
is such that any person in the water in front of
the property would be trespassing if he had his
feet on the bottom. It is generally understood, I
believe, that this or some similar interpretation is
claimed by the other owners of property on the
beach. It is clear, therefore, at least in the
opinion of the property holders, that those who
bathe on any of the beaches at Woods Hole are
either trespassers or guests of the owners of the
adjoining property, unless they are on the small
strip opposite the bath houses and are “such in-
habitants of Woods Hole as make it their home”.

Appeal has been made to certain ancient fishing
rights. It may, be doubted, however, if shell or
any other fish are abundant enough to attract fish-
ermen there. Perhaps a sufficiently liberal in-

terpretation of these rights might make them ap-
ply to Venus anadyomene and classify the linger-
ing sunlit swains as fishermen. But the law is
prosaic. It is rumoured that a wall may be built.
The justification for this is again sought in an
ancient custom. It would be a “cattle fence”.
And again it may be asked if cattle are sufficiently
abundant on the beach and prone to trespass as to
warrant the building of a stone wall.

There is of course no question as to the im-
portance to Woods Hole of a bathing beach.
People will always want to come to Woods Hole
but they will not always want to bring their
families with them if they cannot be sure of
enjoying the beach. The value of property here
depends largely on the number of families who
come to Woods Hole or want to come.

The Town of Falmouth has already taken over
by “Eminent Domain” Old Silver Beach and the
beach at West Falmouth. Shall it take over the
“bathing beach”? This of course would prove a
hardship to the few who at present enjoy the
private ownership of its separate portions, but is
that to be weighed against the hardship to the
hundreds who may be deprived of the right of
even walking on the beach? If the Town of Fal-
mouth had the title to the bathing beach, then im-
provements in the state of the beach and the
bathing facilities could be made by the Town or
by private subscription. Any improvements made
under the present status of the beach by public
subscription would be made on property privately
owned on which the public has no claim.

James W. Mavor.

THE DEDICATION OF THE BELL TOWER

St. Joseph’s Tower is named for the patron
saint of the little Catholic Church of Woods Hole.
It was blessed and dedicated Thursday, July the
thirty-first.

The Bishop of Fall River, in whose diocese we
live, came over for the occasion and was much
gratified, as were all the Catholics present, at the
courtesy of the Choral Society in singing both
in St. Joseph’s Garden and in the church.

In his address Bishop Cassidy spoke of the im-
possibility of a real conflict between Catholicism
and Science.

_ The Church is very old and she moves cautious-

ly as one bearing a precious burden, but she is
‘unafraid because her infallibility is promised by

her Founder. For two thousand years she has
been assaulted by her enemies and the sins of her
members, but, as Baron Friedrich von Hiigel says
“Her beauty and resourcefulness are her constant
guarantee.”

Science, in a certain sense, is also infallible.
The faith of scientists is that our minds do not in
the end deceive us, though, as_ individuals,
deficient in discipline, we may and do err.

\

Art, religion, science, all the various activities
man has engaged in for his solace and enlighten-
ment should not fear each other, but endeavor to
understand each other and to cooperate in the
darkness and mystery that sometimes seem to
overwhelm us in this strange world.

As for the bells themselves, nothing more beau-
tiful could be said of them than what Mr. Alfeo
Faggi, the artist of the St. Joseph door and the
Stations in the tower, said “Have you not observed
the contrast between the solemn warning of the
bells of the sea in the dark night and the bright
morning when the Angelus bells ring out the
great message that God Himself has come to our
rescue 2”

F.C. Lilhe:

THE COLLECTING NET SCHOLARSHIPS
(Continued from Page 165)
course, will be submitted to a committee of senior
investigators for the selection of successful can-
didates. A summary of work accomplished dur-
ing the period which the scholarship was held will
be published in Tue Cottectine Net.

184

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 37

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell (5 fit tese etetaaeite cates sels alow Editor

Assistant Editors
Annaleida S, Cattell

Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

Mary Howe

Little Beach

Contrary to an editorial note which appeared
in the last number of THe Cottectrne NEt, the
laboratory does not own “Little Beach” or, in
fact, any part of it. The reservation is the pro-
perty of the Fays. When the Gansett tract was
acquired by the laboratory, provision was made
that its lot holders should have access to the
beach for bathing purposes. Special provision
was made only for those members of the labor-
atory who owned land in the Gansett tract, and it
is therefore strictly a private beach.

Dr. Alfred Meyer has made a contribution of
$25.00 to Tue Cottectinc Net Scholarship
Fund. This contribution is deeply appreciated
because of its size—and also because we have
never asked him for a contribution. Dr. Meyer
has made a contribution to our fund every year
since we began collecting money in our net, and
his gifts have thus assisted several students in
returning to Woods Hole to continue their work
in biology.

A great many people attend the Wednesday
night concerts at the M. B. L. Club. The sug-
gestion has been made that all of the listeners
should be members of the Club. Probably not
more than half of them have paid their member-
ship dues. The radio equipment for reproducing
the music was expensive and every interested per-
son ought to contribute towards its cost by join-

ing the Club.

Due to the change in the train schedule on July
27, the Post Office hours have also been altered.
A new schedule follows:

Mails Close Mails Due

6:45 10:35
IPs 340
525 6:09

The Post Office building is open from 7 a. m.
until 7:50 p. m. on week days and a few hours
Sunday morning while the 10:35 mail is being
distributed. The window is closed about an hour
after each incoming mail and all day on Sunday.

BEACH IMPROVEMENTS
To the Editor:

With the possibility of a voting day on town war-
rants in Falmouth impending before January Ist, it
would be very desirable to place before the people of
Falmouth for their support the question of the perma-
nent improvement of the Breakwater Bathing Beach.

Falmouth has a recent, nearby example of the benefits
conferred on a bathing beach by a jetty. This projee-
tion by slowing the sidewise movement of the water,
favors the deposition instead of the washing out of
sand such as occurred last winter at Falmouth Beach
as well as at the Breakwater Beach. Marked beach—
building was obtained at the Falmouth Beach, according
to Mr. E. M. Lewis, Park Commissioner, in the course
of a few weeks.

A stone jetty extending at right angles to the shore
at a point somewhere near the west end of the bath
house, would, in the opinion of Mr. Frank Taylor, an
experienced harbor man and dredging operator of New
Eedford, in all probability, have the effect of covering
the beach with sand in the course of a season, although
it could not be guaranteed to do so. The jetty would
be constructed of large rocks placed between creosoted,
machine-driven piles. The jetty would be about 6
feet wide at the top, and could be used as a walk to
deep water. The artistic features of the jetty would
be taken into consideration as much as possible.

The cost of such a jetty to the Town of Falmouth as
estimated by Mr. Taylor, would be around $1000, which
would soon be realized by the town of Falmouth and
the business people of Woods Hole by adding to the
attractiveness of Woods Hole as a summer resort.

The acquiring of property rights in the beach front
by the Town of Falmouth simultaneously with the
authorization for improving the beach by a jetty seems
an important question for consideration at this time,
in view of a conveyance seen by us at Falmouth not
long ago which conferred bathing privileges at
Breakwater Beach “in perpetuity to such inhabitants
of Woods Hole as make it their home”. That the
people of Woods Hole, both resident and non-resident,
desire to use and enjoy the Breakwater Bathing Beach
was demonstrated by the immediate response to a re-
quest for funds for temporarily improving the beach
in the form of contributions, letters, and words of
encouragement.

L. G. Wesson.

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
August 9 4:59 5 :03
August 10 530 5:43
August 11 6:17 6:29
August 12 635i 7 :06
August 13 7:33 es?
August 14 8:10 8:31
August 15 8:56 9:23
Nottie Woy sign SUuSY/ 10:11
August 17 10:30 Wasi)

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
eause the turning of the current to oecur a half an
hour earlier or later than the times given above.

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

185

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Professor L. T. Hogben, who spent a summer
at the laboratory several years ago, has been se-
lected to fill a newly created chair of social biology
in the University of London.

Dr. Conway Zirkle, who has been a National
Research Council fellow in biology at the Bussey
Institution of Harvard University has been ap-
pointed associate professor of botany at the
University of Pennsylvania.

Dr. E. C. Cole, associate professor of biology
at Williams College, will spend his Sabbatical
leave, which falls this academic year, in the South-
west carrying on his research work.

Miss Pauline Darby, who was a member of the
invertebrate class in zoology last year, received her
masters degree this spring at St. Louis. She
takes her new position as instructor in zoology at
the University of Maine this fall.

Dr. H. E. Howe, editor of Industrial and En-
gineering Chemistry and Mrs. Howe have left
for a week’s tour of Maine and New Hampshire.
On the way back to Woods Hole, they will attend
the opening sessions of the Institute of Politics
at Williamstown where Dr. Howe conducted the
round table conference on ‘““Trade Relations as
Influanced by Politics, Science and Finance” last
year.

Mrs. Ruth Kidd, instructor in bacteriology and
immunity at Bellevue Medical College, is spend-
ing several weeks of her vacation at Woods Hole
as an interested observer of the new methods of
chemical research.

Dr. Leigh Hoadley of Harvard University has
been given a full professorship in zoology at this
institution.

A Department of Forestry has been initiated
at Duke University. There are five thousand
acres of timber land on the University campus.
Dr. C. F. Korstian, formerly of the Appalachian
Forest Experiment Station in North Carolina,
has been made head of the department.

Dr. Eleanor H. Slifer has been granted a Na-
tional Research Fellowship to continue the grad-
uate work which has been carried out at the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania at lowa State University.

An informal social gathering for the staff,
investigators and students of the Marine Biolo-
gical Laboratory and the United States Bureau
of Fisheries and their families, will be held by
the Church of the Messiah at Nobska, the resi-
dence of Mrs. Henry H. Fay, Thursday evening,
August 14, from 8:30 until 11. There will be
dancing.

The /ilyria, of Gloucester, put into Woods Hole
August 4 for a visit of a week or more. It has
just returned from an expedition to the Galapagos,
the South Sea Islands, the New Hebrides, the
Solomon Islands, New Guinea, Bali and Angkor,
where Mr. Cornelius Crane, the owner, took
motion pictures which he will exhibit at the Ma-
rine Biological Laboratory at a special lecture
which has been announced for August 11.

On August 2 the chauffeur and butler of
Thomas D. West, president of the Hospital Trust
Company of Providence, and owner of a home at
Gansett, discovered a fire in the garage attached
to the servant’s quarters. The fire is thought to
have been caused by a short circuit in the Ford.
Three cars were demolished although the building
was not seriously damaged. The total damage
was estimated at over $7000.

The 140th birthday of the Coast Guard Service
was celebrated by Base Eighteen in Woods Hole
on Monday, August 4. In the morning, the Base
Commander, Commander F. A. Nichols, gave
the men a brief history of the Coast
Guard. This was followed by swimming
races, the 25-yard race being won by John
H. Kittila, Chief Boatswain’s Mate, and
the 50-yard race by James A. Gray, Ship’s Cook,
second class. The baseball game between the
Warrant Officers and the Chief Petty Officers was
won by the Chiefs with a score of 11-3. During
the day about 500 visitors were conducted through
the base and over the gaily bedecked Base Ship,
the //yanda, and the Patrol Boats. In the eve-
ning the League of Coast Guard Women gave a
dance at the Community House of Woods Hole
which was well attended by the personnel of the
base and by the citizens of Woods Hole.

The Woods Hole Yacht Club held its fourth
race of this season Monday afternoon, August 4,
in a strong southwest breeze. The heavy going
made it necessary to shorten the course. The
boats finished in the following order, Menidia,
sailed by C. Glaser, Charlog, sailed by O. Wood-
ruff; Dorine, sailed by G. Clowes; Awnt Addie,
sailed by W. Meigs; and Hunky, sailed by K.
Cole. Scuttlebutt, sailed by E. Dubois, was dis-
qualified.

The general heat wave and drought, and care-
less smokers were blamed for the raging forest
fires at Plymouth and Pocasset last week. The
Pocasset fire, which broke out on Tuesday, August
5, could be seen plainly from the bathing beach
at Woods Hole. By Thursday even the town of
Falmouth was threatened.

186 THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 37

PROJECTION

for Instruction
and Observation

PROJECTION — both micro- and macro-
—is an indispensable aid in instruction and,
in many kinds of individual observation, affords
welcome relief from ocular fatigue. Bausch &
Lomb offers a large selection of instruments
for micro-projection and for projecting slides,
strip film and opaque
objects.

Among the more unique
instruments for this pur-
pose are the Euscope
and the Overhead Projector. The Euscope allows the in-
structor to observe the specimen and manipulate the micro-
scope while the class observes the subject projected upon a
ground glass screen. It can also be used for photography :
and as an aid to individual microscopical observation. Es a

The Overhead Projector enables the instructor or lecturer The Euscope
to sit at his desk and manipulate the projector. The image
is thrown upon a screen over his head in clear view of the
audience. This instrument is for lantern slides only.
Micro-Projector 4354-AA is a complete, compact instru-
ment easy to operate and requiring but little more manipu-
lation than an ordinary microscope. It is for direct projection
of mounted microscopical specimens.

Write for complete information on projection and micro-
projection apparatus.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO.

671 St. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York GREATER VISION THROUGH

OPTICAL SCIENCE

B & L Overhead Projector

BAUSCH
% LOMB

BAUSCH éLOM

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

Aucust 9, 1930] THE COLLECTING NET

187

RO

OK

Py

<

9.058

KD

22:

PERLE

C2

Kk

¢.

KX

KOK

KK

ROKK KOK

KK

ee ——————————————————————————————
LEEELEEEE LEE ELE EE EEG LEE EE EE EEE LEE EE EE EGE EL EL EEE EEE EE EE EE LE LE EE LE ELE REBEL

IMPORTANT MACMILLAN BOOKS

Just Published
PROBLEMS AND METHODS OF RESEARCH IN PROTOZOOLOGY

Edited by
ROBERT W. HEGNER, Professor of Protozo6logy
and
JUSTIN ANDREWS, Associate in ProtozoOlogy
Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health
Cloth, 8 vo. 532 pp., $5.00
The editors of this book have brought together information of value to students and

investigators in the field of Protozo6logy that is at present either widely scattered in the
literature or has never before been published. They have organized the work of approxi-
mately twenty-five outstanding research workers with the purpose of aiding both the
seasoned investigator and the beginning student. The editors at first had intended to
prepare the entire manuscript themselves, but it soon became evident that the work would
be much more valuable if specialists in each field were to contribute chapters on problems
and methods of research in the various phases of the subject about which they were most
familiar.

Outstanding In Its Field
HOOKWORM DISEASE
Its Distribution, Biology, Epidemiology, Pathology,
Diagnosis, Treatment and Control
By
ASA C. CHANDLER, M. Sc., Ph. D.,
Professor of Biology, Rice Institute, Houston, Texas; Recently
Officer-in-Charge, Hookworm Research Laboratory, School of
Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, Calcutta, India.
Cloth, 8 vo, 494 pp.. $5.00
“The book is well printed and illustrated, and must be regarded as a most important
contribution, not only for research workers, but for general practitioners, especially those in
tropical climates. It is written in the clear style characteristic of the author. . . He spent
more than three years in India in full-time research on the various problems involving
hookworm and hookworm disease. He covered all phases of the subject, and writes from

personal knowledge as well as an extensive study of the work of others.”—American Journal
of Publie Health.

Ready Soon
PROTOZOAN PARASITISM OF THE ALIMENTARY TRACT
PATHOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS and TREATMENT

ey
Kenneth M. Lynch, M. D., Professor of Pathology, Medical College of the State of
South Carolina; Patho’ogist to the Roper Hospital, Charleston, S. C.; President,
American Society of Clinical Pathologists, 1930-1931; President, American Society of
Tropical Medicine, 1930.

The confusion which exists among those practically concerned about Protozoa of the
alimentary tract of Man and their relation to disease has been the stimulus in writing this
book. It was planned as a monograph for students and practitioners of medicine and for
those variously connected with medicine in special ways which bring them as responsible
parties into this very common consideration in diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of
disease.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

PUBLISHERS
60 Fifth Avenue New York
Atlanta Boston Chicago Dallas San Francisco

+)

¢

KKK

KOK

eek

OOK OOK

Cx

KX

Oo

KK

OK KOKI

188 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

The Dissecting Set illustrated above is
being widely used by instructors and
by advanced students of biology. The
case is of best-quality leather, hand-
somely finished, lined with velvet and
having chamois skin protecting flaps.
The instruments comprising the set are
of “A” quality, with keen cutting edges.
These instruments consist of the follow-
ing:

Scalpel No. 6935 ebony handle 46 mm edge

Sealpel No. 6942 ebony handle 25 mm edge

Scissors No. 7009, medium straight

Forceps No. 6787 heavy straight for
vertebrate work

Bee

1 Tenaculum No, 7052 ebony handle 160 mm
length

1 Cartilage Knife No. 6817, all steel 45 mm
edge

1 Seeker No. 7037 all steel 150 mm length

1 Triple chain and hooks No. 6807

1 Blowpipe No. 6747 120 mm length

1 Celluloid rule No. 10497, 6 inches

Per Set eae -.-.. $5.00
Per dozen, 10% discount

We can supply Dissecting Sets containing any
desired selection of dissecting instruments
and we would be pleased to submit quotations
on any required quantity.

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

Rochester, N-Y.

“RITE ON”
Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the
slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the
markings can be washed off with water
so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again
and again.

Use Pen
or

= Pencil
SIZE 31?

Non-corrosive semi-white,
medium thickness

All four sides ground and polished,

$1.75 Gross

Sample gross sent prepaid on
receipt of check.

Please mention dealers name

; A _@. Rex
Crav-Apams Company
Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, ete., surgical instruments, etc.

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

189

RESEARCH
PERIODICALS

MEDICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL,
CHEMICAL and OTHER
SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS

Complete Files, Volumes or Back Copies
For Sale .

We buy unbound and bound Scientific
Journals

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
Established 1887
29 EAST 21st STREET
New York City

SCIENTIFIC
MACHINE
SHOP

Repairs Balances, Polariscopes, Refracto-
meters and other delicate instruments.
Makes Polariscope Tubes, pH Apparatus,
Colorimeters, Electric Stirrers and a great
variety of special forms.

Write for further information and state
in detail your requirements.

EIMER & AMEND

Established 1851 Incorporated 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

. . . First Edition Used in
83 Colleges and Universities

Second Edition

Introduction to

VERTEBRATE
EMBRYOLOGY

By WALDO SHUMWAY

Professor of Zoology,

University of Illinois

This new edition of Dr. Shumway’s excel-
lent textbook has been prepared in order
to make such changes and corrections as
he has found advisable through his own
experience, as well as those suggested by
teachers using the book.

The distinetive feature of this text is the
use of two methods of presentation. The
comparative method, now used quite gen-
erally by the foremost English, French and
German embryologists and more recently
adopted by American zoologists, is em-
ployed in lectures and reading, while the
sequential method is utilized in the la-
hboratory work.

Particular emphasis has been placed upon
four forms: Amphioxus, the frog, the
chick, and man. The first section includes
the embryonic membranes and the develop-
ment of body form. The second division
deals with the derivation of the separate
organs and organ systems from the germ
layers. Part III, which covers the atlas,
treats of the anatomy of the frog, chick, and
the pig. The book is concluded by a section
on laboratory technique which covers
methods of preparing embryos for study.
These instructions for cutting and staining
will be .found especially useful to “pre-
medics” and those specializing in zoology.

311 pages 6 by 9 Cloth, $3.75

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 Fourth Avenue, New York City

190 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 37

RESEARCH MICROSCOPE
GCE-10

Magnifications: 30-—1800x
Large mechanical stage

Abbe illuminating apparatus
Aplanatie condenser n. a. 14
Quadruple revolving nosepiece

Apochromatie objectives

10 n. a. 0.30, 20 n. a. 0.65, 40 n. a. 0.95,
90 n. a. 1.30 (Oil Immersion)
Compensating Eyepieces

3x, 5x, 10x, 15x, 20x, 7x micrometer

Price complete in case: $437.50 f. 0. b. New York

Polarising Accessories for the above: Polariser
No. I. Analyser No. III with divided cirele,
gypsum plate RI in case eerie eat LOT

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

EARL ZEISS)
[ JENA |

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, II.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographie references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight 1-inch slides
or thirty-two 14-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides,

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

4

su

ae ee eS ee ee

—

Aucust 9, 1930] THE COLLECTING NET 191

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for
SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, etc.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Apams CompANy

Importers and wholesale distributors of PANY
Botanical and Biological models and preparations
and skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

Turtox Products

APPARATUS FOR BIOLOGY
BOTANICAL MATERIAL

_ CHARTS

COLLECTING EQUIPMENT
CULTURES

DISSECTIONS
EMBRYOLOGICAL MATERIAL
ENTOMOLOGICAL SPECIMENS
INJECTED MATERIAL

(For Comparative Anatomy)
TURTOX SKELETONS JEWELL MODELS
The high grade of Turtox Skeletons can be maintained only by LANTERN SLIDES
using well prepared, hard, white bones and arranging these correctly = arr =e;
in their natural position on a suitable base or mounting. ewe HIS TORTS is
Turtox Skeletons are prepared in our own laboratory from mature MICROSCOPIC SLIDES
specimens by osteologists who have had years of training and MUSEUM PREPARATIONS
experience. PARASITOLOGY MATERIAL
SKELETONS
Turtox Skeletons are known STAINS AND REAGENTS
for their high standards of TAXIDERMY
quality and workmanship. ZOOLOGICAL MATERIAL

General Biological Supply House
(INCORPORATED)
761-763 East 69th Place

Chicago, Illinois

The Sign of the Turtox
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

192

THE COLLECTING NET

a cus

[ Vor. V. No. 37

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC.
13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

shoes for

every

occasion
e
jax

parkway shops near filene’s

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“The Firebrand”

A COMEDY
Week of August 11 - 16

Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30

Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH
(Episcopal)
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion - - - - 7:30 a.m,
Morning Prayer 11:00 a.m.
Evening Prayer 7:30 p.m.

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661

622.5%

Woods Hole and Falmouth

DANIELS’

for Home-made Ice Cream,

Follow the Crowd to :
;
Delicious Sandwiches,

Coffee, |
PICNIC LUNCHES ¢

THE TWIN DOOR

RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.

Chicken and Lobster Dinners
Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

COME TO 7

THE TOASTED SANDWICH SHOP 4

M. B. L. Specials Cape Cod Specials »
Dinners and Lunches

Tel. 70787 J

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Main Street

Woods Hole

Tel. 1243

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth ®
Phone 239-W Free Delivery

We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING :

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at $

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass.

Call 752

Aucust 9, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

193

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Sunday, August 10

Marie Dressler and Polly Moran in

“CAUGHT SHORT”

Monday, August 11 - Tuesday, August 12
Frederick March and Claudette Colbert in
“MANSLAUGHTER”

Tuesday, August 12 Afternoon only
Return showing of

“BYRD AT THE SOUTH POLE”

Wednesday, Aug. 13 - Thursday, Aug. 14
El Brendel in
“FOX MOVIETONE FOLLIES OF 1930”

Friday, August 15
Will Rogers in
“SO THIS IS LONDON”

Saturday, August 16
Jack Oakie in
“THE SAP FROM SYRACUSE”

E.Leitz,Wetzlar

Marine
Biological
Laboratory
Supply
Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

LEITZ
NEW RESEARCH MICROSCOPE

MODEL “ABMT”

Combination Type for Monocular and
Binocular Vision as well as
Photomicrography

Its particular feature focuses in the
Built-In Mechanical Stage of square
pattern, made of metal; it is com-
pletely covered with vulcanite and
measures 120 x 120 mm.

To appropriately equip’ Microscope “ABMT”, we offer
an assortment of eight Apochromatic Objectives and
nine Periplan (Compensating) Oculars.

60 East 10th Street

Write for Pamphlet No. 1141 (CN)

ore) 6 Saree ac:

New York, N. Y.

194

THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 37

1930 RESEARCH MODEL, WATER JACKETED

AMERICAN STANDARD INCUBATORS

Operating sensitivity plus or minus 0.3°C. Operating uniformity plus or minus 0.5°C

AMERICAN STANDARD INCUBATORS, 1930 Research
Model. Made in a new triple wall, copper and enamelled
transite construction, with both water jacket and air-cell
asbestos insulation between the walls. Temperature is
controlled by two hermetically sealed, expanding liquid,
piston type, adjustable thermo-regulators, one inserted in
the water jacket and the other in the incubating chamber.
These are connected so as to control each other as well as
the temperature of the chamber.

Unit System. The net available inside dimensions are
based on a unit which equals a cubical space 444x414 x
74% inches, i. e. that required to accommodate ten 100x
15 mm Petri dishes; thirty-six culture tubes 150 x16 mm in
a wire basket; or one Pyrex boiling or Erlenmeyer Flask
500 ml.

The 18-unit size takes nine such units on each of two
shelves, and the 48-unit size takes sixteen such units on
each of three shelves.

Operating Sensitivity. We thus designate the maxi-
mum variation of temperature at location of thermometer
bulb when working at the usual incubating temperature
of 387° C. In the 1930 Research Model, this is plus or

2

minus 9.3° C.

Operating Uniformity. We thus designate the maxi-
mum variation of temperature throughout working shelf
space in relation to the temperature at location of the
thermometer bulb in the incubating compartment when
working at the usual incubating temperature 37°C. In
the 1930 Research Model, this is plus or minus 0.5° C.

1436-B. Incubator, American Standard, 1930 Research
Model, 18-unit, with net available inside dimensions
15% in. wide x 15% in. deep x 18 in. high (4,324 eubie
inches). With two certified thermometers; without
stand, for use on table. For 110 volts ... $3875.00
Code Word Aidda

1436-C. Ditto, but on stand, as shown in illustration $400.00
Code Word . Aidgu

1436-E

1436-D. Incubator, American Standard, 1930 Research Model, 48-unit, with net available inside
dimensions 20 in. wide x 20 in deep x 26% in. high (10,600 eubie inches). With two
certified thermometers; without stand, for use on table. For 110 volts $495.00 Aidod

1436-E. Ditto, but on stand, as shown in illustration 5 525.00 Aidsv

NOTE—The above Incubators are furnished without the specified thermometer and thermo-regulator
equipment at approximately $100.00 less than above prices; and also with duplex heaters and
switches, for operation at either 374° C, or 55° C, at approximately $25.00 additional,

Prices subject to change without notice

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

Aucust 9, 1930] THE COLLECTING NET 195

SLIGHULY LARGER, SLIGHTLY HEAVIER,
JUST A BIT MORE RUGGED -- NEW

= SPENCER No. 34

LABORATORY and MEDICAL

MICROSCOPE

I. Chromium plated objectives and adjustment
buttons.

II. Distance 95 m.m. (increased from 80 m.m.)
from inner curve of arm to optical axis.

ItI. Solidarity exemplified and graceful lines
characteristics of all Spencer microscopes
are featured.

IV. Increased size and new beauty added to
outstanding performance without increase
in price.

Our many years of close experience with
the needs of laboratories and laboratory
workers, has naturally led to careful
study of types of design, sizes, weight
and to every phase of instrument needs
both from the standpoint of the worker
as well as that of the manufacturer. The
result has been that Spencer Microscopes
No. 44 and 64, because of neat compact-
ness, beauty in design, brilliant perfor-
mance, excellence in craftsmanship, dur-
ability and size for ease and comfort in
use, have held a foremost place among
laboratory microscopes for the past 18 or
20 years and their popularity has not
declined—in fact their sale during the
past year exceeds all previous years.

slightly heavier and a bit more rugged.

To meet this demand our new No. 34 microscope has been designed, not as a substi-
tute for Nos. 44 and 64 but as an additional instrument incorporating in design and
construction all the advantageous features of those most popular instruments, with a
bit more size, weight and ruggedness added. It is supplied with or without
the mechanical stage.

Brochure No. M-41 illustrates and describes it—sent on request.

anim SPENCER LENS COMPANY aac

MANUFACTURERS

Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring
[BUFFALO | p | BUFFALO |

Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Etc.

BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

For certain types of work there has been some demand, not for laboratory micro-
scope of research size and weight, No! not that, but for an instrument slightly larger,

196 THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 37

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
ER@JECTION APPEAR mes

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination,

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopie living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopie preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Crayv-Apams Company

rane East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Vol. V. No. 8

THE EFFECTS OF X-RAYS UPON
REGENERATION !
Dr. W. C. Curtis
Professor of Zoology, University of
Missouri
Studies upon regeneration may be undertaken
from the

SATURDAY, AUGUST 16, 1939

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION,
SINGLE Coprrs 25 Crs.

$2.00

RECENT ADVANCES IN THE STUDY
THE RESPIRATORY METABOLISM
Dr. Eucene F. Du Bots
Associate Professor of Medicine,
Cornell University Medical College
The study of basal metabolism is a good example

OF

“organismal” aspect, as when one of the results that can be obtained by cooperation
examines changes externally demonstrable or between physiologists and clinicians. As a matter
infers physiological _ states aa of fact the men who first
from experiments with an ws developed this field were
organism or a part as a whole. MGM. B. L. Calendar trained in both branches of
One may also examine the ; science. At the present time
histological and cytological ULES ID oy MRE Ne ROU ahs the clinicians are deriving

The Secend

aspects of regeneration. Com-

Reynold A.

Spaeth | creat practical benefits from

: ; Memorial Lecture. Professor Har- ;
plete analysis involves both dolph Wasteneys, professor of bio- the tests. They are being
organismal and__ histological chemistry, University of Toronto, made as a matter of routine
factors. Thus, the pharynx “Protein Synthesis.” on all cases suspected of hav-

of a regenerating planarian
may appear in a given region
because of factors related to

Bridges, “The

FRIDAY, AUGUST 22, 8:00 P. M.
Evening Seminar.

ing any disease of the thyroid

Dr. Calvin B. | gland and in practically all
Neutralization of | cases where the diagnosis is

the organism as a_ whole. me ee of Ree acres uncertain. Machines for mak-
: + s » Same omo- : :

There remain, however, the sereharaiesials sei iaaiaes a emcee ing tests are manufactured in

cellular changes by which the thousands every year and

such an organ is produced.
Difficulty in ascertaining such
changes does not make them
less important. In general
they have received much less
attention than the organismal

Dr. Helen

of Drosophila.”

Dr. A. H. Sturtevant, “A Peculiar
Sex-ratio in Drosophila obscura.”

Redfield,

Crossing over in Drosophila.”

Jack Sehultz, “The Eye Pigments

are to be found in almost
every clinic. The result has

of °
been an enormous number of

“Studies

experiments, most of them
with poor technique. This
has led to a corresponding

aspects of regeneration. The

1A summary of studies upon regeneration conducted
by my students and myself that have been presented
in part before the American Society of Zoologists and
elsewhere (ef. Curtis, ’28) but not otherwise published.
The work has been supported since July 1, '29 by
grants from the Committee on Radiation, National
Researeh Council.

(Continued on Page 205)

number of publications and
the literature of the subject is voluminous. I
shall try to cover the more important contribu-
tions of the last four years but shall be obliged
to leave out all the work that deals with animals
and confine myself to a relatively small number
of the papers that deal with man.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Effects of X-Rays upon Regeneration

Professor W. C. Curtis Patties 197
Recent Advances in the Study of the

Respiratory Metabolism

DD ree Boe aie ee aee DUES OS pereraey seaesenasescseeceserssecen vex 197
A New Marine Laboratory on the Pacific Coast 198

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Curtis
Dr. Marie A. Hinrichs a : 207
The Relation Between Division Rate and
Susceptibility to Radiation

Dr. Charles Packard 208
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Packard

Dr. G. Failla 209
A Letter from China

Dr. Homer W. Smith .............. 210
Yarns and Cordage 210
Items of Interest . 211
Currents in the Hole . 212

Advertising Section

OOOO

198

If we view these last four years as a whole
we find that they have not made any great changes
in our conceptions of the basal metabolism. We
still consider it to be the heat production of an
individual measured during complete mental and
physical repose, fourteen or more hours after the
last meal. The basal metabolism of a given
individual is fairly constant and it can be com-
pared with the average normal figure for persons
of the same age, sex and size. The one great
clinical application is that the basal metabolism is
much higher than normal if the thyroid gland is
too active, and distinctly lower than normal when
the thyroid secretion is deficient.

Now the technique of metabolism determina-
tions was simplified about ten years ago and there
have been no striking changes recently. F. G.
Benedict has devised a very small portable appar-
atus for use on exploring expeditions and this is
being carried to all sorts of remote places. There
have been a good many modifications of the closed
circuit apparatus so that it can determine the CO,
production as well as the oxygen. I have not had
any personal experience with these machines
which measure the CO. by various shortcuts but
my work with more accurate apparatus has made
me suspicious of the CO: in short periods unless
it is measured with the best of technique.

On account of the unreliability of the CO,
measurement in short periods it seems safer to
rely on the oxygen and guess that the quotient
will be about 0.82 for the average subject.

The so-called normal standards of basal meta-
bolism have come in for a great deal of well
deserved criticism. Many of us realized from
the start that there never would be any normal
standard that would remain satisfactory for many
years. Thus the Sage Standards were put out
in tentative form in 1917 as a footnote to an
article by Aub and Du Bois. These were based
on calories per square meter of body surface per
hour. A short time later Harris and Benedict
using a larger and better series of normals pro-
posed their well-known prediction formula. Their
averages run about 3-4% lower than the Sage
figures and on the whole give better agreement
with the groups of normal controls that are
studied in various laboratories. More and more
cases, however, are being reported that average
even lower than the Harris-Benedict standards
and Benedict has suggested that the figures
for women should be lowered about 5%. ‘There
is one notable exception to the downward trend
of metabolism and that is found in the large
series of 1822 males and 5066 females reported
by Boothby and Sandiford at the International
Congress of Physiology in Boston. This series
from the Mayo Clinic corresponds very closely
with the Sage standard of 1917 being higher for
some of the age periods but 1 or 2% lower for

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 38

most of the decades. Here we have a very large
series of normal controls studied with excellent
technique. Why so much difference in the levels
between these Rochester controls and the controls
in physiological laboratories ?

The answer is probably to be found in the fact
that the Sage standards and those of Boothby
and Sandiford were intended to serve primarily
as the basis of comparison for patients studied
for clinical purposes. Both series contained a
high proportion of first tests and the early Sage
group included tests made in the days when the
precautions about absolute mental and physical
rest were not observed as scrupulously as at the
present time. The Harris-Benedict group con-
tained relatively few first day tests and many
observations on trained subjects. In the last few
years for all extremely careful testing, subjects
are selected and tests are not counted until they

THE

A NEW MARINE LABORATORY ON
PACIFIC COAST

The California Institute of Technology has ac-
quired a building near Laguna Beach which 1s be-
ing rapidly transformed into a modern marine
laboratory. The building was originally the Pal-
isades Yacht Club and is sufficiently large to ac-
commodate twenty or more investigators. It is
located at Carona del Mar, fifty-three miles from
Pasadena.

This project has been made possible through the
generosity of Mr. W. G. Kerckhoff and is to be
known as the “W. G. Kerckhoff Marine Labora-
tory.”

Dr. Albert Tyler from the California Institute
is working at the new laboratory this summer
with a group of students. The top floor has been
reserved for work in chemistry and is now being
used by a small group.

The laboratory will be open throughout the
year, and since many of the marine forms on the
Pacific coast lay their eggs throughout the winter
the new laboratory will make it possible for biolo-
gists in the East to spend the winter months in
Southern California.

Aueust 16, 1930 ]

can assume the complete relaxation that ensures
the minimal metabolism. Almost all trained sub-
jects who have had many metabolism tests give
results well below all the normal standards and
their metabolism remains very constant, falling
gradually as they grow older.

On the other hand it has long been known that
athletes and men accustomed to hard labor have
a higher metabolism than others. Thus Takahira
found that general laborers averaged 5.8% above
the mean, policemen 3.3% above, the school
teachers and tradesmen 3 to 7% below the mean.
Almeida was able to raise markedly the meta-
bolism of one of his experimental subjects by
having him start a system of strenuous physical
training.

These two factors of (1) experience in meta-
bolism tests with complete relaxation and (2)
physical condition are of great importance in
interpreting the results of tests on individuals
or on groups of persons. Thus if a man wanted
to prove that the metabolism of the inhabitants
of Woods Hole was lower than. that of the
country in general he could select a group of non-
athletic persons, train them in the art of complete
relaxation until they approached “cadaver
repose” as the Germans call it. Then if the results
of the first three or four tests were discarded and
the lowest test out of three made each morning
were selected he would find that his average was
5 or 10% below the so-called normal standards.
It has been argued that one should select the
lowest test as representing the true basal because
there are practically no factors except sleep,
undernutrition and disease that lower the metab-
olism below the basal but many experimental
errors that raise it. This argument does not seem
to me quite fair as there is an experimental error
of at least two percent in any test due to the
apparatus and the technique. Personally I prefer
to make three or four short tests and take the
average of the two lowest that agree fairly closely.

Now if another experimenter wished to prove
that the metabolism was high in Woods Hole he
could select a group of laborers and tennis players,
make tests on one or two days only, include all
the days, take the average of the three tests made
each day and he could easily show a level of heat
production well above the average for the country
at large.

This may sound extreme but it is just what is
being done in all parts of the globe as we shall
see when we come to the discussion of the metab-
olism of different races. Many of these reports
are filled with elaborate statistical discussions and
analyses. One gets the impression that the in-
vestigators try to compensate for a poor selection
of material by an impressive statistical treatment.
Perhaps this impression of mine is merely the

_ personal reaction of a clinician who is not well

THE COLLECTING NET

199

trained in statistics. All clinicians are suspicious
of statistics. They realize the difficulty of diag-
nosis, the frequency of incipient disease among
groups of so-called normal subjects, the wide
variations found in humans, the large number of
factors that may affect experiments. If any one
individual shows a large departure from the mean
of the group, the statistician wants to magnify the
importance of this result; the clinician is inclined
to throw the result out of the averages entirely.

Among the many factors that may affect metab-
olism we are often given very little information
about the diet. A liberal diet tends to raise the
metabolism even fourteen hours after the last
meal, a low diet leads to a lowered metabolism.
The effect of varying the protein ration within
moderate limits seems to be minimal. We have
recently had in our laboratory the opportunity of
studying in considerable detail the metabolism of
two arctic explorers, Stefansson and Andersen,
who lived for one year on an exclusive meat diet.
They ate no carbohydrate except the 5 or 10
grams contained in the meat; they consumed daily
100-140 grams of protein and 200-300 grams of
fat. This moderate increase in the protein ration
caused no change in the basal metabolism. Wang
and her associates have this last week reported
on a series of six young women who tried first
a diet of 2 grams of protein per kilogram of body
weight and then a diet of 0.6 grams of protein
per kilo. Even though each experimental period
was continued for about a month there was no
change in the basal metabolism. The matter is
not completely settled but it looks as if we could
neglect minor changes in the protein ration.

The metabolism of women was formerly con-
sidered to be about 7% lower than that of men
and F. G. Benedict has recently suggested that a
figure 12% lower than that of men would pro-
bably come nearer to the truth. It has long been
known that the metabolism of women is more
variable than that of men. In the last ten years
we have come to realize that part of this varia-
bility is due to the effect of the menstrual cycle.
I think that we can say that it is only in the last
five years that this effect has been definitely
proved. It is not great, it is not present in all
women, and the maxima and minima do not
always come at the same phases of the cycle.
Benedict and Finn have reported on the artists
model, Miss W:, who has been studied at the
Nutrition Laboratory in Boston for the last twelve
years. She is an ideal subject, phlegmatic in dis-
position, never ill and never suffering any dis-
comfort at the menstrual periods. During these
twelve years the average metabolism of the
menstrual days was 3.5 lower than the average
of the non-menstrual days. There was a distinct
premenstrual rise in heat production and also an
intermenstrual peak as had been reported in the

200

earlier literature. Hitchcock and Wardwell made
800 tests on 27 women and selected finally the 20
best ones as the basis of their report. Of these
20 women 14 showed a lowering of the basal
metabolism during the menstrual period, one had
no change and five showed a slight but insignifi-
cant rise. For the group of ten women whose
fall in metabolism was of statistical importance,
the average drop was 5.16%. There was also an
intermenstrual drop averaging 5.03% occurring
on the 12-23rd day, on the average on the 14th
day. Since ovulation occurs on the 14-18th day
following the onset of menstruation Hitchcock
and Wardwell believe that there is some relation-
ship between the two phenomena. These authors
incidentally report the effects of emotion on these
women. One student before her PhD examina-
tion averaged 40.12 calories per square meter per
hour, and almost immediately after the examina-
tion came to a level 10% lower. Another young
medical student spent her first exciting day in the
dispensary and on the next morning the metab-
olism had risen from its usual level of 32 calories
per square meter to 42 calories. Parties on the
evening before the tests lowered metabolism.

Griffeth, Pucher, Brownell, Klein and Carmer,
in their admirably detailed report, confirm in
general these findings, observing the highest
metabolism in the premenstrual period and the
lowest during the menstrual days. The average
difference is not great, only 2.7%. They confirmed
the older observation that pain raised the heat pro-
duction and excluded all cases where this was a
factor. Conklin and McClendon in a recent study
of ten women who suffered no menstrual pain
found that in nine of them the metabolism tended
to reach its lowest level following menstruation
and its highest level preceding menstruation. The
average difference was only 3.5%.

In recent years it has been the custom to tell
women not to have the clinical metabolism tests
made during the menstrual period. It would
seem even more important to avoid the premens-
trual week which gives results higher than the
average. This would leave only the two inter-
menstrual weeks, but there is a good deal of
evidence for a second peak and second valley in
this fortnight and their exact time is not pre-
dictable. Why, then, should we try to avoid the
one time when the metabolism is uniformly low?
It would seem more practical to note the time
when the tests happens to fall in the menstrual
cycle and take this into consideration in the in-
terpretation of the results. The clinician who
does not take a good many factors into considera-
tion when he interprets his results has no business
to ask for metabolism tests.

Now is it any wonder that investigators have
reported differences of metabolism in different
races? There is a very pretty little polemic

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. No. 38

waging in Dutch, French and Spanish, and I may
have missed some of the fine points, but the gist
of the matter is as follows: Way back in 1896
Eykman working in Batavia and Holland reported
that the metabolism of the Malays was the same
as that of the Europeans living in Java and that
the Europeans studied in Java and in Holland
showed no significant change in metabolism. Ozorio
de Almeida in Brazil in 1920 reported figures for
whites in the tropics 24% below the metabolism
of North Americans and the negro laborers only
8% higher than the whites. He inferred that
Eykman’s technique was old-fashioned and Teding
van Berkhout reporting low metabolism in Java
supported Almeida’s criticism. Eykman retorted
vigorously, proved that his work had been done
with every modern precaution and pointed out
that when Almeida repeated his work he found
much higher metabolism than in his original
report. Meanwhile Montoro in Cuba had an-
nounced a series of tests in Havana that averaged
13-15% below the Sage and Harris-Benedict
standards. Coro, also of Havana, disagrees witlt
Almeida and Montoro and reports on a series of
student nurses with an average exactly the same
as the Sage standards for North America.
Perhaps the most significant piece of work is
that of MacLeod, Crofts and Benedict who found
that a group of seven Chinese and two Japanese
women who had been students in America for
more than a year were 10% below both the Sage
and the Harris-Benedict standards. Even if these
standards are both 5% too high this leaves the
Oriental group 5% below their fellow students.
Takahira has shown that the average metabolism
of a series of 120 Japanese men and women is
5-7% below the Sage standards, but as I have
said before, these standards may be 5-6% too
high for a well-trained group, so that Takahira’s
work indicates no significant racial difference.
Okada, Sakurai and Kameda in a series of Jap-
anese students and nurses obtained figures close
to the Sage standards. Earle, on the other hand,
came to the conclusion that his large series of 166
Chinese and 15 other Orientals indicated a slightly
lower metabolism than that of Westerners. His
Chinese averaged 8% below the Sage, Dreyer and
Harris-Benedict standards; his other Orientals
and 41 Westerners living in Hong-Kong were
about 7% below. Stevenson has done some work
on the Height-Weight surface area used in these
calculations which indicates that it may not apply
accurately to the Chinese and this may possibly
account for some of the apparently lowered
figures based on calories per square meter per
hour but his work has not convinced Earle.
Necheles is inclined to ascribe the lower metab-
olism found by Earle to the greater relaxation of
the Chinese. He himself made a few observations
on Chinese and Westerners awake and asleep.

Avcust 16, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

201

With the Chinese the fall in heat production caused
by sleep averaged about 2.6%, whereas with one
Westerner it was 14% and in another 27%. These
last figures are much higher than those observed
by most experimenters. It is customary in this
country to estimate that profound sleep causes a
fall of about 10% below the so-called basal, but
Spencer and McClellan in our laboratory are get-
ting figures somewhat smaller than this in normal
subjects and in the obese. The suggestion of
Necheles is well worth considering though not
yet established.

Hindmarsh found that white students in
Australia averaged 9% below the Sage standards.
Wardlaw and Horsley working in a slightly
warmer part of Australia studied a series of eight
aborigenes living on a government reserve where
they received ample rations once a week in return
for a very small amount of labor. They lived
wastefully and the brief period of plenty was
followed by a period of want for the rest of the
week. Most of their time was spent in lounging
and sleeping. As might be expected their metab-
olism was low but still the average of 30.7%
below the Sage standard is very striking. Here
in America it takes a great deal of undernutrition
to depress the basal metabolism to such a level.
It is possible that the low level of these blacks
might have been entirely due to the fact that they
were indolent and underweight. One half-caste
not included in the series was a hard worker and
muscular. His metabolism was slightly above the
Sage standard.

Steggerda and Benedict found in Jamaica that
a series of eight full-blooded blacks and _ five
brown women gave results very close to the

' Harris-Benedict standard but that the 37 male

browns averaged 5.4% low. They did not con-
sider this small difference to be of significance.
Williams and Benedict in a study of the workers
on an archeological expedition to Yucatan ob-
served no appreciable change in the metabolism
of the whites after they had lived for a short time
in this climate. The 32 male Mayas who acted
as laborers in the excavations gave an average
5.2% above the Harris-Benedict standards and
Benedict, although he admits the possible effect of
the hard labor, is inclined to believe that some of
this difference is racial. Turner and Abonshadid
have reported that the basal metabolism of a series

of 28 young Syrian women averaged 13.3% below

the Sage standards and that the American and

' European women living in Syria averaged 6%

below. The Syrian women lived a quiet life with
little manual labor and this could easily account
for their somewhat low metabolism.

Benedict has noticed that the scientists of some
of the races that have shown a slightly lowered
metabolism have acted as if this implied some
degree of racial inferiority. He has hastened to

point out that the highest metabolism has been
found among the Mayas who have not contributed
much to civilization for many centuries. As a
matter of fact a race might point to a lowered
metabolism with pride as indicating a greater
mental repose or a greater economy of physiol-
ogical effort. After all, one gets the impression
that the racial differences are so slight that they
are almost entirely obscured by the factors of
nutrition, repose, and physical training.

We have mentioned that Stevenson has sug-
gested that the surface area formula may not be
accurate for the Chinese on account of their dif-
ferent body shape. Since the Sage standards are
based on the calories per square meter of body
surface it is obvious that any error in the surface
area formula is just as bad as an error in the
measurement of the calories produced. Rubner and
Richet promulgated the doctrine that metabolism
is roughly proportional to the surface area among
the different species of warm blooded animals
and this has been quite generally adopted al-
though there is as yet no strong proof that the
relationship is a causal one. Most experimenters
believe that the surface area furnishes the best
index of protoplasmic mass which in turn has a
causal relationship to the total heat production.
There is as yet no proof of this but it sounds
more plausible. Now the Sage standards are
based on surface area as calculated from height
and weight. The Harris-Benedict standards are
calculated from height and weight directly so they
both come to about the same result. Recently
Benedict has been using the surface area in more
and more of his calculations but still holds out
strongly against any causal relationship between
the surface and metabolism. It is perhaps signi-
ficant that in the last few years, as the methods
for calculating the surface area of various animals
have become more accurate, the figures for vari-
ous species show closer and closer agreement.

In 1915 and 1916 the Sage investigators put
out two formulas for calculating the surface area,
devised chiefly by Mr. Delafield Du Bois. The
“Linear Formula” was based on the measurement
of the average length and circumference of each
part of the body. The “Height-Weight” formula
was obtained by multiplying powers of the height
and weight by a constant. The classical formula
of Meeh, Weight raised to the 2/3 power, gave
good results with people of average shape but for
people of unusual shape better results were
obtained if the height was taken into considera-
tion. We must remember this in our review of
all the tests of surface area formulas. If you
want to prove that a formula based on weight
alone is the best all you have to do is to take
a series of subjects of different weights but ap-
proximately the same shape. The Sage investi-
gators in their rather small series of subjects

202

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 38

included a cretin, a marantic baby, a living skeleton
and a woman so fat that she was called a "human
pork barrel”. They wanted a formula that could
be used in the clinic.

For a good many years there was no checking
of the accuracy of these formulas except in the
Sage laboratory. Recently, however, a good
many observers have been determining the sur-
faces of animals and of men and have calculated
the errors in the formulas. Takahira, measuring
the surfaces of ten Japanese men found the Sage
formula averaged 0.9% too low, Worner’s work
indicated that it was about 1.45% too high.
Takahira found the best fit for his ten subjects
was obtained with a formula only slightly different
from the Sage Height-Weight method. Steven-
son in a preliminary report states that the total
area as estimated from the Sage Linear Formula
gives remarkable agreement with the areas as
actually measured by him on his Chinese men but
that this is due to fortuitous compensation be-
tween errors in different regions. He suggests a
new set of constants for the different parts of the
body to be used with the Chinese. He is quoted
as saying that the Sage Height-Weight formula
gives higher results than the Linear with the
Chinese. MacLeod, Crofts and Benedict found
that it gave 3.0% lower results with Oriental
women; Necheles found the Height-Weight on
the average 4.4% higher for the Chinese; Wad-
dell, Han and Ch’en measuring 74 male Chinese
students observed that the average variation be-
tween the two methods was plus or minus 1.25%
which is about the same as is found among
Europeans and Americans.

In summary we may conclude that there is pro-
bably a slight error in the Sage Height-Weight
Formula as applied to Orientals but not enough
to make any significant change in the estimation
of their metabolism.

The Sage formulas were not intended to be
used with small children so we are not surprised
when errors are found in the case of infants and
fetuses. Scammon, Boyd and Klein have gone
into the question of the surface area of fetuses
and children with great care. First Boyd deter-
mined the experimental errors inherent in
measuring the growing human body and found
that the measurement of sitting height used in
the Dreyer formula was difficult with children.
She says, “Since the determination of standing
height has the lowest error, it is the best of the
six measurements studied with which to compare
other biologic phenomena, such, for example, as
vital capacity or surface area.

“Any formula for bodily dimension or function
which makes use of the shorter dimension, body
stem, will carry a larger variability than one using
standing height, for it will involve multiplying a
greater experimental error by a larger constant.”

Boyd, Scammon and Donovan then made plaster
casts of three children and measured their sur-
face areas at leisure. Taking these as a basis and
adding the 135 measurements that are found in
the literature, they determined the mean relative
deviations of various formulas. This series was
largely composed of small children, 100 of the
measurements being made on subjects under 41
pounds in weight, only 44 on subjects over 41
pounds. The Sage formula showed a mean rela-
tive deviation of 7.3% for the whole series but
only 5.6% for the groups over 11 kilograms in
weight. The best fit was obtained by a formula,
S = West P0275 K 394.56, but W602
X 1008 was almost as good, the mean relative
deviation being 5.4%. They conclude: “Surface
area in the growing period can be calculated with
about equal precision from expressions with con-
stants determined by least squares for weight
alone and from expressions devised by the geome-
tric method of Du Bois and based on both weight
and height. In this period the relation of surface
to weight closely approximates the expression
S oat W238.”

Klein and Scammon, with apologies, apply the
Sage Height-Weight formula to a series of fetuses
varying in weight from 1.26 grams to 2% kilo-
grams. This is quite a long distance away from
the “human pork barrel” who weighed 93 kilo-
grams. Still the mean relative deviation was only
21.3%. Deviations of 87% and 5.8% were
shown by formulas based on weight or on length
alone, the best being S = W®7°9 X 5.188.

Time does not permit us to discuss the surface
area of animals but Cowgill and Drabkin who
measured the surface of seven dogs noted that a
formula with the Sage values for height and
length with a constant of 4.381 had an error of
only 2.42%. The best fit was obtained by a
formula that took into account the nutritive con-
dition of the animal and this could be simplified
in the expression S = W868 LX 2.268. This
type of formula when applied to man gave results
almost as good as the Sage. Lee, working with
rats, obtained his best results with a formula of
this same type but got almost as good an agree-
ment with the Meeh formula using a constant of
9.0. Applying this formula to the basal metab-
olism of the rats studied by Carman and Mitchell
he found the basal metabolism only 16-14%
lower than that of humans according to square
meters of body surface. Benedict and MacLeod
found their albino rats averaged about 6% below
the level for humans. Cowgill and Drabkin, re-
calculating the surfaces of two of Lusk’s female
dogs found the average 1.5% below that of women
according to the Harris-Benedict standard.

The subject of the respiratory quotient has been
so well reviewed by Richardson that there is no
need of our discussing it in detail. Richardson

;
|
:
|

Aucust 16, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

203

has had a large experience with various forms of
respiration apparatus for determining the quotient
of man, including the respiration calorimeter. He
has also had an extensive experience with the
Barcroft-Warburg apparatus with small portions
of surviving tissues and with bacteria. Working
with Loebel and Shorr he has been able to show
that the quotients with the micro-apparatus give
just as good agreement and come just as close to
the theory as those obtained in the respiration
calorimeter. It not infrequently happens that on
the same day we are observing a patient in the
calorimeter and he and his associates are studying
a piece of rat diaphragm under similar nutritive
conditions. The quotients are almost identical.
They do not find bizarre, unexplainable quotients
any more than we do with the calorimeter. Neither
of us comes across the things that make some
people say that carbohydrate is formed from fat.

When it comes to the question of ketosis we
have been obliged to make some changes in our
opinions. The threshold has been fairly definite-
ly established at the point where less than one
molecule of glucose is being oxidized for each
molecule of fatty acid. Below this point the fat
molecule is incompletely oxidized and “smokes”

with the production of the ketones. The thresh- ”

old has been shown by Shaffer to correspond to
a respiratory quotient of about 0.76 and Shaffer
has also shown that the ketosis increases rapidly
as less and less glucose is oxidized in proportion
to the fat. In our study of the arctic explorers
on an exclusive meat diet for one year we found
that although the proportions of fat and carbo-
hydrate oxidized remained constant the ketosis
diminished very extensively. They seemed to
acquire the ability to burn the fats completely
with relatively little carbohydrate. This gives us
a clue to the diabetic reported by Ladd and
Palmer who had very slight ketosis on a high fatty
acid glucose ratio and also to the well known fact
pointed out by Mason that obese persons show
very little ketosis on diets that would be accom-
panied by a large excretion of acetone in normal
individuals. The arctic explorers after a year
without carbohydrate food were in excellent
health but they exhibited a curious phenomenon
when given a glucose test meal at the ter-
mination of the meat diet. They gave a
typical mild diabetic response with very
high blood sugar and in one instance glyco-
suria. They had temporarily lost the power to
handle carbohydrates but they regained this func-
tion rapidly on the normal diet. Petren has
reported similar phenomena with his diabetics.
We must not look on all of our metabolic func-
tions as fixed quantities and we must not be too
mathematical when we come to the study of dis-
ease. In all metabolism experiments the handling
of the fore period is of great importance and the

investigator must use long experimental periods
if he wishes to obtain accurate results. This is
well illustrated in a study made on the nitro-
gen minimum by McClellan and Hannon in the
metabolism ward of the Russel Sage Institute of
Pathology. By slow stages they reduced the pro-
tein intake of a diabetic patient to 20 grams a day
and held him in weight and nitrogen balance at
this extremely low level for 106 days. During
this period, again using gradual changes they
altered the carbohydrate intake from 132 grams
to 30 grams daily, keeping the calories constant.
Even with the low carbohydrate intake of 30
grams the nitrogen output remained the same,
thus proving that in this patient fat was just as
good a sparer of protein as carbohydrate. Some
of Petren’s work shows just this same sparing of
protein by fat.

There has been a tendency in some places to
look on carbohydrate as the only fuel of life.
Hill and others have considered it the sole source
of muscular energy. Of course it is possible that
in the final processes of the intermediary metab-
olism fat passes rapidly through a carbohydrate
stage. As far as I am aware no one has ever
caught it at this stage and I believe that you would
be fairly safe in offering to pay $100 for a gram of
carbohydrate that had been formed from fatty
acid in the mammalian organism. Lusk and his
pupils and the pupils of his pupils have been very
active in bringing up evidence against the theory
that carbohydrate is formed from fat. They have
shown that fat can be used perfectly well to supply
the energy for the muscles and that the respira-
tory quotient during muscular exercise is not very
different from the resting quotient. A super-
ficial study of the diet of some of the savage tribes,
particularly the Eskimos, would prove this to any
layman. For example when our Arctic explorers
had been on an exclusive meat diet for three
months and I myself had been on the diet ten
days we all ran around the large reservoir in
Central Park, New York with no more discom-
fort than when we were on a carbohydrate diet.
I asked Stefansson about the amount of work
he could do in the Arctic when on a meat diet and
he told me that he thought his record was 80 miles
of walking in one day. Andersen said his record
was running 35 miles on the ice pack in one day
when he had to get back to the land in a hurry.

In the last few years there has been a great
deal of work on the metabolism in obesity and
apparently most of this work has been wrong.
We have not added much to our total knowledge
since 1915 when Means in Boston demonstrated
that the metabolism of the obese was normal when
calculated according to surface area. Physicians
and laymen also have been puzzled by the fact
that some obese persons are apparently light eaters
and that some will not lose weight even when

204

THE COLLECTING NET

{ Vor. V. No. 38

placed for two or three weeks on diets that are
obviously too low in calories to meet the caloric
expenditure. In order to explain these pheno-
mena they have suggested that the basal metab-
olism is low or that work is carried on more
economically. This is not true. They have
reported in a large series of papers in Germany,
Ausiria and America that the specific dynamic
action of food is abnormally low in obesity and
have drawn a good many curves that would seem
to substantiate this. The specific dynamic action
is the stimulation in metabolism that follows the
ingestion of food and a good sized protein or
carbohydrate meal may raise the heat production
20-40% for a few hours. Now the curves for
specific dynamic action are hard to measure and
are affected by a great many factors particularly
if short test periods are employed. They are
even worse than glucose tolerance curves. It is
small wonder that the results are conflicting.
Spencer and McClellan using all the precautions
of the Sage metabolism ward and the Sage calori-
meter have studied a fairly large series of obese
men and women and have obtained perfectly
normal curves for the specific dynamic action.
They have found no abnormality of metabolism
except that the older obese patients have less
ketosis on low carbohydrate diets than the normal
controls. Even the depression of metabolism in
sleep is no greater for the obese than for the
normals.

Quite a few writers on the subject of obesity
have gone so far as to suggest theories that violate
the law of the conservation of energy. The chief
evidence by means of which they would upset this
law is the statement of certain fat people that they
are light eaters. These people are supposed to
be suffering from some form of endocrine dis-
order and they are classed under the heading of
“Constitutional or Endogenous Obesity”.

For a good many years we have known that
when diets are changed the variations in weight
are chiefly due to the retention or loss of water
loosely bound in the tissues of the body. It has
been believed that a fat person suddenly placed
on a diet which supplied only half the calories
expended retains enough extra water in his tis-
sues to mask the inevitable loss of body fat for
one, two or even more weeks. This phenomenon
has been admirably discussed in a recent report
by Newburg and Johnston of Ann Arbor. With
infinite labor and care they determined the water
balance of a series of fat persons. They cal-
culated the total heat production by means of
tests of the respiratory metabolism and for the
24 hour period supplemented this by using the
careful measurement of the insensible perspira-
tion according to the method of Benedict and
Root. If proper precautions are employed this
gives a fair measurement of the total heat pro-
duction.

Newburg and Johnston were able to show that
their obese patients even when losing body tissue
on submaintenance diets held or even gained
weight for considerable periods, the longest being
sixteen days. They proved that this was due to
a retention of water and they noted in all cases
a sudden loss of weight as this water was elimi-
nated with a return of the weight curve to the
point that was predicted from the daily loss of
body tissue. They emphasize the old conservative .
belief that obesity is caused by eating more food
than is needed.

Time does not permit us to discuss the valuable
pioneer work of Fritz Talbot of Boston who work-
ing at first with Benedict made so many valuable
contributions to our knowledge of the respiratory
metabolism of children. I would like, however,
to call your attention to a series of eleven papers
on the metabolism of children published in 1929
and 1930 by Samuel Z. Levine and his associates,
Wilson, Kelly, Rivkin and Gottschall working in
the Nursery and Childs Hospital, New York. The
technique is excellent, the work well planned and
the papers brief, but each report contains a table
of all the alcohol checks made with the apparatus
so that one can see at a glance the experimental
error. I wish that there were a law requiring
everyone who works with respiration apparatus to
publish all his alcohol checks.

Levine has confirmed the normal basal stand-
ards of metabolism of Benedict and Talbot and
has established the relationship of their insensible
perspiration to basal metabolism thus extending
to infants the work of Benedict and Root. He
has made observations on the glycogen deposits
of children finding it quite normal in one child
with cyclic vomiting. His observations on ketosis
are particularly interesting showing that children
develop ketone formation at a very much lower
fatty acid glucose ratio than adults. They do
not tolerate low carbohydrate rations as well as
adults. Moderate exercise in children is not at-
tended by any significant change in respiratory
quotient and there is no indication that carbohy-
drate is the only fuel of life or only fuel for
muscular work. He has confirmed the previous
finding that the basal metabolism of marasmic
infants is high on the basis of calories per kilo-
gram of body weight. These undernourished
infants have very scant fat deposits and in normal
children these fat deposits seem to take little part
in active metabolism. The thin child is, so to
speak, a more concentrated mass of active pro-
toplasm. There is no evidence of any qualitative-
ly abnormal metabolism in these marasmic chil-
dren, no change in their specific dynamic action
or response to exercise. Wilson and Levine sum
up by saying that their evidence supports the
generally accepted view that infantile marasmus
is the end result of chronic inanition induced by
repeated alimentary disturbances or by infections.

— 2"

Avcust 16, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

205

EFFECTS OF X-RAYS UPON REGENERATION

(Continued from Page 197)

X-rays and radium furnish an experimental
technique that should give data not previously
available in the solution of these histological pro-
blems.

Before reviewing the results of our initial work
with planarians, a word may be said regarding
the normal histological structure of the mesoder-
mal tissue known as the parenchyma, which has
been the subject of much controversy. At the
present time a majority of the investigators who
have carefully studied this tissue are apparently
agreed that it consists of a continuous syncytium
with relatively small nuclei and cytoplasm that
appear in sections like a reticulated or vacuolated
substance. Lying more or less free in this
syncytial mass are gland cells, muscle fibers with
their myoblasts, and what have been variously
termed the ‘“Bildungszellen”, ‘Stammzellen’’,
“regeneration cells”, or “formative cells”. Again,
there is pretty general agreement that the ‘‘free
cells” last named are the immediate source of
parts, like head, pharynx or gut lobes that are
formed during regeneration. The point of dis-
pute relates to the origin of such cells. Do they
arise by dedifferentiation of more specialized
cells, such as myoblasts and endodermal epithe-
lium, or from a persistent stock of cells that
has apparently descended from the embryo with-
out specialization? Investigators like Steinmann
(25, ’26 and ’27) and Vandel (’21) have des-
cribed such dedifferentiation. The conclusions
of Prenant (’22) and the studies in my laboratory
support the view that these cells are a persistent
and self-perpetuating embryonic stock from which
new parts arise during regeneration, at least in
the asexual strains of P. maculata and P. agilis.
The evidence for this interpretation is (1) that
these “iormative cells’ are the only cells in active
division and hence to be interpreted as the source
of transitional stages from formative cells to other
types which appear during regeneration and
growth, (2) that such cells are recognizable as a
type from the early stages of the embryo, and
(3) that destruction of these cells by X-rays or
radium destroys the power of regeneration.
Moreover, the post-pharyngeal region of Pro-
cotyla fluviatilis (Dendrocoelum lacteum), which
has long been known to be incapable of producing
a head and pharynx or otherwise regenerating
unless one calls the mere pointing of the posterior
end “regeneration”, possesses almost none of
these cells. Whereas the same region of a
Planaria maculata or a P. agilis, which has con-
spicuous powers of regeneration, possesses these
cells in abundance (cf. lantern slides). A similar
relationship is found to a lesser degree in strains

of P. agilis that differ in their formative cell con-
tent. It should also be noted that formative cells
give rise to the germ-cells when reproductive
organs are formed in planarians. As a check
upon my earlier observations these histological
relationships have been intensively studied in P.
agilis and in Proctyla fluviatilis by Miss Suzanne
Smith and Mr. Clarence Turner during the past
year.

Further confirmation of such a “formative cell
hypothesis” might be obtained by additional
studies of species with differing powers of re-
generation. A more satisfactory test is to destroy
these cells and thus transform a planarian capable
of regeneration into one incapable of such
changes. The formative cells appear to be un-
differentiated and embryonic. If undifferentiated
cells are killed by X-rays in higher animals a
similar result should be obtained in planarians.
The worms are irradiated and cut for regenera-
tion after a latent period of five days. They heal
the cut surfaces but do not regenerate although
they may remain alive for some days after the 12
to 15-day period necessary for regeneration in
the controls. Their normal appearance and
activities in crawling, righting, and feeding with
pharynx in mid-pieces indicate that they are fairly
normal in function as well as external structure.
If the irradiation is sufficient to completely check
regeneration the pieces die in from 20 to 40 days
with various abnormalities. Under sub-lethal
irradiation formation of the scar-tissue, which is
a mass of formative cells, is retarded and hence
the regeneration is delayed. There are no exter-
nal structural or functional abnormalities and the
worms gradually recover their normal power of
regeneration during a period of several weeks.
The lag in the rate of regeneration is quite ap-
parent at 40 days and in other experiments by
Miss Smith it seemed to be still recognizable at
80 days.

Sections of irradiated worms show (1) that
the formative cells are the only ones recognizably
affected by these sub-lethal exposures, and (2)
that formative cells are the first to show abnor-
malities following lethal exposures. The entire
mesodermal region of a P. agilis that has been
irradiated and cannot regenerate resembles the
post-pharyngeal region of a Procotyla fluviatilis
that does not normally regenerate. Further
experiments may conceivably give planarians that
cannot regenerate, in which formative cells are
not found and which will remain alive for so long
a period that their death cannot be fairly attributed
to the irradiation. Such a result has been obtained
in the annelid, Tubifex tubifex, as described later

206

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 38

in this report. It may be too much to hope for
another species in which the experimental results
will be so precise. The results with sub-lethal
exposures that cause a pronounced lag in the
rate of regeneration and in which only the forma-
tive cells are recognizably affected may be the
best evidence that can be obtained in planarians.

One must, of course, recognize the possibility,
as I stated in a previous summary of our results
(Curtis ’28, p. 144), “that it is the destruction
of something else in the planarian, upon which the
formative cells are dependent, that is responsible
for the check upon regeneration and that disap-
pearance of the formatitve cells is merely the first
step in a series of degenerative changes that end
in death of the individual. The formative cells
may be the ‘indicators’ and not the ultimate fac-
tors in regeneration. In view of our limited
knowledge concerning the manner in which radia-
tions produce their effects in protoplasm, this pos-
sibility must be considered. If one could secure
irradiated planarians that could not regenerate
and possessed no formative cells, but lived in-
definitely with no other abnormalities in structure
or functions, this possibility might be disregard-
ed.” I think, however, that adequate and per-
sistent physiological changes should be demon-
strated before this possibility can have more than
theoretical importance, -particularly in a case like
that of Tubifex. In this connection there may be
mentioned a reduced staining capacity in the ir
radiated worms that increases with the exposures.

One must also recognize the difficulties of fixa-
tion and interpretation presented by the mesoder-
mal region of planarians. Moreover, our studies
have been made principally upon the regeneration
of planarians without reproductive organs and
reproducing by fission. Some of the accounts of
formative cells arising by dedifferentiation (cf.
Vandel, ’21) are based upon worms with func-
tional reproductive organs. We have in progress
studies upon the process in such sexual individu-
als. A certain skepticism is warranted regarding
the phenomenon of dedifferentiation of animal
cells, because one often finds glib references to
such a process that do not rest upon any real ex-
amination of the cellular changes, and because the
alternate possibility of the death of differentiated
cells and their replacement by differentiation from
an embryonic stock cannot be excluded in some
instances where the cellular changes have been
specifically described.

Having obtained these results in planarians, it
seemed that other cases of regeneration should be
investigated by the technique or irradiation.
Species among Porifera, Coelenterata, Annulata,
Nemertinea, and Tunicata present conspicuous
powers of regeneration and related asexual pro-
cesses, the histological basis of which is inade-
quately known.

In the hydroid Tubularia crocea there is great
power of regeneration as described many years
ago by Bickford and others. When hydranths
are removed new ones can be formed in as short
a period as forty-eight hours at laboratory tem-
peratures, and the hydranths thus produced may
be removed with subsequent regenerations as long
as the material can be maintained in a normal
condition. Even very short pieces of the stem
will form new hydranths, sometimes even a hy-
dranth at either end by heteromorphic develop-
ment. Experiments by Mr. Ritter and myself
during the summers of 1927 and ’28 and experi-
ments this summer, in which I have been assisted
by Mr. Turner, show that regeneration in T.
crocea can be completely inhibited by suitable ex-
posures with X-rays. The hydroids are irradiat-
ed and their hydranths removed after allowing a
latent period of five days. No regeneration fol-
lows, although the stems remain alive as long as
twenty days after the removal of hydranths at
close of the latent period—a total of twenty-five
days since the irradiation. The irradiated stems
are not markedly different in appearance from
those of the controls and the active circulation of
particles in the enteron shows that the flagella of
the endoderm, and hence presumably the endo-
derm cells, are capable of normal activity. Dur-
ing this twenty-five-day period the controls under-
go repeated regenerations if the hydranths are re-_
moved as soon as formed. Investigation of the
histological changes that may be induced by the
rays is in progress. The normal T. crocea has
interstitial cells, like those of hydra which have
been described by various investigators as im-
portant in budding and regeneration.

With the annelid, Tubifex tubifex, striking re-
sults have been obtained by Mr. Stone, another of
my students. In this species a posterior end is
regenerated by the activities of undifferentiated
cells called neoblasts. These appear on the pos-
terior faces of the septa, migrate along the nerve
cord, to divide and differentiate in the regenerat-
ing posterior end as described by Krecker (’23).
Tubifex is irradiated with X-rays and after al-
lowing for a latent period of several days the
posterior ends are removed. The irradiated
worms fail to regenerate and form only a small
knob of tissue, which is an extension of the ecto-
dermal and endodermal epithelial layers without
obvious proliferation of new tissue and containing
perhaps a similar slight extension of the old mes-
odermal tissues between the layers of epithelium
thus formed. There is no sign of segment for- —
mation. Such irradiated individuals have been
kept alive for more than 140 days. If successive
posterior pieces are removed at intervals during
a 150-day period only these knobs are formed.
The X-rayed Tubifex are as though “castrated”
against regeneration. Control specimens, on the

Aucust 16, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

207

other hand, regenerate rapidly, forming an aver-
age of 20 to 24 segments in 18 days. Histological
examination shows that the irradiated worms con-
tain no neoblasts and no signs of the regenerating
septa, sete, nerve cords, musculature, and ne-
phridia that arise by division and differentiation
of neoblasts in the controls. The results indicate
that the neoblasts are destroyed in situ on the
septa or at least rendered incapable of migration,
growth and differentiation as in normal regenera-
tion. The irradiated worms show no other obvi-
ous abnormalities of structure or function and
they often outlive controls in the laboratory. Mr.
Stone is now engaged in a similar study of anteri-
or regeneration in this species.

Experiments with irradiated pieces of the
sponge Microciona prolifera, which were subse-

_ quently dissociated by squeezing through bolting

cloth seem to indicate a lag in the rate of de-
velopment for the colonies, formed by reassocia-
tion of the cells, as compared with controls, al-
though the results thus far are not conclusive.

Experiments by Mr. Coldwater during the pres-
ent summer with the nemertean, Lineus socialis,
show that X-rays likewise inhibit regeneration in
this species. The histological changes remain to
be studied.

In conclusion, an experiment upon planarians
with radium may be mentioned as giving the same
results as X-rays. In all the cases thus far ex-

‘amined, “healing” of the cut surface occurs and

is therefore a distinct and separable process from
the regeneration which does not occur following
radiation. There seems no common exposure to
the X-rays that is effective. One tries increas-
ing amounts until the inhibition is obtained in a
given species. Once an effective exposure is
reached the results are obtained consistently. Dr.
Failla has estimated that my exposures are about
ten erythema units for Planaria and sixty for
Tubularia, allowing for absorption by the mini-
mum amount of water in which the specimens
must be immersed.

The importance of such studies lies, I think, in
the light that may be thrown upon the histological
changes of regeneration, and in the demonstra-
tion of a technique that should be useful in the

study of developmental and other phenomena
wherever there is a differential susceptibility of
cells that results in the “selective” action of
X-rays and radium. One destroys parts of em-
bryos and larger organisms by gross and micro-
dissection of parts to see how the remainder be-
haves in the absence of a part removed. One uses
various chemical methods of experimentation. Ir-
radiation offers a method of destroying certain
kinds of cells as though by micro-dissecting
needles of ultra-microscopic proportions.

There remains the more fundamental physio-
logical question of the effects of these radiations
upon protoplasm. This is a problem for the bio-
physicist, not for one without such training and
who uses these radiations as a tool, in the way one
might an immersion lens. The present oppor-
tunity is thus two-fold. Exploratory studies can
be undertaken in the extension of irradiation as a
technique and there remain the underlying bio-
physical problems. For we have as yet no ade-
quate data for sound hypotheses regarding the
effects of these rays upon protoplasm.

CURTIS, W. C.,
Old problems and a new technique.
128.

KRECKER, F. H.,

Origin and activities of the neoblasts in the regenera-

tion of microdrilous annelida. J. Exp. Zool., Vol. 37,

1923.

PRENANT, M.,

Recherches sur le parenchyme des plathelminthes.

Essai d’histologie comparée. Arch. de Morph. Gen.

et Exp., Fasc. 5, 1922.

STEINMANN, P.,

Das Verhalten der Zellen und Gewebe im regener-

ierenden Tricladenkorper. Verh. der Naturw. Ges. in

Basel, Bd. 36, 1925.

Prospektive Analyse von Restitutionsvorgtingen:

I. Die Vorgainge in den Zellen, Geweben und Or-
ganen wahrend der Restitution von Planarien-
fragmenten. Arch. ftir Entw.-Mech. der Organ.,
Bd. 108, 1926.

II. Ueber Reindividualisation d. i.

Science, Feb. 10,

Riickkehr von

Mehrfachbildungen zur einheitlichen Organisa-
tion. Arch. fiir Entw.-Mech. der Organ., Bd.
112, 1927.

VANDEL A.,

Recherches experimentales sur les modes de reproduc-

tion des planaries triclades paludicoles. Bull. Biol.

de la France et de la Belgique, Tome 55, 1921.

(A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labora-
tory on August 1.)

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. CURTIS
Dr. Marte A. HinricHs
Department of Physiology, University of Chicago

The effect of X-rays on the regenerative capacity
of certain invertebrates has been studied his-
tologically by Curtis and his students, and in his
paper, Curtis reported in greater detail the results
of his own studies on Planaria, and showed
sections through such forms as Planaria agilis and
Dendrocoelum lacteum. He called attention to

the abundance, in P. agilis, of free cells migrating
through the parenchyma, and dividing mitotically.
These cells were seen to accumulate at the regen-
erating surface of a cut piece of Planaria. On
the other hand, Dendrocoelum lacteum, particularly
in the posterior region through which the section
was shown, has no such cells distributed through

208

its tissues, and does not, at this level, exhibit the
power of regenerating a new head. Curtis
pointed out the correlation between normal re-
generating capacity and the presence of an
abundance of formative cells, and between the
lack of such cells and the corresponding lack of
regenerative powers.

These formative cells, if embryonic in nature,
should exhibit the same degree of susceptibility
to X-rays as do other embryonic and undifferen-
tiated cells. In other words, there should be a
selective action of X-rays for these cells. This
was found to be the case, for following the ex-
posure of pieces to X-rays, the formative cells in
these pieces may be reduced in number, and
regeneration retarded, or, if the dosage is in-
creased, be entirely lacking as are also the powers
of normal regeneration. From these facts, which
may be briefly summarized as a_ correlation
between normal regenerative capacity and the
abundance of formative cells, and the loss of such
capacity paralleling the disappearance of such
cells, Curtis deduces his theory of the role of the
formative cells in regeneration.

However, in his report, Curtis has failed to
emphasize the importance of the following fac-
tors; (a) the level of the cut with respect to its
position along the antero-posterior axis of the
animal, (b), the size of the piece removed, and
(c), the time after section, at which the exposure
was made.

All of these are factors in the regulation of the
regenerative process. Normal regeneration of
cut ends of pieces from different levels proceeds
at different rates. The capacity of the newly

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 38°

forming tissue to produce a normal head is related
to the level of the cut and to the size of the cut
piece, and is normally a function of the relative
activities of the cut end and of the rest of the
piece. Regeneration following sectioning depends
upon many factors, among them the activity of
the cells directly at the cut surface, (some of
which are injured by sectioning), and on the
response of the uninjured cells to an abrupt
change in immediate environment, and finally, on
the activity of the cells immediately adjacent to
these, and of their relation to the rest of the
piece. This is particularly striking when there
are two cut surfaces, and the piece is small.

If the free formative cells alone are to be con-
sidered as important factors in the regenerative
process, it would appear that the stimulation of
cutting produces a directive migration of forma-
tive cells toward the cut end with consequent ac-
cumulation of these cells at the cut surface.

If these cells are largely responsible for the
capacity to regenerate normally, a series of
sections made at different times during the re-
generation period, and at different levels through
a normal animal for which the regenerative
capacity at the various levels is known, should be
instructive. Also, under certain conditions, it is
possible to increase the frequency of normal head-
formation of a given level. Would sections under
such conditions show an increase in abundance of
formative cells at the cut end of the piece?

Furthermore, are these formative cells also
selectively affected by such agents as anaesthetics,
acids, low temperature, and other physical and
chemical agents known to inhibit regeneration?

THE RELATION BETWEEN DIVISION RATE AND SUSCEPTIBILITY
TO RADIATION

Dr. CHARLES PACKARD
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Institute of Cancer Research, Columbia University

One of the chief problems before the radiolo-
gist is to determine why some kinds of cells can
be more easily injured by X-rays or radium rays
than others. This difference in susceptibility has
been put to practical use by the physician who can
check the growth of a tumor without harming the
surrounding healthy tissue; and by the biologist
who can by means of the radiations, affect a
single gene, the others escaping any permanent
alteration. How this is accomplished still remains
‘unknown; at present we can approach the pro-
blem by studying the conditions common to cells
in a sensitive or a resistant condition.

That cells in active division are relatively sus-
ceptible is a matter of common knowledge. But
there are some exceptions to the rule. A rapidly
growing melanosarcoma of the cheek resists all
treatment, while a slow growing basal cell sarcoma

on the same site responds readily. Nor is it true
that sensitivity is a characteristic of dividing cells.
Colpidium is killed only by a dose larger than
ordinary X-ray tubes can deliver, while sperma-
tozoa, which do not divide at all, are easily
injured. But in general, a cell in ‘actual mitosis
is more sensitive to radiations than it is at any
other time.

When an actively growing tissue is irradiated
the cells already in division complete the cycle,
often at an accelerated rate, and then cease from
further division. In the meantime cells about to
divide are prevented from so doing. Thus, soon
after the exposure begins all mitotic activity ends.
How soon this condition appears depends on the
strength of the dose. If then a tissue which is
actively growing is sensitive, it may be because
many cells are in mitosis when the exposure

Aucust 16, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

209

begins. How much difference in sensitivity there
is between an active and quiescent tissue can be
tested quantitatively with Drosophila eggs.

These eggs constitute a good material for this
purpose because they are remarkably uniform in
their response to definite doses. I have found that

half of the eggs in a large sample will be killed by ~

180 Roentgen units, regardless of the wave length
of the beam. This is true for all the different
strains of wild flies tested here and abroad. So
constant is this response that it can be used to
determine the number of X-ray units delivered
by a machine. This is a useful procedure, for by
it one can calibrate the commercial dosimeters
which frequently fail to register properly.

Since this response is so dependable it can be
used to determine variations in_ sensitivity,
especially when the division rate is increased or
decreased by appropriate temperatures. At 28°C.
the development of the eggs is about five times
as fast as it is at 13°; the rates of cleavage are
in about the same proportion. So if the eggs
are exposed after being in the higher tempera-
ture for a time, the probability is that very many
more will be in actual mitosis, that is, in a sensi-
tive condition, than in the lower temperature.
But when these two groups are given the same
accurately measured dose, the difference in sensi-
tivity, as shown by the proportion of eggs
hatching, is not large,—about 40 per cent. That
is, if a definite proportion of the chilled eggs is
killed in 10 mmutes, the same proportion of
warmed eggs will be killed in 6 minutes. So it
appears that while division rate and sensitivity

are correlated they are by no means parallel.

Now it can be shown that all kinds of cells
absorb about the same amount of energy when
irradiated under similar conditions. As a result
of the absorption, photochemical processes are
set up, which are independent of the temperature,
and these lead to changes in the physical and
chemical nature of the proteins and fats. Thus
the initial amount of injury is about the same in
all cells. But some, especially those in mitosis,
are severely damaged by these degenerative pro-
cesses, while others are not permanently affected.
This suggests that in cells which we call sensitive
these degenerative processes continue to increase,
while in resistant cells they decrease. In other
words, the reparative processes are more vigorous
in cells which are dividing slowly or not at all
than they are in those which are rapidly dividing.

This idea can be tested by a simple experiment.
If the eggs are irradiated at room temperature
and then divided into two portions, one of which
is incubated at 28° C and the other at 18° the
latter hatch out in larger proportion than the
former, the difference being about 25 per cent.
So when cells are prevented from dividing rapidly
they have a better chance to recover from their
injuries than when they are stimulated by a rise
in temperature to undergo frequent mitoses. Per-
haps the cessation of mitosis during and after
exposure is a kind of protective response on the
part of the cell. I emphasize this phenomenon of
recovery for I believe that it is an important
factor in determining the sensitivity of cells to
radiations.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. PACKARD
Dr. G. FAILia
Physicist, Memorial Hospital, New York

Dr. Packard’s work with Drosophila eggs is
well known to those interested in the biological
effects of radiation.
ing an expérimental technique which in his hands
has yielded some of the best quantitative data

available at present. His work on the influence
of wave length on the biological effect of X-rays
is an outstanding contribution. He has now made
use of the same material and technique in attack-
ing a problem of great theoretical interest.

The experimental results presented by Dr.
Packard show that there is a definite relation
between temperature and sensitivity to radiation.
There is also a definite relation between tempera-
ture and the rate of development of the eggs so
that one may thus obtain indirectly a relation be-
tweeen rate of development and sensitivity. How-
ever, a change in the rate of development is pro-
bably the last step in a series of reactions which
may be influenced by temperature. Therefore, the

He has succeeded in develop-

connection between rate of development and sen-
sitivity to radiation obtained by varying the
temperature, may be fictitious. That is, tempera-
ture influences not only the rate of development
ot the cell but also chemical processes which take
place within the cell and which are probably
responsible for the change in the rate of develop-
ment. Accordingly, one may attribute the
increase in sensitivity to radiation to the greater
chemical activity of the medium, at the higher
temperature.

Dr. Packard has mentioned that rapid rate of
division of different cell types and high sensitivity
do not always go together. This lends strength
to the argument that the important thing may be,
not the rate of development, but the physical and
chemical state of medium at the time of
irradiation and subsequently.

Pursuing this further, we may assume that
the action of radiation takes place in the follow-

(Continued on Page 212)

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 38

pressure of these is greater than that of their

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Ware Cattell Editor

Assistant Editors

Mary Howe Annaleida 8S. Cattell

Business Manager
Ise Michaelis

Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

On Board S. S.Taiyo
July 4, 1930
At Sea off Shanghai
_ To the Editor:

Do you know that on the Beach at Waikiki
there is the most delightful marine laboratory?
It has the most interesting ecological associations
imaginable ; many of the amphibious forms appear
only by moonlight and they say (I cannot vouch
for this personally) that there are some rare
Sirenidae in the local waters. I did hear some
strange melodic sounds but I never located the
animal that made them. It seemed to be con-
cealed in the bushes. The Arbacia are a different
species than we find in the Hole, and much larger ;
but like the latter they try to hide in an absurd
way beneath flowers, fragments of cloth and other
debris. They are dark brown, they bury them-
selves in the sand at low tide and they frequently
attach themselves to the larger vertebrates for
symbiotic purposes. Believe it or not, I also saw
the tables turned; I saw one of the heavier
vertebrates riding upon a gigantic Hippocampus
as an aid to locomotion. A delightful place for
the well-trained Woods Hole naturalist!

In a few days Carlotta and I will trans-ship at
Hongkong for Bangkok, where we hope to see
Professor Hugh M. Smith. He has been Director
of Fisheries for the Siamese Government for a
number of years and probably knows a great deal
about my sharks.
appears that the Elasmobranchs migrate freely
from salt to fresh water in the warm and broadly-
shelving waters of the Malay Archipelago and
East Indies, some species being exclusively fresh-
water inhabitants. This euryhaline habit is well
known among the Teleostei, which resist the
osmotic change by renal and branchial activities.
But it remains to be determined what happens to

_ the Elasmobranchs under these conditions ; physi-
ologically they are more lowly organized and they
are apparently unable to resist the osmotic stress
of a marine habitat. They yield to it by retaining
urea in the blood and tissues until the osmotic

From scattered records it

environment. They can thus absorb water ad lib.
for renal excretion by simple osmosis. They are,
so to speak, osmotically on top of their environ-
ment,—a unique situation among all known marine
vertebrates. When they go into fresh water I
predict the urea will disappear; they will become
as fresh water teleosts, but still hypertonic to their
milieu exterieur.

Perhaps I should make no predictions, but wait
until I get my Elasmobranchs in fresh water!
Anyway, it is to me an extremely interesting pro-
blem, both functionally and as an historical phase
of the evolution of Claude Bernard’s “milieu
intérieur.”

With kindest regards to all our friends,
Sincerely,
Homer W. Smith.

YARNS AND CORDAGE
Sunday Evening in Woods Hole About Thirty Years Ago

Those people who go to church were in church.
Those who do not go to church were in the
laboratory (?).

Suddenly the fire alarm sounded, (in those days
a steam whistle on the Fish Commission’s pump-
ing station). The shriek echoed and re-echoed
through the still air.

At that time the pride of Woods Hole was a
new horse-drawn hose-cart. This, if memory is
correct, was the first chance to use it—to give it,
as it were, a baptism of fire. The nearest volun-
teers quickly pushed the apparatus into the street.
Meanwhile, from the churches and everywhere
a large crowd gathered. Then there was a long
wait for the horse.

At length an ancient gray mare appeared at
solemn walk, escorted by old Sandy, driver for
Luscombe’s livery. By many helpers the horse
was quickly hitched to the hose-cart. The driver
mounted. Two men crowded beside him. Five
men clung in various precarious positions to the
reel in the rear. Then nothing happened. They
just stood there,—minutes, it seemed.

Then Sandy’s voice: “One on the seat, one on
the reel.”” Another long wait. Again the driver:
“One on the seat, one on the reel.” Still no one
moved. No one said anything. The old horse
hung her head. The reins lay slack on her back.

Finally Sandy once more: “The regulations
say one on the seat, one on the reel. Some of
you fellows get down or we'll stay here till hell
freezes over.”

Six men sheepishly dismount. Sandy looks
back to make sure. At aged trot the old mare
starts toward Nobska and the brush fire. At such
pace as they may, the volunteers take up the rear.

ESR OE;

a a a ed “ah ie onetime

ae ee ee

Aucust 16, 1930 ]

211

THE COLLECTING NET

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Word has been received that Dr. Gilman A.
Drew, former resident Director of the Marine
Biological Laboratories, has suffered a paralytic
stroke. Dr. and Mrs. Drew were en route from
their home in Winter Haven, Florida, to Woods
Hole to visit friends and renew old acquaintances.
The affliction occured to Dr. Drew on July 16th
when they had come only as far as Henderson-
ville, N. C. Some reassuring news has been
received concerning his condition and it is hoped
by his many friends connected with the Labor-
atory that his progress will be rapid and _ his
recovery complete.

Dr. Wm. Randolph Taylor has left Woods
Hole to attend the International Botanical Con-
gress which convenes in Cambridge, England,
this month.

Dr. Louis N. Katz, formerly assistant profes-
sor of physiology in the School of Medicine of
Western Reserve University has accepted the
same position at the University of Chicago. Dr.
Katz is also to be physiologist and director of
cardiac-vascular research at the Michael Reese
Hospital.

The International Congress of Experimental
Cytology convenes at Amsterdam during the pre-
sent month.

_ The second International Congress for Sex
Research convened in London last week. Profes-
sor Carl R. Moore was in attendance.

Professor Charles A. Kofoid, after lecturing
for two months at the Institute of Biology at
Tohoku Imperial University, has taken up his
research work in the Marine Station at Asamushi.

In October the School of Medicine of the
University of Pennsylvania will celebrate the one
hundred and fifty-sixth year of its founding.
Honorary degrees will be conferred upon Sir
Walter Fletcher and Dr. A. V. Hill. During the
celebration both of these English physiologists
will deliver addresses. It will be remembered by
many at the laboratory that Dr. Hill and Sir
Walter visited this laboratory at the time of the
Physiological Congress a year ago.

Dr. Reinhard Beutner, assistant professor of
pharmacology at Louisville University, paid a
visit to the Laboratory last week.

Harvard University has rejected a gift in a will
to endow courses in instruction in eugenics. The
Supreme Court of Pennsylvania has decided that
the gift must be made to some other medical
school.

Dr. C. F. Briscoe, professor of bacteriology at
the University of Mississippi has been dismissed
from his chair with seventeen other men. These
dismissals are in addition to those made a couple
of weeks ago. Dr. Briscoe is sixty-two years old
and took his PhD at the University of Illinois
in 1912.

Dr. Ivey F. Lewis, professor of biology at the
University of Virginia, and his family arrived
August 2 and are occupying the little cottage near
the dormitory which has been occupied by the
Woodruffs of New Haven for a number of years.

Mr. Victor Runo and his family of Worcester
have taken Miss Tinkham’s large house on Mil-
field Street for the month of August.

On Wednesday, August 6, the Coast Guard
boat, CG-280, in charge of Stanley Wilk, towed
the Marlen II, which had a broken rudder, off
the rocks near Grassy Island and brought her to
the Fish Commission dock. The yacht belongs
to Mr. William T. Grant of New York and West
Falmouth. It will be docked in the Eel Pond for
about six weeks while undergoing repair.

The new commander of the Coast Guard Base
at Woods Hole, Lieutenant-Commander R. S.
Patch, and his family are occupying the Davis
cottage, formerly the Little Harbor Inn, on the
road to Falmouth.

On August 7, the Coast Guard patrol boat, in
charge of W. W. Worcester, helped tow the
Lillian, a fishing sloop belonging to Mr. Vietlain
Bengyard of Somerville, Mass., from a point
near Gay Head where her engine had become
disabled owing to a broken shaft.

Miss Edith May Dowling of Wakefield, Mass.,
and Edward McCrady, Jr., of Charleston, S. C.,
were married in Wakefield on Friday, August 15.
Miss Dowling was in Woods Hole last summer
as a waitress at the Mess, and Mr. McCrady,
who is a graduate assistant in zoology at the
University of Pittsburgh, was carrying on re-
search work at the Laboratory.

Mr. Paul Davis and his family of Nashville,
Tennessee, are occupying the Warbasse’s big
house, “Gladheim”’, on Penzance Point for the
month of August.

Mr. M. Ernest Jenkins and his family of
Roland Park, Baltimore, are occupying the War-
ren cottage at the corner of West Street and the
Breakwater road for the month of August.

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vou. V. No. 38

REVIEW OF SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. PACKARD

(Continued from Page 209)

ing sequence: (1) liberation of high speed elec-
trons from atoms, (2) ionization, (3a) recom-
bination of ions into the original chemical sub-
stances, (3b) “cross-recombination” of ions into
chemical substances which differ in kind or con-
centration from those originally present in the
irradiated medium, (4) disturbance of physical
and chemical equilibria required for the normal
course of vital processes, (5) biological changes.
The first two steps in this process are independent
of temperature, while the third and fourth are
not. The fifth step, or biological change, which
is the thing we actually observe, may depend on
the temperature simply because it depends on
preceding reactions which are influenced by
temperature. On this basis, we may account for
the difference in sensitivity of eggs irradiated
at different temperatures by assuming that steps
(3) to (4) proceed at a different rate and may
even differ in other respects. To account for the
different sensitivity of cells of different type at
the same temperature and the same cell at dif-
ferent periods in its life cycle, other assumptions
must be made.

Dr, Packard introduces the idea that the initial
amount of injury is about the same in all cells,
but the reparative processes are more vigorous
in cells which are dividing slowly or not at all,
than they are in those which are dividing rapidly.
Applying this idea to the experiment in which eggs
were irradiated at room temperature and then
some were kept at 18°C. and others at 28° C., we
arrive at the conclusion that in the eggs kept at
the lower temperature reparative processes were
more vigorous. It is perhaps difficult to visualize
how a reparative process, which must depend in
some way or other on chemical activity, can be
more vigorous at the lower temperature.

On the basis of the sequence, ionization—
chemical change—biological change, we may say
that the initial ionization was the same in both
cases; the chemical change was not the same be-
cause the temperature was different and, there-
fore, the biological change was also different.
According to this view the chemical change would
have to be less at the lower temperature, which is
what one might expect. It may be mentioned in
this connection that ions are produced in close
proximity to one another. Nevertheless, they do
not recombine instantly and the rate of recom-
bination depends on their motility. With increased
thermal agitation there is a better chance of
“cross-recombination” which results in chemical
changes. This view, of course, does not preclude
the existence of reparative processes, but in my
opinion they do not play an essential part in the
phenomenon under consideration.

There may be various interpretations of Dr.
Packard’s experimental results. When so little is
known about the modus operandi of radiation any
theory is necessarily built on a flimsy foundation.
The important thing is that Dr. Packard has
obtained experimental data of unquestionable
accuracy, which must be taken into account in any
theoretical development of the subject. If I pre-
fer the “physico-chemical” interpretation of the
results, it is perhaps because I am more familiar
with physics and chemistry.

Dr. Egloff’s Boat Wrecked on Uncharted Rocks

The 30 foot auxiliary sloop Jullinar from-

Woods Hole owned by Dr. D. C. Egloff went on
the breakwater in the Saco river on Wednesday
evening. A Coast Guard Patrol boat, assisted by
a number of smaller boats attempted to rescue
the stranded vessel, but they were unsuccessful.

Dr. Egloff with his wife, and Richard Beckman
of Chicago, had been cruising in the Maine waters.
Mrs. Egloff is the daughter of Dr. Frank R.
Lillie.

A head tide was running against him when Dr.
Egloff started upstream under the power of the
boat’s engine. The breakwater was hidden from
sight by the high water. There are no buoys or
markings of any kind to warn skippers of the
long stretch of rocks reaching from the Saco side
almost across the river. Earlier in the season
another vessel was lost on these treacherous
rocks.

Currents in the Hole

At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time)
the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards
Bay to Vineyard Sound:

Date A.M. P.M.
August 16 9:37 10:11
August 17 10:30 alist 2)
August 18 3.5 Lile25 near
August 19 .... 12:07 12:26
August 20 gilt 23)
August 21 22 ZA
August 22 3 :06 3:20
August 23 .... 4:03 4:16
August 24 4:51 5:07

In each case the current changes six hours later
and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be
remembered that the schedule printed above is de-
pendent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes
eause the turning of the current to occur a half an

hour earlier or later than the times given above.
Cn

Aucust 16, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 213

Cine-Photomicrography
— The Key to New Fields of

R esearc h » » »
CINE-PHOTOMICROGRAPHY has for some time been recognized as an

extremely valuable and fascinating factor in the fields of research in medicine,
biology, chemistry and all of the natural sciences. Exploration into these fields
by this method has 6cen much hampered because equipment has been both ex-
pensive and difficult to manage.

To meet the ever-increasing demand fora satisfactory Cine-Photomicrographic
outfit, B & L has designed an apparatus which is low in price and simple in ad-
justment, yet it is as efficient as a much more complicated and bulky set-up.

The outfit is so designed that you can focus the microscope and observe the
specimen at any time without shifting the camera or interfering with the photo-
graphic process in any way. It can be used with any standard microscope.

Send for catalog E-25 explaining many other advantages and giving full details.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO.

671 ST. PAUL STREET en es ROCHESTER, N. Y.

TO 3
GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
= LOMB

MAKERS. OF ORTHOGON EYEGLASS LENSES FOR BETTER VISION.
<SS———E—_—E__=====—=——_——_—_=_=_=====aBaBES=S===

ms)
pi
~

THE COLLECTING NET

A Group of
Excellent Textbooks
in Zoology

Textbook of General Zoology
By WINTERTON C. CURTIS
and MARY J. GUTHRIE

585 pages 6 by 9 308 figures $3.75

Laboratory Directions in General
Zoology
By WINTERTON C. CURTIS
and MARY J. GUTHRIE

194 pages 6 by 9 Illustrated $1.50

An Elementary Course in
General Physiology

Part I. Principles and Theory
By G. W. SCARTH

Part II. Laboratory Exercises
By F. E. LLOYD

6 by 9

258 pares $2.75

Introduction to Vertebrate Embryology
By WALDO SHUMWAY
6 by 9 195 figures $3.75

2nd Ed. 314 pages

Histological Technique

A Guide for Use in a Laboratory Course
in Histology

By B. F. KINGSBURY
-and O. A. JOHANNSEN

142 pages 6 by 9 16 figures $2.25

Essentials of Human Embryology
By GIDEON 8S. DODDS

316 pages 5% by 9 $4.00

An Introduction to Human Parasitology
By ASA C, CHANDLER
4th Edition 655 pages 6 by 9 $5.00

John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

440 Fourth Avenue, New York City

McGRAW-HILL

has just published

a text and a laboratory
manual in vertebrate
embryology

AN INTRODUCTION TO
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY

By H. L. WIEMAN
Professor of Zoology, University of Cincinnati
411 pages 6x9 201 illustrations $4.00

McGraw-Hill Publications in the
Zoological Sciences

This book is intended as a text for an intro-
ductory course in vertebrate embryology which
can be used to advantage by premedical
students and also by general college students.

The opening chapters deal with certain
features of the study of protoplasm and are
offered for the purpose of linking cytology
with embryology. This presentation is paral-
leled by appropriate studies in the laboratory.
The early development of Amphioxus and the
frog are next considered together with
reference to some phases of experimental em-
bryology which have a general significance.
Throughout the text an effort has been made
to call attention to experimental work when-
ever practicable. The treatment of the chick
embryo and the mammalian embryo, except
in connection with difficult phases of the sub-
ject, is planned to complement the laboratory
work rather than supplement it. The chapters
on human embryology have no counterpart in
the laboratory work,—the student’s study of
the pig embryo serving as the background for
the discussion, which may also be supplemented
by demonstrations.

LABORATORY MANUAL FOR
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY

By H. L. WIEMAN
and C. K. WEICHERT
Instructor in Zoology
University of Cincinnati
6x9 $1.00

This manual provides the student with a
guide for his laboratory study of certain
vertebrate forms, principally the embryos of
the chick and the pig. It is planned primarily
for use with the above text but it may accom-
pany other texts as well.

100 pages

Send for copies on approval

McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY, Isc.

Penn Terminal Building

370 Seventh Ave. New York

[ Vor. V. No. 38

a a a eeineneaianaliad

Aucust 16, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET

AN OBJECTIVE CHANGER

Carrying three pairs low power objectives

S) EIN Sieh

UNIVERSAL
BINOCULAR
MICROSCOPES

Nos. 55 and 56

ise)
a
on

CONVERTIBLE:

No. 55—as illustrated with horse-
shoe base.

No. 56—the stage and above that
omitting base.

EQUIPPED WITH:
MULTIPLE
NOSEFIECE

A new, original, patented objec-
tive changer which carries three
pairs low power objectives and
F which revolves like an ordinary
triple nosepiece. The objectives
may be removed instantly and
others substituted.

The objectives on the nosepiece are dust proof and the worker can easily get to them to
clean them.

These microscopes have a very large stage 100 m/m x 100m/m. Objects in the center of a
dish 50 m/m high and 130 m/m in diameter may be brought into the lines of vision. The
rack and pinion movement together with the adjustability of the arm on the slide permits
the focusing on very thick objects. The large mirror (62 m/m diameter) is sufficient to
illuminate the large fields of the lower power objectives. :

NEW :: ORIGINAL :: BETTER
SPENCER LENS COMPANY aa

MANUFACTURERS

BUFFALO Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring | BUFFALO |
SUS.A_ Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Ete. —.§.A_

BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

216 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vot. V. No. 38

The

Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service “Equal Excelled
is of invaluable assistance to to Any ov? Se by None”
Librarians—Investigators—Teachers ) ig

It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographie Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

GOLD SEAL

NON-CORROSIVE

Microscopic

COVER GLASSES

DO NOT FOG

We have the largest stock in the
U. S. A. and the largest variety of
sizes and thinnesses, squares, circles
and rectangulars.

GOLD SEAL MICRO. SLIDES
RITE-ON MICRO. SLIDES

If your Dealer can’t supply you send
order (mentioning dealer's name) to

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nestling
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight 1-inch slides
or thirty-two 14-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides,

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Circular will be sent on request
And Now

ee
alee roo

Aucust 16, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 217

Selected by

~ AMERICA’S FOREMOST
LABORATORIES

MODEL “IURM”

Combination Type for Binocular
and Monocular Vision as well
as Photo-Micrography.

Microscope “IURM” will command
far-reaching recognition for
Research Investigation and

Photo-Micrography.
WRITE
for

Pamphlet
No. 1141 (CN)

Bes Veh 2 aha.

60 East 10th Street New York, N. Y.

Microscope “IURM”

Microscope Slides
By

Turtox

All Turtox microscope slides are prepared in our
LA. Spe own laboratory by our own staff of technicians in-
\ Cre ee cluding specialists in Bacteriology, Botany, Embryology,

\ ipa Zoology, Parasitology and Histology. The quality of
our preparations is such that we are always glad to
send slides for examination with the understanding
that they are to be returned at our expense if not
entirely satisfactory.

The Turtox Microscope Slide catalog
will be sent on request

General Biological Supply House

(INCORPORATED)

5a 761-763 East 69th Place
The Sign of the Turtox : Stet
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction Chicago, Illinois

218 THE COLLECTING NET

ZEISS

HOMAL LENSES

For correcting the curvature of the image formed
by microscope objectives. Especially intended
for photomicrography

Homals project a sharp image on a plane
(photographie plate) of the curved intermediate
image of a flat object as produced by a micro-
scope objective. The optical system composed
of microscope objective and Homal forms accord-
ingly a plane image of a plane object after the
manner of an aplanatie photographic lens. An
equal flatness of field, maintaining at the same
time maximum corrections of the image, is not
obtainable with any other available system.

Microscope objectives can be grouped into three
classes in respect to the curvature of the image
produced by them, and three corresponding
Homals (I, III, IV) are provided each having the
same focal length, namely 20 mm. In addition,
a Homal (II) of lower magnification (focal length
70 mm) is provided for the same group of objec-
tives (low powers) as Homal I.

Homals have a larger diameter than standard
oculars and are attached to the microscope by
means of an adapter. For microscopes of other
than Zeiss manufacture an additional inter-
mediate ring is required.

f.o.b. New York
Homal I ) for objectives $22.00
Homal IT) 5 to 20 inel. 30.00
Homal III for dry objectives 40 and above 22.00
Homal IV for water and oil im. objectives 22.00
Adapter with intermediate piece for oculars 3.50

A copy of descriptive catalog Micro 390
will be supplied upon request

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Ange‘es

WILL CORPORATIO

11762 MICRO SLIDES — Non-Corrosive. These
are made from a very hard erown glass and
possess a slightly greenish tint when viewed
edgewise but this has absolutely no effect in
decreasing illumination in that the color in-
tensity is less than that possessed by the glass
used in microscope objectives. They are guar-
anteed against corrosion in any climate and are
remarkably uniform in thickness, averaging
about 1.2 mm. The edges are well ground and
the slides are as free from striations, seratches
or bubbles as possible in a miero slide. Size,
3 x Linch; packed in %-gross cartons.

discount. Per 100 gross, 25% discount.

11772 MICRO SLIDES — Non-Corrosive. These
are made from the same glass as No. 11762
above, but are of a size, 3 x 2. inches; packed
in %-gross cartons.

Per gross ;
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

11777 MICRO SLIDES—White. These slides are
made from an imported glass that is as white
as can be obtained and are relatively free from
striations or scratches. They run fairly uniform
in thickness, averaging from 1.4 mm to 1.7 mm,
and have edges well ground. These slides are
preferred by many because of the absence of
color, although optically this is of no great im-
portance, They are not absolutely guaranteed
against corrosion under all conditions, but the
glass from which they are made is highly resis-
tive. Size, 3 x 1 inch; packed in %-gross
cartons,

Per gross . Secasare oi aeat
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

11782. MICRO SLIDES—White, Thin. These are
of the same glass as No. 11777 above, but ap-
preciably thinner, running approximately 1.0
mm; size, 3 x 1 inch,

Per gross) 2.asacts cee ;
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RocHEsTER, N-Y:

[ Vou. V. No. 38

Aucust 16, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 219

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for
SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, ete.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Crav-Apams Company

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Botanical and Biological models and preparations
and skeletal material
Sole agents for Spaltcholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

Saag. Marine EGA

Biological ( Tested
Laboratory Funty)
Sipals CHEMICALS
Department Represent the highest quality C. P. chemicals
obtainable. They have been carefully
FOR THE BEST checked in our testing laboratory and bear

labels showing results of their analyses.

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL Most are of American origin, but we draw

CLASSROOM MATERIAL from the best products of the world, insur-
MUSEUM SPECIMENS ing the user the highest purity at a reason-
LIFE HISTORIES able price.
For analytical chemicals, specify
Samples of different preparations on E. & A. grade.
aa EIMER & AMEND
Catalogues and Information Furnished by Est. 1851 Inc. 1897
Applying at Supply Department Office HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street

NEW YORK, N. Y.

———ooooooeeaoaoaaeaeaeaeE=sEseaesS=«=«=$S$g$g"cS=S=Soaoaoaoooeeem*-]

3

220 ee THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. V. No. 38%
CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH B. WESTERMANN CO., INC.
(Episcopal)
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector 13 West 46th Beis
Holy Communion - - - - 7:30 a.m. New York City
Saeed pie 4 Ph Se AE: 4 on ae All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages
WALTER O. LUSCOMBE COTTAGE FOR SALE
REAL ESTATE AND GARDINER ROAD,
INSURANCE Near Bathing Beach
Woods Hole Phone 622 MRS. E. P. LYON
D — Lin — Lac
Ties cuesley Aue THE TWIN DOOR
Elizabeth Arden Coty RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
~ sardley Pe G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Choice Bits from Pekin : =
Chicke d Lobster D
MRS. WEEKS SHOPS e Watleg n
FALMOUTH Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.
“BILL” ENGLISH COME TO
A Man’s Store THE TOASTED SANDWICH SHOP
MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR M. B. L. Specials Cape Cod Specials
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street Dinners and Lunehes ;
Falmouth Tel. 70787 3

When in Falmouth Stop at °
ISSOKSON’S IDEAL RESTAURANT
GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait Main Sie Weoae
A. ISSOKSON Tel. 1243

PARK TAILORING AND SAMUEL CAHOON
CLEANSING SHOP Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
Weeks’ Building, Falmouth FISH AND LOBSTERS
Phone 239-W Free Delivery Tel. Falmouth 660-661
We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members) Woods Hole and Falmouth

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing N. FE. TSIKNAS

Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at FRUITS AND VEGETABLES
M. DOLINSKY’S =
Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752 Falmouth and Woods Hole
SANSOUCIS BEAUTY PARLOR THE QUALITY SHOP
Frederic’s Permanent Waves Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes
and and Souvenirs
All Branches of Beauty Culture Ask for things you do not see.

Falmouth Phone 19-M Main Street Woods Hole

Aucust 16, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET 221

Presents

“Hell Bent for Heaven”
HATCHER HUGHES’ PULITZER
PRIZE PLAY
Week of August 18 - 23
Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD

occasion
Jax

parkway shops near filene’s

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth Tel. 407

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Sunday, August 17
HELEN KANE in
“DANGEROUS NAN McGREW”

Monday, August 18 - Tuesday, August 19
Matinee Monday at 2:30
RONALD COLMAN in
“RAFFLES”

Wednesday, Aug. 20 - Thursday, Aug. 21
The Four MARX BROTHERS in
“ANIMAL CRACKERS”

New songs, new jokes, new comedy hits.

Friday, August 22
ALEXANDER GRAY, BERNICE CLAIRE,
and NOAH BEERY in
“THE SONG OF FLAME”

Saturday, August 23
CHARLES BICKFORD and NILS ASTHER in
“THE SEA BAT”

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT

STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

.

222 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 38

CAMBRIDGE ELECTROMETERS

The application of Electrometers to the measure-
ment of small electrical quantities has increased
rapidly in recent years.

Lindemann Electrometer with
Grounding Switch.

Among the more prominent electrometer uses are
researches in radio-activity, spectroscopic investiga-
tions and many uses in conjunction with photo-
electric measurements.

: bis?

The Lindemann Electrometer (illustrated)
is an exceptionally compact and robust in-
strument of high sensitivity, short period
and low capacitance and does not require
levelling.

List 169 describes in detail the Linde-
mann, Tilted Gold Leaf, String, Dolezalek,
Recording, Quadrant, and Compton Electrometers.

3144”x1" High

Pioneer Manufacturers CAMBRIDGE 3512 Grand Central
of Precision Instruments INSTRUMENT CoO [Nc Terminal, New York

Small but International quality.
Speed 2700-3300 R. P. M.

ee ae

Relative Centrifugal Force 1300-1800
times gravity.

Four tubes of 15 ml. or two tubes of
15 ml. and two tubes of 50 ml.

eh Otero

—-

Send for Bulletin CC.

—- -.

International Equipment Company

352 WESTERN AVE. BOSTON, MASS.

Aucust 16, 1930 | THE COLLECTING NET 223

WEBER ELECTRIC
Pow ATR STERILIZERS

With automatic control and pointer sca‘e for setting at any desired temperature
between 15) and 200° C.

1627

HOT AIR STERILIZERS, Weber Electric. Insulation consists of asbestos transite
one inch thick, with sheet metal work of Russia iron.

Shelf brackets 14% inches apart provid: for a variety of shelf placement, and shelves
can be loaded while partially withdrawn. Dimensions are designed for convenient and
economical handling of pipettes in boxes, Petri dishes and flasks of the sizes mostly used.

Current consumption at 110 volts is 20 amperes for operation at 170° C for the No.
1625, and 30 amperes for the No. 1627. Time required for reaching this temperature
from ordinary room temperature, with sterilizing chamber empty, is approximately 85
minutes for the No. 1625, and approximately 120 minutes for the No. 1627.

1625. Hot Air Sterilizer, Weber Electric, as above described, inside dimensions 15 inches high
x 18 inches wide x 18 inches deep. With one No. 9621 Special Sterilizer Thermome-

ter 200° C and complete operating directions. On low stand, i. e. angle iron feety
3% inches high. For use on 110 volts ...... F ; $210.00

Code Word .............. Pare Alevi
1627. Ditto, but with inside dimensions 23 inches high x 26 inches wide x 18 inches deep. For

use on 119 volts ead ane venus caseeeiics cave dwatencvespcusiwanirs = : 3 315.00

Code Word . fence etry te once po ey rere : Aleza

Sole Distributors

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

224 INBIS, (COVLIEIACIMUN(E. INTE 1P [ Vor. V. No. 38

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARATUS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is use! for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and inse-ts for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in foeusing students attention on imporiant features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microseope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopie preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switeh for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on

request.
—=

Prospectus gladly sent, address |

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors |

A
: \ ce A a "ZT A sagas
| Crav-Anams Company
| 117-119 East 24th Street
| NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Vol. V. No. 9 SATURDAY,

THE EFFECTS OF LONG-CONTINUED
STARVATION IN A ROTIFER IN
RELATION TO INHERITANCE!

Dr. RutH Stockinc LYNcH
Instructor in Zoology, Johns Hopkins University
In a lecture given here a few weeks ago Dr.

AUGUST 23, 1930

ANNUAL
SINGLE Copies 25 Cts.

SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00

STUDY OF THE DUOFLAGELLATE POLY-
KRIKOS SCHWARTZI, AS A CONTRIBUTION
TO GENERAL CYTOLOGY
Dr. Epouarp CHATTON
Director of the Institute of Zoology and General
Biology, University of Strasbourg
I. The General Conception

Jennings called attention to
the extensive experimental
evidence demonstrating the

inheritance of environmental
effects in the Protista, as con-
trasted with the entire lack of
such evidence in the Metista.
This striking difference be-
tween these two great divisions
of organisms, coupled with
the fact that only the more
specialized types of Metista
have been adequately studied,
whereas all types of Protista
have been examined, occasion- Dr. H.
ed the experiments I am a eee
reporting. These experiments

were directed toward deter- Dre:
mining the heritability of an
environmental effect in a less
highly specialized metazoan,
one possessing many characteristics common to
the Protozoa. A parthenogenetic rotifer, Proales
sordida, was the metazoan chosen. Proales re-
sembles such a Protozoan as Paramecium cauda-
lum in size, habitat, mode of life, and uniparental
character of reproduction, but has the metazoan
many-celled body and germ-cell method of multi-
plication. The environmental effect studied was

(Continued on page 231)

Bronk,
University

of Movement”

velopment

demonstration.

M. B. L. Calendar

TUESDAY, AUGUST 26, 8:00 P. M.
| Evening Lecture.
professor
of Pennsylvania, “Nerve
Impulse Rhythms and the Control

FRIDAY, AUGUST 29, 8:00 P. M.

Evening Seminar.

and I. B. Hansen,
of Mendelian
ters in the Goldfish.”

A. Abramson,
Point of Mammalian

N. Harvey and A. L. Loomis,
“The Microscopic-Centrifuge.”

of the Cell

Since the beginning of this
century the conception of the
generalized type of cell has
become complicated. Besides
the cytoplasm, the nucleus and
the kinetic center, the cytol-

Professor D. W.
of biophysies.

ogists have discovered other
constant elements in the cyto-
Dr. H. B. Goodrich plasm.

The cytoplasm, which, prior
to these discoveries, was con-
sidered heterogeneous, is now

“Embryonie De-
Charac-

“The Iso- | thought to be, , homogeneous,
Red | this homogeneous substance
being the bioplasm. The ap-

pearance of heterogeneity is
due to the presence of particles
or vacuoles which are not the
living substance itself, but
constant elements of its functional organization.

with

These are called paraplasmic elements. In ad-
dition, there are often inclusions of secreted
products, like fat or starch, which are called

deutoplasmic elements.
with these here.
Paraplasmic elements:
The paraplasmic elements are diversely enu-
merated. But there is one category of them which

We shall not have to deal

TABLE OF CONTENTS

The Effects of Long-Continued Starvation in a
Rotifer in Relation to Inheritance
Dr. Ruth Stocking Lynch .... 225
Study of the Duoflagellate Poly krikos Se shwartzi,
as a Contribution to General Cytology
Dr. Edouard Chatton

Acree onto aie 0

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Ly neh

Professor Lorande Loss Woodruff 232
Cause, Inheritance, and Effects of the Chain-

Forming Tendency in the Ciliate Protozoan,

Colpidium Campylum

Dr. LT. M. Sonnleborn ...+.... 232
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. ‘Sonneborn

Druidouunde © Rathore. c s-i-tonytele lel acs a) 'elete- 234
Life Cycle of a Bisexual Rotifer

Dr Elelientys Mem GEE or cece, creraierene cere hae 234

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Miller
Dr. J. A. Dawson ,

Some Biological Effects Produc ed by Alpha ‘Par-
ticles on the Eggs of Drosophila Melanogaster
Dr. Paul S. Resets . 236

Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. ‘Henshaw
Professor James W. Mavor : 237

The Effects of X-Rays upon the Growth ‘of ‘the
Wheat eee ane

. 236

Ware Cattell 238
Review of the Seminar Report of Mr. Cattell

Dre CharlessPackandiee acetate 239
The Organization of the International Congress

of Biology 239

A Letter from Prof. Robert Chambers in Russia 240
Items of Interest

226

Hibs COLLECRING SNE

[Vot. V. No. 39

is generally accepted without strong discussion.
They are the mitochondria discovered at the end
of the last century. The discussions arise chiefly
about their role in the formation of cytoplasmic
differentiations like the muscular fibrils, or in the
secretion of cellular products. Whether or not
plastids of plants are more or less transformed
mitochondria, according to the views of Guillier-
mond, is a question still debated.

Besides the mitochondria, two other kinds of
paraplasmic elements have been described: The
so-called Golgi apparatus and the vacuoles, the
ensemble of the latter being the vacuome of
Dangeard. Whereas many cytologists make an
absolute distinction between these two categories,
others think they are one and the same thing.
For instance, Hirschler, Bowen, Bronte, Gatenby,
and Avel uphold the classic conception of the
Golgi apparatus. It presents itself sometimes as
a fragile network, sometimes as a group of plate-
lets, called dictyosomes. Both are argentophilic
and osmiophilic, both are located around the
kinetic center, in most of the animal cells, but are
more dispersed in plant cells.

At the time of mitosis, the elements of the net-
work or platelets behave like small chromosomes
or dictyosomes, except for the longitudinal split-
ting, this process being called dictyokinesis.

In France, Guilliermond studying plant cells
and Parat studying animal cells have come to the
conclusion that the Golgi network is only an ap-
pearance due to the pressing together of minute
vacuoles. These vacuoles are stained in the living
by neutral red and are impregnated, at least their
wall, by osmium and silver. For these authors
the platelets or dictyosomes have nothing to do
with the Golgi apparatus, except in the way in
which they are impregnated. Parat considers
them as a special kind of chondriosome which he
calls active chondriosomes. I do not intend to
go further in this discussion now but shall ex-
press my opinion more fully later, and I come
back to the generalized scheme of the cell.

The Cinetid :

Thus limited to the preceding enumeration,
this scheme is an incomplete one, at least for a
protistologist. It lacks a motor apparatus ( I say
motor-apparatus, not a neuro-motor apparatus ).
The idea that plants are derived from organisms
like green Flagellates is much more familiar to
the botanists than to the zoologists. The reason
for this is the fact that there is a complete series
of intermediary forms between the unicellular.
Flagellates and the highest Chlorophycae or
Pheophycae. And many of them admit that the
motile microgametes of these Algae, and even
those of the highest plants are nothing more than
the remnants of the primitive flagellate state.

Because of the lack of transitional forms in the
animal kingdom between Flagellates and Metazoa,
such an idea is not as well received in regard to
the gametes of animals.

However, in the presence of the great uniform-
ity of the structure of the spermatozoa and the
complete identity of this structure with that of
flagellates, some authors, Leger and Dubosq, for
instance, uphold the idea that this uniformity and
this identity are not merely casual, but have an
historical, a phylogenetical cause.

According to these views, with which I agree,
I will add to our cell-scheme the motor-apparatus
which I call the cinetid. It is the same thing that
Kofoid calls the “neuro-motor apparatus” but I
prefer the term cinetid which is shorter and only
descriptive. As it is seen in the simplest cases
the centid is constituted by: 1, the centrosome
or kinetic center; 2, the flagellum, a motile organ;
3, the parabasal, or accessory body, discovered
by Janicki twenty years ago and which seems to
be very widespread among the flagellates.

It has some of the characters of the mito-
chondria or of the Golgi apparatus, chiefly its
lability and the property of being impregnated by
osmium and silver. It is always connected by a
thread with the rest of the cinetid, sometimes
directly with the centrosome, sometimes with a
ring which surrounds the internal part of the
flagellum. From this type of cinetid we can
derive all the more complicated types, including
the ciliation of the ciliated infusoria and of the
ciliated cells of metazoa.

I must emphasize the fact that the cinetid of
the spermatazoa is a rather simple one quite
similar to the generalized type of the cinetid of
Flagellates, except for the fact that no parabasal
bodies have been found in sperm cells. But
recently Dubosq and Grasse have advanced the
idea that the idiosome of sperm cells which is
derived from the Golgi apparatus, is the equiva-
lent or homologue of the parabasal of flagellates.

We shall see to what extent this opinion can be
supported. At any rate, we have to remember
that in many of spermatozoa we find a ring
around the internal part of the flagellum, which
may be considered, in my opinion, as the remnant
of the parabasal apparatus.

Another fact which I would like to stress is that
in both the primitive Flagellates and the sperma-
tids, the centrosome is at the same time, the basis
of the cinetid and the polar element of mitosis.
We can not, at first sight, say which of these roles
is the most essential. But the fact that in many
cases, among flagellates, the basal body of the
flagellum loses its relation with the nucleus, which
then divides without any centrosome, seems to
prove that the essential role of the centrosome is

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

227

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

EXPLANATION OF PLATE

Fig. 1. Polykrikos schwartzi with four energids
and eight cinetids cu. equals cnidocyst, incl. equals
food-vacuole.

Fig. 2. Two cinetids. f. h. equals transverse
flagellum, f. a. equals trailing flagellum.

fig. 3. Scheme of finer structure of Polykrikos
(composite drawing from several preparations
made with different technique )

Ist. energid: nucleus, two cinetids without their
parabasal, mitochondria and trichocysts.

2nd. energid: Ct equals cnidocyst, one of them
bearing a cnidoplast; cp., cg equals cnidogenes
with the cnidosphere (cs) containing the cnido-
some.

3rd. energid; contour of the nucleus (not im-
pregnated), two cinetids with their parabsal

(p. b.) and two groups of osmiophilic platelets
(g).

4th. energid as seen in the living with flagella,
fat, glycogen (minute granules) and vacuoles (v).
Fig. 4. Scheme of the cnidogenes: 1, 2, 3, 4,
and 5 equals external cnidosomes with the cnido-
desmose ; 6, 7 equals formation of the cnidosphere ;
8, 8a, 9 equals transformation of the cnidosphere
into the cnidoplast; 10 equals young cnidoplast
with the internal cnidosome and the opercule; 11
equals later cnidoplast with the ampule and the
opercule ; 12 equals dissolution of the body of the
cnidoplast; 13, 14, 15 equals cnidogenes; 16
equals formation of the intracellular thread; 17
equals formation of the capsule; 18—complete or
finished cnidocyst.

228 THE COLLECTING

NET [Vot. V. No. 39

not the participation in mitosis, but the participa-
tion in movement. Thusit is not surprising
to see the centrosome lacking in the mitosis of
many animals cells, and in most of the higher
plant cells. That is easily explained since these
cells have lost their cinetids. What is surprising
is the fact that the centrosome is so often present
in cells which lack a cinetid. On the contrary,
it is never absent in the moving microgametes of
plants and animals and it always keeps in them
its very precise relations with both the cinetid
and the mitotic figure.

This is a little outside my subject, but I wanted
to mention it because the lack of centrosomes in
many mitotic figures is often interpreted against
the reality of its existence as a definite element in
the cells which possess it. Against such a view I
will only emphasize the fact that it must be, before
all, considered as a constant kinetic element; and
only secondarily as a mitotic one. If we had to
create a rational nomenclature we would have to
call it the cinetosome rather than the centrosome.
And we shall see that, in its first function, at
least, it shows an obvious genetic continuity. It
is the only element of the cinetid which remains
through generations, in sperm cell-lines and in
Protozoa, when the others have disappeared and
it regenerates them again.

The cell scheme thus completed contains all the
wide-spread cell constituents. If we wanted to
make this scheme quite synthetic, we would have
to put in it all kinds of cell differentiations—
smooth and striated muscular fibrils, neurofibrils
and also those highly interesting formations, a
little despised by cytologists, which are found in
a quite constant way in Coelenterates among the
Metazoa and in Cnidospordia among the Pro-
tozoa.

Cnidocysts :

They are the cnidocysts or nematocysts con-
tained in cells which are called cnidoblasts or
nematoblasts. They are found also in many
species of Eolidian Molluscs and in some Turbel-
laria like Microstomum. But it is now clearly
shown that in the two last groups they are nothing
else but cnidocysts of Coelenterates which have
been swallowed and kept by Molluscs and Plan-
aria feeding on hydroids. You will pardon me
if I dwell a little on their structure.

They are formed with a chitinous capsule the
anterior pole of which is invaginated into itself
in the form of a bladder which we name the
ampulla. This is projected in a long and very
narrow tube coiled inside the capsule. The
ampulla is closed by an operculum and has inside
of its cavity two or more teeth, stylets or per-
cutors. The cnidoblasts bear a cnidocil connected
by means of fibrils with the cnidocyst. When
excited, this connective apparatus induces the

discharge of the cnidocyst which works under the
sudden increase of pressure within the capsule.
The ampule evaginates, its teeth tear the oper-
culum and the whole filament is discharged.

If the structure and the function of this ap-
paratus are now rather well known, very little is
known about the origin, the development and the
cytological significance of these elements.

At least we have to add to our cell scheme the
trichocysts which are widespread among the
Ciliates and the Flagellates and which are very
closely related, morphologically and physiological-
ly to the enidocysts. They are rod-like bodies
which become suddenly elongated upon irritation.

II, Study of Polykrikos Schwartsi.

The proceeding cell scheme must seem to you
to be quite romantic, because you would not believe
that there could exist a cell which possesses at the
same time all these organelles or differentiations.
However, I can present to you cells or energids
which do show all the previously mentioned struc-
tures or organelles with the exception of muscular
and neurofibrils. It is a free-living, planktonic
Dinoflagellate, rather common in concentrated sea
water, as, for instance, in the lagoons of the
French Mediterranean coast. Its name is Poly-
krikos Schwartzi. Its general morphology was
worked chiefly by Butschli (1873). In 1913 (1)
and later in 1924, and 1929 (2) with the collabora-
tion of Robert Weil and Pierre Grasse, I studied
its finer structure.

Energids and Cinetids:

The flagellate which is long and broad would be
almost cylindrical if not a little flattened in the
dorso-ventral sense. As a Dinoflagellate it pre-
sents the characteristic type of cinetid of these
Protozoa, that is to say, a biflagellate cinetid,
with two unequal flagella, the one trailing is of the
normal type, the other is undulating in a transverse
spiral furrow around the body.

But, whereas in most of the Dinoflagellates,
there is only one of these cinetids, we have here,
in the adult organism 8 of them, with 8 furrows.
We shall say that the Polykrikos is an
octocinetid flagellate. And whereas in most
of the Dinoflagellates there is only one nucleus,
we have here four nuclei, four big nuclei of the
dinocaryon type, that is to say with very numerous
and long threadlike, intricate chromosomes.
Beautiful nuclei, but bad for geneticists.

We shall not dwell and wonder with Dobell, if
such an organism must be called polycellular, uni-
cellular, or acellular. We shall say, in a more
simple way, with the German cytologist Sachs,
that it is tetraenergid, the energid being defined

(1) Arch. Zool. exp. et gen. SL, p. 157-196, pl. IX
(2) Compt. rend. Ouc. Biol. xci, p. 180 and C, p. 281.

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING

NET 229

by this author as the nucleus with its cytoplasmic
sphere of influence. The Polykrikos is a tetra-
energid and octocinetid Dinoflagellate, or, in
other words with four energids each one of
which possesses two cinetids. Such a condition,
exceptional but not unique, is very easily explain-
ed if one considers that the cinetid is a rather
autonomous apparatus in the energid which is
able to multiply without corresponding nuclear or
cytoplasmic multiplication. In other words, the
multiplication of the cinetids is here one genera-
tion in advance of the nuclear or energid multi-
plication.

When seen in the living the two flagella do not
arise from the pellicle at the same point and be-
fore we studied the Polykrikos it was impossible
to say whether or not the two flagella of the Dino-
flagellates belonged to the same kinetic unit.
When stained each flagellum is seen extending
into the cytoplasm as a thread which joins and
fuses with the one from the other flagellum in a
single thread, this one is attached to the centro-
some. The two centrosomes are perfectly obvious
even in the interkinesis, as small conical bodies
on the nuclear membrane.

The internal part of each of the two flagella is
surrounded by a small ring. To this ring which
surrounds the trailing flagellum and to this one
only the parabasal is attached. It is a long ribbon-
like body, visible only after impregnation. It
stretches out through the whole width of the body.
Incidentally, this js the first time that a parabasal
has been demonstrated among the free-living
Flagellates. You see that, undoubtedly, the para-
basal is an integral part of the cinetid.
Paraplasmic Elements:

Let us study now the paraplasmic elements. I
shall put aside fat and glycogen, the deutoplasmic
elements, which are in the form of a layer of very
minute granules just under the pellicle.

We have (1) numerous rod-like mitochondria,
stainable in the living with Janus green but very
difficult to impregnate; (2) vacuoles which lie
superficially under the pellicle. They are stained
in the living with neutral-red and are poorly
osmiophilic, (3) osmiophlic platelets, very clearly
located around the centrosomes, therefore in two
groups in each energid. They are invisible in the
living, are not stained by vital dyes, but are very
highly osmiophilic. They are seen dividing trans-
versely and at the time of nuclear division each
group is subdivided into two parts. To what
extent are these three kinds of paraplasmic ele-
ments homologous with those described in our
generalized cell scheme? There is no doubt about
the identification of mitochondria and of vacuoles.
The only question is about the osmiophilic plate-
lets. I believe that they are equivalent to the
dictyosomes but in order not to confuse the
question I will avoid calling them Golgi bodies. I

believe, however, that if one cares to use this
term, it is to osmiophilic platelets that it must be
applied.

Much more clear is the fact that the parabasal
body has nothing whatever to do with the dic-
tyosomes or with the vacuoles, and is, therefore,
absolutely distinct from the Golgi apparatus. In-
deed, it is not a paraplasmic element at all but a
structural part of the cinetid.

I would like now to speak about the trichocysts
in the living. As we have not yet studied these
structures very carefully I will merely mention
them.

Cnidocysts and their autogenes:

Now we shall take up the cnidome, that is to
say with the ensemble of the cnidocysts, and their
developmental stages. When observed in the
living or after staining there can be distinguished
at first sight three main stages in this development.
(1) The finished cnidocysts which are
quite similar to the generalized type of those of
Coelenterates. The only difference is in the
percutor which is single and axial. (2) the cnido-
plast or young cnidocyst with an opercule and an
external granule or cnidosome connected by a
thread to the percutor of the ampule. They are
most of them, attached to the operculum of the
cnidocyst. (3) the cnidogene which consists of a
large vacuole without membrane, and a perfectly
organized ampule with its operculum to the top
of which is attached a sphere or cnidosphere.
The cnidosphere shows in its center an internal
cnidosome which is connected by a thread with
the percutor of the ampule and the granule which
is at its base. Of course these three main stages
are linked together by transitional stages. The
ensemble of these stages constitute a true cycle
which begins with the cnidosome. The cnidosome
is merely a granule, but it becomes the center of
the formation of the cnidosphere, which occurs
by the condensation of the cytoplasm around it.
When fully formed the centrosphere shows at its
distal pole a circular and deep but very narrow
split which marks out, as a kind of button, the
future operculm. Whereas the cnidosphere be-
comes ovoidal the operculum is evaginated. After
becoming cylindical the cnidosphere is transform=:
ed into the cnidoplast. By this time the cnido-
some has divided into two: an internal one which
remains at the basis of the percutor at the bottom
of the ampule and an external one which is seen
above the operculum in the cytoplasm. These two
cnidosomes are connected by a desmose, the proxi-
mal part of which becomes hardened and forms
the percutor. Considering the shape and the
structure of the cnidoplast it would be expected
to be transformed very directly into the cnidocyst
but that occurs by a rather extensive metamor-
phosis. Its body which is dense is dissolved and

230

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 39

becomes a large vacuole without any membrane.
At one pole of this vacuole both the ampule and
the operculum remain attached with the cnidosome
around which the cytoplasm begins to condense.
In the vacuole a very fine and delicate thread
grows from the internal cnidosome which is al-
ready subdivided into two. That is the late
cnidogene stage. The continuation of the make-
up of the cnidocyst is easy to understand if one
supposes that chitin is secreted in the vacuole and
precipitated afterwards on the whole surface
bathed by the vacuolar fluid. That is to say the
main wall of the vacuole, the external face of the
ampule and the intravacuolar thread. Thus is
formed the chitinized capsule with the invaginated
ampule and the invaginated and coiled intracap-
sular tube. Meanwhile the operculum and _ per-
cutor have become hardened, but the chitin, if it
is chitin, is different from that of the capsule as
is shown by its greater solubility in the alkalies.
At this stage the cnidocyst is ready to discharge.
It bears on its top the cnidoplast which later will
part from it.

In Polykrikos nothing similar to the cnidocil
and the connective apparatus between the cnidocil
and the cnidocyst as above described in Coelen-
terates is found. The discharge of the cnidocyst
occurs only when it comes in contact with sea-
water in consequence of the disintegration of the
injured flagellate. Therefore the cnidocysts of
the Polykrikos cannot in any way be regarded as
they are in Coelenterates as a means of defense. If
we cared to express ourselves about them in a
teleological way we should say that they are not
mechanisms of defense but post-mortem ven-
geance apparatus against animals which swallow
the Polykrikos.

Conclusions

Now let us conclude this study. (1) the cnido-
cyst of the Polykrikos are autocnids. That is
to say, cnidocysts which belong to the Polykrikos
and not cleptocnids or cnidocysts of Coelenterates
swallowed and kept by the Polykrikos.

(2) The cnidocysts are quite independent at
every stage of their development of the other cell
constituents, nuclei, cinetids paraplasmic ele-
ments. (mitochondria, vacuoles, osmiophilic plate-
lets).

(3) This development constitutes a true cycle.
A cnidocyst always comes from a pre-existing
cnidocyst. (autogenesis). They behave in the
cytoplasm of the Polykrikos somewhat like foreign
organisms but there is no question about their

being parasites because they have no nuclei of —
their own. Besides, the autonomy of the enido-
cysts, surprising as it is, is no more pronounced
than the autonomy of the cinetids which are, as
we know capable of an autonomous multiplicaticn
in the cell.

(4) The comparison between the cinetids and
cnidocysts or better cnidogenes can be carried
further—up to true homologies. Indeed, both
cinetid and cnidocyst have as an initial stage a
basal granule, centrosome for the cinetid and
cnidosome for the cnidocyst. In both a thread
grows from these basal granules, being a motile
flagellum in the cinetid, a motionless flagellum in
the cnidogene where it serves as a matrix for the
formation of the coiled tube. And the multiplica-
tion of cnidogenes is insured and initiated by the
division of the centrosome. The cnidocyst or
better the cnidogene may be defined cytologically
as an internal cinetid, that is to say, a cinetid the
flagellum of which instead of being projected into
the external medium extends in a vacuole where it
is at length chitinized.

(5) Cycles, or better, autogenetic formations of
cinetids and of cnidocysts are in my opinion the
strongest argument in favor of the genetic con-
tinuity of these elements and of their basal
granules. I emphasized the fact in Ann. Sc. Nat.,
Zoologie, 10 serie, VIII, p. 60, 1925, that cycle
or autogenesis and genetic continuity are one and
the same thing.

I hoped that these facts could be easily verified
in Coelenterates. I suggested this problem to my
pupil Robert Weill who cooperated with me in the
study of the Polykrikos, but up to the present time —
he has been unable to find anything similar in the
cnidoblasts of Coelenterates. Upon further con-
sideration I am not much surprised with this
negative result. Conditions are very different in
Coelenterates. There the cnidocyst is always con-
tained alone in a cell. The genetic continuity is
certainly, not between two cnidocysts, but be-
tween two cnidoblasts, and it must be insured
only by the ordinary mechanism of mitosis. The
only question is to know how the cnidosome,
which is to some extent the germ of the cnidocyst,
arises from the normal cellular centrosome.

* *

I wanted in this lecture to show that the cyt-
ology of protista is not so specialized that it can
not help the progress of the so-called general
cytology which is too often only the cytology of
higher organisms.

THE EFFECTS OF LONG-CONTINUED STARVATION IN A ROTIFER

(Continued from page 225)

the one often noted in the Protozoa, the depression
of vitality occasioned by inadequate food, as
shown by shortened life and decreased fecundity.

Previous work on the effect of faulty nutrition

in the rotifers is scant. Luntz found in Pterodina
elliptica that the number of offspring varied
directly and precisely with the amount of food
provided, Shull, and Whitney and his students,

Aucust 23, 1930]

found a decreased fecundity in improperly fed
individuals of Hydatina senta. Whitney, Noyes,
and Finesinger found a cumulative decrease in
fecundity in various rotifers subjected to alcohol.
They also found that this decreased fecundity was
partially inherited for two generations, but not
longer.

The experiments I am reporting consisted in
subjecting three groups of lines of Proales sordida,
all descended from the same ancestor, and all
cultivated simultaneously, to three diverse
strengths of culture fluid. The controls were
cultivated in the full strength culture fluid, experi-
mentally found to be the optimal culture medium.
The two test series, called H and Q, were culti-
vated in reduced strengths of culture fluid; H in
half-strength, Q in quarter strength culture fluid.

The questions particularly dealt with are two:
First, do adverse environmental conditions pro-
duce the same effect on the rotifer Proales as on
the Protozoa; that is, do they bring about a de-
pression which increases with succeeding genera-
tions, so that the rotifers “run down” as do the
Protozoa? Second, if they become depressed, is
this depression inherited in later generations that
have been returned to a favorable environment ?

The first question was adequately answered, in
the affirmative, by the results of a first set of
experiments reported here last summer by my
collaborator, Dr. Helen Bernice Smith. The
second set of experiments, differing from the first
mainly in their constant temperature conditions,
show a depression somewhat diverse in details,
but similar in all essentials. The control series

_ was carried alone until it was well established.

With its fourth generation, the two test groups
were started. The fourth generation of controls
consisted of 48 animals which produced an indivi-
dual average of 13 eggs. The 49 individuals of
the contemporaneous first H generation produced
an average of 10 eggs. The 41 individuals of the
first Q generation produced an average of 5 eggs.

The Q series reached its lowest fecundity in the
third generation with an average of 1.33 eggs.
The H series reached its lowest fecundity in the
12th generation with an average of 3.54 eggs. In
general the records of the three groups run paral-
lel to each other, the half-strength series regularly
lower than the full-strength series, the quarter-
strength series regularly lower than the _half-
strength series.

Thus in these experiments as in the others it is
shown that subjecting Proales sordida to culture
media of reduced strength for many successive
generations causes a decrease in fecundity similar
to that observed in other rotifers in adverse en-
vironmental conditions, and similar in many
respects to the lowering of fission rate in poorly
fed Infusoria. Similar in all essentials are the
records for length of life. I might remark, how-

THE COLLECTING NET

231

ever, that others who have worked on the Roti-
fera, have not found depression in longevity.

Now as to the inheritance of this depression.
In the first set of experiments depression came on
so rapidly and so fatally that we were able to
rescue only a few individuals to return to the full-
strength culture medium for the testing of the
heritability of the effect. The resulting scantiness
of the data made our results uncertain. In our
second set of experiments every generation tested
comprised adequate numbers and our results are
convincing. The 36 individuals of the 8th O
generation, cultivated in the quarter-strength cul-
ture medium, laid 66 eggs, an individual average
of 1.83 eggs, considerably less than the 10.5
average of the contemporaneous control genera-
tion. Forty-two of these eggs were continued in
the quarter strength fluid; but 24 of them were
put into full strength fluid. The animals hatching
from these 24 eggs, the first OC generation, cul-
tivated in the full-strength fluid, laid over 200
eggs, an average of 9.5 eggs per individual.
Later OC generations closely approximated or
exceeded the record of the controls. The H series
showed an even more striking recovery, rising,
when returned to full-strength culture medium,
from the 3.54 average of the 12th H generation to -
the 12.5 average of the first HC generation. This
12.5 average is almost double that of the contem-
poraneous control generation.

Obviously, recovery is immediate and complete ;
there is no indication of any inheritance of the
lowered fecundity so pronounced in the preceding
generations. Similar in all essentials are the
records for length of life, which I will not give;
they also show immediate and complete recovery
in the first generation returned to a favorable
environment.

It is thus demonstrated that the effect of in-
sufficient food on fecundity and longevity is not
inherited. Animals whose length of life and egg
laying ability have been decreased by long-con-
tinued cultivation under adverse conditions pro-
duce progeny that show a normal longevity and
a normal fecundity when grown in a favorable
environment. Depression continues only in the
presence of the effective stimulus. Apparently the
food deficiency does not affect the germ cells so
as to produce a heritable modification.

The Protozoa and the Metazoa are again shown
to be unlike in their genetic reactions to environ-
mental effects. The Protozoan constitution seems
to be extremely sensitive to environmental modi-
fications and becomes changed to such an extent
that the alterations are passed on to the progeny
of later generations. The Metazoan constitution
is not so changed.

This difference between these two groups may
be related to the diversity in the details of their

232

reproductive processes. Typically the body of a
Protozoan divides into two equal parts, each of
which becomes an individual. In Proales, as in
most Metazoa, a smaller piece separates from a
larger. The larger piece is called the parent; the
smaller piece the egg. This smaller piece goes
through a 24-hour-long process of development,

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 39

which includes several cell divisions, before it
becomes a new individual. It does not seem ob-
vious a priori that this difference must result in
diverse genetic behavior. These experiments,
however, indicate that it does.

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labora-
atory on August 8.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. LYNCH
Dr. LoranpeE Loss WoopruFF
Professor of Protozoology, Yale University

Experimental evidence that the environment
produces heritable changes in multicellular organ-
isms is exceedingly meagre and, with certain ex-
ceptions, much less convincing than it is in the
Protista; and the interesting results reached by
Dr. Lynch from her study of inheritance in
Proales sordida further shows that even such a
relatively simple Metazoon is refractory to envi-
ronmental modifications of its genetic constitution.

Dr. Lynch’s long experience with the culture
of micro-organisms affords ample assurance -not
only that the formal technique is adequate but also
that the problems of animal husbandry have been
given the care that is necessary for significant re-
sults. Accordingly the results will become in-

creasingly convincing as the experiments continue
for a longer period of time and through more gen-
erations. One would, perhaps, hardly anticipate
that environmental influences, such as unfavorable
living conditions, would so soon become genetical-—
ly evident even in this simple Metazoon. Pre-
sumably a species whose reproductive ability was
irreparably lowered by a few generations of
partial starvation would be handicapped in the
‘struggle for existence’. After all, the rate of
reproduction possibly is adaptively related to the
suitability of the environment to support the off-
spring, and this may be a not unimportant factor
in the success of Proales sordida as a species.
Certainly the Rotifers are proving most valuable
material for the attack on genetic problems.

CAUSE, INHERITANCE, AND EFFECTS OF THE CHAIN-FORMING TENDENCY IN THE
CILIATE PROTOZOAN, COLPIDIUM CAMPYLUM !
Dr. T. M. SonNNEBORN
Research Assistant in Zoology, Johns Hopkins University

The material with which this paper deals bears
primarily on the problem of how new races arise
in the Protozoa. An attack on this problem was
made possible by the appearance of abnormal
individuals in mass cultures of the ciliate pro-
tozoan, Colpidium campylum. In the normal
division cycle, a single elongated individual be-
comes constricted transversely into two parts
which separate and soon assume the normal size
and form. The cycle is then repeated. In the
abnormal individuals, the two parts into which a
dividing individual is constricted fail to separate.
Instead they assume the normal adult form while
still united. Such united individuals have been
called “chains” and their formation in various
species of protozoa has been reported by Jennings,
Chatton, and others.

In Colpidium campylum these chains continue
to develop in a peculiar and interesting way. The
two parts fuse at the plane of fission: their aboral
surfaces then bend together and gradually fuse,
forming a double individual. Such individuals
undergo further partially suppressed fissions, the
new parts not separating from each other. In

this way there are produced multiple monsters of
irregular form which contain as many as eight
or nine sets of structures. From these monsters
three types of individuals arise: (1) other irreg-
ular monsters; (2) apparently normal individuals ;
(3) individuals with two complete sets of struc-
tures. These double individuals differ from the
ones formed earlier in two important respects.
First, their two sets of structures extend in the
same direction; for example, both mouths are at
the anterior end, instead of their being one anter-
ior mouth and one posterior mouth as in
the earlier doubles. Second, these. doubles, un-
like the former, reproduce true to type; regularly,
at division, each double individual divides into two
double individuals of the same sort, thus forming
races of double individuals. This occurs nearly
always, but not invariably. Occasionally, one of
the double individuals will give rise to some single
individuals. This happens in a very simple way.
In some double individuals there is a slight cleft
at the anterior end. This cleft, always remaining

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 8.

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

233

in the anterior products of succesive divisions
enlarges until it completely separates into two,
the anterior part of one dividing double animal.
From each of these two parts, a single individual
is formed; and from the posterior part a double
individual. Singles so produced are referred to
as “singles produced by doubles” in contrast to
the normal singles which have not had double
ancestors.

When the chains, monsters, and double animals
first appeared, Colpidium was being cultivated
in a rye infusion in which unknown bacteria
flourished. In attempting to discover the cause
of the formation of chains, the effects of the dif-
ferent bacteria in the culture fluid were analysed.
Of the two kinds of bacteria found, the presence
of one, Micrococcus sensibilis, was found to be
correlated with the formation of chains. When
Micrococcus was excluded from the culture fluid,
no chains developed in 19 cultures containing
over 71,000 specimens; but when Micrococcus
was included in the culture fluid 57 chains were
produced in 21 cultures containing about 23,500
specimens. This type of result has been obtained
a half dozen different times using both ordinary
and bacteriological technique. Chain formation
can therefore be produced at will by including in
the diet the bacterium, Micrococcus sensibilis.
Chatton, in 1925, using bacteriological technique,
reported chain-formation in Colpidium campylum
as an effect of feeding them a particular race of
Bacillus coli, which he calls Colibacillus D. This
phenomenon he analysed in a beautiful series of
experiments.

The question of whether the environment has
brought about a hereditary change in the organ-
isms is quite another matter. The mere formation
of a race of double individuals from one double
individual cannot be considered as the manifesta-
tion of a change in the hereditary constitution of
the animals, because the doubleness is not formed
anew in each generation; it pre-exists and is
merely transmitted unaltered to the two products
of division. From another point of view, Chat-
ton tested whether environmental effects persist
in the descendants of individuals that have been
induced to form chains; under carefully con-
trolled conditions he found that environmental
effects did not persist in these. I performed a
somewhat different experiment. I compared the
frequency of chain formation among single
animals descended not from chains, but from
double animals with the frequency among single
animals descended from normal single ancestors.
The two groups compared were both cultivated
for many generations under similar conditions,

namely, in a similar mixture of the two bacteria,

Micrococcus sensibilis and Achromobacter candi-
cans. In four, cultures containing about 5,000
single individuals having no double ancestors, only

one individual or 0.02% formed a chain. In 8
cultures containing 10,950 single individuals des-
cended from double ancestors, 309 individuals
or 2.82% formed chains. The frequency of
chain formation has been tremendously increased
among the descendants of these double individuals.
Nevertheless, the single descendants of some other
races of double individuals show no increase
whatever in the frequency of chain formation. In
this particular race and in others the increases are
large; however, conclusive proof of the point will
have to await repetition on a much more exten-
sive scale and under strict bacteriological condi-
tions, such as have been used in demonstrating
the induction of chain-formation by Micrococcus
sensibilis, This much is clear: whatever dif-
ferences exist in the frequency of chain forma-
tion between the singles produced by doubles and
the singles of normal ancestry cannot be attributed
to environmental causes, because both groups of
ancestors—the doubles and the normals—were
cultivated in the same kind of environment. We
are therefore forced to conclude that if dif-
ferences in frequency of chain formation exist,
they must be in some way related to the internal
conditions of the ancestors; namely, of the
chains, monsters, or doubles. The direct des-
cendants of chains were studied by Chatton, who
found no increase in frequency of chain forma-
tion among them. I therefore directed my at-
tention to the study of double animals which did
not appear in Chatton’s cultures. I found, first
of all, that double animals are more variable than
single animals. For example, the coefficients of
variation of the rates of fission are 6.59 plus or
minus 0.27% for pure lines of single animals and
8.75 plus or minus 0.67% for pure lines of double
animals. The difference, 2.16 plus or minus
0.72%, is three times its probable error and re-
presents an increase in variability of 32.78%.
If the extreme variants are selected from each of
these pure lines and compared, it turns out that
singles selected for high rate of reproduction
divide 32.19 plus or minus 0.24 times in 9 days;
and singles selected for slow rate of reproduction
divide 32.34 plus or minus 0.34 times. The dif-
ference is only 0.15 plus or minus 0.33 and is
less than half its probable error; moreover those
selected for low rate are higher than those selected
for high rate! So, in normal singles, the selec-
tion was completely ineffective. On the other
hand, doubles selected for high rate divided 29.82
plus or minus 0.28 times in 9 days, whereas
doubles selected for low rate divided only 28.52
plus or minus 0.29 times. The difference is
1.30 plus or minus 0.40. This difference is 3.3
times its probable error and may therefore be con-
sidered significant. If time permitted, I should
like to show you similar data that have been
obtained for other characteristics such as rate of

234

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 39

mortality. In general they show that not only
are doubles more variable than singles, but that
persistent diversitics arise among doubles. This
is highly suggestive of the results obtained in
studies of conjugation made by Jennings in 1913
and Raffel in 1930. Thus far, I have not made
cytological examination of the nuclear phenomena
to see whether changes similar to those occuring
in conjugation take place. The genetic evidence

certainly suggests such a condition.

In summary, new races of Colpidium campylum
have been found to arise in two ways: (1) races
of double animals can be produced by the action
of a particular bacterium Micrococcus sensibilis ;
(2) diverse races arise among the double animals.
It is suggested that this maybe a consequence of
nuclear interchange within the doubles, similar
to that occurring in conjugation.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. SONNEBORN
Dr. Epouarp CHATTON ~
Professor of Biology, University of Strasbourg

The main results which are brought out by Dr.
Sonneborn’s experiments and ours, and which per-
haps he has left a little too much in the back-
ground, are the following:

Some bacteria: Bacilluscoli D (Chatton) JZic-
rococcus sensibilis (Sonneborn) produce sub-
stances which inhibit or delay the cytoplasmic
division of Ciliates of the genus (Colpidium)
which feed on them (Dystome). .Thus chains,
polyvalent monsters, twins are formed. There-
fore, there are dystomigene and non-dystomigene
bacteria. But the same experiments show that

LIFE CYCLE OF A BISEXUAL ROTIFER !

this inhibition does not last any longer when the
dystomigene bacteria is substituted for a non-
dystomigene one.

This clearly demonstrates the necessity of work-
ing in that field, with the most rigorous bacteri-
ological technique, that is to say only with quite
pure cultures. It is just because the cultures
used by Dr. Sonneborn in his inheritance experi-
ments were mixed cultures of dystomigene and
of a non-dystomigene bacteria, that Dr. Sonne-
born himself cannot consider his results as quite
final.

Dr. HELEN M. MILLER
National Research Council Fellow in Biology, Johns Hopkins University

The life cycle of a bisexual rotifer is complex.
The individuals usually found are the non-sexual
or amictic females. These reproduce solely by
parthenogenesis, their eggs invariably producing
females. The females so produced are usually of
the same type as the mother, so that multiplica-
tion by parthenogenesis may continue for many
generations. But among the females so produced
are at times individuals that bring forth small
eggs which develop parthenogenetically into the
small male individuals. These females are also
capable of fertilization, and are therefore called
mictic females, as contrasted with the amictic
females which are not capable of fertilization.
When fertilized, the mictic female produces
larger, thick-shelled eggs instead of the small,
male eggs. After a period of time the fertilized
egg hatches, producing invariably a partheno-
genetic or amictic female. From such a female,
commonly called the stem mother, begins anew
the cycle of diverse generations just described.

In the bisexual rotifer we have, then, three
diverse kinds of individuals: (1) the amictic
female, the predominating type, which reproduces
only parthenogenetically; (2) the mictic female,
which reproduces parthenogenetically until ferti-
lized; (3) the males,

In the present report two questions are con-
sidered: (1) what are the differences in these
three diverse types of individuals? (2) what fac-
tors operate in their production? The answers
to these questions are based upon experiments
with the rotifer, Distyla inermis Bryce, a species
in which bisexual reproduction has not been pre-
viously described.

Males and females are readily distinguishable,
differing in both size and shape. The males are
small, and structurally degenerate; they lack a
functional digestive system, are therefore unable
to grow, and so retain their embryonic size. The
two types of female are distinguishable only
cytologically and by the eggs they produce. Both
are diploid; but the oocytes of the amictic female
fail to undergo chromosome reduction and pro-
duce large eggs with thin shells, while those of
the mictic female undergo reduction, and, unless
fertilized, produce the small, haploid, male eggs;
if fertilized, they produce large, thick-shelled eggs.

The two types of females and the males differ
markedly also in physiology, as shown by indivi-
duals subjected throughout life to similar, uni-
form conditions of cultivation. The average life

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labora-
tory on August 18.

Aveust 23, 1930]

duration of the males is 5.7 days, that of the
amictic females, 8.9 days, of the unfertilized
mictic females, 11.1 days. As shown by the life
curves for these populations, 80% of the males
die between the 4th and the 6th day. The uni-
formly short life of the males undoubtedly re-
sults from structural degeneracy. In popula-
tions of both kinds of females mortality
begins on the 4th and 5th days, but increases more
rapidly in the amictic than in the mictic popula-
tion. On the 15th day, when the last of the
amictic females is dead, 12% of the mictic fe-
males are still living; the last of these mictic fe-
males die on the 28th day. The longer life of
these unfertilized mictic females results, in part at
least, from the fact that their process of egg-
production is less strenuous. They produce
regularly only two-thirds as many eggs as the
amictic females. Their male eggs are smaller
and are produced at a slower rate.

The foregoing facts as to the structural and
physiological differences in the three types of
individuals shed light upon the second question
to be considered: What factors operate in the
production of these very diverse types? The ap-
pearance of males inevitably follows the produc-
tion of mictic females. Fertilization of the haploid
eggs of the mictic female restores the diploid

- chromosome number, and produces an amictic or
parthenogenetic female.

Thus the crucial pro-

_ blem presented by the reproductive cycle of the

rotifers is: What brings about the production of
mictic rather than amictic females? In consider-
ing this problem, certain general facts should be

borne in mind. First, a single amictic female may

tions are studied by comparing

produce both mictic and amictic daughters.

- Second, previous investigations have shown that

environmental factors may affect the amictic fe-
males in such a way as to alter the proportion of
mictic daughters produced; and third, the nature
of the daughters is determined before they leave
the body of the mother as eggs, as demonstrated
by Shull for Hydatina senta, and by Luntz for
Pterodina elliptica.

In the present investigation genetically identical
amictic individuals are subjected throughout life
to uniform conditions of cultivation. The eggs
produced daily are allowed to hatch, and the pro-
portion of mictic individuals among them is de-
termined. The effects of environmental condi-
parallel series
cultivated under conditions which differ in some

_ single known respect.

&

<

is such a condition.

Several environmental conditions have been

found which influence the proportion of mictic

daughters produced. Quantity of bacterial food
When much food was used,
in one experiment 9% of the daughters were
mictic, in another 12%. When little food was

THE COLLECTING NET

235

present, in one case 1.6% of the daughters were
mictic, in a second case, 0.8%. Temperature of
cultivation is another effective condition. In oat
infusion, or in Benecke salt solution with an alga,
Chlorella, and Bacillus proteus as food, a greater
proportion of mictic daughters occur at the lower
temperature employed. In oat infusion, at the
higher temperature (23°-24°C), 3.5% mictic
daughters were produced; at the lower tempera-
ture (18° - 20°), 26%. In Benecke solution, at
the higher temperature (23° - 25°), 22% were
produced, at the lower (20° - 22°), 38%. The
differences are great. Attention should also be
directed to the fact that the type of culture
medium is important. When cultivated upon the
alga and bacillus in salt solution, a greater pro-
portion of mictic daughters are produced, at cor-
responding temperatures, than when oat infusion
is used as the culture medium. These examples
indicate the potency of conditions of cultivation in
altering the proportion of mictic females produced
in this species.

The age of the amictic mothers also affects the
proportion of mictic daughters. This is true in
all conditions of cultivation employed in the pre-
sent investigation, in oat infusion and in Benecke
solution, at high and low temperatures. 2107
females were examined and their order in the
family recorded. Four per cent of the first five
members of the family were mictic; 12% of the
6th-10th members; 13% of the 11th-15th; 19%
of the 16th-20th; and 12% of those above the
20th. These data indicate that very young
mothers produce a smaller proportion of mictic
daughters than middle-aged and older mothers.
Shull has found the same situation in Hydatina
senta; Luntz was, however, unable to find any
correlation between the age of the amictic parent
and the type of daughter produced in another
species, Pterodina elliptica.

In answer to the two questions proposed for
discussion, the following facts have been demon-
strated: (1) Bisexual phenomena in the rotifers
depend upon the production of mictic rather than
amictic females; (2) In Distyla inermis, the dif-
ference between the two types of females involves
their entire life history, as demonstrated by com-
parison of longevity, mortality rate, and fecun-
dity; (3) In this species, both environmental and
intrinsic factors operate in the production of the
two types of female—the environmental factors ;
quantity of bacterial food, type of culture medium,
and temperature; the intrinsic factor: age of the
amictic mother.

Further investigation of the relation of environ-
mental factors, and also of racial differences, to
the initiation of the bisexual cycle in the rotifers
is now in progress.

236

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 39

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. MILLER
Dr. J. A. Dawson
Assistant Professor of Biology, College of the City of New York

It is freely confessed that the study of the
factors concerned in the life cycle of bisexual
rotifers has yielded to date rather contradictory
results. The conclusion, if it may be called such,
is that some change in environmental conditions
whether of pH, amount of oxygen present, tem-
perature, light, etc., is the thing which modifies
the parthenogenetic-bisexual cycle.

In the study under consideration, Dr. Miller,
by making the first comparative statistical study
of the life history of mictic and amictic females
and of the males of the bisexual rotifer, Distyla
inermis, employs a method of attack which pro-
mises to be most fruitful in clearing up the present
rather anomalous situation in regard to the life
cycle of rotifers.

In this preliminary work it is sufficiently de-
monstrated that the environment of the amictic

females clearly modifies the proportion of mictic
daughters produced. The author freely admits
the necessity of more precise control of environ-
mental conditions before any analysis of the
method of interaction of environmental and in-
trinsic factors can be made and it is to be hoped
that this can be carried out. Although the quality
of the food material used in some of the experi-
ments was maintained constant a considerable
variation in the temperature of each of these is
indicated. The effect of temperature on the
quantity of food material must be taken into con-
sideration by all workers who use mixed cultures.
It would seem that a careful temperature control
in combination with the statistical treatment em-
ployed by Dr. Miller would enable her to make
the desired differentiation between the interaction
of environmental and intrinsic factors.

SOME BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS PRODUCED BY ALPHA PARTICLES ON THE EGGS
OF DROSOPHILA MELANOGASTER!
Dr. Paut S. HENSHAW
Biophysics Laboratory, Memorial Hospital, New York, N. Y.

Although over 92 per cent. of the energy given
off by radium is in the form of alpha particles,
almost no biological studies have been made with
this form of radiation. Investigation with this
powerful tool has been limited, mainly for two
reasons: Ist, a source of alpha particles uncon-
taminated with beta particles or gamma rays is
very rare; and 2nd, because alpha particles have
a very short penetration range into matter (about
05 mm. Al or a maximum of 7 cm. of air, ac-
cording to the source used).

The actual physical nature of the alpha par-
ticle may be briefly summarized by saying that it
is identical with the nucleus of the helium atom.
It therefore has a mass more than 7000 times
that of the electron or beta particle, it carries
two positive electric charges and its velocity is
about .05 that of light. A material partical with
such a mass, moving through space at such a
speed, must exert a tremendous effect upon atoms
and molecules that lie in its path. In fact it is
well known that alpha particles produce extremely
intense ionization along their trajectories. The
alpha particles emitted by polonium, which was
the source used in these exploritory experiments,
have an initial velocity of 1.58 x 10® cm. per sec.
and are capable of traversing in a straight
line 4 cm. of atmosphere air. This means that
they actually pass through a very large number
of atoms and molecules in their path. As a result
of these encounters, each alpha particle from

polonium produces 162,000 pairs of ions in air
before it loses its identity. (‘‘The Chemical Ef-
fects of Alpha Particles and Electrons’—S. C.
Lind, The Chemical Catalog Co.)

Eggs of Drosophila melanogaster were found
to be killed by the alpha particles from polonium.
Their susceptibility at different periods during
development has been investigated in order to
correlate certain biological processes with the
physical characteristics of this form of radiation.
The eggs were collected during a two hour period
from actively laying flies in order to be certain
that nearly 100 per cent. were fertilized within
that time. They were then exposed on moist
filter papers in a moist chamber to radiation given
off by the polonium which had been plated onto
a copper disc about the size of a fifty-cent piece.
The dose was always the same for a given experi-
ment and exposures were made on succeeding
hours after collection.

It was found that the per cent. of eggs sur-
viving to the hatching point, diminished steadily
during the first three or four hours. Following
this the process was reversed and an increase in
resistance was shown. In identical experiments
using soft X-rays and gamma rays, the eggs
showed a marked increase in resistance at the
time they showed an increase in susceptibility to
alpha particles. It seemed, therefore, that the
increased susceptibility was due to some peculiar~
ity of the alpha particle radiation.

a ee eae

ee eee ae

Aucust 23, 1930]

In the embryology of the Drosophila egg, it is
known that the first cell divisions occur near the
center of the egg. Technically, the cells are not
then true cells, but are merely nuclei surrounded
with small masses of protoplasm and scattered
about through the yolk substance of the egg. At
about the eighth or ninth cleavage, which at room
temperature (20° to 24°C.), is two to three hours
after fertilization, the cells begin to migrate to
the periphery to form the blastodermic layer.
Microscopic preparations showed the blastoderm
to just be completed at the time the eggs were
found to be the most susceptible to alpha particles.

It is evident that in order to account for the
peculiar differences between the action of alpha
particles and X-rays on the same living material
under identical conditions, the migration of the
nuclei must be considered. The alpha particle
radiation differs from that of X-radiation in
several respects, but in the ultimate analysis, the
main difference is in their penetration powers. It
may also be said that the actual effect on matter
caused by either type of radiation is ionization,
since other effects are negligable in comparison.
The actual primary effects on the eggs should be
the same for either type of radiation. In the case
of alpha particles, the radiation penetrates only
the outer layer of the egg on the exposed side;
whereas in the case of X-rays the whole egg is
traversed by the radiation. The increase in

THE COLLECTING NET

237

resistance to penetrating rays is as one might
expect—greater as the number of cells increase,
since the reparative possibilities are greater when
there are more cells. Accordingly, at the time the
eggs show the maximum susceptibility to alpha
particles, the cells are actually in a more resistant
state. This indicates that at that time at least
a number of cells must be in a very intense field
of radiation or in a field which has been markedly
modified by ionization. Such a region may be
found in the outer layers of the egg on the side
which has been irradiated with alpha particles.

The increase in resistance is simultaneous with
the invagination process in organogenesis. The
cells are thus protected from the particles by mov-
ing out of their range. This increase is at a
different rate from that shown in the response to
the penetrating radiations, since invagination
processes occur at a different rate from cell pro-
liferation.

In view of these physical considerations and
the fact that the nuclei carry little or no proto-
plasmic substance with them to the periphery,
one might conclude that the effect of alpha
particles is largely on the nucleus of the cell in
bringing about death in the egg of Drosophila
melanogaster. Further experiments are contem-
plated with the idea of elucidating this point.

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labor-
atory on August 1.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. HENSHAW
Dr. JAMes W. Mavor
Professor of Biology, Union College

Great interest attaches to the experiments of
Mr. Henshaw in which Drosophila eggs were
killed by being exposed to bombardment by alpha
particles from polonium and they will be of great
importance if it can be proved that the lethal effect
was due to a specific action on the nucleus.

Mr. Henshaw finds that the eggs are most
susceptible to the treatment between three to six
hours after laying (the eggs were collected within
an interval of two hours and the most susceptible
period was found to be from three to four hours
after this). As explained by Dr. Huettner in the
discussion, eggs of Drosophila may be laid at
various stages of development from that immedi-
ately after fertilization up to a stage corresponding
to the time of hatching of the larva. The migra-
tion of the nuclei from the interior of the egg to

the periphery occurs between the ninth and tenth

periods of nuclear division or approximately one
hour and forty minutes after fertilization. The
time of greatest susceptibility as determined by

Mr. Henshaw would therefore not correspond to

the time of migration even if the eggs which he
used were laid immediately after fertilization
which would be doubtful unless special precau-
tions were taken to ensure this.

It does not seem possible to account for this
difference between the time of migration of the
nuclei and the time of greatest susceptibility by
assuming a latent period. However, it may be
suggested that the migration of the nuclei to the
peripheral region causes certain changes, cyto-
plasmic or nuclear which render the protoplasm
more susceptible and that these changes take time.

A further point concerns the question whether
the lethal effect is due to a specific action of the
alpha particles ‘upon the nuclei. The alpha
particles of polonium or Radium F are all emitted
with the same velocity and have a uniform pene-
tration of 3.9 cm. in air or 32. mu. in water as
determined by Michl (see Zeit. f. Physic 1921 Bd.
5, p. 404). The ionization caused by these parti-
cles is a maximum at the end of their trajectory.
The egg of Drosophila measures approximately
500 mu. by 100 mu. This raises the question

238

whether the peripheral portions of the protoplasm
and the plasma membrane were ionized to an
extent equal to the nucleus. Even if this were so
it would still not be clear that the lethal effect
was due to ionization within the nucleus rather
than the cytoplasm.

These considerations do not alter the result that
during the stages investigated by Mr. Henshaw

THE EFFECTS OF X-RAYS UPON THE

WarE CATTELL
Biophysics Laboratory, Memorial Hospital, New York, N. Y.

The work to be reported upon was undertaken
to obtain quantitative results on the reaction of
living material to X-rays under carefully con-
trolled physical and biological conditions. The
organism chosen was the wheat seedling. The
technique of handling the seeds was first carefully
standardized, and then the preliminary experi-
ments revealed the fact that the results of similar
experiments were in close agreement. Over two
hundred thousand measurements were made on
the control and radiated material.

Physical Methods

The source of radiation was a standard water-
cooled Coolidge tube. The filament current was
maintained at 30 ma., and a potential of 200 kilo-
volts was applied across the tube. A filter of 0.9
mm. of copper was interposed between the tube
and the seeds. A thin sheet of bakelite covered
the dish at the time of treatment. The distance
of the seeds from the center of the target was 43
cms. Before and after, as well as in the middle
of each experiment, ionization readings were
taken to check up any possible variations in the
energy output of the machine.

Biological Methods

The grain was soaked in distilled water and
germinated on moist filter paper in a large
chamber. Twenty-four hours later the seeds
having a primary root of about 4 mm. in length
were selected. These seeds were irradiated and
then transferred to large petri dishes. Twenty
seeds were planted on the moist filter paper in
each vessel. Forty-eight hours later careful
measurements were made of the sheath, the
shoot, the primary root and the two secondary
roots.

Results

Briefly, it was found that :

(1) The seeds were relatively sensitive—less
than a threshold erythema dose cutting the
growth of the roots down to half their normal
length.

(2) The effect of the irradiation is evident
within twelve hours after treatment.

(3) Each of the four growing parts of the
seed were affected to a different degree by the
same dose of radiation. A threshold erythema

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 39

irradiation with X-rays and bombardment with
alpha particles have different effects and it should
be emphasized that the points brought up for dis-
cussion do not in any way question the care and
accuracy with which Mr. Henshaw’s experiments
were conducted nor do they question the definite
results which he has obtained. They have regard
only to the interpretation to be placed on the data.

GROWTH OF THE WHEAT SEEDLING?!

dose will cut down the growth of the sheath less
than one per cent. Taking the per cent. reduction
of the sheath with reference to the control as
unity and comparing it with the other growing
parts we find these striking differences:

Growing Part Relative
Effect
Sheath» 202-15; See eee 1
Shtdot27< 45. het 3. 9 a seereee 27
Bitmany, Root 72: s- ssss eee 60
Secotidary: .Baraces eee 71

(4) As can be noted from the curve, only in
one small section of the curve is it true that
twice the dose will cause twice the damage. When
the exposure is short the effect of a given increase
in the dose is great. This same increase has little
effect when the exposure is long.

(5) Small doses are stimulatory. No experi-
ments have been carried out, however, to deter-
mine whether or not this effect is merely transi-
tory.

(6) The irradiated roots become somewhat
thicker than normal. A heavy dose produces a
tuberous formation immediately posterior to the
tip.

(7) If the product of the intensity and time
of exposure is kept constant that over a wide
range (increasing the time factor by 12) the re-
trading effect is the same.

(8) Vitamin B in the cotyledon is destroyed
by very heavy doses. .

(9) The dehydrated cotyledon is normally
brown. An erythema dose of X-rays brings about
a straw yellow color in the dried product.

These chemical effects have been found by Dr.
Sugiura at the Hospital. | However, the state-
ments rest on only a couple of preliminary experi-
ments, and we are not yet in a position to say
definitely whether these results can be duplicated.

The last slide gave a graphic representation of
the effect of gamma rays upon the roots of the
wheat seedling. Taking the threshold skin
erythema as a standard, this one experiment
demonstrates that it requires the same number of
R. units to produce a given effect as it does in

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 1.

Aucust 23, 1930]

the case of X-rays.

(Tables were shown on the board giving the
measurements of a number of control experiments
which demonstrated that small alterations in

THE COLLECTING NET

239

growth produced by any agency could be detected
with certainty.) It would seem from our many
experiments that wheat seedlings might have some
merit as a “biological ionization chamber.”

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF MR. CATTELL
Dr. CHARLES PACKARD
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Institute of Cancer Research, Columbia University

For more than a generation, students of radio-

logy have tried to find some suitable living

fei

material by which to measure the quantitative
effects of short radiations. This was an import-
ant problem, for even though the physical
methods of measurement were adequate, which
at first they were not, it still remained to prove
that biological effect and dosage expressed in
terms of physical units, were correlated. Many
test objects have been tried. The reaction of the
human skin was the first, and it is still used,
although it is by no means ideal. Jungling and
others tried seeds of various kinds, determining
the effectiveness of different doses by the amount
of growth of the root or shoot. The results of
this work have been criticized on the ground that
seeds show an immense amount of normal vari-
ability and hence are unsuitable. But Cattell’s
careful experiments demonstrate that wheat seeds
of certain strains can be used to good advantage
since the range of variability in growth rate is
small and constant. Evidently the former experi-
menters were not careful in selecting their
material, and did not use proper methods in caring

for it after irradiation. The same can be said
for the use of Ascaris and Drosophila eggs which
have been employed in similar studies; in the
hands of those who know how to use them they
are adequate; under other conditions, they are
not.

Since physical instruments are available for
measuring the intensity of X-ray beams of dif-
ferent qualities, it is possible to determine with
considerable accuracy the relation between dosage
and biological effect. And there are many pro-
blems of practical importance to the radiotherapist
which can now be solved,—problems such as the
relative effectiveness of deeply penetrating and
slightly penetrating rays, the amount of effect
contributed by rays which are scattered back
from the absorbing medium, whether rays of
different qualities have different qualitative
effects, and problems of susceptibility. These
can only be attacked when the biological material
is suitable and thoroughly understood. Cattell’s
work shows that his methods can be successfully
used in the solution of these and similar
questions.

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF BIOLOGY

In view of the fact that the International Con-
gress of Biology convenes early in October, we
print here the rules of the Congress which have

been translated by Miss H. Irene Corey.
Rules of the Congress

ARTICLE I. The organization of the International
Congress of Biology will be in charge of the Executive
Committee of the Congress, constituted of nine mem-
bers: a President, a Secretary, a Treasurer, and six
representatives.

ARTICLE II. All those persons who are interested
in biological study or have made written contributions
to this science may take part in the Congress.

ARTICLE III. The Coneress will comprise five
sections:
1. General Biology
2. Cytology, Histology, Embryology and An-
atomy
3. Parasitology, Microbiology, Haematology and
Serology
4. Physiology and Biochemistry
5. Methods and didactics of the biological
sciences.

Each of these sections will be in charge of a sub-
committee named by the Executive Committee and
constituted of seven members.

The Committees will elect from among their members
a President and Secretary each.

ARTICLE IV. The Sub-committees will prepare a
program of the subjects to be treated and will take the
proper steps to obtain papers, as well as proposing the
names of the official speakers.

ARTICLE V. The Congress will be celebrated in
Montevideo from the eighth to the twelfth of October,
1930, and will form a part of the celebration in com-
memoration of the Uruguayn Centenary.

The day of the opening of the Congress there will
be a preparatory session in the morning. At this time
the Secretary will speak of the work of the organization
and will give the final outline of the Congress.

ARTICLE VI. The same day the representatives of
the Executive Power, the President of the Congress,
and the delegates named by respective foreign delega-
tions will speak. .

ARTICLE VII.. The papers of the official speakers
must be presented to the General Secretary before the
first of September, 1930. These must not be more than
twenty pages in length. In the ordinary sessions the
speakers may talk for thirty minutes. In general they
are asked to present information concerning recent
deve! ppments in their own fields of study, and further
setting forth their own opinions or the criteria which
they follow in judging such work.

ARTICLE VIII. Original communications should
not exceed ten pages in length and should be sent to
the Secretary before the 20th of September, 1930. In
all cases the Executive Committee will wait until the

240

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 39

last moment to make decision concerning admission of
the papers presented. The reading of such communi-
cations during the sessions of the Congress should not
take more than fifteen minutes. After each report or
communication the President will call for discussion
by members of the Congress, each of whom may speak,
if he desires, for not more than five minutes, and once
only. After this the President will give an opportunity
to the author of the report or communication to reply
to objections or remarks. 'This reply may not exceed
ten minutes. By an affirmative two-thirds vote of the
members present, open debate may be declared; the
same number of votes may terminate open discussion.

ARTICLE IX. Communications sent to the Congress
may be written in the author’s own language, but must
be accompanied by a resume in French to facilitate
discussion. For discussions during the sessions of the
Congress the Latin languages will be used by prefer-
ence.

ARTICLE X. The Executive Committee will retain
all papers, records, and other documents pertaining to

the Congress and will take charge of their respective
publication. Members of the Congress will be assessed
ten Uruguayan (gold) pesos each. Each member of the
Society of Biology will be assessed five pesos. Both
the members of the Congress and the members of the
Society of Biology will enjoy all the privileges of the
Congress, and each will receive a free copy of the
Annals,

ARTICLE XI. The Executive Committee will organ-
ize among the heads of government departments See-
tional Executive Committees, charged with expediting
the arrival at the Congress of scientific contributions
from investigators at home. These Sectional Com-
mittees will have ample facilities for adopting the
means that they judge most convenient for the success- —
ful discharge of their commission.: ?

ARTICLE XII. The same Executive Committee will
appoint in such countries as they deem desirable, aux-
iliary executive committees, with ample powers to or-
ganize in their respective countries, delegations to the
International Congress at Montevideo.

A LETTER FROM PROFESSOR ROBERT CHAMBERS IN RUSSIA
On board Temerethie II, Black Sea.. Entered Russia on June 22, left Batum July 25

We entered Russia at Negorelowe on the Polish
frontier and five weeks later emerged at Batum
on the Black Sea which was full of lively interest
for a people undergoing a period of extraordinary
self denial. They subsisted on not much more
than the barest life necessities, living in the hopes
of the future. We had been told that during the
past two years Russia has been sending out every
thing exportable in exchange for foreign made
machinery and tools to develop factories, electric
plants, etc., which in accordance with the five-
year plan is to place Russia on a foundation of
industrial development.

On our eastern trip to Moscow we passed
through a lumber country and we saw several
lumber factories in construction. Moscow itself
is in a turmoil of reconstruction. Street after
street all through the city has been torn up for
extensive repairs. We could enter only through
a small side door of the Grand Hotel at which
we stopped. The entire building is being recon-
structed. The same story holds for the rest of
the principal hotels. New buildings are going up
everywhere, apartment houses, scientific institutes,
an amazing plethora of new development. Every-
body appears to be busy, the streets are crowded
with masses of people hurrying in every direction.
The tramways are always crowded and as for the
railroad stations I never saw such crowds. All
Russia seems to be on the move.

We took the train to Nizkin Novgorod having
arranged for tickets days in advance. At N.
Novgorod the same picture presented itself. A
colony of Americans there are constructing a Ford
automobile plant.

From there we took a four-day trip down the
Volga to Stalingrad (formerly Tsaritzin) in a
small ferry steamer that stops at all the stations.
I had expected to see more traffic on the river.
I was called upon to give a talk in the evening but

the topic they were most interested in was how to
get rid of flies, for there are flies everywhere.
We did see rafts of logs and an occasional oil
tanker but nothing exciting. Samara and Saratow
appeared like overgrown villages, a characteristic
true for most Russian cities. The real villages
were picturesque with their low mud and log
houses with thatched roofs. To supplement the
rather meager food served on board we all would
dash off the steamer at the stopping places and |
waiting villagers sold us cheese, butter, cucumbers
and what passes for white bread in Russia—all
of which were delicacies for us_ travellers.
Estimating the currency at the official value of
two roubles to our dollar the prices we paid were
extortionate. Food cost us on the average of
$5.00 a day for the two of us in addition to the
meals on board which were included on our
ticket.

One interesting series of stops was in the Re-
public of the Germans-on-the-Volga—Russian
looking peasants talking German !

The second day out we passed by Drienberg at
a distance, where the Tsar and his family were
executed.

At Stalingrad—again construction everywhere.
There we visited a huge tractor plant being in-
stalled by a colony of 300 American engineers.
We were cordially entertained and we heard con-
siderable complaint regarding the lack of organiz-
ation and the scarcity of good food. The day we
arrived the “American store” had run out of —
cigarettes but our hosts presented us with several
boxes as well as with biscuits and several boxes
of chocolates which we had not seen since enter-
ing Russia. The general complaint seemed to be
the interminable delays in the delivery of tools.
Many people said they were doing only half work, —
and they hate the idling about in-a hot, dreary
country with nothing in the way of recreation.

<n sninienbiineadl

Avcust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

241

One of their interpreters, an American who had
adventured all over the world, drove us back to
the city in a rickety car over an awful road,
secured our tickets by pushing through a mass of
ragged humanity sprawling all over the station
floor.

When we reached Vladikavbas just to the north
of the Caucasus the freshness of fruit for sale
at the stations gladdened our eyes. A glorious
all day motor trip across the mountains to Tiflis
found us in another country. Here for the first
time we were served in the hotel restaurant with
edible bread. Tiflis is clean compared with Mos-
cow. People on the streets of this quite modern
looking city are much better dressed. As we
entered the city we passed by a huge hydro-electric
plant recently built.

Regarding the general reconstruction scheme
what interested me most was our trip to Erivan
in Armenia, a ravaged land almost denuded of a
once splendid forestry. The town which was a
primitive village only a few years ago is being
reconstructed as a city. Two hours away, on the
border of the beautiful lake Sevan, is being built
a city with factories in the desert.

Erivan now sports a real picture gallery with
several Rubens, Teniers, Grenze in addition to a
goodly number of Russian and Armenian painters ;
a Museum with most interesting old manuscripts,
church jewelry, material from old excavations of
probably the oldest civilization of the near East.

Truly the Soviet Union is not selfishly work-
ing only for Russia but is endeavoring to build
up all the autonomous republics in the Union. An
example of this is the establishing in Erivan of a
splendidly equipped Zoo-technical and Veterinar-
ian University for Transcaucasia. Erivan was
selected not only because of the central location
but also because it has nothing to compare with
the institutions already developed in Tiflis and
Baku.

A delightful acquaintance we made at Erivan
was Oberingenieur Dr. Strehle, a German, who is
directing the reconstruction work of all Armenia,

of its hospitals, university buildings, factories,
electric plants throughout the country. At present
he is foaming at the mouth because of delays
but haste was never a characteristic of this part
of the world. The new thing is that the workmen
work fast. Buildings which took years to con-
struct are today only taking months to build.

The country about Erivan is volcanic in origin
with rolling hills rising into mountains to the
north and semi-arid plains to the East and West.
In the South rises out of the plain the magnificent
snow clad peak of Mt. Ararat with its smaller
sister to one side, Little Ararat, a spectacle al-
most worth the hot day’s journey from Tiflis.
Power plants and extensive irrigation schemes
are to convert this arid, but potentially fertile,
region into a productive country.

The Soviet countries which border Russia
proper are not subject countries but truly active
sister members of the Soviet Union. The U. S.
S. R. consists of a large number of autonomous
republics and provinces which had no chance to
breath under the old regime but are now allowed
to develop self expression and self respect. The
one condition is that the form of government be
proletariat. The relations with foreign countries
and internal finance are dealt with through ap-
pointed delegates which meet in Moscow.

When we finally arrived at Batum we saw
several freight ships in the Harbor, then Italian
boats, one French, and one American (American
Exporting Line). The Paquet boat which we
boarded for our journey to Constantinople took
nothing but a few passengers. We had expected
to see the wharves laden with vast quantities of
exporting material but nothing appreciable was
in evidence. The captain of our boat assured us
that Russia is on her last legs. Last year his
boat was always laden with goods from Russian
ports. Such goods have been gradually diminish-
ing. Does this mean that the stories we had been
hearing in Russia are only meant to blind the
people of the true facts of the situation?

Robert Chambers.

DR.McCLUNG TO ATTEND CONGRESS IN URUGUAY

Dr. C. E. McClung will sail on September 5th
for South America to attend the International
Congress of Biology at Montevideo, Uruguay,
where he is to represent the biologists of the
United States on official invitation of the Urug-
uayan government. This Congress is to be held
in connection with the celebration of the hundredth
anniversary of the establishment of the Republic
of Uruguay, in the hope that it will inaugurate
increased participation in scientific progress on the
part of South American biologists. Dr. McClung
will deliver one of the official addresses of the
Congress on “Contributions of Cytology to
Theoretical Biology.”

Distinguished European biologists who will
represent their countries on invitation are Pro-
fessor Brachet of Belgium, Professor Embden of
Germany and Professor Rondoni of Italy.

Dr. McClung will be accompanied by Mrs. Mc-
Clung and Miss Irene Corey, who will act as his
interpreter. En route they will visit Rio de
Janeiro. After leaving Montevideo Dr. McClung
is scheduled to deliver a series of lectures at the
University of Buenos Aires and the Medical
Institute of that city. He expects to cross the
Andes and return by the West Coast of South

America through the Panama Canal.

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Assistant Editors
5 RRS ene ae Annaleida S, Cattell
Business Manager

Ilse Michaelis

Copyright 1930 by The Collecting Net
Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

Ware Cattell Editor

Mary Howe

The Everglades as a National Park

Commenting in The Scientific Monthly (Jan.
1929) on the devastation by fire in the Everglades
Dr. John K. Small, of the New York Botanical
Garden ends his article with the following words:
“The Everglades can safely be termed the ‘Land
of Ten Thousand Smokes’. Would it not have
been a better plan to have closed this land to
“development” and had it appear on the maps of
Florida as “Lake Okeechobee—Everglades Na-
tional Park?”

It is gratifying to every biologist and Nature
lover to know that serious steps in this direction
have been taken, and that the idea of a National
Park in the Everglades— ‘‘a unique natural monu-
ment’ according to the authority quoted above—
has passed the stage of a dream to become a
reality. For those of us who have not been for-
tunate to visit a region of such rare beauty the
lecture given last Thursday in our auditorium by
Mr. Ernest F. Coe, Chairman of the Everglades
Tropic National Park Association, was a revela-
tion. The excellent lantern slides that illustrated
the lecture conveyed to the mind a clear idea of
the scenic beauty of the proposed National Park
but, as biologists, we were much more impressed
by the variety of animal and plant forms that
have found in this area what is undoubtedly the
last refuge of tropical life in our country.

That the idea of the Everglades Tropic National
Park is warmly endorsed by those who are in a
position to know the scientific value of this un-
dertaking requires little comment. We all feel
that the Everglades should by all means be saved
from the certain destruction that threatens it,
and sincerely hope that Congress will take the
necessary steps to preserve a region which, from
the biological standpoint, equals the vast area
set aside as a National Park in the Belgian Congo.
While it is true that there are no gorillas or
elephants in the Everglades its water teem with
myriads of little animals and plants, and as the
history of biology has repeatedly shown, many
of these inferior forms have yielded secrets of
such fundamental nature that their preservation
for further study becomes imperative.

UB Tg IN

THE COLLECTING NET

[Vor. V. No. 39

The last number of THE Cottectine Net will
be issued next Saturday. To make room for the
genetics seminar we will not include reviews of
the papers in protozoology which were given a
week earlier. Four pages have been added to
this number in order to enable us to print the
material that we have on hand. We trust that our
readers will appreciate the fact that it is the in-
creased support of our advertisers that has made
possible this and other additions to our regular
number.

Property Rights On the Sea
To the Editor:

Several people have suggested that I submit
for publication the following letter which I re-
cently received from the Land Court of Massac-
husetts :

“In this Commonwealth the Courts have always ruled
that the owner of upland adjoining the sea is also the
owner of the beach or flats to low water mark, if not
more than one hundred rods from the upland. If
more, then he owns to the one hundred rod mark. An
owner may sell his upland without the flats, or the
flats or any part thereof without the upland.

If the grantor in your case owned the flats as well
as the upland and in a deed bounded by the waters of
Buzzards Bay, then I believe title to the flats passed
to the grantee.

The decrees of the Land Court where the registered
owner owns to low water mark usually in your vicinity
bound “by Buzzards Bay”. This phrase itself carries
to low water mark provided same is less than one
hundred rods from the shore. The decree further
states that the land below high water mark is subject
to public rights, and those publie rights were set forth
in more or less detail in the case of Paul Butler et al.
vs Attorney General, the land being situated on the
North Shore in Annisquam, a part of the city of
Gloucester. In that case the Supreme Judicial Court
ruled:—‘“decreed that premises are held by the peti-
tioner in fee subject, however, as to that portion be-
tween high water mark and low water mark to the
easement of the public for the purpose of navigation
and free fishing and fowling, and of passing free over
and through the water without any use of the land
underneath wherever the tide ebbs and flows.”

L. G. WESSON

A Correction
To the Editor:

Owing to an undoubted slip of the tongue which was
preserved in the stenographic record of my discussion
of Dr. Gelfan’s paper printed in the August 2 issue,
certain of the final remarks must, I fear, appear sadly
meaningless. It was intended to suggest that a stimu-
lus of constant intensity (such as a nerve impulse)
might, in its effect and in a purely relative sense,
become sub-normal (and thus submaximal) as the
threshold of a gradable system responding to it is
raised, not “lowered.” The meaning might equally be
restored by the substitution of excitability for
“threshold” in the passages concerned,

Very sincerely yours,
FREDERICK H. PRATT.

Owing to lack of space it was necessary to drop
the Currents in the Hole from the Editorial Page.
The regular table will be found posted in the
Mess and at the Laboratory.

a=

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

243

ITEMS OF INTEREST

The American vice-presidents of the Fifth
International Botanical Congress which has been
meeting this week at Cambridge are Professor R.
A. Harper, who is trustee of the Marine Biological
Laboratory, Dr. L. H. Bailey and Dr. E. P.
Merrill.

Dr, Samuel Gelfan, formerly research fellow in
physiology at the University of Chicago, has ac-
cepted the position of assistant professor of phys-
iology and pharmacology at the University of Al-
berta in Canada.

A recent number of Science contains an article
by Dr. Frederick L. Gates entitled “A Method of
Titrating Proteolytic Enzymes.” Dr. Gates at-
tended the course in physiology here this summer.

The Rockefeller Foundation has given the sum
of $375,000 to the University of Munich for a
new building for the research division of its Zo-
ological Institute. Dr. K. von Frisch has been
made director.

Dr. Reid Hunt, professor of pharmacology at
Harvard University, and Mrs. Hunt are spending
a few days in Woods Hole.

The last number of Science contains an article
entitled “A Rapid Method for Staining Sections
of the Spinal Cord and Brain Stem,” by Dr.
Henry McE. Knower.

Dr. Charles D. Snyder, professor of physiology
in the School of Medicine at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, and his family are spending a few weeks
in Woods Hole.

Dr. and Mrs. Harvey J. Howard, of St. Louis,
announce the engagement of their daughter, Miss
Margaret Strobel Howard, to Dr. Samuel Gelfan.
Miss Howard has spent the last three summers
here at Woods Hole. Her father is director of
the School of Ophthalmology at the University of
St. Louis. He spent the summer of 1928 working
at the Laboratory and visited here last year. Dr.
Gelfan has been carrying out work in physiology
in this laboratory for the past two summers.

Dr. William C. Harrington, formerly of the
International Fisheries Commission, has just
joined the staff of the United States Bureau of
Fisheries at Woods Hole to investigate the prob-
Jem of the changes in the abundance of haddock
with special reference to possible depletion.

Dr. A. G. Huntsman, director of the Atlantic
Biological Station at New Brunswick, spent the
day visiting the Bureau of Fisheries on August 13.

Mr. Albert E. Parr of the Bingham Oceano-
graphic Foundation of Yale University spent last
week visiting the Bureau of Fisheries Station,

The ninth annual meeting of the Woods Hole
Protective Association will be held in the Old
Lecture Hall of the Marine Biological Laboratory
on Wednesday, October 27 at 8 P. M., for the
election of officers, to consider the improvement
of the bathing beach, and other business.

The Board assures us that after the regular
meeting there will be a general discussion of the
beach question in which non-members will be
welcome to join.

Mr. Robert A. Nesbit, assistant in aquatic bi-
ology at the Bureau of Fisheries, gave a lecture
in the Residence on August 14 on “The Studies
of the Changes in the Abundance of Squeteague.”

Mr. Walter O. Luscombe of Woods Hole cele-
brated his 79th birthday on Tuesday, August 19.
The Rotary Club of Falmouth, of which he is a
prominent member, gave a special program in his
honor at their regular meeting, and speeches were
made by Colonel Dean, president of the Falmouth
National Bank, and Harry S. Dowden, secretary
of the Cape Cod Chamber of Commerce of which
Mr. Luscombe is president.

The sloop Ace, owned by Emory J. San Souci
of Newport, R. I., was towed into Woods Hole
with a disabled motor on August 13, by the Coast
Guard patrol boat CG-282, with J. H. Kittila in
charge.

The Woods Hole Yacht Club held its fifth race
Monday, August 18, with results as follows: Dory
Knockabout Class; Dorine, sailed by G. Clowes,
winner, followed in order by O. Woodruff in
Charlog, C. Glaser in Menidia, W. Meigs in Aunt
Eddie, E. Dubois in Scuttlebutt, 1. Morgan in
Black Cat, and K. Cole in Hunky. Catboat Class:
T. Ratcliff in Salty Dog, R. Kaltenborn in Black
Cat, G. Striker in Seaward, and O. Kaltenborn in
Explorer. In the latter class the results are not
final, having to be corrected according to the time
allowances of the different boats. Mr. Seward
Prosser has offered a cup for the catboat class.

Miss Mildred Wright, bookkeeper at Sam
Cahoon’s Harborside Fish Market, has recently
announced her engagement to Russell T. Jen-
nings, also connected with the market. They will
be married on November 3.

The Bureau of Fisheries have had hundreds of
visitors in the past few weeks to see the fine col-
lection of specimens at the Aquarium, and the
seals from Boothbay Harbor and the loon from
Buzzards Bay in the outdoor tank. Among those
who have been in Woods Hole recently are the
members of Camp Wampanoag for boys at Buz-
zards Bay, and of Camp Chequessett for girls at
Wellfleet, who were both here on August 19,

244 THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 39

STABILITY!

STABILITY is one of the most important factors in photomicro-
graphy, especially when working with high magnifications. Stability
is assured when you use the Bausch & Lomb GBPAA Photomicro-
graphic Outfit.

This equipment is designed to eliminate all vibration, so that a well
defined negative can be obtained. The entire outfit is mounted
upon a sturdy supporting stand equipped with leveling screws and
smooth rolling casters.

Adequate support for bellows—complete and adjustable illuminat-
ing equipment—metal back with reversible plate holder—reducing
kit for smaller standard sizes than 8 x 10 and many other superior
aspects of design are completely described in our booklet E-21.
Write for it today.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO. Mt “yf”
671 ST.PAUL STREET « » ROCHESTER, N.Y. cnedtin yon tmnoven
= : BAUSCH

= LOMB

ie

FOR BETTER VISION

LENSES

ORTHOGON EYEGLASS

MAKERS

OF

ne

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

Important Textbooks, New and Revised

WOODRUFF

Foundations of Biology
Fourth Edition
This highly successful text by Dr. Woodruff of
Yale
largely rewritten, and reset in full octavo size.
Rearrangements have been made in the material
where classroom use has shown this to be desir-

University has been completely revised,

able and additions have been made which bring
the book thoroughly up to date—but the essential
quality of the treatment remains the same.

501 pp. Ill., Cr. 8 vo., $3.50

BAITSELL
Manual of Biology

Fourth Edition

Revised in keeping with the new Woodruff text
which it so efficiently supplements, this Manual
by Dr. Baitsell of Yale University is now offered
in a larger format, with new and expanded ma-

terial and improved order of presentation.

369 pp., Cr., 8 vo.,°$2.60

HICKMAN
Laboratory Manual in College Physiology

Cleveland P. Hickman of De Pauw University, in
this new Manual, unites the older type of phys-
iological experimentation with some of the newer
chemical and physical methods now so widely
used. While the standard experiments are in-
cluded some of the exercises appear here for the
first time. They have all been successfully used
with the author’s students, and meet the needs
of the elementary physiology course.

116 pp., 12 mo, $1.10

WALTER

Genetics
Third Edition

This standard text for beginners in Geneties, by
Professor Walter of Brown University, is now
presented in a revised form which brings the
material thoroughly up to date and which, owing
to the new type style adopted, is more readable
The important advances made in
the subject during the last decade have been in-
The clarity and interest of the book
have been retained.

359 pp., Ill., 12mo, $2.50

than before.

corporated.

BUCHANAN
Bacteriology

Third Edition

In revising this comprehensive textbook E. D.
Buchanan, and R. E. Buchanan, of Iowa State
College, have rewritten it almost entirely, added
new chapters and new illustrations, and brought
it thoroughly abreast of the times. Important
new material on bacteriophage and the fermenta-
tion industries has been added.

532 pp., 12mo, $3.00

JOHNSON
Educational Biology

The American Teachers College Series

In this text for the basic course in biology given
in a teacher-training program, Professor Johnson
of the State Teachers College, Westchester, Pa.,
presents clearly the outstanding principles of bi-
ology which contribute to a teacher’s understand-
ing of educational psychology and theory, nature
study, elementary and general science, hygiene,
and health education.

360 pp., Ill., 12mo, $3.00

60 Fifth Avenue

MACMILLAN

New York City

245

Lae)

THE COLLECTING NET [Vor. V. No. 39

SOLD BY THE COLLECTING NET
for the benefit of its Scholarship Fund

AN ENTIRELY NEW WORK BY THE LEADERS OF THE GREAT BARRIER REEF
EXPEDITION, 1928-9

THE SEAS

OUR KNOWLEDGE OF LIFE IN THE SEA
AND HOW IT IS GAINED

By F. S. RUSSELL. D.S.C., B.A. (Cantab.)
Assistant Naturalist to the Marine Biological Association, Plymouth; Formerly Assistant Director of
Fisheries Research to the Egyptian Government
and

C. M. YONGE, D.Se. Ph.D.

Leader of the Great Barrier Reef Expedition; Formerly Assistant Naturalist to
the Marine Biological Association, Plymouth

WITH 384 ILLUSTRATIONS
167 of which are in full colour
In pocket size, 6% x 4% ins., cloth gilt, round corners
PRICE $5.00

By special arrangements with the publisher, Frederick Warne and Co. Ltd., half of the money
coming from the sale of this volume will be turned over to THE Cottectinc Net Scholar-

ship Fund.

MONOGRAPHS ON EXPERIMENTAL BIOLOGY

Factors Affecting the Distribution of Electro-
lytes, Water and Gases in the Animal Body
By D. D. VanSlyke, Ph. D., Se. D.
Rockefeller Institute
16 Diagrams. 70 Pages $2.50

Basis of Growth and Senescence
By T. B. Robertson
University of Adelaide, Adelaide, South
Australia
45 Illustrations. 376 Pages

Chemical

$3.00

The Biology of Death
By Raymond Pearl
Johns Hopkins University
64 Illustrations. 275 Pages $3.00

Injury, Recovery and Death In Relation to
Conductivity and Permeability
By W. J. V. Osterhout
Harvard University
96 Illustrations. 259 Pages $3.00

The Physical Basis of Heredity
By Thomas Hunt Morgan
Professor Experimental Zoology in Columbia
University

117 Illustrations. 305 Pages $3.00

Chemical Dynamics of Life Phaenomena
By Professor Otto Meyerhof
Awarded the Nobel Prize 1923, for the
Researches Published in this Book

8 Diagrams. 110 Pages $3.00

Labyrinth and Equilibrium
By Samuel Steen Maxwell, M.S., Ph.D.
University of California

11 Illustrations. 163 Pages $3.00

The Nature of Animal Light
By E. Newton Harvey, Ph.D.
Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

36 Figures 14 Tables. 182 Pages $3.00

Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the
Vertebrates
By G. H. Parker, Se. D.
Harvard University

37 Illustrations. 192 Pages $3.00

The Elementary Nervous System
By G. H. Parker, Se. D.
Professor of Zoology, Harvard University

53 Illustrations. 229 Pages $3.00

For Sale at All Bookstores
Washington Square, Philadelphia

LIPPINCOTT

ee et eee

el eel il ee

er

ee ee

.

Aucust 23, 1930] THE COLLECTING NET 247

LEITZ
COLLEGE and LABORATORY MICROSCOPES

Models “L” and “LL”

With the beginning of classes this fall, additional
microscopical equipment will undoubtedly be re-
quired due to increased classes and to the replace-
ment of old instruments. The new Leitz fall models
offered for college classes represent student micro-
scopes carefully designed both in weight and size
to meet your requirements.

We shall be pleased to submit a sample for examina-
tion, comparison and trial since this offers an
excellent opportunity to determine the exceptional
merit of our new models.

a E. LEITZ, Inc.

Write for Pamphict No. 1168 (C. N.) 60 E. 10th Street,
NEW YORK, N. Y.

The Asta Electric Incubators and Ovens

Adopted by Leading Institutions

(Medical Center, N. Y., Columbia University, University of Virginia, etc.)

On Display With Other Kny-Scheerer Products in Old Lecture Hall—Aug. 27-30

Naturalists’ Museum
Biological Cabinets
and
Laboratory Surgical
Supplies Instruments

“Ask our Representative regarding Special Offers”

KNY-SCHEERER CORPORATION

Department of Natural Science
580 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK CITY

248 THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 39

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for
SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, etc.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Cray-Apams CompANy

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Botanical and Biological models and preparations
and skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

Turtox Biological Service Leaflets

Free to Biology Teachers

Many projects carried on in the school Biology laboratory present problems which
are difficult for the average instructor to solve. To assist the Biology teacher in solv-
ing some of the problems most commonly encountered, we have prepared a series of 36
service leaflets.

The Turtox Service Leaflets are prepared primarily for the High School teacher
and are written from the standpoint of secondary school science work. Judging from
the requests we have received, however, we have concluded that the leaflets are also
proving of interest to many college and university teachers.

The leaflets cover a wide range of subjects including ecology in the laboratory,
preparation methods, study suggestions for various forms, making laboratory draw-
ings, ete.

The Turtox Service leaflets are free to Biology teachers and educational officials. Write
for a detailed list of the subjects covered.

General Biological Supply House

(INCORPORATED)

761-763 East 69th Place

The Sign of the Turtox Chicago, Illinois
Pledges. Absolute Satisfaction

Pesins

A FFLM te ae thy

Aucust 23, 1930]

7

ash elt

THE COLLECTING NET 249

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nesting
Features

This tray will earry forty-eight l-inch slides
or thirty-two 1%-ineh slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides.

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

11762 MICRO SLIDES — Non-Corrosive. These

are made from a very hard crown glass and
possess a slightly greenish tint when viewed
edgewise but this has absolutely no effect in
decreasing illumination in that the color in-
tensity is less than that possessed by the glass
used in microscope objectives. They are guar-
anteed against corrosion in any climate and are
remarkably uniform in thickness, averaging
about 1.2 mm. The edges are well ground and
the slides are as free from striations, scratches
or bubbles as possible in a micro slide. Size,
3 x 1 inch; packed in %4-gross cartons.

Per ross’ 2iiiiacviccccsots sete cance eae ere 1.50

Per 10 gross, 10% discount. Per 50 gross, 20%
discount. Per 100 gross, 25% discount.

11772 MICRO SLIDES — Non-Corrosive. These

are made from the same glass as No. 11762
above, but are of a size, 3 x 2 inches; packed
in 44-gross cartons.

Per gross Pte pepe ih feo oass th cpeceat: .. 3.00
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

11777 MICRO SLIDES—White. These slides are

made from an imported glass that is as white
as can be obtained and are relatively free from
striations or scratches. They run fairly uniform
in thickness, averaging from 1.4 mm to 1.7 mm,
and have edges well ground. These slides are
preferred by many because of the absence of
color, although optically this is of no great im-
portance. They are not absolutely guaranteed
against corrosion under all conditions, but the
glass from which they are made is highly resis-
tive. Size, 3 x 1 inch; packed in 1%-gross
cartons.

1 Uz) Oot oh of 1) Casey ASSESS Ua CLE Aa oe EPE CEE MEER Se EM
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

11782 MICRO SLIDES—White, Thin. These are

of the same glass as No. 11777 above, but ap-
preciably thinner, running approximately 1.0
mm; size, 3 x 1 inch.

Per gross ....... ac Lect Aadvs eeerecratie tsa
Per 10 gross, 10% discount.

WILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RocHester, N-Y:

250 THE COLLECTING NET

[Vot. V. No. 39

TEST SOLUTIONS

Widest Assortment

Made according to the specifications of
the A. P. H. A., according to Dr. Victor
C. Meyers and according to the U. S.
Pharmacopoeia.

Staining, Mounting and Preserving Solu-
tions for Microscopic and Microchemical
Work.

Volumetric Solutions.

Write for further information advising
requirements.

EIMER & AMEND

Est. 1851 Inc. 1897
HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS
Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Marine
Biological
Laboratory
Supply
Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

RESEARCH
PERIODICALS

MEDICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL,
CHEMICAL and OTHER
SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS

Complete Files, Volumes or Back Copies
For Sale

We buy unbound and bound Scientific
Journals

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
Established 1887
29 EAST 21st STREET
New York City

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC.
13 West 46th Street,
New York City

All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

The Collecting Net

Began Publication in 1926

BACK NUMBERS AND
VOLUMES

May be obtained by

addressing

The Collecting Net

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

“RITE ON”
Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the
slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the

so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again
and again.

Use Pen
or

. : Pencil
SIZE 3x1”

Non-eorrosive semi-white,
medium thickness

All four sides ground and polished.

$1.75 Gross

Sample gross sent prepaid on
receipt of check.

Please mention dealers name

Crav-ApAms Company
Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

markings can be washed off with water |

BINOCULAR ATTACHMENT
“BITUKNI”

The Bitukni tube attachment serves for
stereoscopically viewing microscopic ob-
jects with the aid of a single objective.
It enables the observer to look obliquely
into the microscope without inclining it,
thus retaining the convenience of a hori-
zontal stage for manipulation of the
specimen. An outstanding feature of
this instrument is that there is no appre-
ciable loss in definition. In fact, details
are frequently revealed which escape
detection with monocular observation.

Price $86.00 f.o.b. N. Y., including one pair
of compensating eyepieces. (7x, 10x or 15x.)
Additional compensating eyepieces, $18.00
a pair.

Carl Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

Bis

251

THE COLLECTING

NET [Vot. V. No. 39

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH
(Episcopal)
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector

Holy Communion -
Morning Prayer - - - - 1
[Waterss ese ALS A ES | Prayer

aA
2S we
sao
Weetal b
|

REAL ESTATE AND
INSURANCE

Woods Hole Phone 622

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE [mace || See

te onices = tines — bee el — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles
Elizabeth Arden Coty
Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin

MRS. WEEKS SHOPS

FALMOUTH

“BILL” ENGLISH
A Man’s Store

MEN’S AND BOYS’ WEAR
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth

Phone 239-W Free Delivery

We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

M. DOLINSKY’S

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE
COMPANY

Opposite Station

After the Movies
LAWRENCE’S SANDWICH SHOP
FALMOUTH HEIGHTS

DANIELS’

for Home-made Ice Cream,
Delicious Sandwiches,
Coffee,

|. Wellow the Crowd to= sain the Crowd to y
PICNIC }. oe PICNIC LUNC EES eee

THE THE TWIN DOOR DOOR
RESTAURANT AND BAKERY
G. M. GRANT, Prop.
Chicken and Lobster Dinners

Waffles

Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

COME TO
THE TOASTED SANDWICH SHOP
M. B. L.

Specials Cape Cod Specials

Dinners and Lunches
Tel. 70787

IDEAL RESTAURANT

Woods Hole

Main Street

Tel. 1243

SAMUEL CAHOON

Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
FISH AND LOBSTERS

Tel. Falmouth 660-661

Woods Hole and Falmouth

N. E. TSIKNAS

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Falmouth and Woods Hole

THE QUALITY SHOP

Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes
and Souvenirs

Ask for things you do not see. _
Main Street Woods Hole

Aucust 23, 1930]

THE COLLECTING NET

bo
on
Ww

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“The Marquise”
by NOEL COWARD

Week of August 25 - 30

Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth
Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

shoes for
every

occasion
jax

parkway shops near filene’s

KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

EASTMAN’S HARDWARE
5 AND 10ce DEPARTMENT

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS

Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

Falmouth

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Monday, August 25—Tuesday, August 26
Matinee Monday

CYRIL MAUDE in
“GRUMPY”

Wednesday, Aug. 27—Thursday, Aug. 28
Matinee Each Day
EDDIE CANTOR in
“WHOOPEE”

First Showing in New England
Friday, August 29
NORMA SHEARER in
“THE DIVORCEE”

Saturday, August 30

GARY COOPER in
“THE TEXAN”

Sunday, August 31

LILLIAN GISH in
“ONE ROMANTIC NIGHT”

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT
STORE ON CAPE COD

Phone 116

Falmouth

254 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vou. V. No. 39

HALDANE - CARPENTER
GAS ANALYSIS APPARATUS

GAS ANALYSIS APPARATUS, Haldane-
Carpenter, for the determination of Carbon Di-
oxide and Oxygen. For use with respiratory
exchange apparatus in which a chamber, a spirom-
eter or other container for the expired air is
employed. This apparatus embodies the latest
modifications as described by Thorne M. Carpen-
ter in, “The Carpenter Form of the Haldane Gas
Analysis Apparatus,” The Journal of Biological
Chemistry, Vol. LXX XIII, No. 1 (July, 1929),
p. 211. See also, The Journal of Metabolic Re-
search, Vol. 4, No. 1-2 (July-August, 1923), and
The Journal of Biological Chemistry, Vol. LXX,
No.1 (Sept., 1926), p. 115.

Samples of gases containing as much as 1.7%
of Carbon Dioxide and from 78.4 to 79.6% of
Nitrogen can be an analyzed with this apparatus.
Analyses of outdoor air have given 0.030 plus or
minus 0.003% for Carbon Dioxide, and 20.940
plus or minus 0.003% for Oxygen.

The capacity of the burette is 40.04 ml and it
is calibrated to 100.10%, each interval having a
capacity of 0.004 ml or 0.01%. An interval
length of approximately 1 ml permits reading to
0.001%. An illuminator is provided for the
burette, consisting of two 110-volt cylindrical
incandescent lamps mounted on metal brackets
behind an opal glass window.

In the latest model, the lower end of the com-
pensator tube is sealed off, a construction which
overcomes entrapping air bubbles—a difficulty
5933-A. experienced with a rubber tube closure.

5933-A. Gas Analysis Apparatus, Haldane-Carpenter, as above described. The burette is uncalibrated
but is provided with an extra stopcock for calibration in the laboratory, after which this
stopeock is cut off. Complete with glass parts as above described, glass tube for agitating
water in jacket, theremometer, necessary rubber tubing connections and pincheocks, all

mounted on polished, quartered oak board with base : $140.00
Code Word “ ; Ibbha
5933-B. Ditto, but with calibration table for the burette, from which the calibration stopcock has
been removed ....... ‘ F ; 150.00
Code Word 5 - cers Tbbiy

Prices subject to change without notice

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

Avoust 23, 1930] THE COLLECTING NET 255

People Who Buy
SPENCER RESEARCH MICROSCOPES

Are not. susceptible
to bargain appeal
They want:

[ Quality, Precision,
LL Design, Usability.

Always, their great re-
sponse is to that patri-
cian element which sets
fine things apart and so

Spencer Research
Microscopes

Nos. 7H, 14H and 7CBH

ated in their proudest traditions and kept free from the barterings of the market place.

Without special inducement they have met a demand that has no parallel in research
microscope history. There is now scarcely a college, university or research laboratory
in America that does not possess at least one of these fine microscopes.

Whoever want a research microscope, want the very latest and the best; they want a fork-type
substage which admits every possible substage accessory. They want a fine adjustment for focusing
the condenser because in recent years they have learned that fine focusing of objectives is not
enough, it should be supplemented by fine focusing of the condenser; they want a highly corrected
achromatic condenser; they want the advantage of case and comfort on the eyes provided by the
converging binocular tubes; they want a combination stage—plain and mechanical (2 in one); they
want a combined binocular and monocular body (2 in one) which avoids the necessity of changing
from one tube to another when changing from binocular to monocular vision and vice versa; they
may want a set of highly corrected apochromatic objectives, certainly the best achromatic obtain-
able.

All these and many more advantageous features, many of them patented by us, are
provided in Spencer Research Microscopes and explain why laboratory workers gener-
ally prefer the Spencer to others.

The company that makes the best research microscopes should be
able likewise to excel in making laboratory and student microscopes

SPENCER LENS COMPANY

MANUFACTURERS SPENCER
BUFFALO Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring BUFFALG
SA U.5A Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Ete. SAS

BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

First visioned by Professor C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania, and then cre-

bo
on
OV

THE COLLECTING NET [Vot. V. No. 39

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION ALPARAIUsS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple |
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or screen,
microscopic preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living insects or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction,

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
| miecroseopie high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microscopic preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying case. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 119 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-cuvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

( os \ ee A oe Zam, i a pe I onc >
Crav-Apams Company
117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Vol. V. No. 10

OFFICIAL LABORATORY MEETING

At the meeting of the trustees of the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 12, Dr. W. C.
Curtis and Dr. A. C. Redfield were elected to
serve as members of the Executive Committee in
the 1932 class. The other two members of the
committee are Dr. Gary N. Calkins and
Dr. L. L. Woodruff. The following investigators

SATURDAY, AUGUST 30,

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00

1930

SINGLE Copies 25 Crs.

PROTEIN SYNTHESIS

Dr. HarpotpH WaASTENEYS
Professor of Biochemistry, University of Toronto
It is not necessary to elaborate on the im-
portance of an understanding of the mechanisms
involved in the enzymatic synthesis of proteins
because it is perhaps the most fundamental charac-
teristic of living matter just as protein itself is
the most characteristic con-

were elected to membership in
the Corporation: Detlev W.
Bronk, Edouard Chatton,
Alden B. Dawson, Leslie C.
Dunn, Helen Mar Miller,
Arthur W. Pollister, Daniel
Raffel, Walter S. Root, Tracy
M. Sonneborn and Margaret
Sumwalt.

At the Corporation meeting
on the same day the following
men were elected to serve as
trustees of the laboratory for

Utrecht,
tion with

isms.”

Bryan,

tour years; EH! R. Clark, E.

G. Conklin, Otto C. Glaser, ture after Parathyroidectomy.”
Ross G. Harrison, E. N. Har- Dr. K. Blanchard,

veya i. Ss) Jennings, E. P. Acids.”

Knowlton, M. M. Metcalf. Dr. L. Michaelis and M.

It was unanimously voted “Metal Complex

that Dr. William Patten be Thioglycollic Acid.”

elected trustee emeritus.

M. B. L. Calendar

TUESDAY, SEPT. 2, 8:00 P. M.
Evening Lecture.
professor of zoology, University of
“The Problem of Restitu-
special
Phenomena of Secretion.”
FRIDAY, SEPT. 5, 8:00 P. M.
Evening Seminar.
“The Extraction

Dr. G.

Professor W. E.
“Alkalosis in

Garrey

Tetany Following High Tempera-

Condensation Reactions by Amino-

stituent of protoplasm.

We know something of the
intermediate and a good deal
of the final products of de-
gradation of the protein mole-
cule though we know little or
nothing of the exact structure
of the molecule itself.

Dr. J. M. Johlin, In the higher organisms
of Miero-organ- | which, unlike the plants, have
not the power to synthesise
amino acids, material for the
synthesis of the proteins which
are required for growth and
maintenance must be ingested
in the form of proteins or
amino acids. The proteins
before final absorption must
(Continued on Page 264)

C. Hirsch,

Regard to the

and W. R.
Relation to

“Catalysis of

Schubert,
Compounds of

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Protein Synthesis,

Professor Hardolph Wasteneys Abs
The Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, 258
The Life History of Cryptocotyle Lingua,

Professor Horace W. Stunkard ..... 268
Review of the Seminar Report of Dr. Stunkard,

Dr. Edwin Linton ae . 268
A Mutation of Chilodon U neinatus: Produced

by Ultraviolet Radiation,

Professor Mary Stuart MacDougall ...... 269
The Effects of Quinine and Plasmochin on the

Avian Malarias,

Dr. Reginald D. Manwell ........ . 270
The Asymmetrical Motile Stage of an Epistylis,

iprofesson Bdowand Chattom >......64-4.--. 272
A Cine-Photomicrograph Apparatus,

Dr. Ruth B. Howland 272

Neutralization of Effects of Deficiencies through
Duplications of Chromosome Materials,
DraCalwine Bi Bindgesi sc). 0. ea tice eens 273

A Peculiar Sex-Ratio in Drosophila Obscura,

Professor A; Bo Sturtevant... 4,6... Ban 2/3)
Crossing over in Triploid Drosophilas,
IDs Wlellern ING Chl sooo mode badeon 10059 275

A Spectrophotometrie Study of the Pigments in

the Eye Color Mutations of Drosophila,

Dr. Jack Schultz Soar ce PAA AE OG 276
A Microscope-Centrifuge

Professor E. Newton Harvey 276
Post Embryonic Development of Mendelian

Characters in the Gold Fish,

Professor H. B. Goodrich 27
The New Research Museum at the Laboratory 278
LON, Tnsiey wo) tas Stomin SERA oo acsotaogacuouse 278
The Isoelectric Point of Red Blood Cells,

Dr. H. A. Abramson Ss Sarit tee 279
“The Productivity of the Sea,”

George L. Clarke ..... Poe aoic.cc ee ee)
MhenScholanshiupeAwarOsereserteeren niente 282
tems of Almbenrest s-c-trraere ee iat eis ereiere 283

a A

258

THE COLLECTING

NET [ Vor. V. No.

THE WOODS HOLE OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION

In February of this year, upon the recommen-
dation of the National Academy of Sciences that
“the establishment and endowment of an Atlantic
oceanographic institute should be realized at the
earliest possible moment,” the Rockefeller
Foundation granted $1,000,000 to finance build-

aWoors HOLE CCEMOGLAPHIC INST
Woors Wole — assxenusty]S

Wor ie
Nignd

we ; \
Pe ep
Wh
i “4 CDi Se, Sees, WEY ye

& kesoyy dvaipechs

ace Dae

ings and equipment, and $1,000,000 as a perman-
ent endowment fund. Later it agreed also to
give $50,000 a year over a period of ten years to
form a special operating fund. Dr. Henry B.
Bigelow was appointed director, and the follow-
ing men were selected to form its board of

Ay

Naat ‘gees ane: ae Sete
EGO vr reel he é

THE LABORATORY
THE PENZANCE
PENTER SHOP”
YEARS OLD.
WOODEN BUILDING.

VIEWED FROM THE
GARAGE TO THE RIGHT.
ARE IN THE BACKGROUND.

HARBOR
THE
THESE
THE OFFICES OF “THE COLLECTING
—Photographs from the architect’s drawings by Mr. A. R. Apgar

LEFT AND
“OLD CAR-
HUNDRED

OF THE

TO THE
AND THE
OVER A
FLOOR

CLUB HOUSE
BUILDING”
ARE

MAIN

WITH
“OLD
TWO
NET”

THE
STONE
BUYLDINGS
ARE ON THE

Avcusr 30, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET

Laborayor
eae a

i,
HIKE

(a
|]/|3¥|| :
zl | Researcn fT

eens

| Lab
r0'e'. We

Lab.
70'8"s 190" |

||

]
| | | LaporaTory.
1 fog"

p's

Chemica E——$ Hh roaart

RLsEa\

Lap
— toe

10-8". 35:8"

Courter,

[sw]
ReH | Resrarch

=| Las
n'a iq

HOMINISTRATION
zo'Bs 2g

Die

|

LAsor
woe ara

Ls —

a
= ] I]
Laporatany ww || ReseARCH
ayia a Lap

Biovoaicat i
SPECIMENS,

=" I

7 \

| Tfesean [| | Restarch
lan = Las
20'8% 14:2" * &

LABORATORY

zie

Sater

Pay sic

s |] ] \Camera &

| Laboratory L Las Drarring Rm Cart Room
21 S« zole a we za as wae ist

SECOND FLOOR PLAN

DiovogicaL LAboRATORY

Coe sy |

Laporayony. Research

Restarcu

THIRD FLOOR PLAN

|

=

6 ‘SNOL 08 LOOUY BX TIM INGNGOVIdSIG SLI ‘ANIT YOLVM DHE LV Ladd col GNV 'TIV AHAO Ladd CFT AYOSVAW THM INV
Z ONIDDIM HOLEM HALIM HALSVICOML V AA OL SI TASSHA AHL “SUrMOLVYOAVT ADUVI AHL dO NOMISOd AHL SMOHS HOTHM
S TASSAA OIHAVUVONVHOO AHL JO SNOILOGS TYNIGOLIONOT
a

°

>

&

i)

a

Oo

a

_

sal

O

ea

4

e)

1S)

sca

yan)

ical

S

\O

Nm

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

ies

il
3 Al re ,

‘e___ =
===

Wit
Vane

pore (]
°°

THE TWO-MASTED SCHOONER WHICH IS BEING CONSTRUCTED IN COPENHAGEN

trustees: Dr. Thomas Barbour, Dr. Henry B.
Bigelow, Dr. William Bowie, Newcomb Carlton,
Dr. E. G. Conklin, Dr. Frank R. Lillie, Dr. John
C. Merriam, Seward Prosser, Lawrason Riggs,
Jr., Elihu Root, Jr., Dr. Harlow Shapley and Dr.
T. Wayland Vaughan.

A careful investigation of the possible sites for

Rectving 6?
SHipPiNG

Bouter Room
py + be

the new development resulted in the decision to
establish the laboratory at Woods Hole and the
name given to it is the Woods Hole Oceano-
graphic Institution. It is now under construction
between the M. B. L. Club house and the Pen-
zance Garage. It will be much the same type of
building as the Marine Biological Laboratory,

a 1s] 2

Macnine — Snop
27+ 208

Le

Sorting Room
ais 20-8"

==
D LAV
| LING
Cytmpcae PPARATTUS| Agparatus Pry siovogicac Aguarium
| 33) & zie Ru 1B %« 208)
= —

= GROUND FLOOR PLAN OF THE NEW LABORATORY

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

Is

sv

ATTIC FLOOR PLAN

being of brick, steel and concrete construction.
The outside dimensions of this new laboratory
will be 135 x 46 ft. and it will rise four stories
above the ground. There will be about fifty
rooms and three or four large general laboratories
for beginning investigators.

One large laboratory is being provided for
experiments on a large scale. This room will be
lined with large aquaria and equipped with tem-
perature control apparatus. In general the
building will have the same facilities as the Marine
Biological Laboratory for research in chemical,
physical and biological work. Special emphasis,
however, will be placed on the physical and
chemical aspects of oceanography, and there will
be whatever special apparatus is needed for this
work.

The large salt water tanks will be installed
under the roof in order to conserve space. There
is to be a separate pumping system, housed on
the wharf, which will supply a continuous flow
of fresh sea water.

The Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution is
an independent organization and separately fi-
nanced and starts out with an endowment which
will be sufficiently large to cover its running
expenses.

The principal instrument of research will be
the vessel which is as much a part of an oceano-
graphic institution as a telescope is of an astro-
nomical observatory. In fact the whole institution
centers around this boat which is to be the most
modern of oceanographic vessels. Therefore a
large sum of money is being spent on a floating
laboratory. The plans for it have been completed
and the contract for the work has been let. The
ship which is being built in Copenhagen is 142
ft. long over all and 105 ft. at the water line; and
its displacement will be about 380 tons. The vessel
is to be a two-master with ketch rigging. An
auxiliary Diesel engine will make it possible to

cruise without sails, over a radius of several
thousand miles.

The vessel will contain two general laboratories,
a chart room and about nine staterooms and the
quarters for the crew of about thirteen, and a
mess room. The Diesel engines run on crude
oil, and there will be absolutely no gasoline on
the boat. A catastrophe such as occurred in the
case of the ill-fated Carnegie cannot take place.

The ship will be fully equipped with all the
instruments used in oceanographic service. A
drum with about five or six thousand fathoms of
steel cable will be provided for dredging.

The Oceanographic Institution will deposit its
library in the Marine Biological Laboratory,
made up af books on basic oceanography, marine
expeditions, hydrography, meterology and fisheries
and special books of reference. This arrangement
will make the Laboratory library more complete,
and at the same time save the overhead expense
of a separate library.

The coming of this institution, together with
the Marine Biological Laboratory and the United
States Bureau of Fisheries Station places Woods
Hole in the unique position of containing the
most complete equipment and organization for the
study of marine life and the ocean in the world.
The close spirit of cooperation which exists be-
tween these institutions will insure an economical
attack on the many intricate problems which await
solution.

The building will be completed in the Spring
and occupancy is planned for next summer. There
will be a resident staff of eight or ten workers,
because there will be work to be carried out
through the winter months. During the summer
months it is not unlikely that a course will be
given in the methods of oceanography, for few
students have had a thorough training in this
field.

Aucusrt 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

263

THE WOODS HOLE OCEANOGRAPHIC INSTITUTION!
Dr. Henry B. BiGcELow, Director
Research Curator in Zoology, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University

It is gratifying to report that the study of the present
status of oceanography made by the committee of the
National Academy on that subject and their recom-
mendations have borne fruit in the incorporation of a
new establishment for the study of the sea, the Woods
Hole Oceanographic Institution. And it is still more
encouraging to students in sea science that the Rocke-
feller Foundation has appropriated for the new in-
stitution funds sufficient to assure it an adequate
building program and sufficient operating income.

The purpose of the new institution, as its name im-
plies, is to carry on and to encourage the study of the
sea in the broadest sense. Like the Marine Biological
Laboratory, it is an independent organization, but sim-
ilarly assured of informal association with other edu-
cational and research institutions through the person-
nel of its trustees. The initial board is as follows:
Dr. Thomas Barbour, Dr. Henry B. Bigelow (director),
Dr. William Bowie, Dr. E. G. Conklin, Mr. Newcomb
Carlton, Dr Benjamin M. Duggar, Dr. Frank R. Lillie
(president), Dr. John C. Merriam, Mr. Seward D. Pros-
ser, Mr. Lawranson Riggs, Jr. (treasurer), Mr. Elihu
Root, Jr., Dr. Harlow Shapley, Dr. T. Wayland Vaughan.
The by-laws provide for an increase in the number of
trustees up to twenty-four.

The choice of Woods Hole as the site for the head-
quarters of the new institution was reached only after
a careful consideration of other possible situations along
the Atlantic Coast of North America. The final decision
was based on the combined advantage of close proximity
to two world-famed laboratories of marine biology, on
the one hand, and, on the other, on the exceptional op-
portunity for illustrative investigations that is offered
by the neighboring waters.

The first of these inducements needs no explanation.
The second depends in part upon the ease with which
the transition from inshore to offshore waters can be
reached from Woods Hole, on the abruptness of that
transition and on proximity to the continental slope,
and abyss. At the same time the Gulf of Maine, close
at hand, with its tributaries, offers a more promising
field for intensive investigations into the interaction be-
tween the physical-chemical and the biologic aspects of
oceanography than any other sector of comparable ex-
tent along the coast of America. This follows from the
fact that deep troughs, freely open to the ocean, en-
closed sinks, a varied coast-line, a wide range of depth
and offshore banks supporting some of the most pro-
ductive of sea fisheries can all be reached within a few
hours’ sail from Woods Hole, while the transition from
regions of extreme turbulence to waters more stable can
be followed within short distances. The thermal di-
versity (regional, bathymetric and seasonal) is also
wide, with temperatures ranging within a few miles of
Woods Hole, and at different seasons, from below the
freezing-point of fresh water to values almost tropical.
A wide variation in the fertility of the local waters for
pelagic plants is reflected by variations in the mass pro-
ductions of the latter, while the faunal associations (in-
cluding the planktonic) are equally diverse and abun-
dant.

In short, there is hardly an oceanographic problem
but can be hopefully attacked close to Woods Hole, un-
less primarily associated either with tropical shallows,
with Artic ice or with mid-oceanie conditions. The

northeastern coast of the Unted States with neighboring
parts of Canada is the most convenient headquarters
for studies in the last two of these fields combined, be-
cause of nearness on the one hand to the ice-laden
Labrador current (chief discharge of Arctic waters into
the Atlantic) and on the other to the open Atlantic
basin, with Bermuda in the offing as the possible site of
a future substation,

The preceding remarks introduce one of the most
important features of the institution’s program, namely,
that it expects to own and operate a seagoing ship, of
moderate size, with convenient living quarters, capable
of extended voyages and equipped to carry on investi-
gations at all depths in the various fields of sea science,
This is the more desirable because no other American
marine laboratory independent of governmental control
is at present in condition to do this. To make the most
of such facilities, it is planned to keep the laboratory
open with resident staff and the ship in commission the
year round.

Plans for the laboratory bulding, docks, ete., are now
being prepared and the institution hopes to open its
doors by the summer of 1931. Before that time the
trustees expect to announce in detail what facilities
can be offered and what initial program of research is
planned, based on the general purpose of offering every
opportunity (compatible with work on shipboard) for
participation by visiting oceanographers, whether from
America or from abroad. This implies field-investigations
in a variety of subjects, for which the offing of Woods
Hole is favorable for the reasons just stated. The most
essential activities of the institution may be expected
to center around the work at sea. In this connection it
must, accordingly, be recognized that the technical re-
quirement of oceanography (necessity for obtaining the
raw data for the major problems at sea) will confine
the projects that can be undertaken at any one time to
those that can be provided for simultaneously by the
station’s fleet. Consequently the activities, not only of
the staff but likewise of many of the visitors, must be
coordinated parts of a joint program. At the same time
the laboratory purposes to offer every hospitality to
individual workers who may elect to attack, independ-
ently, any problems the data for which can be obtained
from the pier or from small boats.

At present few opportunities are open for the student
of oceanography to gain experience in the technique of
his subject, and the first-hand intimacy with the sea
that he requires as a background for his detailed
studies. The institution therefore expects to offer to
university students instruction in oceanographic meth-
ods by participation both in the cruises and in the gen-
eral work of the laboratory.

To carry out: this part of the program, as well as to
make the facilities available to qualified investigators,
friendly and continuing relations with universities are
obviously essential. Equally essential will be a con-
stant endeavor to encourage the coordination of effort
between various scientific institutions of this and other
countries, that is especially needed in oceanography,
where the area to be covered is so vast and where so
many fields of science intertwine.

1Reprinted from Science, March 14, 1930, Vol. LXXI,
No. 1837, pages 277-278,

264

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No 40

PROTEIN SYNTHESIS

(Continued from page 257)

be broken down in the digestive tract into the con-
stituent amino acids by means of enzymes, and
these amino acids are built up in the body into
the infinite variety of proteins which are charac-
teristic of the various organs and tissues.

Now it is not difficult to conceive the possibility
of building up this immense variety of different
proteins from the 20 or so different amino acids
which are presented to it. But the mechanism by
which the differentiation is achieved is more dif-
ficult to imagine, and provides a fascinating field
for speculation. It is possible, of course, but im-
probable, that a specific enzyme performs each
synthesis. Experiments which I will describe this
evening provide at least a possible alternative.

The first part of the problem to be attacked was
of course the synthesis of protein from its de-
gradation products by means of enzymes. It was
then necessary to prove that a real synthesis had
been achieved. The investigation and control of
the conditions concerned in the synthesis was then
attempted, and finally the possibility was invest-
gated of producing from one substrate, with a
single enzyme, proteins of different composition.

Those of our own experiments to which I shall
refer were performed in collaboration chiefly with
Dr. H. Borsook, now of the California Institute
of Technology, and I shall always look back with
pleasure to the many pleasant hours we have spent
together in these investigations.

I should explain perhaps at the outset that we
have not been able to obtain synthesis from any-
thing less complicated than peptic digests of
various proteins although it is possible to obtain
synthesis from such substrates with several
enzymes. The experiments do not, therefore, re-
produce an actual biological synthetic process but
investigations into the mechanisms of peptic
synthesis and its control are at least very sugges-
tive as to the probable mechanism of the biological
synthesis.

First let me say a few words about the theore-
tical aspects of enzymic synthesis. In applying
the law of mass action to hydrolysis in general it

is usual to write A + H,0=>— = products
e. g. ester + H,0=— alcohol + acid
and the equilibrium equation in this case becomes

(alcohol) (acid) Ky

(ester) (water) Ke

In such a system it is necessary, in order to
obtain synthesis, to diminish the concentration of
water as far as possible, and it has been assumed
that the synthetic processes taking place in living
cells include a very efficient mechanism or
mechanisms for accomplishing this, such as sur-

face condensation or imbibition by colloids. In
our first experiments with protein synthesis
in vitro the attempt was made to produce such
surface condensation by means of the artificial
cells used by T. B. Robertson and E. Newton
Harvey. Robertson, you remember, used them
to illustrate the mechanics of cell division and
Harvey to demonstrate permeability. We were
not successful in obtaining synthesis by this means
alone, but we returned to a similar procedure
in later experiments, with interesting results which
I will try to describe towards the end of this
lecture.

To return to the question of concentration of
water. In the alcohol-acid-ester system the mole-
cular concentrations of water: and of the other
reacting components are of somewhat the same
order of magnitude, but in protein systems, at
least in vitro, the molecular concentration of water
even in very concentrated solutions, must be
enormously greater than that of the other react-
ing components; and if we had to consider con-
centrations in the same terms as for the alcohol-
acid-ester system it would be impossible to attain
syntheses im vitro because the relatively large
molecular concentration of water would always
send the reaction in the direction of hydrolysis.
This is one reason why, under ordinary conditions
of protein hydrolysis the reaction is always com-
plete, i. e. the equilibrium position appears to be,
unlike the ester system, at 100 per cent hydrolysis.

But in the hydrolysis of proteins and also, to
a lesser extent of fats, we have another factor,
which alters the picture and minimises the rela-
tive importance of the molecular concentration of
water. This factor is the formation from one
molecule of substrate, (i. e. of protein or fat) of
a number of molecules of hydrolysate, (i. e. of
amino acids or of glycerine and fatty acids as the -
case may be).

Hydrolyses of this type are in a special category
because the formation of many from one molecule
leads to other consequences which were, as far
as I know, first pointed out by Benjamin Moore.
I will very briefly review his suggestions.

Moore deduced on thermodynamical grounds
that the conditions of equilibrium for the
reaction A>~B may be expressed by the equation

Pe —= KP,
where P2 and P, are terms proportional to
the osmotic pressures of A and B respectively.

When, however, one molecule decomposes into
two, i. e. A>~2B as in the hydrolysis of an ester,
the equilibrium reaction may be expressed by the
equation

Pp, = PK,

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

265

No term is inserted for the water which takes
part in the reaction because its molar concentra-
tion remains practically constant.

For such simple reactions as A >= B the ratio
of the concentrations at equilibrium or A and B
is a constant, and is independent of the absolute
concentration, as the expression P2 = KP,
indicates, consequently dilution or concentration
of the system does not alter the proportions of the
components at equilibrium, but where one mole-
cule decomposes into more than one molecule the
equilibrium ratio is not constant and is not in-
dependent of the absolute concentrations. For
example, if in the equilibrium reaction P?,; =
KP, the concentration is doubled,

then P; becomes 2P,
and P*, becomes 2P?.
but since Ps is the 2V_ of the left hand term
Py becomes V2P2, or V2 X Po
i. e. while P; has been doubled in concentration
Py has been only increased V2 or 1.4 times,
so that under these conditions when the con-
centration of substrate is doubled the concentra-
tion of hydrolysate is less than doubled at equili-
brium. In other words the degree of hydrolysis
is less, or in still other words, the tendency to-
wards synthesis is greater. Conversely, on
dilution Pz decreases in less ratio than P,
i. e. the degree of hydrolysis increases. This
effect, in the case of substances like esters and
disaccharides is not very marked; it is more
marked in the case of simple fats where, since
the fat molecule decomposes into four molecules
the equilibrium reaction becomes
P4, = KP,

and it is of course very marked in the case of
proteins where the value of the exponent is much
higher.

The consequences of this relationship can be
briefly stated as follows: In reactions in which
one molecule is decomposed into a number of
molecules the position of the equilibrium point
depends on the absolute concentration of the solu-
tion. In concentrated solutions of such systems
these reactions are incomplete, i. e. there is a
tendency towards reversion or synthesis. In
dilute solutions these reactions tend to be com-
plete and irreversible, i. e. the tendency towards
hydrolysis is great.

These effects of concentration and dilution
apply with especial force in the case of proteins
and of polysaccharides. They are independent
of the effect of concentration on the molecular
concentration of the water itself. This, as we
have seen, cannot be practically reduced for pro-
teins in vitro to proportions which would drive
the reaction in the direction of synthesis, and
they have two consequences, first they enable us
to easily attain complete hydrolysis of proteins in
dilute solutions, and secondly they enable us to

attain synthesis with great ease in concentrated
solutions and eliminate the necessity for mechan-
isms to reduce the molecular concentration of
water to dimensions commensurate with the mole-
cular concentration of other components. Since
presumably the same considerations apply in vivo
we have no longer need to necessarily postulate
special biological mechanisms for effecting syn-
theses.

It can also be deduced on thermodynamical
grounds, as Moore pointed out, that an increase
in temperature should favour synthesis and a
decrease should favour hydrolysis. The method
for the synthesis of protein in a peptic digest of
protein is then very simple, it consists simply in
concentrating the digest, raising the temperature
and adding pepsin. The [H°] must also be con-
trolled. Synthesis begins immediately and equili-
brium is attained in a few hours. Under optimal
conditions a yield of 50 per cent of protein has
been obtained.

Since 1886, when the first synthesis of protein-
like material was carried out by Danilewski, many
workers have obtained synthesised protein. Saw-
jalow in 1901 gave to the protein precipitate the
name plastein, and most of these protein precipi-
tates have since been known by that name.

The first unequivocal proof that the precipitate
obtained is a synthetic product was furnished by
Henriques and Gjalbak in 1911, who demonstrated
that plastein formation is accompanied by a de-
crease in free amino nitrogen, i. e. the converse
of the common method of following protein
hydrolysis by estimating the increase in free
amino-nitrogen. We confirmed these results and
it can be shown that the free COOH groups also
decrease in a digest on plastein formation, and,
as Rona has shown, they exactly parallel the re-
duction in amino groups.

The plasteins may be hydrolysed by pepsin in
the same manner as native proteins and yield pro-
teoses and peptones. Plastein like native protein
is precipitated from its solution by trichloroacetic
acid which will not precipitate gelatin nor the
proteoses, so that its complexity must be of the
order of native protein. It gives, of course, all
the usual protein reactions. Perhaps the best
proof of synthesis is obtained from a fractional
analysis which we made of digests where different
amounts of plastein had been synthesised. All
fractions of the digest contribute to the formation
of plastein.

There is no doubt then that these plasteins re-
present synthesised protein-like material. Their
identity has been doubted by many because of
their apparent dissimilarity in physical properties
(in particular their insolubility) from the native
proteins or particularly from the proteins from
which the digest is prepared. As a matter of fact
their insolubility appears to be due to a denatura-

266

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

tion which results from the conditions in which
they are formed, and other soluble proteins, e. g.
albumin under similar conditions, i. e. in the
presence of a concentrated digest at the optimum
pH of 4.0, are rendered as insoluble as plastein.

We have then the first part of the simple pro-
blem completed. We have synthesised protein
and we have satisfied ourselves that the product
is indeed protein and that it is synthesised from
all the principal components, 1. e. the proteose,
peptone and sub-peptone constituents all contri-
bute to the rebuilding of a protein or protein-like
substance.

The next part of the problem is the investiga-
tion of the conditions under which the synthesis
is obtained. This has yielded results of the
greatest interest to us though I can only discuss
them very briefly in this lecture.

In studying the effects of concentration on
synthesis we found the following relations. We
found that the limiting concentration below which
no synthesis could be. made to occur corresponds
to the equivalent of about 8 per cent of protein.
Synthesis occurs at all concentrations greater than
8 per cent. With concentrations higher than
8 per cent there is a straight line relationship
between the amount of protein synthesised and
the concentration of material in solution, 1. e.
synthesis is in simple inverse proportion to the
dilution. At high concentrations, however, i. e.
at concentrations which correspond to more than
40 per cent of protein, there is a rapid falling off
until at still higher concentrations no synthesis
is obtained. We have no explanation for this
falling off, but a similar falling off was found by
Armstrong and Gosney in the enzymatic synthesis
of fats.

These results on the effect of concentration con-
firm Moore’s prediction that the important factor
in the enzymatic synthesis of proteins is the con-
centration of material in solution, and not the
relative concentration of water. That the same,
as he predicted, holds for hydrolysis can also be
shown, i. e. the tendency for hydrolysis diminishes
as the concentration of protein increases, and in
concentrated solutions of proteins hydrolysis is
incomplete no matter how much enzyme is used.

That we are dealing with true equilibria in these
reactions is shown by a study of the effect of the
addition of products in each case. Our experi-
ments show that if previously synthesised protein
is added to the system synthesis is inhibited to an
extent which is directly proportional to the
amount of added protein which also shows that
the plastein takes part in the equilibrium as if it
were in solution. Conversely it can be shown
that addition of products to a digest in which
hydrolysis of protein is going on inhibits hydro-
lysis to an extent proportional to the amount of
products added.

‘covered :

I mentioned earlier that Moore had deduced
on thermodynamical grounds that in reactions of
the type of protein synthesis and hydrolysis the
effect of temperature on the equilibrium position
is such that increase of temperature favours re-
versibility, i. e. increase in temperature favours
synthesis and decrease favours hydrolysis.

We were able to confirm this deduction by a
very striking experiment. A solution in which
hydrolysis was proceeding at a temperature be-
tween 20° - 24° was adjusted to the optimum pH
for synthesis. It was then divided into three
portions. One was maintained at 20° and showed
the further change in the direction of hydrolysis
to be expected under the circumstances. The
second portion was raised to 65°C. In ten min-
utes plastein began to form and in 30 minutes
considerable protein had been synthesised. A
third portion was boiled to destroy the enzyme and
then maintained at 65°C for 8 hours without the
occurrence of any change except the faint coagula-
tion produced on boiling.

In this experiment then we have a solution in
which hydrolysis is proceeding at 20°, and simply
by raising the temperature we are able to induce
synthesis. We find that the equilibrium amount
of protein synthesised increases with increasing
temperature up to 72° at which temperature the
the enzyme is destroyed, i. e. the effect of increase
of temperature is to move the equilibrium point
more and more over to the protein side.

So far I have made hardly any reference to
the effect of hydrogen ion concentration on peptic
synthesis, as you could guess it is a most import-
ant factor. Practically all the previous work on
protein synthesis was performed before the im-
portance of the [H*] in enzyme reactions had
been realized, and before methods for its exact
determination had been developed. The only de-
termination, that of Henriques and Gjaldbak, had
placed the optimum for synthesis with the opti-
mum for hydrolysis at a pH of 1.5. We determined
it many times to be at a much more alkaline re-
action, viz. pH 4.0. It has been shown by Oda
that this optimum holds regardless of the acid
employed, and that it is unaffected by the
presence of a great variety of salts.

We have tried to determine the mechanism by
which the [H°] controls the extent of peptic
synthesis. The following interesting fact was dis-
If we construct a curve, plotting the
yields obtained at different [H*], and plotting
the yields obtained as per cent with the yield at
the optimum pH as 100%, then the curve re-
sembles in form and in slope either the primary
dissociation curve of a dibasic acid or the undis-
sociated residue of an amphoteric electrolyte. It
seems probable from this resemblance, or cor-
respondence, because the correspondence is re-
markably exact, that the amount of protein

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

267

synthesised at any given [H°] is dependent on the
the degree of ionization of some component of
the system. It can hardly be the ionization of the
enzyme which is concerned because, as Northrop
has shown, pepsin exists as a monovalent anion
between pH 1 -7, and changes in pH within that
range do not affect the degree of dissociation. It
might be an effect on the autodestruction of the
enzyme, but at least within the range of pH 1 - 4
there is no autodestruction under the experi-
mental conditions. One can only suppose that
the result is to be interpreted as showing the
relation between synthesis and ionization of the
digest itself, but titration curves of the digest
show that the ionization of the digest as a whole is
not represented by the curve, and one is forced to
the conclusion that since there is this remarkable
correspondence between the experimental values
and a theoretical dissociation curve, and we have
ruled out other possibilities, that the protein
synthesised at any given Cx, is dependent on the
degree of ionization of one component of the
digest or rather of the substrate.

Another respect in which peptic synthesis be-
haves rather differently from other enzyme re-
actions is in the effect of varying enzyme concen-
tration on the equilibrium position. It has been
found by other observers, and we confirmed it,
that the equilibrium amounts of protein synthesis-
ed are increased with increasing amounts of pep-
sin. This is, of course, an exception to the
general law of enzyme action and catalysis, which
always assumes that the equilibrium position is
not affected by the concentration of the enzyme.
The explanation of this effect of varying con-
centrations of enzyme is suggested by another
series of experiments which we carried out on the
effect on peptic synthesis of the presence of emul-
sions in the system. These are the experiments I
referred to earlier as resembling the experiments
where the substrate was concentrated at the sur-
face of artificial cells. We found that certain emul-
sions, such as those formed when chloroform,
benzene, benzaldehyde, etc., are shaken up with
the digest, accelerated the attainment of equili-
brium. Moreover, as the table shows, in the
presence of some emulsions, benzene, toluene,
benzoic acid and benzaldehyde, synthesis is effect-
ed even in the absence of enzyme.

Now we may consider that pepsin being a colloid
or in colloidal association owes its action, in part
at least, to properties resembling those possessed
by these emulsifying agents. This action occurs
by virtue of the presence of the interphase sur-
face. The action of emulsifying agents further
resembles that of pepsin in that increasing
amounts, under certain conditions, also augment
the yield of protein synthesised at equilibrium, and

this effect of concentration of enzyme or emulsi-
fying agent, on the equilibrium is consistent with
thermodynamical conceptions because the addition
of an emulsifying agent means an increase in the
interphase surface, and this increase in surface
means in turn an increase in surface energy to the
system, because of the increased amount of sur-
face energy available, so that increasing the con-
centration of pepsin should have the same effect
as that obtained when energy in any other form
is added to the system, as for example by in-
creasing temperature. We have already seen that
increasing the temperature up to the limit of des-
truction of the enzyme has a similar effect. On
this basis then we can explain the departure from
the classical conception that the concentration of
enzyme should have no effect on the amount
synthesised at equilibrium.

But there is another point of similarity in the
action of pepsin and of emulsions. T. B. Robert-
son, in 1926, discussed the possibility that con-
centration of the reactive groups of amino acids,
by orientation at lipoid surfaces, might account
for the completeness of enzymatic surfaces in
living tissues. As we have just seen in certain
cases synthesis can be affected even without
enzyme by the emulsifying agent alone if it is an
accelerator of synthesis. Some of these emulsi-
fying agents, e. g. benzene and toluol are chemi-
cally inert compounds, and can hardly enter into
chemical combinations with digest constituents,
and they are readily separable again from the
synthesised protein. Their effect is almost cer-
tainly due to a specific orientation of the compon-
ents of the digest which participate in the
synthesis. That this action is specific is shown
by the fact that the chemical and physical proper-
ties of the proteins synthesised vary with the
means employed in synthesis. The base combining
properties, the ratios of free amino and free car-
boxyl groups to total nitrogen, the hydrolysability
by pepsin, all show marked differences which are
reproducible.

The solubilities also show very marked dif-
ferences, e. g., proteins synthesised by pepsin with
or without benzaldehyde are soluble only at alka-
linities greater than pH 7.7, at 7.6 the proteins
are precipitated almost completely.

Proteins synthesised in the absence of pepsin
with benzaldehyde are not precipitated until the
reaction reaches pH 6.0, and the benzene protein
is not precipitated until the pH reaches 5.0, At
more acid reactions these proteins are also com-
pletely precipitated.

These results indicate that, presumably through
variations in the orientation of the participating
components of the digest, proteins of different
chemical composition are synthesised. They sug-

268

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

gest also a possible explanation for the specificity
of the action of the enzymes themselves.

We have been able to work out other interesting
suggestions from studies of the conditions of
peptic synthesis, but time will not permit me to
discuss these results.

It is unfortunate that we have had very little
success with protein synthesis from digests less
complex than peptic digests, but we still hope to
obtain synthesis from simpler substrates, and are
continuing our studies.

Peptic synthesis therefore is at best only a

possible model of the biological synthesis of
proteins, but it provides many interesting sug-
gestions as to the mechanism of the biological
process, and not the least important of these is
the last discussed. The suggestion that specific
orientation on the colloidal interphases provided
by the proteolytic enzymes and their associated
colloids may best account for the ability of the
organism to sytithesise its many varieties or pro-
teins from a common substrate.

(The Reynold A. Spaeth Memorial Lecture presented
at the Marine Biological Laboratory on August 19).

THE LIFE HISTORY OF CRYPTOCOTYLE LINGUA (CREPLIN) WITH NOTES ON THE
PHYSIOLOGY OF THE METACERCARIAE 1
Dr. Horace W. STUNKARD
Professor of Biology, New York University

The various stages in the life history of
Cryptocotyle lingua were identified and described.
Adults live in the intestine of fish eating birds
The development of the miraci-
dium was followed with the egg. Larval stages

occur in the marine snail Littorina littorea. The
structure of the redia and cercaria was described
in detail and evidence submitted to show that the
cercaria is identical with C. lophocerca Lebour
described from the same snail on the British
coast. Penetration and encystment of the cercaria

and mammals.

in the skin of the cunner was experimentally
secured. Excystment of the metacercaria was
obtained both in experimental animals and in
vitro. The metacercariae were maintained in
artificial media for as long a time as is required
for them to attain sexual maturity in the find host.
The host relations and specificity of the parasite
was discussed on the basis of infection experi-
ments. The carcaria was compared with similar
larvae and its taxonomic position determined.

1An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 8.

REVIEW OF THE SEMINAR REPORT OF DR. STUNKARD —
Dr. Epwin Linton
University of Pennsylvania

Of the thousands of species of trematodes
whose sexually mature stages have been described,
the life histories of but few are known. In spite
of the painstaking and prolific work of Court,
Faust, Miller and others of recent years, the list

of described species is increasing more rapidly
than is the list of completed life histories. And,
in view of the investigations of such industrious
workers as Manter, for example, brought to my
attention through correspondence, the list of sex-
ually mature species of trematodes, in this
country, at least, will have many additions in the
near future, while the life histories must, of neces-
sity, be wrought out slowly and with much travail.

And here, suggested to me by the contribution
which I have been asked to review, is a hint to
heads of departments of biology in our universi-
ties, when they are casting about for theses for
prospective candidates for the degree of doctor of
philosophy. Incidentally I may be permitted to
say that the only remark in the way of criticism
that I have to make, after reading Professor
Stunkard’s admirable paper, is to chide him for
having deprived some embryo Ph. D. of a rarely
attractive thesis. As it is, this illuminating’ paper

takes its place beside Tennent’s Study of the Life
History of Bucephalus haimeanus as a model of
contributions to knowledge.

While I am in the way of giving advice I may
offer the suggestion to compilers of text-books of
zoology that in this contribution to the life history
of Cryptocotyle lingua they will find a substitute
for the much used life history of the liver fluke,
or at least a parallel to that nearly half century
old revelation of nature’s workings. The finely
executed drawings which accompany the paper
will serve admirably as text-book illustrations.
It might also be hinted, for the benefit of timid
publishers, that a synopsis of the methods which
nature has devised to preserve this parasite by
providing the cercaria with an elaborate equip-
ment in the way of specially adapted mechanisms
for swimming, sapping and mining, including
specialized glands for secreting fluid to dissolve
the tissues of the host which it is entering, and a
hereditary toughness which preserves it indefinite-
ly in the encysted stage, can be included legally
in a text-book that is to be used in Tennessee
or Arkansas, even if it might prove to be pro-
vocative of independent thinking, and devastating
to preconceived theory.

Aucust 30, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET

269

When one contemplates the many evidences of
loving solicitude on the part of nature in endowing
with rich gifts what, in the view of snail, fish,
bird and mammal, must be looked upon as a veri-
table cumberer of the earth, contributing nothing
to the common food supply, which, even, when
eaten, does not die, but rises again to a new phase
of being, it is difficult to avoid a certain feeling of
pessimistic apprehension that all may not be well
with the scheme of things. Confidence, however,
in nature’s care for all her children is, in some
measure at least, restored when one reads the
assuring words of Professor Stunkard, following
certain observation of Stoll: “The develop-
ment of protective and self-curative mechanism
against helminths is a reaction of as common
occurrence as immunity to bacterial infection.”

It is gratifying to the reviewer to see that Pro-
fessor Stunkard regards this distome as identical
with the European species, and especially so to
find his own view expressed in the suggestion that
the distome was introduced in this country with
the snail Littorina littorio. So far as is yet known
Cryptocotyle lingua has not found a single native
species of snail that is hospitable to the cercaria
stage, while its encystment in fishes is, in large
measure, limited only by varying accessibility.

Although most abundant on the skin and fins of
the cunner and tautog, I have records of its being
numerous on the skin and fins of the cod, tomcod,
butterfish and two species of flounder, and from
few to many on twelve other species of fish in the
Woods Hole region. Even a fish with such roving
habits as the mackerel does not escape the lodge-
ment of this parasite in its skin. For example,
out of 78 mackerel examined on ten different
dates, 20 had a few cysts and 4 had many cysts
on the skin and fins. The sexually mature stage
is also adaptable to different avian hosts, since it
occurs in great numbers in different species of
gulls and terns, and in great abundance in the
loon. To this list of final hosts must now be
added mammals belonging to at least two distinct
orders.

The cercaria of C. lingua have been found thus
far only in the snail L. littoria. When I first
visited Woods Hole, in the summer of 1882,
L. littoria was fairly common, but not abundant,
while two of the native species, L. palliata and
L. rudis, were very abundant. These native
species are still to be found, but I believe, no
longer abound. It would be interesting to know
if they, along with all other native snails, are im-
mune to C. lingua.

A MUTATION OF CHILODON UNCINATUS PRODUCED BY ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION 1
Dr. Mary Stuart MAcDouGALi
Professor of Biology, Agnes Scott College

This mutation appeared in a culture of Chilodon
uncinatus which had had three exposures to ultra-
violet rays,—one of thirty seconds, and two of
fifteen seconds each. A Hanovia Lamp, Universal
Model, was used.

The new organism has certain very definite
differences from Chilodon uncinatus. The shape
of the body is distinctly different, and it has a
posterior prolongation of the convex dorsal por-
tion of the body, resembling somewhat a form
described by Stokes as Chilodon caudatum.
Stokes’ description is brief, and does not seem to
fit this case. In the Columbia Laboratory this
spring, a form was found in cultures brought from
the Botanical Gardens in New York which seems
to resemble this mutation closely. However, a
critical study of the morphological features was
not made, and the writer has not had an oppor-
tunity to examine it. The ciliation has undergone
a change, there being an extra row on the left side
of the animal (ventral surface up), and there is
only one row of cilia leading to the mouth. The
normals in the culture from which this animal
came have two rows of cilia leading to the mouth.
Klein figures only one in his study of the ciliation
of Chilodon uncinatus. I had seen only one row
until Klein’s technique was demonstrated to me
by Dr, Chatton this summer, It may be that there

is some variation in the normal form in this
respect. The movement of the animal is quite
characteristic, being much more rapid than that
of C. uncinatus.

Four chromosomes are present, which is the
same number the normal animal has. The re-
duced number of two is easily seen during the
exchange of nuclei. In division, the tail can be
seen before the animals separate. It is not, how-
ever, the last point to separate, and it grows as
the animal grows, becoming much larger as the
animal matures. During the conjugation period,
it does not degenerate and reform at the same time
the other organelles do, but at a late stage of the
reorganization of the exconjugant. It is most
prominent in the exconjugant. :

Behavior. Several of the larger animals with
conspicuous tails were isolated, and allowed to
multiply. Conjugation occurred in one of the
cultures at the end of the second week. An
especially large exconjugant was noticed, so it
was isolated, and kept in isolation cultures for
twenty generations, after which this line was
maintained in mass cultures, sub-cultures being
made when necessary. At the first three conjuga-
tion epidemics, six pairs of conjugants were
isolated and their history followed until the next
conjugation epidemic. To this date, Aug, 19,

270

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

1930, there has never been any sign of reversion
in this line, and there have been twenty conjuga-
tion epidemics in all. It appears that this line is
homozygous.

The original mass culture was kept running
along without any especial attention for several
months except for making sub-cultures. In April,
after a conjugation epidemic, it was noticed that
there were a few normals in the culture. That
seemed to indicate one of two things,—that there
had been a reversion to normal, or that the culture
had been contaminated. To test this out, fifty
pairs were isolated, and the history of the excon-
jugants followed. Three of the fifty pairs gave
only normals. This summer, three out of twenty-
five pairs isolated from the same stock have given
only normals, making five in all out of seventy-
five pairs. The normals obtained in this manner
have never shown any sign of an appendage. It
should be borne in mind that in the early part of
the work, the largest animals having the most
conspicuous tails were selected out, and if it be
that these were of the homozygous stock mostly,
which seems probable, it might account for the
small ratios. Much more work will have to be
done with this stock before it can be adequately
tested.

The animals are hard to handle without injury
on account of the smallness of the individuals,

their habit of sticking tight to the bottom of the
dish when an attempt is made to pick them up
with a pipette, and the fact that they sometimes
stick inside the pipette. Seemingly contradictory
results have not been obtained since sterilizing the
pipettes before and after each isolation.

Although pure lines of the normal and tailed
organisms have been kept constantly in the same
dish, only two pairs of the tailed form conjugating
with the normals have been found. Both normal
exconjugants were accidentally killed, and one of
the tailed exconjugants died, probably due to
injury. The other tailed animal was not vigorous
but lived. multiplied and conjugated. Only fifteen
pairs of conjugants were obtained, but their his-
tory was studied before the stock died out. Three
of the fifteen pairs gave normals, and twelve the
tailed form. The ciliation has not been studied
completely enough to state definitely whether all
the reversions are normal in this respect. Some
of them certainly are.

The data is insufficient to justify a discussion
of the theoretical considerations suggested, but
since one line after twenty conjugations remains
unchanged, and a limited number of reversions
have occurred in other lines, the work seems
promising.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 15.

FURTHER STUDIES ON THE EFFECTS OF QUININE AND PLASMOCHIN ON THE
AVIAN MALARIAS 1
Dr. Recrnatp D. MANWELL
Assistant Professor of Zoology, Syracuse University

The action of anti-malarial drugs has been a
subject of study for many years, and for labor-
atory research in this field canaries infected with
bird malaria have usually been employed, since
it has so far been impossible to transmit human
malaria to any experimental animal. Most of the
work done in the past has been on a single species
of parasite—Plasmodium praecox. The present
investigation has dealt with the effect of quinine
and plasmochin on this species and two others—
Plasmodium cathemerium and Plasmodium
clongatum, and as experimental animals female
canaries have been used as by previous investiga-
tors. In all, 106 birds have been treated and 54
have served as controls. Twenty of these cases
were treated for two months, but in all the others
the drugs were administered for two weeks only.
Fifty-two of the 106 cases received quinine and
the other 54 plasmochin. All treatment was oral.

The results may be briefly summarised as
follows:

The effect of quinine and plasmochin varies
greatly according to the species of parasite. The
three types of avian malaria may be arranged in

the following order, the most susceptible being at
the head of the list:

Quinine Plasmochin
1, Plasmodium praecox 1. Plasmodium elongatum
2. Plasmodium cathemerium 2. Plasmodium praecox
3. Plasmodium elongatum 3. Plasmodium cathemerium
Plasmodium elongatum, which differs very much
from the other two species morphologically, is
also much different from them in its response to
treatment. It is less susceptible to the action of —
quinine and far more so to plasmochin. Such
differences as there are between praecox and
cathemerium, although they are certainly real, are
very much less marked, particularly in the case of
quinine. Probably the susceptibility of elongatum
to plasmochin is correlated with the fact that this
species segments chiefly in the bone marrow, on
which tissue plasmochin (in canaries at least)
seems to exert a specific action.

No indication has been found of any selective
action on the part of either drug toward the
gametocytes. This was something of a surprise
since it has been claimed that the gametocytes of
avian malaria are particularly resistant to quinine,

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

and this seems also to be a fact in the human
malarias. One of the great advantages of plas-
mochin over quinine is the ability of the former
to destroy the crescents of Plasmodium falci-
parum. Whenever parasites are observed in the
blood of birds under treatment however I have
found them to be, practically without exception,
young trophozoites or (less often) larger asexual
stages.

The time in the infection at which treatment is
begun seems to be important, and this is of course
only what might be expected. Still it is rather
surprising to find that, except in the case of
Plasmodium elongatum, all cases of sterilization
occurred in series treated during the incubation
period. There is a single other exception, it is
true, but this was a bird which was treated for
two months with plasmochin. In general it may
be said that the longer treatment is continued the
less severe subsequent relapse is likely to be, and
this fact has been noted by previous investigators.

From what has already been said it is evident
that sterilization is possible, at least in the case of
Plasmodium elongatum and Plasmodium praecox.
It is very difficult indeed to attain it with quinine
however, even when treatment is continued for a
long period (as it is under the Bass system of
treatment for human malaria), and so far I have
not been successful in obtaining complete recovery
in the case of Plasmodium praecox infection ex-
cept when treatment was started during the
incubation period. With plasmochin it seems to
be possible to secure sterilization in every case of
infection with Plasmodium elongatum, whether
treatment is started during the incubation period
or postponed until parasites are evident in the
blood. This is perhaps the most interesting
result of the entire study, for the number of
diseases in which such a result can be regularly
obtained (if helminth infections are excluded) is
very, very small. For this particular disease then,
plasmochin appears to fulfill Ehrlich’s ideal of a
“magna therapia sterilisans’”. Plasmochin seems
also to be fairly effective against Plasmodium
praecox, as far as securing sterilization is con-
cerned, but only when treatment is begun early.
Sterilization has so far not been obtained in any
case of infection with Plasmodium cathemerium,
either in the present study or in work previously
reported by the present author, although a total of
40 birds infected with this parasite has been
treated with plasmochin and 28 with quinine.
Such marked differences between the avian mala-
rias in their response to drug therapy suggest
that in the future experimentation should be car-
ried out against all the species of plasmodia
available, for obviously it is unsafe to predict
from experience with one what that with others
would be.

THE COLLECTING NET

271

Freedom from relapse appears to be an almost
certain indication of sterilization, except in the
case of infection with Plasmodium cathemerium.
In this species relapse is particularly infrequent
mm untreated infections, as I was able to show
in work previously reported.

Moldovan showed a number of years ago that
birds which recovered naturally were as suscep-
tible to reinfection as if they had never had the
disease, although he had few cases, and a very
few other cases of complete recovery, with sub-
sequent reinfection, have been reported since.
With most diseases produced by animal parasites
(the spirochaetes being included in this class)
immunity appears to depend on the actual presence
of the parasites. It might therefore be expected
that when complete recovery has been brought
about by drug therapy reinfection would be as
easily possible as if there had never been original
infection, and this has in fact been found to be
the case. In all, sterilization has been secured in
23 cases, and in 18 of these reinfection has been
produced. The other 5 died before this could
be tried. It may also be remarked that this is
the first time complete recovery from infection
with Plasmodium elongatum has been reported.

The question of just how much quinine and
plasmochin differ in relative efficacy is hard to
settle. Roehl (1926) claimed that the latter was
60 times as effective as the former in treating bird
malaria, but he was probably working with
Plasmodium praecox infections. And it must be
remembered that it is about 6 times as toxic to
the host. The results obtained in the present
work seem to prove that plasmochin is perhaps
more than 60 times as effective as quinine against

Plasmodium elongatwin, considerably less so
against Plasmodium praecox and much less

superior to quinine when used in infections of
Plasmodium cathemerium. With all strains plas-
mochin is able to reduce the parasite level to a
subpatent figure more rapidly than quinine. In
this connection an interesting fact was demon-
strated with the birds undergoing long-term
treatment. Subinoculation after a month’s treat-
ment from all the birds in this series gave only
one infection in the case of the plasmochin-
treated birds but was successful for all birds
receiving quinine. This means that although
neither drug was able to kill all the parasites
plasmochin reduced their numbers to a much
lower level than did quinine.

The effect of treatment upon subsequent re-
lapse has already been touched upon. In general
it appears to have little effect on the frequency of
relapse, except as it produces sterilization, but it
certainly reduces their severity.

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labor-
atory on August 15,

272

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

THE ASYMMETRICAL MOTILE STAGE OF AN EPISTYLIS AND THE QUESTION OF
THE SO-CALLED LONGITUDINAL DIVISION OF THE PERITRICHOUS INFUSORIA!
Dr. EpouArp CHATTON
Professor of Biology, University of Strasbourg

Everyone knows that the ciliated Infusoria are
distinguished from the Flagellates by their trans-
verse division, but that in a very important group
of ciliates, namely the Peritrichidae, the division
is longitudinal. The best known of this group
are the Vorticellidae.

A Vorticella is attached by a contractile pedicle
to the substratum. This pedicle is secreted by a
glandular area called scopula by Faure-Fremiet.
The motile stage is conical or cylindrical and
swims with its scopula ahead.

In the colonial forms with a contractile pedicle
like Carchesium and Zoothamnium, the motile
stages with which I am familiar are not cylindrical
but are very flat and discoidal. However, they
swim in the same way turning on their axis with
their scopula ahead.

The genus Epistylis involves species which are
also colonial but the pedicle is simpler, and it is
not contractile because it lacks myonemes. I
expected the motile stage of this genus to be
similar to those of Vorticella, Carchesium and
Zoothamnium. But, studying for another purpose
the moults of barnacles in Woods Hole I was
surprised to see on them a very curious ciliate,
which was quite flat like a Chilodon. As in this
ciliate the horizontal axis is elongated; one
extremity rather pointed, the other one round;
one side rather straight, the other one curved.
It is, therefore, doubly asymmetrical. Its ventral
face bears a complete ciliated ring in a deep fur-
row and a quite eccentric scopula. On the middle
of the dorsal face is the opening of an invaginated
peristome. These three characters, peristome,
ring and scopula, made me realize that this form
belonged to the Peritrichidae. Besides, I had no
difficulty in tracing its origin. I saw the forma-
tion of these motile stages in the colonies of
Epistylis attached to the moult.

Thus I found all of the stages from the normal
conical E pistylis up to the flat asymmetrical motile
stage. It is interesting to notice that the attached
Epistylis has a perfect longitudinal symmetry but

that the asymmetry is realized very early in the
metamorphosis by the formation of a big lobe
on one side of the scopula.

When free the flattened motile stage swims wit
its pointed end forward turning on its longitudinal
axis. On the substratum it moves with its ventral
face downward and with the acute pole ahead.

It would be highly interesting to see such a
motile stage dividing, but I never was able to
observe this phenomenon. The division seems to
occur only in the attached forms, according to
the normal longitudinal process.

We see that the definition of the direction of
the cleavage depends upon the stage which is con-
sidered. If we consider the attached individual
this cleavage must be called longitudinal but if
we consider the motile it must be called trans-
verse. Which stage must we consider in order to
define the direction of the division? I think that
if it can be established that the motile stage is
a more primitive type than the attached stage,
then it is according to this one that we must base
the definition of the direction of the division. Its
similarity to the normal type of Ciliates makes
me think that its morphology is indeed a primitive
one. We have also to remember that in regard
to the constitution of the pedicle Epistylis is
simpler than Vorticella, Carchesium or Zootham-
nium. But the asymmetry of the motile stage of
Epistylis may be a secondary adaptative symmetry,
like, for instance, that of many deep-sea Holo-
thurians. This question will be settled only by
an extensive study of the motile stages of the
Peritrichidae. If it is shown that all the motile —
stages of Epistylis are asymmetrical we will not
escape the conclusion that this asymmetry has a
phylogenetical significance.

As one sees, it is the whole question of the
origin of the Peritrichidae which is reopened
here. This question has been discussed already,
chiefly by Butschli, in a quite hypothetical way.
The present observations give a new and objective
basis for this discussion.

A CINE-PHOTOMICROGRAPH APPARATUS
Dr. RutH B. HowLanp
Associate Professor of Biology, Washington Square College, New York University

A cinematographic outfit, owned by Washing-
ton Square College, has been in use in the labor-
atory during the summer for recording experi-
mental processes concerned with various research
problems, and for the making of teaching films
for classes in Invertebrate Zoology and Embry-
ology.

It consists of a Debrie studio camera, mounted

for use with a microscope. The usual demonstra-
tion ocular attachment makes it possible for the
operator to keep the material being photographed
under continuous observation, with a sacrifice of
only one fifth of the total amount of light used.
A chronometer with hour, minute and second

1Summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on August 15.

Aucust 30, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING

NET 273

hands may be attached and photographed on the
corner of each successive frame, and a specially
arranged revolving disc serves as a spacer for
accurate time interval exposures. Cine-photo-
graphs may be taken satisfactorily at a speed of
fifty per second. The entire equipment is mount-
ed on springs to minimize vibration. In addition
to the photographic outfit, and serving as a neces-
sary adjunct, is a Moviola, or editing machine, by
means of which negatives are examined before
printing, and positives run as “‘slow-motions” for
close study.

The camera was purchased primarily for use
as a research instrument. It offers several unique
advantages, both in the study and in the presenta-
tion of research problems. First, it contributes a
means of making a permanent and accurate record
of protoplasmic changes occuring so rapidly that
the eye cannot detect the various steps in their
progress. Each separate stage may then be
critically observed at leisure. Use of film-strips
in studies concerned with phenomena exhibited
during electrical stimulation, and with reactions
on immersion in chemical media have already
confirmed the value of this method.

A second advantage offered by film records of
experiments, lies in the possibilities for accurate
measurement of changes in size or volume of
objects in relation to time. For such a study, the
chronometer attachment may be used if the time
occupied is long; or, over brief intervals, there

may be substituted the method of computing the
time on the basis of the speed at which the film
is exposed. Such film-records may then be sub-
jected to mathematical analysis.

The use of film-records also minimizes to a
great degree the personal equation necessarily in-
volved in interpretation of data. In lieu of ob-
servations made by any single observer, actual
demonstrations of experiments may be brought
pictorially before large groups for their individual
interpretation. ;

Special research methods, as, for example, the
micromanipulative technique, may be _ briefly
demonstrated to classes or large audiences by
means of a previously condensed and adequatedly
captioned film series. Such a film-strip, present-
ing the application of the microinjection method to
the study of vacuolated protoplasm was shown by
the writer on a recent program.

The cine-camera will serve a _ secondary
function in the making of teaching films featuring
material not easily available for classes, or avail-
able only in the preserved state. A library of
films of the marine forms obtainable in Woods
Hole has already been started during the present
summer. About four thousand feet of film
featuring the marine and fresh water Protozoa
of the Woods Hole region is now ready for pro-
jection. Films showing fertilization and early
cleavage stages in Echinoderm eggs are also in
preparation.

THE NEUTRALIZATION OF THE EFFECTS OF DEFICIENCIES THROUGH DUPLICATIONS
OF THE SAME CHROMOSOME MATERIALS 1
Dr. Catvin B. BripGES
Carnegie Institution of Washington

The term “deficiency” is the name of a hypo-
thesis invented in 1914 to account for the first
case of what has now become a well-recognized
type of hereditary behavior. In each case a large
number of diversified effects and properties can
be accounted for on the simple assumption that a
small section of a string of genes has been lost
from its chromosome. In the case of Minute -1,
the character effects include minute bristles, slow
development and female sterility. These and other
somatic changes are inherited together as a
dominant, which gives only 80% viability in
heterozygous form and is completely lethal in
homozygous form. The locus is in the right end
of the second chromosome, where all crossing
over is removed from a small section including
the recessives arc and plexus, while crossing over
in the regions near this is lowered. The hybrids
between MI and the included recessives arc and
plexus show both pseudo-dominance and exaggera-
tion of are and plexus in the MI flies. The pseudo-
dominance of are and plexus is accounted for by
the loss of their dominant wild-type allelomorphs,
which were contained in the section removed.

The minute bristles, female sterility and other
somatic effects are due to the loss of the other
genes in this same piece. This loss allows the
remainder of the genes to work in a different sit-
uation to produce different effects. In the
homozygous form the genes of this section are
not represented in either homologous chromo-
some and the remaining genes are thrown still
more off the normal balance and produce more
extreme aberrations in development, leading to
death.

A second Minute, MI?, which was found and
investigated by Dr. Shultz differs from the first
by having normal viability and female fertility,
and by showing no special relation to are and
plexus. The linkage shows that in this case the
deficiency lies just to the right of plexus but over-
laps the deficiency Ml. The characters in com-
mon, e. g. the short bristles, are due to the loss,
by both of the genes of the section of overlap.
The female sterility, present in M1 but not in MI’,
is due to the loss of genes in the left part of the

1A paper presented at the Marine Biological Labor-
atory on August 22,

274

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vot. V. No. 40

section lost in Ml.

In Plexate deficiency, the chief somatic change
is a stronger and more complex venation. The
locus extends from between morula and speck to
the right end of the chromosome. In this section,
and giving pseudo-dominance with Px, are the
recessives speck, olive, blistered, and balloon.
Also a recessive lethal lies there, and the death of
the Plexate-lethal hybrid is presumably because
Px can not contribute the normal allelomorph to
save its life.

A second category of cases, that present
features in many respects the opposite of the
features of the deficiency cases, is accounted for
by the hypothesis of “duplication”, namely, the
presence in the cell of an extra section of a string
of genes. If a fly carries an extra section, then
it can be homozygous for any recessive whose
locus lies in the region represented by the dupli-
cation and yet the recessive character can not
develop because of the dominant action of the
wild-type allelomorph in the extra section.

The most useful duplication is that derived
from “Pale-translocation”, which is the trans-
ference of the right end of the second chromo-
some to an attachment on the third chromosome.
The loss from the second chromosome, symbolized
by PII, extends from just to the right of arc to
the right end of the chromosome. The duplicat-
ing fragment, PIII, is apparently not quite as
long, extending from just to the left of plexus
to the end of the chromosome. Thus, the fly
carrying both the deficiency and the duplication
(PII/+, PIII/+) has a pale eye color, since the
shorter PIII can not supply all the genes lost by
PII. Also, the homozygous type should lack these
genes entirely and hence perish, which it does.
By outcrossing to normal flies, individuals with
PII but without PIII are expected, but are found
to perish, presumably because the character
changes due to the loss of the many genes of this
long section are too great for viability. PIII
without PII gives shorter, blunter wings and
vitality lowered to 80%.

If the interpretation of these cases is correct,
the duplication PIII should contain all the genes
lost by the deficiencies Pelxate and M1?, and, the
genes in the deficiencies PII and M1, of all except
the small parts that extend to the left of the
section covered by PIII. The addition of PIII
to a fly having Px should therefore entirely neu-
tralize the Px effects by restoring the genes on
whose loss the Px effects are supposed to depend.
This complete neutralization was found to occur
in the Px/+, PIII individual. But reciprocally,
the Px deficiency removes part of the excess
genes on which the PIII characters depend, and
hence Px neutralizes to that extent the PIII ef-
fects. This fly shows no Px characters, is fully

viable and the wings are not blunt. Homozygous
Px dies, but Px/Px, PIII lives and is Plexate.
As in the previous case the one PIII is partly
neutralized by one Px and this Px is reciprocally
entirely neutralized by the PIII, but there is no-
thing to supply the genes lost with the other Px,
and hence its effects develop fully. A fly carry-
ing a PIII attached to each third chromosome is
lethal ; for a long section of genes are represented
four times in the cell, while the other genes are
represented only twice. This unbalanced action
from excess genes can be reduced by inserting
PII. The PII/+, PIII/ PIII fly shows the pale
eye color, from the small part of the PII defi-
ciency that PIII is unable to cover, and shows the
blunt wings and 80% viability due to the complete
neutralization of one PIII and the excess action
of the other. Plexate is a shorter deficiency than
PII, and Px/Px only partly neutralizes the effect
of PIII/PIII. This fly shows no Px characters,
but shows some PIII features emphasized, for the
fly is now a homozygous duplication for the part
of PIII not lost in the Px deficiency. In the
Px/+, PIII/PIII type the viability is reduced to
25% normal; for one Px can neutralize only part
of one PIII. But the PII/Px, PIII/PIII type
has a nearly complete restoration of the wild-type
properties since PII with one PIII gives neutrali-
zation complete except for the pale eye color, and
the Px and other PIII give no Px features and
only slight PIII features. In other words, the
qualitative restoration is great in that Px supplies
the extreme left end, lacked by both PII and PIII,
while the extreme right end, lost by both PII and
Px, is restored by the two PHI duplications.

Similar neutralizations were found by combin-
ing PII and PIII with M1 and MI? in various
ways. In the MI/+, PIII form, PIII completely
supplies the genes whose loss gave rise to the
small bristles, the low viability, etc., but does not
neutralize the female sterility, since that depends
on genes lost with the left part of the MI sections,
and PIII does not extend so far to the left as Ml.
The Ml are, PIII form shows no MI features
except female sterility, while the are shows and
is exaggerated; for PIII does not cover are nor
the exaggerators of arc. MI/+, PIII/P III lives
in about ten per cent. of cases with prominent
PIII features. As we saw Px/+ PIII/PIII lives
in about twenty-five per cent. of cases, with
prominent PIII features. But M1 Px, PIII/PII1
lives very well, with slight PIII features, no Px
features and only female sterility as MI features.
This fly offers a very striking example of two
independent deficiencies, representing the loss of
different sections, which give reciprocal neutrali-
zation with one duplication that completely covers
one and nearly covers the other. The duplication
makes good the losses of genes due to the other
two aberrations,

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

A PECULIAR SEX-RATIO IN DROSOPHILA OBSCURA |

Dye. JA, 1eI.

STURTEVANT

Professor of Genetics, California Institute of Technology

A sex-linked gene in a California strain of
Drosophila obscura affects the sex-ratio in such
a way that any male carrying the gene in his X-
chromosome produces many more daughters than
sons, regardless of the nature of the females to
which he is mated. The daughters always have
two X-chromosomes and the sons have one, just
as in normal cultures. The unusual sex-ratio
cannot be accounted for by supposing that many
males die, for there is no unusually heavy mortal-
ity in sex-ratio cultures. A cytological study of
the spermatogenesis of sex-ratio males has shown
nothing abnormal. The mechanism at work

remains uncertain.

The sex-ratio gene has persisted in a wild
population in the California canyons for at least
a year, and what appears to be the same thing has
also been found in wild stocks of two related
species—D. affinis of the eastern United States,
and a Russian species studied by Gershenson.
These occurrences become significant when it is
realized, following Gershenson’s analysis, that
the sex-ratio gene will automatically increase in
frequency in a wild population, until such increase
is checked by the unfavorable effects of a shortage
of males.

CROSSING OVER IN TRIPLOID DROSOPHILAS !
Dr. HELEN REDFIELD
Carnegie Institution of Washington

Crossover values in Drosophila are markedly
different in the triploid and in the diploid, and
the type of difference depends upon the particular
chromosome region involved. At the left end of
the X chromosome crossing over is twice as great
in the triploid as in the diploid, and at the right
end it is one-half as great (Bridges and Anderson
1925). For thé third chromosome crossing over
at either end is slightly more than one-half as
great in the tripioid as in the diploid; and as the
region considered approaches the middle of the
chromosome the relative amount of crossing over
in the triploid increases continuously until a maxi-
mum is reached at the center, for which region
crossing over is more than three times as great in
the triploid as in the diploid (Redfield 1930).

Results are now at hand for the second chromo-
some. The differences in crossover values for
this chromosome may be regarded as similar in
direction, but not nearly so extreme in absolute
value, as for the third chromosome. At the ends
of II triploid crossing over is equal to or less than
diploid crossing over. At the center it is only
slightly higher. The equational exceptions from
these crosses give information regarding the at-
tachment of the spindle fibre in the second
chromosome. The spindle fibre is in the expected
position at the center of the chromosome near
purple.

There is some reason for believing that the
regional differences in crossing over are cor-
related with the actual physical spacing of the
genes along the chromosomes. On the whole,
regions in which genes are clumped on the diploid
map tend to elongate on the triploid map, and
regions in which genes are sparse on the diploid

map contract on the triploid map. If we assume
that, generally speaking (that is excepting special
loci, such as the white locus), mutations are not
more liable to occur in one chromosome region
than in another, then it follows that the triploid
map more nearly represents the actual spacing
than does the diploid map. The factors tending
relatively to lengthen or contract the distances
between mutant loci of different regions are
operative in both the triploid and the diploid, but
these factors have less influence in the triploid
than in the diploid. This conclusion is corrobo-
rated (except possibly for the extreme left end
of II) by a comparison of diploid and triploid
crossover values with the cytological map dis-
tances determined ee the translocation work of
Muller and Painter (1929) and of Dobzhansky
(1930).

The cause of these differences between triploid
and diploid is a matter for investigation, and the
most immediate way of attacking the problem is
by means of crossover reducers. The triploid cell
differs from the diploid cell in size and in number
of chromosomes. It would seem to follow that
the relation of parts of the cell to each other are
changed—for example the surface and volume
relationships of chromatin and cytoplasm. By the
proper use of crossover reducers we may keep
constant these various relations of the triploid
cell with the exception of the number of crossing
over chromosomes.

The right end of one of the third chromosomes
of a triploid may be prevented from crossing over
by the presence of cd Cyy1. The crossing over in

1An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 22.

276

THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

this region between the remaining two third chro-
mosomes gives triploid values instead of diploid
values. The same was found to be true for
chromosome II in the presence of the reducers
associated with Curly, and for the X chromosome
in the presence of Cl B. The values obtained are
equal to those obtained in the crosses involving
triploids without reducers.

When one of three homologous chromosomes of

a triploid does not cross over due to the presence
of reducers, the remaining two chromosomes
cross over as they do in triploids and not as they
do in diploids. This means that the differences
between triploid and diploid crossing over cannot
be said to depend upon the presence per se of three
rather than two homologous crossing over
chromosomes.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 22.

A SPECTROPHOTOMETRIC STUDY OF THE PIGMENTS IN THE EYE COLOR
MUTATIONS OF DROSOPHILA !
Dr. JACK SCHULTZ
Carnegie Institution of Washington

The many eye color mutants of Drosophila
furnish material for the study of problems in the
physiology of gene expression. As a first step in
such a study, the pigments concerned have been
investigated by means of spectrophotometric
measurements of their absorption curves.

In the twenty eye color types so far studied
three water soluble pigments—red, yellow and
brown—have been found. The first two of these
show characteristic color changes with change of
pH. The brown pigment, when the solution is
made alkaline, darkens, but does not change in
color. All three of the pigments follow the por-
tion of an extract which contains the amino-acids ;
they may possibly be related to this group of sub-
stances. Partial separation of the pigments from
each other, out of mixtures, has been accomplished
in various ways.

On the addition of excess acid, or on heating
the dry pigment, both yellow and red are changed
into the brown pigment, which itself is stable

under such treatment. As yet the reverse change
has not been brought about. The conversion of
two of these pigments into the third, as well as
the general similarity of their group reactions,
indicates that they are closely related.

The different eye colors may be grouped into
four general classes, according to the pigments
they contain. Three of these correspond to the
three pigments, each group containing one pig-
ment in high concentration compared to the others.
The fourth group contains those types in which
mixtures of the three pigments are present.
Genetic combinations have been made of mutants
from different groups, and the pigments present
in these combinations studied. These data may
perhaps be interpreted to mean that the genes in-
volved affect the reaction which forms the pig-
ment out of its precursor, and that these three
pigments may possibly have the same precursor.

1An abstract of a paper presented at the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 22.

A MICROSCOPE-CENTRIFUGE !
Dr. E. Newton Harvey
Professor of Physiology, Princeton University

The centrifuge has been used in experimental
study of living cells for several types of investi-

CROSS SECTION OF
OBJECT FOR CLEARNESS OF IMAGE.
STILL, EXPOSURE 10 SECONDS,

ONION ROOT TIP

STAINED TO
RIGHT, REVOLVING 2500 R. P, M., EXPOSURE 10 SECONDS, LEFT,

gation. First, to determine relative density and
total volume of granules (which are stratified

SHOW DIVIDING CELLS AND USED AS A TEST

THE COLLECTING NET

277

Aucust 30, 1930 |

under centrifugal force) present in living cells.
Second, to observe the behavior of mitotic figures
and other structures under centrifugal force,
experiments which give a clue to the nature of the
structure, that is whether solid and resistant to
deformation or merely the configuration of par-
ticles in an electrical field. Third, to measure the
viscosity of the protoplasm, by applying Stoke’s
law to the rate of movement of granules under
the centrifugal force. The previous procedure
has been to centrifuge the cell in capillary tubes,
remove it from the tube and observe it under a
microscope to determine what happens.

It would obviously be far better to observe the
effect of centrifugal force while the force was
acting. An instrument for this purpose could be
constructed, in theory, making use of several
different principles. This communication des-
eribes a practical means of attaining this end. A
magnified image of cells making 1,000 to 4,000

THE POST-EMBRYONIC DEVELOPMENT

R.P.M. at a distance of 10 cm. from the centri-
fuge axis can be obtained.

The image is remarkably steady with high
power objectives (x62) and we have obtained
photomicrographs with the microscope-centrifuge,
using a x62 objective, of basteria and chromo-
somes in dividing cells which can hardly be dis-
tinguished from those taken when the cells are
at rest. The apparatus has been found to be
equally successful in studying marine eggs where
the movement of individual granules, the forma-
tion of stratified zones and the pinching off of
egg fragments can be followed perfectly.

An illustrated account of the microscope-centri-
fuge, devised in collaboration with Mr. Alfred
L. Loomis of Tuxedo Park, will be found in
Science for July 11.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marine

Biological Laboratory on August 29.

OF MENDELIAN CHARACTERS IN THE

GOLD FISH, CARASSIUS AURATUS!
Dr. H. B. Goopricu

Professor of Biology,

Mr. I. B.
Instructor in Biology,

It has been shown by Chen (1928) that the so
called scaled and transparent types of gold fish
are a single pair of mendelian allelomorphic
characters and that the typical “Shubunkin” of
the fanciers is the hybrid. These characters are
due to the differential development of chromato-
phores and of the crystal reflecting tissue. In the
scaled type, (common gold fish) the melanophores
develop at a definite measurable rate producing a
brown self-colored fish until a critical period oc-
curring any where from one and one-half to
seventeen months after fertilization, when the
melanophores disintegrate leaving only the yellow
xanthophores. In these fish the reflecting tissue
remains highly developed.

In the transparent type, development starts as
in the common gold fish but at about three weeks
after fertilization the destruction of melanophores
and of xanthophores begins and eventually al-
most all disintegrate. The developing reflecting
tissue is early inhibited and the net result is the
truly transparent fish.

The heterozygous type or common shubunkin
also begins development as in the other two types,
and melanophore disintegration begins at three
weeks. In this case, however, the destruction of

Wesleyan University
HANSEN

Wesleyan University

melanophores is not as complete as in the trans-
parent fish and is subject to great individual

variation. The disintegration is usually irregular
giving rise to the variegated pattern. The de-
velopment of reflecting tissue is irregularly
inhibited.

These pigment changes have been recorded by
counts of melanophores within an area bearing a
constant ratio to the size of the fish and the results
have been given in graphs. These indicate that
the average number of melanophores of the heter-
ozygous form in early stages lies about midway
between the numbers in the two homozygous
types. This seems to indicate a fairly definite
quantative effect of the action of the genes. These
results suggest the application of Goldschmidt’s
theory of genic action.

The method of production of the variegated
pattern by destruction of an earlier self-colored
condition is quite different from that upon which
prevalent theories are based. It is impossible at
the present time to generalize in regard to the
mechanics of pattern formation.

1A summary of a paper presented at the Marjne
Biological Laboratory on August 29.

278 = ; THE COLLECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

CURATOR GEORGE M. GRAY

THE NEW RESEARCH MUSEUM AT THE

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

At the meeting of the trustees of the Marine
Biological Laboratory on August 12 plans were
approved for the establishment of a research
museum. Mr. George M. Gray was appointed
curator and has been given full charge of de-
veloping this new institution, which will form a
valuable addition to the laboratory for students
and investigators alike. We have obtained the
following statement from Mr. Gray concerning
the plans of the museum.

“The need for a good workable museum of
the local fauna has for a long time been recog-
nized. Plans for such a museum are now being
formulated. | While the details are not fully
worked out, the object is to have not only as com-
plete a collection of the local forms as possible,
but also, in the case of migrating species, the dates
of arrival and departure, time of abundance,
breeding habits, embryological data, life histories,
and perhaps habitat groups, relief maps, and lo-
cality charts,—in fact, everything pertaining to
the fauna of the Woods Hole region that might
be of aid to the student or investigator.

“Such a museum used in connection with the
library, it is hoped, will not only be a valuable
source of information, but a stimulus to further
biological work.”

Mr. Gray first came to Woods Hole in 1891 and
served as general collector for Dr. H. C. Bumpus.

In 1899 he accepted a permanent position and was
later appointed curator of the Supply Department.
Thus for a long number of years Mr. Gray has
labored to build up the Supply Department until
it has become one of the most important depart-
ments of the Laboratory. He has succeeded in
developing it to such an extent that it is now a
considerable source of revenue to the Laboratory.
This distinguished record of Mr. Gray's service
to the Laboratory and his wide knowledge of
marine life have rightfully gained for him the
difficult task of building this new museum. In
his hands it is certain to be a worthy addition to
the institution.

“A Trip to the South Seas”

On the evening of Monday, August 11, Corne-
lius Crane exhibited a collection of very interest-
ing and vivid films upon the screen in the
laboratory auditorium. The subject of this
special evening lecture was the expedition, headed
by Crane, to the South Sea Islands in the brigan-
tine yacht given to him by his father. His guest
passengers were made up of scientists from the
Field Museum in Chicago.

The films showed the ///yria on her trip to the
Galapago Islands where marine and land iguanas
sported before the camera, the South Sea Islands,
the New Hebrides, the Solomon Islands, New
Guinea, Bali and Angkor. Crane’s films of the
savage tribes in their native habitats in New
Guinea, and of his adventures with wild life was
an interesting and intimate picture of what many
of us had only thought of as a vague and im-
possibly distant fairyland. Particularly interest-
ing were the pictures showing the everyday life
and homes of these savages, many of whom had
never seen a white man before. The huts and
cermonial lodges with their alligator beaks on the
gables was an unusual sight even to those who
have seen pictures of the south seas before. But
perhaps most remarkable of all were the pictures
of a rajah’s funeral on the Bali Islands. It cer-
tainly must have been a tremendous spectacle, to
see that gay crowd bearing the body to the funeral
pyre.

The overcrowded hall was an indication of the
popularity of the lecture. No function in the
auditorium has been so well attended this year.

“The Seas”

Fourteen copies of ““The Seas” have been sold
during the last couple of weeks. By special ar-
rangements with the publisher THre COLLECTING
Net obtains this $5.00 book for half of its price.
Each one that is sold brings $2.50 into our
Scholarship Fund. The money from the sale of
this book has thus already amounted to $35.00,

Aucust 30, 1930 ]

THE COLLECTING NET

THE ISOELECTRIC POINT OF MAMMALIAN RED BLOOD CELLS!
Dr. H. A. ABRAMSON
Instructor in Biochemical Sciences, Harvard University

A historical survey of the electrophoretic
mobilities of certain mammalian red cells in acid
solutions reveals that the isoelectric points

accorded to these cells are the result of equilibria
occurring incidental to red cell destruction. The
electrophoretic mobilities of normal washed sheep
and human cells have now been studied in 0.85%
NaCl solutions from pH 3.6 to 7.4. All measure-
ments were made within two minutes of the
preparation of the suspensions since addition of

acid to red cells produces in the system products
of cell destruction which change the relatively
normal cell surfaces remaining. Under these
conditions no reversal of sign of charge occurs,
nor is there an appreciable diminution in electric
mobility with increasing hydrogen ion activity in
the range noted. These data in conjunction with
other related experiments do not support the
viewpoint which demands the red cell surface to
consist of a simple protein layer.

“THE PRODUCTIVITY OF THE SEA”—A LECTURE BY DR. GRAN
GrorGeE L. CLARKE
Instructor in Physiology, Harvard University

In view of the interest in the new institute of
oceanography at Woods Hole aroused by Dr.
Bigelow’s recent talk on its plans and prospects
and: by the hole on Water Street now showing
the outlines of the future laboratory above its
rim, Dr. H. H. Gran’s lecture entitled ‘““The Pro-
ductivity of the Sea” held the special attention
of Woods Hole listeners.

Dr. Gran is particularly qualified to speak on
this subject through years of experience with
marine problems. As professor of botany at the
University of Oslo, Norway, he has carried on
his studies chiefly in North Atlantic waters, but
scientific expeditions have made it possible for
him to extend his investigations across the seven
seas. His visit at Woods Hole was made on his
return to Norway from Friday Harbor where he
made his headquarters for work in Puget Sound
with Dr. Thompson of the University of Wash-
ington.

In his lecture Dr. Gran dwelled particularly
upon the role of diatoms in the sea. It is these
tiny unicellular pelagic algae which form the
dominant element of the phytoplankton. Upon
the diatoms primarily all animal life in the sea
ultimately depends for its subsistance. As Dr.
Lillie pointed out while introducing Dr. Gran, the
marine diatoms play the same part in the ecology
of the oceans as green grass plays on land. The
diatoms, existing in the surface waters in count-
less millions, have rightly been called “the
pasturage of the sea”.

With the importance of diatoms established,
Dr. Gran proceeded to a discussion of the factors
which limit their growth in the sea. It is well
known that growth can be successful only when
the temperature, the hydrogen ion concentration,
and the salinity of the sea water are confined
within certain limits. But although these condi-
tions vary widely in different parts of the world,

still the values which have been found, if not
always optimal, are almost never lethal. A cer-
tain strength of sun light is of course required
for diatom production. The living organisms are
confined in depth to zones of water where the
light intensity is suitable. During the months of
December and January the numbers of diatoms in
the sea are everywhere at a minimum. But as
the intensity of light increases with advancing
spring, the diatom population suddenly increases.
Within a few weeks the “spring maximum’ is
reached. Dr. Gran said that even in the Arctic
where the temperature of the water was below
zero, diatoms grew rapidly wherever cracks in
the ice allowed the light to enter.

However, this spring maximum is followed by
a long period of curtailed production. Yet the
factors for growth already mentioned have now
attained even more favorable values. The supply
of oxygen and of potassium—two necessary ele-
ments—are present almost everywhere in excess.
As far as it is known there are only two other
factors which might limit the production of
diatoms in the sea. These are the nitrates and
the phosphates.

Dr. Gran presented data from the work of
Marshall and Orr and of Schreiber as well as
from his own laboratory to show that the nitrates
and phosphates indeed often are limiting factors.
Graphs in which the diatom population curve is
plotted beside the nitrate and phosphate curves
indicate a close correspondence between the
periods of diatom maxima and minima and of
nitrate and prosphate abundance and _ scarcity,
respectively. The quantities of nitrates and
phosphates in the sea water usually remain in the
same ratio to each other but either may fall below
the amount necessary for the diatoms and ac-

1Summary of a paper presented at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory on August 29,

280

THE COLEECTING NET

[ Vor. V. No. 40

cordingly become a limiting factor.

What replenishes the supply of nitrates and
phosphates in the surface waters where the
diatoms exist? The diatoms are continuously
consuming these compounds and when they die
and sink to the bottom or are carried down in
the bodies of pelagic animals which feed upon
them, the supply is rapidly depleted. It is
believed that both local convection currents and
vertical movements of bodies of water on a large
scale bring a large part of these nutrient salts
back to the surface again, and it is known that
a fresh supply is continuously being brought in
by the rivers. It is significant to note that an
increase in diatom production in the inshore
regions occurs when the rivers are swollen by
melting snows or torrential rains. Dr. Gran cited
observations from the Pacific and the Atlantic to
demonstrate this effect.

Further observations at sea and experimental
work in Dr. Gran’s laboratory gave indications
that at least one other substance stimulating to
diatom growth was brought down by the rivers.

It was found that soil extract added to diatom
cultures greatly increased production. Acting
on the theory that iron might be the suspected
beneficial element, Dr. Gran conducted a series of
tests using various compounds of this “rare ele-
ment”. Diatom cultures containing different iron
salt solutions were placed in bottles and lowered
to a suitable depth in the water. After a period
of time long enough to produce a luxuriant growth
of diatoms in a bottle to which soil extract had
been added, none of the iron solution bottles
showed a better growth than the control of
normal sea water.

Hence the mystery of the beneficial effect of
the soil extract still remains unsolved. But with
the new interest in the science of Oceanography
which is manifest, particularly in exact quantita-
tive work and in physiological relationships in the
sea, we hope with Dr. Gran that important pro-
blems such as this one can be unravelled. As
Dr. Bigelow suggested, now that we have a fair
knowledge of what is in the sea, more emphasis
should be placed on the why and the how.

A NEW APPARATUS FOR MAKING OCEANOGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS

In view of the oceanographic developments at
Woods Hole it is of interest to learn of the work
of the Bermuda Oceanographic Station at Non-
such Island. The work is being carried out under
the direction of the New York Zoological Society.
From time to time the work has been aided by
Drs. E. Newton Harvey, C. J. Fish and Henry
P. Bigelow.

On June 21 Dr. William Beebe, the director
of the station, made the following report which
has just been printed in Science:

Director William Beebe and Mr. Otis Barton
have just completed a number of dives in a deep
sea chamber or bathysphere in the open ocean to
a depth far beyond where any scientific observa-
tions at first hand have ever been made. This
bathysphere was designed for and financed by
Mr. Barton, who in frequent consultation with
Dr. Beebe, has worked on it for a year. The
barge from which the dives were made was kept
anchored off Nonsuch Island where the New York
Zoological Society Oceanographic Expedition has
its headquarters, and the descents were made in
the open sea in connection with and within the
limits of the area of intensive research which
Director Beebe has carried on for two years past,
1928-1929.

The length of cable at the greater depths was
checked and rechecked both by hydrographic
meterwheel and by measuring off and marking
one hundred foot lengths of the cable, the dif-
ference between these methods being two feet
in one thousand four hundred and twenty-six.

On June 6th a descent was made to 803 feet,

and on June 11th to 1,426 feet, or beyond a
quarter mile, with both Beebe and Barton in the
bathysphere. The sphere is 57.3 inches in outside
diameter, and 1% inches thick, and at the greatest
depth withstood a pressure of 652 pounds to the
square inch, or a total of 3366.2 tons on the whole
surface. The exact locality was 32° 16’ No. Lat.,
and 64° 39’ West Long., five miles south of Non-
such Island, Bermuda.

Fifteen dives have been made altogether, three
to a depth of 800 feet. At Mr. Barton’s own
wish he took charge of the telephone communica-
tion and the supervision of the vital instruments
and chemicals, while Dr. Beebe carried on ocular
and instrumental observation at the window and
controlled the depths. The more unusual fish and
the extreme spestroscopic readings were also
observed and confirmed by Mr. Barton.

The two most surprising phenomena were, first,
the abundance of life observed, and the clarity
and certainty with which it could be seen and
identified, and second, the blue brilliance of the
watery light to the naked eye, long after every
particle of color had been drained from the
spectrum. Another unexpected fact was the
presence of fish and invertebrates at these upper
levels which, in trawling nets, have been taken
only hundreds of fathoms lower. At 700 feet the
spectrum, as seen close against the quartz window,
was quite devoid of color, the lightest portion
being at the 510th wave-length. The last color
to disappear was violet, which, many feet above,
had completely overlaid the blue.

The visual degeneration of the spectrum was

Aucusrt 30, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING NET

281

red every fifty feet, and rechecked on different
dives and by both divers, and the radical color
alteration in known species of fish agreed with
the shifting spectrum. An intensity meter was
read in connection with the spectroscope.

A strong, electric search-light illuminated the
outside water to a distance of many feet, a bag
of decayed fish and baited hooks served as a lure,
an outside thermometer was easily read, and
perfect telephone communication and dictation
were carried on without interruption.

Luminous fish and shrimp swam close to the
quartz ‘window, about a dozen species of true
bathypelagic fish being identified and seen again
and again. Among these were Myctophum,
Diaphus, Serrivomer, Idiacanthus, Stomias,
Leptocephalus, Cyclothone and Argyropelecus.
Puzzling results of the trawling nets were ex-
plained, and every possible ecological fact noted
and dictated.

A second very important phase of the work
proved to be dangerous but exceedingly interest-
ing. ‘This was to lower the bathysphere in shallow
water, and as the guiding vessel slowly drifted
seaward, to do contour exploration down the
Bermudian insular shelf. The risk was the possi-
bility of suddenly sighting a wall of reef too near

upward. Four such descents to a miximum of 350
feet, yielded unexpected results, revealing an
entirely new fish fauna at these offshore depths
and opening an absolutely new future field, for the
study of the unknown bottom life connecting the
shore with the deep sea faunas. The most notable
thing about the recongizable shore fish was their
great average size.

The only dive when Beebe and Barton were not
together in the bathysphere was Dive Number 8,
when General Assistant John Tee-Van and the
technical associate Gloria Hollister went down to
400 feet and made many interesting observations.

Great credit should be given to Assistants Tee-
Van and Hollister for their days of recording
work on the deck of the barge. Mr. Tee-Van had
full charge of the deck crew and the hoisting
machinery and carried on without accident or
mistake. Miss Hollister received and correctly
and instantly transmitted the scores of orders and
observations, contending often with bad static and
with confused, over-enthusiastic dictation from
a quarter of a mile beneath the surface.

The satisfactory margin of safety and the ease
and accuracy of observations of fish and other
bathypelagic organisms have ensured the advisa-
bility of the continued use of the bathysphere for

to be cleared by reeling the bathysphere quickly another year

HELL BENT FER HEAVEN
ARTHEMISE OTTMANN

The University Players have done well by
themselves this week in a play by Hatcher
Hughes. “Hell Bent Fer Heaven’, which
has the quality, always amenable to the art
of acting, of melodrama. Its chief value is that
it provides a versatile group of actors with types
admirably suited to the powerful characterization
of which they are capable. The scene is laid in
the Blue Ridge Mountains, and the plot develops
those themes, not unusual in our mountaineer
drama, of religious fanaticism and family feud.
The playwright, who supplies actors with oppor-

tunities for interesting work, has been less
generous with his audience. “Hell Bent Fer
Heaven”, for all its intensity and skillful

motivation, is an uninspired variation of real life,
unreconcilable and disassociated. Mr. Hughes,
since he has nothing to say of life, must have
written to fill the popular need produced by those
people, who, little troubled by the disjointed and
unresolved quality of their own lives, are able to
find in realism itself the novelty and the fresh-
ness of escape. He has chosen to ignore the fact
that through the ages, men have demanded enter-
tainment more sophisticated than themselves, in
order that they may enjoy, at least for a little
while, an escape from their own conflicts and
necessities.

Kent Smith shows his usual competancy.
Joshua Logan is outstanding in the part of a hot-
headed young mountaineer. And _ Bretaigne
Windust, who is able to evoke a type, inevitably,
by the very lines of his figure, again proves his
capacity for creative interpretation. At the end,
when the audience not only knows the outcome
but has listened to a moral summing up, Windust,
alone on the stage, recaptures interest in a few
final moments of impressive acting. The quality
of work of all the actors, however, is astonishingly
even.

The Protective Association Meeting

The annual meeting of the Woods Hole Pro-
tective Association was held on Wednesday even-
ing, August 27, in the Old Lecture Hall, for the
election of officers and the transaction of other
business. The officers for 1930 were reelected
for 1931: Dr. Caswell Grave, president; E. N.
Lewis, vice-president; Miss Florence Tinkham,
secretary-treasurer ; Dr. Charles Packard and Dr.
Howard Warren, members-at-large. The sub-
ject of the bathing beach was discussed, and it
was decided that the executive committee recom-
mend the provision of combination life guard and
patrol for the Breakwater Beach next year.

‘282

THE COLLECTING NET

A weekly publication devoted to the scientific work
at Woods Hole.

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Ware Cattell ions tec icles aetna
Assistant Editors

Annaleida 8, Cattell
Business Manager
Ilse Michaelis

. Editor

Mary Howe

Copyright 1980 by The Collecting Net
Shirley H. Gray—Printer, New Bedford

——

The Scholarship Awards

Last Fall six Cottectinc Net scholarships of
$75.00 were awarded by a committee consisting of
Dr. E. G. Conklin, Dr. W. E. Garrey and Dr. L.
L. Woodruff. The winners were;

Mr. H. J. Bennett

Mr. B. R. Coonfield
Miss Florence Haynes
Sister Florence M. Scott
Mr. K. A. Stiles

Mr. I. Wright

Three of these students, Mr. Stiles, Mr. Benhett
and Miss Haynes, were unable to avail them-
selves of the scholarships which require that the
recipient carry on research work in Woods Hole
for a period of at least six weeks. This summer
one of these scholarships was given to Mr. D. P.
Costello who took the course in protozoology.
The other two scholarships will be turned back
to form the nucleus of an endowment fund.
Investigators working at the laboratory with
grants from our Fund are:

B. R. Coonrretp: A study of the coordinating
mechanism of the ciliary system of one of the
polychaetes. The method of attack has been
chiefly of a histological nature. Other features
being studied are size, distribution, number in
groups associated with a single epithelial cell,
and rate of beat.

D. P. Costetto: The formation of surface
precipitation membranes in the protoplasm of
crushed Protozoa comparing them with those
formed in the eggs of Chaetopterus and Arbacia.

Frorence M. Scotr: Developmental history
of Bottyllus schlosseri from fertilization to the
formation of the tadpole.

Cuarces I. Wricut: The respiration of
marine forms (especially fish and lobsters) with
a view to adapting the Van Slyke apparatus to
the study of this problem.

THE COLLECTING ‘NET

[ Vou. V. No. 40

BEACH IMPROVEMENT FUND

Total receipts,

Cash contributions $122.50

Total expenditures,
Beach sand, 34 cubie yards @ $1.50 $51.00
Rake 1.30
Labor 67.45
Total $119.75
_ Unexpended balance 2.75

$122.50

The account has been kindly audited by Miss Polly
Crowell, M. B. L. The books and unexpended balance
are deposited with Miss Crowell,

L. G. WESSON.

DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY IN
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA!

Former members of the Department of Zoology
and its friends will no doubt be interested in the
news items which Mr. Huggins has gotten togeth-
er, following the practice started by Dr. Colton a
few years ago. It will not be necessary to say
that all is well with the Department, for the record
given is a better indication of its status and activ-
ities. Some indication of our difficulties is ap-
parent in the fact-that other institutions can draw
so strongly from our faculty by inducements
which we cannot meet. It should be a major con-
tribution of any university department to train
teachers and investigators, and it must expect to
have frequent calls upon its own personnel, but
excessive losses indicate that something is amiss.
Only the very fine spirit of devotion, always a
characteristic of our Department, has kept our
staff from greater depletion.

The creative activity of the faculty and students
is clearly indicated in the statistics regarding our
“Contributions.” Practically every member of
the permanent staff is an active and productive in-
vestigator. The spirit of research is deeply in-
grained in the character of the Department and
we are hopeful that in the newly launched reor-
ganization of the University administration prac-
tical recognition of the Department’s devotion to
real university work will be accorded so that we
may do much more to advance the limits of bio-
logical knowledge.

Meanwhile, those of us who remain in service at
the old stand appreciate the continued interest of
those who have gone out into other fields, and
we send this ‘““News Letter” as an indication of
that appreciation, with the hope you may return
to us in person whenever opportunity offers. Un-
til you can do so this statement may serve in lieu
of personal contacts or letters.

THE

C. E. McClung

1Reprinted from the News Letter of the Department
of Zoology of the University of Pennsylvania.

Aucust 30, 1930 |

THE COLLECTING

NET 283

ITEMS OF INTEREST

Bronze Tablet for Stone Building

On Monday, September 8, a bronze tablet will
be unveiled on the Old Stone Building. At the
head of the tablet there will be cast in relief a
picture of a whaling vessel, followed by the words:

CANDLE HOUSE, 1836

This building was used for the manufacture of sper-
macitie candles and as a store and supply house for the
outfitting of whaling vessels. The following vessels
were built on Bar Neck Wharf:

Ship Uneas, 1828.

Ship Bartholomew Gosnold 1832

Ship Commodore Morris 1841

Barque Elijah Swift

This tablet was placed here by the Town of Falmouth
in nineteen hundred and thirty.

The committee in charge of the celebration of
the tercentenary of the founding of the Massa-
husetts Bay Colony is composed of Dr. A. L.
Pattee, Rev. H. H. Smythe, Franklin L. Gifford,
Wilbur A. Dyer and Mrs. Dorothy G. Wayman.
On Sunday evening a movie depicting early life in
the colony will be shown at the Elizabeth Theatre.

The marriage of Dr. Reginald D. Manwell to
Dr. Elizabeth Skelding Moore on August 6th at
the Congregational Church of Williamsburg,
Mass. has just been announced. The ceremony
was performed by the Rey. John P. Manwell, the
father of the groom. Dr. Manwell has spent
several summers here, and for the past year has
been an instructor in protozoology at the School
of Hygiene and Public Health of the Johns
Hopkins University. He has recently been ap-
pointed assistant professor of zoology at Syracuse
University. Miss
associate in child psychology at the University of
Iowa and head of the Nursery School there.

Miss Florence Haynes has come to Woods
Hole for a couple of weeks to finish up a piece
of research work that she started last summer
after the close of the physiology course. She was
awarded a CoLtectinG Net scholarship but was
unable to avail herself of it because she could not
plan her work so as to spend the required period
of six weeks at the Laboratory. Last year she
assisted Dr. H. E. Himwich, assistant professor
of physiology at Yale University Medical School,
and this winter she is planning to take courses at
Harvard University Medical School.

Miss Ruth Pearl, daughter of Dr. Raymond
Pearl, director of the Institute of Biological Re-
search at Johns Hopkins University, spent the
week of August 18-25 in Woods Hole. Miss
Pearl took the course in invertebrate zoology at
the laboratory in.1928,. ’ :

Moore had been research:

Miss Mary Ballard who was a member of the
staff of the Chemical Room in 1926 spent a few
days in Woods Hole last week.

A birthday party was held on Nonnamesset
Island, Monday evening in honor of Miss Lizzie
McLeish who has boarded investigators of the
M. B. L. for fifteen years. She celebrated her
76th birthday. Calvin Bridges and Miss Ida
Genther sponsored the affair.

An entertainment for the benefit of the Woods
Hole Public Library was given in the auditorium
of the Marine Biological Laboratory on Saturday,
August 30 at 8:30 P. M. Miss Helen Howe
presented some of her famous original mono-
logues.

Water sports for children under 15 were held
at the Bathing Beach on Friday morning, August
29. There were the usual swimming and diving
events, canoe contests, etc.

The amphibian plane, NC-804W, with Mr.
Noel Macy, the owner, Mrs. Macy, W. E. Bur-
dick, and G. Wilson aboard, was forced down at
Woods Hole by the fog on Monday night, August
25 and later came upon the beach by the Coast
Guard Base. Here hundreds of people had the
opportunity of examining it.

Seward Prosser’s schooner yacht Constance was
the winner in the class for larger schooners in the
Nantucket Yacht Club’s first annual regatta on
August 25. The Constance is a well known:
Woods Hole yacht, being the largest black one in
our harbor. In the class for schooners under 60
feet, Penzance, owned by Dr. F. J. Frost of
Penzance Point, was the winner. 4

The Woods Hole schools will open on Tuesday,
September 9, at 9 A. M. Miss Helen Sheehan;
daughter of Mr. and Mrs. Edward J. Sheehan of
Falmouth, will teach a class of entering pupils.
This year the primary teacher, Mrs. Effie Ani
drews, will be succeeded by Miss Emma H,
Thompson of North Truro. ;

The Delight, a schooner yacht owned by Frank
Guldin of Islip, Long Island, New York, and’
bound for Block Island, New York, ran on the
rocks near the entrance beacon in Great Harbor;:
Woods Hole on August 18. The Coast Guard’
patrol boat, CG-149, in command of D. Shea;
towed her off in a short time. i

Biology and Religion d

The work of demolishing the old building on
Main street to make way for the new Congrega~
tional Laboratory of the Marine Biological
Laboratory was started Monday morning —New,

- Bedford Times, sso SS ee

284 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 40

It is Not the Cover that Makes a

Microtome.

WHEN

Spencer Precision
Rotary Microtome

NO. 820

was designed, now nearly 20 years ago
and the attainment of a degree of ac-
curacy and precision heretofore unap-
proached, we thought that such precise
craftsmanship should be protected by a
cover, and we originated that type of
protection.
We fully appreciated then as now that to take an ordinary type of microtome of less
precision and simply cover it would add very little. With such an instrument of preci-
sion as the Spencer Rotary Microtome No. 820, it does mean much.

OVER 1800 UNIVERSITIES, COLLEGES AND RESEARCH
LABORATORIES HAVE PURCHASED THIS MICROTOME

It Has Become Worldwide in Distribution

There is scarcely an important educational hospital or research laboratory in America
that is not equipped with one or more of these microtomes. Some universities have in use
as many as 6, 8, 10 and 12 of them. There is scarcely a country in the world to which
we have not shipped and to many of them in quantities. It has thus become not alone
‘INTERNATIONAL but WORLDWIDE in its use.

BECAUSE :

It is built with an incline-plane feed, an advantage possessed by no other rotary
microtome.

It completely overcomes the inaccuracies usually encountered in rotary micro-
tomes, due to the up-and-down movement of the object.

In this microtome the feed and the up-and-down movement are entirely inde-
pendent.

Its advanageous features manifest themselves in its perfection of accuracy.

It is Made for Better Section Cutting
Spencer Precision Rotary Microtome No. 820 equipped with one knife, handle
and back for sharpening and with three object discs

CATALOG T-8 DESCRIBES IT.
antim SPENCER LENS COMPANY iam:

MANUFACTURERS
Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Measuring
Instruments, Dissecting Instruments, Ete,

BUFFALO, N. Y.

Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington, Minneapolis, Los Angeles.

Avcust 31, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET

A NEW

POUueNTIOMETRLC: UNLE

TT
aL
a

nnn!

4908 Top View

POTENTIOMETRIC UNIT, Leeds & Northrup. A new calibrated type, designed and built expressly
for us. For the determination of H-ion coneentra‘ions and end-point indications in acidimetrie and
alkalimetrie titrations.

Consisting of a potentiometer mounted in a compact assembly with galvanometer, standard cell
and operating battery. The dimensions are identical with those of the Kelley Electrometric Indicator
so that the Indicator and Potentiometric Unit can be used interchangeably on the base of No. 4920
Kelley Electrometrie Titration Outfit.

The potentiometer has a range of 0 to 1.11 volts, of which 0 to 1.0 volt is measured on a dial
switch in ten steps of 0.1 volt each, and 0.11 volt measured on a slide wire carrying a scale calibrated
to 0.1 millivolt. The calibration is guaranteed to have an accuracy of 0.5 millivolt, although the actual
adjustment at the factory is better than this. It is, therefore, possible to read to a precision of 0.01
pH or better.

The galvanometer is of the deflecting pointe: high resistance type designed for concentration
cell work and has a sensitivity of the order of 2 merohms. A standard cell of the unsaturated type is
housed within the box. The operating battery is a d y cell, which can be readily replaced. If desired,
it may be disconnected and a 2-volt storage batte y attached externally, for which binding posts are
provided.

Two fixed resistances with plug switches and a variable resistance with operating knob, built into
the instrument in series with the operating battery, afford easy regulation of the operating current.
4908. Potentiometric Unit, Leeds & Northrup, complete as above described .. : $150.00

Code Word ....... = scint. C ented ae HOS ERR ee ae Ee Secu siare Bee aed ; ae Ezyqr

Copy of Supplement No. 89, which illustrates and describes one of the complete H-ion
assemblies possible with the above Potentiometric Unit, sent upon request.

Sole Distributors

ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

RETAIL -- WHOLESALE -- EXPORT

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U.S.A.
Cable Address, BALANCE, Philadelphia

THE COLLECTING NET

MINOT
SLIDE CABINET

Designed by the late Dr. Charles 5S.
Minot; entirely of metal construction;
very compact, occupying much less
space than wooden cabinet, strongly
made throughout and neatly finished on
outside in maroon-colored japan with
bronze stripes, inside being finished in
black japan; contains 380 japanned
metal trays, each holding 24 glass
slides, 75 x 25 mm. Trays are provided
with convenient knobs and card hold-
ers. New and improved construction
of trays holds each slide independently
in place, preventing shaking or slipping
when trays are removed. Cabinet is
furnished with brass lock. Outside di-
mensions: height, 141% inches; depth, 13
inches; width 7 inches; capacity, 720
slides; furnished complete with 30
trays.

11882 MINOT SLIDE CABINET as described
above Fa ae eM eats OOO!

ILL CORPORATION

Products for Every Laboratory
Guaranteed Without Reservation

RocHEsTER , NY:

The
Wistar Institute Bibliographical Service
is of invaluable assistance to

Librarians—Investigators—Teachers
It brings to them, in AUTHORS’ ABSTRACT
form, a brief review of all original papers on
Biological Subjects which appear in the following
journals:
Journal of Morphology and Physiology
The Journal of Comparative Neurology
The American Journal of Anatomy
The Anatomical Record
The Journal of Experimental Zoology
American Journal of Physical Anthropology
The American Anatomical Memoirs
Folia Anatomica Japonica (Tokio, Japan)
Stain Technology (Geneva, N. Y.)
Physiological Zoology (Chicago, Ill.)
Advance Abstract Sheets
issued semi-monthly, bearing Author’s Abstracts _
without bibliographic references, offer a practical
means of making research immediately available
in abstract form and of purchasing articles of
special interest in reprint form without the neces-
sity of subscribing to all the journals. Sub-
scription, $3.00 per year.
Bibliographic Service Cards
with complete bibliographic references, printed
on Standard Library-catalogue cards, are of value
and assistance to Librarians and Investigators.
Subscription, $5.00 per year.
Abstracts in Book Form
referred to above, are brought together period-
ically, with Authors’ and Analytical Subject In-
dices. Price $5.00 per volume.
Subscriptions to the Bibliographic Service
and orders for reprints should be sent to

The Wistar Institute of Anatomy & Biology
Thirty-sixth St. & Woodland Ave. Phila., Pa.

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE SLIDE TRAY

9 tS
Section Through Two Trays, Showing Nesting
Features

This tray will carry forty-eight l-inch slides
or thirty-two 114-inch slides, or twenty-four 2-
inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well
protected from accident or dust. Trays nest
together. Width and breadth the same, so that
they may be nested in either direction. All metal
—no paint or varnish to affect slides.

Price, $1.00 each

Orders may be sent to

THE WISTAR INSTITUTE
Thirty-Sixth Street and Woodland Ave.,
Philadelphia, Pa.

[ Vor. V. No. 40

Aucust 31, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 287

EINTHOVEN STRING GALVANOMETERS

This well-known instrument pos-
sesses the advantages of extreme
sensitivity, short period and negli-
gible self induction or capacity. It
is largely used for physical and
physiological investigation. Several
types are furnished.

Tull information on request.

nae CAMBRIDGE
Type “B” shown above has a readily INSTRUMENT CO [Nc
interchangeable string suspension i ¥
which makes possible quick replace- Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments

ment of strings of different charac- ‘
Teese 3512 Grand Central Terminal, New York

SPALTEHOLZ

TRANSPARENT

PREPARATIONS

Human and Zoological
Actual specimens (not models) in museum jars with
special solution and process that makes the tissue
transparent showing bone structure. Many with
arteries and/or veins injected. A large variety of
human embryos, small animals and human and
animal organs to select from.

Send us your inquiries for

SKELETONS, SKULLS, MODELS,
CHARTS, etc.

Catalogs will be gladly sent on request

Crav-Ansams Company

Importers and wholesale distributors of Anatomical,
Sotanical and Biological models and preparations
and skeletal material
Sole agents for Spalteholz Preparations
117-119 East 24th Street New York

[ Vor. V. No. 40

288 THE COLLECTING NET
“Equal Excelled
to Any by None”

An duuitatinn

We Cordially invite the
Biologists of Woods Hole

to visit our

Greatly Enlarged
New

Showroom

Replete with

ZOOLOGICAL,

BOTANICAL
and
ANATOMICAL
MODELS,

SPECIMENS,
CHARTS,
ETC.

Cray-ApAms Company
Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.

Importers and wholesale distributors of
Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-
tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

Microscopes and Microscope
Accessories

A comprehensive stock of Bausch & Lomb,
Leitz, Spencer, and Zeiss makes, including
Pocket microscopes, Inexpensive Compound
microscopes for examining botanical speci-
mens and similar work, Regular Students
microscopes with Oil Immersion Ojcectives
and Monobjective microscopes fully equip-
ped for the most exacting research work;
also full lines of Photomicrographic
Cameras, Microtomes, etc.

Complete information with descriptive

literature sent on request.

We have no agents. To be sure of E&A
material order direct.

EIMER & AMEND

Est. 1851 Inc. 1897

HEADQUARTERS FOR LABORATORY
APPARATUS AND CHEMICAL REAGENTS

Third Avenue, 18th to 19th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

Marine
Biological
Laboratory
Supply
Department

FOR THE BEST

BIOLOGICAL MATERIAL
CLASSROOM MATERIAL
MUSEUM SPECIMENS
LIFE HISTORIES

Samples of different preparations on
exhibit.

Catalogues and Information Furnished by
Applying at Supply Department Office

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator

Aucusrt 31, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 289

LEITZ NEW LABORATORY and
MEDICAL MICROSCOPE

Quality that Dominates

Quantity production with its hurried workmanship can-
not compare favorably with the painstaking efforts
utilized in the production of Leitz microscopes. The
Leitz Works recognize but one standard which must be
rigidly maintained before any microscope can be released.
Each unit of construction is carefully checked during
and after manufacture and the completely assembled
instrument must pass a most critical test under the
scrutinizing eyes of trained mechanics and opticians.
These men have learned their trade and inherited their
slall from generations past.

Write for Pamphlet No. 1176 (CN)

| E. LEITZ, Inc.

| 60 EAST 10th ST., NEW YORK, N. Y.

Cw

INTERNATIONAL

MULTISPEED ATTACHMENT

multiplies by 10 the centrifugal
force ordinarily given by a centri-
fuge, and this higher relative
centrifugal force of approximate-
ly 20,000 x gravity is applicable
to volumes of individual speci-
mens as great as 7 ml.

INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT CO.

352 Western Avenue

Boston, Mass.

290

THE COLLECTING NET

“RITE ON”
Micro Slides

Write on the frosted surface end of the
slide itself, NOT on a label. Writing
surface on both sides of slide! No more
labels to become mutilated. And the
markings can be washed off with water
so you can use “RITE-ON” slides again
and again.

Use Pen
or

Pencil
SIZE 3”x1”

Non-corrosive semi-white,
medium thickness

All four sides ground and polished,

$1.75 Gross

Sample gross sent prepaid on
receipt of check.

Please mention dealers name

Crav-ApAms Company

Wholesale Distributors
117-119 East 24th St. New York, N. Y.
Importers and wholesale distributors of

Quality laboratory supplies, anatomical
and botanical models, and specimens, skele-

tons, charts, etc., surgical instruments, etc.

[ Vor. V. No. 40

RESEARCH
PERIODICALS

MEDICAL, PHYSIOLOGICAL,
CHEMICAL and OTHER
SCIENTIFIC JOURNALS

Complete Files, Volumes or Back Copies
For Sale

We buy unbound and bound Scientific
Journals

B. LOGIN & SON, Inc.
Established 1887
29 EAST 21st STREET
New York City

B. WESTERMANN CO., INC.
13 West 46th Street,

New York City
All Scientific Books in Foreign Languages

The Collecting Net

Began Publication in 1926

BACK NUMBERS AND
VOLUMES

May be obtained by

addressing

The Collecting Net

WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Aucust 31, 1930 ] THE COLLECTING NET 291

The Asta Electric Incubators and Ovens

Adopted by Leading Institutions
(Medical Center, N. Y., Columbia University, University of Virginia, etc.)

On Display With Other Kny-Scheerer Products in Old Lecture Hall—Aug. 27-30

Naturalists’ Museum
Biological Cabinets
and
Laboratory Surgical
Supplies Instruments

“Ask our Representative regarding Special Offers”

fs GHEERER: CORPORATION

Department of Natural Science

580 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK CITY

Now Ready -
The new and Revised

~ ;
Turtox Biology Catalog and Teachers Manual
1930-31 Edition

Although the 1929-30 edition of this book was written primarily for the High School
teacher, it met with an unexpectedly large demand in colleges, normal schools and uni-
versities. Many university teachers even requested extra copies for distribution to their
advanced students who planned to teach Biology after finishing their school work.

In republishing this book we have done everything possible to make the new edition
of even greater value to the teacher. The best features have been retained while many
new chapters have been added and several of the old ones rewritten. The new book
contains 300 pages, over half of which are devoted to the teachers’ manual and to chap-
ters on laboratory and field work.

Your copy will be mailed to you, without charge, on request.

General Biological Supply House

(INCORPORATED)

761-763 East 69th Place

The Sign of the Turtox Chicago, Illinois
Pledges Absolute Satisfaction

292 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 40
ae 1

CHURCH OF THE MESSIAH SAMUEL CAHOON
(Episcopal) Wholesale and Retail Dealer in
The Rev. James Bancroft, Rector FISH AND LOBSTERS
Holy Communion - - - - 7:30 a.m.
Morning Prayer - - - - 11:00 a.m. Tel. Falmouth 660-661
Evening Prayer : : z F 7:30 p.m. Woods Hole and Falmouth

WALTER O. LUSCOMBE

REAL ESTATE AND

N. E. TSIKNAS

INSURANCE FRUITS AND VEGETABLES
Woods Hole Phone 622 Falmouth and Woods Hole
Dresses — Linens — Laces
Fine Toilet Articles THE TWIN DOOR

Riza ber naa RESTAURANT AND BAKERY

Yardley
Choice Bits from Pekin G. M. GRANT, Prop.
MRS WEEKS SHOPS Chicken and Lobster Dinners
¥ Waffles
Se Main Street Woods Hole, Mass.

“BILL” ENGLISH Nie a
A Man’s Store
MEAP RUA RIO Su EAT THE TOASTED SANDWICH SHOP
Colonial Building. Tel. 935. Main Street
Falmouth

M. B. L. Specials Cape Cod Specials
Dinners and Lunches
Tel. 70787

When in Falmouth Stop at
ISSOKSON’S
GENERAL MERCHANDISE
Shoe Repairing Done While U Wait
A. ISSOKSON

Follow the Crowd to

DANIELS’ ||

for Home-made Ice Cream,

PARK TAILORING AND
CLEANSING SHOP

Weeks’ Building, Falmouth
Phone 239-W Free Delivery

We Press While You Wait
(Special Rates to Laboratory Members)

Delicious Sandwiches, :
Coffee, ||

PICNIC LUNCHES

LADIES’ AND GENTS’ TAILORING KELVINATOR REFRIGERATION

Cleaning, Dyeing and Repairing
Coats Relined and Altered. Prices Reasonable at

eee EASTMAN’S HARDWARE. |

Main St. Woods Hole, Mass. Call 752

5 AND 10c DEPARTMENT |}

KITCHEN FURNISHINGS

SANSOUCI’S BEAUTY PARLOR

Bredenicie @E ormeiene aaa Pyrofax Gas and Glenwood Ranges

i

'
and i
}

All Branches of Beauty Culture
Falmouth Phone 19-M

Falmouth Tel. 407

Aveusr 31, 1930 ] |THE COLLECTING NET of . 3293

THE
UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD
Presents

“A Kiss for Cinderella’”’
By SIR JAMES BARRIE
Week of September 1 - 6

Evenings at 8:30 Matinee Wednesday at 2:30
Old Silver Beach West Falmouth

Seats 75c, 1.00, 1.50 and 2.00
Tel. Falmouth 1250

shoes for
every
occasion
Jax
parkway shops near filene’s

High Pressure Greasing

TEXACO

WOODS HOLE GARAGE

COMPANY

Opposite Station

ELIZABETH THEATRE

FALMOUTH, MASS.
Two Shows — 7 and 9 P. M.
Matinee at 2:30 — Wednesdays & Fridays

Monday, September 1
One Day Only
RICHARD ARLEN in
“THE SEA GOD”

Tuesday, September 2
One Day Only
NORMA TALMADGE in
“NEW YORK NIGHTS”

Wednesday, Sept. 3 - Thursday, Sept. 4
The Musical Comedy Success

“GOOD NEWS”

Friday, September 5
WALLACE BERRY and LEWIS STONE in
“THE BIG HOUSE”

Saturday, September 6
WARNER OLAND in
“THE RETURN OF DR. FU MANCHU”

Visit
Malchman’s

THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT

STORE ON CAPE COD

Falmouth Phone 116

vation, even during exposure.

_ THE COLLECTING NET

DMG NBt 2) = ee Vot. V. No. 40

Photo-Micrographic Ocular
“Phoku”

Attachable to any standard microscope.
The specimen is continually under obser-
Optically
and mechanically correct, negatives of
exact definition are obtained, which may
subsequently be enlarged four or five
diameters, without apparent loss of sharp-

ness.

By means of the Phoku photographic
records are made of specimens examined,
with a minimum expenditure of time and
money. It may also be used with equal
facility for photographing opaque (in-
cluding metallurgical) and transparent
objects.

Price $108 f.o.b. New York

Suitable Zeiss Microscopes to use with
the PHOKU may be had from $132 and
upward.

Carl! Zeiss, Inc.
485 Fifth Avenue, New York

Pacific Coast Branch:
728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles

Ges

New McGRAW-HILL BOOKS

A LABORATORY MANUAL FOR
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY

By H. L. WIEMAN,
Professor of Zoology, Univ. of Cincinnati
and C. K. WEICHERT,

Asst. Professor of Zoology, Univ. of Cincinnati
McGraw-Hill Publications in the
Zoological Sciences
100 pages 6 by 9 $1.00
A guide for laboratory study of the develop-
ment of certain vertebrate forms, principally

the embryos of the chick and the pig.
AN INTRODUCTION TO
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
By H. L. WIEMAN
McGraw-Hill Publications in the
Zoological Sciences
411 pages 6 by 9 201 ill. $4.00
A text for an introductory course in vertebrate
embryology, which while centering the labor-
atory work on the study of the chick and pig
eninryon extends the work beyond these two
forms. The book may be used in connection
with laboratory work on cleavage and early
stages in amphioxus and the frog.

LABORATORY MANUAL IN
BACTERIOLOGY

By SYANLEY THOMAS
POMEL of Bacteriology, Lehigh University

154 pages 6 By, 9 $1.75
This manual presents about thirty experi-
ments aiming to include those laboratory

exercises which every beginner should per-
form in order to learn the necessary funda-
mental principles of bacteriology and_ to
obtain practice in laboratory technique.
BACTERIOLOGY
By STANLEY THOMAS

2nd Ed. 361 p., 6x9 38 ill. $3.00

A well-organized presentation of the essen-
tial principles of bacteriology with a discus-
sion of the practical applications of these
principles in the work of the sanitary engi-
necr, the industrial chemist, the agricultura-
list and the medical student.
THE LOWER FUNGI-
PHYCOMYCETES

By H. M. FITZPATRICK

Professor of Mycology, Dept. of Plant

Pathology, N. Y. State College of Agricul-

ture, Agricultural Experiment Station,

Cornell University.

McGraw-Hill Publications in the
Agricultural and Botanical Sciences $4.00
A comprehensive general reference work on

the Phycomycetres. This book offers the only
complete modern treatment of the taxonomy
of the lower fungi available in any language.
Keys are provided to all the known genera of
the Phycomycetes. Though the general treat-
ment is essentially taxonomic, the facts of
cytology, comparative morphology and biology
as known for each group are emphasized.
Send for Copies on Approval

McGRAW-HiLL BOOK COMPANY, Inc.

Penn Terminal Building

370 Seventh Ave. New York

Auaust 31, 1930] _ THE COLLECTING NET 295

Accuracy with Speed
« « IN pH Control

MANY ACCURATE METHODS of

H-lon determination are not suitable for
routine work because they are slow and
difficult. More speedy methods often
suffer for want of accuracy. The B&L
H-lon colorimeter combines these two

important qualities, giving the
.— routine worker an ideal instru-
sake ment for pH work to close limits of
accuracy.

Patterned after the Duboscq colorimeter, the
advantages of that instrument are retained.
Additional cups are provided for both acid and
alkaline forms of the indicator in either light path.
Auxiliary cups are available for balancing of
body color according to the Walpole technique.

B & L H-lon Colorimeter Write for literature giving all details.

BAUSCH & LOMB OPTICAL CO.
671 St. Paul Street « » Rochester, New York

. GREATER VISION THROUGH
OPTICAL SCIENCE

BAUSCH
% LOMB

BAUSCH € LOMB

Makers of Orthogon Eyeglass Lenses for Better Vision

296 THE COLLECTING NET [ Vor. V. No. 40

THE PROMI MICROSCOPIC DRAWING AND
PROJECTION APPARAWS

Projects microscopic slides and
living organisms and insects on
table or wall for drawing and demon-
stration. Also used as a microscope
and a micro-photographic apparatus.

The Promi, recently perfected by
a prominent German microscope
work, is an ingenious yet simple
apparatus which fills a long felt
want in scientific instruction and re-
search in Bacteriology, Botany, Zoo-
logy, Pathology, Anatomy, Embry-
ology, Histology, Chemistry, etc.

It has been endorsed by many lead-
ing scientists and instructors.

In the Industrial Field, its uses
are limitless for research as well as for Microscopic examination, comparison and recording
of raw and partly processed materials. The simple operation of this apparatus permits its
use by the layman as well as the scientist.

AS A PROJECTION APPARATUS: It is used for projecting in actual colors on wall or sereen,
microscopie preparations, living organisms and insects for lecture room demonstration and instruction.
Makes it possible for a group of students to examine a single specimen simultaneously. Invaluable for
instructors in focusing students attention on important features, which cannot be demonstrated with
equal facility and time saving under a microscope. Eliminates the eye strains of microscope examination.

AS A DRAWING LAMP: The illustration shows how a microscopic specimen slide is projected in
actual colors on drawing paper enabling student or teacher to draw the image in precise detail in
black or colors. Living inseets or microscopic living organisms can also be projected. Adjustment of
the size of the image is simply a matter of varying the distance to which the image is projected.
Higher magnification may be obtained by using tube and ocular and or high power objectives. Charts
can readily be made for class room instruction.

AS A MICROSCOPE: By removing the bulb and attaching the reflecting mirror and inverting the
apparatus a compound microscope is achieved. Higher magnification is possible by the use of standard
| microscopic high power objectives and oculars.

AS A MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS: Microseopie preparations of slides, living organisms
and insects can be photographed without the use of a camera.

PRICE: F. O. B. New York $100.00 complete apparatus in polished wood carrying ease. Includes
extra bulb, rheostat for 110 and 220 volts with cords, plugs and switch for both DC and AC current,
11x objective, tube with 5x ocular, reflecting mirror and micro-euvette. Extra equipment prices on
request.

Prospectus gladly sent, address

Exclusive Wholesale Distributors

Crav-Apams Company

117-119 East 24th Street
NEW YORK, N. Y.

“Promi” on display and demonstrated at Woods Hole, Brick Bldg., Room 314
M. B. L. in charge of Morton D. Schweitzer.

Supplement of THE COLLECTING NET

August 39, 1930

MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY

CHEMICAL ROOM

FORMULAE AND METHODS

Edited by

OSCAR W. RICHARDS

For some time the Chemical Room has been
collecting information about the solutions used
at the M. B. L. in order to prepare a manual for
the members of the staff. The suggestion made
in the first issue of THe Correctine Net this
year arouses our interest so much that we are
publishing some of our material at this time.
Perhaps it will help toward the organization of
a larger manual of information for those who
work at the M. B. L.

This pamphlet is planned for the members of
the Chemical Room Staff and contains suggestions
of especial value for those who have not been on
our staff in previous years, that would not be added
otherwise. The formulae are standard formulae,
although in some cases we have recalculated
amounts in order to make the preparation of the
solutions more direct and to yield more uniform
solutions year after year. Several members of
the staffs of 1929 and 1930 have collected infor-
mation for the tables. This is acknowledged in
the several tables and the editor wishes to express
his appreciation for the enthusiasm they have
shown in the rather tedious tasks. The investi-

gators have chosen indirectly the formulae, as only
those items actually called for at the M. B. L.
have been included. Not a few of the investiga-
tors have generously given their time and aid in
this task and we wish to thank them and express
to them our appreciation for their cooperation.
We are grateful to Dr. H. J. Conn for permission
to print the stain solubilities in table 4.

It is the hope that the publication of this
material may lessen some of the misunderstanding
that sometimes arises from the lack of standari-
zation of many biological solutions. We propose
to make our stock solutions from these formulae.
This will in no way change our present policy of
preparing special -solutions to order in so far as
the needs and facilities of the service permit.
Only those solutions that keep well and for which
there is an active demand will be kept on our
shelves.

Table 1.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Several grades of many of the chemicals are
kept in stock and care should be used in issuing
chemicals so that the proper quality requested is

2

furnished to the investigator. If there is any
doubt regarding the quantity or quality requested
consult the person in charge before filling the
order.

Purity of chemicals. The commercial or
technical grade is satisfactory for many purposes
such as preparing freezing mixtures and cleaning
fluid. Certain materials have been purified in
accordance with the U. S. Pharmacopoea
(U. S. P.) for medicinal use, but these may still
contain impurities harmless for medicinal use.
The so-called Ghemical’y Pure (C. P.) grades
are further purified and satisfactory except when
great purity of reagents is required. The purest
chemicals commercially obtainable are further
purified and are usually accompanied by an
analysis indicating the amounts of certain im-
purities present. This reagent grade includes
Merck's “Blue Label Reagents”, Eimer and
Amend’s “Tested Purity’, Baker's “Analyzed”,
Kahlbaum’s “pro analyst’, etc. These analyses
cover only certain impurities and are not always
complete, so that they are not completely satis-
factory for the comparison of materials from
different manufacturers. For special studies these
salts must be further purified by the investigator
before they may be used. For methods used in
making the analyses cf. Murray, Standards and
tests for reagents and chemicals. Van Nostrand
€o. 2nd Ed. 1927.

The confusion of different grades of mater-
jals is to be guarded against. For instance do not
issue immersion oil for clearing oil just because
both are different kinds of cedar oil. Certain of
these confusing substances are specially marked.
In the case of expensive materials issue no more
than the amount marked on the bottle unless per-
mission of the person in charge is given for a
greater amount.

Solubilities. If a special solution calls for a
large amount of a material consult the table of
solubilities in an handbook or, for stains, table
4, to see if solution is possible. If not, consult
with the person in charge before attempting the
preparation. This may avoid an error and the
wastage of much material. Chloretone, in parti-
cular, cannot be made stronger than 0.6% in
water.

Alcohol dilution. For ordinary histological
work special strengths of alcohol may be pre-
pared by taking the number of ccs. of 95% equal
to the strength desired in a graduate and adding
enough distilled water to make 95 cc. (Example
—to prepare 60% take 60 cc. of 95% aRotiol and
add 35 cc. of distilled water making 95 ce. or the
strength of the alcohol used.)

Cleaning glass ware. For all but the worst
organic residues, soaking in water followed by
scrubbing with sapolio and careful rinsing will
give the best results. If cleaning solution must

Supplement of THe Cottectine Net

[ Vor. V. No. 40

be used continued rinsing is necessary. Some-
times 10-15 rinsings are necessary to remove the
chromic acid adsorbed on the glass. Since
chromic acid is toxic to living organisms (note
its use in killing fluids, table 2) this is important.
For many purposes 1 part commercial nitric acid
to 9 parts water, is superior to chromic acid as the
nitric acid oxidizes organic material without
leaving an adsorbed residue on the glass, To
clean staining jars use a little dilute, commercial
hydrochloric acid. For the few dyes not removed
by this use crude sodium hydroxide.

Accuracy and decimals. Note that accuracy
is relative. An error of 0.1 gram in 500 grams is
only a 0.02% error, while the same error in 1 gram
is a 10% error. Use the proper scales or balance
for the particular job to be done. If you have any
question as to the accuracy required in an order
consult with the investigator placing the order,
or when that is not convenient, with the person
in charge. When a decimal is to be placed on the
label of any preparation conform to the following
rule. Write the decimal to the number of places
known to be correct, and one, and only the first,
doubtful figure. This same rule can be applied to
figures where the known value does not extend
to decimals by writing one doubtful figure and
the rest zeros.

Table 3
GENERAL FORMULAE
Collected from various sourses by
John Deitrick

Use distilled water in all solutions.
Adamkiewicz reagent. (for proteins). Strong

sulphuric acid 1 volume, glacial acetic acid 2

volumes. Heat substance with this reagent—

reddish-violet color denotes proteins.

Alcohol, acid. 70% alcohol 99 cc., hydrochloric
acid 1 cc.

Alcohol, alkaline. 70% alcohol 0.1%
sodium bicarbonate 1 cc.

Ammoniacal silver solution. Dissolve 13 g. of
silver nitrate in about 250 cc. of water, add
enough ammonium hydroxide to redissolve
the ppt. which forms upon the first addition
of the ammonium hydroxide and make the
volume up to 500 cc. with water.

Anilin water. Shake 4 cc. of anilin oil in 90 ce.
of distilled water. Filter through a wet filter.
Enough alcohol may be added to make it
20% alcohol, if a weakly alcholic solution is

99cc.,

desizeds
Barfoed’s test for dextrose in
presence of maltose. 13.3 g. cupric acetate

in 200 ce. water, and 5 cc. of 38% acetic acid.
Benedict’s solution-qualitative. Copper sulphate
17.3 g., sodium citrate 173 g., sodium carbo-
nate 100 g., water 1000 cc. Dissolve the
sodium citrate and carbonate in 800 cc. water
(filter if necessary). Dissolve the copper

Aucusr 30, 1930 | Supplement of Tur Cortectinc Net 3

TABLE IL
KILLING AND PIXING FLUIDS

Recalculated from Lee, Microtomists Vade Mecum, ninth edit
Prepared by Sibyl Street, fdition unless otherwise noted.

Killing Pluid General

Altman
Benda

Bouin aI

Bg (Carother’s)# Warm to about 50°C and
add 1 gm. of urea

: ; crystals; stir con-

15 (Allen's) ># anahaniitisa tatters
Warm solution and stir
constantly while adding
2 gm. urea crystals,
Chromic acid should not
be added until ready to
use.

Chloroform 30 cc

G
5 ¢ ide lg
I Tadd formalin just, befgre
[Platinum chioride.15 g|\ 2

_(Huettner

Kleinenberg Y —

Lavdowsk Platinum chloride 0,5 ¢
Sodium chloride 0,15 g.

Ohimacher Chloroform 15 cc.

Perenyi Nitric Acid 10 % 40 cc.
Petrunkewitsch | 300 Nitric Acid 10 ec,

Picro-Sulfuric
(Mayer)

O. vom Rath 10 percent of a 2
percent osmic acid

Sublimate-acetic For other than marine
lanimals use weaker
acid,

Courtesy of Dr. Fry

Courtesy of Dr. Carothers
If chromic is desired for fine cytological details add 4 drops of 50% aq. sol. to each

5 ec. when ready to use.
The mixture does not keep well as ethyl acetate forms and ppts. out.

Courtesy Miss Buck.
Formol-chromic mixtures contain both oxydizing and reducing substances which will not

keep when mixed and should therefore be prepared immediately before using.

The various units and measures have been recalculated into grams and cubic centimeters
of standard reagents. In no case have the original proportions been altered except
that where considerable choice of strengths was given the mean value has been used
followed by a sign.

4 Supplement of Tur Cottectine Net

[ Vor. V. No. 40

sulphate in 100 cc. Add the copper sulphate
slowly to the citrate-carbonate solution with
constant stirring and dilute to 1 liter.

Benedict’s quantitative sugar reagent. Copper
sulphate (crystallized) 18 g., sodium carbo-
nate ('% weight of anhydrous salt may be
used) 200 g., sodium or potassium citrate
200 g., potassium thiocyanate 125 g., potas-
sium ferrocyanide (5% solution) 5 cc., water
to make up volume to 1000 ce. With aid of
heat dissolve the carbonate, citrate and thio-
cyanate in enough water to make 800 cc., and
filter if necessary. Dissolve the copper sul-
phate separately in 100 cc. and mix slowly
with the other solution. 25 cc. of the reagent
are reduced by 50 mg. of glucose.

Carbo-xylol. 1 part liquified phenol (see below),
and 3 parts xylol.

Carlsbad salts, synthetic. (Sprudelsalz). Sodium
sulphate 11 g., sodium bicarbonate 10 g.,
sodium chloride 9 g., potassium nitrate 19 ¢.,
potassium sulphate 1 g.

Chloretone, chlorbutanol. 0.6 g. soluble in 100
cc. water at 20°C.

Cleaning solution. Saturate commercial sulphuric
acid with commercial potassium bichromate.

Fehling’s solution. Solution J—copper sulphate
34.65 g. in 500 cc. water. Solution I[—
potassium hydroxide 125 g., Rochelle salt
(Naktartrate) 173 g., water to make up to
500 cc. Solutions mixed in equal volumes for
use.

Ferri sesquichlorati, Liquor. Use an equal
volume of 63% aqueous solution of ferric
chloride (crys. with 6 mols water).

Gram’s iodine. Water 200 cc., potassium iodide
2 g., iodine 1 g.

Hayem’s solution, for microscopic examination
of blood. Water 1000 cc., mercuric chloride
2.5 g., sodium sulphate 25 g., sodium chloride
5) (oe

Iodine, tincture—U. S. P. Alcohol
iodine 70 g., potassium iodide 50 g.

Iodine, water. Water 1000cc., iodine 0.2 g.

Keefe’s solution—for preserving green organ-
isms. Alcohol 50% 90 cc., formaldehyde 5
ce., acetic acid 2:5 cc., glycerine 2.5 cc.,
cupric chloride 10 g., uranium nitrate 1.5 g.

Klotz solution—for preservation of inverebrate
animals. Chloral hydrate 50 g., Carlsbad
salts (see above) 50 g., formalin 100 cc., water
to make 1000 ce.

Knopf’s solution—No. 1. Water 1000 cc., calcium
nitrate 1 g., potassium chloride 0.25 g.,
magnesium sulphate 0.25 g., monobasic potas-
sium phosphate 0.25 g., ferric chloride trace.

Knopf’s solution—No. 2. Water 1000 cc., potas-
sium nitrate 1 g., calcium sulphate 0.5 g.,
magnesium sulphate 0.5 g., calcium phosphate
0.25 g., ferrous phosphate 0.25 ¢.

1000 cc.,

Locke’s solution—for warm blooded animals.
Water 1000 cc., sodium chloride 9 g., calcium
chloride 0.25 g., potassium chloride 0.42 g.,
sodium bicarbonate 0.2 g., dextrin 2.5 g.

Lugol’s iodine. Water 100 cc, iodine 5 g., potas-
sium iodide 10 g.

Millon’s reagent—for proteins and nitrogenous
compounds. Mercury 10 g., nitric acid 20 g.
(specific gravity 1.42). Dilute this resulting
fluid with 2 volumes of water. Let stand 24
hours and decant. Gives a red color with
proteins.

Miquel’s solution. Culture fluid for diatoms.
A. Water 100 cc., magnesium sulphate 10 g.,
sodium chloride 10 g., sodium sulphate 5 ¢.,
ammonium nitrate 1 g., potassium nitrate
2 g., sodium nitrate 2 g., postassium bromide
0.2 g., potassium iodide 0.1 g.

B.* Water 80 cc., sodium phosphate 4 g.,
calcium chloride (dry) 4 g., hydrochloric acid
(specifié gravity 1.169) 2 cc., ferric chloride
Po

2¢.

* Make as follows—To the sodium phosphate
dissolved in 40 cc. of water are added, first
2 ce. of hydrochloric acid, then 2 g. of ferric
chloride and then 4 g., of calcium chloride
dissolved in 40 cc. of water, taking care to
shake the mixture. There will be a brown
ppt. of ferric oxide on adding the last solu-
tion. It should be separated from the liquid
before using.

Forty drops of solution A and 10-20 drops of
solution B are added to each 1000 cc. of sea
water sterilized by keeping at 70° C for about
20 minutes.

Miquel’s_ solution— Allen’s modification. A.
Water 100 cc., potassium nitrate 20.2 g. B
Water 80 cc., dibasic sodium phosphate 4 ¢.,
calcium chloride. 6H,0, 4 g., ferric chloride
(melted) 2 cc., hydrochloric acid (con.) 2 ce.
Two cc. of solution A and 1 ce solution B
to each 1000 cc. of sea water.

Moore’s solution. Water 1000 cc., ammonium
nitrate 0.5 g., monobasic potassium phosphate
0. 2 g., magnesium sulphate 0.2 g., calcium
chloride 0.1 g., iron sulphate trace.

Naegeli’s solution—culture medium for fungi.
Water 1000 cc., dibasic potassium phosphate
1 ¢, magnesium sulphate 0.2 g., calcium
chloride 0.1 g., ammonium tartrate 10 g.

Nessler’s reagent (Bock & Benedict) from Hawk
& Bergeim. Mercurie iodide 100 g., potas-
sium iodide 70 g., sodium hydroxide 100 g.
Place 100 g. mercuric iodide and 70 g. of
potassium iodide in a liter volumetric flask
and add about 400 ce. of water. Rotate until
solution is complete. Now dissolve 100 g. of
sodium hydroxide in about 500 cc. of water,

= cool thoroughly and add with constant shaking
to the mixture in the flask, and make up with

Aucust 30, 1930 |

Supplement of THe CortectinG Net 5

water to the liter mark. If a small ppt. forms,
decant the supernatant liquid and use.

Pasteur’s solution. Potassium phosphate 2 ¢.,
calcium phosphate 0.2 g., magnesium sulphate
0.2 g., ammonium tartrate 10. ¢., cane sugar
150 g., water to make 1 liter.

Phenol. To liquify add 10 cc. of water to each
450 g. melted phenol. Melt by standing bottle
in hot water.

Poison ivy preventives. 1. Sat. sodium thio-
sulphate. 2. Ferric chloride 5 g., glycerine
50 cc., water 50 cc. 3. Ferric chloride 5 g.,
glycerine 5 ec., 50% alcohol 100 cc.

Raffel’s fluid. Water 1000 cc., potassium nitrate
0.5 g., dibasic potassium phosphate 0.06 g.,
magnesium sulphate 0.02 g., ferric chloride
0.001 g.

Ringer’s solution— for cold blooded animals,
(frog heart). Shaffer. Water 1000 cc.,
sodium chloride 6.5 g., potassium chloride
0.14 g., calcium chloride 0.12 g., sodium bi-
carbonate 0.2 g.

Ringer’s solution — for cold blooded animals,
(modification of Shaffer). Water 1000 cc.,
sodium chloride 6.5 g., potassium chloride
0.14 g., calcium chloride 0.12 g., sodium bi-
carbonate 0.2 g., monobasic sodium phosphate
0.01 g.

Ringer’s solution — for warm blooded animals
Water 1000 cc., sodium chloride 9 g., calcium
chloride (anhydrous) 0.24 g., potassium
chloride 0.42 ¢., potassium bicarbonate 0.2 g.

Ringer’s solution—‘Woods Hole’. 1 part of
sea water to 3 parts water.

Saline, normal. Water 1000 cc., sodium chloride
7 to 9g. For cold blooded animals, use 7 g.
For warm blooded animals use 9 g.

Toisson’s mixture—a diluting fluid for blood.
Water 160 cc., sodium sulphate 8 g., sodium
chloride 1 g., glycerin 30 cc., methyl violet
0.025 g.

Tyrode solution—for gut muscle (no advantage
for heart muscle). Water 1000 cc., sodium
chloride 8 g., potassium chloride 0.2 g., calcium
chloride 0.2 g., magnesium chloride 0.1 ¢.,
monobasic sodium phosphate 0.05 g., sodium
bicarbonate 1 g., glucose 1 g.

Van't Hoff’s solution—artificial sea water. Water
1000 cc., calcium chloride 2 g., potassium
chloride 2.2 g., magnesium chloride 7.8 g.,
magnesium sulphate 3.8 g., sodium chloride
100.2 ¢.

Winkler method for dissolved oxygen. 1—Man-
ganous chloride solution. 200 g. of manganous
chloride (iron free), in distilled water to
500 ce. total volume. 2—Potassium hydro-
wide-potassium iodide solution. 180 g. of
potassium hydroxide (or sodium hydroxide)
and 75 g. of potassium iodide in distilled
water, to 500 cc. total volume. 3—Hydro-
chloric acid, cone. C. P. 4—Sodium thio-
sulphate solution (Nas Sz Os .5 H20). Make
up 5 liters of 0.01 N solution. In making the
dilution use distilled water, but add 4 cc. of
normal sodium hydroxide per liter as part of
diluting medium. Solution 4 is the only one
in which accuracy of standardization is
necessary.

Zumstein’s solution. Water 1000 cc., peptone 5
g., saccharose 5 g., citric acid 2 g¢., magnesium

sulphate 0.2 g., dibasic sodium phosphate

MH g

o

Die

o

Table 4
STAIN SOLUBILITIES
Prepared by Etsa M. KeiL

Ref.—Conn, Biological Stains, 2nd Ed., 1929.
Holmes, Stain Technololy, 1926-1929.
Selected from the above references and printed
with the permission of Dr. H. J. Conn.

Dye solubilities at 26°C listed as grams of
anhydrous dye per 100 cc. of saturated solution.

Name of Dye

Acid Yellow, see Fast Yellow
ANIC Disha ce cheetit > CO ecg Ce eae RRR eee

Anilin Blue, see Spirit Blue

PANE ATU ILC) MOERUEMES, 055,25 ate os ale. cyalsiy# ch at-0 Fi nachaeedpaveleneun tera memeess

(Canary Yellow)

Aniline dyes are commonly used as saturated
solutions (aqueous or alcoholic) unless other
concentrations are given.

Key to biological use of the stains: B—bulk,
C—cytoplasmic, /—fat, /—indicator, N—nu-
clear, /—vital. Synonyms of the dyes are given
within parentheses.

Water 95% Strength Use
Alcohol solution
used
Seis Oeicteart nil 0.125 I, ¢
ew scence 7.69 0.15 N, V
he COMO EERO 7.20 0.01 (0)
Povey towers 0.74 4.49 V

6 Supplement of Tur Cortectine Net [ Vor. V. No. 40

AW TG fogs , stepigie bates sy oce Se PO ce Uo EPRICE Ne toe PSL NIE are vavo tse yesete nil 0.33 Cc
(Imperial Yellow)

TAHT IG ne fide Beet er oc eee a aan: 2 RR aechh ace fe 0.12 40.00 af

Azo Bordeaux ‘Red, see Bordeaux red, Azo

Benzo purpurin 4B 5 Re MEPs & 0.13 Vv, c
(Cotton red 4B, Dianil red, Sultan 4B)

Biebrich Scarlet eee or 0.05 Cc
(Croceine scarlet, Ponceau B, Searlet B, Double scarlet)

Bismark Brown R or GOO00 .. carl. ; ae acs ahi 1.10 0.98 N

Bismark Brown Y severe 1.36 1.08 Vi Ne

(Vesuvin, Phenylene brown, ‘Manchester brown, Leather
brown, Excelsior brown)
Bordeaux Red, AZO, Beiemtig 3.83 0.19 1% aq. (@!
(Fast red B, Cerasin, Archelline oR, Acid Bordeaux,
Azo-bordeaux)

amminme emcee: «cee Beas snepen ene ccs psacta a iawiits 250 ofuvtevapsnctetereng 0.13 N, B

Chrysoidine R : Pete 0.2 0.99
(Cotton Orange, Cerotin orange)

Chrysoidine Y strays 0.86 2.21 N, B
(Brown salt R, Dark brown salt ‘R)

Congo Red ; A ny neaarcrcrs pr. 0.19 Cc, B
(Congo, Cotton red, Direct red, Cosmos red)

Crystal Ponceau 6R Seite ase) es 5 5 Geen 0.80 0.06 1
(Ponceau 6R)

Ciesydl Vroret “CONE AAR OG)! che ce hitracal ls Satan (rm ares e see 0.38 0.25 NG
(Cresyl fast violet B)

Crystal Violet (chloride) eiazertee ‘ : : ae 1.68 13.87 1% aq. N
(Violet C, Methyl violet 10B)

Crystal Violet (iodide) : ; pec 0.035 1.78 N

Crystal Violet (chioride) Resorein Ad. Prod. nee 0.28 13.84 N

Crystal Violet (chloride) Hydroquin. Ad. Prod. .. : 0.30 8.39 N

Crystal Violet (chloride) Pyrocatechin Ad. Prod. ... 0.79 24.87 N

BOs PB UNA SAD icine, npn ays eek eecrtin cguenierctandy st omy Oma aicbtincnssnsiacey crete 39.11 0.75 (C}
(Eosin scarlet, Caesar red, Safrosin) |

FUORI DLAON GES AltA)! cast fn yaren cee Reon te ero mara cte ivvectel ciarer aie teins ent 44.20 218 0.5% aq. (0!
(Water soluble eosin, Hosin WwW or + WS)

Eosin Y (Mg salt) Ms ren Ake ; PECK aad Sees amct 1.43 0.28 (0

Eosin Y (Ca salt) .. OE ie Sa a xa clorbyiciicns heen 0.24 0.09 iC

Eosin Y (Ba salt) Re etre elcid J! tebe, ee . 2: agate 0.18 0.06 Cc

By HH MOS ine OLUES NN ey, <-tc.ceevue eae ee tetris cutee rerels a2 BO DOC ROL GL 90.00 ; Cri
(Jodo-eosin B, Dianthin B, Pyrosin B)

Erythrosin (Na salt) Pare ar ete Oca tt MOA Geiser: eaten 2 11.10 1.87 1% aq. (GF oil

Erythrosin (Mg salt) TARE oe Bike CM AA REA oe On af is 0.38 0.52 Col

Erythrosin (Ca salt) . roe ak CUM ere eS een ‘ BP sce 0.15 0.35 CG, I

Erythrosin (Ba salt) .. 3 eS eee : ; 43 ; 0.17 0.04 Cor

Ethyl Hosin Bp te tees ot tote ritees Came oie Ferre, PER par sithe, SPE aie 0.03 1.13 0.5% al. (0)
(Eosin, alcoho! ‘soluble, Eosin 's)

Fast Green FCF .... Seen snateias archer ware alate sans Roe RETEDNS Coates “ants 16.04 0.35 C

Fast Yellow 5 COS eee EON Aa oO CCN Aone marae 5 18.40 0.24 C
(Wool yellew G, Acid Yellow)

Fuchsin, basic Boe PRES Coco E duets sees a 0.30 10.00 N
(Magenta, Rubin, Anilin red)

Fuchsin, New (chloride) Ee ie tte MES OOOO COTTE 1.13 3.20 (1% al. N
(Isorubin, Fuchsin NB) (1% aq.

Fuchsin, New (chloride) Resorcin Add. Prod. .................... 0.94 5.74 N

GBtrien Virol Gite me acer et tcc <-s.48 ccc aile Cie Pee tele aerers 1.50 3.00 1% al N
(Methyl] violet 2B)

Helianthin, see Methyl red, acid

Todoeosin B, see Erythresin, bluish

Tenn Ors Om OMEN eerste ere Gece teeter er fore ssersicls) wvete ecevae, abate vaccyertssetoyerochane 1.68 0.01 C
(Indigotine Ia)

JANUS. GLEOMM EB ienrcerer frei iers raves erste PP fareiceleieSeaicee! aici ase ramioremlonas 5.18 1.12 (0.1% aq. V, N. B
(Diazin green) ( -1% aq.

Light Green SF, yellowish ..... MMV orcas sais lohe.s: Sieveleuei sense tei 20.85 0.82 0.5% al. C

(Acid green, Fast acid green N)_

Lyon’s Blue, see Spirit Blue

Magenta, see Fuchsin, basic

Malachite. Gitegiy oF... acchectae es oteeteereu deer rere iete a fan ciktheleran obo: ithe 3 asta 4.09 5.00 1% aq. N
(Emerald green, New Victoria green, Diamond green,
Solid green)

Malachatie: Greg. (oxalate)! scceee cca aecctteye ana cine leestic vista) cielo of ede vhchale 7.60 7.52 N
Martinswmellow ‘(Ca mae). com cvs cal meneame tet RnR eaten liars rere 0.05 1.90 (e!

(Napthol yellow, Manchester yellow)
Mantras «Melllow:\(Na salt), 72 canes) .cic\leyeverbeeasranachdstam i erstcistuen testis, 4.57 0.16

Aucust 30, 1930 ] Supplement of THe Cortectinc Net

WIIG Ha AACE TROT. 3. 4).3 age Ca ER Re Rt Gee niche Es. cee 7.00 0.25 1% aq. N
(Double green, Light Green)
Ei yl Gh ein Camm e Wc 9k 1lk a 2 ost oie a 0.52 0.08 Ne (@}
(Orange 108 Helianthin, Gold orange)
Methyl Orange, acid ............. MA Oat 5050 ROMOaao athe a0 9.015 0.015 if,
Methyl Violet , os ; Sets 2:93) Abia ((OIbYoaq. N
(Dahlia B, Paris violet, Gentian violet) ( -2% aq.
Methylene Blue, chloride : sfoterteteatee ieee 3.55 1.48 ING
(Swiss blue)
Methylene Blue, ZnCl, double salt ... Ra Od tae : 2.75 0.05 Ne Vee
Methylene Blue, iodide .............. ME TE oro ee OT eras 0.09 0.13 N, V, I
DESI USL gS SS ID oy ew: ws nyeV ein ce waa sand SuN's'a avate/ ore orate acatelel«teteteve onedace 1.45 0.12 N
Naphthol YellowS ...... i: ROSE ee a Serotec oie ne : 8.96 0.025 (6
Nene Thevls CleUlehansley A ae noe ae er aERniced aor eormannon inn tenaeec 5.64 2.45 1% aq. Wi, UN, Keb
Neutral Red, iodide mene Pein’ Te pos eR atal Mer-cae 0.15 0.16 Vi IN, (Cy
Neutral Violet a a Thre Mia Pcde stuart 3.27 22: I, N
New Fuchsin, chloride: see Fuchsin, new chloride
Oil Red O ... ot Acta epune saree ‘ Saige nil 0.389 FE
(Sudan II, Oil searlet, Red B)
Orange I , Ops Sows : 5 Oe and eae 5.17 0.64 af
(Naphthol Orange, Tropaeolin G)
Orange IT tn : Soe 11.87 0.15 (6!
(Gold orange, Orange A, Ac id orange, Orange extra,
Mandarni G, Tropaeolin 000)
Ovange IV ; ; Cte j ie 0.16 0.20 I
(Crange N, Acid gold D, Tropaeolin 90)
(OWED. Cho 5. ::-305.2 dé 08 ORE ROT ERT one nT ne 10.86 0.22 C
(Wool orange 2G, ‘Patent orange, acid orange G, Crystal orange)
Para Rosanilin, acetate fs ners ete oe Matai een mer oI ; 415 13.63 N
Para Rosanilin, chloride : : Facey eee: Bei ites 0.26 5.93 N
(Para-fuchsin, Basic rubin, ‘Para-magenta)
Liny suvka}l shen l a Rey eee Ree nee eae Ry OUREA OES ER CERF aG 0.04 10.00 T
Phloxine, (Na salt) ... AE oe a Bicacereiy TOME tudclore Meine Ee 50.90* 9.02 N
(Brythrosin BB, New Pink)
Phloxine (Mg salt) .... ; ; : Pe Cory Sa org Uo gic 20.84 29.10 N
Phloxmem(Gaesalt)) oo n.ulye ute cs cps es CASE ne Mays 0.45 N
Phloxime (Basalt) .......... eet be Riis ab BERGE ORE ; 6.01 1.17 N
Pieric Acid . er setae fe : EO OOOO Te 00 1.18 8.96 a
Pyronin B, iodide ..... Sak eee bolle ta ee MaRS Or ioecin: Meta 0.07 1.08 a
Pyronin G ys pod ero Gee Se : ne 8.96 9.60 0
Red A, sce awaalllean
Resorein Yellow . ott : : mine eet F Bays 0.37 0.19 C
Roceelimm ..:....... Laaen Ba. tg a RS : 1.67 0.42 (@]
(Fast red A or 0, Cerasin, Cardinal red)
Rhodamin B . ‘ she i Geteyeissue abe = airspa eenerens 0.78 1.47 C
(Brilliant Pink, Rhodamin O)
Tigospnablliial, ulioiGle: ) oA Qouea aed ocee 5 LO aOR aE oS oma tae dics 0.39 8.16 N
EMIS MIB EN PRENL CIN GMGEMLE)) disks cei ep ete vhevslaverdvcioiy on sta lape apse stele eet a OC 36.25 (583 0]
IRaze Teall CME SEI) be ge pos eee eee oe Reet ads Haig PoOmenA.cube 07. 0.48 1.59 C
BEM ee waa eee MDL SEAN TN iste acne ctai (eve eps ee ba) e.nle) ale\eindoueusteie a ne eee 0.20 0.07 @)
Rose Bengal (Ba salt) ......... Le eR Me hc: sas oe eR IRA she 0.17 0.05 Cc
Safranin 70: <....+ PR oh 20% Ae Mos Ne RAE tee ke nave 5.45 3.41 1% aq. N
Sky Blue, Niagara; see Niagara Sky Blue
Spirit Blue > 229 20 HEGEL ODRe ae OSE RE OROOET at ob Boom morc oa f21g nil 110 0.38% al. (0!
(Lyoun’s blue, Paris blue, Night blue, ‘Gentian blue, Anilin
blue, alcohol sol.)
Sudan lor 8 ... Snack IRAE OcoeRPes Se nil 9.37 F
(Oil Yellow, Scharlach B)_
Sudan IT, see Oil Red O
Sinvabna, IOC. 2c neath ee (Roem Gee Renee Pern Igri wo Coin StoDEnD 4 nil 0.15 F
(Sudan red, “Tony red, Scarlet G or as), Cerasin red, Oil red,
Fettponceau G)
SW NN Pl eco c il artasrar cd) eaten a aveletae Squish Flea teens unk nstoeras nil 0.09 F
(Scarlet red, Fettponceau, ‘Ponceau 3B, ‘Oil red IV)
Gpiulanalitiatl 2/5564 4:6 a > pave Rei EEO SI ED a DIGI GCS oar coe cht Gloinmreacicac 0.25 0.25 NOW
(Lauth’s violet)
MDa Lei. (6 nisi BY, J8215 5G 6 cae ae pee eR ce mRER RE 20, ee BE Per ea ctche ear aecty Caio 3.82 0.57 1% aq. N; V
(Methylene Blue O)
TORE CONN. © . ..de cdots CRD EN eeemaDas ube Shee ne Snap duouetoecE (4.22 ae 1% aq. I
(Chrysoin, Gold yellow, Acid Yellow) (liter
Victoria Green, oxalate; see Malchite green
Victoria Yellow nA Re oe e Peeters Ht ic 3 ho De a eT eae 1.66 1.18 (o}

* means that these figures are grams per 100 g. of saturated solution (the others being grams per 100 ee.).

8 Supplement of THe Cottectrne Net

| Vor. V. No. 40

Table 5.
STAINING SOLUTIONS

Collected from various sourses by Elsa Keil
Use distilled water in all solutions.
Borax-Carmine (Grenacher’s). Borax (4% aq.)

100 cc., carmine 1 g. Boil until the carmine
dissolves, then add 100 ce. of 70% alcohol.
Filter after 24 hours.

Carmalum (Mayer's). Carminic acid 1 g., alum
10 ¢., water 100 cc. Dissolve with heat and
filter the solution when cold. To prevent the
growth of mold add thymol.

Delafield’s Hematoxylin. Ammonium alum (sat.
aq. sol.) 100 cc. Dissolve 1 g. of hematoxylin
crystals in 10 cc. of absolute alcohol, and
slowly add it to the ammonium alum. Expose
this mixture to air and light for several weeks
to “ripen”. “Ripening” may be accomplished
at once with some degree of success through
the addition of a few cc. of a neutral hydrogen
peroxide or other powerful oxidizing agent.
When ripe, filter the solution and add 25 ce.
of glycerin and 25 cc. of methyl alcohol.
(cf. Haematoxylin stock sol.)

Ehrlich’s triple stain (triacid mixture). Orange
G (sat. aq. sol.) 14 cc., acid fuchsin (sat.
aq. sol.) Z7cc., water 15 cc., absolute alcohol
25 cc., methyl green (sat. aq. sol.) 12 cc.,
glycerin 10 cc. Each solution should be
throughly saturated (several days). Add the
ingredients in order named, shaking mixture
well after each addition.

Feulgen’s reagents see Nucleal reaction.
Gentian violet. Gentian violet 1 g., anilin water
(cf. table 3) 80 cc., 95% alcohol 20 cc.
Giemsa’s stain (Tetrachrome stain.) Dissolve
0.5 g. of the dry stain in 100 cc. methyl
alcohol (neutral, acetone free) by heating to
50°C. Shake thoroughly and leave at 37°C
for 1-2 days, with occasional shaking. Filter
off any ppt. that forms.

Gram’s stain see Gentian
iodine (table 3).

Hematoxylin stock solution may be made by dis-
solving 1 part of hematoxylin crystals in 10
parts of absolute alcohol. In the course of
several months or a year, this solution ripens
to a dark wine-red color. It may be used in
making up the various hematoxylin solutions,
and being ripe, will stain at once.

Heidenhain’s hematoxylin (iron-hematoxylin).
A. Ammonium ferric sulphate (ferric alum,
clear violet crystals) 2.5 g., water 100 cc. B.
Hematoxylin 0.5 g., water 100 cc. (cf. Hem-
atoxylin stock: sol.)

Mallory’s triple stain for connective-tissue. A.
Acid fuchsin 0.5 g., water 100 cc. B. Anilin
blue (Griibler’s water soluble) 0.5 g., orange

violet, and Gram’s

G (Gribler) 2 g., 1% aq. phosphomolybdic
acid 100 ce.

Muci-carmine (Mayer). Water 2 cc., carmine |
g., aluminium chloride 0.5 g., 50% alcohol
100 cc. Mix in order given, heat gently till
the fluid darkens (ca. 2 minutes) ; filter after
24 hours. To use, dilute with 5 to 10 volumes
of water.

Nucleal reactien—Feulgen’s modification of the

Schiff reaction for aldehydes. A. Water
with an excess of sulphur dioxide. Water
200 cc., sodium bisulphite 1.3. g., normal
hydrochloric acid 10 cc. B. Fuchsin-sul-
phurous acid reagent. Dissolve 1 g. of basic
fuchsin in 100 cc. warm water. Filter. Add
20 ce. normal hydrochloric acid. Cool. Add
1 g. sodium bisulphite and let stand 24 hours.
The excess sulphur dioxide may be removed
by suction.
Wermel’s modification of B. Water 200 cc.,
basic fuchsin 1 g., normal hydrochloric acid
20 cc., sodium sulphite (crys.) 2 g. After
standing 2 hours add 0.2 cc. acetaldehyde
which produces a strong violet. Let stand 45
minutes and then add normal hydrochloric
acid 20 cc., sodium sulphite (crys.) 1 g. After
2-3 days at 20°C. or 8-10 hours at 37°C. the
reagent is ready for use. (Courtesy of Dr.
Hibbard. )

Picro-carnine. Ammonium hydrate 5 cc., water
50 cc., carmine 1 g. When dissolved add sat.
aq. picric acid 50 cc. Expose to air and light
for 2 days, then filter.

Polychrome methylene blue—(for staining cell
granules). Michaelis’ method. Methylene
blue (medicinal) 2 g., water 200 cc. To this
solution add 10 cc. of 0.1 normal solution of
sodium hydroxide. Boil for 15 minutes.
After cooling add 10 ce of 0.1 normal sul-
phuric acid and filter.

Polychrome methylene blue — Unna’s method.
Methylene blue 1 g., potassium carbonate 1 g.,
alcohol 20 cc., water 100 cc. Evaporate to
100 cc. It may be used at once, or after
diluting with an equal volume of anilin water
(see table 3).

Scharlach R. 70% alcohol 50 cc., acetone 50 cc.,
Scharlach red to saturation.

Triacid stain see Ehrlich’s triple stain.

Weigert’s elastic tissue stain (Resorcin-fuch-
sin). 19% aq. sol. basic fuchsin 100 ce., 2%
aq. sol. resorcin 100 cc. Heat the mixture
in a porcelain dish and while boiling add 25
cc. of liquor ferri sesquichorati (table 3).
Stir and keep boiling for 2-5 minutes. Cool
and filter. Discard the liquid. Dry the pp't.

Aucust 30, 1930 |

Supplement of THE CoLLectinGc NET 9

which remains on the filter paper thoroughly
in a porcelain dish. Add 200 cc. of 95%
alcohol and boil. Remove the paper when the
ptt. is dissolved off. Cool, filter, and replace
the alcohol lost through evaporation. Add
4 ce. of hydrochloric acid.

Wright’s stain. Wright’s stain (dry power) 0.1
g., methyl alcohol (absolute, neutral, acetone-
free) 60 cc. Filter after standing for 24
hours.

Table 6.
PREPARATION OF STANDARD
SOLUTIONS

Prepared by Joseph Hale, William A. Wolff

and F. Edward Wilson

Standard solutions are prepared with calibrated
glassware with great care and are to be issued
only in clean, dry, glass stoppered bottles as any
dirt or moisture will ruin the solution. Conse-
quently, only the person assigned to the chemical
work or the person in charge will issue these
solutions.

Constant boiling HCl and U. S. Bureau of
Standards’ sodium oxalate will be used as primary
standards beginning with the summer of 1931
and the other materials for interchecking. The
constant boiling hydrochloric acid may also be
used for calibrating the hydrogen and quinhydrone
electrodes. Refs. to Treadwell & Hall are for the
7th. ed.

1. Normal Hydrochloric Acid from Constant

Boiling Hydrochloric Acid.

Ref.—Hulett and Bonner—Jour. Am. Chem.
Soc. 31, 390 (1909)

Prepare a solution of HCl with a specific
gravity of 1.10. Distill over one half, this may
be used again. Save the third quarter. Take
180.170 g. of this constant boiling fraction and
make up to a liter, for normal HCl. This weight
is for brass weights in air.

2. Sodium Carbonate from Sodium Oxalate.

(Sorenson’s method). Ref.—Treadwell and Hall

p. 475.
Sodium oxalate with certificate is obtained
from the U. S. Bureau of Standards. Weigh out

the oxalate after drying (105° to 115°C). Then
heat carefully in an air bath. A slight carboni-
zation does no harm but it should be avoided by
raising the temperature slowly. It is well to heat
it for the first hour in an oven at 270° to 280°C.
Finally, after all danger of mechanical loss by
escaping carbon monoxide has passed, heat to,
but not over, 500°C. Cool and titrate the sodium
carbonate. The milli-equivalent of sodium
oxalate is 0.06700 g.
3. Normal Sodium Hydroxide 100 ml. contain
40.01 g. Ref—Treadwell and Hall p. 479.
Clark (for N/5 base) p. 195.

Weigh out roughly 350 g. of C. P. NaOH and
dissolve in about 500’ml. of water. This will

probably require standing over night for complete
solution. Filter with suction into a clean dry
flask and transfer with as little contact with the
air as possible into an 8 liter bottle and dilute to
eight liters using water which has been distilled
hot. Arrange siphon and soda--lime tube on
bottle immediately for protection from COs.

Standardize solution with HCl (see No. 1
above) or with KHPhthalate. Dry a _ good

analytical grade of KHPhthalate at 110°-115° for
two or three hours if the salt is already approxi-
mately dry; it may take longer if the salt is an
old sample, and has been on the shelves for a
period of time. It is desirable that a dry day be
chosen for this operation as otherwise the results
are not so dependable. Weigh out samples of
approximately 8 g., dissolve in water and titrate
with the NaOH using phenolphthalien as the in-
dicator. (see T. & H., page 476). Calculate
normality, and dilute to exactly N = 1.005 (Not
N = 1.000 as in the end the base must be made
exactly normal and it is impossible to dilute such
a large volume of base accurately without undue
exposure to the COQ, in the air.) Determine
normality of the base again and this time the dilu-
tion may be made to exactly normal, by the addi-
tion of a few ml. of water. After this dilution
it is well to check the normality once more and
also determine the amount of COs per liter by a
comparison of the hot and cold titrations with
phenolphthalien. (see T. & H., p. 479). M. W.
of KHPhthalate 204.14. If base were exactly
normal 50 ml. would neutralize 10.207 g. of the
salt.

Base prepared carefully according to the above
directions should have a normality of 1.000 with
an uncertainity of 0.001, and should contain less
than 0.001 mols of carbonate per liter.
4. Tenth Normal Sodium Hydroxide.
contain 4.001 g.

Procedure and references same as (3) except
that 35 g. of NaOH are used in place of the 350,
and 50 ml. of the base will neutralize 1.0207 g.
of the salt.

1000 ml.

5. Normal Hydrochloric Acid. (cf. No. 1
above.) 1000 ml. contain 36.47 g. Ref—

Treadwell and Hall p. 474-5 and 476.

Measure roughly 725 ml. of cone. C. P. Hy-
drochloric acid and dilute to approximately 8
liters. Standardize against NaOH previously pre-
pared and adjust to exactly normal as was done
in the case of the standard base. Either Methyl
Orange or Phenolphthalien indicator may be used
with proper conditions. (see Treadwell and Hall
p. 467-474.)

After adjusting the acid to exactly the same
normality as the base it is desirable to make an
independent standardization using Sodium Car-
bonate as the primary standard (see No. 2 above).
Dry a good analytical grade of sodium carbonate

10 Supplement of THE CottectinG Net

[ Vou. V. No. 40

anhydrous (Merck Blue Label is recommended )
in the oven at 115° for 3 or 4 hours. Weigh out
samples of about 2 g. and dissolve in 150 ml. of
water. Titrate with acid as prepared above using
either Methyl Orange indicator with a cold solu-
tion, or Phenolphthalien with an hot solution. (T.
& H., p. 477). M. W. of NasC03 106,06. If
acid were exactly normal 50 ml. would neutralize
2.651 g. of salt.

The value of the normality from the NavC0;
should not differ from the value from the NaOH
by more than 0.1%. Closer agreement than this
should be expected.

6. Tenth Norma! Hydrochloric Acid.

Proceed exactly as described above, but make
acid just one tenth as strong. The acid should be
checked again by the carbonate method and the
results should agree almost as well as for normal
acid.

7. Normal Sulphuric Acid.
49.04 g.

Measure 240 ml. of pure sulphuric acid (sp.
gr. 1.84) and add slowly to about 4 times its
volume of water, cool and dilute to about 8 liters.
Standardize against NaOH and adjust to normal.
8. Normal Nitric Acid. 1000 ml. contains
63.02 g.

Measure 65 ml. of nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.42) and
dilute to 1 liter. This will be slightly more than
normal. Standardize and adjust to normal.

9. Normal Acetic Acid.

Dilute 480 ml. of glacial acetic acid to about 8
liters and titrate with NaOH using phenolphthalein
as an indicator. Dilute to exact normality and
check dilution carefully.

10. Standard Calcium Chloride and
Nitrate.

Demands for these standards are so varied that
it is better to adapt the method of preparation and
standardization to the needs of the investigator.
They can be standardized by determining either
the Chlorine, or the Silver as Silver Chloride.
(Treadweli and Hall p. 288). After either one
or the other has been made up and accurately
standardized, it may be used as a standard for the
other, or for a solution of a different strength of
the same substance. (T. & H. p. 601-602).

11. Standardization of Sodium Thiosulphate.
Ref.—

1000 ml. contains

Silver

First prepare pure, sublimed iodine.
Treadwell and Hall pp. 552.

In each of two or three small weighing bottles
with tightly fitting glass stoppers put 2 to 2.5 g.
of potassium iodide, free from iodate, and 0.5
ml. of water (no more), stopper the tubes and
weigh accurately. Open the tubes and add 0.4-
0.5 g. of iodine to each, quickly insert the stopper
and weigh. As the tubes are cooled by the dis-
solving iodine, moisture sometimes collects on the

outside of the tube and must be wiped off before
weighing.

Place one of the tubes in the neck of a 500 ml.
Erlenmeyer flask which is held in an inclined
position and contains 200 ml. of water and about
1 g. of potassium iodide. Drop the tube to the
bottom of the flask, loosening the stopper as it
begins to fall. This method prevents the loss of
iodine and the solution then contains a known
weight of iodine.

To this solution add the sodium thiosulphate
solution to be standardized from a burette until
the solution is a pale yellow. Then add 2 to 3
ml. of starch solution and titrate till colorless.
From the mean of 2 or 3 determinations calculate
the strength of the thiosulphate solution.

If the weight of iodine equivalent for 1 ml. of
thiosulphate solution is divided by 0.12685 the
normality of the solution will be obtained.

Table 7

H-ION STANDARDS AND BUFFER
SOLUTIONS

Prepared by
JosepH Hate anp Oscar RICHARDS

Ref—Clark, The determination of hydrogen
ions, 2nd, & 3rd eds.

To be prepared and issued by the person as-
signed to the chemical work or by the person in
charge.

All color standards are to be carefully checked
against the Hellige Comparator before issuing.
Buffers for color tubes may be protected from
mold growth by adding 1 to 10,000 copper acetate
or sulphate or a little cinnamon oil. This should
not be done when buffers alone are ordered as
investigators frequently put living organisms into
the buffer solutions. If there is any doubt do not
add the preservative.

The acetate buffers are the most satisfactory
and dependable buffers of the entire series pre-
pared here. The average error (determined
electrometrically) is 0.03 pH although occasional-
ly an error of 0.05 may occur. The pH 4.6 mix-
ture is often used for calibrating the quinhydrone
electrode.

The phosphate buffers are not so dependable
though nearly as accurate as the acetates when
they are first prepared. The phosphates do‘change
and the salts are so difficult to prepare pure that
Merck, following Clark’s criticism of the salts,
has withdrawn its Sorensen salt.

1. Indicator Solutions.

Indicator test solutions are for the most part
0.04% aqueous solutions of the various indica-
tors. To simplify preparation, and to increase
stability, stock solutions of 0.4% are first made
up and the various test solutions are made from
these as required. The sulphonphthaliens, as

Aucusrt 30, 1930 |

such, are not soluble in water so it is first neces-
sary to convert them into their mono-sodium salts
and dissolve them in the specified volume of water

Weigh exactly 1 g. of the indicator required
and transfer to an agate mortar. Add specified
(below ) number of ml. of N/10 NaOH and grind
with agate pestle until dissolved. Transfer to a
250 ml. volumetric flask and dilute to mark with
distilled water.

To prepare the test solutions, dilute the stock
solutions as prepared above to 0.04%, using 1
part stock solution and 9 parts distilled water.

Table of indicators with ml. of N/10 NaOH
required to convert 1 g. of indicator to mono-
sodium salt and amount of dilute solution used
in making tests.

Sse

5 Se

g -§. 2

Indicator = Za Z 3

roo o & ag

Su re

a Za Pe

Meta Cresol Purple 12, - 2.8 26.2 ml. 0.5
Thymol Blue U2; = 2.8 21.5 1.0
Brom Phenol Blue 0.3 - 4.6 14.9 0.5
Brom Cresol Green 3.8 - 5.4 14.3 0.5

Chlor Phenol Red 4.8 - 64 23.6 0.5
Brom Cresol Purple 5.2 - 6.8 18.5 0.5

Brom Thymol Blue 6.9 - 7.6 16.0 0.5
Phenol Red 6.8 - 84 28.2 0.25
Cresol Red T.2'- 8.8 26.2 0.25%

Meta Cresol Purple tA - 9:0 26.2) 0.5
Thymol Blue 8.0 - 9.6 21.5 0.5

* Be sure to mark cone. of solution on these sets as
these indicators are often diluted to 0.02%.
2. Indicator Standards. Color tubes.

A set of indicator standards for one indicator
consists of nine 15 mm. pyrex test tubes contain-
ing a series of buffers in steps of 0.2 pH units
oyer the range of the indicator, to each of which
the proper amount of indicator has been added.

Select nine 15 mm. pyrex test tubes of approxi-
mately the same size and label (with rubber
stamps provided) on each the various pH steps.
Add to each exactly 10 ml. of the proper buffer
and either 0.25 or 0.5 ml. (cf. above) of the in-
dicator test solution (0.04% ).

Protect solutions from corks with tinfoil over
the bottom of the cork. Each individual tube
should then be checked by means of the Hellige
Comparator before issuing. Indicator standards
are issued in test tube racks accompanied with an
empty tube and 25 or 30 ml. of the indicator test
solution in a dropping bottle.

3. Acetate Buffers pH 3.6 -5.6.

Stock Solutions—

(a) Normal Sodium Hydroxide, (b) Normal
Acetic Acid (cf. Table 5).

Table for the preparation of buffers. Mix as
indicated in a 500 ml. flask and fill flask to mark

~ with COs free water. Water which has been dis-
tilled hot is sufficiently pure for this.

Supplement of Tar Cottectinc Net 11
pH Na0H Acetic pH Na0H Acetic
3.6 epmonils 100 ml. 4.8 60.0 100
3.8 12.0 100 5. 70.5 100
4.0 18.0 100 5.2 79.0 109
4.2 26.5 100 54 85.5 100
4.4 37.0 100 5.6 90.5 100
4.6 49.0 100
4. Serensen Phosphate Buffers pH. 5.6-8.0

Stock Solutions

(a) M/15 Primary Phosphate.
Potassium Phosphate, Monobasic, anhydrous, in
the oven for two hours at 110°. Place in dry
glass stoppered bottle and keep in dessicator until
ready for use. Weigh accurately 18.156 g., dis-
solve in CO: free water, and dilute to exactly two
liters.

(b) M/15 Secondary Phosphate. Dry Merck’s
Sodium Phosphate, Secondary, anhydrous, in the
oven for two hours at 110°. Place in glass stop-
pered bottle as above. Weigh accurately 18.937
g., dissolve in CO. free water and dilute to exactly
two liters. Note—It is well to store these stock
solutions in 2 or 3 liter flasks fitted with siphons
and soda-lime tubes to keep out as much moisture
and COs as possible.

Table for the preparation of buffers—Mix
solutions as indicated. Recalculated so that the
mixtures give steps of 0.2 pH.

Dry Merck’s

pH M/I5Na,HPO, = M/15 KH, PO,
5.6 10.0 ml. 190.0 ml.
5.8 16.5 183.5
6.0 25.0 175.0 ,
6.2 36.0 164.0 <|
6.4 53.5 146.5
6.6 74.5 123.5
6.8 99.0 101.0
7.0 122.0 78.0
G2 143.0 57.0
74 161.0 39.0
7.6 172.5 27.5
7.8 182.5 17/35)
8.0 189.0 11.0
5. Clark & Lubs KC1-Borate’ mixtures
pH 7.8-10.0 Ref.—Clark, 2nd ed. p. 195, 201.
Stock Solutions.
(a) M/5 Boric Acid, M/5 KCl. Prepare

3oric Acid by drying in oven at 110° for 2 or 3
hours. Prepare KC1 by drying in oven at 110°-
120° for four hours. Weigh out 24.81 g. of Boric
Acid and 29.824 g. of KC1, dissolve in water and
dilute to exactly 2 liters.

(b) M/5 NaOH. This is best prepared by
diluting the standard normal solution. Measure
out exactly 200 ml. of Standard NaOH in a
volumetric flask (to contain). Pour contents
into a 1 liter volumetric flask. Wash out the
NaOH well from the 200 ml. flask into the liter
flask with several portions of distilled water, and
finally dilute to 1 liter.

Table for preparation of buffers. Mix as
indicated in a 200 ml. vol. flask and dilute to
200 ml.

12 Supplement of THe CottectinGc Net

pH M/5 H,B0.,M/5 KCI M /5 NaH
7.8 50.0 ml. 2.65 ml.
8.0 50.0 4.00
8.2 50.0 5.90
8.4 50.0 8.55
86 50.0 12.00
8.8 50.0 16.40
9.0 50.0 21.40
9.2 50.0 26.70
94 50.0 32.90
9.6 50.0 36.85
98 50.0 40.80

10.0 50.0 43.90

6. Mcllvaine Buffers.
Ref.—Clark, 3rd ed. p. 214.
Stock Solutions

(a) 0.2 M Disodium Phosphate.

(b) 0.1 M Citric-Acid.

Table for the preparation of buffers. Mix as

indicated.
pH PO, Citric
2.2 0.40 ml. 19.60 ml.
2.4 1.24 18.76
2.6 2.18 17.82
2.8 3.17 16.83
3.0 4.11 15.89
3.2 4.94 15.06
3.4 5.70 14.30
3.6 6.44 13.56
3.8 7.10 12.90
4.() 7.71 12.29
4.2 8.28 11.72
4.4 8.82 11.18
4.6 9.35 10.65
4.8 9.86 10.14
5.9 10.30 9.70
5.2 10.72 9.28
54 alsa) 8.85
5.6 11.60 8.40
5.8 12.09
6.0
62
64
6.6
6.8
7.0
72
7.4
7.6
7.8
8.0
Table 8
PHOTOGRAPHIC SOLUTIONS
To be issued only on order from the Apparatus
Room.

Always dissolve chemicals in the specific order
given in the formulae.

The carbonate and sulphite, unless otherwise
specified, are the photo grade, or the mono-
hydrated salts. If these are not available and
crystals must be used, use three times as much
sulphite and 2.5 times as much sodium car-
bonate (Naz CO3.10H2O) or 1.1 times as
much sodium carbonate (Naz C03; .1 H2O) by
weight.

[ Vor. V. No. 40

For further information see “Elementary Photo-
graphic Chemistry” published by the Eastman
Kodak Company.

Process tray developer (D-9). A. Water (52°)
500 ce., sodium bisulphite 22.5 g., hydrochi-
none 22.5 g., potassium bromide 22.5 g., cold
water to make 1000 cc. B. Cold water 1000
cc., sodium hydroxide 52.5 g. Use equal
parts of A & B. Develop about 3 minutes
at 18°.

Developer for paper (D-72). Water (52°)
500 ec., elon 3.1 g., sodium sulphite 45 g.,
hydrochinone 12.2 g., sodium carbonate 67.5
g., potassium bromide 1.9 g., cold water to
make 1000 cc. Dilute 1 to 1 for Velox, 1 to
3 for Azo and develop 45 seconds at 21°.
Dilute 1 to 6 for bromide and develop 1.5
minutes at 21°.

Fine grain developer for motion picture film
(D-76). Elon 2 g., sodium sulphite 100 g.,
hydrochinone 5 g., borax 2 g., water to make
1000 ce. Dissolve elon in small volume of
water at 52°. Dissolve about a quarter of
the sulphite in water at 70°, add hydrochinone
and when in solution add to elon solution.
Dissolve remainder of sulphite in water at
70° and add borax when dissolved, and add
to other solutions. Make to volume with cold
water. Develop 10-20 minutes at 18”.

Contrast lantern slide developer (for line work).
A. Water 680 cc., sodium sulphite (anhy,)
85 g., hydrochinone 9.7 g.
B. Potassium carbonate (anhyd.) 57 g.,
potassium bromide 1 g., water 450 ce. Use
3 parts of A to 2 parts of B.

X-ray developer (D-19). Water (52°) 500 cc.,
elon 2.5 g., sodium sulphite 105 g., hydrochi-
none 9.8 g., sodium carbonate 52.5 g., potas-
sium bromide 6.3 g., cold water to make 1000

cc. Delevop 5 minutes at 18°C.

Acid fixing bath (F-1). A. Hypo 480 g. (use
photo pea crystal hypo, not C. P. sodium thio-
sulphate), water to make 2000 cc. When
dissolved add the following hardner (B) while
stirring rapidly. B. water (52°) 160 cc.,
sodium sulphite 30 g., 28% acetic acid* 96
cc., powered potassium alum 20 g.

* 28% Acetic acid. Dilute 3 parts of glacial acetic
acid with 8 parts water.

Chrom alum fixing bath (F-16). 4. Hypo 480
g., sodium sulphite 30 g., water to make 1500
ce. B. Water 500 cc., potassium chrom alum
30 g., Sulphuric acid (conc.) 4 cc. Pour B

into A while stirring 4 rapidly.

ee ee

ee

59 taS0)
ities
geieys

-

i
vr

ots ee!

<A
+
abe ae
eeu

ene
ety

eh

355

.
i

eoatareriee
2

Pa tetatatsrests
i

ne!

Gekrer

Nets
ieieiesey.
-

SOA
a

a

x

caer

ale

Sat

te

aah

bin pnd — 9097 9 om 9 nw

a